Performance Specifications II

HARAMAIN HIGH SPEED RAILWAY
PHASE 2 C,.;;;J.,}=._II bgmJJ Cio L:::..JI 8..u.J..w ghl

SAUDI RAILWAYS ORGANIZATION
ERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 11
~~~I .bg.b.:¥J Cio Lc..ll CUu.w gbl

PHASE 2
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION
-
;:.·-.
CONTENTS
G I
IN ASSOCIATION WITH AXELCIUM

This document sets out the contents of the Performance Specification referred to in the Principal
Contract Document forming part of the Contract for Phase 2 of the Haramain High Speed Railway
Project and is initialled by representatives on behalf of the Government and the Consortium for the
purposes of identification as set out below:
I
i THE MINISTRY OF FINANCE
~T-HE-M-IN-1-ST_R_Y_O_F_T_R_A_N_S_P_O_R_TA_T_I_O_N_ _ _ _-t--------~
- /:::? ..... c;....
!---------- ~
I AI-Shoula Group
I AI-Rosan Contracting Company
I Administrador de lnfraestructuras Ferroviarias (ADIF)
Cobra lnstalaciones y Servicios lnternacional, S.L. i

·----------------!-~--=.!
i ,c:o-():c71/7
i Consultrans, S.A.U.
L
I S.A. de Obras y Servicios, COPASA
l
! Dimetronic, S.A.
L----------------------4----------~r-~.r----
l lmathia Construcci6n , S.L. i
~•v-<v·rrfCfl\._ ~ (A.\ fV2_k/7K_
i
·- ·--·:
·.? i lnstalaciones lnabensa, S.A.
! lndra Sistemas, S.A.

~D~
lngenierfa y Economfa del Transporte, S.A.
. "-\l ~ 'lt:..'-t-.\:-n_ \:1..7 ~ ~lAW"( 1'l II
·--~;
; Obrasc6n Huarte Lain, S.A.

·-------
~~~ ; I
I RENFE-Ope-radora V I
·~1--""""-l""--'f'- ()~Gi-}0-Nt.-/:l?a
I Patentes Talgo, S.L.
lJ
11
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS - CONTENTS
0
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION- CONTENT
C.1 General Technical Documents
C.1.1 General Specification
HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-00 1-01 General Specifications-Section 1
HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-002-01 General Specifications-Section 2
HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-003-E1 General Specifications-Section 3
HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-004-E 1 General Specifications-Section 4
H H R-LO-CT -602-SYS-006- E 1 General Specifications-Section 6

1::·:•. •
· .·.. H H R-LO-CT -602-SYS-007 -E 1 General Specifications-Section 7
HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-009-01 General Specifications-Section 9
H H R-LO-CT -602-SYS-0 10-01 General Specifications-Section 10
H H R-LO-CT -602-SYS-011-0 1 General Specifications-Section 11
HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-014-01 General Specifications- Appendix A
HHR-LO-CT-602-SAU-001 -01 General Specifications-Appendix B
HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-015-01 General Specifications-Appendix C
HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-016-01 General Specifications-Appendix 0
HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-017 -C 1 General Specifications-Appendix E
C.1.2 General Drawings

Water Supply and Neighbouring Networks
A collection of drawings for information
Electrical Power Supply Schematic HHR-LO-EP-301 -NE-001 -81
Example of Transmission Network ArchitectureA3
General Alignment - AI Haramain High Speed Rail Corridor
H H R-LO-SY-301 -INE-001-C1 System Schematic
Ref: A2
GENERAL S PECIFICATION S- CONTENTS
0 C.1.3 Framework for Safety Regulation
2011 -03-20 Guidance for ICPs DTE R4
2011-04-17 Guidance on Early Actions DTE R3
2011-10-01 Key guidance for safety certification DTE R8
2011 -10-01 Key guidance on the SMS DTE R8
C.1.4 Performance Requirements
HHR-LO-PR-602-SYS-001-F1 Performance Requirements
C.1.5 Performance Score Calculation
HHR-LO-PR-602-SYS-002-E1 Performance Score Calculation
C.1.6 Safety Requirements
HHR-LO-SA-602-SYS-001 -01 Safety requirements
C.1.7 RAMs Assurance Requirements
HHR-LO-RA-403-SYS-001 -01 RAMS
C.1.8 Route Civil Works
See CD 's for Drawings
C.1.9 Station Design and Operations

C.1 .9 Contents
See the following CD's for Stations
CD1 Makkah
C02 Jeddah
CD3 KAEC
CD4 Medinah
C.2 System
C.2.1 Operation Control Centre (OCC) Specifications
(' -. HHR-LO-CC-403-SYS-001-01 Operation Control Centre
C.2.2 High Voltage Power Supply
HHR-LO-HV-403-INE-001 -E1 High Voltage
C.2.3 Low Voltage Power Supply
HHR-LO-LV- 403-INE-001 -01 Low Voltage
C.2.4 Overhead Catenary System
HHR-LO-CA-403-INE-001 -01 Catenary
C.2.5 Track System
HHR-LO-TR-403-INE-001 -01 Track System
C.2.6 Interlocking and Main Line Signalling
HHR-LO-SI-403-I NE-001 -E1 Interlocking and main line signaling
Ref: A2
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS- CONTENTS
C.2.7 Telecommunications
HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001-01 Functional specification for telecommunication
HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-003-01 Standard list for telecommunication
HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-005-01 Transmission Network
HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-006-01 LAN-WAN-WIFI
HH R-LO-TE-403-SYS-007 -01 Railway Telecommunication
H HR-LO-TE-403-SYS-008-01 Administrative Telecommunication
HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-009-01 CCTV
HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-01 0-01 Passenger Inform ation
HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011 -01 GSM-R
c.·
.:..
HH R-LO-TE-403-SYS-0 12-01 Building Security
HH R-LO-TE-403-SYS-0 13-01 Master Clock
H HR-LO-TE-403-SYS-015-01 Telecommunication Supervision Centre
C.2.8 Automatic Fare Collection Specification
HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-01 Automatic Fare Collection
C.2.9 Work Bases and Maintenance Bases Requirements
HHR-LO-WB-403-INE-001 -01 Works Bases and Maintenance Bases
C.2.10 SEC 380kV Feeding
Power Supply
C.3 Rolling Stock
C.3.1 Rolling Stock Specifications
HHR-LO-RS-403-SYS-001 -E2 Rolling Stock Specification
C.3.2 Workshop Specifications
HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-01 Workshop
C.3.3 Small Depot Specifications
HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001-D1 Small Depots
HH R - LO - DW - 301 - 003 Small Depot and Workshops Conceptual Model
HH R- LO - DW - 301 - 002 Small Depot Conceptual Model
HH R - LO - DW - 301 - 004 Small Depot Conceptual Model
Small Depots and Workshops Layouts
C.4 Rolling Stock Maintenance
HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001-F1 Rolling Stock Maintenance
Ref: A2
G ENERAL S PECIFICATIONS - C ONTENTS
C.S Operations and Infrastructure Maintenance
C.5.1 Basic Service Plan
HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-002-E1 Basic Service Plan
C.5.2 Operating Requirements
H H R-LO-OP-202-SYS-001 -G 1 Operating Requirements
C.5.3 Fare Policy
HHR-LO-FP-602-SYS-001 -01 Fare Policy
C.5.4 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification
HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-001 -F1-Infrastructure Maintenance Specification
( ·. ·.
......
Ref: A2
D,}:l:J~ I b~ CiDIJ::..II Ci..w.J.ugbl
0 SAUD I RA ILWAYS ORGAN IZATION

PHASE 2
OPERATION CONTROL C_ENTRE (OCC)

SPECIFICATIONS

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
APPROVAL I REVISION RECORD SHEET
REVISION DATE SUBJECT OF ISSUE I REVISION AUTHOR
A1 23/04/2009 First Issue D. MASSAT IS. VECCHIATO
A2 24/04/2009 Language Review G.GODDING
81 03/06/2009 Final Issue D. MASSAT
C1 29/06/2009 Final RFP D. MASSAT
01 11/09/2009 Update after Linklaters's comments D.MASSAT
REVISION No: 01 NAME DATE SIGNATURE
D. MASSAT (l
-
\
PREPARED BY 11/09/2009
CHECKED BY L. FONTAINE 11/09/2009
VALIDATED BY G.NORMAND 14/09/2009

~
APPROVED BY C.SCHANG 14/09/2009 -~-----·
::..;;--
:;::;"
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-01 PAGE 2/73

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GLOSSARY ............•..............................................................................................••.• •.•••...................•.......•..... 8
2. STANDARDS AND REFERENCES ............................................................................................................. 9
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...... ..... ... ..... ........................................ ............. ...... ..... ..... .. ....... .... ...... .... ... ... ..... .... ... 9
2.2TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTEROPERABILITY (TSI) ...... .. .......... .. .. .. .. .... .... ..... .. .... .. .. .. ..... ...... ...... .. .... . 9
2.31NTERNATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATION UNION STANDARDS (ITU -T) ..... ... .. .. .... .. ..... .... ... ...... ..... ...... ... .. ... ....... 9
2.41S0 STANDARDS .............. ... ......... ..... .. .... .......... ............ ..... ... .. .... ..... ........ .. .... ..... .. ... .. ... ... .. .. .. ... .... ..... ......... .... .. 9
2.5EN STANDARDS ... ...... ...... ... ... .. ........ ........ ... ............ ... .... .. ... ..... ................... ......... .. ... .. ....... ...... ................ .. ... .. . 10
2.60THER STANDARDS ... ..... ............. .... .. ......... ............... .... .... .. ..... ...... .. .. .... ........ .. ............. .... ....... .... .... .. .... ... .... .. 10
3. PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF WORK ......................................................................................................... 11
4. INTERFACES ................................................................................................................................................ 12
5. BASIC DESIGN ............................................................................................................................................. 13
5.1 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM ..................... ... .. .. ...... .... .. ...... .... .. ..... 13
5.2CENTRALIZED CONTROL AND FUNCTIONAL SUB-SYSTEMS .... ....... ........ ............... .... ... ..... .. .. .. ..... .. ..... .. ... .. .. .. .. 13
5. 2. 1 Centralised Traffic Control (CTC) ..... .. ..... ........ .. .. .. .. .... .. .... .. ..... .... .. .. .. ......... ..... ............... .. ... .... ... .. ... ..... 13
5.2.2 Management of HV power suppy ................................. .. ........................ ..... ....... ..... ...... .. ... .... .. .... ... ...... 13
5.2.3 Passenger Security and Information System. ...... .... .. ... .. .. .. ...... .. .. ........ .. .... .. ... .. .. ..... .. ... ... .... .. ....... ... ... 13
5.2.4 Monitoring offacilities .............. ... .. ... ... ... .. .... ........................................................ ..... .... .. ............. .. .... ...... 14
5 .38ACK· UP OCC ... .. ...... .... ..... ..... .... .. ... ... .. .. ... .... ..... .... .... .. .... ... ... .... ....... .. ... .. .... ... .. ...... ...... ... .... .... ....... ............ .. 14
5.40PERATING MODES ........ ...... ...... .. ... .. ... ... .. ... .. ... .. ...... ...... ..... ... ...... .. .. ...... ... ........ .. ... .. ... .. ....... ......... ... .. ....... ... .. . 14
5.4.1 Centralized mode .......................... ........... ....... ......................................... ............ .. .. .. ... .. ...... .... .. .. ....... .... 14
5.4.2 Local mode ..... .... ..... .... ................ .... ....................................... ... .. .......... ... ........ .. .. ... .. ... ..... .. ................... .. 15
5.4.3 Field mode ............ ......... ... ..... ... .. .... .. ......... ....... .... .. .. ..... .. ... ....... ... .. .......... .. .................. ... .. ... ... .. .. ........... .. 15
6. GENERAL OP E RATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 16
6.1 FUNCTIONS LINKED TO THE TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT .. .. .. .. .. ..... ..... ... .. .......... .. .. .. .. .. ............ .. .......... .... .............. 16
6.2FUNCTIONS LINKED TO THE COMMERCIAL ACTIVITIES .... .. .. .. .. ..... ...... .... .. ... .. .. .. .... ......... .. .. .... .. ..... .. ................ 16
6.3FUNCTIONS LINKED TO SECURITY ... ... ..... ... .. ...... ... ... ... .... ...... ... ..... ... ....... .... ....... .. ....... ......... .. ...... .. ..... .. ..... ...... 16
6.40THER FUNCTIONS .... ......... ................... .. ..... .. ............. .. .. ...... .. ... .. ...... ... ..... ... ... .... .. ....... ......... ... .................. .. .. 16
7 . FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................... 17
7.1 GENERAL .. .. .. ..... ............... ..... ... ..... .. ..... ... ..... .. .. ..... ..... ..... .... ............... ....... .. ............... .......... ... .. .. ... .. ......... ....... 17
7 .2EQUIPMENT CONTROL AND MONITORING S YSTEM (ECMS)- SCADA SYSTEM .... .. .. .. ....... ... ..... .. ... .. .. .... .. .. 17
7.2. 1 ECMS I SCADA Presentation .. .. ............................................................................. ... .. .... .. ...... ... .. .... .. ... 17
7.2. 2 Administration Subsystem .. ........ ... .. .... ..... ... ..... .... ...... .... .. ............. .. .. .... ... ...... ... .... .. .. .... ...... .. ............. .... 18
7.2.3 ECMS Functions ......... ... .. ....... ... .......... .... ... ... ........ .. ... .. ..... ... ... .. .. .. ... .... .... ... ... .... ...... .. ....... .. ... ... .. ............ 19
7.2.4 Alarms Management ..... ..... .. ....... ...... .... ....... .. ....... .. ... .. ... ... ...... ..... ..... ..... .... .... ....... .. .... .. ......... .... ........ .... 19
7. 2. 5Archiving Database ....... .... .......... .. .... .. ........ ........ ... .......... .. ... .. ....... .. ................. ... ..... .. ... .. ..... .. .... .. ........... 20
7.2. 6 Operational Statistic Calculation ..... .. ...... ..... ... .. ............. .. ... .. .................. .. ...... ...... .... ... ....... .. .. ..... ... ....... 21
7. 2. 7Reports .. ..... .... ...... .... .... ... .. ............. ................................................................ .. .. .... ... ..... .. .... ................ .. ... 21
7.3TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ......... .. .... ...... .. ... ... ... .. .. .... .. .. .... .. .... .. ................... ........ ... .. ... .. ... ...... .... ... .. 22
7.3. 1 Train route supervision. ... ... .. ......... ... ...:......... ...... .......... .... ..... :.. .... ... ... .... .. .. .. .... ..... .. .. .. ... ... ......... ...... ...... 22
7.3.2 Traffic Regulation .... ... ...... ..... ..... .. ... .. .. .... ... ... ...... ... ...... ...... .... ... ..... ....... ... .. ..... ............. .... ..... .. ... .. .. .... .... ..22
7.3.3 Traffic Centralized Contro1 ........... .... ...... ... .. .. .. ...... .. ... .. ....... ...... ....... ............. ... ............ .. .... .. .. ... ... ... .... .... 23
7.3.4 Operating feedback and analysis ....................................... .......... . .. ..... . ....... .. .. ....... .. .. 23 ~
7.3. 5 Management of works possessions .... .. ....... .. .............. .. .. .. .. ..... ... .. ..... ... ......... .. ..... .. ..... .. .... . ....... 24
7.4TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS ..... ..... .... ....... .. .. .. .. ..... .... ..... .. ... .... ....... ... ....... .. ..... .. ..... ........ ..... ........ ... ... .... . 25
7.4. 1 Tram descnber system ...... .... .. ...... .. ... .. .......... .. ........ .. ........ .. .. ... .. ............ ........ .. ..... ·:.... .. .. ~~~~
7.4.2 Automatic diagram s.ystem .............. .. ........................... .. ... .. ............ ..... .... ...... .. .. ....... .' ..... . ,·~-~~·~ ~~~':'\::
7.4.3 Automattc route settmg system. .. .. ... ...... ... .... .. ..... .... ..... ... . .. .. ....... .......... .. ......... .. .?.. . .. ..... .. .... ..1-§··~ ~
7.4.4 Train list management system .. ... .. .......... ..... .. .. .... .... ....... .. ... ....... ... .. ........ .... .. .......' .... .. ... f :.C:: ,"~'~.. ..... ... .. .
7 .5HV POWER SUPPLY MANAGEMENT.. .. ...... ...... .. ......... ... .. ... .. ..... ... ........ ..... ......... ..... ... .. ..... .... .. .. ;.S,.f. ...... .. .
7.5.1 Power supply centralized control (PSCC) ...... .. .... ...... .... .................... .... ........ ... ... .. ...... l. .;;; .; .... ~.~ .. .. .2
7.5.2 Management of HVPS works possessions and grounding.... .. ........... .... .......... ... .. .... . \.:~\ ...... .
\~, ~r.
· _-5 ~'Ecs Qe\)\·
':>r,. . 1·1o\\
-antza.
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -40 3- SYS-0 01-0 1 PAGE 3/73

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
7.5.3 HVPS management feedback and analysis...... .. ..... ......... .... .... ........ ............. .. .. ... .... ..... ....... .. ... ... ....... 27
7.5.4 Power Supply Management ................... ... ...... .... ... ... .. ................ ........ .... .... ..... ... ..... .. ..... ............ .... ..... .. 27
7.5.5 Traction Power Supply Management .... ..... ... ..... ... ... ... ... ..... ..... .... .. ... .. ..... ... .... .... ... .... .................... ... ... .28
7.5. 6 Levels of Control ....... ... .... ... ....... ...... .. .. .. .............. ... ......... .. .. ... .... .... ..... ..... .... ..... .. .. ..... ... ..... .. ................ .30
7 .6SECURITY PHONE COMMUNICATIONS .......................... .... ........... .... ...... ..... .... ... .. ......... ..... ...... ..... ...... ...... ........ 3 1
7.7SECURITY AND PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM (PIS) ......... .. .. .. ... .. ............... .. ........ .. .............. .. ........ .. ... 31
7. 7.1 Principle ............................ ...... ... ..... .... ........... ..... .. ..... ... .. .... .. ...... ... ...... ...... ... .......... ..... ... ...... ..... .... .. ...... ... .31
7. 7.2 Functions .. ..... ..... .... ..... ......... .. ... .. .... ........ ..... ...... ........................... ... .. ... ....... .. .... ..... ...... ... .... .. ........... ...... ..31
7. 7.3 lnterfaces ....... ...... ....... ...... .... ..... ..... ..... .. ...... ............ ............. ...... .... ......... ............. ......... .. ..... ... .................. 33
7.8ROLLING STOCK DISPATCHER ... ... .... .... ...... ..... ... ... .. .... ... ......... .. ............ ... .. ......... ......... ....... .... ... .. ..... .... ..... ..... 33
7.9MONITORING OF FACILITIES ... ... ... ... ..... .... ........ .... .. ..... ....... ... ..... ... ............... .. ....... .... ...... .. .... ..... .. ...... ... ....... ... . 34
7.9.1 Monitoring of safety-critical facilities ......... ..... ..... ..... .. ..... ........ .... ..... ... ............ ......... .. ...... .. .... .... ....... ... ..34
7.9.2 Monitoring of access controls ...... ... .. .... .. ...... .. .. ... ..... .... .. ...... .. ...... ......... .................. ... .... ... ..... .......... .... .. 34
7.9.3 Monitoring of station buildings .. .. ... ... ............. .. ................. .. ... .. .. .... .. ... ... .. .. ........................ .... .. ... ..... .. ... . 34
7.9.4 Monitoring of CCTV ... ..... ............................ .. ... .... ..... .. ... ... ..... .. ....... .... ... .. ..... ...... .. ... ........... ....... .... .... .. .... 34
7.10 ABNORMALITIES FOLLOW-UP PROCESSING .......... .. ...................... .... .......... ....... ... ..... .... .... .. ...... ... .. ...... . 34
7.10.1Management of rolling stock abnormalities .......... .. .......... .... ... .. ........... ............................ ..... .. ....... ...... 34
7.10.2Management of facility abnormalities ......... ... ..... ... ... .... ...... ..... ....................... .... .. .. .. ......... .. ...... ....... ..... 34
7.11 ROLLING STOCK FLEET MANAGEMENT .......... ................ .... .. ......... .... .. ...... ... .. ... ... ....... ..... .. ..... ............. ... 34
8. OCC ARCHITECTURE -BASIC DESIGN ................................................................................................ 36
9. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................................38
9.1 PHYSICAL ARCHITECTURE .... ... .... ..... ........ ..... .. ...... .. ....... ... ...... .. .. .... ......... ... ....... ...... ........ ... ... .. ... ............. ..... .. 38
9 .21MPLEMENTED MODULES ... .......... ...... ... ... ...... ........ .. .. .. .......... ... .... ...... .. .. .. .. .... .... ..... ... .. ...... ... ..... .... ...... .... .. ..... 38
9.3HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ............ ..... ...... ...... ... ..... ............ ............ ...... ........ .. .... ....... .. .. .. .... ...... .. ...... ....... .... .40
9.4SCADA SOFTWARE COMPONENTS ..... .. ..... ................ .... .. .......... .. ..... ......................... ... ...... .. .............. .. ... ...... .40
9.4.1 Operating System ...... .. ... ..... .... ....... ..... ... .. .. ....... ... ..... .... .............. ..... ... .. ...... .... .. .. ..... .. ........ ..... .... ... ... .... ..40
9.4.2 ace application .... ..... ............ .. ..... ....... .. ... .. ..... ...... .............................. ... .... .. .... .. .............. .... ..... ... .. .. ... .... 40
9.4.3 SCADA Protocols ... ..... .................... ..... ... ... ...... .... .... ... ..... .. ..... ..... .. .... ... ... .. .... ..... .. .. .. .. ......................... ... .40
9.4.4 Central LAN protocols ..... .... ...... .... ...... ... .... ..... .... .... ... ..... .. ... ... .... .......... .......... .. ......... ... ...... .... .... .. ........ .. 40
9.4.5 Field protocols .... .... .. ... .... ...... ..... .. ...... .. ... .. ..................................... ...... .. ..... .... ... .... .............. .... ... ..... ... ... .. 40
9.5SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ... .. ...... ........ .... .............. ..... .... .... ..... ... .. ... ... ...... .... ... .. ... ...... .. .. .......... ................... .41
10.MAN MACHINE INTERFACE PRINCIPLES ............................................................................................43
10.1 REMOTE-CONTROLS AND REMOTE MONITORINGS MMI .... .. ...... ..... ........... ....... ....... .... ... .......... .. ...... ... .44
10.2 MAN MACHINE INTERFACE PHYSICAL COMPONENTS .... ................... ........ ....... .. ................. ..... ... .. .... .. ... .44
10.2. 1workstation .. .... .... ......... ............. ..... ......... ........ .. ...... .... ...... ... ..... .. ... .. ... ..... .... .. ............... ... .... ..... .... .... ........ 44
10.2.2Visual Control Panel ... ......... ..... ..... ...... ...... .. ........ .... ................ .. .... .... .. .. ... ..... ................. .... ... .............. .... 44
10.3 CENTRALISED CONTROL PROFILES .......... .. .. .. ... .. ..... ... .... .. ... ... .... ......... ..... ..... ... .. .. ...... .... ................ ..... ..45
10.3.1 System access management .... .... ... .... ... ... ..... .. .... ............. ....... ... .. .... .. ..... ...... .. .. ..... .. ... .......... .... .. ... .... ..45
10.4 ERGONOMIC DESIGN ... ... ..... ......... .. ..... .... ... ... ..... ....... .... .................... ..... .. ........... .. ...... .... ..... .. ..... ... .... .... .45
11.BUILDING REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................................................................47
11.1 OCC LOCATION .. .... .. ........ ....... ... ... .. .... .. ...... ..... .. ... ......... .......... .. .. .. ... ...... ............... .. ... ...... ... .... ... .... .. .... ..47
11 .2 OCC ORGANIZATION .. ......... .. .. .. ....... .. ......... ........ .... .. ... .... .... ... ....... .. .......... .... ..... ................... .... ..... ..... . .47
11.3 OCC ACTIVITIES ..... ......................... .. ......... ... ... .. .. ....... .. ........ ... ............. ......... ............ .. .... ... .... .......... .... .49
11.4 occ LAYOUT ... ...... .... ... .... .. .. .. .. ... .............................. .... .. ... ........ ........ .. ........... .... .. ........ .... ......... ........... .49
11.5 OCC SYSTEM MAIN ROOMS REQUIREMENTS ......... ... .. .. ....... :......... .. ... .. ........ ..................... .. .......... ...... . 51
11 .5.1 Central Control Traffic Room ................... ....................,..... ... ....... ............ ..... .. ....... ...... .. .... ... .... ... ... .. ..... 51
11 .5.2Emergency Room ........ .. .. .... .... ..... ... .. .... .. ...... .. .. ... ... ...... ........ .. ..... ... ...... ..... .. .. ... ... .... ... ....... ......... .. .... .. ... . 52
11 .5.30peration Management Room. .................. .... ........ ..... ... ..... ..... ............. ... .. .. ... ..... ..... ............................. 53
11 .5.4Drivers and line Room ..... ........... ............ ...... ........ .. ..... ,.... .... .. .. .. ...... .. .............. .. ... ..... 54
11 .5.5Back-up ... .. ... ..... .. .. ...... .. ... ... .... .... ............ ,.. .... ............. ............. .. ....... .......... .......55
~ ~: ; : 70 t..t':;:· . ~·?. ~ "~<;; :\ . ..::::::::: :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: :::::::::::::::::::::::: ::::::::::::::::::::::::~~

11 .5.80CC .. ... .. .~!:;: · ... ........................ ... ... ...... ............... ... .. ... .. ... ... ... ... .... ..... ... ... ..... ... ,.. .....57
~~:;:~~PS . ~~~-~- .:::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ::::::: :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ::::: :::: ~~

11 .5.11 ......... .. ...... .. ................... ..... ....... .............. .... ...... ,. .... ... .. .. .. ... ..... .. ..................... ..... 59
' n<\U, ~I.n.r:::M NTS ............ ............................................................................................. 60 \:
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-01 P AGE 4/73

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
0 12.1 OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCES .......... .. .. ... ... .. ....................................... ............................. .... ... ... ...... ... .60
12. 1. 1Recovery from failure .... .. ..... ............... .............................. ............ ............... ....... ......... .... ... .. ... .. ........ ..... 60
12. 1. 2 Transfer time .... .. ........... .. .... ... ..... ... .... .. ............. .. ..... .... ...... ............. ....... ... ..... .................. ................ ........ . 60
12. 1. 3 Re-initialisation .............. ... ...... .... ..... ..... ......... ......... ........ .. .... ..... ........ .... ... .... .. ... ... .... .................. ....... ...... . 60
12.1.4Software version installation. ....... ....... .. ..... ... ........ ........ ...... ........................... .... ... ..... .............. ...... ........ . 60
12.1. 5System flexibility. .... ...... ..... ........... ....... .... ....... ... ..... ....... ..... .... ..... .. ... .. ... .... ... .. ..... ... ...... ....... ............ ....... .. 61
12.2 SYSTEM CAPACITY .................... ....... ... .... ..... .. .. ... .. ... .. ............... .... ..... .. ... .. ... .... .. ....... ... ...... ... ..... ............. 61
12.3 PROCESSING PERFORMANCE ... ..... ... .. .. ....... ...... .. .. ... .. ... .... .. .. .. ... .. .... ...... .. ... ................... .... ... ... ... ..... .. .... 61
12.3.1 Chronologic analysis ....... ........ .......... ... .. .. ....... ... ..... ... ........... ........... ...... .... ... ... ... .. ...... ..... ... ... .. ... .. ......... . 61
12. 3.2 System server switch over time ... ....... .... ..... ........ ... .. .... .. ...... .... ..... .......... .... .......... ... .... .. ........ ... ... .. .... .... 61
12.3.3System Capacity ........................ ... .... .. ....... ..... .. .. .... ..................... ..... ..... .. .............. ... ..... ...... ....... ..... ........ 62
12. 3.4 Transmission errors ..... ..... ..... ........... .. ..... ...... ............. ...... ......... .... ... .. .... .. .... ... ... .. ... ................. .. ..... .. .. ... . 62
12.3. 5Expandability ...... ..... ..... ..... .... .................... ..... .. ....... .... ..... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. ..... .. .. .. ... .. .. ... ..... .. ..... .. ......... ... ...... 62
12.4 MMI PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS .... ... ....... .... .. .... .. .. .. ..... .. ... .. ... .. ............ ... .. .. .... .... .. ......... ............... 62
12.4. 1 Display selection response time ........ .. .. ..... .. .... .... ..... .. ... .. . ..... ..... ...... ......... ... ..... .. .. ... ..... .. ................... . 62
12.4. 2 Operator entry response time .. ................. .. ...... .. .. .. ... .......................................... ......... ..... .......... .... ...... 62
12.4. 3 Configuration of an operating workstation ...... ..... .......... ....... ... ............... .. ..... .. ... .. ..... .. ...... ............. ... ... 62
12.4.4 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) ....... ........................................... ..... .. ............................... ....... ...... 62
13.RAMS REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................. 63
...~ ~- -- · 13. 1. 1 Reliability and availability. ....... .. ........ ...... .. ........ ... ... .... ... .. ....... ... ......................... .. .. ....... ..... ... .. ....... .. ...... 63
13. 1.2 Maintainability. .... .. ............. .... .... ... ....... ..... .......... .. ..... .......... .. .. .......... .. ... ........ ..... ...... ....... ........... .. ....... .... 63
13. 1.3Safety. .. .. ..... ....... ...... .................................................... .......................... ...... .. ... .. ....... ... ... .... ... ................... 63
14.DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................................... 64
15.MANUFACTURING REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................................................65
16.PROCUREMENT, CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................... 66
17.SPECIFIC ENVIRONMENTAL CONSTRAINTS AND REQUIREMENTS ........................................... 67
18.VERIFICATION, TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 68
18.1 ACCEPTANCE PRINCIPLE ....... .......... .................. .... .. .. .. .. ....... ..... ... ... .. ........... .... .. .. ...... ... ............ .. ........... 68
18.2 CERTIFICATION .... ....... ........ .. .. .... ... .. ...................................... ... ........................... ....... .... ......................... 68
18.3 DESIGN VERIFICATION ....... ................... .. ....... .. ... ..... ... ................... ..... ........................ .... ..... ... ............. .. .. 68
18.4 INSTALLATION VERIFICATION ............ ......... .. ... .... .. ... .. ...... .................... ........... ...... ..... ...... ... ... ..... ..... .. .... .68
18.5 SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION TESTS .. ....... .... ... ... .... ... .. .. .. ..... ... .. ... .. ... .. .... ... .... ....... ....... .. .. .. ......... ..... ...... 69
18.6 LOCAL OCC TESTS .. .. ..... ........ ..... .... .. ....... .. .. .. ........ .... ...... ..... ... .. ..... ............... .. ....... .. ................. .. .. ........ 69
18.7 QCC INTEGRATION TESTS ......... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. ... ..... ... ......... .. .... ........... ....... ....... ..... .. ........ ... .. ............ .. .... .. .69
18.8 DYNAMIC TESTS ..... .. .. ... .............. ....... .... ........ ... .............. ...... ........... .. .. .............. .. ... .. ... ...................... .. .. .70
18.9 INSTALLATIONS RECOVERIES AND MODIFICATIONS ..................... ... .. ... ......... ..... ..... .. ......................... .... .70
19.TRAINING REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................................................................71
20.DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................................................72
20.1 SCHEMES AND DIAGRAMS ... ...... .... .... ........ ... ................................................................... .. .. ....... ............. 72
20.2 TECHNICAL DOCUMENTS .. .... ........................................... ...... .... ... ... ... .. ... .... ... ... ................ .. .... ................ 72
20.3 PROCEDURES AND PROOFS ... ... ... ...... ..... .......... ......... ... ........ .......... .. ... .... ...... ....... .... ..... ......... ... ..... .. .... .. 72
20.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS ........................................................... .. ......... ... ... ............ 72
21.TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................... 73
' .. ~
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-01 PAGE5/73

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
Table of Illustrations
Figure 1 : Functional diagram of a Centralized Control system .................................................... ........ ............................. 36

Figure 2 : example of physica l architecture of the control centre ....................................................... .. .. ............................ 39
Figure 3 : Example of control ce ntre working spaces arrang ement .......... ......................................................................... 48
Figure 4 : Example of OCC layout ...................................... ....... ........................................................................................ 50
...
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001 -01 PAGE 6/73

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
0 PROJECT REFERENCES
REFW REF ID NUMBER REF DESCRIPTION
1 HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-001 to 013 General Specifications - Sections 1 to 13
General Specifications - Appendix A : Contractor

2 HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-014
Deliverable Requirement List
General Specifications - Appendix B : Annual

3 HHR-LO-CT-602-SAU-001
Climate and Weather in KSA
General Specifications - Append ix C : Interface

I~ :·:·: ·J Management Requirements
. .. ,
5 HHR-LO-SY-301 -INE-001 System Schematic - Indicative preliminary study
6 HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-002 Basic Service Plan
7 HHR-LO-PR-602-SYS-001 Performance Requirements
8 HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 RAMS Requirements
9 HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-001 Infrastructure Maintenance
10 HHR-LO-OP-202-SYS-001 Operating Requirements
r.··

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
1. GLOSSARY
The Consortium shall refer to the General Glossary, defined in Section 2 of General Specification s (HHR-
LO-CT -602-SYS-002).
. ''}
·.-...

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
0=-
2. STANDARDS AND REFERENCES
2.1 General requirements
Req 01 Unless explicitly stated otherwise in this document, the OCC shall comply with the following
specifications as well as the relevant referenced standards and regulations .
Req 02 The Consortium may supply equipment and systems in accordance with other national or international
standards than those listed below. If so, these standards shall be clearly referenced and all differences shall be
clearly identified .
Req 03 If the Consortium decides to refer to other standards , the demonstration that the standards proposed
are Equivalent Or Superior (EOS) shall be made and submitted by the Consortium.
All communication systems shall be designed and built according to appropriate industry standards and in
compliance with the Saudi Arabian , ITU-T, TSI, EIRENE and OSI standards and references .
2.2 Technical Specifications for lnteroperability (TSI)
The current version of the following TSI at call for tender date shall be used .
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability- Control and command Subsystem ERTMS
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability- Rolling stock Subsystem
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability- Infrastructure Subsystem ·
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability- Operation Subsystem
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability- Maintenance Subsystem
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability- Energy Subsystem
r ''''·
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability- Safety in railway tunnels
I ...
2.3 International Telecommunication Union Standards (ITU-T)
• Series D - Principles of billing and accounting
• Series E- PSTN, numbering and routing, service quality, network management
• Series G -Analogue and digital transmission systems
• Series M - Maintenance
• Series 0 - Measurement equipment
• Series P- Telephony transmission quality
• Series Q- Switching , value added services , signaling systems
• Series V- Data communications over the PSTN
2.4 ISO Standards
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-00 1-01 PAGE 9/73

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
• ISO 7250 : Basic human body measurements for technologic design

• ISO 9000-3 : Quality management and quality assurance standards - Part 3: Guidelines for the
application of ISO 9001 to the development, supply, installation and maintenance of computer
software
• ISO 9241 - Ergonomic requirements for office work with Visual Display Terminals
• ISO 10007 - Quality management - Guidelines for configuration management
• ISO 11604-1 to 4 - Ergonomic design of Control Centres
2.5 EN Standards
• EN 50122-1 - Railway applications - Fixed installations - Protective provisions relative to electrical

safety and earthing
• EN 50126 - Railway applications - The specification and demonstration of reliability, availability,
maintainability and safety (RAMS)
• EN 50128 - Railway applications - Communications, signaling and processing systems - Software
for railway control and protection system
• EN 50129 - Railway applications - Communications, signaling and processing systems - Safety
related electronic systems for signaling
• EN 50155 - Railway applications - Electrical equipment used on transit vehicle
• EN 50159-1 to 2 - Railway applications - Communications, signaling and processing systems -
Safety related communications (closed or open transmission systems)
• EN 60950 - Information technology equipment- Safety
• EN 61508-1 to 3- Functional safety of electrical/ electronic I programmable electronic safety-related
systems
2.6 Other standards
• NFPA 130 - (US National Fire Protection Agency) - Standard for Fixed Guideway Transit and
Passengers Rail Systems
• IEC 60571 - Electrical Equipment used on Railway Vehicles
··.

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
3. PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF WORK
This document is part of the Performance Specification for Phase 2 and concerns the Operation Control
Centre (OCC). it aims to describe its basic design as well as OCC requirements and interfaces, which
shall be respected by the Consortium , according to the Government's general requirements for the
Railway.
Unless specifically excluded from these requirements, the Consortium shall provide everything
necessary, whether specifically mentioned or not, to ensure that the OCC is successfully implemented,
with a safe and proper operation.
Scope of work for this system includes:
• Design, manufacturing and maintenance of the Centralized Traffic Control (CTC)
• Design, manufacturing of High Voltage Power Supply Management system (HVPSM)
.' • OCC organisation
• OCC operation instructions
• Centralisation and management of warning systems
• Management of telesurveillance (CCTV) and monitoring of facilities
• Passenger Information and Security system
• Power supply for OCC equipment
• Verification, testing and acceptance
• Operational and technical training
• Associated spares and consumables
• Special tools and other maintenance equipment
• Technical documentation

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
4. INTERFACES
The Consortium shall ensure that all interfaces required between OCC and line equipment (including
stations) in the related technical specifications are fully respected, including but not limited to :
• rolling stock,
• depots,
• power supply,
• signalling,
• communications system,
• automatic fare collection,
• control rooms in stations
()
Ref: REF : HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-01 PAGE 12/73

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
0
5. BASIC DESIGN
5.1 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System
The implementation of a SCADA System for the OCC shall allow it to benefit from the advantages of
modern technology and provide for a safe , efficient and reliable HHR operation and maintenance .
Each subsystem shall be provided with the appropriate software and hardware for implementation and
supervision of the OCC main following functions:
• Configuration
• Management
• Control
• Monitoring
,..--·.· :.i
- ;;- · ~-
• Alarms display .
5.2 Centralized control and functional sub-systems
The Centralized control system shall be located in a unique place (OCC building) and enable both
command and control of all geographically distributed equipment.
5.2.1 CENTRALISED TRAFFIC CONTROL (CTC)
The Centralised Traffic Control shall group all train control and monitoring means for traffic management,
and related SCADA functions .
it shall mainly include automation to a level suitable to handle the complete management of train traffic.
In order to maintain passenger and staff safety, the Centralized Traffic Control shall, in addition, enable
quick intervention on site each time an incident occurs.
5. 2.2 MANAGEMENT OF HV POWER SUPPY
A general view of the whole HHR high voltage power supply system and status shall be provided in order
to allow OCC operators to make judgments and decisions , to enable reconfiguration when necessary, or
allow other maintenance actions .
The HV Power supply Management system shall also be based on SCADA functions.
5.2.3 PASSENGER SECURITY AND INFORMATION SYSTEM
A dedicated system , called Passenger Security and Information System shall centralize all information on
incidents and provide them to relevant interfacing systems and operators.
This information shall be classified and archived during the Consortiums'

activities.

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
5. 2.4 MONITORING OF FACILITIES

Safety-critical facilities shall be monitored in order to detect their malfunction. This shall allow OCC staff
to take appropriate measures for ensuring safe HHR operation even in the case of system failures.
5.3 Back-up OCC
To prevent the HHR line from a global operations blackout in case of a major failure of the main OCC ,
located in Jeddah, a back-up OCC shall be designed and built near the rolling stock workshop I
maintenance base , forecast at approximately Km 125.
This configuration shall allow for:
• Operation with all equipment and staff in case of a main OCC failure
• Its' use as a training facility for OCC operating staff
IReq 04 The back-up OCC shall have the same functions and RAMS level as the principal one in Jeddah.
Req 05 In case a takeover becomes necessary due to a failure of the main OCC (one or several systems), the
back-up OCC shall command and control all OCC functions . No partial takeover shall be possible.
5.4 Operating modes
Req 06 The Centralized Control system shall be adapted to all various possible operating modes of the line.
These are as follows:
• centralized mode (normal operating mode)
• local mode (first level of downgraded operating mode)
• field mode (second level of downgraded operating mode)
5.4. 1 CENTRALIZED MODE
The Centralized mode shall be the normal operation mode. Automatons shall receive signals
from the line equipment, generate processing operations and send back the required
commands.
The main functions which shall be performed by the automated systems are:
• traffic management
• high voltage power supply management
• operating assistance
• maintenance assistance.
However the operating staff shall stand by in order
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-0 1 P AGE 14173

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
Other functions shall be implemented, including:
• control and monitoring of fixed facilities

• rolling stock management assistance
• passenger and security information .
Req 07 All conversations between ace operators and external actors, through radio and telephone, shall be
recorded on dedicated equipment.
5.4.2 LOCAL MODE
The local mode shall be the first level of downgraded operation mode.
In this case, command and control functions are still centralized but data communication
between the OCC and the line facilities is no longer possible.
Operating staff in signaling rooms or sub-stations shall ensure the operation activity, under OCC
instruction (through radio or telephone). All instructions to be carried-out shall only be given by
the OCC.
IReq 08 Voice communications in local mode of ace operation shall be recorded .
If the internal HHR telephone system is not available, then the public network shall be used (GSM or fixed
lines).
5.4. 3 FIELD MODE
The field mode shall be the second level of downgraded operation.
Data is no longer available even in line facilities. Intervention shall be carried out in the field ,
under radio or phone OCC control and instructions.
Ref: REF: HHR· LO- CC ·403- SYS-001-0 1 PAGE 15/73

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
6. GENERAL OPERATION REQUIREMENTS
The design of OCC systems shall be preceded by an accura te analysis of the events likely to happen on
the line . This shall allow information selection to be centralized , then to be classified according to various
degrees of emergency, reliability, and availability (which shall be defined by the Consortium).
These events shall result from the "operating" functions and their related performing activities.
These "operating" functions can be identified as follows.
6.1 Functions linked to the traffic management
• Train route supervision,

• Traffic regulation,
• Traffic centralized control,
• Operating feedback and analysis,
• High voltage power supply supervision,
• Rolling stock dispatcher.
6.2 Functions linked to the commercial activities
• Passenger information
6.3 Functions linked to security
• Telesurveillance (CCTV) I monitoring of equ ipment and facilities,

• Monitoring of staff protection ,
• Telesurveillance (CCTV) of HHR access points.
6.4 Other functions
Some other transversal functions can be added to those above, including but not limited to:
• following-up of abnormalities ,
• rolling stock management assistance,
• instructions management,
• supervision of training activities.
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-0 1 PAGE 16/73

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
7. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
The Consortium is responsible for the full list of functional requirements. The following requirements list is
not exhaustive . The Consortium shall fully respect all the TSI and standards given in part 2 of this
document as well as complying with local regulations, rules and commissioning criteria .
IReq 09 The OCC systems shall provide control and monitoring functions of the various System components .
Req 10 Upon unavailability of the main OCC , the operations shall be able to be transferred in the Back-up
OCC.
7.1 General
..__.,-·.
~-~~
~-· The Centralised Control System provides the highest level of observation control and command of the
System. lt is an operational nerve centre which allows the personnel in charge of the operations for the
traffic and power supply management to obtain real time status of the installations, to make relevant
measurements, and to take the appropriate actions during the normal operation as well as during unusual
occurrences when efficiency and swift responses are required .
Req 11 To achieve this aim, the Centralised Control system shall ensure all the possible facilities to:
• monitor the whole line,
• help the Operation Team to make the most suitable decisions upon occurrence of an incident,
• ensure the transmission of the corresponding controls to the equipment on the line.
7.2 Equipment Control and Monitoring System (ECMS)- SCADA system
Req 12 The CONTROL CENTRE shall be provided with an equipment control and monitoring system
(SCADA).
7. 2. 1 ECMS I SCADA PRESENTATION

The term Equipment Control and Monitoring System (ECMS) , shall refer to hardware and software systems
resident at the Operational Central Centre that are able to collect, to process and to manage all the status
and events coming from the different intelligent controllers belonging to the various subsystems of the
Control Centre.
Note: commands of a single or a set of equipment shall be sent by each single operator owner of its
technology (e.g. the Train Dispatcher shall handle commands of the equipment under AVS control , the
power supply operator shall deal with electrical devices under supervisory control, the ECMS I SCADA
operator shall handle commands of the monitoring of the equipment status and the events detection and
management).
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-0 1 PAGE 17/73

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
Req 13 ECMS I SCADA functions shall be the following:

• data collection;
• data processing;
• data dispatching;
• data ru:chiving;
• data reporting;
• data displaying;
• data querying.
ECMS shall collect all the "raw" data coming from the field; it shall process them building structured
messages that shall be dispatched to the appropriate operators at the Control Room and/or to other
locations at the Operation Control Centre (e.g . the maintenance operators).
Req 14 ECMS internal clock shall be synchronized with the central system clock (Master Clock) like the other
systems of the Control Centre.
n
'\..';_:)
In detail, ECMS shall provide to the OCC monitoring of the current status and alarms of the following main
subsystems:
Power Distribution System (Lighting and Power system);

Facilities including , but not limited to :
• Fire detection and fighting;

• Air conditioning , refrigeration and ventilation ;
• Drainage and pumping ;
• Automatic Fare Collection ;
• Passenger Information;
• Communication systems (public address, telephone, radio telephone, intercom);
• Uninterruptible Power Supply;
• Low voltage distribution ;
• Access Control (A/C);
• CCTV;
• Clock, etc. ;
• Signaling system ;
• Building Management System, except stations
• All communication subsystems equipment.
Ref: REF : HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-0 1 PAGE 18/73

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
Req 15 Several specific schematic shall be proposed , so that the operator can have a global view of the
system.
7. 2. 3 ECMS FUNCTIONS
Req 16 ECMS shall provide the following main functions:

• Monitoring of the Equipment status: on/off, stopped, failed,
• Events detection, combination and alarms triggering,
• Management of alarms processing, with priority classification, time of,
• Management of data acquisition with system equipment (either through direct links or via Remote
Terminal Units),
• Management and feedback of operator actions,
• Database administration.
,!_..:_:_ :4:,\
'..-..:-:· IReq 17 The ECMS shall be based on a "real time database" and as much as possible on standard software.
Req 18 The database shall be accessible by an authorised operator by means of tools to manage the various
data (e.g. insertion, modification, cancellation, exchange, etc.).
IReq 19 Therefore, ECMS shall provide also all the necessary functions for the database administration.
The database shall be able to manage all the reference data: as regard the Traffic management, for
example, the database shall include, but not be limited to:
• Line lay out characteristics,
• The reference time tables,
• The systems and operating parameters,
• Planning of the data transfer to the "real time" configuration.
7. 2.4 ALARMS MANAGEMENT
Req 20 The database shall allow the definition of the alarms:

• classification (e.g. traffic, signaling, access, system, "CCTV, communication system, etc.),
• operator information,
• associated operation instruction,
• categmy (e.g. maintenance, operating, technical),
• level of priority, acknowledgement or not (e.g. with or without buzzer),
• addressing (e.g. operator authority areas, workstation, etc.),
• etc.
Req 21 The alarms management module shall be an ergonomic product for the operator.

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
IReq 22 The management of the list of alarms shall be flexible and user-friendly.
Req 23 The user shall have a powerful graphic editor mover and shall define symbols and macro-symbols
making it possible to simply construct moving mimic diagrams.
Req 24 The purpose of the alarm operating process in "real" time shall be mainly to entail a quick view of the
triggered alarm, to select and process the highest priority, to carry out quick actions and to give the OCC
operator the chance to manage each alarm.
Each alarm can be allocated to operator authority areas or can be allocated to one or more "workstation"
functions .
Req 25 Alarms processing shall include but not be limited to :

c.':\
• Time and date, \.J
• Text,
• Type,
• Location of equipment I identification,
• Associated operation instruction,
• Category,
• Level ofp1iority,
• Handling of operator acknowledgments,
• Time acknowledgement.
Visual and audible alarms integrated into the system shall provide a warning to the operators within the OCC
room . These alarms shall be capable of different warning tones to indicate the different type of alarm being
generated and to further isolate the nature of the alarm .
IReq 26 Alarms shall be classified per function or subsystem.
IReq 27 Each class of alarms listed shall be able to be consulted on the screen by means of an access button .
Req 28 The list of last alarms of the workstation shall be displayed, on the screen , in chronologic order and in
priority order (e .g. the newest alarm and the highest priority at the top of the list), etc.
Req 29 A complete r
into service. ,, ~
7.2.5
GENERAL
Req 30 The archivi (lfat§lbase shall record all operating , technical and maintenance events and alarms.

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
0 Req 31 Database tools shall allow an authorized operator (e .g. OCC supervisor) to design reports , statistics,
analyse and process , etc.
EVENTS HISTORICAL RECORDS
Req 32 The system shall record and be able to print the following type of events:
• All the controls sent by the operator,
• All the alarms
• All the other remote monitorings,
• The synthetic information related to traffic
7.2.6 OPERATIONAL STATISTIC CALCULATION
Req 33 This function shall store all real-time information that shall be necessary for statistical calculations ,
--··~··
possibly performed on daily, weekly, monthly and yearly basis to provide overall system performance and
availability information, such as:
• Punctuality during peak and off-peak hours;
• Average commercial speed;
• Delayed services;
• System availability;
• Vehicles availability.
7. 2. 7 REPORTS
This function shall prepare daily documents on event reports or edited daily and monthly reports on operating
reports or edited kilometre counter follow up reports .
\ ..

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
Req 34 Reports shall include, as a minimum:

• Scheduled Operating time;
• Operation data compared to forecasted program;
• System service availability;
• Downtime events, total downtime;
• A summary of major events and system alatms;
• System major failures;
• OCC main decision;
• Statistical data.
7.3 Traffic Management functions
7. 3. 1 TRAIN ROUTE SUPERVISION
~IR_e_q~3_5___AII_tr_ai_n_m_o_v_e_m_e_n_ts_s_h_a_ll_b_e_s_u~p_e~
__ __is_e_d_b~y_t_he__C_T_C_.__________________________________~I (-j}
The function of train route supervision shall consist of determining and setting the running pattern of each
vehicle on the main track.
Train route supervision shall be performed through:
• action onto the routes , with regard to:

o the Automatic Route Setting (see§ 7.2.3) linked to the timetable management
o an automatic route control , derived from the interlocking and signaling system or when a
passing train is detected in approach
o command , control and monitoring from the CTC
o manual route control from local signaling rooms in downgraded mode
• observance by CTC Train Controllers , or on-site operators (downgraded modes only)

• operating assistance tools such as:
o video wall
o mimic diagram (Visual Control Panel)
o alarms screen display
o train location and identification on the line (linked with the Train Describer system)
o GSM-R radio link to ensure communication between CTC staff, drivers, and other staff
o telephony system to ensure communication between CTC and drivers, and other staff, in
downgraded modes .
7.3.2 TRAFFIC REGULATION

QCC SPECIFICATIONS
The function of traffic regulation shall consist of:
• ensuring compliance to the reference time schedule

• managing the priorities in case of conflict
• re-creating a time schedule, in real time, in case of passenger traffic disruption.
The Consortium shall submit detailed traffic regulation organization measures and instructions, to ensure
achievement of the above requirements, in both normal and downgraded modes of operation.
7.3. 3 TRAFFIC C ENTRALIZED CONTROL
Req 37 A real time image of the entire line, alerts upon abnormalities and associated actions shall be provided
to the CTC operating staff.
Real time image of the entire line shall be provided with the following information as a minimum:
' •.·
r ·:~.· • ·1
• track occupancy,
• train locations and identifications,
• representation of turnouts, shunting and protection signals (stopping points) status,
• representation of temporary speed restrictions (TSR),
• representation of working staff protection measures (other than TSR),
• alarms display from all safety detection devices linked with the signaling system status,
This image shall be fully displayed on a mimic diagram (Visual Control Panel), and detailed
views shall be displayed on demand on CTC staff workstations.
Alerts upon detection of abnormalities shall be displayed using the following representation codes:
• graphic symbol flashing on colour screens,

• graphic symbol flashing on mimic diagram.
In case of abnormality detection, the CTC operators shall be able to react at least by:
• having at their disposal the related operation instructions,

• sending commands to facilities,
• receiving an acknowledgement of the anomaly occurrence,
• inserting or removing a train set from operation,
• establishing a radio (or telephone) dialogue with train drivers or station staff,
• modifying the schedules.
7.3.4 OPERATING FEEDBACK AND ANAL YS/S

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
The operating feedback and analysis shall consist of establishing operation reports and
statistics processes , with reference to the timetable actually performed . This shall also allow
recording all relevant data for:
• assessing offer and service quality,

• analysing the operation and maintenance process ,
• archiving all information for eventual investigation.
The characteristics of all daily performed train services shall be stored and relevant indicators
related to the quality of service (punctuality and regularity in stations , variation of trip times and
headways, variation of commercial kilometres , etc.) shall be provided .
In addition to indicators , the Traffic Managements systems shall allow for the possibility to
analyse the performed operation by recording data such as operation events , delays in stations.
Some maintenance-related data for train sets , such as performed kilometres , technical failures ,
shall also be provided at the end of each round trip .
For facilities, a list of technical alarms shall be established for the maintenance staff and
activities.
In addition , investigation following any incident shall be possible through:
• the telesurveillance (CCTV) system ,

• the recording of all radio and phone conversations (see § 5.4 ).
7.3.5 M ANAGEMENT OF WORKS POSSESSIONS
Req 39 The Traffic Management systems shall allow the management of works possessions, according to the
organization specified in the operating requirement (HHR-LO-OP-202-SYS-001 ).
The possessions shall apply in case of works to be performed during the daily circulation period .
In normal operating condition, a works possession request over a given area shall be issued to
the CTC by the working staff in charge of the corresponding works . The corresponding area
shall be highlighted on the mimic diagram (Visual Control Panel).
In downgraded mode , the area subjected to works possession can be under the management of
staff in signaling rooms , but under OCC instructions .
During works possession time on the corresponding area, according to the field working
procedures and the provided working staff protection systems (see "Interlocking and main line
signaling" specifications: HHR-LO-SI -403-INE-001 ), specific measures shall be taken to ensure
working staff safety.
limited
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -4 03- SYS-00 1-0 1 P AGE 24/73

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
(} • The conditions required for granting a works possession ,

• Traffic and safety management during works possession time ,
• Conditions required for closing a works possession.
7.4 Traffic Management systems
Req 40 The Traffic Management systems shall include, but not to be limited to:
• a Train Describer system (TDS)
• an Automatic Diagram system (ADS)
• an Automatic Route Setting system (ARS)
• a Train List Management System (TLMS).
{ - - --
<---·· --
7.4. 1 TRAIN DESCRIBER SYSTEM
IReq 41 A Train Describer system (TDS) shall be provided. lt shall have two key functions:
• providing information to staff about the location and status (number and potential deviation from
planned time) of trains to enable efficient operation and management of the railway
• providing information to other systems (especially staff and passenger information) automatically
and, on demand, the location and status of all trains in the system.
A codification number shall be assigned to each train service. The Consortium shall submit
details about the chosen codification.
In addition, the TDS shall show for each train whether it is being routed by the Automatic Route
Setting (ARS) or whether it requires manual routes to be set.
7.4.2 AUTOMATIC DIAGRAM SYSTEM
IReq 42 An Automatic Diagram system (ADS) shall be provided to facilitate HHR traffic management.
This system shall involve the automatic production of train graphs detailing actual performance against
timetables and shall also have the capability of extrapolation of train paths to facilitate operational
recovery from delays .
The ADS shall also allow the system to be interrogated by a Train Controller to input regulation decisions
so that the ADS can demonstrate their effect, allowing the Train Controller to choose the preferred option. ~
7.4.3 AUTOMATIC ROUTE SETTING SYSTEM . q--

Req 43 An Automatic Route Setting system (ARS) shall be provided to set routes automatically throughout the
main line, and for access to and from depots I maintenance base.
The ARS system shall provide at least the following facilities :
• Be capable of operating any booked service to its planned path from the
point of termination ,

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
• Be capable of automatically changing a train description where a train has completed one booked
path and is about to embark upon another booked path ,
• Be able to regulate path clashes and minimise the overall delays that arise from out-of-course
running booked services ,
• Be capable of checking and monitoring the correct sequence of track circuits operation ,
• Be tolerant of partial unavailability of signa ling facilities .
The ARS shall be sub-divided into sections which shall generally relate to station or interlocking areas. lt
shall be possible to either enable or disable ARS for a particular section .
The ARS shall be installed to perform route setting and train regulation for the whole area under control of
an OCC Train Controller.
Trains shall only have routes set for them once they have been recognized by the ARS and are included
in the timetable data.
Route setting shall match the planned timetable when all trains are running as scheduled. When train
services are disrupted , the ARS shall take decisions to regulate the service so that minimum delay to
trains shall be achieved . Such decisions shall be automatically referred to the
and acknowledgment prior to implementation . The Consortium shall submit full
Train Controller for vetting
details about the design of
n
'(;l;J
this facility .
However, manual route setting shall not be inhibited at any time and have the priority over automatic
operation.
7.4.4 TRAIN LIST MANAGEMENT SYS TEM
A Train List Management system (TLMS) shall be provided in order to load train services related data into
the CTC systems (ARS , ADS , TDS) . The Consortium shall give details of the train list management and
data loading (according to schedule or in real time , for whole or partial routes , etc .).
7.5 HV power supply management
7. 5. 1 POWER SUPPL Y CENTRALIZED CONTROL (PSCC)
Req 44 A real time image of the entire high voltage power supply network over the line, alerts upon
abnormalities and associated actions shall be provided to the PSCC staff.
The real time image of the HV power supply network shall provide at least the following information :
• representation of turnouts status,
• representation of working feeder stations status ,
• representation of electrical status for each system part.
This image shall be fully displayed on a mimic diagram (Visual Control Panel) , and detailed
views shall be displayed on demand on HVPS management staff workstations .
/.-·.:'
•· I
_:/
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-00 1-0 1 P AGE 26/73

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
• having at their disposal the related operation instructions,

• sending commands to facilities,
• receiving an acknowledgement of the anomaly occurrence,
• inserting or removing a train set from operation,
• establishing a radio (or telephone) dialogue with train drivers or station staff,
• modifying the schedules .
Any abnormality event shall be filed, reported , classified and archived once being resolved .
7.5.2 MANAGEMENT OF HVPS WORKS POSSESSIONS AND GROUNDING
Req 45 The High Voltage Power Supply Management system shall allow the management of works
possessions and grounding .
The possessions shall apply in case of works to be performed during the daily circulation period.
In normal operating conditions, a works possession request over a given area shall be issued to
the HSPV Management staff by the working staff in charge of the corresponding works. The
corresponding area shall be highlighted on the mimic diagram (Visual Control Panel).
In downgraded mode, the area subjected to works possession can be under the management of
staff in sub-stations , but under OCC instructions.
During works possession time on the corresponding area, according to the field working
procedures and the provided working staff protection systems, specific measures shall be taken
to ensure working staff safety.
The request for works possession shall be issued through GSM-R radio or telephone .
7. 5. 3 HVPS MANAGEMENT FEEDBACK AND ANALYSIS
IReq 46 The Traffic Management systems shall provide tools for post-operation analysis and feedback.
The HVPS management feedback and analysis shall consist of establishing management
reports and statistics processes, both during operation and maintenance periods. This shall
also allow recording all relevant data for:
• analysing operation and maintenance processes

• archiving all information for eventual investigation.
7. 5. 4 POWER SUPPLY MANAGEMENT

The Power Supply equipment is distributed in:
• 2 X 25 KV Feeder stations
• Field control-command facilities ,
• Sectioning and paralleling posts
The field of activities of the Power Supply Management team comprises:
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-00 1-0 1

OCC SPECIFICATIONS
• Power Supply management of the main receiving feeder station ,

• Traction power management at the line side,
Req 47 The main functions shall be:

• to visualise the condition of the power supply network, as well as the visual monitoring panel,
• to control the equipment,
• to inform the operator of any change in the status of the power supply network,
• to indicate several electrical parameters (voltage, power...),
• to print a pre-determined log of events and data,
• to store a log of events.
The Power Supply management can be divided in two main functions:

• the traction power supply management,
• the facility power supply management.
Req 48 Traction power supply and facilities power supply management shall both be under the responsibility of
the same Power Operator.
7. 5. 5 TRACTION POWER SUPPLY MANAGEMENT
The Traction Power Supply function allows the Power Operator to energise or de-energise the different
Traction Power sections of the line on demand of the Traffic Operator.
The controls related to the Power Supply equipment are performed :

• from the Power Supply Workstation
• or locally from the equipment itself.
Req 49 The equipment under supervision shall be :

• Equipment of the high voltage feeder stations,
• Paralleling and sectioning posts,
• OCS voltage supervision.
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-00 1-0 1 PAGE 28/73

HARAMAIN n iGH SPEED RAILWAY- TENDER DOCUMENTS - OCC ~tECIFICATIONS 0
____ ..,. : Contra~ Command links Power Supply
- Power supply
.,..
Control Center
PSCC
~
/////
' '
' '
/ '
/ ~:______ _- - - - 380 kV I 2 X 25
/ / --- Feeder Station
''
/
/
''
/
/
'' Electrical gears
Field Control Sectionning &

Command Parralleling posts
Electrical gears
~
t l 'I~ LLI- CC -403- SYS-001-f ) . . _ _
~1 )
PAGE 29f73
HARAMAIN HIGH SPEED RAILWAY - TENDER DOCUMENTS- OCC SPECIFICATIONS
7. 5.6 L EVELS OF CONTROL

Several levels of management are possible, namely:
• centralised control from the PSCC control room,
• centra lised control from the Back-up OCC (BCC) control room,
• local mode control from the local Man Machine-Interface,
• fi eld mode control fro m the equipment itself.
Control- Command of
Feeder stations,
Remote Control Posts, etc.
Local MMI Feeder stations
Field Gears
Manual
CENTRALIZED CONTROL FROM THE PSCC CONTROL ROOM

In this mode, all the actions are carried out from the PSCC provided that the local equipment is in the
appropriate configuration (« remote control »).
In other words, the centralised - local switch ing is always managed fro m the local area. The common
practice is to have a telephone communication between the PSCC operator and the local operator so that
their actions can be co-ordinated.
CENTRALIZED CONTROL FROM THE BCC CONTROL ROOM

Upon major problem with the main OCC, all SCADA functions shall be transferred to the BCC.
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001 -C1 PAGE 30/73

HARAMAIN HIGH SPEED RAILWAY- TENDER DOCUMENTS- OCC SPECIFICATIONS
() FIELD MODE CONTROL FROM THE EQUIPMENT ITSELF

The command/control system is decentralised and modular, based on programmable logic controllers (PLC) ,
called stations, distributed around a local area network. Each PLC is dedicated to an operational item (e.g .
Remote Terminal switchgear, Traction Set).
On the equipment there is an associated change over switch with two positions: "local" or "remote" . Its
actuation sets the working mode in remote or in local control which means it can be operated fully manually .
The actuation of the switch in manual mode , has the highest priority over the other actions possible from the
local control or the PSCC.
7.6 Security phone communications
The Consortium shall refer to and respect all requirements for security phone communications stated in the
Railway telecommunication specifications document (HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-007) .
7.7 Security and Passenger Information System (PIS)
:,i::) PIS deals with passenger information display of pertinent, current, real time and up-to-date travel information
to passengers .
7. 7. 1 PRINCIPLE
Req 50 The Control Centre system shall elaborate the necessary data to allow the display of information to
travellers in stations.
7. 7.2 FUNCTIONS
Req 51 Information presented to travellers shall be dispensed under three different arrangements:
• Display of the future "Departures" or" Arrivals" panels on several lines with the following
information:
- identification of the circulation,
- time of departure or an:ival,
- destination or source,
circulation track,
- information about possible disruption (delay, deletion.),
- possibly, infonnation to the clients, not related to the circulations.
• The Display panels on departure platforms to present the next circulation expected to come on a
track. These display panels shall show :
- identification of the next circulation expected to come on the track,
- departure time,
- inf01mation of possible disruption (delay, deletion.),
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-00 1-C1 PAGE 31 /73

DATA TO BE CONSIDERED
Req 52 The main data to be considered shall be the following ones :

• The circulations and their featmes: train identification, passage time, anival track,
• The" missions" ensured (destination and servicing) by these trains and their representation on the
various supports of display and public address,
• The "sentences" that shall be used for the public address broadcasting,
• Announcements : the objective is to have a set of sentences for eve1y announcement, in all the
network stations.
INPUT FUNCTIONS
This input information is usually applicable to every serviced station. lt comes from the forecasts of traffic
issued from the scheduling , stored in a data base and made available for use in Passenger information
systems. As much as possible, the amount of data to be stored in the Data Base must not be limited .
(':'\
FUNCTIONS OF DAILY MANAGEMENT OF THE CIRCULATIONS '<':;J
Req 53 The input data shall be available for the daily operation . lt shall be noted that such a system will run
without stopping all day long.
Req 54 The operator shall have at his disposal a list of the trains automatically planned for the display in the
next 24 hours, issued from the data base and updated in real time, as time goes on .
Req 55 The operator shall be able to modify the information presented according to the actual conditions of
circulation (delays, changes of track.). The main functions related to circulations shall be:
• The modification of a circulation (times, natures) or the train mission,
• The addition and the duplication of a circulation,
• The addition of a delay,
• The deletion of a circulation (the circulation is announced and is displayed as "cancelled"),
• The validation of a circulation for taking into account by the system, and the possibility to
withdraw it,
• The display of the circulation on a track,
• the erasing on a track,
• The recovery of a circulation in the data base.
.
'~
)
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-C 1 PAGE 32/73

0 FUNCTIONS OF DAILY MANAGEMENT OF THE ANNOUNCEMENTS
Req 56 For the public address system, the operator shall be able to manage the following different types of
announcements:
• Announcements of approach of the trains servicing the station,
• departures announcements,
• anivals announcements,
• disruption announcements : delay, cancellation, modification of track, traffic inte1ruptions.
• Safety announcements: e.g. train not stopping, platf01m berth, ...
• Announcements to the clients, about unexpected events and a change in circumstances.
These different types of announcements shall be defined as a sentence framework. The sentences shall
then be filled with the various pre-recorded variable elements. A preliminary recording of all the public
address elements is necessary therefore so that the system can be built.
f. .o.:. ., Req 57 The main functions available to the operator for the management of the public address
\. ;,"~---- ... announcements shall be:
• The selection and the broadcasting of any announcement. The system shall automatically
elaborate the announcement with the frameworks of sentences and the variable elements.
• The cancellation of an announcement in progress,
• The possibility to listen to an announcement before it is broadcast in a station,
• A function of recording shall be put at the disposal of operators.
Req 58 Announcement triggering shall be able to be automated:

• Approach announcements or departure "X" minutes before the entry in station or the departure of
the trains,
• Cyclic announcements to the clients.
7. 7. 3 INTERFACES
The Consortium shall refer to the PIS specifications document (HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-010) for description
of the system of display and public address in stations.
7.8 Rolling stock dispatcher
The Rolling Stock dispatcher shall manage the train movements between a depot and the line. He shall
launch the preparation of trains expected to be sent into operation and he shall also arrange for their
return from the main line to the depot.
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-C1 PAGE 33/73

7.9 Monitoring of facilities 0

7.9.1 MONITORING OF SAFETY-CRITICAL FACILITIES
The functioning status of all HHR safety-critical facilities shall be reported in real time to the CTC with
relevant warnings and alarms in case of malfunction . The Consortium shall define all associated
operations instructions and procedures to ensure the maintaining of HHR safety in any situation .
7.9.2 MONITORING OF ACCESS CONTROLS

The ECMS I SCADA operator monitors the detection of attempted access . Upon detection of an abnormal
movement, the operator is involved in a checking procedure.
The Consortium shall refer to and respect all requirements stated in the buildings security requirements
document (HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-012).
7.9.3 MONITORING OF STATION BUILDINGS
The Station Contractor (Phase 1 - Package 2) , shall be in charge of all the design monitoring and the
implementation of stations buildings facilities . ·.·.--~
However, the Consortium shall make arrangements with the Station Contractor for ensuring the reporting
of any necessary information to the OCC .
7. 9.4 MONITORING OF CCTV

The Consortium shall refer to and respect all monitoring requirements stated in the CCTV specifications
document (HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-009).
7.10 Abnormalities follow-up processing
IReq 59 The OCC shall record and follow-up all facility and rolling stock abnormalities.
7. 10. 1MANAGEMENT OF ROLLING STOCK ABNORMALITIES
The CTC staff shall be warned directly by drivers (through radio or telephone) of any malfunction
occurring on the rolling stock.
A dedicated hotline to RS staff shall be expected to centralize all rolling stock abnormalities and record
them onto a dedicated file available from supervision workstations . After recording, appropriate safety and
operating measures shall be taken , according to the default I malfunction characteristic .
7. 10.2 MANAGEMENT OF FACILITY ABNORMALITIES
The CTC staff shall be warned of a malfunction either from the facility management system (SCADA) or
directly by drivers or on-site staff.
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-00 1-C1 PAG E 34/73

HARAMAIN H IGH SPEED RAILWAY- TENDER DOCUMENTS- OCC SPECIFICATIONS
Req 60 The CTC systems shall be provided with rolling stock operating assistance functions , in order to get
information on kilometres covered by train sets during revenue and non-revenue service, and send it to the
rolling stock management staff.
. I
Ref: REF : HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-C1 PAGE 35/73

8. OCC ARCHITECTURE - BASIC DESIGN
The following diagram illustrates a typical architecture satisfying the above mentioned requirements.
Figure 1 : Functional diagram of a Centralized Comrol system
Vis ual Control Panel
Operators
r-:":\
'i:.;;::::;
Dispatchers
Servers
Front-end units
Control Centre
Remote Terminal
Units ( ...... )
Field
( ... )
CCTV Public address Depot
Line
Station

Functional ly, the structure of the network shall be a star formation meaning that all the remote spots i.e.
stations, shal l be linked to the relevant centres.
For the physical configuration, several considerations are to be taken into account to determine the type of
topology. The contractor shall determine the topology which optimizes cost and global availability of the
system .
.·.·.····-:
'.·..·
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-C 1 PAGE 37/73

HARAMAIN HIGH SPEED RAILWAY- TENDER DOCUMENTS - QCC SPECIFICATIONS
0
9. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
9.1 Physical architecture
Req 61 The architecture of a model OCC facility shall be based on modules as represented in the diagram
Figure 2 : example of physical architecture of the control centre . However, the Consortium can propose
another solution provided it meets the functional and technical requirements . The Consortium shall provide the
demonstration that his proposal shall be equivalent or better than the architecture shown here-below.
9.2 Implemented modules
The Control Centre system shall be fitted with :
• an «Application Manager » divided into several modules . Each module shall be a functional unit and
homogeneous equipment. This unit includes:
• The MMI (Man Machine Interface - MMI): it shall be the system controlling the Operator
Workstations dialogue , as well as alarm and image display,
• The SCM (Standardised Control Module): it ensures control management (e .g.: routes ,
safe working of trains) ,
• The SPM (Standardised Programming Module): it ensures the traffic programming
functions with respect to the scheduled time tables and effective train positions .
• The Train Describer Module : it provides train position information. it informs the station
operators by providing information on identification of operative and announced trains
and their respective position within the overall action region of the station .
• The SDM (Standard Display Module), which provides :
o Visual display on screens of the different signaling equipment indications (e .g.
signals , point switches, ... )
o Operator course of action in case of equipment failure .
• The SIM (Standardised Interface Module) ensures the acquisition of field equipment; it
shall also be called the "front-end module".
• The AUM (Alarm Unifying Module) in charge of centralisation , hierarchical organisation
and redirection of alarms to either operators or a surveillance centre, depending on their
nature.
• The Maintenance Module: it shall be in charge of monitoring the systems and sending
the necessary data and functions to the maintenance and Transport operators .
• A set of tools facilitating implementation and tests :

• The Parameterisation Software Package Module for signal boxes , allowing the
parameterisation of the modules of the Application Manager with respect to the site. The
parameterisation of the applications make the modules independent from the site ,
• The Environmental Simulation Tools: this toolbox validates the applications or
parameters and allows each system module to simulate its environment.
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -40 3- SYS-00 1-C 1 P AGE 38/73

HARAMAIN MIGH SPEED RAILWAY- TENDER DOCUMENTS- occ S~ECIFICATIONS
Display
VCP
lOperator room
SCM SPM DESCRIBER SVM SIM Maintenance

Alarms
_ _ _t~hnical room
Spare
1 Wayside Interlocking
~ ..i·
C!:-: ,:.;
Ill "
~- ill
r
03- SYS-001-C 1
Figure 2: example ofphysical archirecwre of the control centre
PAGE 39173
HARAMAIN HIGH SPEED RAILWAY - TENDER DOCUMENTS - OCC SPECIFICATIONS
9.3 Hardware Architecture
Req 62 As a general rule , the system provided shall be, as much as possible, made up of modules with
Ethernet types interfaces.
Req 63 In the Control centre, the system shal l have the structure of a local area network . lt shall be built
around an Ethernet network with optical fibre allowing the computerized equipment of the system to
communicate, even in a disturbed environment.
9.4 SCADA software components
The SCADA software components are :

• The operating systems,
• The application ,
• The protocols.
9.4. 1 OPERATING SYSTEM
Req 64 The operating system shall be one of the common contemporary desktop systems e.g. OS : Linux,
Microsoft Windows, Unix or Unix-like.
9.4. 2 OCC APPLICATION
IReq 65 The OCC application shall be as much as possible based on open standards.
9.4.3 SCAOA PROTOCOL$
Schematically, the SCADA system shall be made up of :

• A LAN which handles the central management ;
• The field equipment.
Each of them uses its own types of protocols.

In all cases, the design shall be conducted with the ability to use non proprietary solutions ..
9.4.4 CENTRAL LAN PROTOCOL$

SCADA systems are coming in line with standard networking technologies. Ethernet and TCP/IP based
protocols are replacing the older proprietary standards.
Req 66
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-00 1-C1 PAGE 40/73

0 Req 67
are:
The field protocol shall be chosen among the most widespread protocols in the SCADA systems. They
• Modbus,
• Profibus,
• IEC 60870-5-101 or 104, IEC 61850,
• IEC 870-5-101/104 ,
• RP-570,
• DNP 3.0 (serial and over IP).
Many of these protocols now contain extensions to operate over TCP/IP

Should the Consortium select another protocol, he shall demonstrate its non proprietary features and its
compliance to open standards.
9.5 Software requirements
Software may consist of system software and application software.

·::;.:::1
1..
~;::-
IReq 68 The application software package shall meet the functional requirements of the supply scope.
Req 69 The Consortium shall define and justify the software Safety Integrity Level (SIL) per subsystem in
accordance with the present document and with EN 50126 and EN50128 or similar or higher standards. The
SIL shall be reviewed and approved by the Engineer.
Req 70 The Consortium shall propose design and implement techniques or measures depending on the SIL.
These techniques or measures shall be based on EN50128 or similar or higher standard.
Req 71 The Consortium shall appoint an independent Assessor with appropriate skill and adequate authority to
perform software assessment, in conformity with item 14 of EN50128 or similar or higher standard.
Req 72 The Consortium shall take the necessary measures in order to ensure the integrity of software
executable code during transfer from one media to another.
Req 73 The Consortium shall provide a Software Configuration Management Plan. lt shall define in detail the
responsibilities and management procedures of the configuration articles for each reference configuration and
the items associated with the software product. Work Breakdown Structure shall be completed to a level
permitting control of the "elementary" components .
Req 74 The Consortium shall define the rules for coding software applications in order to ensure their quality.
Req 76 The Consortium shall adopt a regression testing procedure to be applied to all software
made during development and operation life of the system.
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-C1 PAGE41 /73

Req 77 The Consortium shall identify all test software and simulators used. Test software and simulators
should be developed to an appropriate Software Safety Integrity Level agreed with the Client's representative.
Req 78 The Consortium shall conduct static analysis to demonstrate that the defined products metrics have
been achieved .
Req 79 The Consortium shall conduct dynamic analysis to demonstrate that the defined level of test coverage
has been achieved.
Req 80 For proprietary software code the source shall be put into an escrow account at cost borne by the
Contractor.
Req 81 The Consortium shall submit to the Client an original copy of all software programs on a laptop or on ......
any other means.
Req 82 The Consortium shall submit to the Client two original copies of all the E-proms used in the system
attached with an updated E-prom writer tool to make the required copies.
y
Ref: REF : HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-00 1-C1 PAGE 42/73
10. MAN MACHINE INTERFACE PRINCIPLES
Req 83 The Man-Machine Interface shall be made up of three levels of view corresponding to various levels of
detail:
• 1st level: a general view of the line with the name of all the stations and signal boxes.
• 2nd level: it shows a map of the station or signal box with an icon for each equipment in a
position conesponding to its real physical place. Under the icon of each facility, the name is
displayed as well as its status, and its measurements; it may be the flow, the downtime, etc.
• 3rd level: while clicking the icon of an equipment, the accurate type of alarm, the possible
controls or the failure history are displayed.
Req 84 All the monitored equipment shall be visualized in station or signal boxes schematics by using the
notion of layers. Each layer corresponds to an equipment type or a set of equipment types (for instance an
escalator/lift layer or a camera layer).
These layers can be displayed or not by selecting/deselecting dedicated buttons in the screen. lt is possible
to display one or several layers at the same time on the schematic.
Req 85 For helping the operator, a global schematic shall be available with a global synthesis of the alarms by
equipment type.
The system may be composed of three global synthesis schematics:

• Building schematic: a synthesis for OCC , stations, signal boxes,
• Power system schematic: a synthesis for power facilities concerning the non power equipment (e .g.
CCTV, Access control, ... ).
• Line schematic.
(: ...
- Req 86 When an alarm occurs on at least one piece of equipment in a station or signal box, the corresponding
symbol shall be blinking in red to show where the alarm is.
The operator can select the alarm and call up the corresponding detailed schematic.
Req 87 A set of buttons (depending of the kind of mimic view: station, signal boxes , power feeder station , or
line) shall be displayed to allow the operator to display one or several layers.
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -40 3- SYS-001-C1

10.1 Remote-Controls and Remote Monitoring MMI
Req 88 Whatever its type , a control shall be sent in two steps :

• Preparation of the command,
• Confirmation.
Req 89 The traffic operator must have at least the following possibilities to send a control:
• With the mouse;
• With the keyboard.
10.2 Man Machine Interface physical components
The Man I machine interfaces (MMI) shall be designed according to the following guidelines;
Req 90 MMI shall be:

• User-friendly,
• easily understandable and usable by all (all texts , acronyms and help files in Arabic and in
English),
• compact, limited number of windows,
• straightforward ; the amount of data entry using the keyboard is minimal,
• efficient,
• provided with on-line assistance.
Req 91 The main Man Machine Interfaces shall be :

• The operator workstations,
• The Visual Control Panel.
10. 2. 1 WORKSTA TION
The main functions of each workstation are:

• Information display,
• Operator control acquisition .
For integration , supervision of the systems (ECMS, traffic management system) they shall have a common
Graphic User Interface (GUI) for greater optimisation and synergy of operators' resources , workstation
functions and console space.
10.2.2VtSUAL CONTROL PANEL
completely inactive. Its role is just to display and it does not include any

0
10.3 Centralised Control profiles
jReq 93 Each actor of the OCC shall be able to access the system under a specific profile.
Req 94 The various categories of profiles shall be at least the following ones:
• Traffic controller,
• HV Power supply controller
• Maintenance,
• Feedback analysis
• Training.
10. 3. 1 SYSTEM ACCESS MANAGEMENT
Req 95 The system shall contain for each possible profile , the list of the geographical areas managed by a list
~ ..:_ ·-·
of functional categories with their associated actions.
lt is possible , thus to describe easily, for example:

• A profile named "Signaling operator" which can control routes ,
• A profile named "Train Dispatcher operator" which can control a wide range of actions,
• Another one named "ECMS-SCADA operator" which can control fixed facilities
• Etc.
The flexibility of this mechanism shall make it possible to very easily personalize the management of the
users according to customer requirements.
Req 96 The various types of profile shall be at least:

• Control Centre manager,
• Traffic operator,
• HV Power supply operator,
• ECMS I SCADA supervisor,
• Passenger Information Service operator,
• Rolling stock dispatcher.
I~
jReq 97 Before commencing work on a workstation , operator identification to the system shall be required .
IReq 98 The operator shall log off to end a working session on a workstation.
10.4 Ergonom ic design I,
Req 99 The Consortium shall design OCC ergonomics in compliance with ISO 9241 aod ISO 11
Ref: REF : HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-C1 PAGE 45/73

Examples of visualisation angles
Ref: REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001 -C1 PAGE46/73

HARAMAIN HIGH SPEED RAILWAY- TENDER DOCUMENTS - OCC SPECIFICATIONS
11. BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
11.1 OCC location
Req 100 The main ace shall be located in the area of Jeddah Station. The back-up ace (BCG) shall be
located near the RS workshop (about Km 125).
Req 101 The Consortium shall provide a detailed description of the Control Centre premises , showing how they
address the daily operational needs.
11.2 OCC Organization
OCC Organ ization (rooms and facilities) shall depend on the activities and the relationship between
operational and maintenance staff, which shall be defined according to the performance and RAMS
requirements.
Req 102 The Consortium shall provide offices for the Saudi Rail Regulatory Commission, the Railway Police,
etc. to be defined (in terms of number, square meters and location inside the Building) with the Government.
Req 103 The Consortium shall provide an ergonomic study by detailing the activities and the working and
fun ctional relationships between operators. These studies shall lead to a rooms and premises organization
proposal .
N.B. The organisation of the operating rooms and premises shown below is indicative only.

D( Premises
Traffic
Training
Methods
,,...~-s Room
Office
. _,''
. . ,,.s+-)
..... .
~ "!'-
'[ § ~I CTC
'?ii' ~ l.:l~
l
\
o -·~
-"'
. \.9~ <:',s-
' '
........
Off- line data
Processing
Operation
Premises
~ , -- '
1 Visitors '
\ space /
- - -......·-' -- ,
Photocopy
space
CTC
Operating Operators
Legend Technicians Room
Office
~ Direct foncional relationship
0 Proximity foncional relationship

(=door)
Figure 3 : Example of control centre working spaces arrangement
' ·, REF: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001 -C 1 PAGE 48/73 : )

11.3 OCC Activities
jReq 104 The OCC shall be working 24 h per day, all year long.
11.4 OCC Layout
The Operation Control Centre (OCC) shall be the brain of the HHR line, from where the overall
supervi sion is done and all the commands are issued.
IReq 105 . The various working posts shall include but not be limited to:
• OCC manager
• Traffic operators
• HV Power Supply operators
• ECMS I SCADA supervisor
• Rolling stock dispatcher
• Security and Passenger Information System (PIS) operator.
The following indicative number of operating posts has been estimated from the experience of other
systems already operated .
Function Post number

OCC Supervisor 1
Traffic Operator 3
HV Power Supply Operator 2
Rolling stock dispatcher 1
SCADA supervisor 1
Security and PIS operator 1
Ref: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-C1 PAGE 49/73

Visual Control Panel
Power supply operators

Operation
Control
Center
.________.II.__ II._________. Traffic operators
ECMS Passenger
Rolling stock SCADA Information
operator operator operator
CTC
supervisor
----------------- Visitor Room and VIP gallery
Operation Offline data &

Technical room Archive room
manager room
Meeting & incident Staff space Peripheral rooms

room
Training and Other rooms

emergencyroom
Figure 4 : Example of OCC layout
Ref: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001 -C1 PAGE 50/73

11.5 OCC System Main Rooms Requirements
11.5. 1 C ENTRAL CONTROL TRAFFIC ROOM
Name Traffic Room

Room I Function Supervision and operation of lhe OCC system. Operation staff
permanently occupies the traffic room .
Dimensions OCC traffic and power supply room > 400 m 2
Connection to The Traffic and Power Supply room requires cable connectio ns under a
other rooms false floor to technical rooms (power and telecom). Redundant and
protected cable route to the technical rooms.
Walls The outer walls must be fire rated. Partition walls to the other rooms: fire
resistant. Walls to other offices must have at least an acoustical
attenuation factor of 40 dB (A).
Doors The doors from the operator's room to the outside must have a clear
passage of900mm x 21 00mm and mu st be fire rated according to the
national standards. For transportation of equipment, one door shall have
two wings (2 x 2 100mm x 900mm clear passage).
Access control by card readers.
Minimum height 3500 mm clear height + space for suspended ceiling I false floor.
of the room
Requirement Suspended ceiling depending on requirement of installation space for
cei ling/0 oar li ghting, fire detection, fire fighting and acoustical treatment. There shall
be fire sensors in the ceiling void.
Suspended ceiling should be also considered for air exhaust ventilation
ducts used for fire fighting gas exhau t.
A false floor is required which must have a minimum height of 150 mm
without being obstructed by pipes for water or heating. There shall be fire
sensors in the floor void.
Plaster or concrete surfaces including surfaces under false floor and
above the suspended ceiling shall be anti-dust protected (painted). An
anti-static carpet shall cover the floor.
The general live load for the false floor is 5 kNimZ, respectively 12 lcNi m2
at concentrated load areas.
The false floor design shall include the Mimic Panel requirements.
Lighting The traffic room is divided into working areas. Above each working area
the lighting level must be indi vidually adjustable via ditmner switches
from 300 t.o 500 lux . The lighting above the working places must be
homogeneous without reflections. Iri addition a general lighting is
required of which 50% are to be connected to the emergency power
supply.
Radio 100 % radio coverage inside the traffic room is requjred.
communication h'l-':~
~ '
t .I_, ' ~' ' .. '
Acoustic Ceiling, walls and floor must have an acoustical treatment. Re;l;il!irat~) ~'<.;
requirements time should exceed 0.5 seconds in wide frequ ency range. The (1«>simf'J '' ~
noise level shall not exceed 40 dB(A) +I- 3 dB(A). a"?.
/
I

0
Name Traffic Room
Environmental The traffic room requires air conditioning including air treatment. The
conditions air should have a humidity of approximately 40/60 % and an adjustable
temperature between 20 oc and 25 °C.
Fire protection Automatic fire and smoke detection system required.
Visitor gallery Ergonomically designed to offer the state-of-the-art viewing to VIP and
selected visitors without disturbing the OCC room staff.
11 . 5.2 EMERGENCY ROOM
Name Emergency Room (localization near OCC SYSTEM)

Room I Function Management of major incident by OCC system key staff and external
Authorities.
Dimensions A!Jproximately 60m2 (in accordance with equipments)
Interface to other Direct view to OCC system traffic room via windows . Direct access to
rooms the traffic room. Cable connection to technical rooms and traffic room.
Walls Exterior walls shall be fire rated. Partition walls to the other rooms :
fire resistant.
Doors Access control by card readers. Steel door and fire rated. Clear passage
900 mm x 2100 mm.
Minimum height of At least 2500 mm.
the room
Requirement Suspended acoustical ceiling panels.
ceiling/floor Suspended ceiling should be also considered for air exhaust ventilation
ducts used for fire fighting gas exhaust.
False floor of at least 150 mm height.
The general live load for the false floor is 5 kN/m 2 , respectively 12
l<N/m 2 at concentrated load areas.
Lighting Dimmer switch for regulating the light from 300 to 400 lux at 1m
above floor level.
Telecmmnunication All communication equipment: CCTV, SCADA, safety and security
and Radio systems, LAN, workstations, monitors, etc.
communication 100 % radio coverage inside the room is required.
Acoustical High standard acoustically treated ceiling and walls . Maximum noise
requirements level40 dB (A) .
Environmental The incident room requires air conditioning including air treatment.
conditions The air should have a humidity of approximately 40/60 % and an
~~ ~stable temperature between 20 oc and 25 oc.
Fire pro tt'C~n .;;. . ~.Jl...: . .~u~~atic fire and smoke detection system required.
'"' b
'~].' 'l~
,,...
~~ --
'" \... .,.\~
~
\?
\ ,, .J.,,b -
~ lj•. :''JfJ Pr o~
111
' Ways C
---...__..:__.
)
Ref: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-00 1-C1 PAGE 52/73
11 . 5. 3 OPERATION MANAGEMENT ROOM
Name Operation Management (localization near OCC system)

Room I Function Operation management functions: timetab les, statis6cs, etc.
Dimensions Approximately 40m2 (in accordance with equipment)
Interface to other Direct view to OCC system traffic room via windows. DiJ"ect access to the
rooms traffic room. Cable connection to technical rooms and traffic room.
Walls Exterior walls shall be fire rated. Partition walls to the other rooms: fire
resistant.
Doors Access control by card readers. Steel door and fire rated. Clear passage 900
mmx2100 mm.
the room
Requirement Suspended acoustical ceiling pan els.
1'"• • ' . '•' ceiling/floor Suspended ceiling should be also considered for air exhaust ventilation
ducts used for fire fighting gas exhaust.
Fal e floor of at least 150 mm height.
The general live load for the false floor is 5 kN/m2, respectively 12l<N/m 2
Lighting Dimmer switch for regulating the light from 300 to 400 lux at 1m above
floor level.
Telecommunication All communication equipment: telephone, safety and security systems,
and Radio LAN, workstations, monitors, etc.
communication 100 % radio coverage inside the room is required .
Acoustical High standard acoustically treated ceiling and walls. Maximum noise level
requirements 40 dB (A).
Environmental The room requires air conditioning including air treatment .The air shou ld
conditions have a humidity of approximately 40/60 % and an adjustable temp eratu re
between 20 °C and 25 °C.
Ref : HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001 -C1 PAGE 53173

HARAMAIN HIGH SPEED RAILWAY - T ENDER DOCUMENTS - OCC SPECIFICATIONS
11.5. 4 D RIVERS AND CONDUCTORS HOT LINE R OOM
Name Operation Management (localization nea r OCC system)

Room I Function Communications, assistance to the drivers, etc.
Dimensions Approximately 40 m2
Interface to other Direct view to OCC system tJ:affic room via windows. Direct access to the
rooms tTaffic room. Cable connection to techn ical rooms and traffic room.
Walls Exterior wall shall be fire rated. Partition wall to the other rooms: fire
res istant.
Doors Access control by card readers. Steel door and fire rated. Clear passage 900
mm x 2 100 mm.
the room
Requirement
ceiling/floor
Suspended acoustical ceiling pan els.
Suspended ceiling should be also considered for air exhaust ventilation
( ..
:.
duct used for fire fighting gas exbau l.

The general live load for the false floor is 5 kN/m 2 , respectively 12 kN/m 2
Lighting D immer switch for regulating the light from 300 to 400 lux at lm above
flo or level.
Telecommunication All communication equipment: telephone, safety and security systems,
and Radio LAN, workstations, monitors, etc.
communication 100 % radio coverage inside the room is required.
Acoustical High standard acoustically treated ceiling and walls. Maximum noise level
requirements 40 dB (A).
Environmental The room require air cond itioning including air treatment. The air should
conditions have a humidity of approximately 40/60% and an adjustable temperature
between 20 °C and 25 °C.
Fire protection Automatic fir e and smoke detection system required .
Ref: HHR- LO· CC -403· SYS-001-C1 P AGE 54/73

11 .5. 5 BACK-UP OCC- TRAINING ROOM
The back-up OCC training room shall be identical to main OCC traffic room, with no visitor gallery.
11 .5. 6 MEETING ROOM
Name Meeting Room

Room I Function Metro internal staffmeetings and with visitors.
Dimensions Approximately 50 m2 .
Interface to other rooms Close to the traffic room and to offices.
Walls Exterior walls shall be f1re rated. Partition walls to the other
rooms: fire resistant.
Doors Access control by card readers. Steel door and fire rated. Clear
passage 900 mm x 2100 mm.
Minimum height of the At lea t 2500 mm.
room
Requirement ceiling/floor Suspended acoustical cei ling panels.
Suspended ceiling should be also considered for air exhaust
ventilation ducts used for fire fighting gas exhaust.
The general live load for the false floor is 5 lcN/m 2 , respectively
12 lcN/m2 at concentrated load areas.
Lighting Dimmer switch for regulating the light from 300 to 400 lux at
lm above floor level.
Telecommunication and Telephones, LAN, projection equipment.
Radio cotmnunication 100 % radio coverage inside the room is required.
Acou tical requirements High standard acoustically treated ceiling and walls. Maximum
noise level 45 dB (A).
Environmental conditions The meeting room requires air conditioning including air
treatment. The air should have a humidity of approximately
40160 % and an adjustable temperature between 20 °C and 25
oc.

11 .5. 7 OFFICES
Name Offices
Room I Function Offices for staff: operation and maintenance staff, the SRRC,
Police, etc.
Dimensions Approximately 12m2 , 20m 2 for OCC system manager office.
For the other rooms, the number of square meters is to be
defined with the Government accord ing to its needs inside the
building.
Interface to other rooms By corridors.
Walls Exterior walls shall be fire rated. Pattition walls to the other
rooms: fire resistant. Windows to open within the exterior walls.
Doors All glass 60% sand blasted glazing. Hydraulic floor mounted
door closers ..
Minimum height of the At Least 2500 mm. 0
room
Requirement ceiling/floor Suspended acoustical ceiling panels.
Suspended ceiling should be also con idered for air exhaust
ventilation ducts used for fire fighting gas exhaust.
Acrylic, antistatic, heavy duty carpets.
L ighting Dimmer switch for regulating the light from 300 to 400 lux at
lm above floor level.
Te lecommunication and In accordance with the functions: minimum LAN, telephone .
Radio communication l 00 % rad io coverage inside the room is required.
Acoustical requirements High standard acoustically treated ceiling and walls. Maximum
noise level 45 dB (A).
Environmental conditions Offices require air conditioning including air treatment. The air
hould have a humidity of approximately 40/60 %and an
adjustable temperature between 20 °C and 25 °C.
Fire protection Automatic fire and smoke detection system requ ired.
Ref: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001 -C1 PAGE 56173

11 .5. 8 OCC T ECHNICAL ROOMS
Name Telecommunication room

Hous ing of all necessary electronic equipment, computers and
Room I Function transmission systems for signaling, power supply,
telecommunications, etc., required to operate the OCC system.
In accordance with equipment. Minimum 80 m 2 for
telecommunication room, 130m2 for signaling equipment room, 60
m 2 for environmental control system, 40 m2 for signaling and
Dimensions
telecom supervision room, 15 m2 for fire detection and
extinguishing sy tem. For future extensions an area of 30 % shall
be kept free of equipment.
By corridors. Cable connections between all technical rooms, to the
Interface to other rooms traffic room and the field, shall be halogen free, low make, fire
retardant.
Walls Fire rated. Fire res istant, anti dust protected, anti static.
Fire rated. Opening direction to the outside. Door dimensions clear
Doors passage 2x (21 00x900 mm) and 1 x 2100x900 mm. Access control
by card readers. Protection of the access.
Minimum height of the
At least 3000 mm (finish floor level).
room
In accordance with the equipment. False floor of 300 mm height.
Requirement
Suitable for computers rooms. The general live load for the false
ceiling/floor
floor is 5 kN/m 2 , respectively 12 kN/m 2 at concentrated load areas.
Lighting 400 lux at lm above floor level.
Telecommunication
Structured cabling for maintenance telephone.
and Radio
100 % radio coverage inside the room is required.
communicati on
Acoustical
65 dB
requirements
Environmental In accordance with equipment. Air treatment temperature 21 - 25
conditions °C, 40 - 60 % humidity. Ventilation, air filter.
Automatic fire smoke detection and fire fighting system are
Fire protection
required (gas system).

11 .5.9 UPS AND P OWER SUPPLY R OOM
Name UPS and power supply room.

Room I Function UPS equ ipment, power contro l, transforming ofvoltages,
distribution and monitoring of power to all OCC systems.
Dimensions In accordance with equipment. Minimum 80 m 2 For future
extensions an area of 30 % shall be kept free of equipment.
Interface to other rooms By corridors. Cable connection between all technical rooms, to
the traffic room and the field, shall be halogen free, low smoke,
Gre retardant.
Walls Fire rated . Fire resistant, anti dust protected.
Doors Fire rated. Opening directi on to the outside. Door dimensions
clear passage 2x (2100x900 mm) and 1 x 2100x900 mm . Access
conu·ol by card readers. P rotection of the access.
M inimum height of the At least 3000 mm (finish floor level). ....
•:.V'.'.'-
room
Requirement In accordance with the equipment. Fa lse floor of 300 rnm height.
ceiling/floor Anti dust protection under false floor. The general live load for
the false floor is 5 kN/mZ, respectively 12 kN/ m2 at concentrated
load areas. Heavy UPS equipment to be installed on upp01is on
the concrete floor.
Lighting 400 lux at l m above floor level.
Telecommunication and Structured cabling for maintenance telephone.
Radio communication 100 % radio coverage inside the room is required.
Acoustical requirements 70 dB (A).
Environmental In accordance with equipment. Air conditioning maximal 26°C,
conditions 40 - 60% humidity.
Fire protection Automatic fire smoke detection and fire fighting system are
Ref: HHR· LO· CC -403· SYS-001-C 1 PAGE 58/73

HARAMAIN H IGH SPEED RAILWAY- TENDER DOCUMENTS- OCC SPECIFICATIONS
11. 5.10 B ATTERY R OOM
Name Battery room

Room I Function Housing of battery cells for signaling, telecommunication
equipment as well as for power supp ly systems (emergency
lighting).
Dimensions In accordance with equipment. Minimum 50m2 For future
extensions an area of 30 % shaH be kept free of equipment.
Interface to other rooms Cables connection to the UPS and power distribution room.
Walls Fire rated. Fire resistant anti dust protected. Indoors anti acid
paint or ceramic tiles.
Doors Fire rated. Opening direction to the outside. Door dimensions
clear passage 2x (21 00x900 mm). Access control by card
readers. Protection of the access.
Minimum height of the At least 3000 mm (finish floor level).
room
Requirement ceiling/floor In accordance with the equipment. Floor anti acid protected,
ceramic tiles, floor load 10 kN/m2 , concentrated 20 l<N/m2 .
Lighting 300 lux at lm above floor level, illumination elements mu t
have explosive proof protection class.
Telecommunication and Structured cabling for maintenance telephone.
Radio communication 100 % radio coverage inside the room is required.
Enviromnental conditions In accordance with equipment. Air cooling maximal 26°C.
Continual mechanical ventilation to external atmosphere.
Fire protection Automatic fire smoke detection and fire fighting system are
11 . 5. 11 O THER ROOMS
The Consortium shall design all other rooms according to the Government requirements.

12. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
The performance of the system must enable the operators to operate the line under satisfactory
conditions . More precisely, the various types of targets are :
• Operational performances,
• System performances,
• Man-Machine Interface performances,
• RAMS requirements .
12.1 Operational Performances
12. 1. 1 RECOVERY FROM FAILURE
Req 106 Safety-related missions (e .g.: setting of an absolute stop signal to danger), interrupted (failure ,
for example) shall be available within 10 s maximum.
Req 107 For less critical functions (e.g. operation assistance functions), the mission shall be resumed
within 1 minute .
12.1.2 TRANSFER TIME
Req 108 The time required to transmit data between the supervised or controlled equipment and the
operator must be less than 2 (two) seconds whatever the circumstances .
12. 1.3 RE-INITIAL/SA TION
Req 109 In case of asserted fault, leading to the re-initialisation of the equipment, the restart delay for
the piece of equipment concerned shall not exceed 2 minutes.
12.1.4 SOFTWARE VERSION INSTALLATION
Req 110 Software version installation on a piece of equipment can be total or partial , depending on the
centralised configuration management and installation procedures preset on the maintenance station.
Installation procedures shall not impact the operations in case of failure and shall authorise regression to a
previous version .
'·
:/r.,/, j.J ~ ":.
-~~ f 0J8C ..::~
''/ <; Orgo"
~
Ref: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-00 1-C1 P AGE 60/73
12. 1. 5 SYSTEM FLEXIBILITY

The choices made and the principles implemented, both at the hardware and software levels, shall
allow the integration of a new module without having to modify the other operating modules . If it
complies with the defined communication interfaces, the new module shall use the utilities offered by
the different Control Centre modules, without modifying them.
However, the overall number of applications is limited to 20.
12.2 System Capacity
Req 113 All Control Centre system modules and elements shall be designed so that the system as a
Iwhole can manage and monitor:
• 2 first level operator workstations (OCC supervisor), each one fitted with four screens
max1mum,
• 6 second level operator workstations (Traffic operators), each one fitted with two screens
maxrmum,
• 4 HV power supply operator workstations, each one fitted with four screens maximum,
• the processing of 32,000 remote monitoring (RM) commands and 16,000 remote control
(RC) controls with an average of 4.5 status changes (RM) and 2.5 remote controls (RC) per
second, and, in peak periods, 2,000 status changes in 1Os.
• Storage of 16,000 items of signaling information from the trackside,
• 20 operating configurations,
• 64 remotely controlled signal boxes,
• 1,200 h·ain describer locators,
• 1,500 movements per day.
Req 114 The data relating to operation events shall be kept in the data base at least during 1 month . A
backup of these data shall then be done on CD, DVD or other equivalent durable storage means.
12.3 Processing Performance

,.,. ___ _ 12. 3. 1 CHRONOLOGIC ANALYSIS
Req 115 In order to analyze a sequence of events after they occur with an acceptable accuracy the
number of data samples must be sufficient. Therefore , every alarm or event is dated with a precision of
0,01s i.e. 10 (ten) ms (day and time: hours, minutes, seconds, tenths of second) by the RTU that receives
it from an equipment, or by the computer that generates it if no RTU is involved in this alarm or event. This
date is called the « origin » date of the alarm or event.
Each alarm or event potentially existing in the whole system is designed to be sent to the OCC.
12.3.2 SYSTEM SERVER SWITCHOVER TIME
'•
During this switchover time no information shall be lost.
- ./
Ref: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-C1 P AG E 61 /73

12.3.3 SYSTEM CAPACITY
Req 117 The processing power of the computers , workstations , remote terminal unit, and all the relevant
peripherals of the system should be designed to guarantee the OCC system shall cope with all situations
and allow the operator to manage all the events he is responsible for supervising.
In other words , it shall be able to deal with all the significant functional events to which the system is
likely to be subject. Transient occurrences which do not represent a relevant status modification such
as a relay bounce , are out of the scope of treatment.
Req 118 The system shall have automatic back-up and restoration facilities for archiving system data
and applications.
12.3.4 TRANSMISSION ERRORS
Req 119 The number of undetected errors shall not be greater than 1o· . This means that the rate of
6
wrong Remote Monitoring or Control recognized by the system as correct shall not be higher than 1o·H
12. 3. 5 EXPANOABILITY
Req 120 The size of the system must be sufficient to allow the addition of new equipment to be
supervised.
Req 121 lt shall be possible to extend the system (up to 50%) in the future to include more stations and
sub-systems without the need to replace equipment.
12.4 MMI Performance Requirements
12. 4. 1 DISPLAY SELECTION RESPONSE TIME
Req 122 The time from validation of the Display or list (alarm , events) selection by the operator to
completion of Display on the screen shall be Less than 2 seconds.
12.4. 2 OPERA TOR ENTRY RESPONSE TIME
Req 123 The time from an operator entry (using keyboard or pointing device) to its' display on the
screen (character echo or entry acknowledge) shall be less than 200 milliseconds.
12.4.3 CONFIGURATION OF AN OPERATING WORKSTATION
Req 124 The time from the completion of password entry (provided this password is accepted by the
system) to having the workstation fully operational shall be Less than 15 seconds .
Ref: HHR- LO- CC -40 3- SYS-00 1-C1 PAGE 62/73

A
....,:.-_-
13. RAMS REQUIREMENTS
13. 1. 1 RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY
The reliability of the control centre systems shall ensure that monitoring and control
functions do not contribute to operating delays to passenger services due to the loss of
safety-critical functions . The architecture of the OCC systems shall exploit the software
and hardware redundancy to achieve high operational reliability.
A reliability model for the OCC systems shall be developed and failure modes shall be
identified by FMECA (Failure Modes and Effect Criticality Analysis).
For safety-critical functions, the probability of failure occurrence shall be reduced to a level
D (or less) as specified in EN 50126 .
Safety-critical functions shall achieve a 99.99% availability rate, including communications

system failures . Non safety-critical functions shall achieve a 99.95% availability rate .
Req 126 In centralized operation mode, the installations shall be ineffective during less than a
cumulative total of four hours per year. This does not include a partial unavailability due to the failure
of local equipment.
Req 127 In the case of local and field operation mode, the OCC installations shall be ineffective during
a cumulative maximum of 13 (thirteen) hours over 3 (three) years .
13.1 .2 MAINTAINABILITY
The OCC systems maintainability design shall be consistent with the above availability
requirements. These systems shall include their own internal diagnostic and fault-finding
facilities. Rapid reloading of system functional software and data shall be possible in the
event of a failure causing software/data corruption.
Req 128 The Consortium shall demonstrate that equipment reliability is consistent with the required
system availability.
IReq 129 Any Local Replaceable Unit (LRU) shall"be replaceable in less than two (2) hours.
13. 1.3SAFETY
The Consortium shall give evidence that the OCC systems meet the
integrity level SIL 2.

14. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The Consortium shall refer to Section 7 of General Specifications document (HHR-LO-CT-602-

SYS-007) for design requirements.

HARAMAIN H IGH SPEED RAILWAY- TENDER DOCUMENTS - OCC SPECIFICATIONS
15. MANUFACTURING REQUIREMENTS
Req 130 The Consortium shall produce a report for each equipment that at least indicates:
• its mechanical characteristics,
• its electrical characteristics,
• its construction references,
• its quality certificate from the manufacturer, including proven references.

SYS-008) for additional manufacturing requirements.
·~· . .·

16. PROCUREMENT, CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

REQUIREMENTS
The Consortium shall refer to Section 8 and 10 of General Specifications document (HHR-LO-CT-
602-SYS-008 and 01 0) for procurement, construction and installation requirements.

17. SPECIFIC ENVIRONMENTAL CONSTRAINTS AND

REQUIREMENTS
The Consortium shall take into account all relevant data given in Section 6 and Appendix
8 of General Specifications documents (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-006 and HHR-LO-CT-602-
SAU-001 ), for design , building , maintenance and durability of OCC installations .
Req 131 The Consortium shall collect any missing and needed information regarding environmental
constraints necessary for design achievement.
.......
Ref: HHR· LO· CC ·403- SYS-001 -C1 PAGE 67/73

18. VERIFICATION, TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS
This section concerns the application to the OCC of Verification , Test and Acceptance (VTA)
requirements described in Section 11 of General Specifications documents (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-
011 ).
In addition to the following requirements , the Consortium shall also achieve any expectation of the
regulation authority which shall be required for commissioning authorization.
18.1 Acceptance principle
Any design review or inspection undertaken by the Government or its representatives shall not, in
any way, be considered as relieving the Consortium of any responsibility under this process .
However, the Government satisfaction will not be achieved without the provision of a proof of
safety .
The proof of safety shall be the collection of fully documented evidence that unequivocally shows
that everything, which has been provided under the terms of HHR signaling specifications , has
been done in accordance with the corresponding requirements .
In addition, a detailed procedure for all verification and tests shall be established by the
Consortium.
18.2 Certification
The system of certification shall subdivide the verification and testing activities into uniquely
verifiable and testable items . Since such detailed division can cause there to be a large number of
certificates, individual certificates may be grouped and summarized according to functional
components of each system. However, individual certification of each item shall be traceable.
The Consortium shall submit an example of each certificate together with a description of how the
certificate process will meet the verification and testing requirements.
18.3 Design verification
The design verification activities shall consist of checking all design details . The staff in charge of
this activity shall have no direct involvement in the design production. To achieve this level of
independence , the original producer shall not under any circumstances seek guidance from or
consult with the verification staff, even on matters of general principles .
All staff in charge of this activity shall have no direct involvement in the building installation activity.
Ref: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-00 1-C1 PAGE 68/73

All items shall be certified , and related certificates shall be approved.
18.5 Software configuration tests
Configuration tests sha ll give evidence that all parameter settings for OCC software meet the OCC
systems design and performance. These tests shall be performed before loading these settings
onto the on-site installations.
Appropriate certificates shall be established and approved.
18.6 Local OCC tests
Local OCC test performance first requires:
• approval of all verification certificates (see § 14.4) for OCC installations

• approval of the OCC software configuration tests certificate (see § 14.5)
•....-.· Local OCC tests shall be performed for each system, taken independently from the others. These
tests shall provide evidence that the OCC systems work correctly and safely, with their loaded
parameter settings.
Appropriate certificates shall be established and approved .
18.7 OCC integration tests
OCC integration tests for performance requires the prior approval of local tests for:
• OCC,
• signaling rooms (main line, depots and workshops),
• sub-stations,
• communications .
These tests shall give evidence of correct and safe functioning of the integrated system, with all
line equipments linked to the OCC.
Therefore, OCC integration tests shall include, but not be limited to :
• Correct and safe functioning of the automatic route setting (ARS) system, including stations,
• Correct and safe functioning of command and control of the line from the CTC,
• Correct and safe functioning of command and control of the line from the PSCC,
• Correct and safe functioning of all provided warning systems,
• Correct and safe functioning of integrated telesurveillance (CCTV) and monitoring systems,
• depots and
•
•
Appropriate certificates shall be established and approved.
Ref : HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-C1 PAGE 69 /73

Achievement of these tests shall ensure that the whole command and control system is fully
operational, both in normal and downgraded conditions.
Once these tests are achieved , command and control function s shall only be operated from the
OCC. Local command and control may only be provided to maintenance staff under OCC
authorization , or for downgraded operation modes.
18.8 Dynamic tests
Dynamic tests shall only be performed when there is evidence that the infrastructure is fully
operational (and therefore able to manage high speed circulations).
Tests for correct and safe functioning of transmissions between OCC and circulating rolling stock
with GSM-R, and of on-board cab systems shall be performed during this phase.
Appropriate certificates sha ll be established and approved.
18.9 Installations recoveries and modifications
If, for any reason, faci lity recoveries and modifications are to be performed during the verifica tion
and testing phases, then all related verifications, tests and associated certificates that have already
been approved shall be cancelled. Corresponding verifications and tests on the recovered or
modified facilities shall be re-performed .
Ref: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001 -C1 P AGE 70173

19. TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
Staff training on signaling and interlocking equipment maintenance shall comply with all training
requirements, as defined in Section 12 of General Specifi cations documents (HHR-LO-CT-602-
SYS-012).
Particular attention shall be paid to staff training towards safety use of all electrical and electronic
equipment, devices or tools.
Req 132 Once HHR operation is under OCC control, all training sessions shall be performed at the
back-up OCC .
.....
J-
Ref : HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-C1 PAGE 71173
HARAMAIN HIGH SPEED RAILWAY- TENDER DOCUM ENTS - OCC SPECIFICATIONS
20. DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
The following schemes and documents, related to OCC, shall be established.

The Consortium shall be aware that the following list is not exhaustive. Any additional
documentation considered as relevant for commissioning, operation and/or maintenance, shall be
provided.
20.1 Schemes and diagrams
• Diagram of OCC rooms organization ,

• Cabling diagrams of OCC rooms,
• Technical diagrams for OCC systems.
20.2 Technical documents
• Functional OCC program (including telesu rveillan ce (CCTV)),

• Technical documentation of all equipment.
20.3 Procedures and proofs
• Detailed verifica tions and test procedure, with all related certificates,
• Detailed proof of safety,
• Detailed proof of compliance with RAMS requirements ,
• Detailed proof of compliance with environmental constraints.
20.4 Operation and maintenance documents
• OCC maintenance program,

• Maintenance instructions for all equipment,
• Training program,
• Operation instructions (both in normal and downgraded modes).

21. TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS REQUIREMENTS
Sufficient spare part components shall be provided by the Consortium to ensure that system
availability can be maintained for a period of 12 years from the commissioning date for the whole of
the works. The spare part levels shall be specified in the Maintenance Plan.
The philosophy for repair and/or replacement of failed units shall be specified in the Maintenance
Plan, based on cost and reliability. The procurement options and delivery time for individual spare
parts shall be included in this Plan.
Procedures for testing spare parts (to ensure their operational condition) shall be included in the
Maintenance Plan. These spares shall include protective means for storing printed circu it cards that
are not in use .
.. .-.·.
·.·.·.-:·
END OF THE DOCUMENT
Ref: HHR- LO- CC -403- SYS-001-C1 PAGE 73/ 73

~::l::'~l .bgb.!¥1 Cic U::..ll ciw..w gbl

PHASE 2
HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
"/

A1 15/04/2009 First Issue M.A JOUX
A2 22/04/2009 First revision M.A JOUX

;' ....•.•.·,
..
· ;.:. A3 22/04/2009 Revision M.A JOUX
81 26/05/2009 Revision after the Government comments M.A JOUX
82 29/05/2009 Revision after final work shop M.A JOUX
C1 29/06/2009 Final RFP M.A JOUX
01 11/09/2009 Revision after Linklaters's comments M.A JOUX
E1 17/12/2011 Revision for Contract R J Adams
REVISION W: E1 NAME DATE SIGNATURE
PREPARED BY Gentinsa 16/1 2/201 1
17/12/201 1
CHECKED BY R Adams
17/12/20 11
VALIDATED BY R Adams
17/12/2011
APPROVED BY R Adams
Ref: HHR- LO- HV-403-I NE-001-E1 PAGE 2/44

HIGH VOLTAG E POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4. 1. 1 Subsystems ............................................. ......... ...... ... ... ............................................ .. ................... ........... .. 9

4. 1. 2 Overh ead Catenary System ........................ .... .. ......... .. .... .... .. .................................... .. ........ .. .... ...... .. ..... 9
4. 1. 3 feeder stations ................................................... ... ........ .......... .. ...... .. .............. ......... ...................... .......... I 0
4. 1.4 sectioning stations, Paralleling stations ............. ... .... .. ........ .. ... ......... ... .. ...................... ........... .......... ... 12
4. 1. 5 auxiliary equipment .................................................. .... ................. .......... .. ..... .... ...... ..... .. .... .... .. ........ .... .. 12
4. 1. 6 Equipotential Earthing System ...... ... ..... ... ..................................... ...... .. .................. .. ..... .. ..................... 12
4. 1. 7 SCADA .. .. ...................................................................... .. .. .. .... ... .. ......... ... .............................. ..... ........... .. 12
4. 1.8 Depots traction power supply feeding .... ..... ... ............................ ..................... .... ............ ......... ... ......... 12
6. 12. 1Main transformers . .... .. ..... .. .. ............ .. ............. .. ............ ............ ............... .. .. ... .. .............. .......... ..... ..... .... 19
6.12.2Circuit breakers ......... ........... ........... ........... .. ......... .. ... .. .... .. .. ..... ..... ............ .. ................ ........................... 20
6.12.3Auxiliary Supplies .. ....... .... ... .... ... .... ... ....... .. .... ... .... ...................... ... ........ ... ... ....... .... ...... .. ...... ... .. .. ........... 21
6.12.4Filters and Phase balancer .. ... .... .. ... ....... .. ........ ..... ..................... .. ..... ..... .... .... ......... .. ......... .. ................. 21
6.12.5Autotransformer system .............................. ....... .. ...... .. .................... ..................... ...... .......... ......... ... ... .. 21
6.12. 6Battery and battery charging equipments ....................... .. .... .... ........ .... .............. ... ..... ................ ..... .... 21
6. 13. 1Grounding and Bounding ....................................................... .......................... ... .. ....... ... .... ....... . .......... 22
6.13.21nterlocks ............................................. .......... ............ .... ................ ......................... ... ..... ... .... .. .... ....... ...... 24
6. 13. 3Return circuit .................... .... ..... ... .. ....................................... ... ......... ..... ....... ........... .. ... .... .... .. .... .. ... ..... ... 24
6.13.4Signal Compatibility .................... ... ......... .. ... ... .... ...... .. .... ... .. ............. .. .. ... ......... .. ........ .. ....... .... .... .. ......... 24
6. 13.5Fire Detection/fighting .. ....... ...... ...... ..... .... ...... ... ............. .... ....... .. ... .. ... ...... ...... ... .. .... ..... ....... ................... 24
6.13. 6Safe Working Instructions ................. .. .................. ..... .. ........ .. ...... ............................. ..... ......... ... .. ... ....... 24
6.13. ?Safety warning ................................ .. ............... ... ............ ...... .. ... ...... .. .... .......... ........... ......... .. ............ .. .... 24
6. 14. 1 Control Room Equipment................... ... .. .. ............... .. ... .............. ................. ......... ..... ............ ... ..... ....... . 25
6.14.2Equipment Design .. .. .... ... ..... ...... .... ..... .. ... .. ... ................ .. ... ... .... ..... ... ..... ...... ........................... .... ... ... .. .... 25
6.14.30utstation Equipment ............................... .... ....... .... .... ..... ... ...... .... ..... ... ........ ..... .... .............................. .. 26
6.14.4System Control and Indication ........... .. ............................... .. ...... .. ... .. .... ................ ........ ......... ... ....... ... 26
6.14.5SCADA Control Rooms .. ....... .... ........................ ......... ............... .. .. ......................... ...... ... ...... ... .. ... ........ . 26
6.14.6Depotlworkshop Control Room .... ................ .......... .. .. ..... .. ................ ... .......... .. .. ............ ................ ... .... 27
8. 1. 1 feeder station platforms ............ ...................... ................. .. ... ............ .. ..... ...... .. .. ...... ............... ................ 30
8.1.2 room separation .. ....... .... ........... .. ... ... ... ..................... .. ......................... ....... ... .. .......... ................. .... ........ 30
8. 1. 3 Ventilation and air conditioning ......... .. ............... ........................ ........... .. ..... ............... .... ...................... 30
8.1.4 telephone .................................................................. ...... .. .. .... ...... ..... ....... .. .... ........ ... .... ......... .. ................ 30
8.1 .5 Sealing for sand, water and wind ...... .. .. .. .. .. .... ............. .. ..... ..... ................. ... .. ... ............... .. ................... 30
Ref: HHR- LO-HV-403-INE-001-E1 PAGE 3/44

PROJECT REFERENCES
REF N° REF ID NUMBER REF DESCRIPTION

1 HHR - LO - CA - 403 - INE -001 Overhead Catenary System
2 HHR - LO - CC - 403 - SYS - 001 OCC Specifications
3 HHR - LO - TE - 403 - SYS - 001 T elecom specifications
4 HHR - LO - SY - 301 - INE - 001 System Schematic
5 HHR - LO - HV - 301 - INE - 001 Preliminary study of power supply
6 HHR - LO - CT - 602 - SYS - 002 General Specifications : section 2

Glossary
Verification Test and Acceptance (VTA)
Traininq requirements
9 - SEC dossier for the modification of the_grid
10 - List of Saudi companies agreed for working on
SEC network
··:·.··
Ref: HHR- LO- HV-403-INE-001-E1 PAGE 4/44

1. GLOSSARY
The Consortium shall refer to the General Glossary, defined in Section 2 of General Specifications
(HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-002).
However, following specific abbreviations shall be used:
V, kV Volt, kilovolt
A, kA Ampere, kilo ampere
MW Megawatt
MVA Megavolt ampere
SP Post Sectioning and paralleling post with autotransformers
P Post Paralleling post with autotransformer
SEC Saudi Electricity Company 0
FIET Fixed Installations for Electric Traction
TU Twin Units (two trains)
su Single Unit (one train)
RTU Remote Terminal Units
SCADA Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition

2. STANDARDS AND REFERENCE
The following rules, E.O.S (equivalent or superior), concerning power supply system design,
works, operations and maintenance shall be respected. Any incompliance shall be notified and
written by the Consortium to Government, and shall only be allowed with Government written
agreement.
Current version at call for tender date shall be used.
The Consortium shall respect the Saudi Arabian Grid Code.
The following TSI for high speed railway system, equivalent or superior, shall be respected .
.( :•.
.._... ~;
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability - Control and command Subsystem ERTMS
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability - Rolling stock Subsystem
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability - Infrastructure Subsystem
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability - Operation Subsystem
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability- Maintenance Subsystem
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability - Energy Subsystem
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability - Safety in railway tunnels
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability- Persons with reduced mobility
2.2 ERTMS Specifications
The System Requirement Specifications (SRS) for ERTMS shall be version 2.3.0d.
2.3 European CENELEC standards
CEN ELEC standards, equivalent or superior, shall be respected.
2.4 International Electro technical Commission standards
Internationa l Electra technical Commission {IEC) standards, equivalent or superior, shall be respected .
Ref: HHR- LO-HV-403-I NE-001 -E1 PAGE 6/44

3. SCOPE OF WORK
This document is part of the Performance Specification for Phase 2 regarding the Main Line Power
Supply System of HHR.
lt aims at describing its basic design as well as its requirements and interfaces , which shall be
respected by the Consortium , according to Government general requirements for the Railway.
Unless specifically excluded in these requirements , the Consortium shall provide everything
necessary, whether specifically mentioned or not, to ensure the successful implementation , safe
and proper operation of the main line power supply system .
Scope of work fo r this system includes :
• Design, manufacture , supply, erection , testing and commissioning of all Power Supply System
equipments, including coupling with the SEC to the OCS system equipments , Section and
Parallel Stations , Local Control Facilities and Remote Terminal Units {RTU) .
• All necessary facilities , including supporting steelwork , busbars , insulators , earthing
equipment, bushings , cable boxes , relays , batteries , battery chargers, protective equipment,
panels and facilities.
• Components of electrical equipment at feeder stations , sectioning stations , paralleling stations
necessary to interconnect different sections of OCS.
• Design , manufacture, supply, erection , testing and commissioning of the SCADA system and
all its associated ancillary equipments for the electric control of the HHR.
• Supervisory control interface panels and RTU 's at each distant area indicate and monitor all
the HHR functions required by SCADA.
• SCADA equipment for Local Control Facilities , Feeder Stations , Sectioning Stations and
Paralleling Stations , Control and Data Acquisition boxes (on main line and depots)
• Related furniture for OCC (on main line and depots/workshop)
• Power Supply System room buildings
• Testing and commissioning
• Recommended periodic tests and controls
• The provision of detailed operation and maintenance proceedings and manuals, together with
a maintenance control system for all supplied facilities as provided in this Contract
• Associated spare parts and special consumables
• Technical documentation , all necessary drawings and instruction/installations manuals to

provide a complete record of the installed system
.J
However, following points shall not be included in this High Voltage power supply specifications :
• OCC design and building (HHR - LO - CC- 403- SYS - 001)

• The Communications system including all data lines connections (compatible with the SCADA
system), between Central, Local and all RTU locations (HHR - LO - TE - 403 - SYS - 001 ).
• The SCADA equipment for the Operation Control Center. (HHR - LO - CC - 403 - SYS -
001)
• Grid connection works in charge of the Consortium under SEC supervision.
• Power supply of other loads than PSS and traction
Electromagnetic compatibility shall be considered as an interface between Overhead Catenaries

system (OCS), Communication, Signaling and Power supply systems.
More generally, the Consortium shall correctly interface all equipment and installations with other
HHR facilities and infrastructure in order to meet HHR performance and operations requirements .
d-

4. BASIC DESIGN
The following chapter explains main PSS requirements and gives some sizing example.
The Consortium shall design all the necessary equipments according to standards and TSI.
4.1 Electrification System on Main Line
4. 1. 1 SUBSYSTEMS
The main line electrification power supply includes a number of subsystems comprising at least:
.. . )
;
• Overhead Catenary System '·..
• Feeder Stations
• Sectioning Stations and Paralleling Stations
• Auxiliary equipments (Local Point Heating and back up signaling power supply)
• Earthing system and equipotential bonding system
• SCADA
The PSS shall be supplied by 2x25kV AC , 60 Hz and shall be designed for train speeds up to
320km/h.
4 . 1. 2 O VERHEAD CATENARY SYSTEM
The Overhead catenary consists of catenaries , contact and auxiliary wires, electrification masts,
their foundations, fixings to viadu cts, tunnels or other adjacent structures, support and registrations,
small parts steelwork, fittings, droppers, jumpers, insulators, isolators, switches , pulleys, and
weights.
The OCS shall hang over the track with the purpose of supplying traction power collection to the
pantographs of the Train sets.
Ref: HHR- LO- HV-403- INE-001-E1 PAGE 9/44

4.1.3 FEEDER STATIONS
Req 01
• Each Feeder Station for the Main Line tracks shall be supplied by two independent incoming
power supplies from Saudi Electricity Company (SEC) to ensure a feeding reliability. Each
incoming power supply works with nominal three-phase system at 380kV, 60 Hz and
each incoming current circuit shall be able to carry the total traction load of involved supply
point. The consortium shall prove feasibility of incoming currents in respect of the Grid Code.
J-
Ref: HHR- LO- HV-403- INE-001 -E1 PAGE 10/44

Each Feeder Station shall supply the OCS and the negative feeders from a Grid level voltage/50kV
centre tapped (to ground and rail) transformer at the nominal system voltage of 25kV, 60 Hz to
earth.
One feeder shall be connected to the Overhead Catenary System for pantograph pick-up while the
other is connected to negative feeder along track.
In the indicative preliminary study Schematic System (HHR-LO-SY-301 -I NE-001 ), six feeder
stations have been set up along the line as follows:
• Feeder Station no1 Pk 35+200
• Feeder Station no 2 Pk 94+ 150
• Feeder Station no 3 Pk 180+200
Their locations are indicative and the Consortium shall specify their precise position in order
achieve performance requirements and expected RAMS levels.
SEC proposal as regards the protections has to be agreed with Phase 2 contractor.
P2 Contractor's Bushing CT parameters to match GIS CT parameters supplied by SEC. All
relevant protection schemes to be fully coordinated between both parties .
As requested, SEC have already been provided with a sample list of typical signals . All SOE
(Sequence of Events) signals exchanged between HHR feeder stations and SEC stations for the
SAS (Substation Automation System) to meet IEC 61850.
As requested, SEC have already been provided with estimates of floor plan distribution and
composition of cabinets for protection and power supply to be installed at their facilities. All
cabinets to comply with SEC standards.
SEC are using their current vendor protection equipment data to calculate AC/DC load and
heat dissipation figures as per the estimates supplied .
Where HHR feeder stations are not eo-located with SEC stations (namely HHR-1 and HHR-
6), P2 Contractor and SEC must coordinate and manage the overall design/build of power lines
linking both positions in order to meet the performance specifications without any impact on cost.

4.1.4 SECTIONING STATIONS, PARALLELING STATIONS
Sectioning Stations or Posts are located between Feeder Stations and are equipped to switch
power around Neutral Sections under contingency operating conditions such as emergency or
maintenance requirements
Paralleling Stations with Auto transformers are located between Feeder Stations and Sectioning
Stations as indicated in preliminary study of power supply (HHR-LO-HV-301-INE-001 ).
The autotransformers are connected across the negative along track feeder and the OCS
equipment. The centre tap of the autotransformer is connected to the traction return ground circuit.
Therefore, the voltage between OCS and negative along-track feeder shall be 50kV, 60Hz.
4.1.5 AUXILIARYEQUIPMENT
For low voltage power supply, auxiliary transformers shall be installed in feeder stations.
(See Low Voltage Power Supply specifications: HHR-LO-LV-403-INE-001).

-
···~·- · ·.·
In case of turnouts heating and for back up signaling power supply, auxiliary transformers could be
installed along the track on dedicated shield and be connected to 25 kV feeder wire .
4.1 .6 EQUIPOTENTIAL EARTHING SYSTEM
The design of OCS and PSS and its various return current paths shall ensure the safety of both
passengers and railway staff under normal operating and failure conditions . This insurance shall be
given also for all inductive current due to catenaries and traction power supply.
4.1.7 SCADA
The Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system controls and monitors the remote
operation of circuit breakers , switches .. . associated with Electrification System. This is achieved by
supervisory control facilities located in various Control Rooms , Local Control Facilities and Remote
Terminal Units in Electrification System building. The Data Transmission System provides
connections (compatible with SCADA system) between the Control Rooms and Local Control
Facilities and all Remote Terminal Units locations.
(.
4.1.8 DEPOTS TRACTION POWER SUPPLY FEEDING
Depots are supplied from two independent electrical sources, either both from SEC or one from
Main line traction power circuit and one from SEC. Consortium 's design should limit number of
SEC connections and length of transmission line extensions to the minimum while meeting
requirements of this document.
Ref: HHR- LO-HV-403-INE-001-E1 P AGE 12144

5. GENERAL OPERATION REQUIREMENT
The electrification system shall be designed, manufactured, supply, erected, tested and
commissioned in accordance with best industry practice.
The electrification system shall be designed using standardized components suitable for high
speed railway. Wherever possible, these components shall be readily available throughout the
world.
Req 02 The following general requirements, which have been set by Government, shall be
respected
• The System shall be designed for a 320 km/h speed.
• Trains shall be running normally on the right side, but circulations on the opposite side shall be
possible with the same performance and safety level.
• Proven technology shall only be used.
Ref: HHR- LO-HV-403- INE-001-E1 PAGE 13/44

6. FUN CTIONAL AND TECHNI CAL REQUIREMENTS
6.1 Functional requirements
The Power Supply System shall supply 2x25kV AC, 60Hz traction power and shall be designed for
train speeds up to 320km/h.
Req 03 The PSS for the shall supply at least the following traffics
• The following table gives the different running with the number of train per hour and direction
(t/h/d). Crosses represent the different stop for each running.
• For running A, B, D and E, trains are 400 m long (TU) .
• For running C, train are 200 m long (SU)
• Dimensioning expected traffic is :
Running/Stations MAKKAH JEDDAH Central KAlA KAEC MADINAH

A (3 t/h/d) X X X X X
B (4 t/h/d) X X
c (2 t/h/d) X X X
D (3 t/h/d) X X X
E (3 t/h/d) X X
• This traffic is not a commercial traffic. it is a "dimensioning" traffic devoted to size fixed
facilities for electrical traction . Moreover, passenger cars shall be considered as full (W4
conditions)
• The PSS shall be able to supply also perturbed traffic. A traffic perturbation consists in having
five consecutives trains in one direction with the minimum headway and a normal traffic above
in the opposite direction . In this case , unbalanced voltage rate at the Grid connection point
shall be respected and voltage profile along the track shall respect standards .
• The Consortium shall provide the Electrification System for the HHR to ensure:
- achievement of a minimum headway, reliability and performance Government requirements
according to proposed PSS
- keeping a minimum headway for maximum trainsets, their frequency and defined
requirements for simultaneous accelerations during 6 hours minimum .
The Consortium shall meet the intent of these Technical Requi rements but is free to propose
alternative designs while meeting all performance criteria .
Ref: HHR- LO- HV-403-INE-001-E1 PAGE 14 /44

6.2 Feeders and sectioning Stations
Each Feeder Station shall feed electrical power to a Sectioning Station situated about halfway
between adjacent Feeder Stations.
Req 04 The Sectioning Station shall enable the OCS to be electrically sectioned and paralleled in
order to allow controlling through remote switchgear.
A bus-section coupler shall be included at each Sectioning Station to permit emergency feeding in
the event of the total loss of supply at a Feeder Station .
Further OCS sectioning and paralleling may be provided through Sectioning Stations located
between the Feeder Station and the midpoint Sectioning Station .
The Consortium shall provide size and shape details of the necessary ground as well as the layout
of the main facilities components .
The Consortium shall specify technical description of each type of Feeder Paralleling and
Sectioning Stations.
Req 05 When a single circuit outage occurs at a Feeder Station , the 25kV supply to the OCS
shall be maintained by closing the bus-section coupler. This condition shall not adversely
affect the trainset performance and the system shall be capable of operating the required
number of trains without reduction of speed , service , frequency, or changes to the
environment of the passengers during initial and ultimate operations.
Req 06 When a complete Feeder Station outage occurs , the 25kV supply to the OCS shall be
maintained by opening the bus-section coupler at the lost Feeder Station and closing the
coupler at the adjacent Sectioning Stations.
The Consortium shall specify for each PSS installations:
• The complete electrical design .

• The complete civil engineering requirements , including all services and access facilities .
Warning signs and intrusion prevention measures shall be installed at Feeder Stations adjacent to
public rights of way.
!Req 07 The Consortium shall arrange a permanent connection to the SEC at each supply point.
The Consortium shall provide all the necessary documentation , including design calculations and
drawings to SEC for approval. ·
6.3 Incoming Power Supply
)
PAGE 15/44
Req 09 Each main power transformer shall be capable of being supplied, from any incoming
power supply, through an appropriate arrangement of switches which shall allow
maintenance to be undertaken on one transformer without disturbing main line
operations.
Each incoming power supply shall be protected by a suitable located circuit breaker.
Any disconnecting or switching on the incoming power supply shall be appropriately interlocked
with the incoming circuit breakers to ensure the safety of staff and equipment under all types of
circuit configurations.
The Consortium shall describe in detail the interconnecting of the supply transformers to SEC
network together with the achievable interlocking arrangements.
SRO has agreed Interface Point with SEC at the 380 kV Transformer pushings . SEC shall provide
all 380 kV cables and equipment. The 380 kV terminations/connections will be connected by
consortium . The consortium shall supply all appropriate 380 kV bushing connectors and also shall
interface with SEC regarding CTs or any other requirements on the LV side. The maintenance of
the transformer shall be under the scope of the consortium.
Four Feeders 380/33 kV three phase supply from the SEC 380/33kV transformers shall be
available from the SEC switchboard in the SEC switchyard in each feeder station.
6.4 Outgoing power supply
Each transformer will feed power to its associated 25kV bus bar.
Req 10 The two bus bars shall be capable of being electrically connected together by operating
of a remotely controlled bus-section coupler to allow each transformer to supply the OCS
in both directions .
Supplies shall be connected from 25kV bus bar to the OCS through circuit breakers. Separate
supplies shall be provided for the OCS associated with each HHR track in each direction .
Supplies to any auxiliary feeder conductor used in conjunction with autotransformers shall be
achieved through circuit breakers .
Sufficient switching shall be provided to enable the switchgear feeding the OCS to be maintained
while the system is operating. Switchgear shall be appropriately interlocked with associated circuit
breakers to ensure the safety of staff and equipment for all possible circuit configurations.
6.5 Power to Yards, Workshops and Sidings
Req 11 Two independent incoming power supplies shall be provided in different Depots for the
Traction Power related system.
6.6 Voltage
Ref: HHR- LO-HV-403-INE-001-E1 I?AGE 16/44

The Consortium shall demonstrate the reliability and availability of each Feeder Station as part of
the RAMS study.
Req 12 Each Feeder, Sectioning and Paralleling Station shall be designed to have sufficient
electrical capacity to satisfy both the peak electrical load and the trainset performance
requirements .
Req 13 All equipment and apparatus shall be designed such that proper access shall be provided
for maintenance purposes.
The maximum and minimum OCS voltage shall be determined by SEC supply conditions and the
Consortium's design of the electrification system .
Req 14 The voltages shall be such that the trainset shall perform in a safe and satisfactory
manner over the entire SEC supply voltage range expected at each feeding station for
any loading condition .
The Consortium shall coordinate with SEC and shall be fully aware of the SEC conditions, which
shall be fully incorporated in the Consortium's design.
The incoming and outgoing power supply at the Feeder Station shall be protected by adequately
rated switchgear that can be remotely controlled via the SCADA System from Operation Control
Center.
Provision shall be made so, that the equipment associated with one incoming power supply can
undergo maintenance while the second feed continues to provide power.
The limits on permitted voltage fluctuations of the HV supply shall be in accordance with SEC
regulations. Facilities shall be provided for the control of system voltage to accommodate changes
in the supply system voltage HV .
The Consortium shall detail the design features specific to surge voltage conditions.
6. 7 Relay Protection
A protection scheme shall be provided to give rapid failure clearance to the affected section only,
but prevent supplying disconnection on healthy sections of the equipment. The Consortium shall
detail its protection scheme.
Req 15 The Consortium shall design the protection system for PPS equipment to ensure
• Adequate co-ordination with SEC equipement,
• Satisfaction with SEC requirements,
• Adequate protection for HHR equipement,
• Adequate discrimination between load and fault conditions

Each circuit breaker shall be automatically controlled by the main and back up protection to ensure
that any failure on the system shall be rapidly cleared and neither present a safety hazard to staff
or passengers nor deal to an equipment damage . Protection against very high impedance failures
or sustained heavy overloads shall be provided by thermal over current relays .
The Consortium shall design protection and interlocking arrangements for the main incoming
feeders of SEC. These designs shall be coordinated with and approved by the SEC.
All relays , contactors , links, fuses and test terminals shall be readily accessible so that routine
examination , maintenance and testing may be carried out without necessity of removing bolted
panels . Where protective relays are mounted on swing panel, these shall not be used as a mean of
access to links , fuses or test terminals .
6.8 Short circuits
The system may experience many short circuits due to its exposure and relatively small electrical
clearances.
Req 16 All equipment shall be suitably protected through circuit breakers and protection relays
and be capable of withstanding the effects of these short circuits without detriment to its
service life .
6.9 Grid Code
Req 17 The Consortium shall provide calculations and evidence to demonstrate compliance with
following requirements
• The power factor of the HHR shall be greater than the limit fixed by SEC for all normal
operation conditions.
• The Consortium shall respect the maximum total harmonic distortion limits permitted by SEC.
• The unbalance voltage due to the HHR at the point of common coupling with SEC shall be
less than the limit fixed by SEC.
6.10 Metering
Metering, for billing purposes, shall take place at the incoming feeder switch associated with the
Power Supply transformer.
IReq 18 Metering shall comply with SEC requirements.
The Consortium shall supply meters at the Feeder Stations .
6.11 Grounding and Return Current Bus Bar
Req 19 The Feeder Station shall be provided with a grounding mat to meet r
herein . A return current bus bar shall be provided at each Feeder
connect.
Ref: HHR- LO-HV-40 3-INE-001-E1

• Return current from the running rails ,

• Switchgear ground bar,
• Primary of each voltage and auxiliary transformer,
• Any return conductors being nominally at ground potential and/or ground wires (aerial and
buried) being part of the OCS ,
• Return current conductors to the main Feeder Station ground ,
• Trunking system, cable shielding clamps and all other metallic parts which normally do not
carry current in an equipment installation .
The return current bus bar shall be provided with a sufficient width and length cover to
accommodate warning labels indicating conditions of connection removal. The cover shall be fitted
in such a way that connections cannot be removed without removing the cover.
The bus bar shall have a continuous current rating equal or superior to bus bars of associated
switchgear. it shall be capable of carrying the maximum system short circuit current without
damaging itself or any of the associated connections.
it shall be possible to remove or replace any connection to the bus bar without disturbing any other
connection .
nV
In outdoor facilities the bus bar shall be accommodated with in the switchgear enclosure . In indoor
facilities the bus bar shall be accommodated within the building.
The ground connection to Power Supply transformer winding and all additional exposed metalwork
within Feeder Station compound shall be connected to Grounding mat. Return currents to the
transformers through Ground shall be minimized .
Links shall be provided to enable safety checks to be made on the Grounding system .
The Consortium shall provide details of Grounding of the compound fence .
6.12 Equipment
All necessary wiring connections between different sections of equipment shall be achieved
through suitably placed terminal blocks. All internal equipment wiring shall be connected to one
side of the block and all outgoing wiring to the other.
6. 12. 1MAIN TRANSFORMERS.

Each transformer shall be designed to supply the total load imposed on each section by the peak
electrical load and trainset performance requirement.
Req 20 The transformer shall be equipped with on-load voltage regulator in accordance with the
voltage fluctuation of the Grid ..
Req 21 The transformers shall have design life of 50 years with low maintenance requirements
and low losses and quiet operation.
eq 22 The transformers shall be designed to accommodate frequent short circuits.
The transformers shall be designed to supply 50% of the nominal load during 15 minutes
and 100% during 5 minutes .

The Consortium shall declare the technical specifications and a full technical description of the
transformers to be offered , including:
• Method of cooling ,
• Transformers losses ,
• Local protection of the transformers,
• Full details of the dielectric fluid ,
• Maximum temperature rise of transformers under continuous load ,
• Maximum anticipated temperature rise in service ,
• Details of transformer tap changers,
• Continuous short term rating ,
• Terminating method for High Voltage/Low Voltage connections ,
• Impulse withstand voltage ,

,_ ~ . --
;--'-.:..:·: ~
....._...
• Leakage reactance ,
• Maintenance requirements ,
6. 12. 2CIRCUIT BREAKERS

The ci rcuit breaker shall be adequately designed to break any leading reactive current taken by the
system.
Req 24 All circuit breakers shall be designed to clear, in the minimum possible time, any failures
likely to occur on the Electrification Systems.
The circuit breakers controlling the 2x25kV network shall be auto-reclosing with an operating
sequence submitted by the Consortium to Government's review . The operating sequence shall be
adjustable.
The circuit breakers controlling the HV network shall be auto-reclosing with an operating sequence
submitted by the Consortium to Government's and SEC's review . The operating sequence shall be
adjustable.
Each circuit breaker shall be controllable from OCC and the position of circuit breaker contacts
shall be displayed in OCC.
The Consortium shall provide a technical description of the proposed circuit breaker. The
Consortium shall provide documentary evidence of the suitability of the proposed design for use on
traction systems.
The Consortium shall detail interlocking arrangements for the circuit breakers .
Ref: HHR- LO-HV-403-INE-001-E1 P AGE 20/44

6 . 12.3AUXILIARY SUPPLIES
Two suitably rate transformers shall be supplied at the Feeder Station for auxiliary equipment and
emergency signal power. A suitable single pole switch and fuse unit shall protected each auxiliary
supply transformer.
Req 25 Sufficient auxiliary equipment shall be provided for

• The local and remote control of the Feeder Station,
• The local monitoring of the Feeder Station status,
• The safety and protection of people and equipment in the event of any failure within the
Electrification System or on the OCS,
• The supply of power to the uninterruptible power supply of the SCADA system,
• Monitoring the operation of the Feeder Station and its remote control system in the event of
loss of the auxiliary electrical supply,
0
• The provision of an emergency supply for the signaling system . V
6 . 12.4FIL TERS AND PHASE BALANCER
The Consortium shall provide an outline technical specification , a complete technical description
and any equipment that may be necessary to satisfy the requirements of SEC and Government.
Req 26 Suitable space shall be reserved for future addition of potential equipment components
required for further operation.
6.12.5AUTOTRANSFORMER SYSTEM
The Consortium shall provide a complete technical description of the proposed autotransformer in
accordance with the requirements. The Consortium shall provide details of circuit and switching
arrangements required for an auto transformer system .
6 . 12. 6BA TTERY AND BATTERY CHARGING EQUIPMENTS
Req 27 Battery and battery charging equipment shall be provided in ancillary equipment building
to provide direct current voltage for the operation of switch gear, protection equipment,
relays and the SCADA system .
The Consortium shall provide a full technical description . of its proposals for the provision of
batteries and the proposed battery charging arrangements .

6. 13. 1GROUNDING AND BOUNDING
Req 28 Grounding and Bonding provisions shall be in accordance with Applicable Laws and
Standards.
The Consortium shall be responsible for the general design of the Grounding and Bonding of the
HHR. The Consortium shall undertake the detailed design of Main Lin e and Depot Electrification
System and Core System Grounding and Bonding requirements.
The Consortium shall supply and install Grounding and Bonding systems as shown in Table 1.
Table 1: Responsibility matrix chart for

Grounding, Bonding and corrosion control systems
•.: ....
.,
TERRITORY OR DISCIPLINE WORK ITEMS CIVIL WORKS TRACK- CORE
STATIONS DEPOTS
MAIN LINE WORK SYSTEMS
A. DESIGN
1. D ETAIL DES IGN FOR GROUNDING AND
0 0 H
BONDING SYSTEM, MAIN LINE
2. DETAIL DE SIGN FOR CORROSION CONTROL H 0
SYSTEM, MAIN LINE (2)
3. DETAIL DESIGN FOR GROUNDING BONDING
1-1 0
AND CORROSION CONTROL SYSTEMS, 0 0
(3)
STATIONS
4. DETAIL DESIGN FOR GROUNDING A ND
BONDING SYSTEM, DEPOTS (TRACTION 0 0 H
POWER RELATED ITEMS)
5. DETAIL DESIGN FOR GROUNDING, BONDING
AND CORROSION CONTROL SYSTEMS, H 0
0
DEPOTS (GENERAL POWER SUPPLY & (4)
BUILDINGS)
6. D ETAIL DESIGN FOR GROUNDING O F CORE
0 0 0 0 H
SYSTEMS.
B. SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION
1. PROVISIONS OF EXPOSED, NON-EMBEDDED
GROUNDING & BONDING SYSTEM FOR THE
SAFETY O F ELECTRICAL SHOCK A ND T HE 0 0 H
REQU IREMENTS OF TRACTION POWER
SYSTEM.
2. WELDED CONNECTION TO DEDICATED
REBARS AND CONDUCTORS IN PILECAP,
COLUMN , V IADUCT, T UNNEL LINING A ND
H 0 0
FEEDER AND SECTIONING STATIONS, AND
PROVISIONS OF EMB EDDED ITEMS
INCLUDING GROUNDING MATS .
3. PROVISIONS OF CATHODIC PROTECTION
SYST E M FORTHEB U~ ED STR UCTURESOF H 0
MAIN LIN E.
4. PROVISIONS OF EARTH ROD OR EARTH GRID
H 0
UNDER GROUND LEV EL FOR MAIN LINE.
5. EXOTHERMIC W ELDS TO RAILS FOR ALL
0 H
BONDS
6. PROVISIONS OF GROUNDING, BONDING AND
£2:' '
H
CORROSION CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR 0 s-~ 0
~·""-· ~
(3)
STATIONS
'~-~~ .~''
~\.~~
7. PROVISIONS OF EXPOSED, NON-EMBEDDED '
GROUNDING & BONDING SYSTEM FOR T HE
ff '""
~0.9j> ~
I
I~·
RELATED AREA OF FEEDER STATIONS &
TRACTION POWER W ITH IN DEPOTS. ,;~I
\_,_. lP
(>)
0
·u\
'-J t--.::.1 '- {:
f:.
~- 0 ~.~ I;·
,.. o:>o ~' ··~ .
~'/· r ~
Ref: HHR- LO- HV-403- INE-001 -E1 0/) I jf ~~ , 2/44
- --
TE RR ITORY OR DISCIPLINE WORK ITEMS CIVIL WORKS TRACK- CORE

STATIONS DEPOTS
8. PROVISIONS OF GROUNDING & BONDING

SYSTEM FOR THE RELATED AREA OF
GENERAL E&M SERVICES WITH DEPOTS AND H
0 0
EMBEDDED ITEMS FOR THE FEEDER (4)
STATIONS AND TRACTION POWER
INCLUDING GROUNDING MAT.
9. PROV ISION S OF CATHODIC SYSTEM FOR
H 0
BURIED STRUCTURES W ITHIN DEPOTS
10. GROUNDING FOR CORE SYSTEM TECHNICAL
0 0 0 0 H
SYSTEM
NOTES:
(1) SYMBOLS DENOTE: H : BEING RESPONSIBLE FOR THE WORK ITEM

0: INVOLVED I INFORMATION I INPUT DESIGN DATA
(2) THE DETAIL DESIGN WORK OF THE CORROSION CONTROL PROVISIONS MAY BE ASSIGNED TO A
SPECIALTY CONSULTANT FOR THE WHOLE SYSTEM OR ASSIGNED TO THE VARIOUS CIVIL
CONSORTIUMS.
(3) STATION DEPARTMENT IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SYSTEM INTEGRATION AND PROVIDING SYSTEM
INTERFACE (CONNECTION POINTS) FOR OTHERS .
(4) DEPOT DEPARMENT IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SYSTEM INTEGRATION AND PROVIDING SYSTEM
INTERFACE FOR OTHERS .
The Consortium shall determine and record ground strength values necessary to provide a safe,
durable and economic Grounding and Bonding system .
[Req 29 All exposed metalwork shall be bonded as necessary to ensure staff safety
The Consortium shall be responsible for :
• All requirements for electrical Bonding of the reinforcing bars associated with bridges, viaducts
or tunnels to the traction return ground circuit,
• All ducting requirements for carrying cross bonding connections in depots or workshop areas,
stations areas, tunnels, or viaducts .
The consortium shall liaise with Government to ensure that these requirements are specified within
the required schedule time .
All conductors , including bonds, shall be with sufficient section to carry the anticipated traction
current under normal load or any envisaged fault condition.
These conductors shall be of adequate mechanical strength.
Bonds which are considered critical within the traction return ground circuit shall be duplicated and
clearly identified as distinct from other bonds. (For example, the return current connection from the
running rails to the return current bus bar).
All joints between conductors, bonds , and steelworks shall be capable of carrying the anticipated
current for the Design Life of the equipment without any deficient quality of the joints .
}- Grounding points for OCS insulating, when necessary, shall be provided throughout the system at
intervals to be defined by the Consortium . These intervals shall avoid dangerous potentials to be
~ uced in insulated and grounded equipment.
~ ~, ble, readable , and permanent identification labels shall be provided on structures fitted with
~ ding points .
•\ ll"i; osed metalwork in a Feeder or Sectioning Station complex shall be bonded together and to
: ; ·t ble ground electrode to ensure the safety of staff carrying out their normal duties , and the
) e . I public under both operating and failure conditions .
,. . - .' : /,
~~~t...~
1!'(~...
... :.......... ., ()
Ref: HHR- LO-HV-403-INE-001 -E1 PAGE 23144
6 . 13. 2/NTERLOCKS
Req 30 All appropriate equipment shall be fully interlocked to ensure equipment protection and
staff safety.
Interlocks shall enable maintenance staff to fit padlocks in order to lock in isolated/earthed position .
6.13.3RETURN CIRCUIT
Req 31 The traction return ground circuit of the railway shall be designed in a safe and proper
way using best industry practice.
·::;:o-- 6.13.4SIGNAL COMPATIBILITY
Req 32 The electrification system and the traction/auxiliary circuits of trainset shall not produce
interference in the signaling system under normal load or any credible failure condition.
6. 13. 5FIRE DETECTION/FIGHTING
Req 33 The design of all the electrification system equipment shall minimize fire effect and
spread .
6.13.6SAFE WORKING INSTRUCTIONS
The Consortium shall submit to Government a set of written instructions describing the detailed
procedures for safe working practice within the Feeder, Paralleling and Sectioning Stations. As a
minimum the following shall be included :
• Communication with the various control centers (HHR and SEC)

• Authority to isolate and ground the Electrification System equipment
• Permission to work on grounded Electrification System equipment
• Permission to test Electrification System equipment
• Removal of ground connections and restoration of equipment for service.
6. 13. 7 SAFETY WARNING

Safety signs shall be displayed in prominent positions on equipment and
viewing by staff and the general public. They shall be provided for Govern
installation and shall comply with a Relevant Standard.

6.14 SCADA
6. 14. 1 CONTROL ROOM EQUIPMENT
The equipment shall control , by manual selection, the plant within a number of remote outstations
from the OCC where provision shall be made to display real time outstation plant status. In
addition, alarms shall be given in the event of unsolicited changes of status plant or equipment.
6. 14.2EQU/PMENT D ESIGN
The SCADA equipment design provided shall :
• Permit complete control of the Electrification System

• Indicate unambiguously the position of every controllable switch on the system
• Indicate the value of pre-determined analogue quantities
• Provide an alarm condition if some preset value is exceeded
• Provide an alarm condition if a circuit breaker is automatically operated due to a fault
• Indicate geographically the electrical condition (energized , isolated or grounded) of the
Electrification System.
The system design shall enable the Power Supply Controller at the OCC to carry out the necessary
switching operation for :
• Emergency isolations
• Planned engineering isolations
• Rearrangement of the supply feeding connections in the event of plant or OCS fa il ure.
The equ ipment shall be capable of functioning correctly in the vicinity of the railway track where it
will be subjected to vibrations and local atmospheric conditions. Particular attention shall be paid to
the ambient temperatures and humidity conditions, to vibration caused by passing trains , to nearby
electrical equipment, and to the loca l use of portable radio transmitter/receiver equipment.

6. 14. 30UTSTA TION EQUIPMENT
The equipment housed within the outstation shall be capable of receiving and transmitting data from
and to the Control Rooms and initiating appropriate actions for outstation operations.
Outstation equipment shall be capable of functioning correctly, preferably without supplementary
services, over the ambient temperature range and local environmental conditions. Where
supplementary services are essential, they shall be declared and described by the Consortium in
the appropriate design submission.
• The Consortium shall provide details of its outstation equipment, including the following as
minimum:
• The necessary indication and alarm inputs to provide full control of the Electrification System
• Number and type of analogue inputs to provide all the necessary information on system
performance
• Number and designation outputs to control the required items of plant at each outstation site
'•"•'·.
.V.•.•.·.··· • Details of a relay or other suitable device that shall be installed in each outstation cubicle to
··~·.;.-.·.
simulate a controllable device (Dummy Circuit Breaker) in order to test control and indication
facilities without operating a device in service
• The number and locations of operational devices that shall be controlled (and indications and
alarms gathered) from remote items of plant via telephone pairs
• Details of test outstation that shall be provided and installed at the appropriate Control Rooms
and shall be used as a maintenance, diagnostic, and training aid .
6 . 14.4SYSTEM CONTROL AND INDICATION
The system of control shall satisfy the requirements below and the Consortium shall provide
system details, define and illustrate the control sequence through suitable fl ow charts :
• it shall be possible to open or close any controlled device and to be informed of the operation
achievement at the control center
• The supervisory control system shall not cause any device to change position unless the
operator first selects the appropriate device and th en completes the operation sequence
through operate function
• Operating any device from the control center shall be forbidden until the device has been
proven to be correctly selected . This shall occur through a check back signal derived from a
nearest possible point to the controlled plant. Operation shall be forbidden on the detection of
"select relay" welded contacts
• it shall be possible to send signal either open or close without taking into account of the device
position
• it shall be possible to repeat an opening operation on any device without the intervention of a
closing operation and vice versa.
6.14.5SCADA CONTROL ROOMS
Local Control Facilities shall be required at passenger stations,

Stations, and Paralleling Stations, and in some Signaling Rooms
indication capabilities as required.

6 . 14. 60EPOT!WORKSHOP CONTROL ROOM
A Depot/workshop Control Room shall be devoted to control the traction power supply to the
Depot/workshop. This Control Room shall share facilities with local traffic control within the
Depot/workshop or sidings.
Ref : HHR- LO- HV-403- INE-001 -E1 PAGE 27/44

7. INTERFACES
7.1 General
The Consortium shall be responsible for ensuring a clear identification and consideration of all
interface requirements.
The Consortium shall also be responsible for the running, securing and termination of wires and
cables to any other equipment or systems which interface to the Power Supply System.
The Power Supply System shall be fully compatible with all provided systems facilities considered
as part of the overall project.
7.2 HHR Civil works
The Consortium shall be responsible for all gauge requirements and interfaces with the Route Civil
Works.
The Consortium sha ll also be responsible for PSS platforms construction and accesses except any
contrary decision of Government to entrust the Route Civil Works contractor to do it.
7.3 HHR Track work
Rail bond shall be installed as required for return current and shall be durable and able to withstand
vibration and severe environmental conditions .
Track connections shall respect requirements for both passengers and staff safety.
7.4 HHR OCS
The Consortium shall provide all necessary material including the terminations to interconnect
OCS , Feeder and Sectioning Stations. Tracks are connected to Feeder Stations , Sectioning and
Paralleling Stations .
The Consortium shall be responsible for setting up end connections including high voltage supply,
running rails and ground wires, return conductors and auxiliary feeders.
7.5 HHR Signaling
The Consortium shall provide , in accordance with Signaling rooms design, all the Local Control
Facilities boxes for SCADA of PSS .
The Consortium shall provide, in accordance with signaling , detail and location of connection to the
earthing system. Earthing system shall comply with signaling one.
The cross Bonding between the two rails of the track shall be
system.
The Consortium shall provide standby power supplies derived fro
the Signaling system and Telecommunication system of the HHR.
7.6 HHR Communications
Ref : HHR- LO- HV-403- INE-001 -E1 PAGE 28/44

PSS shall use the Telecommunications system for all data and signal transmissions between its
equipments and OCC . Therefore, the communications system shall provide sufficient capacities
and RAMS specifications in order not to affect the operationa l requirements for the PSS system .
7.7 HHR OCC
The SCADA System controls and monitors the remote operation of circuit breakers and switches
associated with the Electrification System. This is achieved by supervisory control facilities located
in various Control Rooms and Local Control Facilities and Remote Terminal Units in Electrification
System Building. The Consortium shall define interfaces between OCC and PSS.
7.8 HHR Rolling Stock

In case of trainset operating with regenerative braking, the energy produced shall be used by other
trains on the system whenever possible .
7.9 Saudi Electricity Company

The Consortium is also in charge of the needed modifications of the grid under SEC supervision.
He shall define and shall assume all the interfaces between HHR and SEC network according to
the grid code.
Ref: HHR- LO-HV-403- INE-001-E1 PAGE 29/44

8. BUILDING REQUIREMENT
All feeder station shall respect the following characteristics.
8.1 Feeder station building design
8.1.1 FEEDER STATION PLATFORMS
lReq 34 Feeder stations shall be located on platforms near tracks.

These platforms shall be built by th e Consortium, excepted contrary decision from Government.
Feeder stations area shall respect electrical gauge requirements.
8. 1.2 ROOM SEPARATION
Req 35 All feeder stations shall be built on the same design, which consists in 3 separated rooms
• The power supply room heart containing SCADA facilities and equipment,
• A telecommunications room,
• An energy supply room including batteries and electrical boxes, separated from the others, for
fire protection reasons.
• Staff room
8. 1.3 VENT/LA TION AND AIR CONDITIONING
Req 36 All feeder stations room s shall be equipped with controlled systems to regul ate the air
temperature.
The Consortium shall submit specifications for ventilation or air conditioning achievement.
8. 1.4 TELEPHONE
All feeder stations buildings shall be equipped with at least two telephones :
• one for connection to the Centralized Traffic Control

• one for connection to the Power Supply Centralized Control (PSCC)
8. 1.5 S EALING FOR SAND, WATER AND WIND
Climatic and environmental conditions impact the building construction

prescriptions.
Ref : HHR· LO- HV-403-INE-001-E 1

Req 37 Feeder stations buildings shall be sealed for sand, water and wind, to protect electrical
equipments.
Ways in and out for staff may involve sand penetration . If so, the use of airlocks shall be required.
The Consortium shall submit details about sealing achievement.
8.2 Access to feeder stations and prevention of trespassing
Particular attention shall be paid to building access.
Req 38 The line-dedicated area shall be protected with fences, only to be crossed by locked
portals, and access to feeder stations rooms shall be secured with access control.
In order to avoid trespassing, all buildings shall be equipped with an OCC monitored access control
system.
The Consortium shall submit details on the way of achievement of these building and access
prescriptions.
8.3 Equipment and building grounding
All electrical equipments in feeder stations rooms shall be connected to earth .

Moreover, buildings shall also be connected to the ground . To avoid step voltage situations, the
same grounding point shall be used for the whole building .
The Consortium shall submit details about grounding and step voltage prevention.
8.4 Power supply
All feeder stations rooms shall be supplied with electricity from two feeder station auxiliary
transformers or network derivation (SEC).
• Electric supply failures
Req 39 In case of electricity supply incident, the feeder station room shall work constantly in a
normal way. The Consortium shall be· responsible for the design of batteries to respect
RAMS requirement. At least an eight-hour autonomy power supply with batteries is
required .
The Consortium shall submit details regarding batteries characteristics (e .g. capacity, loading and
_____
u'-'
nloading time).
Ref: HHR- LO-HV-403-INE-001-E1 P AGE 31/44

8.5 Fire detection system
All feeder stations rooms shall be equipped with a fire detection system related to OCC and with
one fire extinguisher per room.
8.6 Frost detection
A frost detection system may be necessary, according to their location and local temperature
conditions. This system should be located outside the fe eder station room .
The Consortium shall lead relevant studies to determine the necessity of frost detection.
r····:· . .
d-
Ref : HHR- LO- HV-403- INE-001-E1 PAGE 32/44

9. RAM S
The Power Supply System shall fulfil! and comply with following performance requirement.
9.1 Reliability
Power Supply System reliability is the most important factor. Therefore it should be the highest
possible .
System 's Reliability consists in maintaining normal power supply even in case of loss of a GRID
source or a switch bay (transformer with switch and bus bar).
Power Supply System failures , which could degrade operating, may occur but only exceptionally.
9.2 Availability
Req 40 Power Supply System Availability, globally considered , should be at least equal to D=99 ,
95% .
Each part of the PSS should have properly a very high level of availability in order to achieve its
aim of reliability and safety.
Failure of one of its main facilities , after an accident or a wrong operation , shouldn 't lead to the
failure of the whole PSS for a long time. PSS failure shouldn 't last longer than the necessary
switching time through remote control.
Loss of one of the Grid sources or one of the electrical rows shouldn 't lead to a long perturbation of
the OCS power supply. Perturbation should be limited to the necessary switching time through
remote control.
9.3 Maintainability
The consortium shall draw up maintenance requirement and prove that they are sufficient to
achieve PSS reliability and availability.
Design, manufacturing and installation of PSS should be studied aiming at a minimal maintenance
while operating .
Maintenance operations shouldn 't disturb the run of the main line nor lead to use , eventually to
acquire specific tools .
Preventive Maintenance operations on facilities should not affect availability of this equipment .
9.4 Safety
Req 41 Power Supply System should be designed to:

• Minimize the risks regarding people and goods safety.
• Fulfil! a total safety for the staff and the equipment, during operating and maintenance.
e risks due to a wrong operation from the maintenance staff.
PAGE 33/44
0
10. DESIGN REQUIREMENT
The Consortium shall be responsible for choosing and using standards to design PSS with the aim
of being in compliance with performances and requirement as specified in the Performance
Specification .
PSS installations and equipments shall be conformed to following standards , requirements and
directives :
CEI, ISO, EN, UIC, ITU-T ...
Other directives or code of organizations , administrations or companies with which interfaces would
be necessary shall be implemented .
The consortium shall be responsible for engineering , procurement, construction, testing, and
\-·..:. -- ~
commissioning of the electrical system.
--~--
Req 42 The consortium shall provide the electrification system for the HHR to ensure .
• That the maximum trainset can run at the maximum frequency
• Safety of electrical system, including but not limited to, earthing and bonding, interlocks,
lightning protection, return circuit, step and touch potentials, signal compatibility, clearance of
leaving equipment parts, fire detection a fighting, safe working instructions, safety warning,
erection of safety screens, safety of passengers and staff, etc.
• That the system and its components comply with environmental conditions, including but not
limited to, lightning strikes , temperature, humidity, pollution , wind , rain , sand , dust, solar
radiation , which may occur along the railway.
• That the electromagnetic design of the Electrification System for HHR shall minimize electrical
interference with all other electrical networks, systems or equipment within the railway
Influence Zone, without compromising a safe and normal operation of such networks, systems
and equipment.
Power Supply System shall be designed in order to comply with performances and requirement as
specified in the Performance Specification.
Ref: HHR- LO- HV-403-INE-001-E1

10.1 Power supply study
The Consortium shall carry out a complete 60Hz power system study for each supply point and for
each electrical section of the OCS .
Req 43 The Consortium shall submit a fully documented report to demonstrate

• The offered design will meet all the requirements of the Contract
• The specified current ratings for each Feeder and Sectioning Station are adequate
• The Trainset performance requirements are satisfied under all vehicle loadings
• The voltage regulation requirements of the OCS are achievable
• The permitted conductor temperature rises of the OCS are satisfied
• The power factor and negative phase sequence requirements are satisfied
• The unbalance requirements are satisfied
• The electrical safety requirements of this document are satisfied under normal load and all
credible fault conditions. These include voltages on the traction return ground circuits and
induced voltages of pipelines and cables within the Zone of Influence of the HHR
• The fault current magnitude will be sufficient to operate the system protection under normal
end emergency feeding arrangements. The fault current magnitude as a function of distance
along the OCS shall be declared for each electrical section
• The loss of any one incoming feeder will not affect the operational performance of the HHR.
Any effect on system unbalance shall be highlighted by the Consortium together with any
other adverse influence on the electrical behavior of the SEC network .
The Consortium shall include in its report the chronology of load current for each electrical section
of the OCS , the energy consumption for each trainset, and the total power supplied by each Feeder
Station in the worst case operating conditions, including emergency.
The Consortium shall estimate the total harmonic distortion at supply points for operating
conditions and shall declare the anticipated worst case harmonic distortion likely to be encountered
during service operation.
The Consortium shall define detailed methods to apply for controlling the potentials developed in
the traction return ground circuit of the HHR and provide sufficient detailed calculations to justify
the system design of the route sections on long viaducts , long tunnels , grades and stations .
The Consortium shall calculate the maximum rail potentials developed by a single trainset
operating at peak power, together with worst case voltages developed for both failures on the
trainset and/or insulator flashover.

10.2 System study at Harmonics Frequencies
Req 44 The Consortium shall submit a fully documented report to demonstrate that
• Fully harmonic distortion limits shall be satisfied
• The ratings of any filters , if proved to be required, shall be adequate
• The phosphor metrically weighted voltage induced within any adjacent telecommunication
circuit shall remain within the limits as defined in the Contract.
The Consortium shall define the HHR Influence Zone as a function of geographic position .
The Consortium shall advise which cables and piping within the HHR Influence Zone shall require
additional Grounding , Bonding, screening or sectioning. The Consortium shall be responsible for it.
r ·-<:-· The Consortium shall define the worst cases of phosphor metric current and confirm that each
delivered trainset phosphor metric current is no higher than defined .
The Consortium shall leave at disposal necessary representatives to attend meetings with the
different service provider companies to explain its detailed system design proposals and to justify
any design modifications required for the equipment.
10.3 Demonstration of system design
Req 45 The Consortium shall provide sufficient detailed calculations to demonstrate that the
proposed system design shall satisfy required trainset performances, safety
requirements , and shall minimize electrical interferences with any adjacent signaling or
communication circuits.
10.4 Electromagnetic design
The Consortium shall provide detailed calculations to justify the electromagnetic system design on
viaduct, tunnel and grades for both complete load and failure conditions.
The Consortium shall estimate the longitudinal phosphor metrically weighted voltage in station
developed by a single trainset operating in its most electrically noisy mode for the above
referenced failure condition locations , with any anticipated system resonances being taken into
consideration. The phosphor metric weighting shall be in accordance with CCITT
recommendations. The phosphor metric current produced by a trainset operating at different power
levels shall be defined by the Consortium .

()
Power Supply System shall be manufactured in accordance with best industry practice.
Components shall be readily available throughout the world wherever possible. Specific to the HHR
items shall be brought to the attention of Government.
Req 46 The Consortium shall produce for all equipment setting up a documentation summarizing
at least:
• Mechanical characteristics
• Electrical characteristics
• Construction references
• Quality certificate delivered by the manufacturer and including proven technology reference
r.::"\
C;)
. )
Ref: HHR- LO- HV-403- INE-001-E 1 PAGE 37/44

12. PROCUREMENT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

REQUIREMENTS
Req 47 The consortium shall insure, through its own or manufacturer's quality control, appliance
of the equipment with above defined characteristic documentation .
Req 48 The consortium shall also insure that transportation, storage and handling shall not affect
equipment characteristics.
.·.·.·: Req 49 The consortium shall insure that installation complies with rule book, standards and
references including TSI.
Req 50 The progressive on-site acceptance of subsystems shall give insurance that all these
requirements have been achieved before testing and commissioning .
Particular attention shall be brought to construction phasing in order to respect integrity of each
subsystem while installed.
The consortium shall submit an installation method statem ent and a list of installation inspections to
be performed for all installations.
The method statement shall include a proposed method of recording installation criteria towards
approved design in order to check As-built detail and quality control of the installation works .
I.
Ref: HHR- LO- HV-403- INE-001 -E1 PAGE 3 8/44


REQUIREMENTS
The Consortium shall take into account all relevant data given in Section 6 and Appendix B of
General Specifications documents (H HR-LO-CT -602-SYS-006 and HHR-LO-CT -602-SAU-001 ), for
design, building, maintenance and durability of PSS installations.
IReq 51 The consortium shall collect any missing information needed for a complete design.
13.2 Protection of line insta llations to solar radiations
Req 52 For all installations which can be exposed to sun light, specific arrangements shall be
taken by the Consortium to ensure correct protection towards solar radiation effects on
materials.
13.3 Wind
The Consortium shall apply specifications to take into account concerning wind effect.
13.4 Sand
The risk of sand winds and deposits shall be taken into account for protection arrangements
design , both for buildings and facilities on the line.
13.5 Earthquakes
As detailed in the Section 6 of General Specifications documents, no specific earthquake detection

system is required .

14. VERIFICATION, TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS
The Consortium shall submit a schedule of tests and testing procedures for the Electrification
System addressing the requirements described in Section 11 of General Specifications documents
(HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-011 ).

Staff training to power supply system equipment maintenance shall comply with all training
requirements, as defined in Section 12 of General Specifications documents (H HR-LO-CT-602-
SYS-012).
Particular attention shall be paid to staff training regarding safety use of all electrical and electronic
equipment, devices or tools.

16. DOCUMENTATIONS REQUIREMENTS
The following schemes and documents shall be settled.
The Consortium shal l provide electrical, mechanical and structural designs, schedules and
drawings for all installations.
• Detailed power supply system schemes installations for the line, stations, depots and
workshops
• Diagrams of power supply system feeder (stations and rooms) organization

...... . :.• • Diagrams of power supply system SCADA (with different modes)
• Cabling diagrams of power supply system feeder (stations and rooms)
• Technical diagrams for power supply system feeder stations including, but not limited to ,
grounding and return current bar bus, interlocking, protection, interconnecting of the supply
transformers to SEC network.
• Functional power supply system program

• Design documents including simulating reports, calculations notes, functional descriptions,
technical specifications
• Interlocking principles
• Technical documentation of all equipment
• Detailed verifications and test procedures, with all related certificates

• Detailed proof of safety
• Detailed proof of compliance with RAMS requirements
• Detailed proof of compliance with environmental constraints
Ref: HHR- L0-HV-403- INE-001 -E1 PAGE 42/44

n
• Power supply system maintenance program

• Maintenance instructions for all equipment
• Training program
• Operation instructions of equipment and power supply rooms (both in normal and downgraded
mode)
The consortium shall be respon sible for the following facilities, tools and equipment and shall
supply the basic designs and major equipment specifications :
• The concept design of the maintenance facilities for PSS,

• Provision of all Special Tools and diagnostic test equipment,
·-·)
• A recommended list of all other tools and equipment.

17. TOOLS AND SPARE-PARTS REQUIREMENT
17.1 Tools
An electrical or electronic laboratory shall be provided as part of the maintenance organization and
shall be equipped for troubleshooting, testing and repaired of power supply equipment. The
laboratory shall be supplied and equipped with desktop computers, specialized tests facilities .
Regular environmental controls shall be necessary for staff equipment and protection .
"
17.2 Spare parts
. ....
:
availability can be maintained for a period of 12 years. The spare part levels shall be specified in
the Maintenance Plan.
Philosophy for repairing and/or replacing of failed units shall be specified in the Maintenance Plan ,
based on cost and reliability. The procurement options and delivery time for individual spare parts
shall be included in this Plan.
Maintenance Plan. These spares shall include protective means for storage of printed circuits cards
not being used.
Ref: HHR- LO-HV-403-I NE-001 -E1 PAGE 44/44

Q,.l~~l bg.b:¥1 c':ic U::..JI Ci..w.w g.bl

PHASE 2
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
~=+.'~ I .bg..b:¥J Ci.c IJ:J I Ci.u.u.u 9b I
••• •l
·.-., A1 02/04/2009 First Issue M.JAMAT
A2 22/04/2009 First revision M.JAMAf
A3 22/04/2009 Revision M.JAMAT
B1 26/05/2009 Revision after the Government comments M.JAMAI
B2 29/05/2009 Revision after final workshop M.JAMAI
C1 29/06/2009 Final RFP M.JAMAI
D1 11/09/2009 Updated according to Linklaters's comments M.JAMAI
REVISION W: D1 NAME DATE SIGNATURE
r ~ .
11/09/2009
PREPARED BY M.JAMAf
11 /09/2009
C HECKED BY G.JEHANNE
11 /09/2009
VALIDATED BY G.NORMAND
i&
APPROVED BY C.SCHANG
11 /09/2009
0~
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
Cl,!~~ ~ .bg.b.:yl iio Ll:..ll Ci.w.w gbl
SAU DI RA ILWA YS ORGA NI ZAT IO N
TABLE OF CONTE NTS
1. GLOSSARY ..................................................................................................................................................... 6
2. STANDARDS AND REFERENCES ............................................................................................................ 7
2.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTEROPERABILITY (TSI) ..... ........... .... ... ............ ....... ..... ..... .. ... ... .. .. .... ....... 7
2.2EUROPEAN CENELEC STANDARDS ........................ .................. ............ ..... ... ... ................ .... ... ..... .... ... ... .... .. ... 7
2 .31NTERNATIONAL ELECTRO TECHNICAL COMMI SS ION (IEC) .. ............... ... ..... ..... ..... .. ... ................... .. .. ...... .... .... . 7
3. SCOPE OF WORK ......................................................................................................................................... 8

3.1 PURPOSE ... ... ..................................................... ....... ... .. .... ... ..... .... ....... .... ... ... ..... ........... ............. .......... ............ 8
3.2GOVERNMENT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ........... .. .. ... ... .... ....... ............. ... ..... .... .... ............ ........ .. ...... ..... ...... 8
3.3SCOPE OF WORK .... ... ........... ...... ............ .. ............. .. ... .... .... .... ..... .................... .. ....... ... ....... .. ....... .......... ............ 8
4. BASIC DESIGN ............................................................................................................................................ 10
4.1 ELECTRIFICATION SYSTEM ON MAIN LINE ..... ...... ... .. .. ... .. ... .... ... .... ........ ..... ..... .. ....... .. .. .. .... .... .. .................... .. lO
4.1.1 Subsystems ... .... .... ........ ........................... .. .. ... .. .. ..... ..... ..... ..... ...................... ........ ...... .... ... ....... .... ...... ... .. 10
4. 1. 2 Global low voltage power supply. ... .... ... .. ................. .... ... ..... .. ... .. ..... ..... .... ........ .......... ..................... ..... 10
4.1.3 signaling room power supply .............. ....... ... .... ...... ... .. .. .................. ...... .. ...... .. .. ....... .... ... .. .... ... ....... ...... 11
4. 1. 4 auxilary equipments Power supply ......... .. ...... .. ..... ...... ...... ....... ................ ....... ................... .......... ... .... . 11
4.1.5 OCC power supply ........ ..... ...... .... ..... .... ....................... .... ............ ... ..... ....... ... .. ..... .. ... .. ....... ..... ....... ... ..... 11
4. 1.6 Equipotential Earthing System .................... .. .. ..... .... .... ... .. ..... ............ ... ... .... ............ .......... .. ..... ... .. .. ... . 11
5. GENERAL OP ERA liON REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 12
6. FUNCTIONAL AND TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT S ............................................................................. 13
6.1 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ............ .. .. ..... ......... ........ ........................... .... .. .. ........ ....... ....... 13
6.21NSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ..... .... ... ... ... ..... ............... ... .... .. ...... ....... .... ..... .... ....... ... .. ... ..... ...... ................. ... l 3
6.2.1 Installation Design and Orawings .... ............................................... ..... ................. ..... ... .... .... .......... ... .. .. 14
6. 2. 2 Installation Method Statement ....... ....... .. ................. ... ...... ......... ... ..... .. .. .................... .. .. ...... ... .... .. .. .... ... 14
6.3MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS ........... ...... ....... .. ... ... ..... ... .. .. ................... ...... .... .... .. ... .... ... ............. .. ... .. ...... .. . 14
6.4SAFETY .... .... ......... .... ...................... ........ ..... .. .... .. ......... .. .............. .... .... ... ..... ........ ..... ..... ...... ....... ................ ... . 14
6.4. 1 Grounding And Bonding .. .. ..... ... ... .............. .. ....... ...... ... ... ..... .. .... .............. ........... .......................... .... .... 14
6.4.2 lnterlocks ... ............................. ....................... ...... .... .... .... .. ... .. ..... .. ..... .. ... ... .. ........ .. .. .. ... ..... ... ... .. ...... ... ...... 16
6.4.3 Lightning Protection ............ .............. .... ...... .... ............ " .. ....... .. ...... .. ... .... ........ .. ..... .. .... .... .. ... ................. 16
6.4.4 Fire protection /fighting .... ....... ..... ..... ..... .. ..... ... .. .... ..... ... ... ... .. ...... ........... .. ... .... ... .. ..... ...... ... .. .............. .. .. 18
6.4. 5 Alarms ...... ... .... ..... .. ..... .. ....... ..... ...... ... ........ ........................... ...... .. .. ... ...... .... ... ....... .... ... ............. ... .. .......... 18
6.5REQUIREMENTS OF LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY FACILITIES ... .... .. ... ..... .. .................... .... .. .......... .. ....... ..... 18
6. 5. 1 Main and intermediate signa ling rooms .. ................................. .. .. ..................... .... ...... .. .. ........ .. .......... 18
6. 5. and transmission devices .............. ... ...... .. .. ... .... .... .. ... ..... ............ ... .. .. .. .... .. .. ... .... ... ................... 19
supply ....... ...... ... .......... ............ .... .... ... ........................... .... .. .......... .... ...... .. ................. .. .. ... .. 19
................... .. ......... .... ....... ......... ... .. ... ... .... ...... ..... .. ... .............. .. .... .. ..... ... ............. .................. 20
...... .. .............. ... ..... ..... ..... .. ... ...... .... .. .. ... .. .. ...... .......... ..... .... .. ..... ... .. ....... .............. ... .... 20
~lf!>Hru'Yl1"< "fi,-,,l~ y" . .......... . . ... .... ... .... .... . ............... . .. . ... ....... . ... .. . .. .. . ...... .... . .. . . ... .. .. . . ..... . .. ..... . . .. . . ... . ................
21
... .. ....... ........ .... ..... .... ...... .. ... .......... .... ..... .. .. ... ..... .... ....... ... ....... .. ..... ...... .... ................... ... .. .. 21
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
~'::1:1~ 1 .b~ fu:J U:.JI i:i.u.u.u gbl
SA UDI RAI LWA YS ORGA NI ZA TION
6.5.8 tunnels ..... .......... ........ .... .... ....... ... ..... .... ....... .. ......... ......... .. ......... ... ... ... ...... ......... ..... ........ ........ ... .... ........... 21
7. INTERFACES ................................................................................................................................................ 22
7.1 HHR CIVIL WORKS .......... ........ .... ... ..... ...... .. .. .. .... ........... ............................ ...... ... ...................... ......... ......... .. .. 22
7 .20VERHEAD CATENARIES SYSTEMS .... ..... .. ........... ............ .. .. .... .. .... ...... ... ... .... .. ... ... .. ...... .... ... ..... .............. ...... 22
7.3HHR SIGNALING .. ................ ............ .... ........ ............ ... .... .... .... .. .... ... ... ....... .. .... ...... ......... .... ........... ... ...... .. ..... .. 22
7.4HHR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS ............ ................. ....... ..... ..... ... .. ...... ................. ...... ... ... .............. .. .. ......... 22
7.50PERATION CONTROL CENTER ······ ···· ·· ····· ························ ·· ···················· ··············· ··· ··· ······· ···· ···· ··········· ···· ···· 22
7.6SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY .. ... .......... .... ..... ... .... .. .... ...... ... .. ............. .. ..... .. .............. .. ..... .. .... ...... ...... ..... ..... 23
8. BUILDINGS REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................. 24
9. RAMS ............................................................................................................................................................. 25
9.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ... .. ..... ... ...... .... .................... .. ... ... .... .. .. ...... ..... ... .... ... ...... .... .. .. .. .. ... ..... .... ... .... ... ....... 25
9.2SPECIFIC RELIABILITY REQUIREMENTS ... .. ..... ....... ... .. ....... .... ... ... .. .. .. .. ...... ....... ......... ........ .. .... ................. ...... . 25
9.3SPECIFIC AVAILABILITY REQUIREMENTS ...... .. .. .. ...... ... ... .. .... ......... .. ...... .. ..... .... .. .. .... .. ........ ...... .............. ..... .. .. 25
9.4SPECIFIC MAINTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS ..... ... .... .. .. ..... ..... ..... ... ..... .. .. ...... .. ......... .. ........ .... .... .... ........ .. ..... .. 26
9.5SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ... .......... ..... ..... .... .... .. ....... ..... ..... ........ ....... .... ...... ........ ....................... .... ... . 26
10.DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................................... 27
11.MANUFACTURING REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................... 28
12.PROCUREMENT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION REQUIREM ENTS .............................. 29
13.SPECIFIC ENVIRONMENTAL CONSTRAINTS AND REQUIREMENTS ........................................ 30
13.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ·· ······· ··· ········ ·· ····· ······ ··· ········ ·· ··········· ···· ···· ······ ···· ····· ···· ···· ··············· ·..... ......... 30
13.2 PROTECTION OF LINE INSTALLATIONS TO SOLAR RADIATIONS ......... .... ................. .. ........... ..... .. ...... .. .... 30
13.2.1 Wind ........... ... ..... .. ...... ... .... .... ..... ....... ... ....... ........ .. .... ...... ...... .. ..... ..... .. ... .. .. ..... ....... .................. ......... .... .. .. 30
13.2.2Sand ...... ..... .................. ... .... .. ....... .·..... ......... .. ... ........ ........ ................... ... ...... ..... .. ... ... ....... .. ... .. .... ........ ... ... 30
13.2.3Earthquakes .. .... ........ .. ... ...... ............... .. ........... ... ... ...... ... .... ... ........ .......... ...... ..... .............. ........ .. .. .. ......... 30
14.VERIFICATION, TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS ......................................................... 31
14.1 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS .... ... ...... ......... .......... .... ... ........... .. ..... .. ..... ...... ... ... .... ..... .. .... ... ... ..... .. ..... ......... 31
14.2 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ....... ... ...... ..... ..... ...... ... .. ... ...... ...... ..... ... .... .... .. ... .. ....... ..... ........ ............ ..... .... ..... 31
14.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS .... ... ... ..... ..... .......... .... ..... ... ... ... ..... ...... ....... ... ... .......... ...... .... ... ....... .......... .. ........ ... . 31
15.TRAINING REQUIREMENT ........................................................................................................................ 32
16.DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENT ....................................................................................................... 33
17.TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS REQUIREMENT ...................................................................................... 34
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
Cl:} ~~I b~ Cic U:.JI Ci..u.u.u g.bl
0
PROJECT REFERENCES
REF No REF ID NUMBER REF DESCRIPTION

1 HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-001 Interlocking and Main Line Signaling
2 HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-016 General Specifications : Building requirements

APPENDIX D
3 HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 RAMS specifications
4 H HR-LO-CT -602-SYS-002 General Specifications : SECTION 2

Glossary
5 HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-011 General Specifications : SECTION 11
Verification , Test and Acceptance (VTA)
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
C:,l~~ I .bg.t::a:¥J CiD L.c:.J I c'iuwJ 9b I
1. GLOSSARY
The Consortium shall refer to the General Glossary, defined in Section 2 of General
Specifications (H HR-LO-CT -602-SYS-002 ).
However, following specific abbreviations shall be used:
V, kV Volt, kilovolt
A, kA Ampere, kilo ampere
VTA Verification Test and Acceptance
SEC Saudi Electricity Company
SCADA Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
LVPS Low Voltage Power Supply
EOS Equivalent Or Superior
..·-
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
Q,.l ::1:}~ I .bg.b::IJ.I Cic l.c.JI ii.u..u..u 9b I
The following rules, or equivalent or superior (EOS), shall be respected for low voltage
power supply design, works, operations and maintenance. Any incompliance shall be
indicated to Government, for agreement.
The following TSI for high speed railway system, equivalent or superior, shall be
respected.

• Technical Specification for lnteroperability - Power Supply
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability - Tunnel
The following European CENELEC standards, equivalent or superior (E.O.S.), shall be

respected.
• EN 50121-1 to 5 - Railway applications - Electromagnetic compatibility
• EN 50122-1 - Railway applications - Fixed installations - Protective provisions

relative to electrical safety and earthing
• EN 50124-1 to 2 - Railway applications - Insulation coord ination
• EN 50125-1 to 3 - Railway applications - Environmental conditions for equipment
• EN 50126 - Railway applications - The specification and demonstration of reliability,

availability, maintainability and safety (RAMS)
• EN 50-163 - Railways application - Supply voltages of traction systems
• EN 50128 - Railway applications - Communications, signaling and processing

systems - Software for railway control and protection system
• and processing
I Electra technical Commission (IEC)
equivalent or superior ones, shall be respected .
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
i:JJ~~I .b~ Cic U:.ll iiJ.u.w gbl
3. SCOPE OF WORK
3.1 Purpose
This document is part of Performance Specification for Phase 2 regarding the Low Voltage
Power Supply. lt aims at describing its basic design as well as its technical and functional
requirements, which shall be respected by the Consortium, according to global RAMS
specifications and Performance Requirements.
'·.·
3.2 GOVERNMENT general requirements
The following general Government requirement shall be respected.
• The HHR railway system shall be designed for train speeds up to 320 km/h
• Trains run on the right, but circulations on the other direction shall be possible with
the same level of performance and safety.
• Only proven technology shall apply.
3.3 Scope of work
lt aims at defining the facilities to be achieved by the Consortium.

The Consortium shall be responsible for the design, procurement, installation , erection,
testing and commissioning of all equipment necessary to supply and control low voltage
electri cal energy from the points of common coupling with the Saudi Electrical Company
(SEC) to the System.
All equipment shall be supplied and set up in order to operate safely and satisfy all
operational and environmental requirements .
The consortium shall meet the intent of these Technical Requirements but is free to
offer alternative designs while meeting all performance criteria.
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
C:J ~:;,.::y1 .b gb:¥1 c1c U:JI a.w.w 9b 1
Scope of work of this system includes (not exhaustive list):

• Intermediate and Main Signaling Rooms power supply
• OCCs (Main and back up one) power supply
• System for Mobile communications - Railways (GSMR}& Transmission devices
power supply
• Depots/workshops power supply
• Work Bases power supply
• Platform doors in stations
• Tunnels (ventilation system not included)
• Turnouts heating if any
• Cables
• Testing and commissioning
• Recommended periodic tests and controls
• The provision of detailed operation and maintenance proceedings and manuals,
together with a maintenance control system for all supplied facilities as provided in
this Contract
• Civil works areas, including for Feeder Stations, Section and Parallel Stations areas
except if Government choose to entrust it to Route Civil Works Contractor.
The Consortium shall provide a global Low Voltage power supply according to SEC
interfaces, Saudi Arabian grid code and international and European standards.
More generally, the Consortium shall correctly interface all equipments and installations
with other HHR facilities and infrastructure in order to meet HHR performance and
operations requirements.
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
Q,..I:1J~I.b~ aoU:JI ci.w..w gbl
4. BASIC DESIGN
4.1.1 SUBSYSTEMS
The main line electrification comprises a number of subsystems, including (but not limited
to):
• Low voltage power supply global design
• OCC power supply
• Signaling room and GSM-R room power supply
• Auxiliary equipments for HV power supply
4. 1. 2 GLOBAL LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
The Consortium shall define a global low voltage power supply of the railway equipments
as specified in the functional and technical requirements (see Chapter 6).
Railway facilities shall be supplied from local electrical network derivation (Saudi Electrical
Company).
In case of impossibility of supply from SEC, the Consortium shall define an appropriate
way to provide this supply according to Reliability, Availability, Maintainability and Safety
requirements.
Interfaces between the Consortium and SEC shall be defined by the Consortium in total
respect with grid code.
The Consortium shall define location of low voltage power supply feeders.
These facilities shall partly need a back up power supply. The Consortium shall
determinate them and define an appropriate solution while meeting the RAMS.
l
~
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
0
4.1.3 S/GNALING ROOM POWER SUPPLY
Required electrical power supply for an ISR shall be of about 160kVA, and reach more
than 300kVA for a MSR. These indicative values shall however be precisely defined by the
Con sortium according to relevant design requirements.
The consortium shall define original power supply location (signaling rooms or other local
supply points ); for all auxiliary faci lities, lighting, turnouts, GSMR, platforms doors, etc.
However the Consortium shall define the necessity of supplying these equipments from
the signaling rooms or other local supply points.
4.1.4 AUXILARY EQUIPMENTS POWER SUPPLY
The main equipments to be supplied shall be following:
• GSMR bases
• Telecommunication devices
• Depots
• Point heating if any
• Work Bases
• Tunnels (except mechanical items such as ventilation supplied by Phase 1
Consortium).
Req 01 The Con sortium shall determinate the electrical needs for all these facilities and
define
the best way to supply them according to functional and technical specifications,
RAMS
and Performance Requirements .
4. 1.5 OCC POWER SUPPLY

The Operation Control Center
The Consortium shall define an appropriate way to provide the supply of the main and
backup OCC facilities, according to Reliability, Availability, Maintainability and Safety
requirements.
4. 1.6 EQUIPOTEN TIAL EARTHING SYSTEM
shall be designed according to electrical standards for passengers and
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
0, ~~ I .bg.b.::.,U Cio U:J I cl.J..u..w 9b I
SAUDI RA ILWAYS ORGANIZATION
The low voltage power supply shall be designed, manufactured , erected, tested and
commissioned in accordance with best industry practice.
The low voltage power supply shall be designed using standardized components suitable
for high speed railway. Wherever possible, these components shall be readily available
throughout the world .
Req 02 The following general requirements, which have been set by Government, shall
be respected
••·! • •
• The System shall be designed for a 320 km/h speed .
• Trains will be running normally on the right side, but circulations on the opposite side
shall be
• Proven technology shall only be usable.
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
()
6. FUNCTIONAL AND TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
Req 03 The Electrification System shall be designed using standardized components

and
proven technology suitable for a high-speed railway. Wherever possible,
these
components shall be readily available throughout the world . Any particular
need of
equipment, specific to the HHR, shall be brought to the attention of
Government.
6.1 Design and Construction Requirements
The Consortium shall be responsible for the engineering , procurement, construction ,

testing, and commissioning of the low voltage power supply for the HHR including SEC
connections.
Req 04 The Consortium shall provide the low voltage power supply for the HHR to
ensure that :
• The overall reliability of Low voltage power supply meets RAMS and Performance
Requirements . The Consortium shall provide calculations to prove its compliance
Req 05 The electromagnetic design of the low voltage power supply for the HHR shall
minimize
electrical interference with all other electrical networks, systems or equipment
within the
railway Influence Zone , ensuring a safe and normal working of such networks,
systems
and facilities.
• Electrical System shall be safe, including for example, grounding and bonding ,
erecting of
safety screens, passengers safety, railway staff safety during maintenance and work
operation , as well as public safety (acting in a lawful manner).
• The system and its components shall comply with the environmental conditions,
including ,
but not limited to, lightning strikes, temperature, humidity, wind, rain sand, dust and
solar
ctures .
be provided by the
':•~'"\
~V
IN ASSOC IATION WITH
AXELCIUM
6.2. 1 INSTALLATION DESIGN AND DRAWINGS
Req 06 The Consortium shall provide electrical, mechanical and structural designs,
schedules and drawings for all these installations .
6.2.2 INSTALLATION METHOD STATEMENT
The Consortium shall submit an installation method statement and a list of controls to be
performed in the field for all facilities.
This statement shall prove the Consortium's knowledge in providing modern technical
equipment, positioning, conductor stringing and tensioning , and equipment wiring.
6.3 Maintenance Requirements
The Consortium shall be responsible for the following facilities , tools and equipment, and
shall supply the basic designs and major equipment specifications for:
• The conceptual design of the maintenance facilities in the two smalls depots.
• Heavy Depot/workshop required for the maintenance of the Rolling stock and
Maintenance
base Infrastructure.
6.4 Safety
The low voltage power supply shall be designed, constructed , installed,

commissioned and tested to ensure the safety of the staff, passengers, and
public under all normal operating and fault conditions.
6.4. 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Grounding and Bonding provisions shall be in compliance with Applicable Laws . The
Consortium shall be responsible for the main Grounding and Bonding design of the HHR.
The Consortium shall undertake detailed design of Main Line and Depot low voltage
power supply System and Core System Grounding and Bonding requirements .
The Consortium shall interface with other contractors to assist them in detailed design
process, as shown in Table 1.
The Consortium shall supply and set up Grounding and Bonding systems as shown in
Table 1.
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
O,!~:::l..::rJ I b~ Ciol..c.JI ciw..wgbl
SAU DI RAILWAYS ORGAN IZAT ION
Table 1: Responsibility matrix chart for Grounding, Bonding

and corrosion control systems
TERRITORY OR DISCIPLINE WORK ITEMS CIVIL WORKS TRACK· CORE

STATIONS D EPOTS
A DESIGN
1. DETAIL DESIGN FOR GROUNDING AND
0 0 H
BONDING SYSTEM, MAIN LINE
2. DETAIL DESIGN FOR CORROSION CONTROL H 0
SYSTEM, MAIN LIN E (2)
3. DETAIL DESIGN FOR GROUNDING BONDING
H 0
AND CORROSION CONTROL SYSTEMS, 0 0
(3 )
STATIONS
4. D ETAIL DESIGN FOR GROUNDING AND
BONDING SYSTEM, DEPOTS (TRACTION
POWER RELATED ITEMS)
0 0 11 0
5. DETA IL DESIGN FOR GROUNDING , BONDING
AND CORROSION CONTROL SYSTEMS, H 0
0
DEPOTS (GENERAL POWER SUPPLY & (4)
BU ILDINGS)
6. DETAIL DESIGN FOR GROUNDING OF CORE
0 0 0 0 H
SYSTEMS.
B. SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION
1. PROVISIONS OF EXPOSED, NON-EMBEDDED
GROUNDING & BONDING SYSTEM FOR THE
SAFETY OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND THE 0 0 H
REQUIREMENTS OF TRACTION POWER
SYSTEM.
2. WELDED CONNECTION TO DEDICATED
REBARS AND CONDUCTORS IN PILECAP,
COLUMN, VIADUCT, TUNNEL LINING AND
H 0 0
FEEDER AND SECTIONING STATIONS,
PROVISIONS OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
INCLUDING GROUNDING MATS.
3. PROVIS IONS OF CATHODIC PROTECTION
SYSTEM FOR T HE BURI ED STRUCTURES OF H 0
MAIN LINE.
~~~~~:~~~~UO:DE:E~E: ~~~ ~~~~AL~~~.GRID

4.
H 0
5. EXOTHERMIC WELDS TO RAILS FOR ALL
0 H
BONDS
6. PROVI SIONS OF GROUNDING, BONDING AND
H 0
CORROS ION CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR 0 0
(3)
STATIONS
V · ~EXPOSED. NON·EMBEDDED
:.,1 v.rl\\t3ij9J~,0 & BOND ING SYSTEM FOR THE
&:
~
I
i\;·"
I IU(J
q,
'
~
.;;"
\<'-\V R81u~,:yE&~
TRACTtaN PO
1
S S EM FO~Tr
OF FEEDER STATIONS &
ER WITHIN DEPOTS.
S;""rP~ 1 SION~~ ROUNDING & BONDING
RELATED AREA OF
0 0 H
0"0 GENERf~et ~ RVICES WITH DEPOTS AND H

::l~ 0 0
D9, D: i S FOR THE FEEDER (4 )
~
E B
ST~l;JO t'l:')f\1'1 RACTION POW ER
~/rlr! I1(1'CLU..0Jk OUNDING MAT.
~~~~.OF CATHODIC SYSTEM FOR
H 0
. STRUCTURES W ITHIN DEPOTS
IN ASSOCI ATION WITH

AXELCIUM
D.} '::l:! :::a::..J I .b gb.:¥J Ci.c U:.J I CiJ.w..u g.b I
------ SAUDI RAILWAYS ORGANIZATION
TERRITORY OR DISCIPLINE WORK ITEMS CIVIL WORKS TRACK- CORE

STATIONS DEPOTS
10. GROUNDING FOR CORE SYSTEM TECHNICAL

0 0 0 0 H
SYSTEM
NOTES:
(1) SYMBOLS INDICATE : H : BEING RESPONSIBLE FOR THE WORK ITEM

0 : INVOLVED /INFORMATION / INPUT DESIGN DATA
(2) DETAILLED DESIGN WORK OF THE CORROSION CONTROL SUPPLY MAY BE ASSIGNED
TO A CONSULTING EXPERT FOR THE WHOLE SYSTEM OR ASSIGNED TO THE VARIOUS
CIVIL CONSORTIUMS.
(3) STATION DEPARTMENT IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SYSTEM INTEGRATION AND PROVIDING
SYSTEM INTERFACE (CONNECTION POINTS) FOR OTHERS.
r;:::-:;_< (4) DEPOT DEPARTMENT IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SYSTEM INTEGRATION AND PROVIDING
~_:_.)•
SYSTEM INTERFACE FOR OTHERS .
The Consortium shall determine and record ground strength values since it shall be
necessary to provide a safe , durable and economic Grounding and Bonding system .
The Consortium shall describe all requirements for the electrical Bonding of reinforcing
bars associated with bridges , viaducts , or tunnels to the traction return ground circuit.
The Consortium shall liaise with Government to ensure , these requirements shall be
specified within the required schedule .
The Consortium shall liaise with Government to ensure that any requirements for ducting
for carrying cross bonding connections in Depot or work bases areas , station areas,
tunnels, or viaducts are specified within the required schedule time .
Req 07 All joints between conductors, bonds, and steelwork shall be capable of carrying
the
anticipated current for the Design Life of the equipment without any damage to
joint
quality.
6.4.2 INTERLOCKS
Req 08 All appropriate equipment shall be fully interlocked to ensure its own protection
and staff
safety. Interlocks shall be designed in order to allow the use of padlocks to
switch
devices in insulated/earthed position .
6.4.3 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
a,..~~~ .b~ iiD U::.ll CWl.W g.bl
SAUD I RAILWAYS ORGANIZATION
• The design criteria shall comply with the local Saudi fire protection regulations and
standards of lightning protection systems and equipment installation.
• Lightning protection is heavily dependent on an adequate ground mat to maintain
surge
voltages below flashover threshold between energized equipment and structures.
Therefore,
a special attention shall be paid to the Grounding design for each application.
)
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
0:/~~ 1 .b~ Cic IJ:.JI CiJ..w.u gbl
SA UDI RAI LWAYS ORGA NI ZA TIO N
6.4 . 4 FIRE PROTECTION /FIGHTING
Req 10 The design of all the Electrification System equipment shall provide to minimize
effect
and spread of fire .
• In tunnels only fire retardant materials shall be used in order to minimize smoke and
acrid
gases during combustion
• Toxic gases during combustion shall be avoided .
• The Consortium shall declare its policy on fire retardation and provide Government
with a
comprehensive description of material performance , and shall justify any location
where it is
not intended to comply with this requirement.
6.4.5 ALARMS
Req 11 The Consortium shall provide useful information for display in OCC for
supervision ,
including but not limited to :
• Equipment status
• Incoming power supply status from SEC ,
• incoming power
• shelter temperature
6.5 Requirements of low voltage power supply facilities
6. 5. 1 MAIN AND INTERMEDIATE SIGNALING ROOMS
Req 12 Main power supplies for signaling rooms shall be connected to a local supply
point
(designed by the consortium) or to a SEC connecting point to be defined by the
Consortium
• Signaling rooms comprise the power supply of several equipments, including but not
limited ·
to, lighting , turnouts on the line and wayside , GSMR, platforms doors·, etc. , through
cable
routes , except if other supply mode is proven to be more relevant.
• However the Consortium shall define the necessity to supply these equipments from
the
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
~':J.,}~ I .bgb:¥18c ldl ii.w..w gbl
SA UDI RAI LWA YS ORGA NI ZAT ION
and define an appropriate solution accordingly, in respect of the RAMS and ensuring
performance . The information on the equipment status shall be transmitted to the
occ
requirements .
Req 13 A six-hour autonomy power supply with batteries is also required for all signaling
rooms
The Consortium has to submit details about the batteries characteristics (e .g. capacity,
charge and discharge time) . The batteries should be supplied by a stand alone way such
as solar panel.
The Consortium shall determinate the power of these equipments and define how to
supply them according to functional and technical specifications and needs of each
equipment.
Req 14 The Consortium shall ensure that environment conditions, like sand, dust, solar
radiation , temperature , humidity, height shall not damage or disturb the smooth
running
of low voltage power supply equipment in the signaling rooms .
The protection factor of the equipment shall be sufficient and the technical characteristics
of the equipment shall be in compliance with the environmental conditions of Saudi Arabia
(see building req. HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-013 - General Specification - Appendix D:
Building Requirements)
The Consortium shall define the air conditioning power necessary in order to prevent
excessive temperature in the signaling rooms, GSM-R shelters and protect them efficiently
against sand and dust.
6.5.2 GSMR AND TRAN SMISSION DEVICES
The low voltage power supply conditions and prescriptions about smooth running of
GSMR equipment as well as transmission data devices shall be the same as signaling
ones .
6.5.3 OCC POWER SUPPL Y
Req 15 The Consortium shall define the main and backup OCC power. He shall define
appropriate way to provide the supply of the main and backup OCC facilities ,
rding
OCC Reliability, Availability, Maintainability and Safety requirements . (See
n Ret : H HR-LO-CC-403-SYS-00 1).
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
~::ld~ I .bg.b::y.J CiD Lc.JI i:iJ..u.w 9b I
SAUD I RA ILWAY S ORGANIZATION
6.5.4 TURNOUTS
Signaling equipment and turnouts on the line and wayside shall mainly supplied through
cables , from MSR and ISR except if other supply mode is proven to be more relevant.
The Consortium shall ensure that environment conditions , like sand , dust (dustproof), solar
radiation, temperature, humidity, height don't damage or disturb the smooth running of the
low voltage power supply equipment of these equipment.
6.5.5 DEPOTS/WORKSHOPS
Req 16 The Consortium shall define the power needs for the th ree depots (two small
depots
and a heavy maintenance depot) .
• The Consortium shall supply these depots from local supply point or from local SEC
supply
• The Consortium shall determinate which equipment needs a backup power supply
and shall
define an appropriate solution for this backup supply according to the respect of the
RAMS
and the performance requirements .
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
6. 5. 6 PLATFORMS DOORS
Req 17 The Consortium shall define the power needs of the platform doors inside the
stations .
• The Consortium shall supply the platforms doors from signaling rooms or appropriate
solution according to RAMS requirements .
• The Consortium shall settle a backup power supply and define appropriate solution
accordingly considering the RAMS and the Performance Requirements .
• The information of the facilities status and their control shall be transmitted by the
OCC .
6. 5. 7 WORK BASES
Req 18 The Consortium shall define the power needs for work bases .
• He shall supply the work bases from local supply point or from local SEC supply
• The Consortium shall determinate equipments needing a backup power supply and
define
an appropriate solution accordingly considering the RAMS and performance
requirements .
6. 5. 8 TUNNEL S
Req 19 The Consortium shall define equipments to be supplied in tunnels , like lighting ,
fire
pumps supply, fire safety systems, power supply, outlet, etc. and calculate
required
power to supply for these equipments .
• The Consortium shall supply these equipments either from signaling rooms , local
supply
point or local SEC connecting point. The Consortium shall determinate equ ipments
needing
a backup power supply and shall define an appropriate solution for this backup supply
according to RAMS requirements and the Performance Requirements .
• The Consortium shall size correctly the equipments according to the va rious
scenarios which
could meet.
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
~~~~ .bgb:¥l aoU::.JI ewuu!:Jbl
7. INTERFACES
The Consortium shall liaise with the others contractors and suppliers regarding :
7.1 HHR Civil works
• Tunnels equ ipments

• Cables on viaducts, bridges and stations.
7.2 Overhead Catenaries Systems
25 KV /LV transformers to supply equipments for back up power supply.
7.3 HHR Signaling
• MSR and ISR power needs

• MSR and ISR standby power needs
• Earthing system
7.4 HHR Communications systems
• GSMR bases power needs

• GSM-R standby power needs
• Transmission devices power need
7.5 Operation Control Center
• Low voltage power supply SCADA
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
Q,J~~I .b~ CiD LcJI Ci.u.u.u gel
7.6 Saudi Electricity Company
The Consortium shall define the interfaces between the Consortium and SEC according to
the grid code.
Req 20The Consortium shall be responsible for any grid connexion works according to
SEC Specifications (Chapter C.3.11 of the Performance Specification).
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
0.,~~ 1 .bg.b.¥1 iiD U:JI Q.w.w gbl
SAUDI RAILWAYS ORGAN IZATION
8. BUILDINGS REQUIREMENTS
If specifics buildings have to be built for low voltage power supply needs,
The Consortium shall define building characteristics according to RAMS requirements,
Performance Requirements, usual standards and General specifications, Appendix D -
HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-016)
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
9. RAMS
The low voltage power supply shall comply with all global RAMS requirements defined in
the RAMS Requirements document (HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 ).This compliance shall
ensure that HHR Operating Requirement and Performance Requirements can be met. In
particular, MTTR values for the low voltage power supply defined in order to allow this
compliance.
9.2 Specific reliability requirements
Low voltage power supply reliability is the most important factor. Therefore it should be the
highest possible .
System's Reliability consists in maintaining normal power supply even in case of loss of a
GRID source . The loss can also result from locals supply points or power cable failure.
The quality of the Low Voltage Power Supply is also important.
The Consortium shall draw up the reliability requirements considering voltage level ,
acceptable harmonic rates (according to the Saudi Arabian Grid Code), protection towards
environmental conditions (sand, dust, wind , temperature, solar radiations .. .), vandalism ,
etc.
Low voltage power supply failures , which could degrade operating, may occur but only
exceptionally.
As for the interlocking, 2 failures maximum per year shall be allowed , with only one failure
each 2 years affecting operation for more than 2 minutes .
I Req 21 The design life of the signaling and interlocking system shall be at least 50 years
9.3 Specific availability requirements
Req 22 The availability of the low voltage power supply equipments of the System shall
be define according to the availability of each equipment.
• Downgraded modes of train operation shall be possible if any equipment fails.

• The period of non-availability of the system (from incident origin to service
restoration) shall not exceed 200 minutes for all incidents in a year.
• The number of incidents for 100 km of single line affecting train operation shall not
exceed 5 incidents a year. However, during the two first operating years , this
number can be increased but it shall not exceed 10 incidents a year.
11 refer to the various availability requirements of the Railway to define

low voltage power supply .
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
r . ..
\..
fi:!:l:!~ I .bgb:¥1 Cic U::.J I Ci.wJ..u 9h I
SA UDI RA ILWAYS ORGAN IZAT ION
9.4 Specific maintainability requirements
Req 23 The Consortium shall define maintenance requirements and prove they shall
meet
reliability and availability of Low Voltage Power Supply in Low Voltage
Maintenance plan and principles document.
• Design, manufacturing and installation of Low Voltage Power Supply should be
studied in
view of a minimal maintenance while operating .
• Maintenance operations shouldn 't disturb the run of the main line nor lead to use,
eventually
to acquire specific tools.
:-:·-·-·.·.\ • Preventive Maintenance operations on facilities should not affect availability of this
equipment Full support shall be provided during all line life
Facilities and procedures shall be required for:

• Preventive maintenance (and detection of any incipient failure) ,
• Predictive maintenance (through the analysis of reported performance variation)
• Corrective maintenance (diagnostic indications of failures occurred by the
equipment).
The maintenance staff shall automatically log all failure reports from any source in the
Maintenance Management System .
The consortium shall make the necessary to secure and facilitate the maintenance and the
accessibility of the zones of work (Lighting , outlet, etc.).
9. 5 Specific safety requirements
All systems shall comply with references as defined in chapter 2 and meet the HHR safety
case requirements .
Req 24 Power Supply System shall be designed to: Minimize the risks regarding people
and
goods safety, fulfill entire staff and equipment safety during operating and
maintenance,
prevent the possibility of dangerous interactions between systems and minimize
the
risks due to a wrong operation from the maintenance staff.
Any failure or wrong operating of a failsafe system or sub-system component shall lead to
a dangerous situation , but to more restrictive situations . ·
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
0,! ::l:!::l::IJ I .b~ c1D l..c.JI ci.w..w 9b I
The Consortium shall be responsible for engineering, procurement, construction , testing ,

and commissioning of the electrical system.
Req 25 The Consortium shall provide the low voltage power supply for the HHR to
ensure:
• The maximum train set frequency
• System electrical safety, including, but not limited to , earthing and bonding, clearance
of
leaving equipment parts, erection of safety screens, passengers and railway staff
safety
• Compliance of the system and its components with environmental conditions,
including, but
not limited to, temperature range, wind, humidity, rain, dust, sand storm, solar
radiation
found along route of the HHR.
• The system shall consider the swept envelopes of the rolling stock, and the wayside
structures.
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
il:J:J:!~I.b~ Cicl.dl Cu.u.w gbl
The Consortium shall produce for each equipment installation characteristics

documentation summarizing following:
• Quality certificate from the manufacturer including proven technology reference
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
REQUIREMENTS
Req 26 The consortium shall insure, through its own or manufacturer's quality control,
appliance
of the equipment with above defined characteristic documentation.
Req 27 The consortium shall also insure that transportation , storage and handling shall
not
affect equipment characteristics .
Req 28 The consortium shall insure that installation complies with rule book, standards
and
references including TSI.
Req 29 The progressive on-site acceptance of subsystems shall give insurance that all
these
requirements have been achieved before testing and commissioning.
Particular attention shall be brought to construction phasing in order to respect integrity of

each subsystem while installed .
The consortium shall submit an installation method statement and a list of installation
inspections to be performed for all installations.
The method statement shall include a proposed method of recording installation criteria
towards approved design in order to check As-built detail and quality control of the
installation works .
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
Q,,:J,J~ I .b~ iiD I.J::..J I W..U..W gbl

REQUIREMENTS
The Consortium shall take into account all relevant data given in Section 6 and Appendix
B of General Specifications documents (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-006 and HHR-LO-CT-602-
SAU-001), for design, building, maintenance and durability of PSS installations.
Req 30 The consortium shall collect any missing information needed for a complete
design.
13.2 Protection of line installations to solar radiations
Req 31 For all installations which can be exposed to sun light, specific arrangements
shall be
taken by the Consortium to ensure correct protection towards solar radiation
effects on
materials.
13.2.1 WIND
The Consortium shall apply specifications to take into account concerning wind effect.
13.2.2 SAND
The risk of sand winds and deposits shall be taken into account for protection
arrangements design, both for bui ldings and faci lities on the line.
13.2.3 EARTHQUAKES
As detailed in the Section 6 of General Specifications documents.
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
~:J:J~I .bg.b:¥1 W::J l..c.J I a..u..u..u ghl
14. VERIFICATION, TEST AND ACCEPTANCE

REQUIREMENTS
The Consortium shall define the VTA according to this document:
HHR-LO-CT-602- GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

SYS-011 SECTION 11 : VERIFICATION , TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE (VTA)
14.1 Specific Requirements r....

\.;_")
Req 32 The Consortium shall demonstrate the dynamic performance of the proposed low
voltage power supply facilities, by normal and backup operating
Req 33 The Consortium shall provide a testing and commissioning plan with detailed
method for
each of all the testing and commissioning processes carried out by the
Consortium in
respect of the minimum requirements of this document
14.2 Acceptance Criteria
The acceptance criteria for the Low Voltage Power Supply will be the satisfactory
completion of the testing and commissioning program and the visual examination of the
LVPS meets the requirements of Consortium's design.
14.3 Acceptance Tests
The testing and commissioning of the LVPS shall be undertaken in accordance with the
commissioning plan drafted by the Consortium linked to HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-011-A2 General
Specifications-Section 11 .
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
D:/~:::t..:¥ I .bg.l:::i:yl Cio l..c:.J I i:i...wllJ gb I
15. TRAINING REQUIREMENT
Req 34 The Consortium shall coordinate initial training of the maintenance and
management
staff. The Consortium shall provide train ing in operation and maintenance
matters
including relevant equipment and system safety requirements .
Req 35 The Consortium shall provide trainers, documents and necessary and training
equipment. Training shall be concluded before testing the system.
d-
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
Cl,! :1,!~1 .bgb.:¥1 i:iD l.c.JI Ci.u.u.u gbl
16. DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENT
For every subsystem, all training and operation manuals, software and applications
documentation, control documentation, instruments documentation and maintenance
manuals shall be provided, as described herein. Documents shall describe all operation
and maintenance procedures in a clear, comprehensive and detailed way and shall be
compiled in separate volume.
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
Q,, ::~,~~1 .b~ CiD U::.JI ciw.w g.bl
17. TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS REQUIREMENT
Req 36 The Consortium shall provide all necessary accessories, spare parts and tools
• Such accessories, spare parts and tools shall be delivered to the project owner after
the end
of the maintenance period. During the maintenance period, the Consortium shall be
obliged,
under the project guarantee, to provide the appropriate spare parts, tools and
accessories
required for the resolution of any failure and maintenance of facilities.
• The Consortium shall also consider supplying of certain accessories, spare parts,
·.-..- ··.j tools etc.
'• ·.·.·
necessary for the effective operation of the low voltage power supply
Spare parts shall be available for at least 12 years after commissioning date. As a
precaution against the loss of support services by a supplier, the Consortium shall provide
backup support options.
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
~::l,,~l .bgb:¥1 Cio Ldl Ci.w..w gbl

PHASE 2
-.·:::·
OVERHEAD CATENARY SYSTEM
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
A1 12/04/2009 First Issue F.DEBACQ
B1 26/05/2009 Revision after the Government comments F.DEBACQ
··········· B2 29/05/2009 Revision after final workshop F.DEBACQ
C1 29/06/2009 Final RFP F.DEBACQ
01 11/09/2009 Review according to Linklaters's comments F.DEBACQ
REVISION No: D1 NAME DATE SIGNATURE
PREPARED BY
CHECKED BY
F.DEBACQ
G.JEHANNE
29/06/2009
29/06/2009
-- ' ::1---- =-
- \. ""
--=- --::J
VALIDATED BY G.NORMAND 29/06/2009 (fl>

..,.,._~
APPROVED BY C.SCHANG 29/06/2009 :,...;;--

;?'
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403- INE-001-01

Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403-I NE-001 -0 1 PAGE 3140

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 7
2. STANDARDS AND REFERENCE ............................................................................................................... 8
2.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTEROPERABILITY (TSI) .. .. .... .... ...... ..... .. ... .. ............ ........... ........... ... .. .. .... 8
2.2EUROPEAN CENELEC STANDARDS .... .... .... .. .. .. ..... ... ...... ..... ... ......... ... ..... ... .. ... ..... .... ..... .. ........ ...... ............ .... . 8
3. SCOPE OF WORK ......................................................................................................................................... 9
4. BASIC DESIGN ............................................................................................................................................ 10
4.1 ELECTRIFICATION SYSTEM ON MAIN LINE ... ........................ .... ... .. ...... .... .. ... ... .. ... ..... ......... .... .... ..... ... .... ..... ... 10
4.1.1 Subsystems .. ... .. ....... ...... ...... ... ................ ... ....... ... ..... ... ... .... ... .. .... ... .. .. .... .... ..... ............... ................. ... .... IO
4.1 .2 Overhead Catenary System .. ... ............. ...... .... ... ........... .... .. ...... .... ...... .. .......................... ..... .......... ... .... IO
4. 1.3 feeder stations, .. .......... ... ... ....... ... .. ... .. ... ... ........... ...... .... ...... ..... ... ............ ... ......... ................. ... ........ .... ... . II
4. 1.4 sectioning post, auto transformers post............. .... ... ...................... ... ......... ..... ......... ... .. ..... ..... .......... .. 11
::;::_.:~"F··
4.1.5 auxiliary equipment ... ..... ........ ..... ..... .... ......................... .............. ....... ... ... ... .... ...... ... .. ..... .. ... .. ..... ...... ..... . I 1
'.:.::__;.; 4. 1.6 Equipotential Earthing System ............... ............. ........................... .. .......... .... .......... ... .. .. ..... ..... ..... ....... 1I
5. GENERAL OPERATION REQUIREMENT .............................................................................................. 11
6. FONTIONNAL REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................................. 13
6.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT FOR OCS ... ..... ............ ........ ...... ... ... ............. .... ..... .. .. .. .. ..... .. ......... ... ... .. .......... ... .... 13
7. INTERFACES ............................................................................................................................................... 14
7.1HHRCIVILWORKS .. .... ............ ...... .. ..... ............... ......... .. ........ ...... ....... .. ... .. ... ... ..... .. ......... ...................... .. .. .. ... l4
7.1. 1 Protective Coatings ... .. ... .... .......... ........ .. ........ .......... ... ........ .. .... ..... ... ..... ...... .......... ... .... ... ... ... ............... .. 14
7. 1.2 Cables and duct .. ............. ...... ............. ... .... ... ............. ...... ..................... ........... ..... ..... ....... ..... ................. I4
7.2HHR STATIONS ....... ....... ... ... .... .. ... ..... .... ............ .... .................. ..... .... .. ................. .. .. ... ... .. ..... ... .... .... ... ... ....... .. 14
7.3HHR TRACK ....................... .. ...... .. ... .. ..... ..... ............ ............... .. .......... ....... ......... ... ... .... ... ...... .... ... .. .......... .... .. . 14
7.4HHR POWER SUPPLY .... .... ... .... ........ ........ .. ... .... ......... .... .... .... .... ... .. .... ..... ... ..... ........ .. ....... ................. .... ........ 14
7.5HHR SIGNALLING ..... .... ... ........ ....... ..... .. .. ... ..... ... ....... .... .. .......... .... ...... .. ..... ...... ....... ............ ..... ... .... ... .... ..... ... 14
7.6HHR TELECOMMUNICATION ................................ ... .... .... .. .... ...... ........... ... .... .. .. ..... .. ... ...... ..... ... ........ ....... .. ..... 15
7.7HHR ROLLING STOCK ........... .... ..... ...... ... ....... .... .... ................. .... .... ..... ... .. .... ... .... .... .... ... .. ............................. 15
8. BUILDING REQUIREMENT ....................................................................................................................... 16
9. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT ................................................................................................................... 17
9.1 DYNAMIC REQUIREMENTS ...... .. ... .. ............ ... .. .... ....... ... .. ........ .. .... ... ............... ... .. ... .. .................... ................... 17
9.2CLEARANCES ..... ............... .............. .............. ... ... .. ........ ......................... .. .. ... .... .. ..... ... .. ..... ... .. ..... ...... .......... .. . 17
9. 2. 1 Electrical Clearances ... .... .. ... ... ........................... ....... ... .. .. ..... .. ..................... .. .... ........ .. ... ..... ... .. ..... ...... . I 7
9.2.2 Public Access and Safety Distances .... ....... .. ..... ... .. ............. .... ..... ... .. .... ...... ... .. ... .... ... .. ........ ..... ......... 17
9.2.3 Loadings .................. .................. .. ... ... ... ... .................................. ............ .. ... ... ...... ... .......... .. ... ... ....... ... ... ... I8
9.3SPAN LENGTH .... ...... ..... ... ..... .. ... .. ............... .. ....... ... ....... .. ..... ...... ... ..... .. ...... ....... .... .... ..... ...... .. .. ...................... 18
9.4TENSION LENGTHS .... .... ..... ... ... .. ... ....... ... ........ ... ... .. ..... ....... ....... .. .. .. ..... .... ...... .... ... ... ................. ..... ..... ... ..... ... 18
9.50VERHEAD BRIDGES ... ............................ .......... ... ....... ..... .. ........ :............. ... ... .. .. ... .. ... .......... ..... .... ... .............. 19
9.60CS TYPES ................. ....... .. ... .. ... .......... .... .. .. ..... ......... ... .......... ..... .... ..... .... ...... ... ...... .. .............. ... .. ............... 19
9.6.1
9.6.2
9.6.3
9.6.4
9.6.5
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403-INE-001-01 PAGE 4/40

9.7SECTIONING DIAGRAM .................... ...... .. ....... ... .... .................... .................... ............ .... ..... ................ .. ........... 21
9. 7.1 Overlaps .............................. ..... ...... ........ ... ... .. .... ...................... ....... ... ..................... ... ... ................... ........ 21
9. 7.2 Neutral Sections .. ............................ .. .... ... .................... ...... ... ... ... .. .................. .. ...... ..... ......... .... ... ... ........ 22
9. 7. 3 Pantograph Switching .... ... .................................. .. .... .. ..... ..... ..... ....... .. ....... .. .. .... ..... .... ......... ...... ....... .. .... 22
9. 7.4 Switchgear ... .................... .... .. ..... ..... .. ... ....... .. ........ .. .......................................................... .... .. .... ...... .. ... . 22
9. 7. 5 Section Switches ............. .. ... ........ ... ..... .... .. ..... .................................. .. ............ ... ...... ..... .... ............. .. ....... 22
9. 7.6 Section Insulators ... ..... ... .. ................. ... .... .... ...... ............ .. .... .... .. ..... .. .............. ........................... .. ......... .. 22
9.8CONDUCTORS ................ .. .... .. .... ..... ..... ....... ............................. .. .............. .... .. .. ..... ........ ...................... ... .... ..... 22
9.8.1 Contact Wire .... ........... .. ..... ....... .. .. .............. ... ...... .............. ...... .. ... ... ................ ... ...... ... ............................ 22
9.8.2 Droppers and Jumpers ... .. ..... ..... ..... ........ ... ....... ... .. .... ... .. ................. .. .. ..... .................. ....... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. . 23
9.8.3 Tensions and Tensioning .. ... ........... ... ..... ... .. ... ..... ... ... ...... .. ..... .. .. .. ... .. .... .. ........ ............... ....................... 23
9.8.4 Factor of Safety ... ................... ...................... ......................... ...................................... ....................... ..... 23
9.8.5 Temperature .............. ... ..... ... .. ....... .. ... .. ..... ... ... .... ..... .... ..... ... .. ..... .... .... ... ... ....... ............. .... .... .... .. ... .... ..... 23
9.91NSULATORS ............ ..... .............. ..... ...... ... ...... ...... ..... ... ... .. .. ... .. ..... ... .. .. .......... .. ....... ..... ..... .. .......... ............ .. .... 24
9.9.1 Insulation Material and Safety Factors ..... ...... .......... .. ... ....... ............ ..... ............ ... ................................ 24
9.9.2 Creepage ... ...... .. .. ..... ...... ............................................ .... ............................ .. ... ..... ... ... .. ... .... ............. ... .... . 24
9.10 OCS STRUCTURES .. ......... .. ... .. ......... ... ... .. ............. .... ..... ... ... ..... ... ....... .... ..... ...... ... ... .. ....... ...... ....... ...... . 24
9.1 0. 1Location Identification ............. ..... .. ............................... ... ...... .... ...................... .. .. .. ................... .. .... .. ..... . 25
9.10.20CS Foundations ............. ............................................. ....... ....... .... ......... .......... ..................................... 25
9.10.30CS Support and Registration Assemblies ...... .. .. .. ................ .................... ............ ................... ......... 26
9.10.40CS Balance Weight Assemblies ........ ............ .... .. ... .... .......... ..................................................... ........ 27
9.10.50CS Hardware ..... ..... ... .... .. ... ............... ... .. .... ... .. .. ..... .. .... ...... ....... ... .... .... ...... ..... ................. .. .. ... .. .. ...... ... 27
9.10.6earthing and bonding ... .. ... .... ..... ... .. ... ............. ... .. ... .. .. ..... .. ... ... .... .. .......... .. ... .... .. .. .... .. .. ..... ... .. ... ...... ..... .. 27
9.11 MEASUREMENTS ............ .... ... ......... .... ............. ... .. ........ .. ... ............. .......... ............. ..... ..... ......... .. .... ... ..... 27
9.11 .1Heights ... ..... .. ... ......... ... .. .................................................... ...... ....... ........ ... .. ... ..... ......... .. ........ .. ................ 27
9.11 .2Cross Track ... ...... ..................... ... ....... .............. ........................ ....... ... ... .... ............................................... 27
9.11.3Aiong Track .. .... ........ ................................................................. .... ... .......... .... ...... .... .. ... ... .... ............ ........ 27
9.12 CURRENT COLLECTION ........ ....................... ...... ... ... ...... ... .................... .................... .. ............ ....... .. ....... 27
9.13 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ..... ... ...... .................... ............................. ....... ............... .. ..... .... .... ...................... 28
9. 13. 1 Contact Loss ....... ... ... ........ ...................... .. ..... ...... ... ... .. .................. .. ..... .... ..... ..... .. .. ... ... ......... .... .... ... .... .. . 28
9.13.2Uplift ..... .......................... ................... ... ... ... .... ...... ............... .... ............... .......... ........ .......... .. ......... ............ 28
9.13.3Contact Force ..... ... .. ..... ................... .. ... ...... .. ...... .. .. ............... ............... ..... ............. ................................. 30
9.13.4Wind ....... ...... .. ...... ... .. ................................................... ........... ............... ...... .... .... .... .. .... ...... ... .. .. ... ... ........ 30
9.13.5Reference System Measurement Or Simulation .. ...... .. .. .... .. .... ......... ................................................. 30
10.RAMS ............................................................................................................................................................. 32
10.1 RELIABILITY .... .... ......... .. ......... ... ... .... ..... .. ..... ... ..................... .. ... .. ............ ... .... ... .... ...... ....... ..... ..... .... ..... . 32
10.2 AVAILABILITY ............... .. .................. ... .......... .. ................ ...... .. ......... .................. .. ..... .. .............. ........ .. .... 32
10.3 MAINTAINABILITY .... ... ... .... ... ... .. .... ......... .. ..... .. ... ...... ... ... ... .... .... ... ... ... ...... .. ....... ........ .. .............. ....... ... ... . 32
10.4 SAFETY ..................... ..... .... ...................... ...... .... .............................. .......... ... ........... ............................... 33
11. DESIGN REQUIREMENT ........................................................................................................................... 34
12.MANUFACTURING REQUIREMENT ....................................................................................................... 35
13.PROCUREMENT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT .................................. 36
13.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT .... ................ ... ..... ...... .... .... ......... .......... ...... .... ... ..... ............. ... .. .. .... ... .... .. 36
13.2 INSTALLATION METHOD STATEMENT .. .. ...... .. ... .. .......... .. .... : .. ....... .......... ... .. ... ..... .... .......... ... ....... .......... 36
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403-INE-001-01 P AGE 5/40

PROJECT REFERENCES

1 HHR - LO- HV -403 - INE - 001 High Voltage Power Supply System
2 HHR - LO - SY - 301 - INE - 001 System Schematic
3 HHR - LO - HV - 301 - INE - 001 Preliminary Study of Power Supply
4 HHR - LO- CT - 602- SYS - 002 General Specifications : SECTION 2

Glossary_
t•_• ••_, Verification Test and Acce___Q_tancejVTAJ
·.... .:.' 6 HHR - LO - CT - 602 - SYS - 012 General Specifications : section 12
Training requirements
Ref : HHR- LO- CA -403- INE-001-0 1 PAGE 6/40

1. GLOSSARY
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403- INE-001 -01 PAGE 7/40

The following rules concerning OCS design, works, operations and maintenance, shall be
respected as they are or even improved. Any lack of compliance shal l be notified and written by
the Consortium to Government, and will only be allowed with Government written ag reement.
The following TSI for high speed railway system, equivalent or superior, shall be respected.

. ....: • Technical Specification for lnteroperability - Infrastructure Subsystem
-···· ·'
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability - Maintenance Subsystem
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability - Persons with reduced mobility
European CENELEC standards, equivalent or superior, shall be respected.
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403- INE-001 -0 1 PAGE 8/40

3. SCOPE OF WORK
This document is part of the Performance Specification for Phase 2 and deals with the Main Line
Overhead Catenary System of HHR. it aims at describing its basic design as well as its
requirements and interfaces, which shall be respected by the Consortium, according to
Government general requirements for the Railway.
Unless specifically excluded in these requirements, the Consortium shall provide everything
and proper operation of the main overhead catenary system
Scope of work for this system includes:

• Masts with their foundations
• Other metal support elements
• Anchoring installation in normal or elevated from the ground level
• Cantilevers
• Insulators
• Switches and isolator
• Conductors (contact wire, messenger wire, dropper, electrical connection, .. )
• Anchoring devices with all their fittings such as anchors, tensioning devices, counterweights,
etc.
• Several other material for assembling and supporting the catenary system
• Special contact line structures, such as tunnels, overlaps, bridges , middle catenary anchor
points, neutral section
• Sectioning insulators
• Bridging earth ing and in general all material and fitting of the earthing system and the
equipotential connections .
• Transformer of tension including their bonding system
• Auxiliary equipment such as local point heating assembly,

4. BASIC DESIGN
The following chapter explains main OCS requirements and gives some sizing examples .
The Consortium shall design all the necessary equipments according to standards and TSI.
4. 1. 1 SUBSYSTEMS
The main line electrification comprises a number of subsystems , which include at least:
• Overhead Catenary System

• Feeder Stations
• Sectioning post and Auto Transformer Posts
• Auxiliary equipments (Local Point Heating and back up signalling power supply
4. 1.2 OVERHEAD CATENARY SYSTEM
Req 01 The Overhead catenary consists of messenger, contact and auxiliary wires, electrification
supporting, their foundations , fixings to viaducts, tunnels or other adjacent structures like in
stations, cantilevers and registrations, small parts steelwork, fittings, droppers, jumpers,
insulators, isolators, switches, pulleys , and weights.
The OCS is supported above the track for the purpose of supplying traction power collection to the
pantographs of the Train sets.
Req 02The messenger wire and contact wire shall be tensioned separately and automatically by
counterweights automatic tensioning devices to compensate wire expansion due to
temperature variation.
Req 03The OCS shall be equipped with continuous conductors in order to be used as earth wire
and shall be connected to the earthing points of the respective masts OCS non live
metallic supports, parts and other structures shall be interconnected to the earth potential
via continuous aerial earth conductors
Req 04The OCS , for sidings and Depots may be a simple catenary system supported appropriately
to suit the system speed at that location . OCS that is not directly connected to the Main
Line may be of the fixed termination type.
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403-INE-001-01

4.1 .3 FEEDER STATIONS,
6 Feeder Stations could be set up along the line in order to supply power to the OCS and the
negative feeder from a 380kV I 25-0-25kV transformers .
One feeder can be connected to the Overhead Catenary System for pantograph pick-up while the
other is connected to negatives along track .feeders.
Location of all this equipment is not definitely fixed and the Consortium may modify them, provided
that the level of performance and RAMS remains at least unreduced.
According to this, Feeder Station have been provisionally located as follows
• Feeder Station no1 Pk 35+200

4.1 .4 SECTIONING POST, AUTO TRANSFORMERS POST
Req 06 Sectioning Posts are located between Feeder Stations and are equipped to switch power
around Neutral Sections under contingency operating conditions such as emergency or
maintenance requirements
Req 07 Auto transformers posts are located between Feeder Stations and sectioning posts The
autotransformers are connected across the negative along track feeder and the OCS
equipment. The centre tap of the autotransformer is connected to the traction return
ground circuit. Therefore, the voltage between the OCS and the negative along-track
feeder is 50kV, 60Hz.
4. 1. 5 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
Req 08 For turnout point heating generally located on area higher than 700m and signalling back
up power supply located on each MSR, auxiliary transformers could be installed along the
track on dedicated shield.
4. 1. 6 EQUIPOTENTIAL EARTHING SYSTEM
Req 09 The design of the OCS and of the return current paths shall ensure the safety of both
passengers and railway staff under normal operating and fault conditions . .
RAL OPERATION REQUIREMENT
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403-INE-001-01 PAGE 11 /40

The electrification system shall be designed, manufactured, and erected in accordance with best
industry practice.
Req 10 The electrification system shall be designed using standardized components suitable for
high speed railway., These components shall be readily available in operation and
throughout the world
!.••••
't.:•:•.-..;..
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403-I NE-001 -0 1 PAGE 12/40

6. FONTIONNAL REQUIREMENTS
6.1 General Requirement for OCS
The Electrification System comprises the Power Supply System, the Overhead Catenary System
(OCS), the Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System and auxiliary/emergency
power supplies as described in these Functional Requirements
Req 11 The OCS for the HHR railways shall be based on European/ Asian OCS design for main
line and depots
IReq 13 The OCS shall be capable of bi-directional operation.
The Consortium shall provide a catenary design that, in combination with the selected pantograph, will
provide a life of 30 years for the contact wire with a sufficient safety margin for the mechanical tension
warranting contact wire integrity.
If the Consortium can reasonably demonstrate that the contact wire life has been maximized using
reasonable engineering design and a 30 year Design Life cannot be achieved, the Consortium shall
propose and justify the appropriate Design Life for the contact wire .
Req 14 The OCS shall electrify all of the HHR railway tracks except where indicated. This
electrification includes tracks within stations, sidings and Depots/workshop areas. The
Consortium shall provide an electrification design that suits the track layout drawings, track
alignment, data and power supply schematic.
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403- IN E-001 -01 PAGE 13/40

7. INTERFACES
7.1 HHR Civil works
Interface requirement include:

• OCS supporting structures in tunnel , viaduct, cut and cover, bridges
7. 1. 1 PROTECTIVE COATINGS
The Consortium shall liaise with Route Civil Works contractor regarding the protective
coating requirement between OCS masts, small parts steelwork and metallic civil
structures.
7. 1. 2 CABLES AND DUCT
The Consortium shall liaise with the Route Civil Works contractor and Station construction
regarding the placement of cables
7.2 HHR stations
Interface requirement include:

• OCS supporting structures in stations including platforms, buildings
7.3 HHR track
The Consortium shall deal with the gauge coherence between track and OCS.
7.4 HHR Power supply
The Consortium shall provide all necessa ry material including the terminations for making all
interconnections between the OCS and Feeder and Section ing Stations
7.5 HHR Signalling
The Consortium shall provide back up power supplies derived from the OCS for the Signalling
Subsystem .
The Consortium shall provide in accordance with signalling detail and location of connection to the
earthing system
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403- INE-001-01 PAGE 14/40

7.6 HHR Telecommunication
The Consortium shall provide communications systems to control OCS devices .
7.7 HHR Rolling Stock
The Consortium shall determine dynamic clearance envelope taken into account of tra in
set and pantograph size. This envelope shall form the basis for calculating positions of the
OCS structures, support assemblies and reg istration assemblies.
The Consortium shall coordinate with the pantograph size according to TSI.

Not applicable
:··:-.:;.,.
···-·.

9. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT
The Consortium shall meet the intent of these Technical Requirements but is free to offer
alternative designs while meeting all performance criteria
9.1 Dynamic requirements
Req 15 In order to achieve an excellent dynamic performance the design speed in the contact wire
shall be less than 70% of the wave propagation speed . The Consortium has to prove by a
Dynamic analysis the interplay vehicle/pantograph/OCS.
9.2 Clearances
9. 2. 1 ELECTRICAL CL EARANCES
For the OCS the minimum electrical air clearance between any live components or parts and any non
live or grounded items or structures for be used by the Consortium are set out in the following table
(extracted of EN 50119)
Clearance Static Dynamic

Normal 270 150
The OCS shall be designed such that electrical clearances between any live part of the system and
the Train sets shall be equal to or greater than those utilized for existing 25KV high-speed railway
systems in operation . The Consortium shall declare the static and kinematics loading gauges that
apply to the proposed Train sets, and state the clearance requirements that apply between the 25KV
OCS and the rolling stock static and dynamic gauges .
Req 16 The clearances defined above shall be maintained for all wind speeds and system
temperatures likely to be encountered when the conditions are such that trains may be
operated.
Notwithstanding the above care shall be taken with the design of the OCS when the distance between
live 25KV equipment and non live or grounded equipment is small , paying particular attention to the
environmental conditions of KSA. The shape of the components shall be such as to minimize the
electrical stress so that discharges do not occur and so as maximize the impulse withstand voltage .
9. 2. 2 PUBLIC ACCESS AND SAFETY DISTANCES
Req 17 Any live 25KV shall be positioned at least 5m frorri any place where the public or untrained
staffs have access, except at station platforms, where this limit shall be 3.5m measured
from the platform edge . Suitable safety screening shall be provided where this is
impractical.
5KV equipment shall not be located above station platforms.
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -4 03- INE-001-0 1 P AGE 17/40

Req 19 Live 25KV equipment shall not be extended beyond the end of sidings or buffer stops .
Req 20 OCS structures located in areas to which the public has access shall be of the type that
cannot be easily climbed or shall be provided with an anti-climbing guard .
The Consortium shall screen , from live 25KV equipment , Wayside equipment that may require access by staff.
9. 2.3 LOADINGS
Req 21 The Consortium shall define design operating conductor temperature range , conductor
mechanical tensions, wind loadings, safety factors , and all criteria together with applicable
--:::.:.:.-·· code and/or standard references to be utilized for the design of the OCS, including for the
OCS foundations and structural support calculations
9. 3 Span Length
The spacing or span length between supports shall be the maximum achievable while taking account
of the following :
• The lateral displacement of the OCS in high wind conditions, allowing for the local increase
of wind speeds due to topographical features , embanked track, viaducts , equipment
stagger, and the presence of a train
• The offset required on curved track
• The existence of specific civils features such as tunnels , overhead bridges, and of track
crossove rs, OCS mechanical and electrical overlaps and OCS phase breaks ..
,_.:;-. -. Req 22 The Consortium shall provide information on the effect of the wind (including gusts) on the
OCS and Train sets . This shall include the maximum distance the contact wire can be
displaced from the pantograph head center line , the Train set and pantograph sway
envelope , the effect of wind on vehicle and pantograph sway, the effect of wind on the
catenary conductors, lateral movement of the contact and catenary wires due to catenary
along track movement and deflection of masts due to wind . All the above shall be assessed
at the operational design wind speed taking account of ground roughness , gust content,
topographical exposure and height over embankments and viaducts, as well as track and
OCS tolerances .
9.4 Tension Le ngths
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -40 3-INE-00 1-0 1 PAGE 18/40

The Consortium shall provide details of the Tension Lengths of the proposed equipment for straight
track and for track containing the minimum radius of curvature for a viaduct, a tunnel , and at grade.
9.5 Overhead Bridges
Where bridges pass over the OCS and the equipment is free running under the bridge, then the Uplift
of the conductors in span shall not infringe upon minimum specified electrical clearances under any
operating conditions. The Consortium shall supply information on the maximum Uplift of the catenary
wire in mid-span for the highest contact force conditions . This shall be supplied for a range of span
lengths likely to be adopted where the OCS passes under bridges .
9.6 OCS Types
The equipment for each track shall be designed to be mechanically and electrically independent from
the one of the adjacent track such that trains may continue to run on one track even though there is an
incident on the adjacent track or the adjacent OCS is isolated.
Within the limits stated below the static height of the contact wire above the track shall be at the ;:-.,;-:
discretion of the Consortium but shall be chosen to maximize all clearance distances and ensure
optimal current collection.
Req 23 The Consortium shall justify the contact wire height and system height chosen in terms of
clearances, pantograph behaviour, and OCS geometry that are required to fit all tunnel,
viaduct, stations and grade sections of the HHR route.
Limits:
• The contact wire height at the support shall be more than 5.08 above rail level
• The contact wire height at the support shall be less than 5.30 above rail level
9.6.1 CROSS SECTIONS
The Consortium shall detail the typical cross section of the proposed OCS for straight track, at
registration points and at mid span locations for tunnel, viaduct, stations and at grade situations. The
static position of the wire , its permitted uplift, and the sway envelope of the Train set pantograph shall
be shown and dimensioned .
9.6.2 MAIN LiNE
The OCS shall be designed for the maximum operating speed of 320 Km/h with some contingency.
The Consortium shall ensure that the OCS design and equipment, including span lengths, cantilevers
and registration assemblies , insulator, droppers, jumpers, clamps and fittings , etc and any OCS
supporting arrangements are designed for use at this maximum operating speed.
Additionally, OCS foundations, masts, portal structures and any other OCS supporting structures shall
be designed and calculated according to codes or standards to be specified by the Consortium, to
withstand extreme wind conditions, that may be encountered along the HHR route.
Standard components, as used on open route equipment, shall be used as far as practical. The
Consortium shall provide details of any OCS components that are specific only to tunnels.
ithin tunnels may be of any material that the Consortium can demonstrate that
PAGE 19/40
• Has given satisfactory service performance in a previous tunnel environment

electrification scheme
• Will be suitable for the applied loading . The Consortium shall provide calculations to
demonstrate suitability
• Will have a Design Life of 30 years (Consortium may recommend otherwise) in a
tunnel environment. The Consortium shall obtain details of the environmental and
corrosive conditions within each tunnel on the line, and ensure that its proposed
design will be satisfactory
The OCS within the tunnels shall be automatically tensioned and wherever possible the tensioning
equipment shall be located outside the tunnel.
The Consortium shall ensure that the current collection criteria and clearance requirements are
satisfied .
The Consortium shall provide earthing devices at tunnel access points and close to the separation
points between sections.
These shall be either fitted manually or remote controlled fixed installations .
The supporting structures and anchor points may be attached to any point on the tunnel wall or ceiling
using fixing and fasteners attached to the wall after construction . All fixing and fasteners shall be
either inherently non-corroding or surface coated to give a life equal to the supporting structures one .
The Consortium shall provide details of this design.
9. 6. 4 DEPOTS AND SIDINGS
The OCS for Depots and sidings shall be designed for the maximum operating speed allowed within
the facilities concerned .
The OCS in Depots and sidings shall consist of a simple catenary system supported on cantilevers,
portal structures. Fixed termination without provision for automatic tensioning may be used provided
that the minimum height of the contact wire at its maximum temperature does not infringe on the
specified electrical clearance between live contact wire and Grounded rail vehicle. The specified
clearances apply to all Grounded metalwork within the Yards and sidings .
The Consortium shall provide information defining the changes of contact wire height over the ambient
temperature range and the tensions in the contact and catenary wires over the same temperature
range .
The mechanical tension in the contact wire shall not exceed the tension to give a factor of safety of 2
on fully worn contact wire at the minimum operating temperature and maximum design loads including
wind .
The tracks in the Heavy maintenance Workshops shall be wired , except where specified , the wire
being as high as possible while remaining within reach of the pantograph. The Consortium shall
propose an OCS , within Heavy maintenance workshops based on a fixed , single registered "trolley
wire " system.
As all the stabling areas of the rolling stock depots shall be covered , the Consortium shall provide and
appropriate OCS.
Any railway tracks interconnecting the Yards or sidings to the Main Line, shall also be equipped with
Where tracks diverge from the Main Line, the OCS shall ·sturbance to
pantographs current collection on the Main Line than would een Tension
Lengths . In addition, the design shall be such that the cu nts shall be
satisfied . The Consortium shall provide diagrams describi of OCS for
crossovers, for the maximum allowed train speed .
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -40 3- INE-001-0 1 PAGE 20/40

0
9.7 Sectioning Diagram
Req 25 :The Consortium shall provide a sectioning diagram that takes account at least of the following.
All wired tracks
The designation of all sections which may be isolated
The location of the stations
The location of all bridges and tunnels
The location of Feeder Stations
The location of Sectioning Stations and Paralleling Stations
The location ofNeutral Sections, section insulators and insulated Overlaps
The location of the auxiliary equipments
The location of switches and isolators
The location of all maintenance Grounding points
The location of cross over
The location of Neutral Sections, near Feeder Stations and midpoints between Feeder Stations.
These shall not be in areas where acceleration or regenerative braking is needed for normal :- ·
service patterns
The electrical sectioning diagram shall be arranged such that the OCS may be isolated on any track,
leaving an adjacent track energized and in full operation . The Consortium shall detail its proposal for
sectioning the route .
Sectioning of the OCS shall be provided, matched to crossovers between tracks of the HHR, to permit
single line operation in the event of a fault on one of the OCS sections.
Appropriate sectioning of the OCS shall also be provided in station , siding and Depot areas .
The sectioning facilities provided by each bus-section coupler require corresponding sectioning
facilities provided by a Neutral Section in the OCS for each track.
Sectioning of the OCS shall be positioned taking into account that the Signa ling System will be
designed such that Train sets at a Stopping Point will not have pantographs in grounded or un-
powered sections.
9. 7. 1 OVERLAPS
Req 26 Overlaps shall be designed to provide a smooth transition between Tension Lengths and shall meet
the current collection criteria . The Consortium shall provide arrangements of the proposed
Overlap designs .
Insulated Overlaps shall be positioned relative to the Signaling System such that Train sets brought to
a stop at a Stopping Point will not have pantographs connecting adjacent Tension Lengths of the
OCS . Wherever practical , the same rule applies to other Overlaps .
Overlaps shall be positioned clear of crossovers and complex track layouts.
The contact wires coming into and going out of a running section shall run parallel and at the same
height for a distance sufficient to give a smooth transition under all allowable pantograph Uplift force
conditions.
An insulated Overlap shall be provided at locations where it is necessary to electrically connect
adjacent Tension Lengths through external switches . The clearance between overlapping equipment
must be such that they shall remain electrical separated under all conditions or by passage of
panto ra h. The Consortium shall define the clearances he intends o use at insulated overlaps .
cfl~JiffS~~t}f Overlap, insulation shall be provided in the out of running sections of contact and
~~~E;l n M~P.IJviff?A1.(;).'f\ oth ten:nination Tension Lengths . The insulators shall be in such position as not to
~· i_Elfring : cleou'gn s to the pantograph head under any conditions . The Consortium shall define the
0~ "0~ e r.ance they i
t -
d to use at insulated overlaps .
::J :- ,1:
~ . ;f't
'- ' A ''/(p
~
.. ......._ ..
•• . ~~..)
), •
((-i . •
~f.
.,
-403-INE-00 1-0 1 P AGE 21 /40

I~
An uninsulated Overlap shall not have insulation except at terminations of conductors. Jumpers shall
be located to provide electrical continuity between adjacent Tension Lengths.
9. 7.2 NEUTRAL SECTIONS
Where electrical insulation between adjacent sections, fed by different phases of the Power Supply
System, is required , the design of the OCS shall be such that no reduction of Train set speed will be
required to meet the current collection criteria.
The design of these Neutral Sections shall be such that no maintenance greater than that described
for the OCS will be required . The Consortium shall provide details of this design.
Req 27 If the Neutral Section consists of a series of Overlaps in order to provide isolation between
phases of the Power Supply System, then switchers must be provided to enable the
energized and grounded sections to be safely energized in the event of a train stopping
with a pantograph in this section .
9. 7.3 PANTOGRAPH SWITCHING
If necessary, a mean shall be provided to operate the main circuit breakers of the Train sets during the
,- :_. .. approach to and exit from Neutral Sections (Automatic Power Control).
9. 7.4 SWITCHGEAR
Req 28AII OCS switches and isolators shall to be operated by remote control and monitored from
OCC . All enclosures shall to have protecting rating , suitable for the operating environment
in accordance with IEC 529.or superior All switches and isolators shall to have secure
method of preventing unauthorized local and remote operation of their mechanisms . The
Consortium shall provide details of this design .
9. 7.5 SECTION SWITCHES
Req 29 Where manually operated switches are provided as part of the sectioning arrangements of
the OCS, these switches shall be provided with a method of locking in the closed , open
ungrounded or open Grounded position , such that unauthorized operation of the switch is
prevented . The Consortium shall provide details of this design .
9. 7.6 SECTION INSULA TORS
The OCS shall be divided into electrical sections for maintenance and operating purposes. Overlaps
or Neutral Sections shall normally provide insulation between sections . Where this cannot be
achieved at crossovers and turnouts, modern high-speed , in-running section insulators, capable of
operating at maximum Line Speed , shall be used . The Consortium shall submit details of the section
insulator to be used.
9.8 Conductors
The material of the contact wire and catenary wire shall be chosen to minimize creep of the
conductors . The Consortium shall provide information on the creep of the conductors at the declared
maximum operating temperature and at the annual mean ambient temperature .
9.8.1 CONTACT WIRE
The Consortium shall declare the anticipated life of the contact wire
defined.
This shall be based on practical experience gained during the oper and
documentary evidence shall be provided to support this value . The C lues
for average wear rates at mid-span locations and peak wear rate at poin and
speed are high . The wear rates shall be presented per pantograph pass
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403-INE-001-01 PAGE 22140

Req 30The material for the contact wire shall be copper or copper alloy with a conductivity as high
as possible (preferably not less than 80% IACS - International Annealed Copper Standard -
at 20°C and in the work hardened condition) considering the requirements for adequate
strength to support operation at the required speed, and minimum wear of the contact wire .
Req 31 No joints, splices or repair sleeves shall be allowed in the contact wire.
9. 8.2 DROPPERS AND JUMPERS
The design of droppers and jumpers shall be at the discretion of the Consortium .
Droppers shall be designed to carry any load imposed during equipment maintenance without being
detached from either contact or catenary wires . The Consortium shall state the necessary maximum
design load of a dropper.
The Consortium shall decide whether in span jumpers are required between contact and catenary
wires and at what intervals . '<J
9.8.3 TENSIONS AND TENSIONING
The tensioning system shall maintain constant mechanical tension in the catenary and contact wires
over the maximum operating temperature range . The Consortium shall define these tension
tolerances, including variations and friction, and provide details of the proposed design.
Req 32 The Consortium shall design the tensioning system to minimize the need for seasonal
adjustments.
Provision shall be made in the design for adjustment of Tension Lengths to allow for conductor creep .
Adjustment shall be required no more frequently than every 4 years .
Req 33 The Consortium shall detail the cross sectional area, diameter dimensions and
composition, the ultimate tensile strength, and the design mechanical tensions of the main
conductors of the OCS.
9.8.4 FACTOR OF SAFETY
The contact wire shall have a factor of safety of at least 2.0 taking into account the contact wire wear
after 30 years of service life . The factor of safety shall be determined from the Consortium 's declared
values of contact wire operating in service load (or applied design load) and minimum breaking load.
If the Consortium can reasonably demonstrate that the contact wire life has been maximized using
reasonable engineering design and a 30 year Design Life cannot be achieved, the Consortium shall
propose and justify the appropriate Design Life for the contact wire .
The contact wire will be considered fully worn when the minimum cross sectional area, representing
the minimum safety factor of 2, has been reached at any point in the Tension Length. The guaranteed
performance will be determined based upon measurement of proportional cross-sectional areas of the
wire used over the first five years in service prorated based upon the number of pantograph passes .
The other conductors of the OCS , including the catenary wire , feeder cable and aerial earth conductor
shall have a factor of safety of at least 3.0. The factors of safety shall be determined from the
breaking loads and their maximum in
f the conductors shall be such that for maximum design current, maximum
est ambient air temperature, applicable solar radiation, and system currents
stem study The conductor temperature rise shall be within the Consortium's
ot be excessive .
PAGE 23/40
Req 34 The Consortium shall provide a diagram showing a typical daily OCS temperature cycle
and detailed calculations predicting the OCS temperature rise for worst case conditions .
An excessive conductor temperature rise is defined here as one that would result in:
~ A marked deterioration of the quality of current collection due to loss of mechanical tension
~ An excessive rate of wire creep which would result in a long-term reduction of system tension
•
1:
The premature failure of OCS electrical connectors
An unacceptable oxidation rate for the wires.
The Consortium shall state the maximum permitted system operating temperature that satisfies the
above requirements and shall provide sufficient documentary evidence to justify this temperature.
Req 35 The current rating of all cable and components used in the traction return ground circuit
shall be chosen so that the HHR can be operated at Line Speed for the saturated service
pattern.
9.9 Insulators
9.9. 1 INSULATION MATERIAL AND SAFETY FACTORS
Insulators shall be made of ceramic, glass or porcelain and tested to IEC 60383-1 , IEC 60720, IEC
60433 or superior. Polymeric insulators can be used at the Consortium's discretion and these shall
satisfy a Relevant Standard. The Consortium shall detail the design of its proposed insulators and
shall demonstrate that any polymeric insulators chosen will provide a life equal to the rest of the OCS.
Req 36 Where polymeric insulators are proposed , the Consortium 's attention is drawn to the high
levels of solar radiation in KSA. The Consortium shall provide evidence of satisfactory life testing
of these types of polymeric insulators in appropriate levels of solar radiation . The safety factor
shall be not less than 5.0.
For insulators that are either made completely of porcelain or for which the load-bearing member is of
porcelain, the safety factor shall be not less than 3.0. This is based on the ultimate tensile load and
the maximum bending moment as compared to the maximum design loads in tension and bending .
In locations where the mechanical failure of an insulator may cause damage to passing trains,
insulators shall be of a type that will retain mechanical integrity, under severe flash-over or impact
conditions and comply with a Relevant Standard. The Consortium shall describe such suitable
insulators.
9.9.2 CREEPAGE
The required creepage distance of an insulator shall be determined using the highest power frequency
voltage measured with respect to ground with the level and type of pollutants present along the HHR.
The Consortium shall undertake a pollution survey to determine the worst conditions , and select the
minimum creepage distance of OCS insulators using the techniques of IEC 507 and IEC 60815, or
equivalent or superior so that an appropriate creepage distance can be chosen and used for all
insulators along the route .
Req 37 The Consortium shall determine the shape of the. insulator and shall declare not only the
anticipated insulator shape , but also creepage and protected creepage distances for the
heavily polluted conditions in KSA.
9.10 OCS Structures
Will have a Design Life of at least 30 years. Account must be ta ere

and industrial pollution of the environment when estimating th the
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403-INE-001-01

requirements for operating at maximum Trainset speed. In demonstrating the life of

components, the Consortium shall refer to experience with existing installations in a similar
environment, to accelerated conosion tests and to the known anti-conosion properties of the
material proposed.
The masts shall be designed for the permanent and non permanent loads carried and the Consortium
shall supply calculations to demonstrate the acceptability of the proposed mast design .
Req 39 The Consortium shall provide details of the design of the masts, methods of attaching the
OCS fittings, evidence of material durability, and the Relevant Standards that apply.
Bonding of sufficient size to carry maximum fault currents must be provided between components
designed to be at earth potential.
Req 40 Corrosion protection of the base material of the masts shall be by surface galvanization (if
metallic masts are used) . The Consortium shall supply full details of the method of
galvanization, including thickness, method of application, and the Relevant Standards that
apply.
9.10.1 LOCATION IDENTIFICA T/ON
Req 41 Each mast shall carry a permanent identification number which shall face toward trains
approaching on the adjacent track in the Normal direction and be at such a height that
allows it to be read easily either from the moving driving cab or from the ground. The
number shall be related to the distance in kilometers from a zero datum defined by the
Government and to the number of the structure within each kilometer. The Consortium
shall provide a diagram showing size of numbering and method of application to masts and
other structures.
On the outer face of each mast, an arrow and telephone symbol shall be fitted indicating the direction
of the nearest emergency telephone.
9.10.2 OCS FOUNDA T/ONS

The foundations shall be capable of meeting the structural loading requirements .
The foundations shall be designed for each separate location , the structural dimensions being
dependent on:
• Loads on the masts due to the OCS, feeder cables , tensioning equipment,
insulators, mid-point anchor ties, and all other necessary equipment
• Wind loads on the masts and associated OCS equipment
• Condition of the ground
•
with material
PAGE 25/40
1- '
Req 43 The top surface of the foundation shall be above ground level so that the lower section of
masts cannot become buried. At locations where the track is on a bridge , viaduct, and
station the masts shall be fully integrated into the design of such structure
9.10.3 OCS SUPPORT AND REGISTRA T/ON ASSEMBLIES

The support and registration assembly shall be of any electrically conducting material that the
Consortium can demonstrate suitability for loads applied by the OCS and that will have a Design Life
of 30 years . Components shall not need replacement during their service life except for replacement
due to wear of moving parts , contact wire , or contact wire clamps . Account must be taken of the
marine atmosphere , industrial pollution of the environment, and applicable operating speed when
estimating the life of components .
Req 44 The Consortium shall provide calculations to demonstrate the acceptability of each type of
proposed support and registration assembly design , for the loads to be carried .
The design of the registration assembly must allow for wind loads when the registration arm is in both
"pull-off' and "push-off' modes.
In demonstrating the life of components , the Consortium may refer to experience with existing
installations in a similar environment, to accelerated corrosion tests and to the known anti-corrosive
properties of the material proposed .
Req 45 The Consortium shall detail its proposed methods of corrosion protection including coating
thickness, coating material, methods of application , and the Relevant Standards that apply.
Req 46 The Consortium shall detail its proposals for preventing electrolytic corrosion at points on
support and registration assemblies where dissimilar metals come in contact.
Req 47 The Consortium shall detail the method of adjustment of the OCS height and registration
arm position .
The steady arm shall have the lowest possible effective mass with respect to the contact wire, and be
designed to allow the required maximum Uplift without infringement of mechanical clearances to the
pantograph head in any position within the sway envelope .
Req 48 The steady arm shall apply stagger to the contact wire giving even pantograph contact strip
wear and optimal contact strip life . The stagger shall be alternately on either side of the
track center line on straight track. On curved track the deviation from center line or offset
shall be such as to give the required mid-span offset taking account of wind loading .
Req 49 The Consortium shall detail the stagger and offset dimensions .
Req 50 The staggers offsets , and span lengths of the OCS sh

contact wire will not be displaced beyond the limits of th
any point through the span for all operating conditions.
The registration assemblies shall in all cases be normal to the track at the me
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403- INE-001-0 1 P AGE 26/40

The design of the registration assembly shall have minimum friction in pivots or supports that provide for along-
track movement of the equipment, consistent with cost and durability considerations . The Consortium shall
provide details of the proposed designs.
The registration for the contact wire shall be designed to allow for the maximum Uplift generated by the
pantograph under any operating conditions plus an allowance of 10% for over travel and tolerances . In the
maximum Uplifted position of the registration arm at any location, the pantograph shall not infringe upon
mechanical and electrical clearances with the Trainset in any position within its sway envelope . The Consortium
shall supply a diagram showing the position of the pantograph head and registration assembly under the worst
conditions of contact wire Uplift and vehicle sway.
9.10.4 OCS BALANCE WEIGHT ASSEMBLIES

On viaduct the tensioning equipment shall include a means of preventing the Balance Weight Assemblies from
falling to the ground in the event of OCS wire break.
9.10.5 OCS HARDWARE

All small components of the assembly such as clamps , brackets, nuts, bolts , washers , or bonds shall be corrosion
resistant either by suitable surface coating protection or by using an intrinsically corrosion resistant material .
9. 10.6EARTHING AND BONDING
The Consortium shall be responsible for providing and installing all earthing and bonding works as follows :
Aerial earth wires , interconnections between the aerial earth wires and the buried earth wire and the bonding
to the earth system of lineside metallic infrastructure . The Consortium shall be liaised with other Consortium
to ensure a fully complete traction current return system , that remains safe at all time i.e under acceptable
step and touch potentials during permanent conditions and during short circuit conditions .
9.11 Measurements
The Consortium shall declare the tolerances including wire mechanical tension and on all installation
dimensions of the OCS, to be achieved during equipment installation and subsequent maintenance.
These dimensions shall include at a minimum height above rail of catenary and contact wires , length
and position of droppers , stagger and offset, OCS mast spacing and vertical alignment.
9.11.1 HEIGHTS
OCS wire height measurements shall be taken along the extended line perpendicular to a line drawn
across the top of the rails.
9.11 .2 CROSS TRACK
OCS staggers and offsets shall be measured horizontally and referenced from the track center line
which is vertical for straight track and normal to the inclined tops of rail on super elevated track. All
other cross track dimensions shall be measured horizontally and referenced from the running edge of
the nearest rail.
9.11.3 ALONG TRACK
Along track dimensions shall be measured horizontally in straight lines referenced to points of support
or registration along the nearest main or through track .
9.12 Current Collection
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403- INE-00 1-0 1 P AGE 27/40

shall be capable of withstanding any resultant transient effects without compromising its life or
affecting its performance.
The acceptability of the current collection performance of the OCS and pantograph shall be assessed
using the following criteria that will apply to all pantographs .
9.13 Acceptance criteria
9.13.1 CONTACT LOSS
Contact between pantograph(s) of the Train set and the OCS shall be maintained in such a way that
no interruption to current flow shall occur at any time over the full speed range of the Trainset except
at defined points, such as Neutral Sections where current interruption is a technical requirement.
The measurement of contact loss shall be either by mechanical means or by an optical method. If a
mechanical mean is used, contact loss is defined as zero contact force .
If an optical method is used, the Consortium shall demonstrate that the measurement method is not
subjective. Contact loss , measured in dry conditions , shall be less than 0,2% of the time to traverse a
given OCS section of five consecutive Tension Lengths including Overlaps . If an optical method is
(
j" ·
-··
·:
used , the arc measurements shall be processed on zones traveled at a stabilized speed . To this
effect, speed filters shall be applied on the basis of an average speed± 3 km/h .
Working from the measurement of the current crossing the pantograph and the detection of arcs not
less than 1 ms (with the current taken not less than 30 per cent of its nominal current) the following
information shall be calculated :
• cumulated duration of all the arcs taken into account (n arc),
• duration of the average and maximum arc,
• time during which , during the running , the current through the pantograph is at least equal to
30 per cent of its nominal current (Tcv),
L,t arc (ms)

• no quality factor N Q ( % ) = ( ) xl 00
Tcv ms
• no quality factor related to 100 travelled metres (NQ1 00) .
Req 51 These measurements shall demonstrate that for all combinations of pantograph , OCS , train
speeds and reasonable wind conditions the OCS and pantographs shall meet the following
criteria
cumulated duration of all the arcs taken into account ~ 5ms,
[ no quality factor (NQ) :::; 0,2% .
The current collection performance shall be within the above criteria over the full speed range of the
Trainset on all pantographs. This shall apply to both open air and tunnel OCS sections for all
operating conditions .
9.13.2 UPLIFT
In real operation conditions the Consortium shall perform OCS/pantograph up lift measurement at a
support.
Specific devices shall be fitted on several (4) catenary supports and a
station shall be set up on the HHR
lt shall be located so as to obtain the maximum speed at that point irrespe ·
Measurements:
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403-INE-001-0 1

• lift of the contact wire in several points,

• train speed,
• weather conditions at the station (general condition, wind speed and direction).

Processing :
The following data shall be calculated from the lift of the contact wire when traveled by the trainset
pantographs:
• maximum lift,
• average lift
9.13.3 CONTACT FORCE
The mean contact force between pantograph head and contact wire is made up of the static and
aerodynamic lift forces generated by the pantograph and shall be chosen to optimize current
collection. There shall be no high frequency impact forces sufficient to cause damage to the
pantograph or to any part of the OCS.
9.13.4 WIND
The Consortium shall declare the ambient wind speed , including gusts , from any direction, above
which the current collection performance cannot be achieved.
The Consortium shall declare the ambient wind speed above which it would be necessary to apply
speed limits to trains or stop HHR operation to avoid damage to pantographs and OCS .
9.13.5 REFERENCE SYSTEM MEASUREMENT OR S!MULA TION
The Consortium shall provide , measurements taken during tests of the same combination of pantographs and
OCS over the same speed range. This data shall demonstrate that the equipment being offered will
meet the current collection requirements.
The Consortium shall perform OCS/pantograph dynamic simulations to demonstrate that the
OCS/pantograph dynamic interactions have been optimized to minimize contact loss, minimize the
wear of both contact wire and pantograph collector strips, and to minimize impact forces . and to
demonstrate the quality of the proposed OCS-pantograph interaction.
Req 52The simulations shall demonstrate that for all combinations of pantograph , OCS , train
speeds and reasonable wind conditions the OCS and pantographs shall meet the following
criteria:
Fm value meet on curve showing below
-~~ lffHtfl
-
and
Fm- 3a > 0
Where: F = Contact Force (N)

Fm =Mean Contact Force (N)
a = Standard Deviation of Contact Force
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403- INE-001-01 P AGE 30/4 0

Req 53The Consortium shall present the test or simulation data as follows:
A family of curves or tabulated data, of registration arm Uplift plotted against Train set speed,
with ambient wind speed from 1Om/s to the maximum expected in 1Om/s intervals
Similar curves or tables as above showing standard deviation of contact force against Train set
speed, and percentage contact loss against Train set speed
The simulation shall include both open route and tunnel equipment for all pantograph
configurations and combinations up to the maximum Train set speed.
The mean contact force used in the simulation of current collection performance in high ambient wind
conditions , shall be the maximum static + dynamic lifting forces on the pantograph assembly.
The Consortium shall declare the anticipated wear rate of the contact strip material as thickness loss
per distance of operation (J..lm/km).
PAGE 31 /40
10. RAMS
In general , there will be compliance with standard EN 50126 or superior, the definition , the
approach , the procedures, to be adopted in relation to RAMS issues of the electrification system
In addition to RAMS issues, the susceptibility of the system to vandalism and unreasonable human
behavior will also be considered .
10.1 Reliability
. The Consortium shall demonstrate the reliability of the proposed study and materials for OCS
within the operating environment.
As to the critical elements of proposed equipment, the Consortium shall indicate the average time
between faults, the mean time between preventive maintenance and the details of preventive
maintenance necessary to ensure the full functionality of the system .
All consumable and/or available materials shall be of high reliab ility, specifically if they remain in
continuous operation of use , such as insulators.
All possible failure states in a specified application and environment

• The probability of occurrence of each failure or, alternatively, the rate of occurrence of each
failure ,
• The impact of the failure on the system functionality .
The reliability of the equipment and traction feeder station parts shall be high level , in accordance
with the above reliability requirements .
10.2 Availability
The feeder station and the OCS system shall provide a Usual Power Supply to the trainset with a
high reliability level.
Req 54 Power Supply System availability, globally considered , should be at least equal to
0 =99 .95%
10.3 Maintainability
The Consortium shall draw up maintenance requirements and prove that these ones are sufficient
to respect reliability and availability of OCS .
Design, manufacturing and installation of OCS shall be studied for having a minimal maintenance
to do during operating .
Maintenance operations shall not perturb in any case operating of the main line nor lead to take
dispositions or acquisition of specific tools .
Preventive Maintenance operations of equipments should be provided that the availability of these
equipment are not necessary .
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -40 3- INE-001-0 1 PAGE 32/40

10.4 Safety
Overhead catenary system should be design to:

• Minimize risks for people and goods safety.
• Satisfy of the total safety for staff and equipment, during operating and maintenance.
• Prevent the possibility of dangerous interactions between systems.
• Minimized ri sk dues to a mistake from operating or maintenance staff.
Ref: HHR· LO· CA -403-I NE-001 -0 1 P AGE 33/40

11. DESIGN REQUIREMENT
The Consortium shall be responsible for the engineering, procurement. construction , testing, and
commissioning of the electrical system
Req 55 The Consortium shall provide the electrification system for the HHR to ensure:
That the maximum train set can run at the maximum train set frequency
System electrical safety, including, but not limited to earthing and bonding, clearance to live part
equipment, erection of safety screens, safety of passenger, the safety of railways staff carry out
their duties, ...
That the system and its components are adequate for the environmental conditions, including ,
but not limited to temperature range , wind, humidity, rain, dust, sand storm, solar radiation
found along route of the HHR
The system shall take into account of the swept envelopes of the rolling stock, and the wayside
1.:: ';
structures.

12. MANUFACTURING REQUIREMENT
The Consortium shall, for each equipment, set up a characteristics slip that at least resumes:
• Quality certificate from the manufacturer including proven technology reference
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403-INE-001-01 P AGE 35/40


REQUIREMENT
13.1 Installation requirement
This section defines the general installation requirements that shall be provided by the Consortium
for installation of all electrification system equipment
The Consortium shall provide electrical, mechanical, structural drawings for all the installations
13.2 Installation Method Statement
The Consortium shall submit an installation method statement plan including a list of installation
inspection that shall be performed in the field . This statement shall exhibit the Consortium's
knowledge of installation techniques .
...··...·.

14. VERIFICATION, TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENT
14. 1. 1 REQUIREMENTS
The Consortium shall submit a schedule of tests and testing procedures for the
Electrification System addressing the requirements described in Section 11 of General
Specifications documents (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-011 ).In add the Consortium shall submit
at the following requirement
Req 56 The Consortium shall demonstrate the dynamic performance of the proposal Overhead
Catenary System, when contacting the pantograph under specific operational conditions,
up to the maximum operational speed of the rolling stock.
Req 57 The Consortium shal l produce a testing and commissioning specification detailing his
method for each of all the testing and commissioning processes that the Consortium shall
carry out in order to meet with the minimum requirements of this document
14. 1. 2ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
The acceptance criteria for the OCS will be the satisfactory completion of the testing and
commissioning programme and the visual examination of the OCS meets the
requirements of Consortium's design .
14. 1.3ACCEPTANCE TESTS
The testing and commission ing of the OCS is to be undertaken in accordance with the
commissioning plan drafted by the Consortium .
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403- INE-001-01 P AGE 37/40

Req 58The Consortium shall coordinate initial training of the maintenance and management
personnel. The consortium shall provide training in operation and maintenance matters
including relevant equipment and system safety requirements.
Req 59 The Consortium shall provide trainers, documents and necessary and training equipment.
Training sha ll be concluded before testing the system.
. '··-..~·

16. DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENT
For every subsystem, all training and operation manuals, software and applications documentation,
control documentation, instruments documentation and maintenance manuals shall be made
available, as described herein.
The manuals in question shall document all operation and maintenance procedures in a clear,
comprehensive and detailed way and shall be compiled in separate volume.
Ref: HHR- LO- CA -403- INE-001 -01 P AGE 39/40

17. TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS REQUIREMENT
Req 60 The Consortium shall submit a list with all necessary accessories, spare parts and tools
that will be provided for routine OCS maintenance as well as to permit replacement of OCS
in case of OCS damage
Such accessories, spare parts and tools shall be delivered to the project owner after the end
of the maintenance period. During the maintenance period, the Consortium is obliged, under
the project guarantee, to provide the appropriate spare parts, tools and accessories that will
be required for the resolution of any faults and maintenance of equipment.
The Consortium must also take into consideration the provision of certain accessories, spare
parts, and specific tools etc. that are necessary for the effective operation of the electrification
system.
..
(... ...:
:·:•.·.,
Ref : HHR- LO- CA -403- INE-001-0 1 PAGE 40/40

n

PHASE 2
.. -·
'-·
TRACK SYSTEM

TRACK SYSTEM
A1 20/04/2009 First Issue M.C. ILLY
A2 07/05/2009 Draft version sent to the Government M.C. ILLY
81 25/05/2009 Revision following the Government comments M.C. ILLY
82 29/05/2009 Revision after final workshop M.C. ILLY
C1 29/06/2009 Final RFP M.C. ILLY
01 11/09/2009 Revision following Linklaters's comments M.C. ILLY
REVISION N°: 01 NAME DATE SIGNATURE
PREPARED BY M.C. ILLY 11 /09/2009 (.b-1~
11/09/2009
CHECKED BY G. JEHANNE - ~ ·
-
14/09/2009
VALIDATED BY G. NORMAND ({iJ
14/09/2009 ..,.,.__.__,
APPROVED BY C. SCHANG ~~
;;;;;-"'
Ref : HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001 -0 1 PAGE 2/46

TRACK SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTE NTS
1. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 7
2 .1 TECHNICAL SPECI FICATIONS FOR INTEROPERABILITY (TSI) .... .... ..... .............. ............ ..... ......... ... ..... .... ....... .... 8
2 .2EUROPEAN STANDARD .. ....... ...... ... ....... ... ........... ....................................... ....... ... ... ... ..... ... ... ..... .... ......... ........... 8
3. SCOPE OF WORK ......................................................................................................................................... 9
4. BASIC DESIGN ............................................................................................................................................ 10
4 .1 BALLASTED TRACKS .............. ..... ........... .. ....... ... .. ...... .. ...... ... .. ... .... .. ... ..... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ......... .... ..... ..... ..... . 10
4 .2UNBALLASTED TRACKS ............. .... ..... .......................... ......... ... .... ......... ..... .... ... ..... ..... ...... .... ..... ..... ... ........ ..... 10
5. GENERAL OPERATION REQUIREM ENTS ............................................................................................ 11

6. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENT ................................................................................................................. 12
7. INTERFAC E REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................. 13
7 .1GENERAL ............ ....... ........ ... ......... ...... ........ ..... ... ..... .... .......... .. ............... ....... .. ...... ..... ........................ ........ .... 13
7 .21NTERFACE WITH ROUTE CIVIL W ORKS ..... ... ......... .... ... .... ............ ... .. ..... .. .............. ... .......... ... ...... .. .. ......... ... .. 13
7.31NTERFACE WITH STATIONS ........ ......... ......... .. ..... .... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ..... .... .. ........ .......... ..... ..... ....... ... ... .. ..... .. 13
7.41NTERFACE WITH OCS ..... .... ..... ...... .............. ..... .... .. ... .. .... ..... .. ... .. ... .. ..... ......... ..... ....... .. ...... .......... ....... ..... .... . 14
7. 4. 1 traction return current ... .... .... ........ ... .... ..................................... ....... ... ... ....... ... .. ..... .. .... ............... .. .... ..... 14
7.4. 2 Neutral sections and insulated overlaps .......... .. .............. ..... .................. ..... ... .. .. .. ..... ... .. .. .... .. .... ..... .. .. 14
7.4.3 OCS gauge envelop .. .. .... ....... ... ... .... ... ...... ............ .. ... .......... .......... .. ....... ... .. .. ... .. .. ........ ......... .. ... .. ......... 14
7 .51NTERFACE WITH SIGNALLING DE SIGN ................. .. ..... .. ..... ..... ....... ..... .. .. ........................... .. ..... ....... ... .. ... ........ 14
7. 5. 1 Turnouts .......................................................................................... ... ... .. ..... .. ... ...................... .. ... ... ......... 14
7. 5. 2 Bond connections .... ..... ........... .. ......... .... ..... ... .... ..................... ............ ...... .... .. ......... ........ ... .. ... ...... ... ...... 14
7 .61NTERFACE WITH ROLLING STOCK ...................... .. ....... ..... ... ... .. ... .. .... ..... ..... ... .. ... ...... .... .. ..... ..... ..... ...... ...... ... .. 14
8. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT ................................................................................................................... 15

8 .1TRACKEQUIPMENT ..... .. ............... ... ......... ..... .. .. .. .... ............. ... .. .. ...... .... ... .. .... .................. ..... .... .. ...... ........... .. .. 15
B. 1.1 CWR .. ... ...................................... .. .... .. ...... .. ....... ..... .......... .. .. ..... ... ..... .. .. .... ........ ... .... ... ..... .. ....... ................ 15
B. 1. 2 Distance between sleepers .................. ... ......... .. .... .. ... .......................... ..... ............ ............ .. ... .. .... ...... 15
B. 1.3 Ballast thickness ... .. ......... .. .... ... .. .. ..... .. ..... .. ... ................................ .. .. .. ..... ..................... .. .......... ... .......... 15
8.2TU RNOUTS ... .......... ........ ... ...... ....... ....... ..... ... ..... ...................... ... .... ..... .... ... ...... ..... .. ..... .. .. ....... ...... ... .. ..... ........ 16
B. 2. 1 Detecting and locking devices ................. .. ......... ... ..... ... .. .. .................... .... ... .... ............ .......... .. ............. 16
B.2.2 Use of switchnose crossings: ...... . .......... .. ... .... .. .......... .. ... .. ..... .. ....................... ... .... ......... .. .................. 16
B.2.3 Fouling point ................................ .. ................ .......... ... .... .... ...... :.... .. ................................ .. ................ ..... . 16
8 .3TRACK EQUIPMENT SCHE ME ........... .. ... .. .. .............. ................ .. ....... ............ ...... .... ...... ......... ..... ...... ......... ....... 17
B.3.1 CWR Studies ...... ................................. .. .. .. .. .. . ....... . ..... . . .. ................. .. .. .. ... .. ........... ........... 17
PE AND DI STANCE BETWEEN CENTERS OF LINES ..... .. ........... .......... .... .. ... ...... .. ....... ... .. ... .... .. 22
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -40 3-INE-001-D1 PAGE 3/46

TRACK SYSTEM
8 .7FENCES AND GATES INTEGRITY MONITORING SYSTEM .... .... .. ........ ........... E RROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.
9. BUILDING REQUIREMENT ....................................................................................................................... 24

10.RAMS ............................................................................................................................................................. 25
10.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .............. ........ .............................. ....... .. .. ... .. ................... .... ......... .. .... ...... ...... 25
10.2 RELIABILI TY AND AVAILABILI TY .... ...................... ..... ...... .. .. ... ... ........ .............. .... ... ... .... .. ... .......... ... .... ...... 25
10.3 MAINTAINABILITY ..... ........ ....... ..... ..... ................................... .. .... ........ ... .... ............... ..... ........ .. .... ........ .. .. 25
10.4 SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUI REMENTS .. .. .. ................ .... .......... .... .. .. .......................... .. .................. .. ......... .. .. 25
11.DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................................ 26

12.MANUFACTURING REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................... 27
12.1 RAIL··· ···················· ······· ······ ··· ········ ········ ············ ···· ········· ·· ·· ···· ·· ·· ······· ······ ···· ···· ·· ··········· ·· ····· ····· ········ ······ 27
12.1.1 Standard ................ .... .... .. .... .. ...... .. .... .. ....... .. ......... .. ....... .. ................... ........ .......... .......... .. .... ... .......... ..... . 27
12.1.2Handling ........... .. ... .. ... ..... ... ...... .... ........ .. .. .. .... ... ... ...... .. .. ... .... .. ... ................ .... .. ....................... ... .. ...... ...... 27
12.2 BALLAST ............ ..... .. .... ... .. ... .. ..... ..... ..... ..... ... ..... .. .... .. .... .... .... ... ......... ..... ..... .. .......... .... .. ...... .. ......... ........ 27
12.3 SLEEPERS ........... ... ... ...... .. ... .. ... .. ... .. ..... ...... .... ... ... .... .. .. ..... .. ............... .. .... ... ...... ...... ..... ...... .. ........ .......... 28
12.3. 1Standard ...... ..... ...... ............... ...................... ......... .. ................... ...... .......... ..... .. .. .. .... ... .. .......... .. ......... ...... 28
12.3.2Handling ................... ......... ... ...... .......... .. ... ............... .. .. ... ..... ... .... .... ........ .. .. .... ...... .... .. ................. .. .... .... .. 29
12 .4 FASTENING SYS TEM .. .... ..... ........ .. ... ... ....... .... .. .. ... .......... ....... ... ..... ..... ..... .. .... .. .. .. .... ..... .. ... ........... ... .. ..... . 29
12.5 TURNOUTS .... .. ..... ........... .... .... .. .... ... ... ... .... ..... ..... .. .. .. ... .... .. ... .. .. ... ... .. ... ...... ...... ... .... .... ...... ..... .... ...... .... .. 29
12 .6 WELDS ..... ... .... ....... .. ..... .. .... ... .. ..... .. .... ...... .. ... ... ... ... ...... ........................ .. .... ..... ..... .. .. ......... ... .. ..... ... ........ 29
13.PROCUREMENT CONSTRUCTION AND FACILITI ES REQUIREMENTS ....................................... 31

13.1 PROCUREMENT ....... ... .. .... ..... ..... .. .. .. ......... .................. .. ..... ......... .. ........ .. ... .... ..... ... .. ... ............ .... .... .... .... 31
13. 1. 1Rail Procurement ............ .. ............... ... .. ....... ..... .. .. ... ............... ... ... ....... ... .. ...... ......... ... ....... ......... .. .......... 31
13. 1.2 Ballast Procurement ... .... .... .. ... ... .. .. ...... ....... ......................................... .. ....... ...... .. ... ............... ............. .. 31
13.1.3Possibility of a new railway between Jeddah Port and the HHR workbases ......... ..... .. .... .. ........... 31
13.2 EARTHWORKS CONTROL ... ..... ...... ... ....... .... .... ............ ... ................ ........... ......... .... .. ..... .... ...... .. .. ............ 31
13.3 TRACKLAYING ......... ..... ... ... .. ......... ... ... .. .. .. ............... .... ....... ... .. .... ... .. ... .... ............... ........... .... .... ..... ...... . 31
13.3.1 Topography ............... ..................... ... ..................... ... .... .. .... .. ..... ..... .... ... .. .. ...... .... ............... .............. ....... 31
13.3.2Tolerances .. ...... .................................................... ......... .... ... .. .. ... .. ................. ........ .. ... ........ ......... .. ... .... .. 32
13. 3. 3Geometrical property of the track .. .. ... ......... ..... .. ....... .. .... .. .... .... ......... .............. .. ..... ... .. .................. ...... 32
13.4 PRI NCIPLES OF CWR RI SK CONTROL ........ ... .. ..... ... ..... .. ...... ..... .. ......... .. ... .... ....... .... .. ...... ... .... ... .... .. ..... . 32
13. 4.1CWR release .... .............. ... .......... .. ..... ... ....... .. .. ... ........... .......... .......... ... .......... .... .. ... .... ........... ... .. ....... .. .. 32
13.4.2stabilization of the ballasted track ..... .. ... .. .......... .... ........ ......... .... ... .............. .. ............ ................ ... ....... 33
13.4.3CWR stability control according to air temperature .. .. ........... .. ........ .. ..... ........ ..... ... ..... ... ...... .... ..... ... 34
13.5 CARRYING OUT OF BALLAST THICKNESS .. ........... .. ................. ...... ... .. .. .................... .. ...... ... .. .................. 34
13.6 TURN OUTS ........... .... ... .... .................... ..... ... ... ..... .. ...... ... .. ... .................. ... ........ ...... .......... .. .............. ....... 34
13.7 BREATHER JOINT FOR CIVIL WORKS STRUCTURE ..... .. .... ................... .... ........ .... .... .. ...... .. ....... .. ...... .. .. .. . 34
13 .8 SAFETY RAIL ............. ..... .... ... ..... .............. .. .......... .... ...... ........ .. ... ......... ..... .... ....... ... .......... ............... ..... .. 35
13 .9 CARRYIN G OUT OF ALU MINOTHERMIC WELD S ............. .. .......... .. ............... .... .......... .. ...... ..... .. ... ...... .. .... .. 35
13 .10 CARRYING OUT OF ELECTRIC WELDS ON TRACK .. ..... .. .. ..... .... .. ... ............ .. .. .. .. ... .. ...................... .. .. .. ...... 36
13 .11 ENGINE BURN .............................. ........ .. ............. .. .. .. .......... .. ... .. ... .. .. ... .................... .. ............... .. ..... ..... ... 36
14.SPECIFIC ENVIRONN EMENTAL CON STRAINTS AND REQUIREMENTS ....................... .............. 37

14.1 GENE RAL REQUI REME NTS ...... ... ..... ..... ...... ..... .. ........................ ...... .. ... ... ...... ... ... .... .... ....... .... ..... ............ 37
14.2 TURN OUTS ..... ... .. .............. ..... ..... ... ....... ... ....... ........ ... ..... .. .. ..... .. ............... ......... .. .. ........ .. .. ................ .... 37
15.VERIFICATION, TEST AND ACCEPTAN CE REQ UI RE MENT ............................................................ 38

15.1 STATIC TE STS .. .... .. ..... .... ... .... ..... ..... ........... .... ...... ......... .. ........... .. ... .. ........ .. ... ....... ...... ....... .... ..... ........... 38
15.2 D YNAMIC TESTS............. .. ....... .. .. ............ .. ......... .. .... .. ...... ........ ... .... .. ... ........ .. ......... . . ·-·~..-... ............. 38
15 .3
17 .1
17.2
17.3
Ref: HH R- LO- TR -403-INE-001 -D 1 PAGE 4/46

TRACK SYSTEM
()
17.4 FILE OF REALIZED WORK: ................ ... .... .... .......... .. ....... ... .......... .. ....... .. .............. ...... .............. .. ............. 41
17.5 FILE S OF ACHI EVED CHECKING AND TRIALS ... ................. ............ .. ...... .. .. .................... .. .... ..................... 41
17.6 B OOKLETS OF MAINTENANCE ............ .. ............... .. ........ .. ................. ....................................................... 41
18.TOOLS AND SPARE-PARTS REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................... 42

18.1 TOOLS ................ ..... .... ....................................................... ................. ........... .. ....................................... 42
18.2 SPARE PARTS .......... ..................... .. ...... ... .. ..... ....................................... .. ................. .. ........ ........... ......... 42
APPENDIX ........ ................ .. ... .... ...................... ... ..... ................... ............... .............. .. ........................................... 43
APPENDIX N"1 : UNBALLASTED TRACK EXAMPLE OF LAY OUT IN HIGH SPEED AREA RUN ... ...... .. .... .... . 44
APPENDIX N"2: ALIGNMENT PARAMETERS .... ..... ............................................................ ............. ......... .... ..... 45
APPEND IX N"3: TURN OUT SCHEMATIC ............... ............................ ...................... ...... ... ................................ 46
Ref : HHR- LO· TR -403-INE-001 -D1 PAGE 5146

TRACK SYSTEM
PROJECT REFERENCES

1 HH R-LO-CT-602-SYS-002 General specifications - Section 2
2 HHR- LO- CT-602-SYS-006 General specifications - Section 6
3 HHR-LO- CT -602-SYS-01 2 General specifications - Section 12
4 HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-0 12 General specifications - Appendix B
5 HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 RAMS
6 HHR- LO-PR-602-SYS-001 Performance Requirements
7 Route Civil Works dossier
8 Stations dossier
··' • I
....
•.·.:
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001 -01 PAGE 6/46

TRACK SYSTEM
0
1. GLOSSARY
(H H R-LO-CT-602-SYS-002).
Specific acronym:
C.W.R.: Continuous Welded Rail.
Definition:
Main Line: means Line 1, Line 2, sidings, tracks in stations and access tracks from or to the
depots/workshop.
- LO- TR -403-INE-001 -01 PAGE 7/46

TRACK SYSTEM
The following rules concerning track design, tra ck works, operation and maintenance shall be
applied. Any non compliance shall be notified in writing by the Consortium to The Government, and
will only be allowed with The Government written agreement.
Current version at the base date shall be used.
2.1 Technical Specifications for ln teroperabil ity (TS I)
The following TSI for high speed railway system, equivalent or superior, shall be respected .
f • ••••• ;

• Techni cal Specifi cation for lnteroperability- Persons with reduced mobility
2.2 European standard
• EN 13146 : Test method for fastening systems

• EN 13230 : Railway application - Track - Concrete sleepers and bearers
• EN 13450 : Aggregates for railway ballast
• EN 1348 1 : Performance requirements for fastening systems
• EN 13674 : Railway applications- Track - Rail
• EN 14587 : Railway applications - Track - Flash butt welding of ra il
• EN 14730: Railway applications - Track- Aluminothermic welding of rails
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001 -01

TRACK SYSTEM
()
3. SCOPE OF WORK
This document is part of the Performance Specification for Phase 2 regarding the Main Line Track
of HHR. lt aims at describing its basic design as well as its requirements and interfaces, which shall
be respected by the Consortium, according to The Government general requirements for the
Railway .
necessary, whether specifically mentioned or not, to ensure the successful implementation, safe
and proper operation of the main line tracks.
Technical field "track" addressed in this document concerns the tracks :
• of the new line of high-speed itself, including sid ings and track secondary tracks necessary to its
proper functioning,
• of the ancillary facilities needed to carry out maintenance.
lt does not cover temporary tracks created in order to make works. ~·-·-
More generally, the Consortium shall properly interface all equipment and facilities with other HHR
equipments and infrastructure, so that all equipments shall be able to satisfy HHR performance and
operations requirements.
The Consortium shall be responsible for the design, purchase, transport, installation , erection ,
testing and commissioning of the main line track system based on RAMS specifications and high
quality standard High Speed Line .
The track design includes in particular turnouts design, expansion joints.
The Consortium shall take into account all the local and environmental conditions for its design.
The Consortium shall insure a safe design, safe construction process in compliance with the global
schedule of the project.
The identified interfaces with phase 1 package 1 and phase 1 package 2 shall be considered under
The Government responsibility.
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001 -01 PAGE 9146

TRACK SYSTEM
4. BASIC DESIGN
4.1 Ballasted tracks
IReq 01 Ballasted track is the reference solution for call for tender.
The ballasted track shall be constituted with long welded rail. The High speed design feedback
designs the track as following : rails are inclined at 1/20Th, they shall be laid on pre-stressed
concrete sleepers and attached with elastic fasteners. Tracks shall lay with a nominal gauge of
1435 mm with at least 1666 sleepers per kilometre . The Consortium shall define these
characteristics according to CWR Continuous Welded Rail study taking into account local
environmental constraints.
Req 02 Ballast profiles used shall respect a superior level fixed for the ballast in order to restrain as much as
possible flights of ballast pieces while remaining within allowed tolerances for the maintenance.
The minimal ballast thickness under sleepers shall be determined by the most unfavourable stretch
of rails .
Civil engineering works higher than 50 m shall be equipped with a safety guide rail in order to limit
effects of a derailment. In this case track shall be laid on specific pre-stressed concrete sleepers .
4.2 Unballasted Tracks
The Government will provide areas of unballasted tracks such as Haramain Road , stations , sand
moving areas , but not limited
Req 03 For these cases , the Consortium shall be responsible for ensuring that the system is, at least,
equivalent to the ballasted one in terms of RAMS .
Req 04 More over, the way to deal with the interface between ballasted and unballasted tracks shall be
explained and clarified .
Req 05 Appendix 1 provides an example of unballasted track in area run with high speed .
In station, other kinds of lay out of unballasted track can be chosen . Nevertheless, the Consortium shall
comply with the dimensions specified .
If, for any reasons , detailed design leads to any incompliance, the Consortium shall submit new cross section
to The Government for approval.
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403- INE-001-01

TRACK SYSTEM
The high speed line is a double line with contra flow tracks. The normal way of running the trains is
on the right hand.
The commercial speed shall be of 300 Km I h. Lay out and profile of the tracks shall be identical to
the one studied by the Route Civil Works Contractor (360 Km/h); only the cant shall be specified for
320 Km/h. In the same way, safety of the System shall be ensured at the maximum speed of 320
Km/h .
The passing through JEDDAH town and KAEC stations shall be carefully considered , according to
particular specifications given by the Stations Contractor and Route Civil Work Contractor.
In order to solve operation problems in downgraded mode, cross over devices, allowing a speed of
170 Km/h, shall be located at about every 25 Km . every other time these devices shall be equipped
with siding in order to allow passengers to leave a train in distress.
Req 06 These sidings shall be equipped with covered platforms of 400 m length. Design of these covered
platforms shall be submitted to The Government for agreement.
These siding shall be connected to tracks for holding siding trains and light maintenance engines.
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001 -01 P AGE 11/46

TRACK SYSTEM
6. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENT
Req 07 As described in the TSI "infrastructure" of 12/20/2007 (cf. article 2.2), the Consortium shall comply
with the functional requirements following :
I. Train lead
I Train support
I Ensure free and safe passing through of the trains in a given space
I Passengers access to the stopping train in railway stations
I Safety warranty
1: Respect of environment
I: Ensure the maintenance of the trains
·.· ~
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001-0 1

TRACK SYSTEM
0
7. INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS
7.1 General
The Consortium shall be responsible for ensuring that any interface requirements are clearly
identified and taken into account.
The track system shall be fully compatible with all systems and equipment provided as part of
the overall project.
7.2 Interface with Route Civil Works
The Consortium is responsible for all gauge requirements and interfaces with the Route Civil
Works contractor.
:·;-.:.-.-
The Consortium is in charge of construction of the whole platforms and accesses needed by
the technical equipment (shelters, signalling rooms, substations ...) along the line except any
contrary decision from the Government to entrust the Route Civil Works contractor to do it, the
whole cable routes .
Req 08 The Consortium shall ensure that lay out and gradient designed by Route Civil Work contractor, are
compliant with maintenance system and allows reaching its aims concerning R.A.M.S as forecast.
Req 09 Designed speed shall be specified in System schematic in compliance with track geometry as
indicated in contract documents for the Route Civil Works. The Consortium shall check the different
speeds according to the positioning of structures which would be planned by Civil Works Contractor.
Req 10 A specific study shall be carried out by the Consortium in collaboration with the Civil Works Phase 1
contractor in order to minimize the expansion joints number in surround of structures.
The passing through JEDDAH and KAEC stations shall be carefully thought, according to particular
specifications given by the Stations Contractor and Route Civil Works Contractor.
7.3 Interface with stations
Req 11 The stations schemes , given on the System Schematic are indicative only. The detailed design of
alignment and layout of the tracks in station areas shall be provided by the Government.
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001-0 1 PAGE 13/46

TRACK SYSTEM
7.4 Interface with OCS
7.4.1 TRACTION RETURN CURRENT
Rails shall be able to support traction return current, even on line sections with 2 x 25 kV feeders .
I Req 12 Track circuits joints shall be able to ensure correct balancing of this current.
In addition, in downgraded modes , the laid earth cable , if provided, shall be able to support 70% of
this current. The Consortium may decide not to use such cable (even if recommended) , but shall
submit details proving that an equivalent solution for downgraded modes has been found .
7.4. 2 NEUTRAL SECTIONS AND INSULATED OVERLAPS
Req 13 The Consortium shall ensure that track geometry complies with the implantation of neutral sections
,(~.-.·. · .~ and insulated overlaps .
7.4.3 OCS GAUGE ENVELOP
IReq 14 The Consortium shall deal the gauge coherence between track and OCS .
7.5 Interface with signalling design
7. 5. 1 TURNOUT$
IReq 15 Turnouts shall be set up in order to satisfy signalling operation requirements.
7.5.2 BOND CONNECTIONS
Where bonding needs to be connected to rails for track circuits , grounding purposes , hot axle
bearing detectors, methods of connection shall withstand reliably the track environment and shall
ensure a safe rail life expectancy, rail physical properties , rail fatigue detection and maintenance
methods .
I Req 16 The Consortium shall prove performance of processes and connections.
7.6 Interface with rolling stock
The specifications for rolling stock should conform to TSI. If not, these specifications shall be
adapted and all the interfaces shall be defined again by the Consortium who shall submit them to
The Government for approval.
• track
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -40 3-INE -001 -0 1 P AG E 14/46

TRACK SYSTEM
8. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT
8.1 Track equipment
Ballasted track shall be the reference

Current track is constituted of CWR continuous bars laid on pre-stressed concrete sleepers (CWR
are interrupted on approach of engineering civil structures if they are equipped with expansion
joints).
8.1.1 CWR
Req 17 On main, siding and junction tracks , CWR shall be constituted of basic bars of 80 m long (In case
of impossibility to use 80m length bars, the Consortium shall submit to the government
approval its alternative with all the needed explanations and justifications), electrically welded
through fixed welding machine (itinerant or workshop installation) according to standard requirements of
EN 14587-1, then in CWR welded through aluminothermic or electric welds. ()
• On turnout tracks , dead-end tracks, junction sidings, work-bases tracks, maintenance bases
tracks or depots, CWR shall be set up with aluminothermic welds of basic 12 m long minimum
bars.
8.1.2 DISTANCE BETWEEN SLEEPERS
Req 18 Nominal distance between sleepers shall be defined from CWR study, the following tolerances shall
be applied :
lE Homogeneous distance between axles with a tolerance of more or less 10 mm tolerance of
more or less 10 mm on squareness.
1£ By the lay out, the number of sleepers to observe shall be more or less 3 sleepers by Km .
8.1.3 BALLAST THICKNESS
The required thickness of the ballast shall be defined under the less favourable rail level
regarding earthworks level.
Req 19 The Consortium shall define the canting method which he shall apply to warrant a minimum ballast
thickness , by the lay out.
The Consortium shall describe interface processes with Route Civil Works Contractors to :
• warrant a continuous thickness for current section,
• warrant linear variation of ballast thickness on approach of Route Civil Works
structures ,
• Allow track lay out without any added risk of derailment.
·)
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001-0 1 P AGE 15/46
TRACK SYSTEM
~ .... •
As an indication, maximum accepted ballast thickness in line of the most restricting rail
alignment shall be of 55cm; minimum ballast thickness is defined in the table hereafter.
Minimum thickness Current track, turnout and On railways buildings,

expansion joints viaduct and underground raft
speed ~ 270 Km/h 30 cm 40 cm
230 km/h ~ speed < 25 cm 35 cm
270km/h
160 km/h ~ speed < 25 cm 30 cm
230km/h
SQ_eed < 160 Km/h 20 cm 20 cm
Siding track 15 cm 15 cm
These minimum and maximum thicknesses shall be defined by the Consortium after the
CWR study.
8.2 Turnouts
Turnouts shall comply following technical and functional requirements:
8.2.1 D ETECTING AND LOCKING DEVICES
Req 21 Switches , mobile switch nose and obtuse crossings of turnout shall be equipped with:
Ill locking devices,
11' devices enabling to detect whether mobile components lay in correct required position and
are correctly locked.
8.2.2 USE OF SWITCHNOSE CROSSINGS :
Req 22 On tracks where the speed shall be equivalent or superior to 230 Km/h, turnouts shall be equipped
with mobile switch noses.
On tracks where the maximum speed shall be inferior to 230 Km/h, fixed switch noses may be
used .
8.2.3 FOULING POINT
A vehicle stopped on the continuation of a track turnout, near its switch end, is an obstacle to free
movement in other track if this vehicle does not completely release the point at which intersection
can be safe without cornering risk. These very important criteria for safety point is called fouling
point; these criteria shall be taken into account in signalling study.
Req 23 The Consortium has to define each fouling point location according to turnout geometry and rolling
stock.

TRACK SYSTEM
8.3 Track equipment scheme
Req 24 Equipment scheme shall be the result of the design phase; it shall comply with the functional the
System Schematic, considering :
Ill. Track alignment parameters as defined related to Route Civil Works Contractor,
liE Performances and specifications of components and systems as defined in this document
111: CWR studies, studies on turnout implementation in CWR, on crossing civil works structures .
Req 25 The Consortium shall design the Equipment scheme . The Equipment scheme is a document
laid down in continuous KP (without interruption) which shall include, at least, following points (designed
according to their KP) :
rails : profile, shade, age, stand, lay out (CWR or basic bars), inox or not,
sleepers: distance between them , sleeper type , lay out year, kind of fastenings,
ballast : profile,
alignment: cant, radius ,
distance between centers of line,
hot boxes detectors,
turnouts : type, positioning,
particular points : civil works structures , expansion joints, safety rails .
8.3.1 CWR STUDIES
IReq 26 The Consortium shall lead a CWR study compliant with following items.
CWR studies aim to control CWR risk. This risk analysis deals to elaborate references for
design, lay out and maintenance of CWR.
8.3.1.1 GENERAL PRINCIPLES :
In the central area of CWR , a total lack of gap allowing expansion with rail extension shall
drive to a totally impeded expansion, it create longitudinal constraint proportional to the
steel , to the expansion coefficient and to temperature variation. The total sum of
longitudinal constraints on the rail section in central CWR section shall be
translated by a normal effort, proportional to the temperature variation.
Analysis of free or constraint CWR expansion shall only concern longitudinal expansion,
transversal dilation being eventually neglected .
Between central section and free extremity of CWR (which usually ends with a specific
device as a expansion joint with such design as to include necessary run to a free dilation
of one or several CWR and eventually rail bridge expansion) , a transition area shall
appear, called « breathing area » where rail extension is progressively allowed according
to longitudinal streng.t ff.!f~ · tening on the support.
vr!fJ~Q S l!"t/~~
.
Length of th1s
.~:r:,
'1\0Jd uo & A.
~rptflg area '6W\1J1.'
1 . .
rmal effort diagram are subordinated to the range of
temperature , t e3RmCl o ~ 'I e~~ ent and to the stand of ballast stabilization .
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001 -01 P AGE 17/46

TRACK SYSTEM
Moreover, CWR design rules shall specify the shape length of breathing areas at
the CWR ends and thus the minimum length of a CWR.
8.3.1.2 CWR RISK
Main distortion risks on ballasted tracks are explained hereafter:
• CWR buckling translated by a sudden and irreversible distortion of the track; track
defects due to lack of standard security and risk of traffic derailment,
• Transversal solicitation due to the normal effort is the result of combination of normal
effort and normal curving in running plan of the track,
• Lateral strength of unloaded track is subordinated to equipment specifications: kind of
rail, kind of sleepers and their distance, ballast profile. lt is also subordinated to work
conditions according to stabilization of ballasted track.
"··
Minor risks of CWR distortion are explained hereafter:
• Upright buckling (rising) is theoretically possible. Nevertheless it becomes

problematic only in provisory situation of work or maintenance.
• By lay out of unballasted track, buckling ri sk in the running plan is reduced by a very
high lateral strength. However, minor risks remain and justify a control of normal
effort;
• Moreover, control of normal effort is recommend ed for risk control of rai l or weld cuts
due to negative ranges of temperatures.
IReq 27 General principles to be applied for CWR lay out shall be also applied for nonballasted track.
8.3.1.3 CWR STABILITY PARAMETERS ACCORDING TO CWR BUCKLI NG RISKS.
Factors due to normal effort:
d-
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001-01 PAGE 18/46

TRACK SYSTEM
• Longitudinal efforts on the rail due to braking and start up of the trains (under
trainsets and also on the trainset front and rear). Solicitation by normal CWR effort is
limited to a value subordinated to equipment conditions.
• Temperature ranges of the rail: design rules consider rail profile as a basic
parameter.
• Temperature ranges of rail: rail may run hot through conduction under braking effect
without using grip or during works dealing temporarily to a rail overheating. Specific
proceedings shall enable to control these inducted risks.
• Rail may be overheated through environment air convection but also through direct
sun radiation , rail temperature is higher than environment air temperature. In order to
set at most design rules, it shall be necessary to define the temperature range
according to meteorology.
• Railways bridge expansion, their moving under braking/starting up of the trains,
rotations of railways bridge apron end cf. paragraph « civil work crossing»
• Particular proceedings of CWR design shall specify following conditions:
• Carrying out of rail junctions of various sections, I ··.·•
Turnout implementation in CWR,

To apply at the tunnel extremities .
Ref: HHR- LO· TR -403-INE-001 -0 1 P AGE 19/46

TRACK SYSTEM
Factors due to curving in the running plan
• Geometry of the track: minimum radius of the track alignment is included in the
design as limited lay out radius in CWR; value of alignment defects is also
integrated in the design .
• One-off rail defects may affect CWR stability if they occur in angular discontinuity.
This notion applies to weld geometry and distorted rails through impacts.
Factors due to the track strength
• By lay out of nonballasted track, lateral strength of unloaded track is sufficient.

• By lay out of ballasted track, lateral strength of empty track is subordinated to
specifications of track frame, of profile crossing ballast thickness and its stand of
stabilization.
• Inflexibility distortion of the track frame shall be considered regarding transversal
distortions; parameters of rail inertia shall be specified, fastening system shall be of
sufficient achievement.
8.3.1.4 PRINCIPLES OF CWR RISK CONTROL:

CF. SECTION 13 HERE AFTER.
8.3. 2 TURNOUT IMPLEMENTA TJON IN CWR STUDIES
Turnout implementations in CWR studies shall be carried out in compliance with CWR studies
under Consortium responsibility out of stations areas , and under The Government responsibility in
stations areas.
8.3.3 CROSSING OF CIVIL WORKS STRUCTURE
Variances of normal effort may be indirectly induced by dictated movements to the rail
support. This occurs by civil works structures crossing; stability parameters of CWR shall
be specified :
• Railway bridge expansion : railway bridges have various expansible lengths due to
dictated shifting of the support, inducing an added normal effort. Thermic operating
ranges of rails and railway bridges are different.
• Variances of normal effort shall be considered on approach of mobile and fixed
supports.
Proceedings of CWR design study shall specify maximum expandable lengths
without CWR interruption. Concept of minimum CWR length shall apply.
Global optimization of the whole railway bridges and tracks shall justify
feasibility study of railway bridges crossing with CWR from the beginning of
bridge design.
• Railway bridges shifting under braking/starting up of trains shall be subordinated to
design rules in the civil works structures regulations to take into account in CWR
design .
•
• This solicitation, more important according to the height on sup
limitation of apron rotations in the civil engineering works regulatio
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001-01 P AGE 20/46

TRACK SYSTEM
Req 28 The Consortium shall specify the maximum expansion length of Railway Bridge compliant with
CWR studies and the opening of expansion joints in CWR study report in a delay to be agreed by The
Government.
8.4 Alignment requirements
Alignment and grade parameters , gauge envelope and distance between centres of lines are
design according to the speed . Two speed 's family are considered:
• the high speed from 230 Km I h,
• the "classical" speed below or equal to 220 Km I h.
These requirements consider ERTMS signalling level 2 and TSI specifications for catenaries .
Moreover, they concern material complying to TSI rolling stock specifications , particularly the load
of 17 tons I axle reference.
They are designed for specific maintenance equipment. The Consortium shall be responsible for 0
ensuring the suitability between these requirements and maintenance equipment he shall adopt.
Req 29 These parameters shall be confirmed by the Consortium according to CWR studies in Global
Design Report in a delay to be agreed by The Government.
8.4. 1 DEFINITION OF PARAMETERS
Two kinds of values can be used for the design:

Normal values =Values allowing trains to run at the minimum or maximum speeds
Exceptional values= Values corresponding to downgraded characteristics for the alignment. To
be used only where topographical and other technical constraints make it impossible to keep to the
normal values.
8.4.2 ALIGNMENTPARAMETERS
Design parameters are identical to those of civil works . A table with limited values is given in
appendix 2.
Nevertheless, curve being an important component in CWR study, minimum radius shall be
specified as soon as possible (including radius of siding tracks for turnouts provided to be used) .
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -40 3-INE-001-01 P AGE 21/46

TRACK SYSTEM
(~
8.6 Gauge envelope and distance between centres of lines
8.6. 1 GAUGE ENVELOPPE
Substructure shall be built in order to enable a clearing space for train traffic safety
according to TSI « rolling stock » for high speed lines.
Minimum gauge of substructures shall be specified in an allowed shape where no

obstacle shall be set up or introduced.
Low obstacle gauge is defined in a maximum distance of 40 cm above running plan and
calculated in parallel to this running plan. lt is kinematical gauge.
High obstacle gauge is a determined space based on reference kinematic gauge and its
appropriate rules.
Gauges as specified in documentation UIC 506 are limit gauges which do not consider
blast effect. Using these limit gauges is strongly discouraged for new building , except for
platform nose which shall be set up with limit gauge to reduce as much as possible the
gap with the train 's threshold.
Minimum gauges of obstacles are nominal gauges according to speed , because blast
effects are taken in account.
In the absence of harmonized regulation at European level, each member country set its
own minimum gauges for obstacles . Outlines to apply shall be defined by the Consortium
and transmitted to the Route Civil Works contractor through the Government; in the same
way, outlines concerning pantograph insulating since they are subordinated to use
overhead equipment. This insulating outline shall strongly influence free height of road
bridges and height of tunnels.
8.6.2 DISTANCE BETWEEN CENTERS OF LINE
Req 31 TSI infrastructure subsystem specifies minimum distance between centre of line to be observed , as
mentioned in System Schematic. The Consortium shall define theses distances between centres of
lines according to considered hypotheses to determine gauges and in interface with the Route Civil
Works contractor in global design report in a delay to be agreed by The Government.
8.6.3 EQUIVALENTTAPER
Equivalent taper is a parameter enabling to consider in a better way the contact between
rail and wheel in alignment and in cu rves with large gradient.
Equivalent taper is the tangent of a conical angle of axle with conical wheel profile and of
which transversal shift has the same wavelength kinematics ' yaw as the one of a given \
axel in alignment and in curves with high radius . c)---
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -4 03-INE-001-0 1 PAGE 22/46

TRACK SYSTEM
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001 -0 1 PAGE 23/46

TRACK SYSTEM
Not concerned
... -...·.•
····.'···
d-

TRACK SYSTEM
10. RAMS
The track system shall comply with all global RAMS requirements defined in the RAMS
Requirements document (HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001) and the EN 50126 standard. This compliance
shall ensure that HHR Operating Plan and Performance Requirements can be met.
10.2 Reliability and availability
Reliabi lity and availability are managed through maintenance criteria which define a geometric
quality level for the track: track gauge, levelling of the track (longitudinal and transversal), lining of
the track.
Req 33 Consortium shall define RAMS targets to reach performance requirements described In HHR-LO-
PR-602-SYS-001 in Global Design Report in a delay to be agreed by the Government.
10.3 Main tainability
The Consortium shall demonstrate through risks analysis the maintenance requirements and prove
that they are sufficient to respect reliability and availability.
During the design, manufacturing and installation of tracks, the Consortium must consider the most
economic and efficient method of maintenance.
Maintenance operations shall not disturb in any case operating of the main line nor lead to take
dispositions or acquisition of specific tools.
10.4 Specific safety requirements
On safety, the overall objective is that the System provides a level of safety at least equivalent to
that of existi ng comparable systems (logical regression the safety level in relation to recog nized
references). This principle seeks to ensure a minimum safety level while allowing the various actors
of the project wide latitude in the choice of technical solutions to implement.
Req 34 The Consortium shall indicate the reference system chosen in Technical rules of maintenance
before commission ing.
The Consortium shall use proven technology.
.J
TRACK SYSTEM
Req 36 The following principles shall be applied:

The design shall be safe and sturdy
The design shall ensure safety for users, maintenance crews and operating staff as well
The design must be in conformity with the construction method to be used
Industrialised methods within existing technology are to be adopted where practicable
Innovative solutions shall be justified
Designs, materials and methods of construction shall be known and well-proven;
The design shall indicate constructional and operational risks
Constructional and operational risks shall be assessed and quantified in terms of probability
and consequences of occurrence.
Ref : HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001 -01 PAGE 26/46

TRACK SYSTEM
()
12.1 Rail
12. 1. 1 STANDARD
Req 37 Rail shall have minimum following specifications:

I Rail profile shall be in accordance with the one as described in appendix A of EN 13674 - 1
I Steel shade is specified in chapter 5 of EN 13674 - 1.
After trials at a speed equivalent or superior to 300km/h , a rail profi le 60 E1 shall be used as a
minimum .
IReq 38 The Consortium shall check the compliance with local environmental conditions.
On secondary tracks, equipped with track circuits, on which traffic may eventually occur at the rate of
once every 48 hours, a special device shall be used in order to ensure a good working of the track
circuit.
12. 1.2 HANDLING

Particular attention shall be paid while handling rails and iron fitting in order to avoid their distortion,
hurt or to damage settled sub-ballast.
Description of operating methods, used engines and apparatuses, shall prove that these above
described risks are controlled . More over, it shall be proven that, while handling, used material shall
not submit on the rails, whatever shall be their lengths, to bending constraints superior to 250 MPa.
lt shall be strictly forbidden to throw rails and iron fittings for loading or unloading; in case of provisory
lay on the site , they shall never be laid directly on the floor.
If laid in balance, between two support points, a rail shall never have a radius shorter than 100 m.
lt shall be forbidden to draw (in length) a CWR without a special device limiting rubbing strains.
12.2 Ballast
12.2.1 Quality Requirements
Req 39 Ballast shall be composed of crushed stones with fractured faces, composed of hard, strong and
durable particles, free of material, in order to avoid, th rough their nature or magnitude, to affect the
ballast performance.
Ballast shall be produced in conformity with the EN 13450 standard .
Ref: HHR· LO· TR -403-INE-001 -01 PAGE 27/46

TRACK SYSTEM
For high speed lines :

~ Acceptable materials shall comply with EN 13450: Los Angeles :514 , M Deval < 5
~ Absorption shall not exceed 0.5% (class A of EN 13 450 standard)
~ Gradation shall comply with the following requirements :
Table 11: Ballast Grading- Mainline and Secondary Track Percent Passing by Weight
Sieve Size (mm) EN 13450 references

63 100
50 70 to 99
40 30 to 65
31 .5 1 to 25
22.4 0 to 3
~ 0.063 Less than 0.5% (class A EN 13 450)
31 .5to50 >50
12.2.2 Quality tests
Req 40 The supply, handling and installation of ballast shall be in accordance with the Consortium Quality
Plan and ISO 9000 procedures .
Req 41 Prior to installation , the Contractor shall provide the Government with certified laboratory test
results of ballast quality and gradation tests, approved by the Design Verification Engineer.
Req 42 Quality tests shall be carried out in accordance to EN 13450 standard
Samplings shall be undertaken in accordance with standards in EN 13 450, EN 932 , EN 933 EN

1097 and EN 1367
12.3 Sleepers
12.3.1 STANDARD
Req 43 Sleepers shall be in accordance with:

I£ required standard EN 13230
i£ The STI « substructure »constrains following :
!£ A minimal weight of 220 Kg for sleepers or track supports ,
'I: A minimal length of 2.25m for concrete sleepers .
Req 44 The concrete hardness of the sleepers shall comply with t e:ba11ast
attrition risks of ballast.
Ref: HH R- LO- TR -403-INE-00 1-0 1 PAGE 28/46

TRACK SYSTEM
12.3.2 HANDLING
A particular attention shall be paid on unloading , transport and loading of concrete sleepers in order to avoid
damages.
Requirements for operating methods, employed engines and apparatuses shall prove the control of above
described risks .
it shall be strictly forbidden to throw sleepers for loading or unloading ; these operations shall be achieved with
appropriate handling machines.
12.4 Fastening system
Req 45 Fastening systems performances are specified by standards EN 13481 « performance

requirements for fastening systems », regarding in particular:
11: Minimum strength to forward and backward oscillations of the rail within fastening system (EN
13481-2)
1 ~£ Strength to frequent loadings
Test methods shall be specified in standards EN 13146 « test method for fastening systems »;
particularly, required minimal electric resistance shall be of 5 KO, in compliance with standard
measure of EN 13146-5. Nevertheless a particular attention shall be paid to special check-
controlling systems and signalling systems with higher resistance requirements .
The dynamic rigidity of the rail pad shall not be superior to 600 MN/m concerning fastening of
concrete sleepers.
12.5 Turnouts
Req 46 Turnout components (rail , sleepers, fastening system) shall comply with specified standard
requirements as defined above.
I Req 47 Turnouts shall be capable to be incorporated in the CWR.
IReq 48 Geometric specifications are described in appendix 3: turnout scheme .
Req 49 Technical specifications of turnouts shall comply with all following parameters :
Maximum value of free wheel passage in switches : 1380 mm into service,
Minimum value of fixed nose protection : 1392 mm into service
-~~~ Maximum value of free wheel passage at crossing nose : 1356 mm into service
y, imum value of free wheel passage at check/wing rail entry : 1380 mm into service
·,J. .
·,g;f~i um flange way width : 38 mm into service
~ ~
tVfu'9 1 m crossing gap: gap in crossing corresponding to a ratio from 1 to 9 in case of obtuse
crossi g with a minimum rising up of the check rail of 45 mm combined with a minimum wheel
diam r of 330 mm on direct tracks .
fn i um flange way depth : 40 mm into service
Ex ess height of check rail : 70 mm into service
.•
-r."~
12.6 Welds J
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001 -0 1 PAGE 29/46

TRACK SYSTEM
IReq 50 Aluminothermic welds: used proceeding shall satisfy standard requirements of EN 14730-1
Req 51 Electric welds of the tracks: electric welds on the tracks shall be limited and comply with standard
requirements of EN 14587-2
Ref : HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001 -0 1 P AGE 30/46

TRACK SYSTEM
13. PROCUREMENT CONSTRUCTION AND FACILITIES

REQUIREMENTS
13.1 Procurement
13. 1. 1 RAIL PROCUREMENT

No rails shall be manufactured within the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. The Consortium shall import
them .
The Consortium shall submit to the Government, for approval : origin, specifications and test reports
of the rails they intend to use . Test reports shall be delivered by approved laboratories , short listed
by the Government.
Random tests will be carried out by the Government during the Construction Period .
13.1.2 BALLAST PROCUREMENT

Ballast shall be produced within the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia .
For the quarries from which the Consortium intends to supply the ballast, the Consortium shall
submit to the Government, for approval, specifications and test reports of ballast. Those tests
reports shall be delivered by approved laboratories, short listed by the Government and shall be
performed under the Government's supervision.
During the Construction Period , tests shall be carried out for each and every new lot/batch of
ballast.
13.1.3 POSSIBILITY OFA NEW RAILWAY BETWEEN JEODAH PORT AND THE HHR WORKBASES
Any potential new railway track used to transport materials from Jeddah Port to the various HHR
workbases falls within the right of way of the Landbridge railway project.
As such , this would require the consent of the Land bridge Consortium .
No other rail route is possible since the area around the city of Jeddah is very densely populated
and land acquisition is very difficult.
13.2 Earthworks control
The integrity of the subgrade shall be maintained ; a particular attention shall be paid on the
importance to preserve faultless geometry, surface and strength of all layers constituting the track-
bed during substructure works.
13.3 Track laying
13.3.1 TOPOGRAPHY
The track shall lay on a very precise and approved topographic groundwork in compliance
with the Route Civil Works contractor. The Consortium shall reinforce this groundwork and
make it in compliance with the construction area . Necessary carrying out shall be
achieved with the same accuracy as specified in the groundwork.
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-00 1-01 P AGE 31/46

TRACK SYSTEM
13.3.2 TOLERANCES
Req 52 Accepted tolerances regarding route shall be as follows :

1 ~ Profile in plan : divergence from the main line in respect of its theoretical location : ± 2 mm
11 Profile in length : track measures in respect of theoretical measures : +0 I -2 cm
Ill Actual cant in respect of stipulated cant : 3 mm
111: Plomb location with platforms :
+ 0 I -10 mm in other rail height of the track in respect of the platform nose
+ 10 I -0 mm on the space between the track and the platform nose (perpendiculary sized up)
13.3.3 GEOMETRICAL PROPERTY OF THE TRACK
Geometrical property of the track and prescribed fault restrictions shall be considered as
very important in the substructure and required in the specified interface between train
and track: geometrical property of the track shall be directly linked to :
• Prevention to derailment,
• Vehicle estimation according to the tests of qualification,
• Axles and bogies resistance
Req 53 Requirements shall be specified in CWR design, works and maintenance proceedings established
by the Consortium.
13.4 Principles of CWR risk control
13.4. 1 CWR RELEASE

Free constant temperature shall be defined regarding average rail temperature range due to
climatic conditions.
CWR risk control requires knowledge of various normal strains in the central area , therefore control
of a referring initial state towards temperature variations .
Release aims to reach a referring initial state known and defined within a working range of
temperature which shall be taken into account by the design requirements.
IReq 54 Working and maintenance proceeding shall specify works rules to keep the track in original state
IReq 55 Besides, They shall define also all type of works requiring CVR release for the same reasons.
In CWR central area and out of particular points there is a simple link between normal strain and
temperature. Consequently, CWR risk control may occur according to variations of rail
temperature. Means of estimation or measuring rail temperature shall be u jgct::o: articular rules
in maintenance and work requirements. \0 enJ0 s,{e-11 -..;:"
O·
~"t · · '):J\OJd
-0.
.::) c;
....
'?.,(:>
9 .
11
1/(~. · ..
0,. V
· ' t/ .~ \
- <;.. -;. '
1-
~,>) (j)
·,
~- i
i
d-
... ._.:
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -40 3-INE-001 -0 1 PAGE 32/46

TRACK SYSTEM
13.3.1.1 RELEASE IN CURRENT SECTION

CWR release is the operation allowing a CWR to pass from a random constraint stand (induced
especially at the lay out time) to a controlled constraint stand regarding distortion or breaking risk.
CWR release shall be achieved as work proceeds simultaneously on both rails .
CWR release requires following points to be checked :

• Design rules shall be respected ,
• Track strength shall be crosswise sufficient,
• Track to release shall be in an adequate geometrical and altimetric position ,
• Measurement of release temperature shall be achieved through a method based on
elongation statement after release and shall take into account local constraint of
temperature ,
• Bars cutting shall remove existing aluminothermic welding in priority
• Maximal release length in a single operation shall be specified in works requirements,
• In case of works modifying strength stand in the rail after release , a « part release » @
shall be carried out.
13.3.1.2. ADJUSTMENT OF DEVICES AT THE CWR EXTREMITIES

Maintenance and works requirements or application documents relating to end pieces devices shall
specify initial adjustments to be carried out on these devices while releasing CWR as well as their
checking conditions for further application .
13.3.1 .3 TURNOUT INCORPORATING

For technological purpose it shall not be possible to carry out a zero constraint of certain turnout
parts at initial temperature. Turnout incorporations shall be carried out in respect of rules described
in a specific application document to be established by the Consortium .
13.3.1.4 STRAINS DI STRIBUTION

Local strains distribution aims to standardize them on a defined length and in a central CWR area
where they have been disturbed without effect on their average value .
Maintenance and works requirements shall specify necessary cases for carrying out distribution
and rule books on release shall specify carrying out conditions .
0
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001-D 1 PAGE 33/46
TRACK SYSTEM
13.4. 3 CWR STABILITY CONTROL ACCORDING TO AIR TEMPERATURE

Specific requirements shall define:
• Temperatures above which a control or a speed limit shall be necessary as long as a
buckling risk shall remain high
• A calendar period with strict restraints for works which could damage the track
stability
• A temperature threshold (heat wave) above which a particular control shall be carried
out for more critical situations
• Possibly, more restrictive stipulation according to local environmental constraints
13.5 Carrying out of ballast thickness
The Consortium shall set up a procedure for ensuring the needed ballast thickness in order to
achieve required geometric property of the track;
• Carried out means,
• Requirements to be taken into account,
•.:::....· ·.
...-..::,~·.... • Quality controls,
• definition of various stages of ballast lay out
• Tolerances regarding construction and statement to consider at various stages of
ballast lay out
13.6 Turnouts
Movable switch nose crossing shall lay in alignment. Fixed switch nose crossing may lay
in curve; in this case, speed requirements, as specified in paragraph 8.1, shall be
observed for considered divergent track.
Turnout implementation on bridges shall be studied together with Route Civil Works
contractor. This is, in principle, forbidden for high speed line.
Requirements concerning implementation of turnouts on the track or relatively to each

other shall be specified according to, under the Government's responsibility for interfaces
(Phase 1 Contractors):
• Rolling stock (safety measure),

• Maintenance strategy (reliability, disposability, maintainability criteria),
• Passengers comfort,
• Required measures for the safety facilities; particularly monitoring control of turnouts.
13.7 Breather joint for civi l works structure
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001-01 P AGE 34/46

TRACK SYSTEM
They have no bed and are equipped with rails enabling to limit effects of a derailment including in
the area of dilators .
This breather joints have a 600 mm aperture for each expansion joint and are composed of two
expansion joints: Generally an expansion joint for civil wo rks structure and a expansion joint for
CWR;
In the case of a succession of civil works , the same scheme shall be observed for the whole of the
structures .
Implementation of expansion joints shall be considered with a particular attention in order to limit
their number and therefore to get better maintenance while considering functional schemes of civil
works. This is a very important interface to deal with the Route Civil Works contractor.
13.8 Safetyrail
Safety rails shall be set up as follows : Q

• In areas where local shape could increase consequences of a derailment. A risk
analysis (to carry out by the Consortium) shall identify concerned areas .
• On ballasted structures with a length apron superior or equivalent to 50 m; if the
structure comprises breather joints , these shall be equipped with safety rail over their
entire length .
Safety rail lay out shall comply all following requirements :

• If set up on a civil work, safety rails shall be laid on the whole structure and at 40 m
on both sides,
• Rails shall lay at a distance between 0.36 m and 0.37 m from the running rail
neighbour inside the track,
• They shall be constituted of basic bars inferior or equivalent to 36 m, fished with
normal expansion joints
• Electric continuity of the safety rail shall be interrupted every 500 m maximum by
setting up of insulating joints ,
• An insulating joint shall be carried out on the safety rail plomb with electric joints of
the current track,
• Superior level of the safety rail shall not stick out of the running plan of rails on the
current track, its end-pieces shall be flanged towards track axle by bending and bevel
cut.
• Their location (equipped track line) shall be chosen in compliance with risk analysis,
• They shall be set up on specific sleepers.
13.9 Carrying out of aluminothermic welds
Req 57 Carrying out, reception and traceability of aluminothermic welds , used products, organizations and
welding operators shall comply requirements of standard EN 14730-1 et EN 14730-2.
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -40 3-INE-001-0 1 P AGE 35/46

TRACK SYSTEM
Following requirements shall be observed :

• Risk of damage by weld carrying out on already set components shall be considered
and controlled ,
• No strain shall be applied on a weld which would not have reach a sufficient strength
(temperature at 350 oc)
• Carrying out of weld at the wide interpolated part (superior to 30 mm) shall be
justified with details
• Weld on both rail lines shall not be shifted or more than one division (2 sleepers
maximum)
• Control on weld quality shall be ensured .
Finish ing grinding shall be carried out only after rolling and complete cooling .
A good weld quality shall enable to reduce dynamic overloads on substructures by train running.
\~ ·~ :: -_ -· 13.10 Carrying out of electric welds on track

·----;.·
Req 58 Carrying out and acceptance of electric welds on track shall be achieved according to the standard
EN 14587-2
Following requirements shall be taken into account:

• Control of weld quality shall be ensured
• Control of agreed organizations, proceeding and qualification of welding operators shall be
ensured
• Risk of used component damage shall be taken into account and controlled
• No strain shall be applied on a welding without having reached a sufficient strength
• The number of electric welds on track shall be restrained as follows (releasing and
"stationing" welding in order to eliminate included skidding effects outside turnout areas) :
4.4 each Km and on each stretch of rails on an average distance of 100 Km
Including a maximum of 6 welds for each kilometre and each stretch of rails
13.11 Engine burn
Burns cannot be repaired by grinding or reloading .

After repair:
• Burns larger than 350 mm 2 shall not be accepted
• Number of burns smaller or equivalent to 350 mm 2 shall be limited to 10 by Km and
by track
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -40 3-INE-001 -01 P AGE 36/46

TRACK SYSTEM
14. SPECIFIC ENVIRONNEMENTAL CONSTRAINTS AND

REQUIREMENTS
Req 59 The Consortium shall take into account all relevant data given in Section 6 and Appendix B of
General Specifications documents (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-006 and HHR-LO-CT-602-SAU-001), for
design, building, maintenance and durability of tracks installations.
IReq 60 The Consortium shall pay attention to sand, dust and temperature range strains.
14.2 Turn outs
Turn outs maintenance (defrosting, lubrication, etc.) shal l be defined on the basis of a risk analysis
to be realized by the Consortium and relating to specific environmental restrictions to be identified
before (sand, temperature, frost, etc.).
Ref: HHR- LO- TR ·403-INE-00 1-0 1 PAGE 37/46

TRACK SYSTEM
15. VERI FICATION, TEST AND ACC EPTANC E REQUIREMENT
15.1 Static tests
Static tests shall be done at the end of the works, as part of a checking plan to be added to the
quality proceeding, which the Consortium shall set during the whole works ; both elements ensuring
technical acceptance of the track.
This checking plan shall be specified by the Consortium and include at least:
• One global checking round (grain size analysis , cleanest and profile of the ballast,
rails look, sleepers, fastening, etc.)
• One ultra sound checking round of all the rails and turnouts
• One round of mechanical measuring for checking geometric quality of the track
• One round of mechanical measuring of rails surface quality .
15.2 Dynamic tests
Dynamic tests allow the val idation of track sub-system regarding provided running speed .
Req 61 Dynamic tests shall be realized as follows :

I. With an approved train-set for considered speeds .
t: At a maximal speed of at least 10% over maximal operating provided speed , while running in
graduation in order to warrant safety of the trial train-set,
lt On all routes,
lt Through a qualified partner, warrant of measuring quality,
I[ In respect of the prescriptions of «test instruction », which have been settled under The
Government responsibility and specify technical , organization , operating and safety
proceedings .
For every speed , curve accelerations up and sideway within the body and bogies shall be
calculated and analysed before giving authorization to run at a superior speed limit.
In order to allow a transfer to higher speed level , in whole compliance with safety and comfort
standa rds , geometric rectification can be done.
15.3 Static and dynamic tests on Route Civil Works

TRACK SYSTEM
Staff training to track equipment maintenance shall comply with all training requirements, as
defined in Section 12 of General Specifications documents (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-012).
Particular attention sha ll be paid to staff training towards safety use of all electrical equipment,
devices or tools .
Ref: HHR- LO· TR -403-INE-001 -0 1 PAGE 39/46

TRACK SYSTEM
17. DOCUMENTATIONS REQUIREMENTS
17.1 Risk analysis
Four month after contracting :
• Risk aAalysis allowing to specify referenced concepts of settlement and maintenance

ofCWR
• Risk analysis relating to specified environmental constraints.
• Risk analysis concerning areas to fit with safety rails.
• Risk analysis concerning material damage by handling and operating means to cover
these risks.
17.2 Proceeding
Six months after contracting:

• Global Design Report including
• CWR study report
• Gauge analysis regarding rolling stocks characteristics
RAMS targets to achieve performance Requirements expected
• Main and specific proceeding of CWR design

• Proceeding of CWR risk managing
• Canting method warranting, at the lay out, a minimum ballast thickness,
• Proceeding of interface with civi l works to:
1.1 Ensure a continuous thickness for current section,
1.2 warrant linear variation of ballast thickness on approach of Civil Works structures,
1.3 allow track lay out without any added risk of derailment
• Proceeding of ballast layer operating
17.3 Design documents
Before the beginning of VTA period :
• Equipment scheme
• Design principles of ballast retaining seal
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001-0 1

TRACK SYSTEM
17.4 File of realized work:
For commissioning:
• Track plans
• Equipment scheme in compliance with the building site
• Lifebooks of CWR : out locking, incorporation, studies reports
• Location of the track relating to lateral track topographical references
• Turn outs file s
17.5 Files of achieved checking and trials
• Records of internal and external checking ,

• Results of dynamic trials,
• Results of static trials,
17.6 Booklets of maintenance
• Technical rules of maintenance (including necessary abilities of the maintenance

staff)
• Necessary documents to draw up the file of further intervention on the work, in order
to prevent most easily professional risks during further intervention on the work.
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001 -01 PAGE 4 1/46

TRACK SYSTEM
18. TOOLS AND SPARE-PARTS REQUIREMENTS
18.1 Tools
Req 62 Specifications of too ls necessary to the maintenance shall be supplied by the Consortium in
Technical rules of maintenance document.
18.2 Spare parts
Req 63 Sufficient spare parts components shall be provided by the Consortium to ensure that RAMS
criteria shall be maintained for a period of 12 years from commissioning date.
I·· •
··!.-.-.· IReq 64 The spare part levels shall be specified in the Maintenance Plan by the Consortium .
Ref: HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001-0 1 PAGE 42/46

TRACK SYSTEM
APPENDIX
)
TRACK SYSTEM
UNBALLASTED TRACK
EXAMPLE OF LAY OUT IN HIGH SPEED AREA RUN
~0
50 Filling concrete fiber in

Casing or reinforced continous without expansion
concrete slab joints
Treated heavy
material
,.. .·:
;_ 200
4%
Cross section in common track
____J P ~-5. .· .: .'·.c:§:0? n r.. /l

------~
Cross section in turnout with switch. nose crossing

TRACK SYSTEM
APPENDIX N°2: ALIGNMENT PARAMETERS
Allgnement parnmeters: lftble w ilh lltnlted vnlues

n ' lt pcu•neter·e mu.t be eonfinned or modified by contractOf phMe 2 ecco.-dJflt to CWR s tudy, ro4hng atock comC'tcristic end pertronlolnce, rnorntenanc:e tlfa\egy, operation oncJ .a let)' c:mer1a
M e t cotrectJona. tMa rwumeter. mus t be g tven to con110r1 h wn plv.. . 1 Aeet~oGn 1\8 po&a.ib~
I oea!:Q; ·~ jKmlhJ trael S•GO I s •80 I 5 • 100 I s - no I S• 130 I s• 1C.O I 5 • 170 I S •220
11 s ·= I s • 170 I 5 •300 S •320 I 5 •lSO
can t parmetert with tr4ek oa\IOe • 1,435 m

CoelllcleR ol Qrtl 7AV"Iorcllboltol No c:cn:emea 25000 40000 70000 110 1 000 1110 210 3110 000 390 e 650 1 000
Cent
TM~-.-v-""'otrtlnct11t'OIWI~
Uti JOftc:IIOft 01,.,.. VMI!I ... ewr. MO
c.n,............MiiltC.~CV'I'·
fCltltt . . ; l'tlnft\,ut~h
Nonnl!l vakle (nvn """"''

C:MI•('I\~toot 1 Jfl...,.._~•2
C:IM•{f!;· IIO;llf) .............. ~l 100 180
"""" nvn
c.,..-<•·7..¥1• • .,..._ .. 1 I
Cant in Atfotm Aret'l t:IAtion Of' 0 0 0
Cant 111 t\n'l ov.- ~ l.mitecf oc.c:on:ltnQ IO turn CHef te~ 10 be Pf'OCIM l7j COiliKJI'UUm lmptemenlai:IOn not DIONed In cli'Ve
con!' 1n1!'UIIUCI""' "OU 12FlfJIOT:

Nonnal vw. nvn
I'"' tonCe'T10Cl 160 140 120 1201 1txll 1001 601 60
ex~ vat.Je .., 1 10~ 1~ 10~ 130(" 130(" 110 tiO
ll'l 150~1N<k ...lh<>ll1boll•ot ·.•.
~111tncen<ygrven 10-piiOM
nvn
I'"' ccncemec ·-""
NotmolvakJO
tr-.ovlllJe nvn
100
160
150
165
140
165
110
140
1txll
130
1!01
1txl '~
90
6~
eo
cantwneoon Noccnc:<I'TW!<I
\kn : I
161S 3 270 216 1 80 1 66 1 1 7 98 0110 080 on 068 062
cant oonaency vannuon

""""" NDIXIleomocl
Nor!NIVIIUO(ITVTIII J(l
~ vOiuO(mnvo)
Geometricnl pAnnetera w 1tll tri'K.k g ouge • 1,435 m

,_.,.,_ ~mini_ • 11,8.11 S'l(c.lt _ • ~tdellie~nc:y_..) R nlini OCW1J\DI • 1 1,8x Sl((cent _ . • ....,. Otndeoc;v )
m
t• 1D-ll; 1000 (2)R
Trod< Tmck t•10'x 100012-.R
• rt """
NorTnal and exqlllomol ~· "'
10 IJe calcdct,.., occcrdroQ to toll
1100 eoo o •
Rminl ac:••11,8x S'l(t3nt••• • c:artdeftdenqr.,.,..10)
0 230 160 120
R mini •• • • 11,8 • s•1(e.ant . . . • cant deftdency - •
10 ~ 8~
oma1teo1 vom toncuon or tr11n01110n

-.em 1
"""'"length
474 sse 0-'0 1 1961 2778 3846 4 SOS 5556
Trocl< • 1 • 1 I Tn>elo olo<nement • 10' x 1 I R
lnook mm 1 S95 300 I I 11 90
......,.,..,_,. 25000 25000
Mnm.m 10ng1ll Of - curve OeccrdOlg la coni vtllloUcn (most unlll'l<lr1Jble lhOn COill OIDdonl VllllliClor1) • L-.,. • -t.-.i<Gnl 11011o'""'--, L..,. • C.U.,.../Cwtl Vlll1odor1..-
-...
Nonnal m
tlo conclml>d 66 71 89 107 116 1<2 151 1116 ZlO 270 300 3.-"0 ')50
EACIIIliiOMOI,m :m 29?
-two
67 83 100 1oe 133 142 18J 192 250 l61
M<Wnum length <1 ..,..,., .,... or <1 ov-tvocl<
512 • e<tej)IIOMOI S/3 NorTnal S/1,5 · f>cepUomftl 512
fcl1cwonc curves
m 11n 1
-
:r . . . .
301 401 >01
e... - , m 20 20 27 1-)1 <40
0<
• 53 57 73 1n1
'""""' S11,5·Ex- 512
mt ~I 200 200
,,.._
............. length ciOCJo.ght ..- _ """" ....
Ncm\ol(m) 1C 40 so eo &5 eo 110 153 tOO 200 250 250
In-·
JO 65
Exceptrcmo~(ml 0 cr20 OorV Oct33 00f 4 0 OOf 43 Ocr53 ~«57 Ocr73 115 13S 150 200 200
Tober ec:C«CC toeafe cn1crlo
Gr~alent parameters
Moxlmum!J11<10.,. mm/m
~~=::::::=.::,,-~eo::::::. 7!'.!,'".:.=.::;:::;:::,.; 6!J • 11001 R (6!Joxpr_,., rmvn1 """R on m)
)
PttlxmlUm ... , e 0 be llehned m 02
M.IXImal doff...ent• of~
Wtta.c vertical CI.J'Ye;
w~~.~ .. tor et tnt.ns.ltion 4 mn\'m • mtNm I•rrmtm I• rnn'm J nwn11n 13mnvm 12 nvnin> lz ntn..-m 12mmlm 1rrmlm __l_1mnVm ltmrnilll 11mnvm 11mnvm
,Alwnt..m va- ot vet1Jcot awvee (m) Conesponcino to venleailltt@l:n11011 or · 0.021 o '"'""'""" value and 0,031 o '"' e>ceptiomOI ntiOTlOI vaiU6.,; o~'; ,;;•;:;.;,"";'o~ ~· ~la
vWt exuObOf"J'\aaYU..
I :lOO 7 :lOO 10500 10000 12500 15500 18000 21000
"''"""""
3500 5000 6000 8000 17000
e. 4000 • 500 7500 12500 8000 13000 15000 18000
1:.<._.., ...."""" 600 900 2000 2500 6500 11
....
>11)' 900 20001 !5001 4DWI 4 5001 65001 7 !1001 ~ >OCl 1UUWI IUWI
V UO t:UMOO(m
9001
,. I """' 40000
IM •nvn lunOfl Of olopoo and Vltlllcal ...-(m)
30 30 40 50 liC ~ eo 85 110 92 toe 120 120 14()

TRACK SYSTEM
APPENDIX N°3: TURN OUT SCHEMATIC
... ... N
• ::!1
"T1
l a
" i f
i ~
!!!. ~ t
l ltl 1
i
!!
~
a
g ·i
!l
j ~
&
§"
t
i
J m
·.·.·.·
·'-·.·.,.1
0> .... f1> Ill
~
(")
~~ J s i3
::r f ~
J·
I
~
g.
"0
!f
.,'2 I~
'2
j
i., !!7
- ~
)>
I
·.···\ >
. J
l
SCHEME OF TURNOUTS
Ref : HHR- LO- TR -403-INE-001-01 PAGE 46/46

O:J::::v~l .bg.b:¥1 iiD Ldl CiJ.u.w gbl

PHASE 2
INTERLOCKING AND MAIN LINE SIGNALING

A1 17/04/2009 First Issue S.VECCHIATO
A2 22/04/2009 Review after checking comments S.VECCHIATO
B1 25/05/2009 Review after the Government comments S. V ECCHIATO
B2 29/05/2009 Review after final workshop S. VECCHIATO
C1 29/06/2009 Final RFP S. VECCHIATO
01 11/09/2009 Review after Linklaters 's comments S. VECCHIATO
E1 17/12/2011 Update for Contract R J Adams
REVISION W: E1 NAME DATE SIGNATURE
16/12/2011
PREPARED BY Getinsa
17/12/2011
.;. .. CHECKED BY R Adams
17/12/2011
17/12/2011
APPROVED BY R Adams
Ref : HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-001-E1 PAGE 2/47

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 7

2.1TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTEROPERABILITY (TSI) .......... .. ...... .. .. .... .......... ... ... ..... ......... ....... ..... .. ..... 8
2.2ERTMS SPECIFICATIONS ................................................. .... .......... ........ .... .. ........... .... ..... ........ .. ... .... ............... 8
2.3EUROPEAN CENELEC STANDARDS .............. ....... .... ......... ............ .... .. ...... ........... .. .... ....... .... ........ ............. .. ... 8
3. PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF WORK ........................................................................................................ 10
4. BASIC DESIGN ............................................................................................................................................ 11

4.1 MAIN LINE SIGNALING .... ............... .. ............ ..... .......... ... .. .... .. ... ............... .. .................... .. ... ......... ........ ..... .... ... 11
4. 1. 1 Subsystems .. ...... .. .. ............ ............... .. ........ ....... ......... .... .............. .. ..... ........ ... .... .. ................ ... ..... ....... ... . 11 C)
4.1.2 Centralized Traffic Control System .. .. .......... ... .... ...... ..... ......... ........ .. .... ................................................ 11 ~
4.1.3 Main signaling rooms (MSR) ... .. ............ ... ... .... ...... .......... ........ ....... .. ..... ... ......................... .................... 11
4. 1.4 Intermediate signa ling rooms (ISR) .. ...... .. ........ ........ ... ............ .. ...... ... ... ... ............................................ 12
4.1.5 Depots and workshops interlocking .. ... ...... ...... .... .... .. ... ................ ... ... ......... ... ...... .. ..... ...... ....... .... ... ..... 12
4. 1.6 Train detection system .................................... ............. .................................... ......... .......... ... ... ........ ..... 12
4. 1. 7 Cab -signaling system ...................... ...... .. .......................... .............................. ........ ..... .... .... .. ......... .. ..... 13
4. 1.8 Spacing system ...... ......... .. ... ......................................... ..... ... .. .... ....................................... .... .. ... ..... ....... 13
4.1.9 Working staff protection system ... .... ... ...... .... .. ........... .. .... .. ....... ... ...... .. ... .. ............................................ 13
4.1.10Hot axle bearing detection system (HABD) .................... ....... ................. .......... ... .... ......... ..... .. .. ..... ..... 13
4. 1. 11 Wayside signaling system .... ...... ....... .... ..... ..... ... ..... .... ......... .... .. ............ .. .... .................................. ....... 13
4.1.12Crosswinds detection system .. .. .... ....... ....... ........... ...... ... .. .... ... .... ............ ..... ................... ....... .. ............ 14
4. 1. 13 Earthquake protection system. ........... ............. ...... .................... ...... ....... .... ... .... ....... .. ..................... .. .... 14
4. 1. 14 Vehicle fall detection system .. ..... .. ........... ....... ........... ..... ..... .. ... ......... .. ............. ....................... ............. 14
4.1. 15Signaling system in stations ................... ................... ... ................... .. .. .... ............. .. .. ... .... ...... ..... .......... . 14
4.21NTERLOCKING .... ........... .. ..... .. ... ... ... .... .. ... .... .. ... .. .. .... ..... ..... ... ...... .... ...... .. ............... .......... .. ... .... .......... .......... 15
4.2.1 Subsystems ...... ...... .... ...... ... ..... ..... .. .... ..... ..... ... .. .... ........... ......... ...................... ...... ........................... ....... 15
4.2. 2 Interlocking system on the main line ...................................... ... .......... .... .. .............. ...... ...... ... .. ........... . 15
4.2.3 Interlocking system for depots and workshops .... ... .. ... ........... .. .... ............... .. .. ................................... 15
5. GENERAL OPERATION AND GOVERNMENT REQUIREM ENTS .................................................... 16
6. FUNCTIONAL AND TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 17
Ref: HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-001-E 1 PAGE 3/47

INTERLOCKING AND MAIN LIN E SIGNALING
\'
6.1.19Temporary speed restrictions ............ .......... .... .... .... ..... ..... .. ... .. ... ... ....... ....... ..... ...... .... .... .. ... .... ...... ... .. .. 22
6.1 .20Hot axle bearing detector system ..... ...... ... ........ .. ........ .. ............ ... .... ................ .. .. ..... .. .. ........... .... .. ..... 22
6. 1.21 Crosswinds detection system ............... .... ....... .. .... ..... .. ........ ................... ...... ... .. ... .. .. .. .. ... .... .......... .... .. 22
6.1 .22Vehicle fall protection system .. ............. ............ .... .... ................. .......... .... .... ............................... ..... ...... 23
6.1 .23Point heating .... ...... .... .. ... ... .......... ........ ...... ..... .... ..... .... ....... ..... ... .. .......... ............. ...... ... ... ......... ............... 23
6. 1. 24Monitoring I remote supervision system .. .. ........................ ..... .. ........ .. .. .. .. ............... ... ... .. .... .......... ..... . 23
6.1.25Specific requirements for tunnel sections .. .. ....... .......... .. .... .. ... ..... .... .... ... ....... .. ... ..... .... ..... ... .. .. ... .. .. .... 23
6.21NTERLOCKING ....... .. ... .. ... .......... ................. ... ....... .... ....... ... ......... ..... ..... ...... ....... ......... ........... .............. .. ...... .. 24
6.2.1 Type of interlocking ......... ... .. ... ........ .......... ........ .... ... ... ..... .. .. .. ....... ................ ....... .. .. ............. .... .... ... ... .. .. 24
6. 2. 2 Signa ling principles ... .. ............ .. ... .. ................ ..... ... ........ .. ... ....... ... .. ... .. .. ... .... .. .. ...... .. .. ... .... ...... ... ....... ... .. 24
6.2.3 Conflicting routes .......... ... .. ... .. ... ....... ..... .. ... ..... .. ...... .. ..... .......... ... .... .......... ... ....... ..... ....... ....... .......... .. .... 24
6.2.4 Approach locking .... ..... ........ ............ ..... ..... ...... ...... .. ..... ... ... .... ...... .............. .. .. .... .. ...... ......... ......... ..... ... ... 24
6.2.5 Route locking ..... ..... .... .. .... ..... .... .... .... .. ... ... .. .. ........ .. ........ .. .. ... ........... ... ... .. ..... ....... .. .. ... .... ....... ..... ........... 25
6.2.6 Turnout locking ........ .. ................... .. ...... ......... .... ... ........ .. ....... ... ........ .. ... ... ..... ........ ......... ..... ............. ....... 25
6.2. 7 Anti-preselection .. ... ...... ...... .. ..... ..... ........... ..... ............................ ...... ........ ..... ............. ...... .. ..................... 25
6.2.8 Proceed indication ... ... .. ........ .... ........ ............. ......... .. .. .... ..... ...... .. ... .... ........ .. ..... ....................... .. ... .... ... .. 25
6. 2. 9 Safety margins and overrun protection ... ........... ................ .... ..... ..... .................................. ..... ............. 26
6.2.10Reversible working ...... ...................... ................ .. .... ............ .... .......... ......... .. ... ..... ... ....... ....... ......... .. ....... 26
:,:: :::::;J 6. 2.11 Maintenance support local system ................. ..... ..... .. ................................. ............... .......... ................ 26
( .
;-;;;_ ~....
6. 2. 12 Specific requirements for depots and workshops .......... .. ........... .... .. .... ... ............ .... ......... ... .............. 2 7
7. INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................. 28
7.1 GENERAL. ... .... ...... .. ..... .. ............. ..... ...... .... ...... ....... .... ..... ...... .... ...... .. ...... .... ......... .. ...········· ·· ...... ·· ············· .... .. 28
7.21NTERFACE WITH ROUTE CIVIL WORKS ..... ... ...... ... .. ... .... .. ... .. ... ..... .......... ......... .... .... .. .. ... ... ....... ........... .. ....... 28
7.3LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLIES ............... ... ........ ...... ... ..... ... ..................... .......... .......... .. ... ... .......... ... .. ... ... .. 28
7.41NTERFACE WITH OCS ...................... .......... ..... .......... .. .. .... .... ... .. ....................... ......... ... ........ .... ....... .. ..... ... .... 28
7.4.1 Traction return current .. .. ...... .... .. ........ ....... ... ... .... .... ..... ........ ..... .......... .......... .... ..... .......... ... ... ... .. .......... . 28
7.4.2 Electrical immunity ......... .. .. ... .... .. ... .. .... .. ... .. ........ .. ........... ............. .... ..... .. .. .... ... .... ..... ................. .... ....... . 29
7.4.3 Neutral sections and insulated overlaps ..... .. .. ..... ............ .. ....... .. ........ ..... ............ ... ........ ..... ... ............. 29
7.4.4 Electromagnetic compatibility. ...... ..... ..... ..... .... .. .... ...... ... ..... ........ .. .... ... .... .... ...... ...... ...... .................. .... . 29
7.51NTERFACE WITH COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ... .. ....... ..... ..... ..... ..... .... ... ......... ... ....... ...... .... .. .. ... ..... ... ... .. ... ..... . 29
7.61NTERFACE WITH TRACK DESIGN .. .. ....... .............. ... .... ... .... ....... .. ....... ....... .. ... .......... .... .. .... ... ... ...... .. ... ....... ... .. 29
7.6.1 Turnouts ... .. .. ... ... .... ........................ ............... .......... .......... .... ..... ...................... ........... .... .... .... ..... .... ........ 29
7.6.2 Bond connections ... ...... .... ....... .. .. ..... .... ..... ...... ............ .. .. ...... ..... ................ ... .. ... .. .. .... ..... ..... .......... .... ..... 29
?.?INTERFACE WITH ROLLING STOCK ..... .. .. .... ......... ...... ..... ... ... .......... .. .. .... .... .. ... ..... ..... ... ..... ............. .. ........ ....... 30
7. 7. 1 Signal sighting .... .. . .................... ...... .. ..... ..... ....... .... .... .. ... .. ........ .......... .... .... ...... ....... ....... ...... .......... ...... . 30
7. 7.2 Braking performance .. .. ....... ..... ....... ..... .......... .. ....... ...... ... .... .......... ..... ................... .. .. .... .. .. ... .......... ...... . 30
7. 7.3 Wheelset impedance .. .. ..... ... .... .. ... .. ...... .... .. ..... ...... ....... .......... ............... .. ........ .. .... ... ...... .... .............. .... . 30
7. 7.4 Electromagnetic interference ... .. ... ....... .. .... ....... .. ... ................ ... ... .... .. .. ..... ...... .................... .... ... ... ....... .. 30
". . 7. 7.5 Pantographs ....................................... ............ ..... .... ... ....... ... ..... ... .. ................. .......... .. ...... ...... ... .... .... .. .... 31
7.81NTERFACE WITH OCC .. .... ......... ...... .... ....... ... ... .... .... .. ........ ......... .......... ....... ............. .............. ..... ... ...... .. .... .. . 31
7.8. 1 Reporting of information .... ... ..... .... .... .. .... ...... ... ........... ........ ..... ... .. ....... ................... ... ....... ..... .. ..... ..... .... 31
7. 8.2 Reporting of alerts and warnings ... ... .... .. ... .. ...... ......................... .... .... ......... ...... ....... ....... . ............. .... .. 31
8. BUILDING REQUIREMENTS ........ .... ......................................................................................................... 32
Ref: HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-001-E 1
0
9. RAMS R EQUIREMENTS ...................•...............................•.............•.....•........................•..........................• 35
9.1 GENERAL REQUIREM ENTS ... ..... .. ...... .. ..... .... .. .. ..... ....... .... .... ... ...... ..... ..... ..... ... ..... ..... ..... .. ............... ... .... .. .. ... .. 35
9.2SPECIFIC RELIABILITY REQUIREMENTS ..... .. ..... .... ..... .. ... .. ...... .. ... ... .. .. ...... .... .. ...... .. .......... ..... ... ... ...... ..... ... ... .. . 35
9.3SPECIFIC AVAILABILITY REQUIREMENTS ....... ... ............ ...... .. .. ...... .... ..... .. ... ..... ..... ... .. ... .. ..... ....... ... .. ...... .... ... .. 35
9 .4SPECIFIC MAINTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS .. .... .......... ...... .. .. .. .... .... .. ..... .. .... .. ..... .... .. ..... ...... .. ... ......... ... .... .... 35
9.5SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ... ....... .... .. .. ......... ... .... ....... .. ..... .. ... .. .......... ...... ......... .... ... ..... .. ... .. ... .. .. ........ 36
12.PROCUREMENT, CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .............................. 39
12.1 IN-TRACK SIGNALING EQUIPMENTS ....... ..... ......... .. .. ... ........... .. ....... ...... .... ...... ..... ...... .. ... ... ...... ... .. .... ...... 39
12.2 PHASING OF WORKS ... ...... ... ...... .... ..... .... ...... ... ........ ........ ........... ....... .. .... ...... ... ..... ...... .... .. ... ... ..... .... ... ... 39
13.SPECIFIC ENVIRONMENTAL CONSTRAINTS AND REQUIREM E NTS .......................................... 40
13.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .............. .... ......... ... .... ..... ....... .. ... ... .... .. .. .. ... .. .... .... ..... ...... ..... .... .. .. ...... .... .. .... 40
13.2 PROTECTION OF LINE INSTALLATIONS TO SOLAR RADIATIONS ..... ....... .. .. ........ ............ ... .. ..... .. ... ... .. .... . 40
13.3 WIND ..... ............... .................. .... .. ............. ......... ......... ... ....... ..... .... ..... ............ ... .............. .... ......... .. .. ... ... 40
13.4 SAND .. ... .. ..... .... ... ..... ...... ...... .. ... ..... ..... ......... ... ........ .. .. ... .. ..... ..... ... ...... ..... ... ...... .. .. .... ...... ...... ........ .......... 40
13.5 EARTHQUAKES .... .... ... ... ................ ... .... ... .... ...... ... ...... .. .... ........... .... .. .. ....... ... .. ...... .. ........ ....... ..... ... .. ...... 40
14.VERIFICATION, T EST AND ACCEPTANCE R EQUIREM ENTS ......................................................... 41
14.1 ACCEPTANCE PRINCIPLE ......... ..... .... .... .. .. ... .. ..... ........ ....... .. .. ..... ........ ... .... ..... ......... .. .... ... ..... .. ....... .. ..... . 4 1
14.2 CERTIFICATION ... .... .... .... ... ... ... ...... .. .. .... .. .... ...... ... ............ ..... ........ ..... .. ... ..... ... .... .... ... ..... ....... ....... ... ...... 4 1
14.3 DESIGN VERIFICATION ....... ... .... ...... ............... .. .... .......... .. ..... ... .... ... .... ... ... ... ... .. .. ... ...... ....... .. ... .... .. ... .. .... 41
14.4 INSTALLATIONS VERIFICATION .... ...... ....... .... ...... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. ... ..... ....... ..... .. .. ....... .. .. .......... .. .. .. ..... ... .. ... ... 4 1
14.5 CONFIGURATION TESTS OF SIGNALING ROOMS .. .. .. ....... ... .... .... ........ ..... .. ... .. ..... ... .. .. ... .. ........ .... ....... .. ... 42
14.6 LOCAL SIGNALING ROOM TESTS .. ......... ... ........ .. .. ..... ........ .. ... .. .. ....... ....... ....... ..... ... .. .. .... ... ... .. ... ......... ... 42
14.7 SIGNALING INTEGRATION TESTS ... .. .. .. ... .. ... ..... .. ... .... ....... .. ... ... .. .. ............. ........ ..... ..... .. .... ... ..... ..... ... ..... 42
14.8 DYNAMIC TESTS ........... ....... .... ...... ...... .. .... .......... .............. ..... ... .. ................. ..... .. .. .. .. ... .. ... .... ... ......... .. .... 43
14.9 SUB-SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS ...... .......... ....... ... ....... ... .. ..... .. ..... .......... ....... .. .. .... ........ ......... ................... . 43
15.TRAINING REQUIRE MENTS ................................................................................... .................................. 44
16.DOCUMENTATION R EQUIREM ENTS ................................... ................................................................. 45
16.1 SCHEMES AND DIAGRAMS ...... ..... .. ... .... .. ..... .... .... ..... .. .... ...... .. ... ... ..... .. .. ............. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. ... ...... .. .. ..... 45
16.2 TECHNICAL DOCUMENTS ... .. ..... .. .... ...... .. ..... .. .. .... ... .. .... .. ..... ..... ...... ..... .... ....... .. ... .. ....... .. .... ... .. ... .. ...... .. .. 45
16.3 PROCEDURES AND PROOFS ..... .. .... ...... ..... .. ..... ..... ... .... ..... ... .. .. ..... ... .. .. ... .. .. .. .. ........ ..... ............. .. ........... 45
16.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS .... .. .. ........ .... ... .. ..... ... .. ............ .. .......... ..... ... .......... .. .. ...... 46
17.TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS R EQUIREM ENTS ................................................................................... 47
17.1 TOOLS ..... .... .. .... .......... ... ... .. ...... ....... .. ... ........ ... ...... .. .... ... .. .... ....... ... ... .... ... .. ..... ............... ..... ... ......... ....... 47
17.2 SPAREPARTS ... ... ............ ............. ..... ......... ...... .... ... ..... ..... ...... ....... ........... ...... ...... ............. .... ......... .. .... . 47
PAGE 5/47
INTERLOCKING AND MAIN LINE SIGNAUNG
PROJECT REFERENCES
1 HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-001 to 013 General Specifications - Sections 1 to 13
General Specifications - Appendix A : Contractor

Deliverable Requirement List
General Specifications - Appendix 8 : Annual

3 HHR-LO-CT-602-SAU-001
·... .· Climate and Weather in KSA
General Specifications - Appendix C : Interface

Management Requirements
5 HHR-LO-SY-301 -INE-001 System Schematic - Indicative preliminary study
8 HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 RAMS Assurance Requirements
9 HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-001 Infrastructure Maintenance
10 HHR-LO-RS-403-SYS-001 Rolling stock Specifications

·-.
11 HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 Small depot Specifications
12 HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002 Workshop Specifications
Ref : HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-001-E1 PAGE 6/47

1. GLOSSARY
(H HR-LO-CT -602-SYS-002).
In this document, "Main Line" means Line 1, Line 2, sidings, tracks in stations and access tracks
from or to the depots/workshop"
()
PAGE 7/47
The following rules, E.O.S, concerning signaling design, works, operations and maintenance shall
be respected . Any non-compliance (before or after contact signing) shall be notified and written by
the Consortium to Government, and will only be allowed with Government written agreement.
Current version at Base Date shall be used.

···:::!·'
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability- Safety in railway tunnels
• Technical Specification for lnteroperability - Persons with reduced mobility
2.2 ERTMS Specifications
The System Requirement Specifications (SRS) for ERTMS shall be version 2.3.0d.
• EN 50121-1 to 5- Railway applications- Electromagnetic compatibility-Genera l.

• EN 50122-1 - Railway applications - Fixed installations - Protective provisions relative to
electrical safety and earthing
• EN 50124-1 to 2 Railways applications-Insulation coordination-Basic requirements-
Clearances and creepage distances for all electronic equipment
• EN 50125-1 to 3 Railways applications-Environmental conditions for equipment-Equipment
on board rolling stock
• EN 50126 - Railway applications - The specification and demonstration of reliability,
availability, maintainability and safety (RAMS)
• EN 50128 - Railway applications - Communications, signalling and processing systems -
Software for railway control and protection system
• EN 50129 - Railway applications - Communications, signalling and processing systems -
Safety related electronic systems for signalling
• EN 50159-1 Railways applications-Communications, signalling and processing systems-
Safety related communication in closed transmission systems
• ENEN 61508-1 to 3 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/ programmable electronic
safety-related systems -General requ irements
Ref: HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-00 1-E1 PAGE 9/47

3. PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF WORK
This document is part of the Performance Specification for Phase 2 regarding the Main Line
Signaling and Interlocking of HHR railway system. lt aims at describing its basic design as well as
its requirements and interfaces , which shall be respected by the Consortium , according to
Government general requirements for the Railway.
Unless specifically excluded in these requirements, the Consortium shall provide everything
necessary, whether specifically mentioned or not, to ensure the successful implementation, safe
and proper operation of the main line signaling and interlocking system .
Scope of work for this system includes :
• Design, manufacturing and maintenance

~-.:-:- : • Modified scope of work says : Civil works related to signalling , including undertrack crossings
and signalling room platforms, except if Government decides to entrust such work to a Phase 1
Contractor.
• Supply of material and equipment
• Construction and installation
• Cable routes including canal ducts, manholes and all that is necessary to install S& T cables.
• Signaling cables
• Power supply for signaling and interlocking equipment
• Verification and Acceptance Tests
• Associated spare part and special consumables
• Technical documentation
On the other hand , the following is not included:
• OCC design , building and furniture (see "OCC Specifications" document : HHR-LO-CC-403-
SYS-001)
• Stations, except interfaces with cable routes
• Communication facilities (see "Communication system " specifications : HHR-LO-TE-403-
SYS-001)
• Temporary signaling facilities in work bases and during line works, if provided (see "Work
bases Specifications" document HHR-LO-WB-403-INE-001) a-- \
HR
ble
Ref: HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-001-E1 PAGE 10/47

()
4. BASIC DESIGN
4.1 Main line signaling
4.1. 1 SUBSYSTEMS
The main line signaling system includes a number of subsystems, including but not limited to:
• a Centralized Traffic Control System (located in the Operation Control Centre)

• several Main Signaling Rooms (MSR)
• several Intermediate Signaling Rooms (ISR)
• a train detection system compatible with ERTMS L2 )

• a cab-signaling system
• a spacing system
• a track safety system for protection of the staff working on the line
• a hot axle bearing detection system (HABD)
• a wayside signaling system, including eventually light signals in stations and depots for
shunting movements
4. 1. 2 CENTRALIZED TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEM
The Centralized Traffic Control (CTC) shall be part of the OCC at Jeddah Central Station. lt shall
operate all HHR open line, stations and access tracks, by controlling the signaling equipment and
the line facilities.
All train movements shall be monitored by the CTC through a real time display of all train locations
and track occupancy.
All warnings, alarms and working failures shall be identified, displayed and managed by the CTC.
A Train Describer system in the CTC room shall provide information about the status (train number,
departure time and station, stops , arrival time and station) and trains location to CTC staff, in order
to enable efficient operation and management of HHR. This information regarding trains location
and status in the system shall also be provided to other systems automatically and on demand.
4. 1.3 MAIN SIGNALING ROOMS (MSR)
Req 01 Main signalling rooms (MSR) shall be dedicated to controlling turnouts in crossovers, stations or
connections .
SR shall also control all line signalling facilities on both tracks.
Ref: HHR-L0-SI-403-INE-001-E1 PAGE 11147

In the indicative preliminary study System Schematic (HHR-LO-SY-301-INE-001 ), 21 MSR have

been set up along the line.
Req 03 Their location is indicative and the Consortium shall relocate them precisely in order to reach
performance requirements and expected RAMS levels.
Req 04 The exact range of Signaling Rooms shall be given by the Consortium regarding the RAMS criteria
and the proven technology, as expected by Government.
[Req 05 All MSR shall be subordinated to the CTC.
l" • .
4. 1.4 INTERMEDIATE SIGNALING ROOMS (/SR)

··-- ·:-:-~-
Req 06 Intermediate signaling rooms {ISR) shall link line signaling facilities if their distance to the closest
MSR is too important.
In order to avoid important voltage dropping in cables which shall link line signaling facilities and
signaling rooms (SR), the control perimeter of one given SR shall be limited.
On the indicative System Schematic (HHR-LO-SY-301-INE-001 ), 21 ISR have been provisionally

set up on HHR. Their location is indicative and the Consortium shall relocate them precisely in
order to reach performance requirements and RAMS levels expected .
ISR shall not control any point nor crossing, and shall be designed to control only line signaling
facilities on both tracks.
[Req 07 Each ISR shall be subordinate to a MSR.
The number given to each ISR shall correspond to its closest kilometric point.
4. 1. 5 DEPOTS AND WORKSHOPS INTERLOCKING
Req 08 A specific and dedicated interlocking management shall be designed for each small depot and for
the workshop I maintenance base.
4. 1. 6 TRAIN DETECTION SYSTEM
Compliance with ERTMS L2 requires the setting up of a train detection system linked with MSR
and ISR.
Req 09 Train detection based on a proven system for the considered operation sp
Ref: HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-001-E1
4. 1. 7 CAB-SIGNALING SYSTEM
Compliance with ERTMS L2 and high speed design requires the implementation of a cab-signaling
system on HHR, in accordance with CENELEC ETCS standards, as required by Government.
This system is bound to receive radio signaling data in trains and display all necessary information
to the driver, enabling him to control the train without having to observe any wayside signals or
indications. In particular, it will provide a complete speed supervision system , in order to give to
drivers a continuous display of the permitted speed profile.
Cab-signaling shall be used on all ERTMS areas , including stations and access tracks to the main
line.
4.1.8 SPACING SYSTEM
Req 10 Spacing between trains shall be calculated by Radio Block Centres (RBC) , located in the Signaling
Rooms . ·~ -
Req 11 Regarding rolling stock braking capacity and distance to the stopping point, the cab-signaling
system shall calculate the speed indication .
Slow down area indications for trains (due to works or equipment damages, for example) shall also
be given by the RBC.
4.1.9 WORKING STAFF PROTECTION SYSTEM
A track safety system may be provided. This system shall interface with main line signaling to
provide stopping or slow down instruction in case of works in the track safety zone . it can also
allow announcement of running trains through a specific device.
4. 1. 10 HOT AXLE BEARING DETECTION SYSTEM (HABD)
Req 12 A hot axle bearing detection system shall be designed , in order to prevent a warm-up of train axle-
boxes when circulating on the track, and then to avoid their explosion and the derailment of trains .
Based on infrared radiation detections , the HABD system is composed by detectors regularly
located on each side of both tracks (1 detector set every 30 km on average, away from stations
and depots), which are able to transmit an overheating alarm to the CTC using the MSR-OCC
communication system .
14 HABD have been set up provisionally on the main line , on sides of both tracks. Their indicative
location is given on the System Schematic.
PAGE 13/47
Light signals shall be used at each entry of ERTMS areas, giving the authorization to enter the
main line access tracks and initializing immediately the ERTMS on-board equipment through
ERTMS beacons situated on tracks.
Except indications of ERTMS block section ends by markers located on the right-hand side of the
track when facing the direction of travel , no permanent wayside signal shall be installed on open
line and on access tracks to the main line.
Milestones displayed at each kilometre shall give location on the line for both working staff and
train drivers .
Additional wayside signals may be set up , in order to display the following information:
• location of neutral sections,

• station limits ,
• MSR and ISR location.
::- ·- l
·-·.::: ;.:..
4. 1. 12 CROSSWINDS DETECTION SYSTEM
A crosswinds detection system may be designed in order to prevent train derailment in case of
huge crosswinds along the line. Additional wind protection with screens is also possible .
Based on instantaneous wind speed measures through anemometers or other equivalent devices
(crosswind stations) installed regularly along the line , this device shall set speed limits to the train
driver through the signaling system .
On the indicative System Schematic , a crosswind protection station has been planned near each
MSR, except for stations areas and for Jeddah area (from Km 75 to Km 119), where maximum
permitted speed and environmental urban conditions do not require a crosswind protection.
Req 13 The Consortium shall define, in the functional signaling program , the accurate location and
opportunity of a crosswind detection system.
4. 1. 13 EARTHQUAKE PROTECTION SYSTEM
According to the study lead in Section 6 of General Specification documents (HHR-LO-CT-602-

SYS-006), no earthquake protection system is needed .
4. 1. 14 VEHICLE FALL DETECTION SYSTEM

A specific detection system for vehicle falls may be installed on important roads structures which
overpass the line. ·
Req 14 The Consortium shall define , in the functionai signaling program , the accurate location and need of
a vehicle fall protection system.
4. 1. 15 SIGNAL/NG SYSTEM IN STATIONS
Specific wayside signal may be set in stations . As for example :

• Stopping point for train set
• Locking doors signal

• Information of positions for boarding platform and alighting platform.
4.2 Interlocking
4.2. 1 SUBSYSTEMS
The interlocking system is composed of the following subsystems:

• a protection system against unauthorized movements on and to the main line
• a special system for the protection of unauthorized movements in depots, workshop and
maintenance base .
4. 2. 2 INTERLOCKING SYSTEM ON THE MAIN LINE
jReq 15 The interlocking system for the main line and its access tracks shall be linked to the CTC.
Req 16 The interlocking system shall check, in each SR perimeter, if all route setting conditions are
satisfied for one given train.
Req 17 Route command shall be given by the CTC automatic route setting system .
The interlocking system shall be based on the following route setting principle, for each MSR and
ISR:
111: checking of route possibility according to the already locked ones
111: setting up of the route after checking of turnout position and collision risks with other trains
111: locking of the settled route (without any possible modifications without enforcement of specific
procedures).
4.2.3 INTERLOCKING SYSTEM FOR DEPOTS AND WORKSHOPS
Req 18 A specific interlocking system shall be provided for each depot and workshop and based on a
dedicated computerized signal box for secondary tracks (all major depot and workshop tracks except
those giving a direct access to the main line).
jReq 19 Route setting principles shall be.the same as described above for the main line.
PAGE 15/47
5. GENERAL OPERATION AND GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS
Req 20 The following general requirements , which have been set by Government, shall be respected.
Ill The System shall be designed for up to 320 km/h speed .
Ill Trains will be running normally on the right side, but circulations on the opposite side shall be
111: As for the Main Line Signaling and Interlocking system, Government requires ERTMS L2,
allowing 4-minutes intervals between two consecutive trains running in the same direction.
ERTMS SRS version shall be 2.3.0d.
Ill No additional Automatic Train Control system is expected.
lE Proven technology shall only be used .
1"-• •
- - .4 - - ~
·...:~:::·-
Req 21 In addition to Government requirements, the main line signaling and interlocking system shall
facilitate the safe operation of all rail vehicle movements on the main line as well as on the other tracks
defined in the track plans (stations , depots, maintenance base). lt shall include at least, but not
exhaustively, facilities to:
1: Protect movements from other trains and rail vehicles
1: Protect movements from signaling system failures
1: Protect movement from certain environmental risk conditions as defined elsewhere
1: Detect some infrastructure devices status , for example the fitting-up of turnouts, track circuits
(if provided), ,specific detector for obstacles
1: Meet the operational journey time objectives and all other performance aims as defined in the
Basic Service Plan(HHR-LO-OP-202-SYS-001) and Performance Requirements (HHR-LO-PR-
602-SYS-001) documents
1: Ensure RAMS requirements as defined at chapter 8, and also those mentioned in the global
RAMS requirements document (HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 ).
The interlocking system may also:

• Provide staff protection towards circulating trains
• Provide equipments whereby movements are either forbidden or subjected to a speed limit in
the presence of staff
• Assist maintenance staff in maintaining it by diagnosing failures to minimize time to
rectification .
'-c_
6. FUNCTIONAL AND TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
6.1 Main line signaling
The following chapter deals with HHR main line signaling functional requirements .
The Consortium shall notice that the following requirements list is not exhaustive. Therefore , it shall
not exempt the Consortium from full respect of TSI and standards given in part 2 of this document.
Besides it shall be also compliant with regulation rules and commissioning criteria .
6. 1. 1 SIGNALING INFLUENCE ON LINE CAPACITY
Req 22 The Consortium shall design the signaling system to meet HHR Performance Requirements and ·- :y
Operation Plan , as defined in the related documents.
The Consortium shall also submit the criteria chosen to prove that point. This shall also allow a
highlight of the sensitive points on the line, regarding available capacity, to ensure recovering from
perturbations .
6. 1.2 CODIFICATION SYSTEM
Req 23 The Consortium shall submit a codification system to ensure a clear and unique identification of
signalling rooms , marker boards, turnouts , cables , etc. This numbering system shall be used on every
document related to the HHR signaling system.
6. 1.3 NORMAL AND REVERSE DIRECTIONS
Req 24 The nominated "Normal" direction of running shall be the right-hand track when travelling in the
facing direction .
Transfer to and from the "Reverse" direction track shall be achieved by signaled moves through
crossovers connecting the running tracks , normally in a facing direction. However, it shall also be
possible to make reverse moves under full signaling control.
6. 1.4 NEUTRAL SECTIONS AND INSULATED OVERLAPS
Req 25 The Consortium shall design the signaling system so that no train shall ever be required to stop
with a pantograph less than 100 m from a neutral section or an insulated overlap (see "Overhead
Catenaries System" specifications : HHR-LO-CA-403-INE-001 ). Stopping points shall be set accordingly.
As for neutral sections , specific wayside signs or signals shall be provided to the attention of train
drivers , in both sides and directions.
maximum permitted speed
PAGE 17/47
6. 1.6 RBC LOCATION

Radio Block Centres can be located either at the OCC, either in signaling rooms.
In both cases, the Consortium shall be responsible for providing all the appropriate arrangements
related to buildings, low voltage power supply, communication system, and ensuring the
compliance with other requirements for signaling, communications and power supply.
If RBCs are to be located in the OCC, the Consortium shall provide the same facilities for the back-
up ace.
6. 1. 7 CAB-SIGNAL/NG
Train control on the main line and in stations shall be made by a cab-signaling system complying
with ERTMS L2 .
Cab-signaling shall also allow movements to be made in either direction over all sections of the
. .. main line.
Running movements on crossovers, into and out of depots and maintenance base (i.e . running on
main line access tracks) shall be operated under cab-signaling.
The cab-signaling system shall provide fu ll and complete in-cab information to the driver so that he
may adapt his speed conditions together, in order to automatically enforce train braking by excess
speed .
lt shall also provide comprehensive speed supervision, including, but not limited to, the following
items:
• use of predetermined braking curves

• monitoring of signaling and other speed limiting co nditions
• continuous monitoring of actual train speed
• continuous comparison of actual speed with permitted speed
• automatic application of braking by speed excess.
The radio communication system between RBC and in-cab system shall ensure sufficient data
capacity and exchange rates in order to guarantee the specified signaling spacing and capacity
requirements. Particular attention shall be given to arrangements in stations areas.
By determining the necessary level of proceeding authority to be given to a train, the cab-signaling
system shall take into account all relevant data , including but not limited to:
• train location
• location of stopping points
• interlocking conditions
•
•
permanent and temporary speed restrictions
track safety protection area s
d-
• type of route which has been set
Ref : HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-001 -E 1
• track gradients
• rolling stock characteristics
• program stop at stations
Information given via the driver interface together with wayside indicators or markers shall form a
comprehensive system enabling trains to be moved safely and efficiently up to the full capacity of
the line.
When running through permanent or temporary speed restrictions, the train speed shall be
restricted for the duration of the restriction only, according to the train length .
6. 1. 8 TRAIN DETECTION SYSTEM
Req 27 Train detection based on proven and ERTMS N2 compliant technology is mandatory. The
Consortium shall only use axle counter devices as track vacancy detector giving references about this
chosen train detection system .
Req 28 The Consortium shall detail all signaling-related rails functions in the functional signaling program ,
including both train detection and traction return purposes. it shall also ensure that under no
circumstances shall any effect of the traction current, including any interference current or transient
effects produced by the traction system on the train , cause a failure on the train detection system.
Req 29 Train detection shall operate reliably for all vehicles expected to run on the operated line, including
maintenance ones .
Arrangements that eliminate or minimize the use of insulated block joints (IBJ) shall prevail. If, for
any reason , IBJ are required , the Consortium shall submit their location and their electrical and
mechanical characteristics.
Suitable precautions shall be included and explained by the Consortium to avoid irregular operation
of the train detection system.
As for downgraded modes (for any reason) , the Consortium shall design appropriate arrangements
to maintain train detection fully operational and not impact the level of circulation safety.
6. 1. 9 BROKEN RAIL DETECTION
Req 30 The Consortium shall provide arrangements or systems able to detect and monitor any broken rail
event. The forecasted arrangement or system as well as related proven technology references shall be
described, especially regarding System RAMS criteria
6. 1. 1OELECTRICAL IMMUNITY TO OCS
Req 31 Signaling equipment shall be immune to the Overhead Catenaries system (OCS) operation and to
.....-::::1=:::-::::~
th;.;:
e
HHR electrification system (25 kV, 60Hz) for both traction peak load and fault conditions, such that it
uo , not induce signaling unreliability, fault or operationally unsafe conditions, and that it remains safe
0
· j o !<'m ntenance staff to work on . The Consortium shall prove this point through relevant criteria.
PAGE 19147
Req 32 All signaling equipment and systems shall operate normally and reliably in case of electrical
interference from the OCS and from train running on the line. The Consortium shall submit , in the proof
of safety document, details levels of such interference which might to appear in the signaling system
under worst case conditions together with supporting evidence, calculations and solutions.
Req 33 Immunization and protection measures proposed for all equipment which is part of the signaling
system shall be fully submitted in the proof of safety document.
6. 1. 11 EARTH CONNECTIONS
IReq 34 All equipments located in signaling rooms shall be connected to earth .
All signaling cables with shielding and wayside equipment with metallic elements shall also be
connected to earth .
Potential hazards caused by different earth potentials shall be eliminated as much as possible ,
especially in buildings and signaling rooms .
Req 35 Earth connections shall be designed so that a single earth fault shall not affect the integrity of the
signaling system. The Consortium shall provide a detection system for such faults and a way to correct
them before a further fault could endanger the signaling system integrity.
The use of a laid earth cable set all along the track in cable routes is strongly recommended;
however any alternative solution may be proposed by the Consortium.
6. 1. 12 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Req 36 The design of grounding and bonding for the signa ling system and equ ipment shall ensure:
1: staff safety
1: protection against system faults including those associated with the OCS
1: safe operation and integrity of the equipment.
Req 37 Lightning arresters shall be set up when necessary, provided it does not cause any electromagnetic
incompatibility with other systems.
6. 1. 13 WAYS/DE EQUIPMENT
Req 38 All wayside equipments shall be positioned in full conformity with the structure gauge for a 320
km/h speed and so as to minimize danger for maintenance staff from the operating railway and the OCS
system .
6. 1. 14 CABLE ROUTES
The main and subsidiary cables and cable routes shall be designed according to the signaling
system specifications chosen by the Consortium .
The main cable route shall be located along one track.
Signaling cabling shall not interfere with the operation of any other cabling which may be fitted in
the same route or in an adjacent one.
Arrangements on cables routes shall be made for securing redundancy by using both side of the
line .
Specific design shall be made to protect cables and cables routes from maintenance machines or
vandalism . The Consortium shall submit the details of how this is to be achieved in the proof of
safety document.
6. 1. 15 SIGNALING ROOMS
Req 39 Signaling room equipment shall at least include:

interlocking equipment
train detection equipment
equipment for communications with the CTC
elements for interface with wayside equipment
a maintenance support local system
main and emergency power supply equipment
a fire detection system
a telephone line
Requirements for interlocking equipment are given at§ 6.2 .
Requirements for power supply, fire detection and telephone lines are specified in building
requirements at chapter 8.
Requirements for the communication system are specified in the "Communications system "
specifications document (HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001 ).
6. 1. 16 WORKING STAFF PROTECTION SYSTEM
Signaling warning and protection facilities may be provided to protect:
• staff and trains in defined areas by enforcing a speed decrease of the trains
• staff by preventing trains from entering designated areas
• staff, while working on a track, by announcing trains circulations.
0
Ref: HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-001 -E1 PAGE 21 /47
6. 1. 17 STAFF CROSSINGS
There may be authorized walking routes across the main line. A "staff crossing system " in relation
with train detection shall then be designed to ensure staff protection.
The number and location of these crossings shall be defined according to the signaling scheme
plan.
6. 1. 18 STOPPING POINTS
Stopping points shall be provided at the origin of all routes on , from and to the main line. This
corresponds to the protection of running on every turnout on the main line and on its access tracks
in both directions.
Stopping points shall also be considered as protection points for all potential obstacles monitored
by specific detection systems (e.g. vehicle fall protection system).
6. 1. 19 TEMPORARY SPEED RESTRICTIONS
For any reason (e.g. tracks stability, works or staff protection) it may be necessary to impose
temporary speed restrictions (TSR) on a line section. Such restrictions shall be managed by the
CTC .
The Consortium shall submit, in the functional signaling program, details on the conditions for
imposing and removing TSR, as well as all corresponding restrictions and limitations.
6.1.20 HOT AXLE BEARING DETECTOR SYSTEM
Req 41 In order to detect and prevent rolling stock incidents due to overheating of axle-boxes, a hot axle
bearing detection system (HABD) shall be provided on HHR main line and access tracks .
All detectors shall be at least located in the track near a signaling room (2 km away maximum) .
IReq 42 Distance between two consecutive HABD shall be 35 km maximum.
In case of overheating, the system shall send an alarm to the CTC. Depending on the overrun
limit, a slowdown or a braking shall be automatically effective through the signaling system.
Therefore, specific stopping points shall be provided and located as described above at § 5.1.16.
These stopping points shall be preferably located in the HABD-related MSR control area .
In order to prevent train derailments in such cases, no emergency braking shall be caused by the
HABD system .
6.1.21 CROSSWINDS DETECTION SYSTEM

(

In order to prevent train derailment due to huge crosswinds in HHR areas, a specific protection
system may be provided .
This protection may be achieved through:
• a devoted system linked to signaling and enforcing speed restriction (in the Consortium
scope of work) .
• a mechanical protection, e.g. screens (in Phase 1 Contractor scope of work, but the
Consortium shall give all necessary details)
The final crosswind protection choice shall be done in relation with Government and the
Consortium shall submit all relevant design details , both in the proof of safety and the proof of
compliance with environmental constraints documents.
6.1.22 VEHICLE FALL PROTECTION SYSTEM
For overpasses on the line where local configuration (profile , structure) and road traffic volume are
considered to be important enough to generate a risk of vehicle fall , a specific arrangement shall be ' ':;;;)
designed to protect the line .
This arrangement can be based on safety nets, installed over the tracks on both sides of the
overpass and connected to it. Their breaking, due to a vehicle fall, should then be able to generate
automatically a slowdown or a stopping order through the signaling system .
In addition , this arrangement shall also be linked with the OCC and generate an alarm in case of
vehicle fall on the line .
The Consortium shall give details on his design for this arrangement, and more particularly all
interactions with the signaling system , both in the functional signaling program and the proof of
safety document.
6.1.23 POINTHEATING
In areas with low temperature statistics , point heating may be provided . it may be either
automatically activated when local temperature reaches 3oc or lower, or manually activated form
the CTC . Heating point for power supply shall be provided from the closest signaling room or the
ocs.
6. 1.24 MONITORING / REMOTE SUPERVISION SYSTEM
HHR line shall be equipped with a monitoring system for fixed signaling installations, which shall
be independent from them .
This system shall monitor and ensure remote supervision of signaling installations in real time on
the operation, and permit both incidents processing and prevention from further occurrence of
these incidents .
lt shall ensure acquisition, generation , centralization , archiving and distribution of all useful
information to the OCC . The use of signaling rooms as relay stations and of the communication
system for data transmission to the OCC is strongly recommended.
ENTS FOR TUNNEL SECTIONS
nel sections shall be done in compliance with Route Civil Works design and
Ref: HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-001-E1 P AGE 23147

6.2 Interlocking
The following chapter deals with HHR interlocking functional requirements.

The Consortium shall notice the following requirements list is not exhaustive. Therefore, it shal l not
exempt the Consortium from full respect of TSI and standards given in part 2 of this document.
Besides it shall be also compliant with regulation rules and commission ing criteria .
6.2.1 TYPE OF INTERLOCKING
IReq 43 All HHR interlocking shall be computerized .
·-~-:- 6.2.2 SIGNALING PRINCIPLES
Req 44 The Consortium shall submit detailed signa ling principles used in the proposed interlocking system ,
in the interlocking principles document . Proven technology with references shall be used, and, in case
of conflict between proposed principles and this requirement , the Consortium shall advise Government
for agreement.
6.2.3 CONFLICTING ROUTES
IReq 45 Once a route has been established, it shall not be possible to set conflicting routes .
6.2.4 APPROACH LOCKING
Approach locking shall be applied to all main line signaling and main line access tracks (i.e. all cab-
signaling areas). Such locking shal l be effected on provision of a proceeding indication by the cab-
signaling system, and shall be released under one of the following conditions:
• a train has been proved to have passed the stopping point and entered the route
• the proceed cab indication has been replaced to stop for a sufficient length of time to ensure
that any approaching train has either not entered the approach sections (see below), has
stopped safely at the stopping point or has passed the stopping point and engaged route
locking
• the train has been forced to stop brought through appropriate indications
• approach sections are clear to a point such that as a result of replacement of the proceed
indication to stop, no approaching train shall receive a more restrictive information.
Ref: HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-001 -E1

0
6. 2.5 ROUTE LOCKING
Route locking shall be effective over the whole of the route.
Release of route locking shall be subject to release of approach locking, together with clearance of
train detection in the route . This release shall be progressive behind a train movement as it
proceeds through the route .
Routes shall be normalized automatically by train passing , without any interference from a train
controller at the CTC.
In case of necessary opposite movements, a route locking release will be proceeded after this first
train movement has been proved at a stand at the appropriate location.
Details of precautions taken to ensure that the train detection system or power supply will not
cause erroneous release of route locking shall also be submitted.
6.2.6 TURNOUT LOCKING
Turnouts shall be locked either normal or reverse as according to:
• routes set over them , including sectional routes held prior to the release through train
passing
• approach locking
• activation of individual turnouts operation
• occupation of areas on turnouts place, or anywhere else in the case of a crossover or other
multi-ended set of turnouts
• anti-preselection being effective (see below).
6.2. 7 ANTI-PRESELECTION
Calls to set routes or move turnouts shall only be effective if these are available and free to move
at the time the call is made. Otherwise a re -application shall be necessary when the routes or
turnouts are available and free to move. ·
Calls applied to set routes or move turnouts being not available or not free to move shall stay
without effect whatsoever.
Ref: HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-001 -E1 PAGE 25/47

In addition to the settled and locked route, following points shall be proved before giving indication
to the train driver:
• all turnouts in the route shall be set, locked and detected in the required position
• all areas in the route shall be clear for main routes
• all stopping points indications likely to enable conflicting moves shall be proved to be at stop
• route locking and approach locking shall be proved to be effective.
Replacement of an indication to stop shall normally be effected on train passing at the associated
stopping point. For controlled routes , once a proceed indication has been replaced to stop , any
other proceed indication shall be impossible, except through a train controller at the CTC, through
the automatic route setting system , or through manual selection of automatic working facilities (if
provided and operated).
6.2.9 SAFETY MARGINS AND OVERRUN PROTECTION
·-~-:· -;_-=:.: Safety margins (slip limits or overlaps) shall be provided to protect against trains overrunning
stopping points, owing to variations in braking performance and/or driver error. Such protection
shall normally include a clear section of track beyond the stopping point, where to bring safely a
train to a stop by automatic application of emergency braking, in case of overrunning the stopping
point.
If the stopping point is at an interlocking , an overrun shall cause any proceed indication from the
opposite direction in that track, including ay route lined from adjacent interlocking to that track, to
be replaced by stop indications and cause cab signal to display its most restrictive indication in
that route.
Where appropriate, route locking shall extend into safety margins and shall be subject to release
when the train has been proved to be at stop at the associated stopping point.
The Consortium shall submit, in the proof of safety document, full design details of safety margins
together with supporting train control and stopping calculations .
6. 2. 10 REVERSIBLE WORKING
The train controlled only shall initiate at the CTC moves in the reverse direction. Before any
change of direction, the whole section shall proved clear. In the same way, any opposing routes
shall be proved clear to the adjacent interlockings.
6. 2. 11 MAINTENANCE SUPPORT LOCAL SYSTEM
Information necessary for maintenance shall also be displayed , in

• track diagram associated to the signaling room and related controls, such as track areas
occupancy, speed indications displayed by cab signal, status of turnouts, etc
• signaling room status (voltages , status of variables , etc.) .
6. 2. 12 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR DEPOTS AND WORKSHOPS
Control and indication arrangements for each depot and workshop shall be provided such that the
operating mode shall be possible by a single seated Train Controller.
The Consortium shall provide signaling arrangements according to the proposed working method
in depots and workshops , and shall submit full details in the proof of safety document, including
the fulfilment way for the following :
• safe methods of working

• high availability of facilities
• flexible working arrangements

• staff safety requirements
Normal running shall be provided in both directions, in order to allow access in both directions
from and to the main line.
Movements between the depots I workshops and the main line , and vice versa , shall be controlled
by the cab signaling system . Shunting movements within depots and workshops shall be
controlled by wayside signals and commanded by a dedicated signaling room (see § 4.1.5).
The status (open or closed) of the last depot I workshop light signal before ERTMS connection
shall always be compliant with the main line access turnout position (straight turnout position if
closed signal I diverging turnout position if open signal). This signal status shall also be sent to the
OCC for controlling main line access conditions.
The Consortium shall submit a description , in the functional signaling program , of all signaling
arrangements controlling movements between the main line and depots I workshops.
The Consortium shall also refer to Small Depots and Workshops specifications (HHR-LO-DW-403-
SYS-001 and 002) to ensure the compliance with other requirements for depots and workshops.
Ref: HHR-LO-S I-403-I NE-001-E1 PAGE 27/47

7. INTERFAC E REQUIREMENTS
7.1 General
The Consortium shall be responsible for ensuring that any interface requirements are clearly
identified and taken into account.
The Consortium shall also be responsible for the running, securing and termination of wires and
cables to any other equipment or systems which interface to the signaling system .
The signaling system shall be fully compatible with all systems and equipment provided as part of
the overall project.
7.2 Interface with Route Civil Works
The Consortium is responsible for all gauge requirements and interfaces with the Route Civil
Works .
The Consortium is also responsible for signaling room platforms construction and cable routes
construction .
However, other measures could be decided by Government according to the Route Civil Works
contractors scope .
7.3 Low voltage power supplies
Main power supplies for the signaling rooms shall be derived from HHR local supply points.
On the line and wayside , power supply to signaling equipments shall be derived from SR power
supplies and brought to equipments through cable routes , except if supply from the OCS is proven
to be more relevant.
Back up power supply for MSR shall be derived from the OCS.
The Consortium shall ensure a satisfying supply of distribution facilities, under all conditions of
varying load , emergency feeding , etc.
Specifications for low voltage power supply system are given in a specific document (HHR-LO-LV-
403-INE-001 ).
7.4 Interface with OCS
7.4.1 TRACTION RETURN CURRENT
Ref: HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-001-E1 PAGE 2 8/47

recommended) , but shall submit details proving that an equivalent solution for downgraded
modes has been found .
7.4. 2 ELECTRICAL IMMUNITY
Electrical immunity between the OCS and the signaling system shall be ensured , as described at §
6.1.8.
7.4.3 NEUTRAL SECTIONS AND INSULATED OVERLAPS
The Consortium shall ensure fulfilment of all requirements as specified at § 6.1.4.
7.4.4 ELECTROMA GNETIC COMPATIBILITY
The Consortium shall ensure fulfilment of all requirements given in the European norms regarding
electromagnetic compatibility (see chapter 2) and earth connections of the System are satisfied . In
case of non compliance, the Consortium shall advise Government and ask for a written agreement.
This concerns especially a lightning protection of main signaling equipments and the respect of
electromagnetic emissions limits to the HHR external environment.
7.5 Interface with communications system
The signaling system shall use the Telecommunications system for all data and signal
transmissions between the signaling rooms and the OCC . Therefore , the communications system
shall provide sufficient capacities and RAMS specifications in order not to affect the operational
requirements for the signaling system .
Data transmission between grounded system (ETCS beacons) and cab-signaling system shall be
achieved through GSM-R facilities . The corresponding specifications are described in the
"Communications System" specifications document (H HR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001 ).
7.6 Interface with track design
7.6. 1 TURNOUTS
Turnouts shall be set up in order to satisfy signaling operation requirements .
7. 6. 2 BOND CONNEC TIONS
PAGE 29/47
7.7 Interface with rolling stock
7. 7. 1 SIGNAL SIGHTING
Req 47 The Consortium shall ensure that all wayside fixed equipments and stopping point markers , on both
main line and depots, shall be visible by the driver at an adequate distance. The Consortium shall take
into account the rolling stock requirements to ensure that all factors relating to visibility of signals and
markers from all vehicles, including maintenance ones, have been designed. These factors shall include
at least:
ll. sight line through cab window from all possible positions of the driver's eye level when
approaching and stopping at a stopping point
ll. visibility of signal or marker in expected weather and light conditions, taking account of any
r·-· -,·..• tinting or coating on the windscreen glass
~::J '
ll. lights on the train or locomotive
ll. speed and distance at which the object is required to be seen
1: trains approaching on the opposite track
1: track curvature .
7. 7. 2 BRAKING PERFORMANCE
Req 48 In order to achieve the Performance Requirements and the Basic Service Plan, the signaling
design , especially the average track detection areas length, shall be related to the average braking
performance expected from rolling stock. The factors that shall be taken into account include at least:
11: track gradients
11: track alignment
1£ authorized line speed.
7. 7. 3 WHEELSET IMPEDANCE
7. 7.4 ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE
Req 49 The Consortium shall ensure that electromagnetic interference emanating from the train , whether in
form of radiated energy or of interference in the traction return current, shall not cause any failure of any
track circuit (if provided), switch machine , detector or cab signaling link. Evidence shall be based at
least on the following factors:
frequencies generated by the OCS, traction systems and auxiliary supply systems of trains in
both normal and failure conditions
transient effect resulting from transformer inrush
traction return current passing through the rails
longitudinal voltage presented between adjacent wheelsets
effects of asymmetrical operation of the train power systems
spacing of electrification track-to-track cross bonds .
Ref: HHR-LO-SI-403-1 NE-001-E1

7. 7.5 PANTOGRAPHS
According to § 6.1.4, stopping points shall be designed so that, in case of a train stopping at one
of these , all operational pantographs will be sufficiently clear of any neutral section or normally
isolated section of overhead line to meet the operational requirements .
The factors to be taken into account by the Consortium shall include at least:
• the position of the stopped train at points or stations

• the positions of the operational pantographs on the trains
• power requirements when starting (particularly on a rising gradient), or if use of regenerative
braking on approach to a stopping point.
7.8 Interface with OCC
7. 8. 1 REPORTING OF INFORMA T/ON
The Consortium shall provide any necessary facility, equipment or system, both in SR and OCC ,
for ensuring the reporting (receiving) of information to (from) the CTC, including but not limited to:
• Functioning status of SR and line facilities

• Track occupancy
• Turnouts status (straight position I diverging position)
• Stopping points status (open I closed)
• Temporary speed restrictions (TSR) and related areas
• Activated working staff protection systems and related areas
• Point heating activation status (if provided).
7.8.2 REPORTING OF ALERTS AND WARNINGS
The Consortium shall provide any necessary facility, equipment or system , both in SR and OCC ,
for ensuring the reporting of alerts I warnings to the CTC, including but not limited to :
• Hot axle-bearing detectors warnings
• Crosswind detectors warnings and associated TSR (if provided)
• Vehicle fall protection system warnings
• SR facilities (hardware and software) defects
• Power supply defects in SR
• Fire detection in SR
• Air conditionin , room ventilation, temperature or lighting defects in SR
•
er ·
PAGE 31/4 7
~)
All ISR and MSR shall respect the following characteristics .
8.1 Signaling room building design
8. 1. 1 SIGNALING ROOM PLATFORMS
Signaling rooms shall be located on platforms near tracks. These platforms shall be built by the
Consortium , except any contrary decision taken by Government.
Specific attention shall be paid for building structure , considering it has to last 100 years minimum.
-· -·.·.·.·'
'<.,:·.·
8. 1.2 ROOM SEPARATION
Req 50 All ISR and MSR shall be bui lt on the same design, which consists in 3 separated rooms:
1: the signaling room heart containing signaling facilities and equipment
1: a hallway for maintenance staff
I: an energy supply room including batteries and electrical boxes, separated from the others, for
fire protection reasons.
8. 1.3 VENT/LA TION AND AIR CONDITIONING
IReq 51 AIIISR and MSR rooms shall be equipped with controlled systems to regulate the air temperature.
The Consortium shall submit specifications for ventilation or air conditioning achievement , in the
proof of compliance with environmental constraints document.
8. 1.4 TELEPHONE
Req 52 All signaling rooms shall be equipped with at least two telephones :
1:. one for connection to the Centralized Traffic Control
11: one for connection to the Power Supply Centralized Control (PSCC)
8. 1.5 SEALING FOR SAND, WATER AND WINO
Climatic and environmental conditions (see chapter 13) impact the building construction and
involve the following prescriptions .
8. 1.6 BUILDING LIGHTING
Outdoor lighting shall be provided by a motion detector system. This shall help staff to access to
signaling rooms.
All signaling rooms shall be equipped with indoor lighting.
8.2 Access to signaling rooms and prevention of trespassing
Particular attention shall be paid to building access. The line-dedicated area shall be protected with
fences, only to be crossed by locked portals, and access to signaling room s shall be secured with
badge control.
Req 54 In order to avoid trespassing, all MSR and ISR shall be equipped with an OCC monitored access
control system.
The Consortium shall submit details on the way of achievement of these building and access
prescriptions in the proof of safety document.
8.3 Equipment and building grounding
As stated in § 6.1 .9 all electrical equipments in signaling rooms shall be connected to earth.
Moreover, SR buildings shall also be connected to the ground. To avoid step voltage situations, the
same grounding point shall be used for the whole bu ilding.
The Consortium shall subm it details about grounding and step vo ltage prevention in the functional
signaling program .
8.4 Power supply
In addition to the following requirements, the Consortium shall refer to the low voltage power supply
specifications document (HHR-LO-LV-403-INE-001 ).
8.4. 1 SIGNA LING ROOM MAIN ALIMENTATION
All signaling rooms shall be supplied with electricity from local network derivation (SEC). In case of
impossible SEC supply, the Consortium shall define an appropriate way to provide it (back up
power supply).
PAGE 33/47
8.4.2 ELECTRIC SUPPLY FA ILURES
In case of electricity supply incident, the signalling room shall work constantly in a normal way.
Therefore, back up supply is required and shal l be provided from the OCS through a local supply
point located near the SR.
IRaq 55 A six-hour autonomy power supply with batteries is also required for all signaling rooms .
The Consortium has to submit details about the batteries characteristics (e.g. capacity, charge and
discharge time) in the technical diagrams of signaling rooms.
8.5 Fire detection system
Req 56 All the signaling rooms shall be equipped with a fire detection system related to OCC and with one
fire extinguisher per room.
8.6 Frost detection
A frost detection system may be necessary for some signaling room, according to their location and
local temperature conditions. This system shou ld be located outside the signaling room .
The Consortium shall lead relevant studies to determine the necessity of frost detection and subm it
results and corresponding arrangements (if provided) in the proof of compliance with environmental
constraints document.
d-
9. RAMS REQUIREMENTS
The signaling and interlocking system shall comply with all global RAMS requirements defined in
the RAMS Requirements document (HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 ). This compliance shall ensure that
HHR Basic Service Plan and Performance Requirements can be met. In particular, MTTR values
for the signaling and interlocking system shall be defined in order to allow this compliance.
9.2 Specific reliability requirements
Req 57 The design life of the signaling and interlocking system shall be at least 25 years for IT components
and 50 years for electromagnetic and electrical parts.
As for the interlocking, 2 failures maximum per year shall be allowed, with only one failure each 2
years affecting operation for more than 2 minutes .
MTBF values for train detection system shall be at least 500,000 hours in stations and at least
1 ,000,000 hours out of stations areas .
MTBF values for turnout equipment shall be at least 100,000 hours for tongue locks, 1,000,000 for
point controllers and 800 ,000 for cables .
9.3 Specific availability requirements
Downgraded modes of train operation shall be possible if any signaling equipment fails .
The period of non-availability of the signaling system (from incident origin to service
reestablishment) shall not exceed 200 minutes for all incidents in a year.
The number of signa ling incidents for 100 km of single line with consequences on train operation
shall not exceed 5 incidents per year. However, during the two first operating years, this number
can be increased but it shall not exceed 10 incidents per year.
9.4 Specific maintainability requirements
Full support shall be provided during all line life.
Spare parts shall be available for at least 12 years after commissioning date. As a precaution
against the loss of support services by a supplier, the Consortium shall provide backup support
options .
•
• (through the analysis of variation in reported performance)
• iagnostic indications of faults provided by the equipment) .
.. )
PAGE 35/47
The maintenance staff shall automatically log all fault reports from any source in the Maintenance
Management System .
9.5 Specific safety requirements
All systems shall conform to references stated in chapter 2 and meet the HHR safety case
requirements.
Req 58 lnterlockings on the main line and in stations, as well as the ERTMS system and sub-systems
(including on-board cab system) shall meet SIL4 requ irements for software and equipment alike.
IReq 59 lnterlockings and signaling systems in depots and workshops shall meet SIL3 requirements.
Any failure or malfunctioning of a failsafe system or sub-system component must not lead to a
dangerous situation, but to more restrictive situations. This applies to interlockings and to both
ERTMS trackside and on-board equipment.

SYS-007) for additional design requirements.
PAGE 37147
Req 60 The Consortium shall include in the technical documentation for each equipment a report that at
least indicates:
it: mechanical characteristics
It: electrical characteristics
it: construction references
11. quality certificate from the manufacturer, including proven references
.....•.·. ·· \
' .
Ref : HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-00 1-E 1 PAGE 38147

INTERLOCKING AND MAIN LIN E SIGNALING
0
REQUIREMENTS
Req 61 The Consortium shall ensure, by himself or through the manufacturer quality management, the
accordance of procured equipment with characteristics described in his manufacturing report (see
chapter 11 ).
Req 62 The Consortium shall ensure that transportation, storage and handling shall not affect any
Req 63 The Consortium shall ensure that instal lation complies with all rule books, standards and
references, including TSI.
Req 64 The progressive on-site acceptance of subsystems shall give insurance that all these requi rements
have been achieved before testing and commissioning.
12.1 ln~track signaling equipments
All signaling equipments that are to be installed on the track (hot axle bearing detectors, train
detection system, etc.) shall only be set after track-laying and leveling operations , in order to avoid
their damage during track works.
12.2 Phasing of works
Particular attention shall be paid regarding the planning of construction, to the installation order of
sub-systems, to avoid any damage.
PAGE 39/47

REQUIREMENTS
General Specifications documents (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-006 and HHR-LO-CT-602-SAU -001), for
design , building , maintenance and durability of signaling installations.
Req 65 The Consortium shall collect all necessary information regarding environmental constraints for
design achievement.
...
··~··· •.
·..;:·.
13.2 Protection of line installations to solar radiations
Req 66 For all installations which may be exposed to sun light, specific arrangements shall be taken by the
Consortium to ensure correct protection towards solar radiation effects on materials.
13.3 Wind
In addition of above § 13.1 requirements, the Consortium apply specifications set at§ 6.1.21.
13.4 Sand
The risk of sand winds and deposits shall be taken into account for protection arrangements
design, both for buildings and installation on the line.
13.5 Earthquakes
As detailed in the Section 6 of General Specifications documents (HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-006) , no

dedica ted earthquake detection system is required.
Ref: HHR· LO·SI·403-INE-001-E1

14. VERIFICATION, TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREM ENTS
This section concerns the application to the signaling system of Verification, Test and Acceptance
(VTA) requirements described in Section 11 of General Specifications documents (HHR -LO-CT-
602-SYS-011 ).
In addition to the following requirements , the Consortium shall also achieve any expectation of the
regulation authority which shall be required for commissioning authorization .
14.1 Acceptance principle
Any design review or inspection undertaken by Government or its representatives shall not, in any
way, be considered as relieving the Consortium of any responsibility under this process. However,
Government satisfaction will not be achieved without the provision of a proof of safety.
The proof of safety shall be the collection of fully documented evidence that unequivocally shows
that everything , which has been provided under the terms of HHR signaling specifications , has
been done in accordance to the corresponding requirements .
In addition , a specific and detailed procedure for all signaling-related verification and tests shall be
established by the Consortium (see chapter 16 for deadline requirements) .
14.2 Certification
The system of certification shall subdivide the verification and testing activities into uniquely
verifiable and testable items . Since such detailed division can bring to a large number of
certificates, individual certificates may be grouped and summarized according to functional
components of the system and related signaling rooms . However, individual certification of each
item shall be traceable .
The Consortium shall submit, in the signaling-related verification and tests procedure, an example
of each certificate together with a description of how the certificate process will meet the signaling
verification and testing requirements (as described in this chapter).
14.3 Design verification
The design verification activities shall consist in checking all design details . The staff in charge of
this activity shall have no direct involvement in the design production . To achieve this level of
independence , the original producer shall not under any circumstances seek guidance from or
consult with the verification staff, even on matters of general principles .
Ref: HHR-LO-SI-403-I NE-001 -E1 PAG E4 1/47

All staff in charge of this activity shall have no direct involvement in the installations building
activity.
All items shall be certified by the Consortium, and related certificates shall be approved by the
Railway Authority (as designed by Government).
14.5 Configuration tests of signaling rooms
Configuration tests shall give evidence that all parameter settings for each signaling room meet the
signaling and interlocking principles . These tests shall be performed before loading these settings
into the signaling rooms .
Appropriate certificates shall be established and signed by the Consortium , then approved by the
Railway Authority.
14.6 Local signaling room tests
Local signaling room (SR) tests performance require first:
• approval of all verification certificates (see§ 14.4) for installations in the SR control area
• approval of the SR configuration tests certificate (see§ 14.5)
Local SR tests shall be performed for each SR, taken independently from the others. These shall
give evidence that the SR functions and interlockings work correctly and safely over the whole SR
control perimeter, with its loaded parameter settings .
These tests shall include , but not be limited to:
• correct and safe functioning of train detection system
• correct and safe functioning of route settings (under local command of the SR)
• correct and safe functioning of stopping points
• co rrect and safe functioning of working staff protection systems

;:--;-
-- · :
• correct and safe functioning of HABD, vehicle fall protection systems , crosswind detectors
• correct and safe functioning of local telesurveillance and monitoring systems
Appropriate certificates shall be established and signed by the Consortium , then approved by the
Railway Authority.
14.7 Signaling integration tests
Signaling integration tests performance require the approval by the Railway Authority of local tests
for all signaling rooms (main line, depots and workshops), for the CTC.
These tests shall give evidence of correct and safe functioning of the integrated signaling system ,
with all SR linked to the OCC and to interface systems (communication system, turnouts) .
I - - ,-
Ref: HHR-LO-S 1-403-1NE-00 1-E 1 PAGE 42/47

Therefore, signaling integration tests shall include, but not be limited to:
• Correct and safe functioning of the automatic route setting (ARS) system, including stations
• Correct and safe functioning of command and control of the line from the CTC
• Correct and safe functioning of all provided warning systems
• Correct and safe functioning of integrated telesurveillance and monitoring systems
• Correct and safe functioning of signaling access conditions to the main line from depots and
workshops
• Correct and safe functioning of all interfaces with the signaling system under OCC command
and control
• Correct and safe functioning in downgraded modes.
Appropriate certificates shall be established and signed by the Consortium, then approved by the
Railway Authority.
Achievement of these tests shall ensure that the whole signaling and interlocking system is fully
operational, both in normal and downgraded conditions.
Once these tests are achieved, command and control functions shall only be operated from the
CTC. Local SR command and control may only be provided to maintenance staff under CTC
authorization, or for downgraded operation modes.
14.8 Dynamic tests
Dynamic tests shall only be performed when evidence that the infrastructure is fully operational
(and therefore able to manage high speed circulations) has been made.
Tests for correct and safe fu nctioning of transmissions between RBC and circulating rolling stock
with GSM-R, and of on-board cab system shall be performed during this phase.
Appropriate certificates shall be established and signed by the Consortium, then approved by the
Railway Authority.
14.9 Sub-system modifications
If, for any reason , mod ifications need to be performed on a sub-system during its verification and
testing phases, these verifications and tests shall be re-performed modified sub-system , according
to its new design or configuration (this corresponds to non-regression tests).
Ref : HHR-LO-S I-403-INE-001-E1 P AGE 43/47

Staff training for signaling and interlocking equipment maintenance shall comply with all training
requirements, as defined in Section 12 of General Specifications documents (H HR-LO-CT-602-
SYS-012).
Particular attention shall be paid to staff training towards safety use of all electrical and electronic
equipment, devices or tools .
Ref: HHR-LO-S I-403-INE-001 -E1

0
The following schemes and documents, related to signaling and interlocking, shall be established
by the Consortium.
The Consortium shall notice that the following list is not exhaustive. Any additional documentation
which would be considered as relevant for commissioning, operation and/or maintenance, shall be
provided.
• Detailed signaling schemes for the line, stations, depots and workshops; these documents
shall be submitted 6 months after contract notification date
• Diagram of signaling rooms organization (for each SR); these documents shall be submitted 1. • )
6 months after contract notification date
• Cabling diagrams of signaling rooms (for each SR); these documents shall be subm itted 1
month after beginning of cabling works for the corresponding SR
• Technical diagrams for signaling rooms (for each SR) including, but not limited to, SR-related
interlockings, working staff protection, and conditions for speed limits and restrictions; these
documents shall be submitted 1 month before the beginning of works for the corresponding SR
• Functional signaling program (including telesurveillance); this document shall be submitted 4

months after contract notification date
• Interlocking principles ; this document shall be submitted 4 months after contract notification
date
• Technical documentation of all equipment (including ERTMS); these documents shall be
subm itted 1 month before the beg inning of staff trainings
• Signaling-related detailed verifications and test procedure, with all related certificates; this
document shall be submitted 1 month before the beginning of verifications and tests
• Detailed proof of safety; this document shall be submitted 2 months before commission ing
• Detailed proof of compliance with RAMS requirements ; this document shall be submitted 6
months before commissioning
• Detailed proof of compliance with environmental constraints; this document shall be
submitted 6 months before comm issioning

• Signaling maintenance program ; this document shall be submitted 6 months before

commissioning
• Maintenance instructions for all equipment; these documents shall be submitted 2 months
before the beginning of staff trainings
• Training program; this document shall be submitted 3 months before the beginning of staff
trainings
• Operation instructions of equipment, on the line and in signaling rooms (both in normal and
downgraded modes); these documents shall be submitted 2 months before the beginning of
staff trainings
Ref: HHR-LO-S I-403-INE-001-E 1 PAGE 46147

17. TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS REQUIREMENTS
17.1 Tools
An electrical or electronic laboratory shall be provided as part of the maintenance organisation and
shall be equipped for troubleshooting, testing and repair of signaling equipment. The laboratory
shall be furnished and equipped with desktop computers , specialised tests facilities. Regular
environmental controls shall be necessary for staff equipment and protection.
17.2 Spare parts
availability can be maintained for a period of 12 years from the commissioning date for the whole of
the works . The spare part levels shall be specified in the Maintenance Plan.
Philosophy for repair and/or replacement for failed units shall be specified in the Maintenance Plan ,
based on cost and reliability. The procurement options and delivery time for individual spare parts
shall be included in this Plan.
Maintenance Plan. These spares shall include protective means for storing printed circuits cards
that are not in use.
Ref: HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-001 -E1 PAGE 47/47

0

PHASE 2
.,.; · .- ..: ,
•, ·;.:.~. -.
FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR

TELECOMMUNICATIONS

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS
A1 2 1/01/2009 First issue J-M. PORTE
A2 14/04/2009 Second issue after comments J-M. PORTE
A3 22/04/2009 Language review G .GODDING
91 0210612009 Revision after final workshop D . CHRISTIEN
C1 29/06/2009 Final RFP D . CHRISTIEN
01 11/09/2009 Revision after Linklaters's comments D . CHRISTIEN
REVISION N°: D1 NAME DATE SIGNATURE
11/09/2009
PREPARED BY D . CHRISTIEN
~
11/09/2009
CHECKED BY S .PETROFF {
(1
11/09/2009
VALIDATED BY G .NORMAND
~
11/09/2009
APPROVED BY C .SCHANG ~
Functional specification for

PAGE 2/33
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. CONTENT ........................................................................................................................................................ 6
2. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 7
3. GENERAL PRINCIPLES FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS .................................................................... 8
3.1 HHR STAFF RESPONSIBILITIES AT THE OCC ...................................................................................................... 8
3.2TELECOM REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................................. 9
3.3MAIN COMPONENTS OF TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS ................................................................................. 9
3.3.1 Functional division ..... ...... ..... ... ..... .. ... ..... ... .......... .... ... ..... .. ..... .... ............... .... ..... .. .... ... ...... .... ......... .. ..... ... 9
3.3.2 Telecommunication systems .... .... .. .. ... .. ...... .. ... ....... .. ... .. .. .. .. ..... ...... .... .. .. ............... ..... ..... .. ...... ............. 11
4. PHYSICAL LAYER ...................................................................................................................................... 12
5. CORE COMMUNICATION NETWORK .................................................................................................... 13
5.1 SYNCHRONOUS DIGITAL HIERARCHY HIGH RATE TRANSMISSION NETWORK.................................................. 13
5.2GIGABITS ETHERNET NETWORK ...................................................................................................................... 14
6. LIST OF CCN LINKS ................................................................................................................................... 15
6.1 LIST OF CIRCUITS ............................................................................................................................................ 15
6.20ESCRIPTION OF CIRCUITS ............................................................................................................................. 15
6. 2. 1 Hot box detectors .... ... ..... .. .. ....... .......... ........ ........................ .. ... .. ...................... ... .. ... .. .... ...... .. ............... . 15
6. 2. 2 Side wind detector ... .. .............. ....... ... .. ..... ............ .. ... .. ........ ... ......... .. ... ............. ...... ..... ....................... .. . 16
6.2.3 RBC ................. .. ....... ... .. ...... ...... .... ..... .... .... ... .... .... ..... .............. ... ...... ........ .................. .... ....... .. ..... ..... ..... .. 16
6.2.4 Administrative Voice Communication (A VC) .. ... ....................... ... .. .. .... ............... ..... ........ .. .. ..... ... .. ...... 16
6.2.5 Operational Voice Communication (OVC) .. .............. ... .. ... ... .... .. .. .. ...... ... ....... ... .. ... .. ..... .. ...... .......... ..... 16
6. 2. 6 Links for maintenance of signaling .. ........................ .......... ... .... ..... ..... ... ......... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. ......... ...... .. .... 16
6. 2. 7 Links for maintenance of telecommunications ................... ..... ... ..... .. ... .... ........ .. .. ..... .. .. ..... ............. .... 17
6. 2. 8 Links for maintenance of electric traction ... .. .. ........ ..... ....... ... ..... .. ..... .. ....... ................. .. .......... .. ... ....... 17
6. 2. 9 Signaling and telecommunication supervision .... .. .. .. .. ...... .. .. ......... .... ....... .. ... ....... .. .. ... ............. .. .. ... ... 17
6. 2. 1OLinks between signal cabinet .. ..... .. ... ........ .. ................................ .................. ......... .......... .... .... ... ... .. .. ... 17
6. 2. 11 Remote control and command of signaling equipment .. .. .... ... ... ............ .. ........... .. ... ................... .. .... 17
6. 2. 12 Remote control and command of energy traction automats and breakers ........... ........ .. ... .. ... ....... 17
6.2.13Remote control and command of substations ...... ... .. ... ... ..... ... .. ... ..... ..... ....... ... .... .. ... .. .... ... ..... .. .. .... .. 18
7. GSM-R NETWORK ...................................................................................................................................... 19
7.1 SERVICES ......................................................................................................................................................... 19
7.2GSM-R ARCHITECTURE .................................................................................................................................. 20
8. OPERATIONAL VOICE COMMUNICATION NETWORK ..................................................................... 21
9. ADMINISTRATIVE VOICE COMMUNICATION ......................................................... ............................. 23
1O.SECURITY OF INFRASTRUCTURES .......................................................................................... ~.~ ~~......_.
~ ~.:r~:~/1/Jp~~..
11. LAN /WIF1 ..................................................................................................................................... ;.:J!.... ,. ...ffl:l'!f;:;.~b~ \
1
1 1.1 LAN ...................................................................................................................................... ;{J.~ 25 ..........
0''§ ~ :
1 1.2 ON BOARD WIFI .................................................................................................................. ·.- ... :: ........ 2 ·,, '£; 0::
\ 3 ' ~, (r ~:c :
12.SCADA (SIAM -ST) ................................................................................................................... li ·~ · ·~ ···· · .2 J: ::: ·
~ ~ '7)_, .. 'c.?/
13.CCTV ............................................................................................................................................. ~
Ref:HHR-LO-TE-40 3-S YS-001 -0 1 Fun ctronal specrfi catr on for ' ,_. (\
telecommunrcatron PAGE 3/33 ~
13.1 ON SITE VIDEO SURVEILLANCE ............................................................................................................... 27

13.2 ON BOARD CCTV .......................... ........................................................................................................... 27
14.PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM ................................................................................................. 28
15.CLOCK DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ............................................................................................................ 29
16.FIRE DETECTION ......................... ............................................................................................................... 30
17.1NSTALLATION WITH CONTRACTORS PHASE 1- PACKAGES 1 AND 2 ..................................... 3 1
18.MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................................................................... ...... 32
18.1 MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................ 32

18.2 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT ..............•.......... ......................•...................................................................... 32
18.3 TRAINING ...................... ........................................................................................................................... 33
18.4 DOCUMENTATION OF INSTALLATION .................... .. ................................................................................ 33
18.5 DOCUMENTATION .................................................................................................................................... 33
Ref:HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001 -01 Functional specificalion for

P AGE 4/33
telecommunication
PROJECT REFERENCES

1 HH R-LO-CT-602-SYS-002 General specifications Section 2: Glossary
2 HHR- LO-RA-602-SYS-001 Rams Assurance Requi rements
d--
Ref : HHR-LO· TE-403-SYS-00 1· 0 1 Functional specification for

telecommunication
1. CONTENT
The purpose of this document is to describe the functional program for telecommunication systems
on the HHR .
These specifications are compliant with commercial and traffic forecasts . They also take into
consideration the Government specific requirements . Security, safety and the continuous operation
of the System, including in severe and crisis conditions , is a major consideration.
Consequently a high level of redundancy is the driver of the technical design. Therefore, two
Operation and Control Centres (OCC) shall be implemented in two different buildings . The current
assumption is for a normal/backup mode of operation with a 2 hours handover.
The Consortium may propose other modes of operation such as hot standby and load sharing and
specify the consequences on the handover delay and telecommunication design.
The following program considers the current assumptions for the OCCs mode of operation.
The operation of the HHR requires the design and implementation of a proven telecommunication
network associated with consistent applications and robust systems providing a high level of
reliability and maintainability in order to ensure:
• Voice communications between the various actors (e .g. Operator at OCC and Operation and
Maintenance Centre (OMC), drivers , train crew, maintenance staff, administrative staff,
station staff .. .),
• Voice and data communications with mobiles including trains ,
• Voice communications with the "outside world"
• Data communications between computerized systems,
• Remote monitoring and control of the technical installations (e .g. Traffic, Power Supply ,
Alarms , Signalling ... ),
• Operational Voice Communication phones and specifically designed positions for the
Operation and Control Centre (OCC) operators,
• Passenger Information System managed by the OCC operator and implemented at stations,
• Buildings and shelters Security including Access Control and Fire detection,
• The required safety measures for the passengers implemented at stations , depots and other
buildings through a CCTV system ,
• A Video surveillance system inside the train,
Fun ctional specifi cation for

PAGE 6/3 3
tele communication
2. GLOSSARY
Refer to document ref HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-002 General specifications - section 2.
·.·.·.·.-·
Ref:HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001 - 01 Fu nctional specification for

telecommunication
3. GENERAL PRINCIPLES FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS
As with any other high speed railway system, the HHR will be operated from a centralised control
room .
However local security and safety conditions have led to the need to implement two Operation and
Control Centres (OCC) in the following locations: Jeddah and the Major Depot (Km 125). Jeddah is
the operation site under normal conditions.
Both control centres are to be equipped identically and can run on normal/backup mode.
Traffic operation is carried out remotely. On a similar basis, management of e lectrical substations is
ensured from a remote position.
These functions are located in the OCC .
The functiona l specifications to be taken into consideration for the design and implementation of
the system of telecommunications are those usually applied for a High Speed Railway.
In addition, the operational rules for voice and data communication equipment at the OCC are
identical to those currently used on a High Speed Railway.
3.1 HHR STAFF RESPONSIB ILITIES AT THE OCC
The following responsibilities will be located in the OCC:

• OCC supervisor
• Traffic operators
• HV Power Supply operators
• ECMS I SCADA supervisor
• Rolling stock dispatcher
• Security and Passenger Information System (PIS) operator.
Ref: HH R-LO-TE-403-SYS-001- 01 Functional specification for

telecommunication PAGE 8133
3.2 TELECOM REQUIREMENTS
• Transmission of data for control and command of signaling equipment and power supply
systems, plus environmental sensors from and to the OCC,
• Voice and Data GSMR transmission network,
• Voice and data transmission with technical sites including sites along the tracks,
• Voice and data communications for
o Maintenance staff,
o Train crew,
o Stations and station operation staff,
o Maintenance Bases,
o Administrative sites,
.• 'I
o Rolling stock depots and workshops,
On site workers who intervene with the installations must have communication tools provided with :
• The OCC Traffic operator to obtain protection arrangements with respect to the rules of the
route in order to take possession and intervene on the tracks,
• The OCC power operator to obtain the catenary protection arrangements or in emerg ency to
cut the power,
• Point to point voice circuits for Maintenance of
o Electrical substations,
o Signaling rooms,
o Telecom rooms,
o Environmental sensors .
3.3 MAIN COMPONENTS OF TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Accord ing to operational procedures and rul es, the telecommunication systems are divided into the
following types of application:
• Vital Application s linked with operational needs and requiring a high level of reliability with a
"low bit rate",
• Secondary applications req uiring a "high bit rate".
3. 3. 1 Functional division
The configuration of telecommunications systems is based on a functional division of the line:
Ref: HHR-LO· TE-403-SYS-00 1-D 1 Functional specification for

P AGE 9/33
telecommunication
• The First Level is the regulation sector. This sector relates to the rail traffic and routes
management ensured at the OCC . The sector is the basic element which makes it possible
to vary the number of operators required to handle the rail traffic load. At given peak hours,
several operators can share the traffic management of the different sectors of the line,
whereas in off-peak periods, only one operator can operate the whole line. Two types of
areas are envisaged:
o Transport regulation Sectors for the management of rai l traffic and routes. These
sectors are called Call Regulation Sector (CRS) in GSM-R,
o Energy regulation sectors for the management of the power supply. These sectors
are called Call Regulation Sector energy (CRSen) in GSM-R. The same division is
applied for technical trouble shooting and alarm supervision.
• Second level. The transport regulation sector is subdivided into radio operator cantons which
often correspond to the zone of action of one or more operator's positions . In GSM-R, the
radio operator canton is called a Zone of Local Call (ZLC).
The above subdivision is considered as an example and is not a requirement.
Req 01 The consortium shall propose its own GSM-R operation program according to the operation
procedures. This program shall detail the following chapters:
11 Calling Areas (Zoning)
ll Radio Alert
11 Alarm generated by the Driver Safety Device
ll Group Call
11 Conference Call
I' Voice recording procedures
Ref: HHR-LO- TE-403-SYS-001 -01 Functional specification for

PAGE 10/33
telecommunication
3.3.2 Telecommunication systems

• The vital telecommunication applications and systems include:
0 GSM-R network providing voice and data communications according to international
standards,
0 Core Communication System,
0 Operational voice communications Network,
0 Video surveillance of platforms,
0 Master clock system,
0 Passenger Information network including Public address system,
0 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system,
0 Control and Command data network,
0 Security and Safety network and System,
Fire Detection system,
Access Control system,
Voice recorder,
o Emergency Room: dedicated telecom systems and interfaces.
• The secondary applications include:

o Station CCTV network and components (image recorder, screen, cameras)
o Ticketing system and components,
o Administrative voice telecom network connected to local PSTN,
o Administrative data communication Network,
o Technical data communication network (documentation, maintenance, .. . ).
• A Core Communication Network (CCN) based on fiber optic transmission systems designed
for a 99,99% service availability and composed of:
o A synchronous transmission looped network ; SOH STM4 622 Mb/s supporting vital
applications
o A 10 Gigabit/s Ethernet looped network supporting secondary applications
o Local Area Networks (Ethernet/IP) wired and Radio (WiFi) supporting local on site
communications .
• An Operation and Maintenance telecommunication Centre (OMC) located at the Jeddah
OCC with a fu lly equipped backup centre located near the main Depot (km 125).
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-00 1-01 Functional specification for

PAGE 11/33
telecomm unication
4. PHYSICAL LAYER
Homogeneous telecommunication cables, each composed of a given number of single mode

optical fibres shall be laid along the HHR. The overall attenuation shall provide a minimum of 80 km
regeneration gap compatible with WDM (wave division multiplexing) equipment.
They shall serve all locations equipped with technical devices, such as telecommunication ,
signalling equipment, electrical substations, stations, Workshops and depots, maintenance bases,
OCCs, as well as GSM-R sites. These cables shall serve all the applications , systems components
and networks with the OCC. The optical fibers shall be divided into direct cable, semi direct cable
and bus cable.
To ensure a high level of availability, two sets of cables should be laid each side of the tracks.
These sets shall never cross and shall not have any common point to avoid a single point of failure.
.
~·
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001-01 Functional specification for

PAGE 12/33
lelecommunicalion
5. CORE COMMUNICATION NETWORK
5.1 SYNCHRONOUS DIGITAL HIERARCHY HIGH RATE TRANSMISSION NETWORK
Designed to provide a high level of availability to applications and systems , the Synchronous high rate
transmission network is based on a looped SOH STM 4 (622 Mb/s) network.
This network shall have a high level of avail ability. Switching time from normal to backup mode
should be compatible with GSM-R requirements. Expansion to STM 16 (2,5Gb/s) is a basic
requirement.
The network shall provide STM 4 and STM1 loops at all locations.
Basic design shall consider separate loops for each system and applications. However, BTS could
be connected with daisy chain configuration to minimize the connections required on GSMR BSC.
Management and supervision of the network shall be handled from the active OCC.
The following architecture has to be considered as an example.
Typical a rc hilecty ro o f SOH c;o ro tran s m ission n etwork (pc HHB High Sp0ed Li ne
ln!Or Loc;k !ng

SiiJ>..SWlml
Ref: HHR-LO-T E-403-SYS-00 1-01 Fu nctional specification for

PAGE 13/33
telecommunication
5.2 GIGABITS ETHERNET NETWORK
Based on dedicated fibers, the Gigabits Ethernet shall be implemented along the tracks. This
network shall have a high level of availability.
Basic design is based on a loop configuration with an automatic switching in case of a single point
of failure.
The following architecture shall be considered as an example:
Ty n lcol orchllocluro p f 1 0 G!p a bll E tb e rn e t notwg r k fgc HHB H i gh S n eed I !ne
• • '1,; ~
.1>1
t-'
lir"'
.c.awou.v. ..,, .,~
Management and supervision of the network shall be handled from the active OCC.
Low rate network

The low rate layer provides the links to the technical sites - signaling, electrical substation ,
electromechanical equipment, dry loop, measurement equipment, telephone sets or voice
circuits .. .
Most of the above equipment shall provide Ethernet!IP connections.
Low rate multiplexers installed in telecommunication rooms shall provide E1 (G703) interfaces with
the SOH core network and shall be equipped with the required interfaces to the equipment.
Redundancy shall be provided by the Core Network.
Ref: HH R-LO· TE-403-SYS-001 -01 Functional specification for

PAGE 14/33
telecommunicalion
FUNCTIONAL SP ECIFICATIONS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS
6. LIST OF CCN LINKS
6.1 LIST OF CIRCUITS
The Core Communication Network shall provide the connections needed by the operational
requirements and condition s.
The following links are listed as an example:

• Links for hot box detectors,
• Links for side wind detectors,
• Links for RBC and ERTMS,
......·:;. • Links for Administrative Voice Communication (AVC),
·:· ··
• Links for OVC,
• Links for Passenger Information Network,
• Links for maintenance of signalling equipment,
• Links for maintenance of telecommunication systems,
• Links for maintenance of electrical traction equipments,
• Links for SCADA (SIAM ST),
• Links for Signaling,
• Links for Traction alarm,
• Links for Traction regulation ,
• Links for Transport regulation,
• Links for remote control and commands of signaling sites,
• Links for remote control and commands of traction sites,
• Links for remote control and commands of circuit breakers,
• Links for remote control and commands of substations,
• Links for BTS/BSC,
• Links for GSM-R equipment including OMC ,
• Links for remote surveillance of infrastructure (e .g. Buildings, BTS sites .... ),
• Links for Master clock distribution,
• Links for LAN networks,
• Links for CCTV,
• Links for the fire detection network,
• Links for the Ticketing system ,
• Others.
6.2 DESCRIPTION OF CIRCU ITS
6.2. 1 Hot box detectors

telecommunication
Hot boxes shall be connected through the A or B access network,
6.2.2 Side wind detector

A system identical to the hot boxes detector shall be provided.
6.2.3 RBC
RBC is part of GSM-R system and provides the ERTMS layer 2 services.
On line ERTMS applications shall be connected through the A or B access network with Ethernet
interface. Implementation shall include a redundant active comm unication link.
6. 2.4 Administrative Voice Communication (A VC)

All sites shall be equipped with an administrative voice communication telephones plug.
The AVC network is based on VoiP technology . All buildings, shelters and sites shall have access
to the AVC.
.\
The number of PABX's (Call Manager and servers) and capacity shall be determined by the .:J
consortium . DID, advanced lP telephony services shall be provided. Connection to the PSTN as
well as a high level of reliability is a basic requirement. The AVC network shall be connected to the
PSTN at two different locations.
A consistent numbering plan shall be designed to provide functional numbers as well as individual
DID numbers. lt shall take into account the numbering constraints and needs for GSMR and OVC.
6.2.5 Operational Voice Communication (OVC)

For maintenance purposes , direct lines (intercom) shall connect the OCC with each dedicated site
(Signaling , Telecom, Power Supply, and GSM). Intercom links for Signalling or Power Supply shall
be connected through access network B, and access network S for GSM-R sites.
6. 2.6 Links for maintenance of signaling
This circuit provides the required connection between OCC (traffic operator) and:
• Signaling maintenance staff
• Signa ling rooms at the OCC
• Depots and workshop
Ref: HH R-LO-TE-403-SYS-001 -01 Functional specification for

PAGE 16/33
telecommunication
6. 2. 7 Links for maintenance of telecommunications
This circuit provides the voice connection between OCC (Supervision operator) and/or other
maintenance staff and :
• Signaling room
• Traction rooms
• Telecom rooms
• Technical rooms in station
• Depot and workshop
6.2.8 Links for maintenance of electric traction

This circuit provides the required connection between OCC (Energy operator and chief operator)
and/or other maintenance staff and :
• Substation rooms
···:::···· • Traction rooms
• Telecom rooms
• Technical rooms in stations
• Depot and workshop
6. 2.9 Signaling and telecommunication supervision

Signaling and Telecommunications infrastructures are supervised by a computerized assisted
maintenance system (part of SCADA) . On the HHR line two systems are commonly implemented .
• Supervision and maintenance system for signaling and Telecoms .,

• Supervision and maintenance system for signal boxes .
6.2. 10 Links between signal cabinet

Each signal cabinet is connected to both upstream and downstream cabinet. These links are
provided by the CCN. Each cabinet shall be equipped with two network interfaces respectively
connected to A and B network access .
6. 2. 11 Remote control and command of signaling equipment

Signal Cabinets are distributed along the line. Each of them is connected to the OCC via dedicated
circuits.
These circuits are permanent and especially reliable using all redundancy techniques commonly
implemented on HHR lines .
Each circuit is connected to the access network respectively on A and B access .
6. 2. 12 Remote control and command of energy traction automats and breakers

Energy traction automats are distributed along the line . Each of them is connected to the OCC via
dedicated circuits . These circuits are permanent and especially reliable · all redundancy
techniques commonly implemented on HHR lines .
Each circuit is connected to the access network on A and B access.
Ref: H HR-LO-TE-4 03-SYS-0 01 -D 1 Fun ctional specifica tion for

P AGE 17/33
telecommunication
6. 2. 13 Remote control and command of substations

Power feeding of the line is provided by substations (2x25000V) and Traction equipment distributed
along the li ne. Each of them is connected to the OCC via dedicated circuits.
These circuits are permanent and especially reliable using all redundancy techniques commonly
implemented on HHR lines .
Each circuit is connected to the access network on A and B access.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001-0 1 Functional specification for

PAGE 18/33
telecommunication
7. GSM-R NETWORK
7.1 SERVICES
The GSM-R communication network provides the transmission of voice and data communication to
the following applications:
• ERTMS,
• Voice communications between the Driver and OCC Traffic and Energy,
• radio alert and Driver Safety Device (DSD) alarm,
• Emergency call to the OCC regulation and transport regulation positions, if emergency
phones are connected by the GSM-R network,
• Protection Management Module (used by maintenance staff to handle permits to work along
the tracks -MGPT),
• Automatic Catenaries protection for maintenance,
• Calls with the AVC,
• Calls with the Operation and maintenance team,
• Train operation communication.
The radio system sha ll manage several priorities.
• High level applications :

• ERTMS, Transport Regulation, radio alert and DSD,
• Traction alarm and Traction energy regulation.
• Low level applications
• Train voice communications, AVC and train operation calls,
• MGPT and CODA.
• Voice and data communications are set up between:
• Two GSM-R mobiles,
• A GSM-R mobile and a telephone set,
• A GSM-R mobile and a system.
Ref: H HR-LO· TE-403-SYS-00 1-D 1 Functional specification for

PAGE 19/33
telecommunication
7.2 GSM-R ARCHITECTURE
GSM-R Architecture shall be designed to provide a redundant radio coverage for the whole HHR
line .
Radio Cover Principles

Co localization of cells is a possible configuration to fulfill a high level of availability. The height of a
pylon and antenna type shall be defined by the Radio survey results . Special studies shall be
needed for tunnels and trenches . For the radio study, the location of the sites shall be chosen in
order to avoid simultaneous handover of GSM transmission and RBC transition.
Double coverage will be implemented on the following way:
• Two BTS shall be installed per site ,
• One BTS shall be connected to a BSC; the collocated BTS shall be connected to another
BSC. Both BSC should not be collocated .
• The 2 radio coverage shall be connected to a unique MSC . 0
• The BTS shall be equipped with two transmitters .
• The 2 collocated BTS shall be connected to both antennas (installed on the same mast)
providing an air signal along the tracks which results from the coupling of each covering
layer.
BTS are connected in a daisy chain structure and each extremity to the CCN .
The following scheme illustrates an example of the principle which provides a redundant radio
cover.
GSMR equipments located at the active OCC are duplicated at the standby OCC.
____] --
[nTSl UiiJ
11 111111111111 1111 111111111111 11111111111111 1111
Figure 17: GSM-R Architecture
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS -001-0 1 Fun ctional speci fi cati on fo r

PAGE 20/33
telecommunication
(,
8. OPERATIONAL VOICE COMMUNICATION NETWORK
Structure of the network

OVC switching equipment shall be implemented at the OCC. One part is dedicated to Rail Traffic,
the other to the Power Supply.
Operator positions are connected to switching equipment.
Services offered by the network shall provide OVC with:

• Outside Leased lines, Administrative Voice Network, PSTN ,
• Direct lines between substations and regulators ,
• Voice over lP network,
• GSM-R voice network through MSC ,
• Call interception for direct lines,
• Recording of calls GSM-R , AVC , OVC,
• Echo cancellation devices when required ,
• Call transfer,
• Conference call ,
• Call forwarding,
• Emergency phones automatic testing.
OVC equipment located at the active OCC are duplicated at the standby OCC .
Emergency Phones
Emergency phones shall be implemented along the tracks at strategic points. The sites and
number shall be specified by the Consortium.
Outside emergency phones shall be powered by solar cells, shall be hands free and anti-
vandalism. The connection could be provided through an Optical link or GSM-R fixed line
interface . Two push buttons shall provide the direct connection either to the traffic position or to
the Traction Alarm position.
Traction Alarm
In the case of an emergency, the Traction Alarm operational function is the procedure which
causes the immediate connection to the substation regulator . This function can be used by all
operational people "on tracks" (including depots, connecting lines .. .), by working staff as well as
maintenance staff. Using the emergency phone , a direct link is set up with the Power Supply
Operator at the OCC.
Along the line, the function is divided into several Zones to be defined by the consortium. Each
Emergency phone is specifically identified.
Ref: HHR-LO- TE-403-SYS-00 1-D 1 Function al specification for

telecommunication
Electric Traction Control

The Electric Traction voice circuit is set up directly between the Power Supply Operator and the
following sites:
• Substation and on line electrical station,
• Signaling station s Traffic operator at OCC.
lt is usually used by catenary staff to work.
Along the line, the function is divided into several Zones to be defined by the consortium .
Transport Control
The Transport control voice circuit is set up directly between the Power Supply Operator and the
following sites:
• Maintenance staff using the phones located in signaling sites,
• All staff using the Transport regulation functions from the emergency phones.
Along the line, the function is divided into several Zones to be defined by the consortium .
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001-01 Functional specification for

P AGE 22133
telecommunication
9. ADMINISTRATIVE VOICE COMMUNICATION
An Administrative Voice Communication network shall be implemented in buildings, OCCs,

workshop, depot, stations and maintenance bases.
The standby OCC shall be equipped as the operational one.
The network shall be lP based as well as with mobile hand sets and fixed phones. Switches shall
be located at the OCC and Workshop .
Switches shall provide:
• PSTN connections.
• GSM-R connection,
• DID lines.
Switches are connected to the CCN.
The capacity of switches shall be dimensioned by the consortium taking into account:
• For workshops and depots all the technical buildings and sites located in the area covered
by the switch ,
• For stations in coordination with the Phase 1 Package 2 Contractor.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SY S-00 1-01 Fu nctional specification for

PAGE 23/33
lelecommunicalion
10. SECURITY OF INFRASTRUCTURES
In addition to the specific installations that the Government will require , technical sites, depots,
workshop and maintenance base shall be equipped with access control and an anti-intrusion
system. Telecommunication links shall transmit information to the OCC and displayed to the:
• Operator position in charge of access control,
• Operator position in charge of supervision of infrastructures.
The security system is based on three subsystems:
• Access control to manage the access authorizations to the various sites with local and
centralised management,
• Intrusion detection complete with CCTV control on particular locations to verify Intrusion ,
• A Video surveil lance network shall be implemented in critical locations such as rolling stock E)
areas . Recording of events shall be part of the system. The definitive list of locations shall
be established by the consortium according to the Government requests.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001-D 1 Functional specification fo r

telecommunication PAGE 24/33
11. LAN IWIFI
11 .1 LAN
lP LAN shall be implemented in all sites and buildings (including technical sites). These LAN are
connected to CCN .
Security measures shall be installed to avoid any outside intrusion and attack. Connection to
Internet network shal l be provided but protected by efficient firewall system .
LAN shall provide features to avoid congestion for vital applications.
The design and architecture shall ensure a high level of availabi lity to vital applications.
VLAN facilities shall ensure security between main domains such as:
...... · • Office applications,

• Operation applications ,
• Maintenance applications.
Installed networks shall provide secured WIFI connectivity in wide areas.
WIFI connectivity sha ll be provided within depots as well as station and platform to allow
transmission between trains and rolling stock or commercial applications.
11.2 ON BOARD WIFI
The Consortium shall install a WIFI network on board to be able to offer passengers Internet
connections along the whole line.
Ref: HHR-LO· TE-403-SYS-001· 0 1 Fu nctional specification for

P AGE 25/33
telecommunication
12. SCADA (SIAM-ST)
The following equipment shall be connected to the SIAM ST:

• Signaling equipment,
• Substations and traction equipment and installations,
• Fire detection and building infrastructures equ ipment,
• Telecom equipment,
• Security equipment in buildings,
• Information provided by detectors, sensors in cabinets ,
• Information provided by surveillance signaling systems,
• Information provided by platforms. ·--'..;;;
<":.
The Consortium shall complete this list.
SIAM ST improves the intervention of maintenance staff. Information is stored according to SCADA
requirements and can be at any time extracted and compiled. Preventive maintenance is then
subsequently organized and will decrease the number of failures and curative maintenance
interventions.
The following services are provided by the system:
• To keep under surveillance the status of equipment implemented along the line. In case of
failure, the SIAM generates and transmits alarms to the corresponding operator at the OCC ,
• For maintenance purposes, a synoptic shall display in real time or batch basis information
about the equipment. This is also available for track circuits,
• To analyse the stored data and provide statistics for maintenance staff domain by domain ,
• Generate operational alarms to dedicated alarm modules (Transport, Power Supply ... )
located at the OCC.
Ref: HHR- LO- TE-403-SYS-001 -01 Functional specification for

PAGE 26/33
telecommunication
13. CCTV
13.1 ON SITE VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Video surveillance systems shall be installed:

• On those HHR sites requiring dedicated security measures,
• On HHR sites and public locations within stations
• On platforms essentially concentrated on passengers boarding (platform and train doors),
Control and command of cameras is handled from the OCC. According to operational rules the
cameras can also be handled from a position located in a station.
Screens shall be located at OCC as well as the main image recorder and management system.
·.·.···, Local screens shall be installed in stations to view local cameras or carry out local recording.
Images sha ll be digital according to international standards and provide a minimum definition to
ensure the implementation of image analysis and recognition process and security or police
investigation .
The CCTV network shall use the Ethernet network.
Platforms shall be covered by the CCTV system . Images shall be displayed on screens located on
each platform extremity so that the HST driver is able to see boarding movements.
13.2 ON BOARD CCTV
The "on board" CCTV system is aimed at seeing inside coaches and boarding passages.
Images shall be recorded and kept on board during a 30 days period . Recorders shall be located in
locomotives or the train crew cabin . Records shal l be easily copied onto an external hard drive.
Screens shall be installed in the train crew cabin for viewing in case of necessity.

P AGE 27/33
telecommunication
14. PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM
This system is aimed at informing Passengers on a real time basis. Information should be given on
HHR sites using:
• Screens and adequate panels on site (stations) and on board,
• Voice message information through a Public Address system.
Control and command of on site displayed data shall be carried out from the OCC and may be
locally monitored according to operational procedures.
Public address messages are managed from the OCC or from the station according to the
operational procedures and zoning of the station .
All displayed information is in both Arabic and English.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-00 1-D1 Functional specification for

PAGE 28/33
telecommunication
15. CLOCK DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
The master clock system shall provide consistent signals to all the technical systems .
Telecommunication systems shall use this unique time pulse to synchronize their internal clocks .
The master clock provides the time to all HHR sites (depots, workshops, technical room, OCC ... )
and is displayed in stations and on platforms.
The master clock is duplicated; its accuracy is compliant with the most severe system user
requirement. The clock distribution is carried by the CCN.
Ref : H HR- LO- TE-403-SYS-00 1-01 Functional specification for

telecommunication PAGE 29133
16. FIRE DETECTION
All the technical buildings along the line, in the stations and the OCCs shall be equipped with a
system for fire detection connected to the operator in charge of supervision at the OCC.
The system shall comply with the local regulations .
Ref: HH R-LO-TE-403-SYS-001-D 1 Functional specification for

telecommunication PAGE 30/33
17. INSTALLATION WITH CONTRACTORS PHASE 1- PACKAGES 1

AND2
The Consortium Phase 1 shall install Ducts and cable ways for the fibre and main cables
(CCN) within civil works .
• Tunnels, Bridges,
Req 02
Ill" The Consortium Phase 2 shall specify the technical requirements to Phase 1 Contractors for
cabling infrastructure.
Req 03
lE The Consortium shall install , connect, test and commission all the cables using ducts and cable
ways installed by the Contractor Phase 1 .
Req 04 Within stations (indoor and outdoor)

11: The Consortium shall install connect and test all system peripherals. (camera , Information
screens and panels, loud speaker, phones , clocks .. . )
lE The Consortium shall provide and install all cables (high and low voltage) to connect system
peripherals.
Req 05
11: Design of peripherals installed in stations shall be approved by the architect and the
~·- :
Government representative .
Ref: H HR-LO-TE-4 03-SYS- 001- 0 1 Functi onal speci fi cation for

PAGE 31 /33
telecom munication
18. MAINTENANCE
18.1 MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
The Consortium shall provide the maintenance organization and policy.
The following items sha ll be within the scope:

• Maintenance level;
• Supervision level;
• Management level:
o Availability;
o Reliability;
o Development and adaptation .
Defects, fa ilures and faults shall be indicated I displayed locally and remotely (if required) .
Sophisticated maintenance and fault detection software shall be provided.
Req 06
11 The Majority of faults shall be repaired by Printed Circuit Boards (PCB) or by piece parts
replacement.
Req 07
11 The Consortium shall provide adequate spare parts to comply with Safety requirements
described in RAMS (doe n°2):
18.2 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT
Req 08
The consortium shall provide a computerised maintenance system aimed at maintaining an up
to date data base of all telecommunication systems and equipment:
Ref: HH R-LO-TE-403-SYS-00 1-01 Functional specification for

PAGE 32/33
telecommunication
18.3 TRAINING
The Consortium shall provide the training program for the operation and maintenance staff:
• Maintenance technician (level 1 and 2);

• Faults detection and supervision maintenance technician ;
• Maintenance engineer;
• Network operation and management engineer.
Req 09
11: The Consortium shall perform adequate training to comply with Safety requirements described
in RAMS (doe no2):
Documents shall be provided in an electronic format.
18.4 DOCUMENTATION OF INSTALLATION
Req 10
11: The Consortium shall provide all the documentation of the installed transmission network.
(Cabling, network configuration , equipment sites , test results , acceptance testing documentation
and results, sites .. .) according to RAMS requirements (doe no2)
Documents shall be provided in an electronic format.
18.5 DOCUMENTATION
Req 11
111: Documentation concerning operation and maintenance shall be in Arabic and English . English
version shall be the reference .
Req 12
11: All documentation shall be provided in an electronic form .
Req 13
11: Documentation shall be available on a dedicated intranet site .
Ref: HH R-LO-TE-40 3-SYS-00 1-01 Fun ctional specification for

P AGE 33/33
telecommuni cation
---~
- Ci,,:::l,,~l .bg.b:¥1 iu::J l.dl CiJ.ll.w g.bl

PHASE 2

STANDARDS FOR TELECOMMUNICATION
.:
A1 20/4/09 First Issue Jean Marie PORTE
B1 02/06/09 Front page Dominique CHRISTIEN
C1 29/06/09 Final RFP Dom inique CHR ISTIEN
01 11/09/09 Review according Linklaters's comments Dom inique CHRISTIEN
11 /09/09 (
PREPARED BY Jean Marie PORTE ;.~,:
11/09/09
CHECKED BY S.PETROFF ~
(.
11/09/09
<idJ
11/09/09 ~
~~
... ------
~-
........
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-003-D1 STANDARD FOR TELECOMMUNICATION PAGE 2/1 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. CONTENT ........................................................................................................................................................ S
2. LIST OF STANDARDS ........ .......................................................................................................................... 6
2 .1 STANDARDS AND GENERAL REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO THE INSTALLATIONS ..... .... ..... ..... .. ......... ... ..... ....... 6
2.2APPLICABLE STANDARD FOR EQUIPMENT .... ...... ... ... ... .. .. ..... ...... ..... .............. ..... .. .. ..... .. ..... .. ..... .. .... ... ....... .... ... .. 7
2.2.1 Data Interfaces: ITU-T. .. .... ......... ..... ..... ............................ ................ .... ..... .... ..... ...................... ..... ... ... ..... 8
2.2.2 Ethernet Interface ..... .... ...... ..... ...... ... .. ....... .. ..................... ........ .. .. ... .. .. ... .................. ...... .. .. ... .... .. ...... ... ..... 8
2.2.3 Digital transmission:..... ... .. ...... ...... .... ....... ... ..... .. ...................... .. ... .... ... ...... .. ...... ................ ... .... .. ....... ..... .. 8
2.2.4 SOH Equipment: ............. ... .............. ..... .... ...... .... .... ................. ... ...... ....... ... ... .. ........ ... ............. .. ........ ...... .. 8
2.2.5 Synchronization: .. .......... .... .... ... .. .. ........... ....... ..... .. .... .. ..... ... ................. .. ....... .. ... ........ ... .. ... .. .. .............. ..... 9
2.2.6 Error rate Performance: .. ..... ... .. .. ..... .......... ..... ....... ..... ............ .. ..... ..... ... .. .. ... ..... ....... ... ...... .... ....... ...... ..... 9
2.2. 7 CWOM: ............... ..... ... ......... .............. .... .. .......... .. ..... .. ... .... .............. .. ............ ............ ... .. ...... ........ .... ..... .. ... 9
2.2.8 Staff SAFETY: ..... ..... ......... .... ... ...................................... .................. .. .. .. .. ...... ... .. ...... .. ........ ...... .... .... ...... .. 9
2.2.9 Lightning protection : .................... .. .. ....... ..... ...... ... .. .... .. ... ...... ... ..... ... .... ... ... .. ....... .... ..... .... ..... ... ... .. ..... ...... 9
2.2.10Resistibility: ..... ......................... .......... .... ..... ... .. .... ... ...... .......... ... ...... .. ... ...... ... ...... ..... ... .... .. ........ ....... ..... .... 9
2.2.11 Standards on the electromagnetic disturbances: ..... ... ... .............................. . .......... ... .... ............. ........ 9
2. 2. 12 Specifications for telecommunication cables: .. ... ....... .. .......... ....... .. ........ ...... .. .. ............ .. ... .. ... .. ...... .. 10
2.2.13DECT: ....... ... ...... .. ..... .. ... ...... ... ...... ............... ....... ..... ...... ...... ...... .. ..... ................ ... .... .. .............. ... ........... ... 10
()
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -40 3- SYS-003-D 1 STANDARD FOR TELECOMMUNICATION PAGE 3/1 0
PROJECT REFERENCES
None
J-
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-003-01 STANDARD FOR TELECOMMUNICATION PAGE 4/ 10

1. CONTENT
This document lists the applicable standa rds for telecommunication systems. In case of
discrepancy or conflict, local regulation and standards shall supersede following list. The
Consortium shall complete the list and submit to Government for approval.
Ref: HHR· LO· TE -403· SYS-003-D1 STANDARD FOR TELECOMMUNICATI ON PAGE 5/10
2. LIST OF STANDARDS
2.1 STANDARDS AND GENERAL REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO THE INSTALLATIONS
• EN 287-1: Qualification test of welders- Fusion welding - Part 1;

• EN 288: Specification and approval of welding procedures for metallic material;
• EN 355: Personal protective equipment against fa lls from a height - Energy absorbers;
• EN 353-1: Personal protective equipment against falls from a height- Part 1: Guided type fall
arresters including a rigid anchor line;
• EN 795: Protection against falls from a height - Anchor devices - Requirements and testing;
·.:··
• EN 362: Personal protective equipment against falls from a height - Connectors;
• EN 61024-1: Protection of building structures against lightening;
• NF EN 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosure (lP code);
• RoHS 2002/95/CE.Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances in electrical and
electronic equipment;
• UIC 753-1, Technical regulations concerning international railway telephone circuits ;
• UIC 753-2, General technical regulations governing establishment and development of communication
capacity over the railway telecommunications network of UIC members ;
• UI C 753-3, General procedures governing maintenance, operating and performance criteria for the UIC
member railways telecommunication network.
Ref : HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS -003-D1 STANDARD FOR TELECOMMUNICATIO N PAGE 6/10
2.2 APPLICABLE STANDARD FOR EQUIPMENT
• ISO 7240 : « Fire detection and alarm systems »;

• GSM standards from 02 .02 to 12.11 (ETS 300 501 a ETS 301 .251 );
• ET SI TS 32.101 : « Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) 3G Telecom
Management principles and high level requirements »;
• ET SI TS 32 .102 : « Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) 3G Telecom
Management architecture »;
• ETSI TS 32.106 : « Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) ; 3G Configuration
Management »;
• ETSI TS 32.111 : « Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) ; 3G Fault
Management» ;
• ITU : « Q.120x-series IN Recommendation structure »;
• ITU : « Q.121x-series structure (IN CS-1) », - ITU : « Q.122x-series IN Capability Set 2 (CS-2)
Recommendation Structure »;
• ITU : « Q.123x-series introduction to IN Capability Set 3 (CS-3) »;
• ITU : « SPECIFICATIONS OF SIGNALLING SYSTEM No. 7 Message Transfer Part (MTP)
0 .701 - 0 .704 , 0.706, 0 .707 »;
• ITU : « SPECIFICATIONS OF SIGNALLING SYSTEM No. 7 Supplementary services 0.73x
Series»;
• ITU : « SPECIFICATIONS OF SIGNALLING SYSTEM No. 7 ISDN User Part (ISUP) 0.761 -
0.764, 0 .766 »;
• ITU : « SPECIFICATIONS OF SIGNALLING SYSTEM No. 7 Signaling Connection Control Part
(SCCP) 0.711 -0 .714, 0 .716 »;
• ITU : « SPECIFICATIONS OF SIGNALLING SYSTEM No. 7 Transaction Capabilities (TC)
0 .771-0 .775 »;
• ITU : «SPECIFICATIONS OF SIGNALLING SYSTEM No. 7 Signaling Network Structure
0 .705 »;
• ITU : « SPECIFICATIONS OF SIGNALLING SYSTEM No. 7 Numbering of International
Signaling Point Codes 0 .708 »;
• ITU-T P.800 : « Methods for subjective determination of transmission quality »;
• ITU-T M.3010 : « TMN conformance and TMN compliance - Principles for a
Telecommunications management network »;
• IEC 754-1 , IEC 754-2, IEC 332-1, IEC 332-3.C , IEC 1034: « Fire standard for cables» ;
• EN 50.126: « Railway applications - The specification and demonstration of RAMS» ;
·-~
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -4 03- SYS -00 3-D1 STANDARD FOR TELECOMM UNICATIO N P AGE 7/10
0
• MORANE , Functional Addressing , FFFS E1 OT6001 ;
• MORANE , Functional Addressing , FIS E12T6001 ;
• MORANE, SSRS , V2.0 19 March 1997 A04T60022;
• ERTMS : Corridor 2007 version du 6 mars 2007 .
2.2. 1 Data Interfaces: /TU-T

• V24 : List of definitions for interchange circuits between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data
circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) ;
• V28 :_Eiectrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current interchange circuits .
2.2.2 Ethernet Interface

• IEEE 802 .1: LAN/MAN architecture, internetworking among 802 LANs, MANs and other wide
area networks, Security, overall network management, and protocol layers above the MAC &
·.·.c:..·-·~-. LLC layers;
\~~-: .
• IEEE 802.2 : Telecommunications and information exchange between systems--Local and
metropolitan area networks--Specific requirements--Part 2: Logical Link ;
• IEEE 802 .3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method
and Physical Layer Specifications.
2.2.3 Digital transmission:

• Recommendation U IT-T G. 703 (2001 ), Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital
interfaces;
• Recommendation UIT-T G.704 (1998) , 1 544, 6 312 , 2 Synchronous frame structures used at
primary and secondary hierarchical levels 2048, 8 448 et 44 736 kbiVs ;
• Recommendation UIT-T G.732 (1988) , Characteristics of primary PCM multiplex equipment
operating at 2048 kbit/s .
2.2.4 SOH Equipment:

• Recommendation UIT-T G.707/Y.1 322 (2000), Network node interface for the synchronous
digital hierarchy (SDH)Corrigendum 1 (2001 ), Corrigendum 2 (2001) et Amendment 1 (2001) ;
• Recommendation UIT-T G.708 Sub STM-0 network node interface for the synchronous digital
hierarchy {SOH);
• Recommendation UIT-T G.709 Management aspects of the optical transport network element;
• Recommendation UIT-T G781 Synchronization layer functions;
• Recommendation UIT-T G.782 Types and general characteristics _ , G~nous digital
hierarchy (SDH) equipment; /-<:...,\ uo!lt?.z.1
:1' .;!"f" 'id<>,... · v~ ·
• Recommendation UIT-T G.783 (2000), Characteristics of sync , ct_r16~s digitaf"h~eJ~ y (SOH)
equipment functional blocks Corrigendum 1 (2001 ); ·3 ,:;: ·~ \Jl J
• Recommendation UIT-T G.784 Management aspects of the syn ,·~
.:} ·~9u gjQ_ital ,!e~r~ {SOH)
transport network element; · ~.> , ' ,! c§ /.
• Recommendation UIT-T G.957 : Optical interfaces for equipme
synchronous digital hierarchy;
' ·,"~
~J:ld )ystem s:r:~t g to the
''"'- i',o 'i'l'_ ";/
~~ ~ J
d---
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-003-D1 STANDARD FOR TELECOMMUNICATION P AGE 8/10
• Recommendation UIT-T G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy
for use on optical fibre cables ;
• Recommendation UIT-T 1.321 (1991 ), B-ISON protocol reference model and its application ;
• Recommendation UIT-T 1.356 (2000) , B-ISON ATM layer cell transfer performance ;
• Recommendation UIT-T 1.362 2, B-ISON ATM adaptation layer (AAL) functional description ;
• Recommendation U IT-T series 1.432.x, B-ISON user-network interface- Physical layer specification ;
• Recommendation UIT-T 1.610 (1999), Measurement of round trip delay using loopback cell
Corrigendum 1 (2000);
• Recommendation UIT-T M.60 (1993), Maintenance terminology and definitions ;
• Recommendation UIT-T 1.325 (1993), Reference configurations for ISDN connection types ;
• Recommendation UIT-T 1.340 (1998) , ISDN connection types ;
• Recommendation UIT-T G.801 (1988), Digital transmission models .
2.2. 5 Synchronization : ·::{:

• Recommendation UIT-T G803 , Architecture of transport networks based on the synchronous
digital hierarchy (SOH);
• Recommendation U IT-T G81 0, Definitions and terminology for synchronization networks;
• Recommendation U IT -T G811 , Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks ;
• Recommendation UIT-T G812 , Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node
clocks in synchronization networks ;
• Recommendation U IT-T G813 , Timing characteristics of SOH equipment slave clocks (SEC) .
2. 2. 6 Error rate Performance:

• Recommendation UIT-T G.821 (2002), Error performance of an international digital connection
operating at a bit rate below the primary rate and forming part of an Integrated Services Digital
Network;
• Recommendation U IT-T G .828 (2000), Error performance parameters and objectives for
international , constant bit-rate synchronous digital paths.
2.2.7 CWDM:
• Recommendation UIT-T G694.2 , Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid .
2.2.8 Staff SAFETY:

• EN 60950 .
2. 2. 9 Lightning protection:
• Recommendation U IT-T equipment installed in a
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -4 03- SYS-00 3-D1 STANDARD FO R TELECOMMUNI CATION P AGE 9/1 0
• EN 50121 -1 November 2006 : Railway applications - Electromagnetic compatibility -Part1 :

General ;
• EN 50121-4 November 2006: Railway applications - Electromagnetic compatibility - Part 4 :
Emission and immunity of signalling and telecommunication apparatus.
• EN 55024. Information technology equipment; immunity characteristics, limits and methods of
measurements.
2. 2. 12 Specifications for telecommunication cables:

• NF F 55-624, Fixed railway equipment - Halogen free cables for telecommunications for local
customs used in underground railway networks ;
• NF F 55-633, Fixed railway equipment - Telecomm and and teletransmission cables used to
urban railway network;
• NF F 55-641, Product specification for optical fibre cables used in underground railway
networks;
• NF F 55-642, Product specification for optical fibre cables used in railway networks for
telecommunication on average and long distance.
2.2.13 DECT:
• ETS 300 175 Wireless Digital Telecommunications Interface
• ETSI ETS 300 286-1.
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-003-01 STANDARD FOR TELECOMMUNICATION PAGE 10/10
PHASE 2
SMISSION NETWORK SPECIFICATION
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
TRANSMISSION NETWORK SPECIFICATION
A1 20/02/2009 First issue JM . Porte
A2 14/04/2009 Review before validation JM . Porte

c=·· • -=~~
·:· -·-~.•
A3 17/04/2009 Language review JM . Porte
B1 02/06/2009 Final version D. Christien
C1 29/06/2009 Final RFP D. Christien
D1 11/09/2009 Review according Linklaters's comments D. Christien
PREPARED BY JM. PORTE 29/06/2009 ~~

;>
CHECKED BY S.PETROFF 29/06/2009 (
fJ
VALIDATED BY G.NORMAND 29/06/2009 (~

,____.____.
APPROVED BY C.SCHANG 29/06/2009 ~~
-7
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-005-0 1 TRANSMISSION NETWORK SPECIFICATION PAGE 2/23

TABLE OF CONTENTS
·. -~·;:).
:;
.;..
1. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 5
2. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................ 6
3. SCOPE OF WORK ......................................................................................................................................... 7
4. TRANSPORT NEEDS ............................................................................................................ ....................... 8
5. PHYSICAL LAYER ...................................................................................................................................... 10
5 .11NTRODUCTION ... ......... .. ........................ ............. .............. ... ..... ..... ...... .... ..... .... ....... ... ............ ......... ... ....... .... .. 10
5 .2 FIBRE OPTIC CABLE ..... ... ......... .. ... .......... ........... ................. ............ ..... .. ........ .... .......... ...... ...... ........ .......... ... .... 10
5. 2. 1 Junctions ............................................ .......... ................................ ......................................... .. ............... .. 13
5. 2. 2 Optical testing of cables ... .............. ......................................... ............................................................... 13
5. 2. 3 Cable installation ........................ .. ................ ............................... ............ ............. ............... .................... 14
5. 2.4 Storage conditions for the fib er reel and PEHD tube ........ .................. ..... .. .... ................................ .... 15
6. TECHNICAL PRINCIPLES OF TRANSMISSION NETWORK ............................................................. 16
6 .1 CCN GENERAL DESCRIPTION .. .... .......... ..... ..... .... ........... .. ....... .. ..... ..... .... ........ .......... ... ...... ... .. ............ .... ..... .... 16
6 .2GENERAL PRINCIPLES .. .. .......................... .............. ... ................. . ..... .... ... .. .... .............. ...... ........... ............ ........ 16
6 .3 SDH TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ............. .......... ........ ............... ..... .. .. .. ......... ... ............ .. .......... .... ............. .. ......... 19
6.4 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION1 0 GIGABIT ETH ERNET ........... .. ......... ..... ..... ........ ................ ..... ......... .............. ... ..... 21
7. PERFOMANCES TRANSMISSION NETWORK ..................................................................................... 23

7 .1 RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY ............ ..... .. ... .... .. .......... ........ .. ........ .... ..... ............ .... ..... ..... .... ... ... .............. .. ... . 23
7 .2SYSTEM EVOLUTION ............. .. .......... ....... ................................. ..... ..... ................................... ... ... ......... .. ...... ... 23
Ref: HHR·LO·TE·403·SYS-005·D1 TRANSMISSION NETWORK SPECIFICATION PAGE 3/23

PROJECT REFERENCES

1 HH R-LO-CT-602-SYS-002 General specifications Section 2: Glossa_ry
2 HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 Rams Assurance Re_g_ui rements
~ -: .· ...
3 HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001 Functional Specifications for Telecommunications
Ref : HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-005-01 TRANSMISSION NETWORK SPECIFICATION PAGE 4/23

1.GLOSSARY
Refer to document HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-002 General specifications Section 2: Glossary
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-005-01 TRANSMISSION NETWORK SPECIFICATION PAGE 5/23

2. INTRODUCTION
The Core Communication Network carries all information to and from the equipment located along
the line. This document describes the requirements for the design and implementation of the core
transmission optical fiber network i.e.:
• The physical layer;
• The transmission structure .
... ·.;:··

3. SCOPE OF WORK
This document describes the requirements that the Consortium shall comply with the
Telecommunication transmission System also called Core Communication Network (CCN).

4. TRANSPORT NEEDS
The transmission network includes all telecommunications circuits or links necessary to the
operation of the HHR. All equipments located along the line are connected to the centralized
Control & Communication systems (C&C) located at OCCs . lt serves all signaling cabinets, all sub-
stations, all shelters GSMR, all stations, all depots and all bases maintenance and rolling stock
workshops .
Req 01
This Transmission Network shall provide the capacity required to:
11 Avoid any congestion
11' Ensure the Reliability, Availability, Maintainability and Safety requirements defined for the
project (ref doe n°2)
The CCN comprises the following circuits:

• Links for hot boxes detectors;
• Links for earth side wind detectors;
• Links for RBC and ERTMS;
• Links for AVC;
• Links for OVC;
• Links for the passenger information network;
• Links for the maintenance of signaling equipment;
• Links for the maintenance of telecommunication systems;
• Links for the maintenance of electrical traction equipments;
• Links for SCADA ST;
• Links for signaling ;
• Links for traction alarm;
• Links for traction regulation ;
• Links for traffic regulation;
• Links for the remote control and commands of signaling sites;
• Links for the remote control and commands of traction sites;
• Links for the remote control and commands of breakers ;
• Links for the remote control and commands of substation;
• Links for BTS/BSC ;
• Links for GSMR equipments including OMC ;
• Links for the master clock distribution;
• Links for LAN networks;
• Links for CCTV;
• Links for the fire detection network;
• Links for the ticketing system;
• Others.

Ref : HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-005-01 TRANSMISSION NETWORK SPECIFICATION PAGE 9/23

5. PHYSICAL LAYER
5.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the technical specifications of the physical layer.

This specification relates to two types of cables :
• Fiber optic cable;
• Copper cable.
Technical requirements relate to:

• The whole line between Makkah and Madinah ;
...: . ·.• • Tunnels;
• Junctions in stations;
• Depots;
• Maintenance bases ;
• Rolling Stock Workshop.
They are considering :

• Security requirements;
• Cabling requirements;
• Installation requirements.
5.2 FIBRE OPTIC CABLE
For this project, single mode fiber should be used. Cables shall be composed of 72 fibers type G
652 {ITU-T). However the Consortium may propose other types of cables assuming they have
similar performance. Choice justification shall have to be made during the design of
telecommunications.
The cable shall support the following type of circuit:

• Wave Division Multiplexing (WDM)
• 10 Gig abit Ethernet : 10 GBPS;
• SOH : 2488 MBPS, (If required);
• SOH : 622 MBPS;

Req 03
Ill' For the design, the Consortium shall take into account that the Government reserves its
possibility to lay more fibers than needed for train operation , aiming at leasing capacity on his
network (dark fiber or bandwidth).
Req 04
Ill' The design shall provide two types of running fibers : Direct fibers used to carry the signal
between repeaters 1/E multiplexers (high rate transmission) and omnibus fibers used to connect
technical railway sites {distribution layer, middle rate transmission) .
Req 05
Ill' The main cable shall be buried in PEHD tube parallel to the line, at a distance ~2 . 5m from the
external edge of the nearest rail and a depth ~1 m. The distance and the depth shall be precisely
determined in coordination with the civil works activities and in collaboration with the
Government's representative . A Underground Warning Tape shall be laid 0.20m above cable
level .
Req 06
111: Backup cable shall be laid on the opposite side of tracks . it shall never cross and shall have no
point of crossing with the main cable. The minimum spacing between these 2 cables shall be ~
10m. This backup cable shall be buried as the main one (see Req . 05 above).
Req 07
11: Cable section lengths shall be 4800m . Cable junctions shall be located in junction chambers
with a 20m reserve . Pulling chamber shall be located at mid section length with a 30m loop .
Req 08
111: Cable ducts shall be laid by the Consortium except for civil works structures (tunnels, trenches,
bridges, stations ... ). The Consortium shall coordinate with the Route Civil Works contractor and
the Government's representative .
Req 09
111: Two separate telecommunication ducts and outside ways shall be provided in each building ,
technical room or shelter,. The distance between two penetrations shall be as large as possible.
Distribution cable to technical room shall have a minimum capacity of 12 fibers . For repeater
rooms {backup loop), 72 fibers shall be connected with SC/APC connectors or equivalent.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-005-0 1 TRANS MISS ION NETWORK SPEC IFICATION PAGE 11/23
Shelte r Cable entrance on both sides of the shelter
12 FO or 72 FO cab le
Common trench for the 2 cab les
Cable derivation prin ciple
Req 10
All the cables in tunnels , trenches and stations shall be of zero halogen type .
Fiber cable shall have the following characteristics:

Cable type : dielectric cable
Nominal outer diameter: 16 mm for the cables with 72 fibers or less
Operating temperature , range : -10oc to+ 60°C
Admissible traction load : 280 DaN
Minimum operating bending radius: 20 times the cable external diameter
Crush resistance: 300 DaN
External identification of cable: Identification + location of the optical cable + Optical
Fibers" indicated in English and Arabic.
Req 12
The production tests of cable must be carried out by the manufacturer's internal system of
quality assurance . The Quality assurance Plan shall be provided to the Government's
representative. All the technical tests shall comply with .standard EN 18700. Each cable must be
tested individually including during manufacturing process . All the reports must be provided by
the Consortium to the Government's representative.
Req 13
Tubes of the FO cable shall have different colors .
The color code of cables shall have to be homogeneous on th
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-005-0 1 TRANSMISSION NETWORK SPECIFICATION P AGE 12/23

5.2.1 Junctions
2 types of connection are required:
• Connexion with connectors and optical jumpers ;
• Connexion between fibers by fusion .
Connection with connectors and optical jumpers
These connections shall be made in technical rooms and on active fibers . Connection shall be
carried out as soon as a complete section between 2 points of regeneration has been installed . All
the 72 fibers shall be connected in junction closure or boxes.
Splicing closure/boxes
For technical sites without regeneration, 12 fibers shall be connected to the fiber distribution frame
(cable head and patch panel) . For regeneration sites, all fibers shall be connected to cable head
and patch panel.
Components shall be connected with jumpers to the fiber frame. Jumpers shall be laid in ·:_
·:_:_··
appropriate tubes or cable ducts .
Optical fib er frame shall be installed in 19" cabinet with SC/APC connector type.
The exact configuration of the optical distribution frame shall be submitted by the Consortium to the
Government's representative_approval.
Fused connection and coupling

When connecting cable sections, junctions shall be carried out using a junction closure. Closure
shall be tight and easy to open , and shall be of lP 68 type (Index of Protection) .
Fibers shall be connected by welding. Only a method of welding by fusion is acceptable. In
connection chambers cables shall be identified . A metric indication shall also be performed on the
cable envelope.
5. 2. 2 Optical testing of cables

Cables characteristics shall be measured after installations and junctions. The Consortium shall
provide the test results to the Government's representative. All fibers (including the reserve fibers)
shall be measured in line with the following requirements.
Req 15
The average value of attenuation for the splices in both directions should not exceed 0.2 dB, for
the two wavelengths 1550 nm and 131 0 nm

Req 18
ll Detection of defects in both transmission directions at 1310 Nm and 1550 Nm:
1: Localized discontinuities (attenuation, Fresnel reflexion .. . ) greater than 0.1 dB shall not be
accepted . The distance separating two defects greater than 0.05 dB and smaller than 0.1 dB
shall be longer than 2500m.
The section insertion loss in a direction of transmission at 1310 Nm and 1550 Nm shall not exceed
those which are defined in the attenuation balance of the link (attenuation of fibers and connectors
are included) .
5.2.3 Cable installation

Cable ways and ducts are the responsibilities of the Consortium except for Civil Works structures
(tunnels, trenches, bridges , stations .. .). The Consortium is also responsible for the installation of
cables and the operation of telecommunication systems.
Req 19
The main and backup cables shall never cross. The distance between their routes may not be
(:·:·:.·. smaller than 1Om
During the design phase, The Consortium shall coordinate with Civil Work contractors in order
to verify that all the telecommunications requirements are correctly taken into account.
Installation of cables is under the Consortium responsibility .
On each way (normal and backup) a second tube (27/33 mm minimum) shall be installed
between chambers .
Within tunnels, trenches, stations and buildings, a PEHD tube shall be laid.
Req 24
Before blowing cables, tubes shall be tested by the Consortium with the presence of the
Government's representative. The following tests shall be carried out (but not limited to)
Verification of diameter
Crush resistance with adequate gauge
Verification of leaks
Cables shall be pulled using the standard blowing technique edited by the manufacturer. The
Consortium shall illustrate the method used and gather for each section the applied traction
load . ·
The Consortium is responsible for the process of pulling cable by blowing .
Req 26
The Consortium shall ensure coordination with the Government's repre
contractors in order to prepare an installation time schedule .
Req 27

11 Within buildings, the Consortium shall provide , install and test all the equipment in technical
rooms for all telecommunication systems including but not limited to CCN , AVC, OVC, le GSM-
R, LAN I WAN WiFi, Public Address, Passenger Information Systems, Master clock, fire
detection, access control, ticketing, CCTV. All cables shall be connected to distribution frames.
Equipment shall be connected to the frame. Connections shall be made by jumpers. Technical
rooms shall be specified by The Consortium.
11 Telecommunication cables within civil works are laid by the Consortium
The Consortium is responsible for the design of the MDF, which shall be in conformity with each
type of connection .
5. 2.4 Storage conditions for the fiber reel and PEHD tube.
Optical cables and PEHD tubes shall be rolled up on not consigned reels . A protective film against
UV shall coat the reels . External and non erasable label shall equip each reel.
The storage condition of optical cables and ducts is the Consortium responsibility.
Req 28
[1. Tubes and cables reels shall be protected against UV rays during transportation and storage
before installation.

6. TECHNICAL PRINCIPLES OF TRANSMISSION NETWORK
6.1 CCN GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This chapter describes the transmission system used to transmit the data generated by all
equipment required for the operation of HHR.
it is suggested to deploy two parallel networks:
• A SOH transmission network;
• An Ethernet 10 Gig a bit transmission network.
SOH is a proven technology; it shall be dedicated to the applications requiring a high level of
reliability and operational security.
Gigabit Ethernet technology is specific to high bandwidth applications .
This transmission system shall be implemented by the Consortium unless otherwise agreed during
tender period .
6.2 GENERAL PRINCIPLES
Req 29
SOH and Ethernet Gigabit networks shall be deployed.
SOH supports the following applications:
Voice and data links between staff responsible for the operation of the running trains.
(Regulator, maintenance staff, driver, crew ... )
Remote surveillance of installations (alerts, alarms),
Remote command of signaling and power installations,
Master clock,
Passenger information,
10 Gig a bit Ethernet network supports:
Video surveillance,
Ticketing,
LAN/WAN/WIFI applications
Req 30
it: The transmission network shall be compliant with RAMS requirements . The network equipment
shall be redundant. In case of failure all communications should be switched in less than
100ms.

Following figure illustrate failure scenarios:
• Availability in case of cable cut.
Without failure cable cut
A A
B
B
Nominal operation Backup operation
NOMINAL CABLE WAY
backup way
D EQUIPMENT
• Availability in case of equipment failure on secured loop.
:·································································"·'······"··························..................................................................................................................................:
i i
i ~------~~---------------------.
i Technical site
!............. .................................................................... eq~~~~:nt eq~~~~:nt OCC
I I
Application Application
I I
Standby Stand by
i'"'''"'''''"'''"''''""'''"'''"'""'""'"'""' ""''''' ''''""''''''' equipment equipment
I
·1~.-..~ .•:::::-:~~...................................................................................................................................,............................................................ i
~' )' , (" Nominal operation
' '1/ )~ -~~"' ,<:> Equipment Failure
occ
~t-'--~''
-t··~' ~ol.' J
I
#;"\'
5,\\.Q. ............................!
!
!............................
-- pplication Application
;r..---+--------:--e-~-~!i.~_-~-~-~-t --......................................................................... .- - -e-~-~a-i~-'-l~-~-t-,

I
Re : HHR-LU-11::-'IUJ-::iY::i-UU!:l-U' I HAr r ETWORK SPECIFICATIOII I PAGE 17/23
Backup operation
Req 31
The Consortium shall be responsible for:
Architecture, configuration, dimensioning of the transmission network;
Provision, installation, connection and operational delivery of transmission equipment;
Optical circuit delivery ;
Grounding of all installed equipments and cables;
Connection to public power supply;
Acceptance testing, operational delivery ;
Commissioning , integration testing acceptance ;
Delivery of all realization documents;
Provision of equipment documentation (English) ;
Provision of documentation for Management systems (Arabic and English);
Training documentation and staff training (Arabic and English);
Maintenance documents (Arabic and English).
In order to improve security, it is recommended to install transmission and GSMR equipment in

separate rooms, buildings or shelters.
Req 32
I' CCN shall be equipped with two separate Operation Centralized Management systems. Each of
them is installed respectively in normal and standby OCC.

0
6.3 SOH TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
The following structure is a recommendation .

SOH technology allows loop architecture. 1500 nm wavelength shall be used for the SOH optical
equipment. HHR shall be equipped with:
• STM4 or STM16 Transport layer;
• STM1 Access network;
• E1 Distribution and multiplexing network providing:
o Ethernet/IP interfaces;
o Audio interface.
STM1 access shall be located as close as possible to signaling equipment.

Remark: STM4 multiplexer shall be equipped with a reserve of not greater than 30% of the useful
cards ... ....
Req 33
1., SOH equipment shall have an IP65 protection index. Should case equipment room have an
IP65 protection index (dust filtering and pressured ambient atmosphere), SOH equipment may
be only IP55.
The following scheme is a representation of the envisaged SOH network and type of connection:

• ;~-!
Typical architecture of SOH core transmission network for HHR High Speed Line
r;:::~ STM-4 ~ ~ STM-4 ~ :1 STM-4 r==1·~

:i .. I
I
1
I
~ q
Railway PlaHorm I .. ~
I I
:
1
1 Direct Fiber 622 Mbps
q r r--- t
II - - - - ~TM--<1
4
Direct Fiber- 622 Mbps

--- _ C>-- -- 3 ~ ~~· . •
----- II
Loop A orB
LoopS
I
GSM-R Base Stations
1 2 34 56 1 2 34 5 6 1 2 34 5 6
u~ ~~ ul ~ ~
Inter Locking Station Station

Sub Station
;-
111
Loops A and B shall connect all equipment except GSM-R ones which are connected through loop
S.
6.4 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION1 0 GIGABIT ETHERNET
The fol lowing structure is a recommendation .

10 Gigabit Ethernet base ZR network, shall have the same architecture as the SOH one . Used
wavelength shall be 1550nm.
The Gigabit network shall provide connections to:

Stations;
• Depots;
• Maintenance bases; ..;.·.
• Technical rooms; -··
• OCC.
Two types of equipment shall be installed:

• Optical regenerator;
• SWITCH.
Req 34
I: Gigabit equipment shall have an index of protection (IP65}. In case equipment room has an
IP65 protection index (dust filtering and pressured ambient atmosphere), SOH equipment may
be only IP55.
The following scheme is a representation of the envisaged Gigabit network and type of connection:
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-005-01 TRANSMISS ION NETWORK SPECIFICATION PAGE 21/23

\.___..
·<·:__::~i )
Typical architecture of 10 Gigabit Ethernet network for HHR High Speed Line
r;:::B: ~ 10 Gbps 1: ~ 10Gbps t::.n

:! !:
I I I I
4
I Ra. .ayPiaffoon I•
t::::j
I 1
-~
~~~~~~ ~
. ~
IV I..::I UJ-1 ;:, _)·
10 Gbps
10 Gbps
;j Switch
10 Gbps ~
tu uuuuu. ::::::~u U UJI 10Switch
Gbp~
t:::.J I I
I
~- -:J
Netwod< AdmllliSirabon
System
I Video
Ticketing Video
l LAN
J
Video
access access access
card card card
(\ ~
N N N
' Camera f Camera ! ca;;;-era
Main
Station Station Depot
Refo HHR-LO-Ti YS-005-0 1 TRANSMISSION NETWORK SPECIFICATION PAGE 22/23

7. PERFOMANCES TRANSMISSION NETWORK
7.1 RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY
The design of the network shall comply with the RAMS requirements
Basic recommendations are:
• All equipment is secured;
• Auto repair processing ;
• Redundant power feeding .
CCN is supporting Safety-critical functions and shall have ad min ima the same availability as those
functions.
CCN shall have 99.99% availability for services provided to Safety-critical functions.
7.2 SYSTEM EVOLUTION
Req 36
ll The transmission network shall be adaptable in terms of capacity and services. Future services
and functionalities of the transportation system shall be supported by the CCN without major
modification.
Req 37
t; Minor adaptations and evolution shall be realized without on site manufacturer intervention.

PHASE 2
LAN / WAN / WIFI SPECIFICATION
H H R - L 0 - T E - 4 0 3 - S Y S - 0 0 6 - D 1
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
APPROVAL / REVISION RECORD SHEET
REVISION DATE SUBJECT OF ISSUE / REVISION AUTHOR
A1 01/04/09 Creation D. CHRISTIEN
A2 10/04/09 Internal review D. CHRISTIEN
A3 14/04/2009 Review before validation D. CHRISTIEN
A4 17/04/2009 Syntax review D. CHRISTIEN
B1 02/06/2009 Final version D. CHRISTIEN
C1 29/06/2009 Final RFP D. CHRISTIEN
D1 11/09/2009 Review according Linklaters’s comments D. CHRISTIEN
PREPARED BY D. CHRISTIEN 11/09/2009
11/09/2009
CHECKED BY S.PETROFF
11/09/2009
11/09/2009
Ref: HHR-L0-TE-403-SYS-006-D1 LAN / WAN /WIFI SPECIFICATION PAGE 2/15

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 5
2. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................ 6
3. SCOPE OF WORK......................................................................................................................................... 7
4. LAN/WAN & WI-FI FUNCTIONALITIES .................................................................................................... 8

4.1 TYPOLOGY OF SITES AND APPLICATIONS .......................................................................................................... 9
4.1.1 LAN/WAN & Wi-Fi in OCC (main and back-up) .................................................................................... 9
4.1.2 LAN/WAN & Wi-Fi in Maintenance workshops ................................................................................... 10
4.1.3 LAN/WAN & Wi-Fi in depot .................................................................................................................... 10
4.1.4 LAN/WAN & Wi-Fi in station .................................................................................................................. 11
4.2 LAN/WAN & WI-FI PERFORMANCES .................................................................................................................. 12
4.2.1 Resilience and availability ...................................................................................................................... 12
4.2.2 Priority management............................................................................................................................... 12
4.2.3 Upgradeability .......................................................................................................................................... 12
4.2.4 Documentation ........................................................................................................................................ 12
4.2.5 Security ..................................................................................................................................................... 12
5. TECHNICAL PRINCIPLES OF THE LAN/WAN & WI-FI ....................................................................... 13
5.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................... 13
5.2 SUPERVISION SYSTEM ..................................................................................................................................... 13
5.3 INTERFACES .................................................................................................................................................... 14
5.3.1 Interfaces with other telecom and signalling systems ....................................................................... 14
5.3.2 Interfaces with the Saudi Telecom Company (STC).......................................................................... 15

PROJECT REFERENCES

1 HHR-L0-CT-602-SYS-002 General specifications Section 2: Glossary
2 HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 Rams Assurance Requirements

1. GLOSSARY
Refer to document ref HHR-L0-CT-602-SYS-002 – General specifications – section 2 : Glossary.

2. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the functional specifications and the technical constraints for the
implementation of the Local Area Network (LAN)/Wide Area Network (WAN) and Wireless
LAN/WAN (Wi-Fi) for the HHR project.
Chapter 4 below describes the functional requirements and the area to be covered by the
LAN/WAN & Wi-Fi systems and the performances to be achieved.
Chapter 5 below describes the technical constraints, the design choice and the interfaces
requirements.

3. SCOPE OF WORK
This document describes the requirements applicable to the LAN, WAN and WiFi systems IP
networks that the Consortium shall have to comply with.

4. LAN/WAN & WI-FI FUNCTIONALITIES
A Local Area Network/Wide Area Network shall be proposed by the Consortium in order to provide
communication services, based on IP protocol, inside the HHR buildings.
Req 01
A Fixed and Wireless Local Area Network shall be proposed by the Consortium in order to
provide communication services, based on IP protocol, inside and outside the HHR buildings.
Req 02
All the work stations shall be equipped with an Ethernet access.
The basic function of the LAN/WAN & Wi-Fi is to offer network access and transmission capacity in
the various HHR sites, to IP applications which shall apply to the following sub-systems including
but not limited to:
On track equipment:
o Signaling ;
o Hot box detectors;
o Wind detectors;
o ….
Communication system:
o Administrative voice communication system;
o Railway communication system;
o VoIP;
o ...
OCC applications :
o Supervision (Core network, GSM-R).
Building applications :
o Building security (Access control) ;
o CCTV;
o Public Address ;
o Passenger Information System;
o Ticketing System;
o Master Clock;
o Fire detection;
o ...
Req 03
The LAN/WAN & Wi-Fi shall supply network access and transmission capacity to its own
supervision.

Req 04
The Consortium shall install an onboard WiFi network providing passengers with the possibility
to connect to Internet along the HHR line. The Consortium shall give a detailed description of
the WiFi network architecture and explain how to ensure high data rate transmission in a
running train (300 km/h).
Req 05
The Consortium shall describe the security system used in the LAN/WAN & Wi-Fi systems, to
guarantee the confidentiality and integrity of transmitted data.
Req 06
The administrative IP network shall be connected to external links mainly for Internet access. It
shall be physically separated from the railway IP network dedicated to the railway's applications
and technical maintenance. Doing so, access to this second IP network from outside shall not
be possible. The IP architecture to be proposed by the Consortium shall comply with this
requirement.
4.1 TYPOLOGY OF SITES AND APPLICATIONS
Req 07
The LAN/WAN and the Wi-Fi shall comprise access in the following site types:
OCC;
Maintenance workshops;
Depots;
Passenger Station buildings and platforms.
4.1.1 LAN/WAN & WI-FI IN OCC (MAIN AND BACK-UP)
Req 08
The LAN/WAN shall provide the transmission needs inside the OCC buildings for the following
subsystems:
Signaling;
Core network supervision;
GSM-R network supervision ;
Ethernet applications: Intranet, Internet…;
Administrative Voice Communication System (for VoIP lines);
Railway communication system;
Building security (Access Control);
CCTV;
Public Address;
Passenger Information System;
Ticketing System;
Master Clock;
SCADA;
Fire detection.
The Wi-Fi shall provide the transmission needs inside the OCC buildings for the following
subsystems:
Ethernet applications: Intranet, Internet…

4.1.2 LAN/WAN & WI-FI IN MAINTENANCE WORKSHOPS
Req 09
The LAN/WAN shall provide the transmission needs inside the maintenance workshop buildings for
the following subsystems:
Building security;
CCTV;
Master Clock;
SCADA ;
Access control.
The Wi-Fi shall provide the transmission needs inside the maintenance shop buildings for the
following subsystems:
Ethernet applications: Intranet…;
VoIP.
4.1.3 LAN/WAN & WI-FI IN DEPOT
Req 10
The LAN/WAN shall ensure the transmission needs inside the offices of the following subsystems:
Building security;
CCTV;
Master Clock;
Scada ;
Access control ;
The Wi-Fi shall ensure the transmission needs inside the offices of the following subsystems:
Ethernet applications: Intranet…;
Others: File download / upload between train and ground, message exchange for train
preparation…;
VoIP.

4.1.4 LAN/WAN & WI-FI IN STATION
Req 11
The LAN/WAN shall provide the transmission needs inside the stations for the following
subsystems:
Building security (access control);
CCTV;
Public Address;
Ticketing System;
Master Clock;
CCTV Recorder;
Scada ;
Fire detection.
The Wi-Fi shall provide the transmission needs inside the station for the following subsystems:
Ethernet applications: Intranet…
Wi-Fi access for passengers and VoIP communications;
Others: File download/upload between train and trackside, message exchange for train
preparation …

4.2 LAN/WAN & WI-FI PERFORMANCES
4.2.1 RESILIENCE AND AVAILABILITY
The LAN/WAN is basically designed to serve the applications installed inside the HHR sites.
Req 12
The requested availability for the LAN/WAN systems shall be the availability required for the
safety-critical functions (see ref n°2).
For example, if the supervision of the network uses the OCC LAN, the required availability shall be
as good as the best one among the whole signaling system.
4.2.2 PRIORITY MANAGEMENT

On the IP network, an operator must be able to allocate a priority to an application and manage
the quality of service in case of congestion.
Req 13
The Consortium shall define an IP network architecture where a priority can be allocated to an
application. In case of traffic congestion, a high quality of service must be guaranteed to the first
priority applications.
4.2.3 UPGRADEABILITY
Bearing in mind all the existing and foreseeable needs, the LAN/WAN & Wi-Fi system shall
provide the better adapted solutions for short, medium and long term needs.
Req 14
The LAN/WAN & Wi-Fi architecture shall allow for easy configuration modification (addition or
removal of a node, of access points …) without the assistance of the manufacturer.
4.2.4 DOCUMENTATION
Req 15
The LAN/WAN & Wi-Fi operation and maintenance documentation shall be in both English and
Arabic languages.
Req 16
All the documentation shall be available in electronic format.
It is requested that documentation be also made available through a Web site.
4.2.5 SECURITY
Req 17
The Consortium shall describe the technical solution proposed for the network security and the
interaction of security devices with the system architecture (firewall, anti hackers, …).

5. TECHNICAL PRINCIPLES OF THE LAN/WAN & WI-FI
5.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Req 18
The LAN/WAN & Wi-Fi shall be based on standard Ethernet systems. The components shall
accept the address under IPv4 and IPv6 format.
The scheme below is given as an example, but alternative architecture could be proposed by the
Consortium, taking into account the requirements and the equipment proposed.
5.2 SUPERVISION SYSTEM
Req 19
The operation and administration of the LAN/WAN & Wi-Fi shall be performed in the operating
OCC building.
Req 20
According to circumstances, the operation and the administration of the LAN/WAN & WiFi will
be performed in the back-up OCC that shall be the exact copy of the main OCC.

Req 21
The Supervision System shall manage all the LAN/WAN & Wi-Fi equipment performing the
following actions:
Supervising of the status of all the components.
Analyzing alarms and taking the required measures.
Managing the system modifications.
Coordinating the software upgrading.
Any failure of any element of the LAN/WAN & Wi-Fi equipment shall be reported without delay to
the Supervision centre. Alarm events from any system component shall hence be gathered,
classified and logged.
The supervision protocol shall be open and standard, as per example SNMP.
5.3 INTERFACES
5.3.1 INTERFACES WITH OTHER TELECOM AND SIGNALLING SYSTEMS

The purpose of this paragraph is to fix the limits of the LAN/WAN & Wi-Fi systems.
The LAN/WAN is potentially interfaced with the following systems:
Core Communication Network;
Signaling;
Administrative voice communication system;
Intranet and Internet applications;
Building security;
CCTV;
Public Address;
Ticketing System;
Master Clock ;
SCADA.
Access control centre.

In all sites, the LAN/WAN & Wi-Fi systems are interfaced with the Core network, which transports
the data flows between locations. The connections with the Core network shall be done in
technical rooms, at the Main Distribution Frame level. It is the responsibility of the Consortium to
produce a design of the WAN & Wi-Fi systems that shall comply with the standard of each type of
link.

Req 22
The LAN / WAN interfaces shall conform to an Ethernet standard such as 10BT, 100BT, Gigabit
Ethernet…
5.3.2 INTERFACES WITH THE SAUDI TELECOM COMPANY (STC)

In order to be able to communicate with the Internet network, interfaces are needed with the STC
as Internet Service Provider.
As interfaces with STC for the Automatic Voice Communication shall be installed at PABX
locations, it can be anticipated that Internet interfaces may be located at the same place.
Req 23
The interface with the STC Internet Service Provider shall be located at the same place as the
PABX interfaces with the STC public telephone network.
Req 24
The interface with the STC shall be either of Fast Ethernet type or of Gigabit Ethernet type,
depending on the sites. Both options shall be quoted by the Consortium.
Req 25
The Consortium shall provide, install, test and commission all components in technical rooms
for all telecommunication systems including CCN, AVC, OVC, le GSM-R, LAN / WAN WiFi,
Public Address, Passenger Information Systems, Master clock, fire detection, access control,
ticketing, CCTV. The Consortium shall be responsible for all LAN/WAN/WIFI works whether
herein specified or not. All cables shall be connected to distribution frames. Equipment shall be
connected to the frame. Connections shall be made by jumpers. Technical rooms shall be
specified by the Consortium.
Telecommunication cables shall be laid by the Consortium
The Consortium shall install LAN/WAN & WiFi “active” equipment, inside delivered civil works.
As documented in the general contract conditions, the Consortium shall coordinate with the
Route Civil Works and stations contractors for commissioning.

(?~
....- -~-"'! 8,} :ld~ l bg.b:¥1 i:ic U:::.ll Ci..u.wJ g.bl
SAUD I RA ILWA YS ORGAN IZATION

PHASE 2
RAILWAY TELECOMMUNICATION
SPECIFICATION
IN ASSOC IATION WITH AXELCIUM

RAILWAY TELECOMMUNICATION SPECIFICATION
A1 20/02/2009 First issue JM. Porte
A2 14/04/2009 Review before validation JM. Porte
A3 17/04/2009 Language review JM. Porte
A4 21/04/2009 English language review G.DAVIES
91 02/06/2009 Final version D. Christien
D1 11/09/2009 Review according Linkelaters's comments D. Christien
PREPARED BY JM. PORTE

11/09/2009 c
CHECKED BY S.PETROFF
11/09/2009
(
o\_.
11/09/2009
VALIDATED BY G.NORMAND ~I)
11/09/2009 ~ ./~
APPROVED BY C.SCHANG ~~
~~ ;:::;""
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-007-0 1 Railway lelecommunicalion specification PAGE 2114

(-.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 5
2. SCOPE OF WORK ......................................................................................................................................... 6
3. OPERATIONNAL COMMUNICATION ....................................................................................................... 7
3.1 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT OPERATOR ..... ... .. ............... .......... ...... .. ... ...... .. ... ... ..... ....... .. ... ..... ... ....... ...... ....... ....... .. 7
3.2 ENERGY MANAGEMENT OPERATOR .... .. ..... ....... .. ......... ............ ... .. ............ ........ .... ...... .. .. .. .. ... ..... ................ ..... . 7
3.3 ALARM ENERGY PROCES S .... .... ... ........ ..... .. ... .. ..... ... ...... ...... ..... ... ..... ..... .... .. .. ...... .. ....... ............. ....... .... ..... .. ..... 8
4. OVC SWITCH ................................................................................................................................................. 9
4 .1 SUBSCRIBER LINE INTERFACE ... .... ..... .... ...... .... ... ..... ...... ....... ........ ...... ....... .. .... .... .... ... ........ ... .... ..... ........ ........ . 9
4 .2 FACILITIES ... ....... ...... ..... .......... ... ... .. .. .... .. ... ... .. ... ... ... .. .... ........ .......... ....... .... .... ..... ....... .. ...... .... ...... ....... ............ . 9
4.3 FACILITIES .. ... .. .... ... ...... ........ .... .. ... .. .... .. ... ..... ... .. .. .. ... .... .. ... ...... .... .... ... .......... ........... ...... ... ....... ..... .. ...... ... . ...... 10
5. TELEPHONES .............................................................................................................................................. 11
5.1 TRACK EMERGENCY PHONES .. ......... ......... ... ..... ..... ... ......... ... .. ..... ... ... .... ....... ...... ....... ...... ... .. .... .... .. ...... .... ..... 11
5.2 INDOOR EMERGENCY PHONES ..... ... .. .. ....... ..... .... ... ..... .... .... ..... ....... ..... ... .. .. ........... .... ...... .... .. .......... ... .... ....... . 11
6. MAINTENANCE VOICE COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................ 12

7. RELIABILITY, AVAILABILITY ................................................................................................................... 13
8. OPERATION ET MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................. 14
8.1 MAINTENAN CE SPECIFICATIONS ...... .. ........ ... ...... .... ........... ..... .............. ....... ....... ... ... ... .... ........ ......... .......... .... 14
8.2 DOCUMENTATION ........ ... ...... ..... ..... ..... ... .... ... ....... ....... ......... ......... ...... ... .... .. ...... .. ...... ........ .. .. .... .... .... .. ..... .. ... 14
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-40 3-SYS-007-D 1 Railway teleco mmunication specificati on PAG E 3/1 4

PROJECT REFERENCES

1 HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-002 General Specifications Section 2: Glossary
2 H HR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 Rams Assurance Requirements
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-007 -01 Railway telecommunication specification PAGE 4/14

1. GLOSSARY
Refer to document HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-002 General Specifications Section 2: Glossary
·~. ·,:,.'
Ref : HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-007-01 Railway telecommunication specification PAGE 5/1 4

2. SCOPE OF WORK
This document describes the Operation Voice Communication (OVC) system designed to support
operational communication of the HHR.
The OCC hosts operators in charge of traffic management, power supply management and
supervision of the installation.
Operators communicate with HHR staff by means of:
• A dedicated, fixed, voice switch ing network, offering an intercom interface (instantaneous
connection , hand free communication),
• The GSM-R network which communicates with trains and fixed emergency phones located
along the tracks,
• AVC interconnection.
The operator desk shall be equipped with dedicated human-machine interface providing hands free
communication, dynamic line identification and a touch sensitive screen.
Desks and communication links are connected through a dedicated switchboard .
The OVC network shall be composed of three types of links (or circuits):
• Voice communication links for traffic management, with signaling equipment rooms, train crew
etc
• Voice communication links for power supply management and power supply equipment rooms,
as wel l as power supply alarms.
• Voice communication (permanent circuit) links for maintenance purposes , specifically identified
by different technical domains. (e.g telecom, power, signaling etc).
Any reference or requirement regarding platform screen doors must be ignored.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-007 -01 Railway telecommunication specification PAGE 6/ 14

3. OPERATIONNAL COMMUNICATION
The HHR line shall be divided into several control sectors also referred to as operation sectors.
During peak traffic periods , operators shall share the management of the line. During off-peak
periods the management of the entire line shall be handled by one operator. Usually two types of
sectors shall be considered:
• The Traffic Control Sector - for train route management, also referred to as the Traffic Calling
Sector for GSMR operation,
• The Power Supply Control Sector - for power supply management, also referred to as the
Power Supply Calling Sector for GSMR operation. The same approach is used for the Power
Supply Alarm Sector.
Sectors are divided up into sections, this is important because , for instance , sectors must be able
to locate trains by sections e.g. Local Call ing Sector for GSMR operation.
·~· ·._.
Req 01
Ill the OVC network shall divide the line into control sectors according to specified periods of time (by hour,
day, week etc).
3.1 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT OPERATOR
Voice communications shall be provided between the Traffic Management Operator and:
• Other operators in the OCC,
• Staff in charge of station operations,
• Maintenance staff working in the field for signa ling purposes,
• Emergency phones located along the track, or inside of buildings/shelters dedicated to traffic
operation,
• Staff located in depots and workshops .
3.2 POWER SUPPLY MANAGEMENT OPERATOR
Voice communications shall be provided between the Power Supply Management Operator and :
• Other operators in OCC,
• Maintenance staff working in substations and power supply buildings.
• Maintenance staff working along the tracks ,
• Staff loca ted in depots and workshop s.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-007-01 Railway telecommunication specification PAGE 7/14

3.3 POWER SUPPLY ALARM PROCESS
This type of communication shall be activated in cases of emergencies or severe incidents. The
communication shall link to the Power Management Operator. All emergency phones along tracks
and located in buildings, shelter etc, shall be equipped with a Power Supply Alarm.
-007-01 Railway telecommunication specification PAGE 8/14

4. OVC SWITCH
The Consortium may choose another solution that provides a dedicated switch for each type of
control (ie. Power and Traffic) instead of one switch for all OVC communications, if they think it is
appropriate.
Req 02
111: Operators shall be equipped with a state of the art desk and human-machine interface.
Req 03
11 The Consortium shall justify the number of desks installed for each type of management.
Req 04
11 The OVC switch shall be connected with S2 links to the MSC (GSMR).
The OVC network shall provide the following facilities and interfaces:
4.1 SUBSCRIBER LINE INTERFACE
• Local and central battery,
• SO,
• lP,
• Intercommunication type,
• Direct line .
4.2 FACILITIES
• Call Transfer,
• Over numbering ,
• Flashing,
• Conference calling ,
• Direct line call forwarding,
• Hold a line (put a line on hold),
• Automatic testing of outside phones,
• Traffic observation,
• Voice recording communication for direct lin es .
Ref : HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-007-01 Railway lelecommunication specification

4.3 FUNCTIONALITIES
Networks and switches shall provide means of managing communications through scenarios
defined by operational procedures.
Scenarios shall be defined in accordance with each of the following:
• A set of lines identified by their geographical location and by the operational fu nction (traffic,
power, supervision , maintenance etc) that they support.
• A set of operator desks, able to handle all the communications in relation to functions
undertaken.
• The geographical sectors and all associated functions .
• A predefined association between a function, a geographical sector and a desk.
The system shall manage the scenario changes through a dedicated position or automatically
according to a remote command .
Management of communications shall be based on predefined scenarios
Req 06
The OVC network shall provide remote maintenance facilities:
11 Remote loading of Track Emergency Phones (TEP) configuration , and software updates
Ill Remote periodic testing
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-007-01 Railway telecommunication specificalion P AGE 10/14

5. TELEPHONES
5.1 TRACKSIDE EMERGENCY PHONES
Dedicated emergency phones shall be installed along the tracks (Track Emergency Phones -TEP) ,
each TEP shall
• be equipped with two calling buttons ; one for the power supply alarm functions , one for traffic
functions ,
• transmit communication via GSMR or through a CCN (fiber optic connection)- an lP interface is
strongly recommended
• permit hands free communication
• include anti vandalism packaging
~.-. ·-:- .;
• be suited to the specific atmospheric/environmental cond itions and legal regulations
(temperature , sand , dust, wind, legal rules) of Saudi Arabia
• include solar energy powering ,
• include automatic remote acoustic testing facilities
Req 07
1£ Each TEP shall be connected through GSMR and have two predefined voice communication
circuits to the OCC - one, a power supply alarm, the other for traffic management
Req 08
liE' Each TEP shall be powered by solar cells and operate 'hands free'
Req 09
lr Each TEP shall be contained in anti vandalism packaging , have IP65 protection and include
functionality for remote testing of the acoustic quality.
5.2 INDOOR EMERGENCY PHONES
Indoor Emergency Phones will be located near fi xed technical equipment or inside shelters or
technical rooms . Voice communication shall be set up via a push button or by simply lifting the
phone off the hook. The interface is Ethernet I lP .
The power supply to the phones shall be secure .
Req 10
11: Inside Emergency Phones shall have an Ethernet/IP interface and their power supply shall be
secure (battery).
Ref: HH R- LO-TE -4 03-SYS-0 07-0 1 Railway telecommu nicati on specification

RAILWAY TELECOMMUNICATION SP ECIFICATION
6. MAINTENANCE VOICE COMMUNICATIONS
For maintenance purposes , voice communication between "on the field" staff and the OCC, or
other maintenance technicians, shall be arranged to facilitate preventative maintenance as well as
maintenance to rectify faults.
Each discipline (telecom, signaling and power) will have its own intercom facility (hands free, full
duplex). The Consortium shall provide an ergonomic system of voice communication to handle this
type of functiona l communication inside all buildings and equipment rooms.
According to the operational sectors (which are disaggregated geographically), the maintenance
circuits shall support an unlimited number of people on the call and an unlimited conversation
duration.
Req 11
I[ Each building and technical room shall be equipped with dedicated voice communication
access for maintenance purposes.
Req 12
I[ For each discipline a separate voice communication socket or intercom shall be provided.
Req 13
11: Sectors (Power and Traffic) that share management of sections shall communications
accordingly
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-007 -D1 Railway telecommunication specification PAGE 12/14

7. RELIABILITY, AVAILABILITY
Refer document HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001 Functional Specifications for Telecommunications
Ref : HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-007-01 Railway telecommunication specification PAGE 13/1 4

8. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
8.1 MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
The Consortium shall provide the maintenance specification .

The following items shall be within the scope:
• Maintenance level
• Supervision level
• Management level
o Availability
o Reliability
o Development and adaptation
Req 14
11 The proposed maintenance organization and reports shall comply with RAMS requirements and
targets.
All identified defects, failu res and faults shall be indicated I displayed locally and remotely to the
Supervision Centre.
Sophisticated maintenance and repair software shall be provided .
8.2 DOCUMENTATION
Req 15
The following documentation shall be provided
E System documentation
I. Installation and testing documentation
ll Operation and maintenance documentation
Refer to document HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001 Functional Specifications for Telecommunications for

the requirements.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-007 -01 Railway telecommunication specification P AGE 14/14

~:::J:,~~I.b~ Ciol.c.ll Ci.wmg.bl

PHASE 2
ADMINISTRATIVE TELECOMMUNICATION
SPECIFICATION

ADMINISTRATIVE TELECOMMUNICATION SPECIFICATION
A1 22/04/2009 English language review G.GODDING
B1 02/06/2009 Final version D. Christien
C1 29/06/2009 Final RFP D. Christien ....3

D1 11/09/2009 Review according Linklaters's comments D. Christien
~
11/09/2009
PREPARED BY D. CHRISTIEN
c~
11/09/2009
CHECKED BY S.PETROFF (
11/09/2009
ffl
11/09/2009
~
---
~_.;;;;--
:;;:?"
--- -
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-008-01 Administrative Telecommunication specification PAGE 2/9

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................ 5
2. SCOPE OF WORK ......................................................................................................................................... 6
3. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 7
4. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ................................................................................... ........................................... 8
4.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS ..... .. ............... ....... .................................. ................ ..... ........ ..... .......................... .......... . 8
··.;;::-·:·, 4.2SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ... ... ........ ...... ...... ....... ...... ......... ... .. ....... ............................. ........................................... 8
·.•.•.•.•
4.3FACILITIES .. ....... ................................................................. ...... ........ ......... .......... ..... ...... ... .......... ........ .......... ..... 8
4.41NSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ........... ..... .......... .................... ....... ... .... ... .................... .. .... .. .. ... 8
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-008-0 1 Administrative Telecommunication specification

PROJECT REFERENCES

1 HH R-LO-CT-602-SYS-002 General Specifications Section 2: Glossary
2 HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 Rams Assurance Requiremen ts

1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the functional specifications and the technical constraints for the design
and implementation of the Administrative Voice Communication (AVC) system for the HHR project.
, ......
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-008-01 Administra tive Telecommunication specification PAGE 5/9

2. SCOPE OF WORK
The Consortium shall design and install a standard, but state of the art, administrative
telecommunication network for the whole HHR Company aimed at providing non operational
communication inside and outside the company.
The AVC network provides telephone lines and facilities to:

• HHR operating employees;
• Administrative employees;
• Maintenance staff.
AVC telephone lines shall be provided in the following sites:

• OCC (main and back-up) operators work stations;
• HHR administrative employees work stations;
• HHR offices in stations;
• Depot;
• Maintenance base;
• Supervision centre;
• Other administrative offices ;
• Emergency Room;
• Technical rooms .
The AVC network shall be connected to:

• Railway telecommunication system .
• GSM-R network.
• SAUDI Public Switched Telecommunication Network (PSTN).

3.GLOSSARY
Refer to document HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-002 General Specifications Section 2: Glossary
!.;:.;.•..•.
.... ~
··~·
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-008-0 1 Administrative Telecommunication specification

ADMINISTRATIVE TELECOMMUNICATION SPEC IFICATION
4. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
4.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
The AVC network is lP based and is composed of:

• Call manager server
• lP telephone sets (powered by LAN over PoE standard)
• Unified messaging server (voice , internet, tax)
• Fax server
• Interface server with PSTN (CCITT no?) and CCN .
IReq 01
AVC components shall be lP based
4 .2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
In addition to the principle of the redundant OCC (both OCC are identically equipped), the
Consortium shall design the AVC to comply with a high level of availability.
OVC architecture shall provide a 99, 99% of availability.
The AVC shall be connected to the SAUDI PSTN in two different sites and to two different public
switches .
A redundant connection to Saudi Telco shall be provided
4 .3 FACILITIES
• Remote logging faci lity;

• Call answering: Calling party indication, ringing choices, call forwarding ... ;
• Call management: conference mode, hold mode, transfer, double call , and group call
management with one unique number;
• Call monitoring: call blocking, direct transfer to voice mail, called party indication, monitoring,
busy lines monitoring;
• Mobility: handset SMS reception for call or voice mail notification , divert calls (always, when
busy, not re c able, no reply);
lJ ..... ,.
• . ~~r functioiie@ : automatic call back, speed dialing, hands free, click to dial (direct dial
j ~.m Outloo'K};-,:0
':~ .~..~ ortin~: al tivl! }' ~ rt (number of incoming I outgoing calls) .
~.
) t
,,,, '
\
~ .~
~-- f"'D
.~ ' .~ a:- I
~~ATIO~~~· .RATION AND MAINTENANCE
..,. ""~ /.'"
PAGE 8/9
• Telephone sets are powered over the Ethernet network. The system shall provide plug and
play installation as well as remote configuration ;
• Alarms are transmitted to the supervision centre;
• Operation and management of the AVC network shall be handled from the
Telecommunication supervision centre where an ergonomic human machine interface shall be
provided;
• All management tools shall be provided for the management of all components (traffic
management and statistics, load measurements ... ) including the unified messaging facilities;
• All maintenance software shall be provided including those providing performances and
Quality of Service indicators .
.·-:·
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-008-0 1 Administra tive Telecommu nication specification PAGE 9/9

PHASE 2
CCTV SPECIFICATION

CLOSED CIRCUIT TELE-VISION
A1 21/3/2009 First Issue S.FRELAT
A2 20/4/2009 Internal review S.FR ELAT
A3 22/04/2009 Language review G.GODD ING
A4 24/04/2009 Minor modifications S.FRELAT
B1 02/06/2009 Final version D.CHRISTIEN
C1 29/06/2009 Final RFP D.CHRISTIEN
01 11/09/2009 Review according Linklaters's comment D.CHRISTIEN
REVISION W : D1 NAME DATE SIGNATURE
--
11/09/2009
PREPARED BY D.CHRISTIEN ~¥;.
.t\;o~---
11 /09/2009
CH ECKED BY S.PETROFF
11 /09/2009
VALIDATED BY G.NORMAND ·~
11/09/2009
~ ~
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-009-0 1 Closed Circuit Tele-Vision P AGE 2/19

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 5
2. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................ 6
3. FUNCTIONAL PRINCIPLES OF THE CCTV SYSTEM ........................................................................... 7
3 .1 GENERAL INFORMATION ........ ......................... ............. ... .................... ..... ...... ........ .............. ........ .. ......... .. ..... ... . 7
3 .2VIDEO COVERAGE ... ...... ............................ .. .... .. .... ....... .... .... .. .... ... .................................. ..... ... .. ........... .. ...... .. .... 7
3 .3FUNCTIONS .......... ... .... ..... ............ .... ..... .. ... ... .. .. ... ....... ..... ...... ... ... .... ... ...... ...... .... ...... ... .... .... ...... ... .... .. .. ... ... .. ..... 7
3.4ARCHITECTURE .... .. ............. ... .... ..... ..... ....... .... .. .. .. ... ........ ...... ....... .... .. ........ ... .... .. ... .... .. .. .. .... ... .... ... ... ..... ........... 7
4. THE CCTV SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................... 10

4 .1 MAIN AND BACKUP OCC .... .. ... ..... ...... .. .. .. ...... .. ... ........... ... ..... ... ... ... .. ... .... .......... ... ... ... ... ......... .... .. .... ........ .... .. . 10
4.2COVERED AREAS .............. ...... ..... ....... ................................... .. ..................... .............. .. ................. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. ... 10
4.2.1 General information ...... .... ... .. .. ...... ... .. ... .... ... .......... ....... ....... ........... ... ..................... ..... ................. ......... 10
4.2.2 occ .......................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.3 Platforms ................ .. .... ... .... ... ... ... .... ... ... ..... ... ................. .. ... .. ..... ......... .. ... .. .... .. .. .....................................10
4.2.4 Onboard...... ...... ..... ... ...................... .. ..... .... ... ......... ... .... ..... ................. .. .. ... ...... .. ... ......... .......... .. ....... .... .... 10
4 .31MAGE IDENTIFI CATION ............ .. ........... ... ...................... ................... .. ..... ..... .. .. ...... ..... ... ... ................. .. .. ... .. .... 10
4.4RECORDING .... ....... ... .. ....... ..... ....... ..... ... ... ......... ....... ....... ............ .. ....... ... ..... .. ... .. ............... ......... .......... .......... 10
4.51MAGES MONITORING .. .... ... ...... ... ... ..... .. .. ..... .. ........ .. .... .. ... .... .. ... ... .. ......... .. .. ... ....... .. ....... ... ....... ... ........... ...... ... 11
4 .6SPECIFIC FUNCTIONALITIES .. ..... .... ... .. .. ... .. .... .... ... ...... ... ....... .. .... .. ...... .... ................ ... ... .... .. .... .. ... .... ... ...... ... ... . 11
4 .7ALARM TRAN SFER ... .... ..... .. .. ........ .. .... ... .. ... .... ... ... .... .... .. .... .. ... ... .... .. .. ... .... ... ... .... ..... ......... ..... ......... ... ...... .. .. .... 12
4 .8SECURED POWER SUPPLY ............. ........... .... ... .... .. ........ ...... .. .... ... ..... ...... ... .. .. ..... .. ....... ...... ................. .... .. .. .... 12
5. COMPONENTS OF THE CCTV SYSTEM ............................................................................................... 13

5 .1 AT THE OCC ........ ... .. .... ........... .. .... .. ... ..... .... .. ...... .... .. .. ............ .. ... ..... .. ... .... ... .. ..... ........ ...... ... .. .. ... .. .............. ..... 13
5 .21N THE STATION ........................ .. ...... ...... .. .... ..... ................... .. .............. ............ .. .... ............... .... ..... .... .. .. ... ... .... 13
5 .31N THE TU NNEL ............ .. ................. ..... .... ... ........ ... ..... ... ......... ... ...... ...... .. ....... .... ..... .............. .. .............. ........... 14
5.4AT THE DEPOT & MAINTENANCE BASE ................. .. .... .. ..... .............. ...... .. ... .. .. .. .. .... .... .. .. ......... ..... ............ .... .... 14
5 .5AROUND THE TRACKS ...... ... ... ...... ............ ......... ........ .. ................................................. ..... ............................... 14
5 .60NBOARD .............. .... ... ... ... ..... .... ........ .. ....... ........... ...... ... .... .. ..... ... ........ ..... .......... .. ..... ... ......... ... ... ..... ...... ....... 14
6. EQUIPMENT DETAIL .................................................................................................................................. IS

6.1 RECORDING SYSTEMS .......... ..... ........... ... .. ..... .. .. .... ... .... ... ............ ............ .... ... ...... ... .. ...... ....................... .. ...... 15
6.2MONITORS .. .... .... ....... .. ...... .... ..... ........ .... .... ............ ... ... .. ....... .. .... .. : ...... .. ... ....... ....... .. .. .............................. .. ..... 15
6 .3CAMERAS .................. ...... ................ ... .... .. .. .. .. ..... ......... ... ........... .... ........................ .. ... .... .......... .... .. ..... .. .. .. ...... 15
7. INTERFACES ............................................................................................................................................... 17
8. PERFORMANCE, IN STALLATION , OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ........................................ 18
9.
PAGE 3/19
PROJECT REFERENCES
1 HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-002 General specifications Section 2: Glossary
····"'
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-009-01 Closed Circuit Tele-Vision

1. GLOSSARY
••11!•
PAGE 5/19
2. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the specifications of a Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) system applying
to the HHR project.
·· : ,'11
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-009-01 Closed Circuit Tele-Vision

3. FUNCTIONAL PRINCIPLES OF THE CCTV SYSTEM
3.1 GENERAL INFORMATION
The CCTV system is intended to monitor the whole railway line (stations, trains , depots .. . ) with
cameras and shall allow the operators:
• To prevent any incident with efficient monitoring (specific areas)

• To manage an emergency issue by a direct visualization of events (management of evacuation ,
management of first-aid workers .. .)
The images given by platforms cameras are shown on the monitors placed at the extremity of each
platform to be made visible to the train driver.
The Operation Control Centre (OCC) operator is capable of controlling and commanding these
cameras . The same functionality is available from the Station Managers' office .
3.2 VIDEO COVERAGE
The CCTV system shall cover:

• All platform areas , all stations and all public places (waiting rooms .. .), as well as the depots in
real time ;
• The images of coaches including gangways (between coaches) shall be visualized by train crew
and recorded on-board.
• Upon a request by the operator, records can be transferred to the station or the depot.
Images and the records shall be made available to:

• The OCC ;
• The Station Managers' office.
3.3 FUNCTIONS
The CCTV system shall allow the monitoring of all the areas where passengers are located
All the images shall be recorded with time-stamping and stored over one 30 days period.
The CCTV system shall be designed to avoid loss of monitoring in the stations , in the protected
accesses, on the platforms , in the train , in the working areas, the depot. .. .
The CCTV system shall allow the operator to choose the images to be visualized on his control
screens coming from any camera in a station . The CCTV control terminal shall provide for the
following possibilities:
• Camera identification ,
• Cyclic sweeping of areas ,
• Number of images per screen ,
• Recording .
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-40 3-SYS-009-0 1 Closed Circuit Tele-Vision P AGE 7/19

The proposed CCTV architecture is shown below.
M.o.nOCC
Redundancy
LDCOICO"""' (ponrq
""-'doors I« )
Sor.onciaryOCC
r .•.·.·.. This llthlectur• "'" be !he same

lor allht &lallons
Otpo4 I Malnte""'oe CCTV IY$1tm
ACS
l!yllem
SCADA
UPS•ystim
The CCTV system shall be made of:
At the OCC:
• A CCTV system management terminal,

• Monitoring screens,
• A screen-wall aiming to monitor multiple areas simultaneously,
• Cameras;
• Switches;
• Redundant video recorders .
At the monitoring office of each station:
• A CCTV system management terminal,

• A monitoring screen .
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-009-01 Closed Circuit Tele-Vision PAGE 8/19

CLOSED CIRCUIT TELE·VISION
At the stations:
• Cameras;
• Video recorders;
• lP Switches;
• Monitors at the extremities of the platform, for the train driver to mon itor the platform from his
cab.
At the depot and maintenance depot:
• A CCTV system management terminal ,

• A Control monitor,
• Cameras;
• lP Switches;
• Video recorders.
The following equipment shall be located in the technical air-conditioned rooms of the stations:
• lP Switches;
• Video recorders.

4. THE CCTV SYSTEM
4.1 MAIN AND BACKUP OCC
The HHR will have two OCC , a main and a backup . In case of a disaster at the main OCC , the
backup OCC will take over operation.
IReq 01 Identical CCTV system shall be installed in both main and backup OCC
4.2 COVERED AREAS
4.2. 1 General information
Req 02 In the stations , the CCTV system shall cover the following areas:
.·.·.-.··, public entrance/exit halls (emergency exit included),
public stairs and escalators,
elevators (entrance/exit),
waiting rooms,
prayer rooms ,
platforms,
access ,
cash dispensers and vending machines.
4.2.2 occ
Req 03 The CCTV system shall integrate with the OCC , which includes:
it: access to the OCC building ,
it: corridors ,
it: parking .
4.2.3 Platforms
IReq 04 Cameras shall be installed along the whole length of platforms in stations.
Req 05 Platform monitors shall be installed to allow the train driver to see the platform along the train. A
corridor of 1m width per total height of train shall be monitored along the whole length of the platform.
4.2.4 Onboard
IReq 06 The images of coaches including corridors shall be visible by train crew and recorded on-board .
4.4 RECORDING
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-009- 01 Closed Circuit Tele-Vision PAGE 10/19

-..
Req 08 video recorder equipment shall be installed :

11: At each station,
11: At the OCC
11: In each locomotive .
Req 09 The images shall be recorded 24 hours a day and at 12 images/sec frame rate.
Req 10 Frame rate shall be automatically switched to 25 images I sec on operator's demand or when a
specific alarm is triggered .
4.5 IMAGES MONITORING
Req 11 Monitoring of recorded images shall be compliant with regulations .
Req 12 Access to records shall be managed under an access control process.

.
· _.
4.6 SPECIFIC FUNCTIONALITIES
IReq 13 The recording system shall provide playback and searching capabilities of recorded images.
A computer with appropriate CCTV software shall manage all the cameras and shall keep all
configuration information .
Image analysis software tools shall be provided to assist operators .
Req 14 The CCTV system shall allow for additional software tools aimed at triggering when there is:
11: Abnormal behavior - such as theft, robbery, flow of passenger I crowds, unauthorized entry,
vandalism , etc ...
lE Camera sabotage (e.g . lens of the camera covered with paint or another obstacle) or
interference due to the bad weather or environmental conditions which prevents the camera
from viewing effectively.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-009-01 Closed Circuit Tele-Vision PAGE 11 /19

4. 7 ALARM TRANSFER
Alarms shall be sent:

To the OCC operator and supervision center
4.8 SECURED POWER SUPPLY
IReq 16 The CCTV system shall be connected to a UPS system .
.:...~: ·.\
'-~.;;·
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-009-0 1 Closed Circuil Tele-Vision

5. COMPONENTS OF THE CCTV SYSTEM
5.1 AT THE OCC
Req 17 The following equipment shall be installed, in order to allow the remote control of the CCTV system:
lE A CCTV system management terminal ,
lE A control monitor,
1: A screen-wall to monitor several areas simultaneously,
lE Redundant recording system .
Req 18 The CCTV system management terminal shall allow:

lE Programming of the screen onto the screen-wall and onto the control monitor from any camera
in any station ,
lE Searching for and downloading of any images from any recording system ,
lE The alarm management.
Req 19 The number of images displayed simultaneously on the control monitor shall be 4 as a
minimum.
Req 20 At least 15 monitors, constituting the screen-wall , shall be located behind the OCC console of
the CCTV operator.
Req 21 The OCC shall be capable of downloading on demand any images from any recording system
located in the station , depot or maintenance depot.
5.2 IN THE STATION
Req 22 The CCTV system shall be located in the monitoring office of the station , and shall be made of :
11: A CCTV system management terminal ,
11: A control monitor,
11: A recording system .
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-009-0 1 Closed Circuit Tele-Vision P AGE 13/19

5.3 IN THE TUNNEL
Req 25 The CCTV system shall cover tunnels in order to instantly detect any fire (smoke and flame
detection). These cameras, in addition to the video monitoring service provided , shall identify automatically
the start of a fire , and alert the OCC accordingly. These cameras shall be installed in all tunnels and cut-
and-cover tunnels.
Req 26 The Consortium shall do the coverage study of these tunnels for the CCTV system for Fire
detection purposes .
5.4 AT THE DEPOT & MAINTENANCE BASE
Req 27 The CCTV system at the depot & maintenance shall be made of:
11:. A CCTV system management terminal,
lE A control monitor,
lE A recording system.
f:>-·~=:~:
p·~~::.:·
Req 28 The CCTV system control monitor shall allow:

Ill Programming the images on the control monitor from all cameras on the site,
11[ Alarm management
5.5 AROUND THE TRACKS
Req 29 The CCTV system shall cover the platform areas around the stations , this in order to identify
that nobody or nothing is present on the tracks .
Req 30 The Consortium shall define these areas.
IReq 31 All the cameras shall be connected through an lP network to the closest recording system .
5.6 ONBOARD
I·
A CCTV system shall be installed in each coach of each train . The purpose of this system is to
record images without interruption for a post-incident analysis.
Req 32 The CCTV system shall permanently monitor inside the coaches , as well as on the gangways
(i .e. in between the coaches).
Req 33 A recording system shall be present in each train , shall store the recorded videos on permanent
or removable med ias, and shall be equipped with an Ethernet connection .
In case an investigation is required , the video recorded onboard shall be downloaded by an

operator onto his PC from where the recording system is located .
d--
Ref: HHR-LO-TE -403-S YS-00 9- 0 1 Closed Circu it Tele-Vision

()
6. EQUIPMENT DETAIL
6.1 RECORDING SYSTEMS
IReq 34 The recording systems shall be designed to support a 30% additional capacity.
Req 35 Each recording system shall retain the records for the longest time possible. The minimum
retention period is 30 daysl24h period of stamped videos (year, month, week, day, hour, minute, second) .
After this period , hard drives can be overwritten in a FIFO (first in first out) manner so as to add additional
time for recordings to be preserved .
Req 36 Each recording system shall record each frame at an appropriate rate of resolution , i.e. not less
than the original resolution of 12 images I sec.
The recorded videos can be used for incident analysis .
6.2 MONITORS
Req 37 The monitors, located in control rooms (stations , OCC) shall be:
I[ Of LCD type with at least 65.000 colors ,
I[ At least 20 inch size ,
11: Equipped with antireflection glass ,
E With a vertical and horizontal reading angle 160 degrees .
Req 38 The Consortium shall implement in control rooms appropriate screens or a video wall to comply
with RAMS (refer document no2)
IReq 39 All screens shall meet as a minimum the environmental protection IP65.
6.3 CAMERAS
Req40 All cameras shall use the « video over lP » technology.
Req 41 All cameras shall meet as a minimum the environmental protection IP65.
Req 42 All cameras shall be protected against all electricai I electromagnetic (EMC) disturbances.
,1 R 43 All cameras shall provide calor images, shall provide at least 4CIF resolution , and shall perform
1() ·/,:~ a tomatically the white balance setting , gain control and shall compensate for differing light conditions .
·;~:~~ All cameras shall be installed on a fi xed support which shall not prevent any azimuth and tilt
·(n~(l al adjustment of the cameras .
::l.. -
- •\!
' ,~P~#~AII cameras shall meet the environmental protection IP65.
~... .Req 46 All cameras shall work under different luminosity conditions , from normal (1000 lux) to low
luminosity (minimum 10 lux).
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-009- 0 1 Closed Circuit Tele-Vision P AGE 15/19

CLOS ED CIRCUIT TELE·VISION
•· l
Ref : HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-009-01 Closed Circuit Tele-Vision PAGE 16/19

7. INTERFACES
Req 47 The CCTV system shall interface with

I Master clock system ;
I A UPS to allow for unexpected power failures or interruptions for a period not less than 8 hours;
• The fire alarm system;
'1. The access control;
lE The Telecommunication supervision center,
11. CCN and LANIWAN
......
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-009-0 1 Closed Circuit Tele-Vision PAGE 17/1 9

CLOSED CIRCUIT TELE·VISION
8. PERFORMANCE, INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE
The cameras shall be connected to the LAN. Configuration of each camera connection and the
local network shall consider the compliance with RAMS (Refer to document HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-
001 ).
Refer to document HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001
... ' I
·· ···...

9. INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Refer document HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001
u
iid:lJ~I .b~ Ci.c l.c.ll CiJ.w.u gbl

PHASE 2
.-.. .· :- ..
(
PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM

A1 20/02/2009 First Issue S.FRELAT
A2 20/04/2009 Technical Review S.FRELAT
A3 21/04/2009 Translation G.DAVIES
A4 22/4/2009 Technical update S.PETROFF
D1 11/09/2009 Review according Linklaters's comments D. CHRISTIEN
REVISION N°: 01 NAME DATE SIGNATURE

-~
CHECKED BY S.PETROFF 11/09/2009 ( ot
~
~ ,.,~
APPROVED BY C.SCHANG 11/.09/2009 ~__.,;;;-
--~ 7 '
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-010-01 PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM PAGE 2/28
TABLE OF CONTENT
1. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 6
2. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................ 7
3. SCOPE OF THE PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM ..................................................................... 8
3 .1 GENERAL OVERVIEW ... ....... ...... .... ... .. ....... ...... ... .. ... ........ .... .... ... .. .... .. ... ............... ..... ...... .. .. .. ... ............ ... ........... . 8
3.2ARCH ITECTURE ...... ..... .. .. ..... ... .. ... .......... ... ... .. ..... ... .. .................................. ............. ..... ............ .... .... ... .. ....... ...... 8
3 .30N SITE APPLICATIONS .... ......... ... ... ..... ... .... ..... ......... ...... ... ............ ..... .... .... ... .... ....... .......... .......... ..... ... ....... ... ... 9
4. THE DISPLAY SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................. ll
4 .1 AREAS COVERED ... ........ ... ..... ... ..... ... ..... ..... ..... ..... ....... ... .. ........... .. ... ..... ..... ...... ........... .. .......................... ..... ... 11
4 .2THE DI SPLAY SYSTEM AT THE OCC ....... .. .. .. ...... ... ... ..... ... ......... .... ................... ..... ...... ... ........ ... ..... ... .. ....... ... ... . 11
4.2.1 overview .. .......... .... .... ............ .................. ... .. ..... .... .. .......... ... ... ..... .. .................. .......... ..... ................... .... .. 11
4. 2. 2 Th e components ..... .. ..... ....... ..... .... .... ........... ..... ...... ............... ... .. ....... ................ ................ .... ............. .... 11
4.2.3 Type of broadcast and areas ..... ... .. .. .......... ..... ..... ......... .......................... ...... .... .. ...................... ........ .... 11
4 .3THE DISPLAY SYSTEM IN TH E STATION ...... .... .... ... ... .... .......... ............ ...... ....... ..... ..... .... ... .... .... ...... ..... ....... ...... 12
4.3.1 Components ..... ... .. ......... ... ...... ..... ... ........ ..... .... ...... .... ............. ............. ............... .... ................. ......... ....... 12
4.40PERATIONAL MODES ........ ... .......... ...... ..... .... .... ....... ...... ............. ...... ...... ...... .... .. ... ..... ... ... .. .... ..... ........... ... ..... 12
4.4.1 The operators ... ..... ... ..... ........ ..... .. .... ..... .... ...... .... ...... ... .. .. ..... ... ... ..... .... .. ...... ... ................... ....... ...... ........ 12
4.4.2 Information contents ..... ........... .. .. .... ..... ..... ................. ....... .. .... ... .. ....... .. .... .. .. ........ .. .... ...... ... .. ........ ... ... .. 12
4.4.3 Database ..... ..... .... ... ............. .... ...... .... .. .. ... .. .. ... .. ... .. ... .... ......... ...... ..... ..... ............ ..... ... .... .. ......... .............. 13
4.4.4 A utomatic/Manual mode ............ ............... ....... ......... ..... .... ... ...... .... .. .......... ..... ................. ...... ........ ...... . 14
4.4.5 The Automatic display ... .... .... .... ..... ...... .. .... .......... ..... ................. ......... ........ ....... ............. .. .... ... .............. 14
4.4.6 languages .. ......... ... .... .... .... .. ........ ... .. .. .... .. ..... .... ............... ....... ... ... .... ....... ...... ........... .............. ... ... .... ....... 15
4.5THE SCREENS AND PANELS ... ..... ..... ......... .......... ... ...... .. ..... ... .. ........ ... ...... .. .......... .. ................... ......... .... ... .. .... 15
4. 5. 1 Location ... .... .. .... .... ..... .. .... ....... ..... .... ..... ...... ............ .... .... .. .... ... ..... ... ... ........................... .. .... ........ ..... .. ... .. 15
4. 5. 2 Reading comfort .... ... ... ...... .. ... .. .. .. ..... .... ...... ....... ... ... ......... ................. .. .. .... .... .. .... ... .. ...... .. ...................... 15
4.5.3 Types and colours ..... .... ... ................ .......... ..... .............. .. .... ...... .... .. ... ................... ..... .... ... .......... ........... . 15
4. 5.4 Environment ...... .... ...... ..... .......... ..... ....... .. ..... ......... ....... .... ......... .... ..... ...... .... ... .... .......... .... ......... .... ........ . 15
4. 5. 5 Wiring prin ciple ............................................... ... ... ..... .... .. ..... .. ..... ................ ..... ....... ... ... .... ... ..... ......... ... .. 15
5. THE PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM ........................................................................................................... 17
5 .1 AREAS COVERED ....... .... .... .... .. ... .... ... ............... .. ... .. ....... .. ............ .... .... ........... .... .. ...... ............ ..... ... ..... ........... 17
5.2THE PUBLI C ADDRESS SYS TE M AT THE OCC ...... .... .. .... ...... .. .. .... .. ... .. ........... .. .... .... ....... ............ ................ ... .... 17
5. 2. 1 General overview .. .......................................... .... .. .. ... ........ ... ..... ..... ..... ... ..... ........ .... .. ....... ...... ........ ... ... 17
5.2.2 The components .. .. ... ..... .. ... .. ...... ... ..... ........... .. .. ...... ....... ... .. ..... .... ............. ..... .......... .... ...... ....... .... .... ... ... 17
5.2.3 Type of broadcast and areas ...... .... .. ......... ......................... .. ... .... ..... .. .. .......... .. ........... ............. ...... .. ..... 18
5.3THE ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEM AT THE SUPERVISION OFF ICE IN THE STATION .................................. ......... ... . 18
5. 3. 1 The components ......... .................................................. ... .. ..... ..... ..... ... .... .. ............... ...... ............. .... .. ..... 18
5.3.2 Type of broadcast and areas ... .... ... ..... ..... ... .. ....... ...... ........ :................ .. ......... .. ...... ... ........ ......... ... ....... 18
5.4 THE ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEM AT THE DEPOT & MAINTENANCE CENTRE .. .............. ...... .. ....... .... ... ..... ..... .. .... . 19
5.4.1 The components ... ..... ..... ..................... .. ... ........... .... .. .... ... ... ... .... ... .... .... ......... ........ .. ..... .... ..... ... .... ... ... .... 19
5.4.2 areas ............... ..... .... ... ... ...... .. ..... ... .. .. .... ... .. ..... .............. .......... ....... ..... ......... .. ......... ................ ....... .......... 19
5 .50PERATIONAL MODES ...... .... .. .. .... .. .. .. ....... ..... ..... .. .. ... ... .. .......... ........ .... ...... .... .... ......... ......... .......... .. ...... ......... 19
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5. 3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5. 5. 6
5.5.7
5.5.8
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-010-D1 PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM

5.6THE SPEAKERS ................... ,............................................................................................................................ 21

5.6.1 Location ........ .................................................. .... ...................................................................................... 21
5.6.2 Type ......................................... .................................................................................................... ............. 21
5.6.3 Sound level ........................................................... ........................................... ........................... ............. 21
5.6.4 Environment ....................... .................... ........... ............................................... ........................................ 21
5.6.5 Wiring principle ........ .. ........................... ............. ...................................................................................... 22
5.7THE AMPLIFIERS .......................... ........................... .. ...................................................................... .... .............. 22
5.7. 1 Type and structure .................. ......................... ... .................................................................................... 22
5. 7.2 Sound le vel ................................................................................................ .... ............................ .............. 22
5. 7.3 Environment...................................................... .. .............. .. ..................................................................... 23
5. 7.4 contingency .............. .................................... .. .......................................................................................... 23
6. BROADCASTING PRIORITIES ................................................................................................................. 24
7. CONNECTION TO CCN .............................................................................................................................. 25
8. INTERFACES ............................................................................................................................................... 26
9. PERFORMANCE .......................................................................................................................................... 27
10.1NSTALLATION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ........................................................................... 28
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-010-01 PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM PAGE4/28

PASSENGER IN FORMATION SYSTEM
PROJECT REFERENCES
Ref Ref id number Ref description

No
1 HHR -LO-CT-602 -S YS-002 General specifications Section 2: Glossary
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-010-01 PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM

1. GLOSSARY
Refer to document HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-002 General specifications Section 2: Glossary.
,....·.·::)
··.·.·-
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-0 10-01 PASSE NGER INFORMATION SYSTEM PAGE 6/28
PASSENGER IN FORMATION SYSTEM
2. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the specifications for the Passenger Information System (PIS) component
of the HHR project.
·-. . .
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-010-0 1 P ASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM PAGE 7128
3. SCOPE OF THE PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM
3.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW
The purpose of the Passenger Information System (PIS) is to supply, in stations, information to
passengers:
• Train timetable and train formations ;
• Voice local and general Information
Information via Internet, PDA or call center is another application out of the scope of the present
document.
The system is composed of two sub-systems :
The Display System:

• Screens and panels in the station and on platforms shall display train departure/arrival
information . This standard information is generated from the PIS server located at the OCC .
• In addition , non-standard information (local ones for instance) can be generated from both the
station and the OCC , with priority afforded to the OCC .
Public Address System :
• Speakers in the station and on platforms shall inform the passengers about train
departures/arrivals. This standard information is generated from the PIS server located at the
OCC .
• In addition, non-standard information (local ones for instance) can be generated from both the
station and the OCC , with priority afforded to the OCC .
3.2 ARCHITECTURE
The PIS system of the HHR project shall be structured as shown below;
• Passenger Display System (displaying standard and non-standard messages):
• In formation are displayed from Planned and real time database ;
• Manual commands generated by the operator at the OCC or by staff in the station
(only non-standard information can be created by staff at the station) .
• Panels specifically designed to display train arrival and departure times ;
• Repetition screens (screens linked to the main panels, displaying exactly the same
information) displaying departure and arrival times of trains;
• Screens on platforms (as repetition screens and train formation) .
• Public Address System (voice announcements):
•
generated by the operator at the OCC or by the staff in the
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403 - SYS-01 0-0 1 PASSENGER INFORMATI ON S YSTEM PAGE 8/28
PASS ENGER I NFORMATION SYSTEM
MalnOCC
Timedlotrlb<JIIon
lnfom\8ll0n Main syt:tem
manag&menl
0
0&111 base of the lnlln operat1ons
systom
cm
BIICIIIJI)OCC
lnfotmallon Main •yowm

nl81\8gltn80\
0
Do la base ollholtllln Qperallono
The .,me arc:hlieelure la laken

I) cm for ell Slallona ollhe lino.
Ml!dlnoh Contra! Sl ol 'on
S~Uon y'mttnal panel Station genural pRnel Staoon StatJoo PJall0m1 8CCIII Co<dlou phone
LocallnfCHmatlon
fDf depat1uru fOf 1ml\'els Monllor• f01 departure. Monitors tor an1vals t.~IIOta spoekorw announoernent
rNJnttgenl60t
Console
Depol & Mllnlenance

loltdacst• notesj
• The PIS systom l$ lnlerfoc&d and synch ronized wllh th nmo distribution
SySiom.
lnforn\illion Maln 5yiUUm
·0: Cordlou phono systom alowlng stotr to broodcO!U on
onnouncomom whllo betng out of tho ornce.
manBSP9ment
3.3 ON SITE APPLICATIONS
The Public Address System and the Passenger Display System shall include the following:
• A main terminal, located at the OCC to provide remote control and supervision of the PIS in all
the stations (the operator commands shall be of drop down menu type). The ergonomy shall be
determined accordingly with the Governm ent.
• A terminal located in the supervision centre of each station, managing the local PIS system,
equipped wi th a microphone (the operator commands shall be of drop down menu type ). The
ergonomy shall be determined accordingly with the Government, the design with station
contractor.
• Display panels dedicated « departures » and « arrivals » with repetition on LC D screens
installed at entrances/exits, corridors/halls, and platform entrances of each station as well as in
the areas where the main panels are not visible. To avoid generating additional passenger
movements in the station, the screens will be positioned so that passengers can view them
easily.
• Pu blic address speakers arranged to ensure that the audio information can be heard easily by
passengers in different areas of the station.
The display system shall cover:

• Platform entrances;
• Waiting room s;
• Ticket offices;
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-010-0 1 P ASSE NGER INFORMATION S YSTEM

0
• Underground entrances, corridors, etc.;
• Prayer rooms.
The public address system shall cover:
• The platforms;
• Ticket offices;
• Waiting rooms;
• Other rooms and areas where passengers congregate and circulate except the prayer rooms.
The location of the whole PIS (display and public address systems) shall be defined by the
Consortium in collaboration with the station contractor.
Double sided (back-to-back) screens shall be installed where appropriate.
This system shall display and announce messages in Arabic, with the functionality to communicate the
displays and announcements in Engli sh too.
The data transmission between the OCC and the stations shall be done via the multiservice network.
The PIS of each station shall be connected to the MSN network.
The operator of the OCC shall be able to generate messages and edit or select pre-recorded
messages, to be displayed or announced.
The operator in the station shall also be able to generate messages and edit or select pre-recorded
messages but control/priority rests with the OCC.
Public address in the Depot (workshop) and other maintenance centres:
The Consortium shall design the local public address system of the depot in accordance with the
following principles :
A public address controller termin al shall be installed in the supervisor's office of the
depot/maintenance centre
From this controller terminal it must be possible to address the following areas:
- The depot/maintenance centre genera lly (including the ability to address the whole depot);
- Each section of track inside each depot;
- Tracks on the outside of the depot.
A controller terminal shall be located in the room of each Depot/Maintenance Centre Manager or
similar function managing the maintenance teams .
This controller terminal shall allow the selection of the following areas:
- The depotlmaintence centre as a whole;
- Each section of track inside each depot .
- Tracks on the outside of the depot.
PAGE 10/28
4. TH E DISPLAY SYSTEM
4.1 AREAS COVERED
Req 01 The display shall be present in the following areas:

lE On the platforms ;
11:In the waiting rooms ;
IE In the ticketing rooms ;
11: In the prayer rooms;
liE In halls and main corridors where passengers congregate and interchange .
4 .2 THE DISPLAY SYSTEM AT THE OCC
Req 02 The display system shall be installed identically in the main and back-up OCC.
4. 2. 2 The components
Req 03 The system shall be commanded from a central control console that shall include:
lE' An alarm management system ;
lE A graphical interface whose ergonomy shall be determined accordingly with the Government.
4.2.3 Type of broadcast and areas
Req 04 The installed system shall allow the operator at the OCC to broadcast visual messages by area ,
groups of areas, in a station , at groups of stations on the line or in all the stations . The announcements
shall be of the following types :
Messages entered/input directly by the operator;
Pre-recorded, from a menu .
Functionality will exist to communicate information in the following areas:

Generally, across the station , more specifically at;
Each platform (independently of each other);
Ticketing rooms;
Corridors;
Waiting rooms (independently, or grouped);
The Main Hall;
Prayer rooms .
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-01 0-0 1 P ASSENGER INFORMATION S YS TE M P AGE 11/28
4.3 THE DISPLAY SYSTEM IN THE STATION
4.3.1 Components
Req 06 The display functionalities shall be used from a terminal installed in the supervision office of each
station
4.4 OPERATIONAL MODES
4.4.1 The operators
Req 07 The operator at the OCC:

Ill Shall be able to edit messages to be broadcasted on the station display screens.
Req 08 The operator at the station 's supervision office:

Ill Shall be able to edit non-standard messages only - to be broadcasted on the display screens of
the local station .
Req 09 In the case of conflicts between the OCC and the station , priority is given to the operator at the OCC
4.4.2 Information contents
The visual passenger information shall be displayed on:

• Two main panels , one for departures, the other for arrivals ;
• Screens repeating the messages displayed on the main panels located in the station ;
• Screens at the platform -displaying specific train information .
Req 10 Screens on the platforms shall broadcast information in relation to the train due to arrive/depart the
platform , as a minimum the screen must display the following :
it: Departing trains : train ID, departure time, train formation stops, final destination station ;
it: Train arrivals: train ID, time of arrival , train formation , origin station .
Req 11 Two LED display panels in each station shall be present, one displaying train departures, the other
train arrivals , each panel shall display the following information, for the 20 next trains :
1£ Train departures panel : train ID , platform number, time of departure, stops, final destination;
it: Train arrivals panel : train ID , platform , number, time of arrival , origin station.
Ref: HH R- LO- TE -403- SYS-0 10-0 1 PASSENGER INFO RMATION S YSTE M PAGE 12/28
Req 12 The repetition screens , in the waiting rooms, ticket offices, prayer rooms, main halls and corridors,
are linked to the main panels , directly repeating the information on them. They shall be distinct for train
departures and arrivals , and shall display the following information , for the 10 next trains :
1: Screen for the departing trains: train ID, platform number, time of departure , stops , final
destination ;
I' Screen for train arrivals: train ID, platform number, time of arrival, origin station.
Req 13 Each screen or panel shall display the actual time (in a numeric form) , the actual time will be sourced
directly from the Master Clock System.
Req 14 All the screens shall allow the display of non-standard text on two lines, without overwriting
passenger information in relation to the train schedule.
Req 15 The Consortium shall make the location studies of the different display equipment for each station in
collaboration with the station contractor, it includes:
11: The main panels;
I 1: The screens on the platforms ;
11' The repetition screens in the station .
4.4. 3 Database
Req 16 The display system shall be piloted by the train operations database of the HHR and updated
automatically.
;.,_
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-010-01 PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM P AGE 13/28
Below the principles for updating the PIS system :
Signalling Tracking and Operation p._lnfornoeiooSysllm

Database
--------!
Updated lnlonnatlon
t
Ptanned time table Database. OloploySystem Updated Ule di$p&ay infOfTT\alion in the ststions
I I
Update ol the d~play lnlonnatlon
lriggers l he car~
0
ai'VlOoocemeot
Arnouncomont Syslem
I Voice enoounc:ement
Real tint Data base
I I
4.4.4 Automatic/ Manual mode
Req 17 The display control system at the OCC , as at the supervision office at the stations , shall be able to
display information in two specific modes:
Automatic mode :
Lists the next planned trains by departures/arrivals - with the corresponding departure/arrival
time;
• Indicates the departure time of the next planned departure from the terminus ;
• In instances of train delays , a specific message shall be displayed ;
• In instances of cancelled trains, a specific message shall be displayed ;
Manual mode (From the OCC only):
• Communication of a message composed by the operator;
• Communication of urgent alert/information .
4.4.5 The Automatic display
Req 18 The automatic display , and its associated announcement, shall be triggered by
A train approaching the station ;
A train arriving at the platform;
A train approaching its departure time (configurable to 20, 10, 5 and 2 minutes before
departure).
PAGE 14/28
4.4. 6 languages
Req 19 The system shall be able to display the information in Arabic and English .
4.5 THE SCREENS AND PANELS
4. 5. 1 Location
Req 20 The final location/position of the screens and panels shall be defined by the Consortium during the
design phase in collaboration with the station contractor, it must:
1: Provide an adequate coverage across all areas of the stations;
1: Minimise the need for passengers to move around the station .
4.5.2 Reading comfort
Req 21 The display of the repetitions screens shall permit comfortable reading of the information at a
distance of 20 meters for passengers standing at ground level. The Consortium is charged with making the
necessary studies to satisfy this point.
Req 22 The display of the general panels shall permit comfortable reading of the information from a
distance of 50 meters. The Consortium is charged with making the necessary studies to satisfy this point.
4.5.3 Types and colours
Req 23 The general panels shall be LED type, with yellow-orange colour.
Req 24 The screens as defined in Req 01 shall be colour and LCD type , able to display texts and images,
with a horizontal vision angle of 160° minimum.
Req 25 For the LCD screens, different colours shall be used to distinguish between messages of different
degrees of importance .
For example, a Red colour can be used to communicate mandatory instructions, an orange colour
for warnings and green for simple information , etc ...
4.5.4 Environment
Req 26 To ensure the best level of visibility, the screens shall be equipped with a device to measure the
ambient luminosity, in order to automatically adjust the display to the ambient conditions
Req 27 The screens and panels shall be protected against the electrical and magnetic atmosphere that exists
in a typical electrified railway environment.
Req 28 The screens shall be shock resistant .
Req 29 The screens located outside shall conform to standard railway norms, as well as with the
environmental conditions typical of Saudi Arabia (temperature , moisture, sand storms etc.).
Req 30 The displayed information shall be visible day and night.
4.5.5 Wiring principle
Req 31 In order to ensure the service is not disrupted in the instance of a switch f
panels shall be cabled according to the following principles below :

Typical dlsploy oyolem design In llaliona
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-010-01 P ASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM PAGE 16/28
5. THE PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
5.1 AREAS COVERED
Req 32 The announcement system shall cover the following areas:

lE Platforms;
liE Waiting rooms ;
11: Ticketing rooms;
lE Main Halls and corridors;
liE Depot & Maintenance .
Req 33 The announcement system at the OCC , supervision office of each station and at the
::-- · ~- .- . ·.
:.-. :~:.·- depot/maintenance centre shall be equipped with a MMI allowing the broadcasting and the control of
spoken or pre-recorded announcements.
Req 34 Each pre-recorded announcement shall be preceded by a sound (or tune) to catch the passenger's
attention before the announcement.
5.2 THE PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM AT THE OCC
5.2. 1 General overview

The operation system shall be composed of two OCCs .
Req 35 The announcement system shall be installed identically at the main and backup OCC .
5.2.2 The components
Req 36 The system shall be controlled from the central console which includes:
11: An alarm management system ;
Ill A graphical interface whose ergonomy shall be determined accordingly with the Government;
Ill A microphone, used to broadcast and record , announcements .
Req 37 This console shall allow the operator to compose and ecjit any audio message.
d-
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -40 3- SYS-0 10-0 1 PASSENGER INFORMATION S YSTE M PAG E 17/28
Req 38 The installed system shall allow the operator at the OCC to broadcast announcements by area ,
groups of areas , in a station , at groups of stations on the line or in all the stations. The announcements
shall be of the following types:
Messages entered/input directly by the operator;
Pre-recorded , from a menu.
Req 39 Functionality will exist to communicate information in the following areas:

Generally, across the station , more specifically at;
Each platform (independently of each other);
Ticketing rooms ;
Corridors;
Waiting rooms (independently, or grouped);
The Main Hall ;
5.3 THE ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEM AT THE SUPERVISION OFFICE IN THE STATION
Req 40 The system shall be installed on a control con sole located in the supervision office of each station,
and shall consist of:
One microphone, for broadcasting spoken messages;
A user-friendly console whose ergonomy shall be validated by the Government.
Req 41 The installed system shall allow the operator in the supervision offices of each station to broadcast
local announcements by area , groups of areas , or across the entire station . The announcements shall be
of the following type :
I" Real time operator messages;
ll Pre-recorded , from a menu .
Req 42 Functionality will exist to communicate information in the following areas

11: Each platform (independently of each other) ;
l Ticketing rooms ;
I" Corridors;
[ Waiting rooms (independently, or grouped);
l The Main Hall
Ref: HH R- LO- TE -403- SYS-010-0 1 PASSENGER INFORMATI ON S YSTE M PAGE 18/28

n 5.4 THE ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEM AT THE DEPOT & MAINTENANCE CENTRE
Req 43 The Consortium shall design the local public address of the areas of the depot & Maintenance, it shall
consist of:
A user-friendly console whose ergonomy shall be validated by the Government .
Req 44 A console shall be installed in each office of the workshop chief, or similar function managing the
maintenance teams , it shall consist of:
A user-friendly console whose ergonomy shall be validated by the Government.
5.4.2 areas
Req 45 The control console at the depot managing the train set movements shall permit the selection of the
following areas :
Ill' The depot/maintenance centre generally
[E Each section of track inside the depot;
[r. Tracks on the outside of the depot.
Req 46 The console in each office of the workshop chief, or similar function managing the maintenance
teams , shall permit the selection of the following areas:
lE The depot/maintenance centre as a whole ;
[11:. Each section of track inside each depot.
11: Tracks on the outside of the depot.
5.5 OPERATIONAL MODES
The depot/maintence centre as a whole;

- Each section of track inside each depot
5. 5. 1 The operators
Req 47 Any ongoing operator action on the announcement system shall not void/overwrite any other action
on the display system , and vice-versa.
Req 48 A configuration module in the OCC shall allow the operator to create , in a user-friendly manner,
announcements via a drop down menu. Creation , recording, modification and suppression tools shall be
present using a database of pre-recorded announcements.
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -40 3- SYS-010-01 PASSENGER INFORMATION S YSTEM

0
5.5. 2 Database
Req 49 The announcement system shall be piloted by the HHR trains operations database and actualized by
the train tracking system .
Below the principles of the PIS update:
SJgnalllng TraciUng and Operatlon

P•-Wonnollonl)tllm
Oatabuse
Updaltd lnklrr•\Ott.lon
---------1
0
Planned ttno labfe DaUI.ba!ie I
""'·-y '""'""lion
I llolpay Syt!lm I.JrxlaiO ol In"" ........
-t I
~· ollho d•pi.Oy ...........-
ll1ggorl lhoccrro~
""""""".._,
0
R.., tknt O.t.. ~u
I -s~-
I
I
5.5.3 Spoken announcements
Req 50 lt shall be possible from the OCC , or from any supervision offices at a station, to broadcast spoken
announcements, with the OCC having the priority.
5.5.4 Automatic announcement
Req 51 The announcement linked to the automatic display system shall be coordinated to give information
that is consistent with the displays.
Req 52 The automatic announcement, and its associated automatic display, shall be triggered by
A train approaching the station;
time (configurable to 20, 10, 5 and 2 minutes before
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-010-0 1 PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM PAGE 20/28
C.
Req 53 Each announcement system in the station shall be equipped with a portable unit to allow for
appropriate personnel to make announcements while they are away from the supervision office.
Req 54 Provision is required for as many portable units as active personnel in the supervision office. This
number shall be increased as necessary in case of incidents.
Req 55 Batteries and loaders shall be planned in a sufficient quantity to ensure the constant operation of the
portable units.
5.5.6 Sound level
Req 56 The sound level in each station shall be configurable on two levels: Night and day. Switching from
one configuration to the other shall be done automatically.
Req 57 Every area of the station shall be equipped with an environment noise control system to automatically
adjust the amplifiers so that the sound levels are adequate. This system shall adjust the sound level of the
amplifiers in order to be 1OdB higher than the ambient noise level.
. :-.· ·
j; : · ·
5. 5. 7 Languages
Req 58 The system shall be able to announce the information in Arabic and English
5. 5. 8 Public radio
Req 59 The announcement control system at the OCC , as in the supervision office of the stations , shall be
equipped in order to allow the broadcast of FM or equivalent music from public radios .
5.6 THE SPEAKERS
5. 6. 1 Location
Req 60 The exact location of the speakers shall be defined by the Consortium in collaboration with the station
contractor during the design phase to allow an adequate coverage of all the areas of the station as defined
chapter 5.1.
5.6.2 Type
Req 61 The speakers shall be of sound projection type or columns on the platforms.
Req 62 The bandwidth of the speakers shall be between 20 Hz and 10 KHz, at a minimum.
5. 6. 3 Sound level
5.6.4 Environment
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-01 0-01 P ASSENGER INFORMATION S YS TEM PAGE 2 1/28
Req 64 The speakers shall be weatherproof as well as adequately protected against vandalism. The
Consortium is to state the levels of protection.
5. 6. 5 Wiring principle
Req 65 The speakers shall be wired following the principles illustrated below, to ensure the service is not
disrupted in the case of an amplifier failing:
Typical addressing aysuun design In a~JIOnt
·... .
E.g Pltlform I
5. 7 THE AMPLIFIERS
5. 7. 1 Type and structure
Req 66 The number of necessary amplifiers and their characteristics shall be the object of a study by the
Consortium and shall be presented to the Government for validation.
5. 7. 2 Sound level
Req 67 The sound level shall be intelligible at any moment and of 10 dB higher than the ambient noise.
5. 7.3 Environment
Req 68 The amplifiers shall be weatherproof as well as correctly protected against vandalism .
5. 7.4 Contingency
Req 69 Backup amplifiers shall be installed to ensure the service continues uninterrupted if one of the
amplifiers fails . The contingency system shall ensure a normal service until the consecutive failure of 3
amplifiers in a same bay of a station .
.... ...
I I
0
6. BROADCASTING PRIORITIES
Req 70 The OCC shall, at any time, always retain priority/control of broadcasts, over the supervision office in
the stations.
Req 71 The installed system shall manage the broadcast priorities according to the operational procedures,
still be determ ined, as the example below:
lE Announcement of emergency messages;
;I Any broadcast from the OCC;
11 Arrivals, approach or departure of trains;
lt: Announcement from a portable unit;
I• Broadcast from the supervision offices;
11 Ambient music from the public radio FM .
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-010-0 1 PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM PAGE 24/28
7. CONNECTION TO CCN
Req 72 The PIS shall use the VoiP (Voice over lP) technology.
Req 73 All equipment shall be connected to the local lP network, this last one being connected to the
Multiservice SOH network.

8. INTERFACES
Req 74 The PIS at the OCC shall interface with the Master Clock System - to ensure consistent time
announcements and displays.
Req 75 To avoid loss of power, all elements of the PIS shall be connected to the UPS system to ensure
continuous service for a minimum of 8 hours.
Req 76 The PIS shall be connected to the SCADA system for alarm management and equipment status. The
alarms shall be distributed as follows :
11 To the OCC operators: For the major alarms identifying a total breakdown on an equipment
impacting directly the operation;
11: To the Maintenance: For the minor alarms identifying a default on equipment without impact on
the operation.
Ref : HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-010-0 1 PASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM PAGE 26/28
PASS ENGER IN FORMATION SYSTEM
9. PERFORMANCE
Refer document HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001 .
.r·····
..
;.,.,,
Ref : HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-010-0 1 P ASSENGER INFORMATION SYSTEM PAGE 27/28
10. INSTALLATION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Refer document HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001 .
~:J.J~ I .bg.b:¥1 Cic IJ:..JI Ci.w.w gbl
SAUD I RA ILWA YS ORGAN IZATION

PHASE 2
GSM-R SPECIFICATION
IN ASSOC IATION WITH AXELCIUM

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
A1 20/02/2009 First issue D.CHRISTIEN
A2 14/04/2009 Review before validation D.CHRISTIEN
A3 21/04/2009 Language review D.CHRISTIEN

. •.•
81 02/06/2009 Final version D. CHRISTIEN '·
D1 11/09/2009 Review according Linklaters's comments D. CHRISTI EN
CHECKED BY S.PETROFF 11/09/2009
APPROVED BY C.SCHANG 11i09/2009
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011 -01 GSM-R SPECIFICATION P AGE 2144

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
, : ~:.;:·~ .
·~,:!--
1. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 6
2. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................ 7
3. SCOPE ............................................................................................................................................................. 8
4. GENERALITIES ............................................................................................................................................. 9
4.1 APPLICABLE STANDARD FOR GSM-R NETWORK ............. ... ...... ... .... ............. .... ... ..... .... ... .... ............ ..... .... ........... 9
4.2SUPPORTED FON CTION ......... ........... ................ ... ...... .. .. .. .. ... .... ..... ... ....... .. ......... .. ...................... ...... ......... .. .... ... 9
4 .3EXPECTED SERVICES .... ..... ... ...... ... .. .. .......................... ..... ... .... ....... ... ... .................. ..... ..... .... ..... ..... .......... .. ... .... 9
4.4TRAIN SPEED ... ..... ....... .... .... ... .... ..... .......... ............ ................... ........... .. ..... .... .... ... ... ..... .... .. .......... ... ... ....... ...... 10
4.5EXPECTED PERFORMANCES ........... ............... .. ... ............... .. .... .......... ... ......... ... ... ..... .... .. ... ............... .... ... ... ..... 10
4 .6GSM-R OPERATING PLAN .. .. .. .. ... ..... ... .. .... ..... ...... ... ...... ..... ..... ......... ... ................. ........... .. .. ..... ......... .... ...... ... .. . 10
4.7EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION .. ..... ..... ... .... ..... .... ................................. ... ...... .. ..... ....... ... ........ ... .. .... ....... .... ..... ...... 10
5. GROUND INFRASTRUCTURE ARCHITECTURE ................................................................................. ll

5 .1 BSS 11
5.1 .1 Double coverage concept .... .. .. ... .. ..... .. ..... ... ........ .... .. .. ..... ... ........... .. .......... ....... ... ............................ .... . 11
5.1. 2 BTS Configuration ....... .. ........ .. ..... ..... ... ........ ... .... .. ...... .. .. ... .... ....... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. .............. .... ....... ...... .. .. ... . 13
5 .2BTS CONFIGURATION .. .. ....... .... ........ .. ............. .. ... ..... ..... ......... ............. ... .. .. ..... ... .. ....... .. ... .... ......... ... .. .. .... .. ... .. 15
5.2. 1 BSC I TCU Configuration ...... .. ........ .......... ..... .... ... .... ... .... ........ ... ...... ... ............... ... .. ... ... .. ....... .... ..... ..... . 18
5 .3NSS 18
5.4SUPERVISION CON FIGU RATION .......... ............ ... ..... ..... .. ..... .... ...... ... ..... ..... ........ .... ..... ........ ... ..................... ..... . 20
6. ON BOARD ARCHITECTURE ................................................................................................................... 21

6.1 GENERAL PRINCIPLE ..... ...................................... ........ .. .... ...... ........ ...... .. ..... .. ..... .... ...................... ... ....... ....... .. 2 1
6 .2EXPECTED FUN CTION S .. ... ..... ..... .... .. ..... ..... .... .. .......... .. ....... ... ...... ... .... ...... ....... ... ...... .. ................ ........ ........ ... . 21
6 .3NEEDED INTERFACES .... ... ..... .............. ....... ...... ...... ..... .. .... ..... ........ . : ... ... .... ... .......... ... . ................... .... ........ .. ... 21
6.4POWER SUPPLY ............ ..... ......... ... .................. ...... ..... ... .... .... ... .. .. ...... ............ ... ...... .... ...... .... ..... ....... .. ... .. ..... .. 2 1
7. SECURITY PROTECTION PRINCIPLES ................................................................................................. 22
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-40 3-SYS-011-D 1 GSM-R SPECIFICATION

GSM-R SPEC IFICATION
7.4GSM-R TELECOM ROOMS INSTALLATIOND SYNTHESIS ....... ... .......... ....... ..................................... ........... ... ..... . 28
7 .5SUPERVISION SECURITY PROTECTION ............... .............. ........ .... ..... ........ .. ......... ..... ... .. .. ...... ..... .... .. ..... .. ....... 28
7 .60N BOARD SECURITY PROTECTION .............. ............... .... .... ... ......... ... .... ... ... ... ......................... .......... ....... .... .. 28
7 . ?DISASTER RECOVERY PLAN .. ...... ............. ..................... ... ..... .... ................ ........ ..... ... ... ... ..... .. ..... .... ..... ............ 29
8. NETWORK GENERAL ARCHITECTURE SYNTHESIS ........................................................................ 31

9. ENGINEERING RULES .............................................................................................................................. 32
9 .1 MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ....... ........ ..... ..... .................................................................... ..................................... 32
9. 1. 1 Neigh boring relations ... ..... ..... .... ... .. ...... ............................. ........ ...... ..... .. .. ...... ..... ....... ... ......... .... ............ 32
9.1.2 Location Area Code (LAC) .... .. .. .................................................... .... ...... ... ........................... .. ........... .. .. 32
9 .2PARAMETER SETTING .. ..................... .. ..... .. ... .... ... ... ......... .. .. ........ .. .................. ..... ... ... ......... .. ..... ... ..... ... .......... 33
9.2.1 Radio layer priority ............. ..... ... ......................... .... .. ... .... ..... ........ .. ... ....... ...... ... .......... ... .... ... ......... .... .... 33
9.2.2 Frequency plan ....................... ..................... ..... .... ... .... ..... .... .... ... ...... .. ..... ... .... .... ....... .. .... ...... ... ........... ... 33
9 .3RADIO DESIGN ..... ..... .... .. ... .. .. ... ...... ... ... ......... ....... ... .... ............ ... ..... ........... .. ............ ....... .. .................. ...... .. ..... 34
9.3.1 Limits to be respected .................... .. ... .. ..... ... ..... ........... ................... ...................................................... 34
9.3.2 Overlapping distance ............ ...... ..... .... .............. ... .. ......... ........ .. .. .. .. .... .... ..................... .......................... 34
9.3.3 Radio design methodology .. ..... .. ... ................ ...... .. ......... ...... .............. .... ..... .. ........... ...... .... ... .. ... ......... .. 35
9.3.4 Tunnel coverage ........... ..... ... ........... .. ............ ..... ..... .......... ........................ .......... ................... ............... .. 37
9.3.5 Repeater use ........................... , ........................................... .... ... ... .. .... ..... ..... ........ ....... .. .. ... .. ......... ... .. .. .. 37
9.3.6 Optic repeater specificity. .... ..... ... ............ ....... ....................... .................... ....................................... .. .. .. 37
9.4TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT ....................... ... ........ ... ................................ .... ........................................................... 37
9.4.1 Parameter setting ... ............................ ..... .... ... .... ... .. .. ..... .. ...... .. ... ..... ............. .. ............ ........ .................... 37
9.4.2 Traffic congestion ..... ... ..... .. ...... ...... ...... .. .. ..... .............................................................. ........ ....... .... ......... 38
1O.ACCEPTANCE AND VALIDAT ION CRITERIA ...................................................................................... 39
10.1 RADIO ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ............. ... .. ..... ...... ... .... ... .. .... .. ..... ............. .. .......... .. .......... .... .... ............... 39
10. 1. 1Radio signal/eve/ - RxLev ................ .. .......... .. .............................. ........ ... .......... .... .. .............................. 39
10.1.2Radio signal quality- RxQual ........ .. .... .... ..... ... ................. .... .. ............................................................... 39
10.1 .3Reselection I Handover ......................................... ...................... .. .. ... .. ............. .... .... ..... ... ... .......... ........ 39
10.2 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR DOUBLE COVERAGE ................................ .... ...... .. ........ .............................. 39
10.2.1Nominal mode................. .... ... ....................................... .... ...... .... ....... ... ........... .. .......................... ... ......... 39
10.2.2Degraded mode ..... ....... ...... ..... ... ......................... ... .... ...... ... .. ..... ..... ..... ................................. ...... ............ 39
10.3 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR VOICE MODE .. ...... ..... ... .... .... ................. ..................................................... 40
10. 3. 1 Call establishment delay ... ..... ...................................... ... ...... .... ..... ....... .. .. ... ....... ...... .......... ........ .. ......... 40
10.3.2Drop call rate ...................................... ... ..... ... ...... ..................... .... ..... .... ........... ................. ... ... ... ..... ... .. .. .. 40
10.3.3HO break .............. ...... ..... ..... .. .. ... ...... .. .................. ... ......... ....... ........ .... ... ... .. ..... .. .......... .. ......................... 40
10.3.4 Voice quality. .... .... .... ... .. ...... ...... .. ..... ........ ............. ... ... ...... ....... ............ ........ .... ... .. .. .. .... .... ...... ................. 41
1 0.4 FUNCTIONAL ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ... ... ........... .......................... .................... .......... .. ........................... 41
10.5 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA IN DATA MODE (ETCS) ............... ... .......... ... ......... .. .................. ........ ...... ... ......... . 41
11 .SIM CARDS AND FUNCTIONAL PARAMETER SETTING ................................................................. 42

11 .1 SIM CARDS ... .. ........................................ .. ................................................................................ ...... ......... 42
11 .2 FUNCTIONAL PARAMETER SETTING .. .... ............ .. .................................. ............. ............. ... .. .. .. ... ..... .. ...... 42
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-0 11-D1 GSM-R SPECIFICATION PAGE 4/44

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
PROJECT REFERENCES

3 HHR-LO-TE-4 03-SY S-005 Transmission network specification
5 HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-011 General specifications Section 11 : VTA
d-
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-01 1-01 GSM-R SP ECIFICATION PAGE 5/44
GSM-R SPECIFICATION
1.GLOSSARY
Refer to document HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-002 General specifications Section 2: Glossary.
PAGE 6144
GSM-R SPECIFICATION
2. INTRODUCTION
In order to provide radio contact between train and ground, a GSM-R network shall be deployed all
along the line. This network shall support train traffic control and security functions, with a high
level of availability.
This document gives a list of:

• Ground infrastructure architecture,
• On board architecture,
• Security protection principles,
• Acceptance criteria,
• GSM-R engineering rules.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011 -01 GSM-R SPECIFICATION

GSM·R SPECIFICATION
3.SCOPE
This document addresses the req uirements the Con sortium shall comply with when implementing
the GSM-R System.
...·.·.~·
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011-01 GSM-R SPECIFICATION P AGE 8/44

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
4. GENERALITIES
The aim of this chapter is to give a short description of the functions and services supported by the
GSM-R network.
4.1 APPLICABLE STANDARD FOR GSM-R NETWORK
[1] EIRENE System Requirement Specifica tion - Ref: PSA167D006, Version 15.0 or last
validated version
[2] EIRENE Functional Requixements Specification - Ref : PSA1 67D005, Version 7.0 or last
validated version
[3] SM-R Interface Class 1 Requirement - Ref : ubset 93, Version 2.3.0
[4) ERTMS I GSM-R Quality of Service Test Specification - Ref : 0 -2475, Version 3.0
Req 01
The consortium shall propose a GSM-R network in accordance with the following documents:
11: EIRENE SRS
I. EIRENE FRS
4.2 SUPPORTED FUNCTION
Req 02
On the HHR line, 5 applications shall be supported by the GSM-R network
I. ETCS level 2 (Automatic train control)
£ Ground to train radio
I[ Operating and maintenance radio
11. Shunting radio
. ... 11. Possibly, track/emergency phones
4.3 EXPECTED SERVICES
Req 03
The GSM-R network shall offer the following functions and services:
Point to Point voice call,
Group call (VGCS, VBS),
Data call ,
Short Message Service (SMS) ,
Voice mail,
Call Interception Service,
Call priority management (eMLPP),
Functional addressing ,
Location depending addressing (LOA),
SIM card management over the air (OTA).
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-01 1-0 1 GSM-R SPECIFICATION

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
0
4.4 TRAIN SPEED
The maximum train speed on the HHR will be 320 kmph . Therefore, the radio design shall be
designed for such a speed . The GSM-R network shall be validated for a train speed up to
320 kmph .
The GSM-R network shall be designed for a train speed up to 320 kmph .
4.5 EXPECTED PERFORMANCES
The GSM-R network equipment and maintenance organization shall provide a 2 hours MTTR
4.6 GSM-R OPERATING PLAN

c.
Req 06
11 The consortium shall issue a GSM-R operating plan for the HHR line. The GSM-R architecture
plan shall conform to such operating plan .
4.7 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
For security reasons, two OCC technica l centers shall host identical equipment; one can be located
in Jeddah , the other close to the Major Depot (km 125). Each of these centers shall host GSM-R
technical rooms.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011-01 GSM-R SPECIFICATION PAGE 10/44

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
5. GROUND INFRASTRUCTURE ARCHITECTURE
The GS M-R network is composed of 3 sub-systems: Base Station Subsystem (BSS), Network
Subsystem (NSS) and Supervision .
5.1 BSS
5. 1. 1 Double coverage concept

The BSS is composed on one hand by the base station, called BTS and providing the radio
coverage, and on the other hand by the base station controller, called BSC. If one of the radio sites
is out of order, the radio cell is no longer available and the GSM-R coverage becomes weak (i.e.
under the minimum threshold). If the BSC is out of order, all the radio cells are lost and the GSM-R
service no longer available on all the area.
,,... ...
This lack of robustn ess is not acceptable for an ETCS level 2 service . lt becomes therefore
mandatory to duplicate all the BSS equipments in order to maintain a continuity of service in case
of a single equipment failure. Two double coverage architecture types comply with this scenario :
• Single or double BTS coverage
• Collocated BTS on quincunxes sites
EXAMPLE OF DOUBLE COVERAGE WITH COLOCATED BTS:
1
BSC 1 BSC 2
MSC
THIS TYPE OF ARCH ITECTURE IS REQU IRED FOR THE HHR PROJECT.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011-D1 GSM-R SPECIFICATION PAGE 11/44

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
EXAMPLE OF DOUBLE COVERAGE WITH BTS IN QUINCUNXES:
BSC 1 BSC2
e
--
MSC
This type of double coverage is not acceptable to the HHR project.
Req 07
~ In order to ensure a high level of availability for the ETCS level 2 service, double radio coverage
shall be offered by the Consortium.
In case of total loss of one BSC site , all the cells linked to this BSC are lost. In order to keep the
GSM-R in service in case of one BSC failure , it is mandatory to link each BSC to different radio
layers.
Req 08
The 2 radio layers shall be connected to different BSC ..
The consortium shall detail the BSC configuration and the internal redundancy principles.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-S YS-0 11-01 GSM-R SPECIFICATION PAGE 12/44

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
5.1.2 BTS Configuration
The main components of a BTS site are:

• Pylon ,
• Antennas,
• Feeder,
• Surge arresters,
• Lightning fin ial,
• Earthing arrangement,
• BTS,
.·..
• Shelter,
• Batteries,
• Add-drop multiplexer (transmission), commonly referred to as a "Mux",
• Generator,
• Fuel tank,
• Access control.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011 -01 GSM-R SPECIFICATION PAGE 13/44

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
:mtenn;~s
Air
Equipment
c;~bln
Gener;~tor
Switch
Fibre optic
cable
Figure 1: GSM-R Radio Site (not to scale)
Req 11
In order to limit.the cell changes around the site , the antennas shall be coupled so as to obtain
an omnidirectional cell equivalent.
Req 12
The BTS of the 2 layers shall share the following elements:
Site property
Shelter
Pylon
Generator
shelters of the HHR line shall be independent from other shelters (signaling, multi
k . .. ).
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011 · 01 GSM-R SPECIFICATION PAGE 14/4 4

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
5.2 BTS CONFIGURATION
Req 14
Ill The BTS sites shall be supplied in 48V I 220V by the electric public network. They shall have a
8 hour battery autonomy
All the BTS must be equipped with a VSWR detector that shall send alarm to the supervision centre .
Different sites typologies may be used on the HHR network:

• 2x01 +1 with coupling : configuration to be used for open line sites ,
• 02 with coupling: configuration to be used for station and depot,
• 2x02 with coupling : configuration to be used for the sites covering both lines and stations ,
• 2x01 + 1 + repeater : configuration to be used for tunnels ,
• S22 : configuration to be used for large stations and depots ,
• S22 with 3 antennas: configuration to be used in junctions.
The consortium may propose other configuration(s). lt shall have to justify his choice and obtain the
Government representative's acceptance .
ANTENNA SYSTEM
Antennas with high gain and reduced 3dB aperture shall be installed to limit unwanted coverage .
Other antenna types may be used for coverage of special areas (station , tunnels ... ).
The antenna system contains coax cables and surge arrestors . Coax cable shall be chosen to have
less than 3 dB total loss (cable, connectors, and surge arrestors) .
In order to check the cable state after installation , measurements shall be performed by the
Consortium and be submitted to the SRO representative approval. Each cable shall be tested as
follows :
• attenuation of each cable section
• Fault Detection
• VSWR measurements for each cable section
• VSWR measurements for the antenna
• VSWR measurements of the entire system
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-40 3-S YS-011-0 1 GSM-R SPECIFI CATION PAGE 15/44

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
GSM-R PYLONS
This sub chapter defines the requirements related to the design and construction of the pylons
which shall support antennas. lt applies to steel truss freestanding towers and towers with 3 or 4
triangulated faces or equivalent type.
A radio study shall be realized in order to define the number of pylons to be built, their height and to
estimate the concrete slabs requi red. Environmental conditions (wind speed , temperature , and
sand storm) shall be taken into account in the pylon design and in equipment protection. Their
location shall be submitted to the Air Traffic Security authorities in accordance with local laws .
The height of the GSM-R network pylons must be homogenous. However the pylon height may be
limited in some specific places like urban areas or military zones . The Consortium shall be
responsible for obtaining the building permits from the relevant authorities . lt shall encompass the
duration of administrative procedures in the program of its works .
The Consortium shall give the pylon specifications
Req 15
The pylons shall comply with the following requirements :
freestanding towers made of steel truss structure or towers with 3 or 4 triangulated faces or
equivalent type
Access ladder equipped with anti fall system,
anti intrusion system (solid door and spike barrier)
rest bearing ,
lightning rod and electric earthing
horizontal and vertical cable duct
Technical and reference document
Diurnal lighting with red I white horizontal painted area (RAL 3001 I RAL 9016a)
Night lighting if necessary
160 kmph wind tolerance
GSM-R antenna tolerance (the number of antennas shall be defined during the radio design)
Galvanization of all the metal parts in order to be tolerant to the local climatic conditions
International standards shall be used and mentioned in all the consortium documents .
The consortium shall submit a technical documentation for each pylon installation .
PAGE 16/44
GSM-R SPECIFICATION
Req 16
Technical documentation to be submitted shall contain:
Ground study results
Ground calculation note
Foundation calculation note
Metallic structure calculation note
Wind static and dynamic calculations
Global analysis in elastic linear mode
Distortion justification
Element resistance and stability justification.
Anchoring justification
Drawing of foundation and structure
Overall pylon drawing (scale 1/100, in annex to calculation notes)
:-:.•...
,.;:~ :=·:·
GSM-R SHELTERS
The GSM-R sites are subject to severe environmental conditions. The operation of electron ic
equipment requires a stable environment and protection against temperature, humidity and dust.
The GSM-R equipment shall be installed in shelters large enough to host all the necessary
equipment while allowing easy movement of a technician during interventions.
The GSM-R shelters shall host the following systems:
• GSM-R BTS ,
• Transmission system,
• Railway maintenance phone,
• Administrative phone,
• lnformatics maintenance system,
• 2 cabinet for 48V I 220V power supply with batteries,
• 2 redundant air condition ing systems,
• Low voltage panel ,
• Main light,
• Back-up light,
• Access control ,
• Anti intrusion system,
• Fire detection system,
• Eventually fire fighting system (intern gas),
• Trigger circuit.

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
The Consortium is responsible for providing safe environing conditions that will allow for the normal
functioning of the equipment proposed.
The design of shelters must take into account the energy requ irements.
Shelters shall be equipped with an active cooling system (two air conditioners in redundancy)
capable of maintaining internal temperature about 30oc when outside temperature raises up to
60°C.
The air conditioning system of shelters should have a cooling power necessary for the proper
functioning of all equipment and should take into account a reserve cooling capacity of 250W .
5.2.1 BSC I TCU Configuration
Req 17
I: The BSC I TCU shall be connected to 48 V I 220V power supply using the public electrical
network. They shall have 24 hour autonomy batteries .
Req 18
.I: The BSC I TCU shall have a double access to the transmission network
I' The BSC I TCU sites shall be installed in the OCC buildings . The questions related to access
control , air conditioning , power supply ... , shall be addressed on a general basis for the entire
building .
Req 19
A GSM-R platform contains:
11:: 2 power supply arrivals
11: 2 transmission arrivals,
111: 1 telecom room dedicated to GSM-R.
Req 20
The telecom room shall comply with the following conditions:
11:: Each room shall be equipped with fire doors .
11: The power supply and transmission cables , main and backup as well , shall pass through
different cable ducts.
5.3 NSS
The NSS is the main component of the GSM-R network. The figure below illustrates the NSS main
components:
To ass j I
I
I
: ______ _ _______1
Signaller
Ref: HHR-LO-TE -403-SYS-011 -0 1 GSM-R SPEC IFI CATION PAGE 18/44

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
Figure 2: Proposed SAR GSM-R NSS Architecture

The MSC (mobile services switching centre) is the main component of the GSM-R network. lt
routes calls within the network and to external parties including the radio block controller which is
part of the train control system .
The IN (intelligent network) provides many of the railway GSM-R functionalities such as functional
addressing .
The VR (voice recorder) records all operational communications for post-incident analysis .
The HLR (home location register) is the main subscriber database .
The VLR (visitor location register) for mobiles "based" elsewhere .
The ACK (acknowledgement centre) records all events concerning railway emergency calls also for
post-incident analysis .
The AuC (authentication centre) checks that authorized users only have access to the radio
- .·. \
r.·.•-··-·.
system .
The SMS-C (short message service centre) provides text messaging functionality and over the air
updates functionality .
The OMC-S (operations and maintenance centre - services) allows for the monitoring and
administration of the NSS .
The EIR (equipment identity register) is a database containing a list of the terminal serial numbers
(IMSI : international mobile subscriber identity) which is used to prevent stolen radios from
accessing GSM networks .
The Provisioning system allows for the provisioning of services on the system .
The Mediation device facilitates the identification of railway emergency calls during post-incident
analysis.
The Group Call register defines the cells through which a railway emergency call is transmitted .
The Dispatcher termina l is located at the signaling centre and allows signalers to communicate with
all drivers and railway personnel within the area of their responsibility.
The creation of profiles and individual users for the subscriber identity modules (SIMs) comes
under the NSS .
..-.::--:-
External links to other networks interface the MSC.
The BSC shall be connected to the Mobile Switching Centre (MSC). The MSC has an internal
redundancy which allows for keeping the GSM-R in service in case of a card failure .
As the whole of a single GSM-R service may be lost in case of a disaster (fire , earthquake ... ) a
second MSC shall be installed . One MSC is to be active while the other one stands by. The one in
stand by is to be activated in case of a disaster on the active one.
Req 21
The MSC shall interface with :
The RBC
The PABX
The Railway phone switch .
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-01 1-0 1 GSM-R SPECIFICATION PAGE 19/44

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
n
control, air conditioning , power supply .. . shall be addressed on a general basis for the whole
building.
5.4 SUPERVISION CONF IGURATION
Req 23
The Supervision sub-system shall ensure the following functions:
I• alarm management
11' Reporting I Performances
11' Configuration management
11. Software update.
Req 24
11: The Supervision sub-system shall be located in the same building as the OCC, in a dedicated
technical room .
Req 25
11: For each OCC, one BSC with one BTS shall be installed. This BSC shall be active. The BTS
shall provide indoor coverage only and would be used for testing or for training .
Ref: HHR-LO· TE-403-SYS-011 -01 GSM -R SPECIFICATION P AGE 20/44

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
c-
6. ON BOARD ARCHITECTURE
This chapter addresses the on-board architecture (equipments , system , functions .. . ).
6.1 GENERAL PRINCIPLE
As a basic principle , a radio rack (preferably a proven model , nothing special shall be developed for
the HHR needs) shall be installed in the driving cab and provide the functions described below.
6.2 EXPECTED FUNCTIONS
The radio rack expected functions are defined in the EIRENE documents [FRS and SRS].
Req 27
1£ The radio rack shall propose a functioning test when starting. At the beginning of a mission , this
function must demonstrate to the driver that the rack is functioning correctly.
6.3 NEEDEDINTERFACES
Req 28
In order to provide the required functions , the radio rack shall have the following interfaces:
1: Interface with the roof top antennas,
1: MMI interface in English and Arabic languages,
1: Interface with beacon reader,
1: Interface with ERTMS management system ,
1: Engine number Interface,
1: Interface with interphone system I public address rack,
'-'·· ., 1: Interface with maintenance .
Req 29
~ The cable loss between the roof top antenna and the radio rack shall be less than 3d B.
6.4 POWER SUPPLY
The radio rack shall use the power supply from the rolling stock.
d-
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-40 3-SYS-011-0 1 GSM-R SPECIFI CATION
GSM-R SPECIFICATION
7. SECURITY PROTECTION PRINCIPLES
This chapter describes the security protection requirements applying to the GSM-R network .
Details are provided underneath for the following sub-systems :
• radio sub-system (BSS)
• Network sub-system (NSS)
• On board equipments (Board)
7.1 GENERAL PRINCIPLES
Req 31
The general architecture is composed of:
Ill For each pylon , 2 BTS are installed and connected to a shared antenna system . By this way,
two radio layers (layer 0 and 1) are created .
Ill These 2 radio layers are managed by different BSC (BSC 0 for layer 0 and BSC 1 for layer 1).
The 2 layers are active at the same time.
Req 32
At the Jeddah OCC , the following GSM-R equipment is installed :
11£ 1 active MSC
liE 1 BSC
Ill: 1 TCU
liE 1 test BTS (indoor coverage only)
Ill Supervision centre .
The GSM-R network shall provide radio services even in case of a single equipment failure .
Req 33
A second OCC shall be installed near the Major Depot (km 125) with the following equipment:
ll 1 active BSC connected to the active MSC in Jeddah
I: 1TCU
I[ 1 test BTS (indoor coverage only) .
The following shall also be installed :
Req 34
1: 1 passive MSC
E 1 passive BSC connected to the passive MSC
E 1TCU
II 1 test BTS connected to the passive BSC (indoor coverage only)
1: 1 back-up supervision centre.
PAGE 22/4 4
GSM-R SPECIFICATION
\' .
The OCC facilities shall allow for the following tests:

In Jeddah :
• Test on the BTS connected to the active MSC
In Major Depot (km 125):
• Test on the BTS connected to the active MSC
• Test on the BTS connected to the passive MSC
Req 35
11: The BTS installed at the OCC are test ones . They shall be connected to attenuators and low
gain antenna in order to provide indoor coverage only without generating any interference with
the signaling equipments . Both BTS shall be used for MSC and BSC commissioning , test and
training .
7.2 BSS SECURITY PROTECTION
(·.·.·.·. ·.
7.2.1 Hypothesis
The security protection study is based on the GSM-R service protection against a single failure
(single equipment is out of order) . Two main hypotheses are made:
• H1: in term of security protection, it is acceptable to lose one BSC temporarily only (or its
associated TCU) at a time.
• H2: only one MSC is lost at a time
7.2.2 BTS security protection
The BTS are connected to the BSC by E1 transmission links. In the GSM standard, this interface is
called "A bis" interface .
In order to secure the interface , it is possible to connect the BTS to the BSC using 2 links , with only
one link supporting the traffic channel. This solution is high consuming in term of connection and
BSC ports. The correct compromise is to define BTS loop , generally called Drop and Insert.
The number of BTS per loop is limited by the following factors:

• One E1 link contains 32 time slots,
• Among 32 time slots, one is reserved for synchronization , one Time slot per BTS is reserved
for signaling (LAPD),
• For one TRX , 2 time slots on E1 are requested ,
The Radio Site Mask (RSM) defines which time slot apply to which BTS.
The BTS installed along the line shall be in configuration 01 +1 , which means 1 active TRX,
1passive TRX, but only 2 time slots are needed . However, in case of traffic congestion , it can be
necessary to activate the 2nd TRX . lt would be necessary to affect 4 time slots on -·~ bis"
interface and modify the Radio Site Mask for all the BTS of the loop . In order to
activation , 4 time slots shall be reserved per BTS in 01 +1 configuration .
e · ~~ · ·.:
~( ~.>~ ~~,.J/ ~1 aL ~
On the "A bis" interface , 4 time slots are reserved for a BTS 01 +1.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-40 3-SYS-011-0 1 GSM-R SPECIFICATION

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
With this requirement, one can deduct the maximum BTS number per loop. With 5 BTS per loop,
the need is:
• 1 time slot for synchronization,
• 5 time slots for LAPD (1 per BTS),
• 20 time slots for traffic (4 per BTS 01 +1 ).
The BTS loop shall have 5 BTS maximum.
IReq 38
11: In order to optimize the security protection , it is requested to connect the BTS loops to the BSC
using BSC ports on 2 different BSC cards.
Req 39
Ill The BTS loop connection to the BSC has to be in accordance with the BSS Disaster Recovery
Plan (refer to dedicated chapter).
.·

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
In a double coverage context, the BTS are collocated . The transmission network could be as
follows :
BSC 0 BSC 1
r - -~ r
~ I
I
I
t t ••••••
. - . - . ____..
•• ••
~--------------l ·
. .
Loop n, Layer 0
~
.
..
Weak ... t
robustness
..
• transport loop
Equipment SOH
.•.
~
;! BTS
••
• .....· 0 n Layer1
On this drawing, one can remark that the 2 BTS loops are taking their synchronization from the
same side. This is a weak point because , in case of cable failure , the GSM-R will be lost on both
layers (even if the BTS reconfiguration occurs after a few minutes).
In order to avoid this situation , it is recommended to define a procedure for the loops to take their
synchronization on different side (see drawing below).
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011 -01 GSM-R SPECIFICATION P AGE 25/44

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
BSC 0
r----~
t t
. .... . .... . ... ........

Loop n, Layer 0
Boucle de transport
•
"t
:5I BTS
Equipment SOH
Loop n, Layer 1
The collocated BTS shall take their synchronization signal from different sides.
7.2.3 BSC I TCU localisation

In order to optimize the security protection of the BSS sub-system , it is better to install the 2 BSC in
different places, which results into a geographical redundancy.
Req 41
The BSC shall be installed in different buildings .
Concerning the TCU location , it is recommended to install the TCU near the BSC because:
• There is no need to install TCU near the main MSC (better availability) ,
• There is no need to install TCU in the back-up MSC (low cost impact),
• it makes the NSS disaster recovery plan easier (see dedicated chapter),
• it provides a reduced extra cost due to high transmission link numbers .
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-01 1-0 1 GSM-R SPECIFICATION P AGE 26/44

GSM -R SPECIFICATION
7. 2. 4 Transmission link security protection

As on the A and A ter interfaces , the loss of one link must have no impact on the GSM-R service, a
security protection N+N is requested . lt means that if N links are needed , 2 times N links shall be
installed . A special attention has to be paid to ensure that the main and the back-up links use
different cable duct.
Req 43
1: For the A and A ter interfaces, a security protection N+N shall be chosen . Main and back-up
links shall use different cable ducts and be connected to separated cards in the BSC, TCU and
MSC .
7.3 NSS SECURISATUION
7.3. 1 Equipment security protection
Req 44
11: In order to ensure a continuity of service in case of MSC disaster, a second MSC shall be
installed . lt shall be a back-up one and shall be passive . lt shall be activated in case of disaster
on the main MSC .
The back-up NSS shall be installed near the Major Depot (km 125), the main NSS being in Jeddah .
1£ The back-up NSS shall be a clone of the main one .
11: lt shall be connected to the core network.
Ill lt could be used as a test platform or for training.
lE The consortium shall submit a detailed NSS disaster recovery plan explaining how to switch
from the main one to the back-up one .
Req 45
The NSS sites shall have a double access to the core network.
Req 46
One of the BSC shall be installed near the main NSS in Jeddah , the other near the back-up
NSS in the Major Depot.
7.3.2 HLR server
Req 47
11: A main HLR shall be installed on the main NSS site . The back-up HLR shall be installed near
the back-up NSS in order to provide for a geo redundancy,
'
)
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-01 1-01 GSM-R SPECIFICATION P AGE 27/44

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
7.4 GSM-R TELECOM ROOMS INSTALLATIOND SYNTHESIS
The principle of the GSM-R telecom rooms' facil ities is the following:
J MSC+ L
-~
~~---~-~-~ HLR
~------------ '
''
Power ,, ' Power
' ' \
Supply \
Supply
'' J BSC+ L I
I
I
I
-I TestBTS I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I
I !!! I
I
I
I
I
~
I
I
TCU I
I
I
I
I
I
r----1 I
I
I
I
I
I I
. I
... ~ ..................................... ~
....
Trans ......-;'"~
Trans
' ....I •..
~
••
~
•• •• ~
.••
•~ •
~
•.. SOH •••
••••• •••••
······•·····•······ ········•··········•········ ·•·••···•·•········
7.5 SUPERVISION SECURITY PROTECTION
In case of major accident in the supervision centre, the GSM-R service should not be impacted but
the operating vision of the GSM-R network may be lost. The GSM-R service would remains
available but the operator would have no idea about the network state.
Req 48
1: In order to avoid this lack of robustness, a second supervision centre shall be installed near the
Major Depot (km 125). Due to technical and operational propose, a special attention is
requested from the Consortium to detail the feas ibility of such a solution . Constraints of
installation, commissioning and switch procedures shall have to be detailed .
7.6 ON BOARD SECURITY PROTECTION
In terms of on board equipment, the following facilities are requested:

• 1 mobile phone for RST application ,
Ref : HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011-01 GSM-R SPECIFICATION PAGE 28/44

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
11 The consortium shall propose a roof top antenna installation offering a sufficient isolation
between antennas. Power supply for the radio rack shall be provided and secured by the rolling
stock provider.
7. 7 DISASTER RECOVERY PLAN
The Disaster Recovery Plan is an action plan to be used if one of the following events occurs:
• The BSS room is destroyed,
• The NSS room is destroyed,
• The supervision room is destroyed,
• The entire OCC is destroyed (active MSC, one of the BSC supporting one of the radio layer
and all the transmission equipments are lost).
The GSM-R service mode may be in one of the following states:

• Nominal mode (all the equipment work correctly),
• Degraded mode (the GSM-R service is working whi le the traffic capacity is reduced),
• Service interruption {the GSM-R service is lost).
If the GSM-R service is no longer available , the Disaster Recovery Plan must restore this service
as quickly as possible.
Req 50
I. In case of disaster, it is acceptable to activate as a first step only one radio layer (degraded
mode). In a second step and if the degraded mode lasts too long, the full GSM-R service must
be repaired (the telecom mode reverts to nominal).

The following table details the impacts on the GSM-R service in case of disaster.
Impact on the Back up

OCC status Loss type Network state
GSM-R service solutions
Interruption of
NSS room lost Service lost Back-up NSS
service
One radio layer
BSS room lost Degraded mode No need
lost
active
Supervision room No control on the Back-up
Nominal mode
lost network Supervision
Interruption of Genera l Back-
Site lost Service lost
service up
Active BSS room One radio layer
Degraded mode No need
lost lost
Passive NSS room
None Nominal mode No need
lost
Passive BSS room
None Nominal mode No need
passive lost
Passive
supervision room None Nominal mode No need
lost
One radio layer
Site lost Degraded mode No need
lost
Req 51
The Consortium shall propose a Disaster Recovery Plan and detail:
I The network architecture (main and back-up),
I. Back-up and switch procedures,
I. Estimated time to recover the GSM-R service,
I[ Tests to be planned.
I After a major disaster, the GSM-R service must be restored in less than 2 hours.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011 -01 GSM-R SPECIFICAT ION PAGE 30/4 4

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
8. NETWORK GENERAL ARCHITECTURE SYNTHESIS
The following drawing, is a synthesis of the requirements described in the Architecture and security
protection chapters.
ma: ------
---- .
To e>t,te! B TS
·~· · ----.
T1an::!Tlls.sfro
-----
BTS_Test
BSC_1
IBTS_T: st I TCU_1 BSC_2 OMC-R
I ---- _jj
•+
TCU_2
SMS-C
mg:
I
MSC_B
I OMC-S
I
I
I
I
• .....__ _..
VLR HLR ACK
OCC JEDDAH OCC Major Depot
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011-0 1 GSM-R SPECIFICATION PAGE 31/44

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
9. ENGINEERING RULES
9.1 MOBILITY MANAGEMENT
9.1. 1 Neighboring relations
With 2 radio layers, the HHR line configuration shall be the following:
Cell n'-2 Cell n'-1 Cell n' Cell n'+1 Cell n'+2
_, .... ..- .. - ·- .. . :.:.:•·<<. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. .

~
I
\
I
------
......
....... .______ ...,..
.. ·· - · - ·· --':.. ·· ':'o>ol····".; .............................
. - .. - .. - (·· >·~............... ........................

\ ..... _
' ----- .. - .. - .. - :· :·><.:.. . . . ..........................
Cell n-2 Cell n-1 Cell n Cell n+1 Cell n+2
In order to ensure the mobility, the neighboring relations must be declared . lt is important to limit
the number of neighboring cells to avoid a heavy measurement process and later the handover
certificate .
Req 52
A cell N shall have the following neighbors:
Intra-layer neighbors:
l Cell N-1
I Cell N+1
I Cell N-2
11 Cell N+2
Inter-layer neighbors:
I Cell N'-1
I Cell N'+1
Due to the inter-layer neighbor and in case of cell failure ,.the mobile must be able to move to the
collocated cell.
u~ ..to t11~-'J
neighbor and in case of radio site fa ilure (supposing that the 2 collocated cells are
. d'6'Wri}. ,iun
Stj ) possible to perform a handover from cell N to cell N+2. The radio signal level
,:l ' I •.
0--
1~9 be bf low 't{le, EIRENE threshold but in such circumstance, the goal is to save the on-going
I ' calrs and void at'g r.· p call.
\ §; 1-;2 Loc_atio -1'fV}I de (LAC)

''"t "~, ,(.-> • ~'ll
"r ,,( \~-v ~
~ /.) '''JII pro, 'll'"
1
1~6~tt~'%a' code is a group of cells. lt allows the network to localize globally the mobiles and
sen fli'en1pagings for incoming calls .

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
n' - -
The HHR network shall have a limited number of cells, so only one LAC shall be declared for the
entire network.
Req 53
All the cells of the HHR line shall be affected to only one LAC .
9.2 PARAMETER SETTING
9.2.1 Radio layer priority

In case of double coverage , it must be possible to affect a priority to one layer. This layer becomes
the main one ; the other layer becomes the back-up one . In nominal case , all the traffic is supported
by the main layer.
On the HHR line and in order to take benefit of the entire capacity of the 2 rad io layers , no priority
shall be affected to one radio layer. The mobiles shall choose indifferently one of the 2 layers; the
traffic shall be shared between the 2 layers without impact on the service or on the users .
Req 54
11:. The 2 radio layers shall have the same priority. Traffic shall be shared between the 2 radio
layers .
9.2.2 Frequency plan
Req 55
1: With help of the Government the Consortium shall be responsible for finalizing an agreement
with the Communications and Information Technology Commission (CITC).
The GSM-R frequency band is 4 MHz large from 876 MHz to 880 MHz (uplink) and 921 MHz to
925 MHz (downlink).
In a 4 MHz band , 19 carriers are available (= (4MHz/200KHz) -1 ). Due to the low number of
frequencies , it is necessary to optimize the radio resources . lt must be possible to re-use a
frequency on another cell if the 2 cells are far enough of each other to avoid interference . The
solution is to use the cell pattern based on a group of frequencies that shall be applied to one
particular radio layer.
The following principles shall be applied :

• The pattern shall be different between BCCH plan and TCH plan .
• The joker frequencies, i.e. the frequencies that do not appear in patterns , shall be used fo r local
needs or in case of interference .
Ref: HHR-LO-TE -40 3-S YS-0 11-0 1 GSM-R SPECIFICATION PAGE 33/44
GSM-R SPECIFICATION
Req 56
Ill The consortium shall issue all the administrative documents to obtain the GSM-R licenses .
Ill The consortium shall furnish the frequencies re-use patterns for low traffic areas and high traffic
areas (like stations or depot), taking into account the C/1 factor . Joker frequencies shall be
specified .
1 ~ The Consortium shall provide the frequency plan of the entire network. BSIC and LAC shall also
be specified .
The GSM-R system of the HHR shall be completely independent of that of other lines.
The consortium shall be responsible for the frequency plan coordination with the Government,
particularly in the Jeddah area .
9.3 RADIO DESIGN
The HHR is 450 km long . The line begins in Makkah at a 300m altitude and reaches Jeddah on the
west coast. After Jeddah, the line continues to North along the Red Sea until KAEC. From KAEC, C'\
q;;y
the line climbs continuously up to a 1000 m altitude before reaching Madinah.
The HHR links 4 urban areas (Makkah , Jeddah , KAEC and Madinah) which are separated by large
desert areas without obstacles except small hills .
9.3.1 Limits to be respected
Req 57
111: The radio design shall comply with the operating program of the line which means that the
border between 2 cells shall be located at the functional limit between dispatcher areas (traffic
controller, station ... ).
For ERTMS application , it is requested that the handover and the RBC change do not occur in the
same place .
Req 58
lE The radio design shall be in accordance with the RBC implementation on a manner that
handover and RBC change do not occur in the same place. A 100m gap is acceptable .
9.3.2 Overlapping distance

The radio network is designed to ensure a continuous coverage for voice and data communications
all along the line . No drop call shall be accepted . Handover procedure must be safe .
On the network, 3 types of handover types will occur:
• Traffic handover,
• Rescue handover,
• Preventive handover.

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
The preventive Handover must be taken into account in the radio design. An overlap between radio
sites must be provided . This overlap distance depends on the train speed, on the sampling
frequency and on the BSC algorithm .
Req 59
11. The radio design to be performed by the Consortium shall comply with an overlap not shorter
than 670m between 2 adjacent sites.
SIgMI
Stte"'lh
B~ne uatJon B
......•
. .. .
Diitan:e along track
Ltrnl at CCM!I3Q~ ot 8
9.3.3 Radio design methodology
When performing the radio design, the Consortium allow for the following constraints:
• ERTMS coverage requirements,
• Railway Emergency Call area ,
• Geographical conditions,
• Climate conditions.
The consortium shall deliver a complete radio link budget for the HHR GSM-R network.
According to a quick analysis of the various environmental area types of the HHR and with
consideration to the ETCS requi rements, the inter sites distance estimate is 5km.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-0 11-0 1 GSM-R SPECIFICATION

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
The radio sites shall have to be close to the signa ling sites, the stations or the depots .
The Consortium shall take into account those sites during the radio design.
Req 61
The Consortium shall perform a radio pre-design with :
1: the number of sites necessary to cover the HHR line ;
il: the theoretical location of the sites;
1
1: the pylon height.
The radio final design shall be performed by the Consortium and shall contain the following phases :
PHASE 1
Radio design is to be performed with a cell planning tool using a propagation model , geographical
data base and clutters. Each radio site is located according the radio threshold . A frequency is then
allocated to this site to ensure traffic capacity and low interference .
In order to take into account the environment specificity, it is necessary to perform a calibration
campaign. A representative number of samples shall be taken per area type in order to tune the
propagation model.
Req 62
liE After a calibration campaign, the Consortium shall define the design margin and design
threshold . The consortium shall perform the radio design.
PHASE 2
Once the radio sites have been identified , a site survey shall be performed so as to fix the exact
location of the pylon installation .
The Consortium shall perform a site survey for each radio site to finalize the radio design .
PHASE 3
Site installation forms shall be submitted to the Government for approval by Authorities . In some
cases the pylon planned installation may not be possible . In such case , a new design shall be
needed .
Req 64
1: The Consortium shall be responsible for obtaining all the required site installation authorizations
in compliance with administrative procedures.
PHASE 4
perform a radio design , taking into account the EIRENE and ERTMS
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-0 11 -0 1 GSM-R SPECIFICATION PAGE 36/44

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
9.3.4 Tunnel coverage
On the HHR, there are 3 tunnels :

• between Makkah and Jeddah -7 600m
• at Makkah -7 850m
• at King Abdulla International Airport -7 3300m
Req 66
The consortium shall submit a technical solution for providing a GSM-R coverage inside the tunnels
and supply the following information :
11: Radiating equipment used (antenna , leaky cable),
it:. Active equipment (repeater or BTS),
11: Distance between radiating points.
~-- -:-.- .-_...::
.:;-.• 9.3.5 Repeater use
Req 67
11: The consortium shall indicate the type of repeaters used (radio repeaters or optic repeaters) . In
case of several chained repeaters , the consortium shall indicate the maximum number of
repeaters .
9.3.6 Optic repeater specificity

With optic repeaters , when the train moves from the repeater coverage area to the BTS coverage
area , the propagation time changes instantly (repeater propagation time = propagation time in the
fibber optic + propagation time in air, BTS propagation time = propagation time in air).
This important time variation can cause a synchronization problem between the mobile and the
BTS , and impair the radio signal quality .
Req 68
1: The consortium shall pay a special attention to the propagation model variation between
- 1 optic repeater and BTS . The radio signal quality must not be impaired in uplink and downlink for
a mobile driving at 320 km/h .
9.4 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
9.4 . 1 Parameter setting
Req 69
For the group call management, the Consortium shall propose anti gossip timers and no
uplink activity timers.
GSM-R SPECIFICATION
n
9. 4. 2 Traffic congestion
Traffic congestion can occur on the signaling channel (SDCCH) and on the traffic channel (TCH).
In ca se of SDCCH congestion , no call can be established ; this type of congestion must be avoided .
Req 70
11 The Consortium shall dimension the TDMA frame in order to avoid SDCCH congestion .
Req 71
Due to the chosen double coverage configuration, all the mobiles (in idle or active mode) can be
under the same layer. The consortium shall explain how the traffic shall be managed and how the
following details will be provided:
11' Ho traffic principle,
11: TCH pre-emption,
11' Directed retry functionality,
11. Late Entry functionality.

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
10. ACCEPTAN CE AND VALIDATION CRITERIA
The GSM-R network acceptance and validation tests shall have to comply with the document
named « Testing program and commissioning »,reference HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-011 [5] .
10.1 RADIO ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
The following criteria shall be tested on the 2 radio layers .
10. 1. 1Radio signal/eve/ - RxLev
Req 72
11:
The radio signal level received by the roof top antenna shall be higher than -92 dB m (El RENE
SRS) for 95% of time and space (EIRENE FRS) .
·-
,·.--"'-.·.--'
Req 73
111: The coverage measurement shall respect the Lee criteria (36 samples per 40 wave length).
10. 1.2 Radio signal quality - RxQua/
Req 74
1: The received quality of the radio signal (RxQual) shall be lower or equal to 4 for both
uplink and downlink at maximum speed .
10. 1. 3 Reselection I Handover
Req 75
Cells changes (reselection in idle mode and handover in active mode} shall respect the following
criteria :
£ HO success rate> 99.5% .
1: A mobile catches the correct cell in accordance with the radio design.
E No reselection or handover ping-pong occurs .
1: Cell changes occur at the correct place and respect the rad io design and functional borders .
I: No cell change occurs at RBC border.
10.2 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR DOUBLE COVERAGE
The following criteria describe the expected mobile (MS) behavior.
10.2.1Nominal mode
Req 76
10.2.2 Degraded mode
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011-0 1 GSM-R SPECIFICATION

The degraded mode corresponds to a component failure: One BTS or a BTS loop out of order.
Req 77
la In degraded mode, a mobile shall pass from one radio layer to the other with no impact on the
quality of service.
10.3 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR VOICE MODE
10.3.1 Call establishment delay
Req 78
111 The call set up time is defined in EIRENE FRS document. lt must respect the criteria in the
table below :
Call type Call set-up time
Railway emergency calls <2s* (M}
Group calls between drivers in the same area <5S (M}
All operational mobile-to-fixed calls not <55 (0}

covered by the above
All operational fixed-to-mobile ca lls not <7S (0)

All operational mobile-to-mobile ca lls not <10s (0)

All low priority calls <10s (0}
10.3.2Drop call rate
Voice calls are related to security, consequently no drop call is allowed in the GSM-R network.
10.3.3 HO break
These HO break represent the sound cut during a handover. lt shall be less than 300 ms.

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
10.3.4 Voice quality
Req 81
I ~ A high level of understandability is requested in radio nominal mode . Based on the document
ITU-T P.800: « Methods for subjective determination of transmission quality », the GSM-R
network shall offer a voice quality not lower than 4 I 5.
10.4 FUNCTIONAL ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
The GSM-R network shall respect the operating program of the HHR line . The following criteria are
defined:
lE Group call establishments,
lE Correct dispatcher connection ,
Ill Establishment of the correct GCA (Group Call Area),
Ill. Call priority respect (eMLPP),
1 ~ Short code call establishment,
Ill Late Entry,
Ill Location Depending Addressing .
10.5 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA IN DATA MODE (ETCS)
Req 82
1: The GSM-R QOS test specifications in data mode are specified in the document Subset 93
item 85. (02475) which specify the measurement conditions. The consortium shall respect
those 2 documents data acceptance test.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS -011-01 GSM-R SPECIFICATION PAGE 41/44

11. SIM CARDS AND FUNCTIONAL PARAMETER SETTING
On the HHR network, there shall be the following types of mobiles:

• The Cab Radio,
• The handset mobile,
• The GSM-R track phone (as an option),
• GSM-R station mobile.
11 .1 SIM CARDS
Each operating team shall have SIM cards with dedicated configuration defining group ca ll and
priority facility. The SIM management must be possible over the air (Over the Air - OTA -
functionality).
The Consortium shall detail the SIM cards management and offer the OTA functionality.
11.2 FUNCTIONAL PARAMETER SETTING

The numbering plan implemented in the HHR network has to respect the EIRENE SRS standard
which precise the format:
• W EIRENE = CT + UIN + FC
• with CT = Call Type
• UIN = User Identifier Number
• FC = Function Code
• Please refer to the EIRENE SRS for details.
Req 84
The consortium shall respect the numbering plan described in the EIRENE SRS standard.
The consortium shall propose a functional parameter setting in accordance with the GSM-R
ating program.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011 -0 1 GSM-R SPECIFICATION PAGE 42/44

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
12. LI FE OF THE NETWORK
12.1 SUPERVISION
The GSM-R network supervision concerns:

• The radio supervision -7 OMC-R
• The switch supervision -7 OMC-S
• The supervision of the « Intelligent network » (IN) part
• The transmission supervision (out GSMR) .
The OMC-R, OMC-S and IN parts are addressed in the present document
The transmission part is treated in the « Transmission network specification » document - ref HHR-
LO- TE-403-SYS-005-[3] .
Req 86
Supervision centres shal l be located in both OCC buildings .
t: The consortium shall propose a supervision network architecture offering the following
functionalities :
Equipment supervision (BTS , BSC , TCU , MSC)
Management work station connection
Alarm monitoring
Performance monitoring
Remote configuration.
I: The supervision network shall be available 24h/24 .
I: The MTTR of the supervision network shall be less than 2 hours.
I: The supervision centre shall be compatible with hardware and software technology evolution .
t: The consortium shall provide the tool list and the PC or work station number needed in the
supervision centre .
~ ....
; ~ : .'
12.2 GSM -R MAINTENANCE
Req 87
The GSM-R maintenance shall be carried out by the maintenance department located near
the Major Depot (km 125).
The location of the maintenance base shall be in accordance with the 2 hours of MTTR
requested .
The spare parts shall be stored in the maintenance basis .
The Consortium shall supply an estimate the spare needed.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011-0 1 GSM-R SPECIFI CATI ON PAGE 43/44

GSM-R SPECIFICATION
12.3 REPORTING
Req 88
11: The Consortium shall prepare report formats bringing out the network performances and the
Quality of Service (QoS).
12.4 UPGRADE/ NETWORK EXTENSION
Req 89
I• The Consortium shall list the various tools needed for software or hardware upgrade and for
network extension .
Ill The consortium shall propose several scenarios for network extension .
11 The consortium shall provide upgrade extension procedure.
S-011 · 01 GSM-R SPECIFICATION PAGE 44/44

~:1:/~l.b~ O!liJ::.II CiJJ.uug.bl

PHASE 2
BUILDING SECURITY SPECIFICATION
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
A1 21/01/2009 First issue J-M. PORTE
A2 12/02/2009 Second issue after comments J-M. PORTE
A3 14/04/2009 Review before validation J-M . PORTE
A4 17/04/2009 Language review J-M. PORTE
81 02/06/2009 Front page D. CHRISTIEN
D1 11/09/2009 Review according linklater's comments D. CHRISTIEN

~
CHECKED BY S.PETROFF 11/09/2009
. t o'k
VALIDATED BY G.NORMAND 11/09/2009 ~t?

APPROVED BY C.SCHANG ~~--~
11/09/2009
~
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-01 2- 01 Buildings security specifications PAGE 2/22
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 6
2. SCOPE OF WORK ......................................................................................................................................... 7
3. DEFINITION .................................................................................................................................................... 8
4. STRUCTURE .................................................................................................................................................. 9
4.1 SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITIES ..... .... ... .... .. ...................... ............. .......... .. ..... .. ...... ...... .... ..... .... ......... ... .. .... ... .. ..... .... 9
4 .2FIRE DETECTION FUNCTIONALITIES ..... ..... .................. ..... ... .... ..... .. .. .... ........ .. ............. .. ...... .. .......... ... ... .. .... ..... 10
4 .3ACCESS CONTROL/INTRUSION 'S REQUIREMENTS .. .... ... .. ........... ..... ... ........... .... .... ....... .. ... ..... ........ .. .... .. .. ..... .. 11
4.3.1 Badge reader ....... ........ ... ............ ... .......... ........................ .. .... ... ... .. .......... ..... .. ..... ..... .... ....... .. .... .. .... .. ...... 11
4.3. 2 Presence detector.. ....... ... .. .... ...... ....... .. ...... .... ............ .. .......... ..... ................... ...... ... ... ..... ......... ... ....... ... . 11
4.3.3 Audio detector for presence doubt verification ..... ... ... .......... ...... ....................... .... ...... . ... .... .. .... ... ..... 12
4. 3. 4 Videosurveillance ..... ..... ..... ..... ... ........... ............. .. .... .. ... ........ .... .. .... .... .. .... .......... ......... ....... .................... 12
4.3.5 Video Access control ... ........ .. ....... ... ................................ ... ........ ... ....... ..... ... ... .... .... .......................... .. .. . 12
4.4FI RE DETE CTION 'S EQUIPMENTS REQUIREMENTS .. ... ....... .... ....................... .. ..................... .. .. ........ .. .... .... ....... 12
4.4. 1 LFAP (Local Fire Management Panel) ... ...... .... .................................................. ....... ... .. .. ... .. ... .... ....... 12
4.4. 2 Smoke Sensing Fire Detectors ....... ......... ... .... ....... ... .. ....... ..... .... ................. ......... ... .... ......... .. .............. 13
4. 4.3 Heat Sensing Fire Detectors ........ ... .... ..... ... ......... .. .... ....... ............... .................................. ..... ... ... ........ 13
4. 4.4 Mimic Panels... .............. ..... ....... .... ....... ........... ........ .. ....... .. ....... ...... ... .. .. .... .. ... ..... .. .. ................. ..... ........ .. 13
4.4. 5 Workstations .... ......... ..... ..... ..... ........... ..... ... ............... ............ ................ .. ...... ...... ...... ..... ......... ... ...... .. .. .. . 13
4.4.6 Cabling .... .. ................... ..... ..... ..... ....... .... .... .... ..... ... .. ..... ... ..... ..... .... .. ... ............... ... ............ ........ ... ... ...... .. .. 13
4 .5HISTO RIC .... ..... .... ................. .. .................... ........ ......... ...... ...... .... .. ... .... .. .... ...... ...... .. .. ... ... ..... ............. ....... ....... 14
4. 5. 1 Basic queries ... .. ... .... .. .... .... ............ .. ........ ... ... .. ... .. ..... .. ........ ............. ..... .... .. .. .... .. ......... ...... ............. ....... 14
4.5.2 Programmable queries. .... ................. .. ... .......... ....... ... .. ...... .... .. ........ .. .............. ... ... .............. ...... ...... .. .. .. 14
5. MANAGEMENT FACILITI ES ............................................................................. ........................................ 15
5 . 1 MUL Tl SITE AND MUL Tl CLIENT MANAGEMENT .. ... .................. ....... .... .. .. ..... ....... ... ..... ... .. ..... .. ..... .. .... ..... ........... 15
5 .2 V ISITOR MANAGEMENT ..................... .... ............ ........... ..... ... ..... .. .. .. ..... ...... ....... . ................... .... ........... .... ..... ... 15
5 .3BADGE CUSTOMISATION ... ... ..... ..... ..... ... .... .. ... .. ... ... .. .. ... ....... ... ....... ... .......... ... .. ..... ... ... ............... ..... ....... ... .. ... . 15
5.3.1 Rights management by profile ............................ ... .. ......... .. .... ... .... ..... .. .. .. .... .. ... .... ............................... 15
5. 3. 2 Rights management............. ........ ... ........... ..... .. .. .. ......... ..... ...... .. ... .. ..... ... .. ... .... .... ... ...... .... .. .............. .... . 15
5.3.3 Management of building zoning ... .... .. ........ .. ... ............ .... .... ...... ...... .... ... .... ... ..... .................... ... ............ 16
5.3.4 Reinforced security .... .................. .... ... .. ... .. ....... .. .. ..... ... ...... .... ..................... ............................ .. .... ... .. .... 16
5. 3. 5 Alarm Management ...... ..... ........ ....... ... ... ............. ........................ ............... ................. .. .... .... .. .... ...... ... .. 16
5.3. 6 Lift management in OCCs .............................................................. .. .... ........ ..... ......... .. ..... .... ................ 16
5.3. 7 Parking management in OCCs, depots, workshops and maintenance base .... .. .... .... ... .. .. ...... ..... . 16
5.3. 8 Fire Detection management ................................................ .. .... .. .... .. .. .. .... ... .. ...................... ...... .... ...... . 16
6. FIRE DETECTION ARCHITECTURE ., ..................................................................................................... 17
7. DEPOT FIRE DETECTION ......................................................... :............................................................... 19
7 . 1 GENERAL ......... ... .. ...... .......... ..... .. ...... .... .. .. ..... ..... .... ... ...... .. ... ...... ................. .. ..... .. .... ... ...... ... ..... ......... ... .......... 19
7 .2 SMALL DEPOTS ......... ... ...... .............................. ....... ... .. ........... ...... ....... ... ...... ... ........ ... ... ... ...... ...... ............ ....... 19
7 .3DEPOT ....... ............ ...... ... .......... .. ... ..... .... ...... ..... .... ..... .. ..... ............. ...... .. ... .. ...... .... ....... .... ..... ............. .............. 19
8. INTERFACES WITH OTH ER SYSTEMS ................................................................................................. 20
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-0 12- D1 Buildings security specifica ti ons PAG E 3/22
BUILD ING SECURITY SPECIFICATION
9. SITES TYPOLOGY ...................................................................................................................................... 21

9 . 1 NORMAL AND BACKUP OCC'S ....... ............................................. ..... .......... .... ... ......................... ............. ...... .. ... 21
9 .2SIGNALLING CABINET .. ... ............. .. .... ....... ................ .... .......... , .. .................. .. .. ..... ... .... ..... .......... ...................... 21
9 .3SUBSTATION .... ......... .. ... .......... ...... ....... ... ................. .. .. ...... ..... ............................ ........... ........ ......................... 21
9.4GSM-R SHELTERS ...................... ....... ...................... ................. ... ............................ .... ....... ................... .......... . 21
9 .5CNN SHELTER (REDUNDANT OPTICAL CABLE) ............... .... ................................. .................................. ... ........ 21
9 .6 ENERGY CENTRE ..... ............... ..... .. ... ...... .................................................. ......... .......................... ......... .. ....... .. 21
9 . ?TRACTI ON ENERGY CABINET ....................................................................................................... ................... .. 21
9 .8MAINTENANCE BASE AND SPARE DEPOTS ........ ............. .............. .............. ........ ........... ................................... 22
9 .9STATION ... .. ..................................................... ... ......... ... ................................ ........ .. ... ............................. ........ 22
•. ~. ·.·!
Ref: HHR- LO- TE ·403- SYS-012- D1 Buildings security specifications PAGE 4/22
PROJECT REFERENCES

1 HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-002 General specifications Section 2: Glossary
2 HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 Rams Assurance Requ irements
·;·.···· '
BUILD ING SECURITY SPECIFICATION
1. GLOSSARY
Refer to document HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-002 General specifications Section 2: Glossary .
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-012- 01 Buildings security specifications P AGE 6/22
2. SCOPE OF WORK
This document defines security systems for the buildings and all technical sites along the line, as
shelters, technical rooms in stations, signaling rooms, substations, depots, maintenance base ,
OCCs ...
Sensitive technical installations should be secured by appropriate systems.
According to on site surveys appropriate configuration s shall be defined by the Consortium taking
account of local constraints and regulation .
The following program describes the minimum specifications required for Fire Detection, Access
Control completed by an Anti-intrusion system and for specific location, optional video surveillance .
lt is reminded that both OCCs shall be equipped identically to provide the shortest hand over time.
t"•"······
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-012- 01 Buildings security speci fications PAGE 7/22
3. DEFINITION
Req 01
11 Management of security is an integrated and centralized system. lt is expected to provide:
I• An easy integration of fire detection system;
I• An optional integration of technical management of building ;
11 An automatic control and command of video cameras in specific locations (station , depots,
workshops ... );
11 A multisided /multi-customer management with a single data base;
I• MML interface in English and Arabic.
Req 02 r'\
1 ~ Capacity and expansion of the system shall be precisely determined with the Government
\; .:;1
according to current and future building design .
4. STRUCTURE
Req 03
The system shall be composed at least of:
1: The Central Unit and associated Data base;
11:. The operation and management terminals located at the OCCs;
1: An automatic control and command of video cameras in specific locations (station , depots ,
workshops ... );
ll A multisided /multi-customer management with a single data base ;
lE Access Readers of various technology types;
lE Code keyboard , probe, detector, display unit ...
Req 04
1: The following services are provided :
1: Lighting management ;
1: Alarm and display management: Intrusion Alarm, Fire Alarm, Technical Alarm.
4.1 SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITIES
Providers offer a wide range of functionalities . The Consortium shall design the most appropriate
configuration according to the Government requirements and specific local constraints.
Req 05
For the access control the Consortium shall propose to the Government:
11: One or several technologies (biometrics, RFID, magnetic, smart card, masked bar code,
badge , free hands, digital lock);
11: Command of siren, barrier, electric lock, video camera ...;
11: Simple badge reader;
11: Stand alone badge reader.
Req 06
In terms of system architecture and topology the Consortium shall propose the Government:
11: Mono or multi site with local or remote supervision ;
11: Distributed Data base storage ;
11: Networked terminals ;
11: Bus topology, lP network or mixed;
11: Interconnection with WAN/LAN/CCN.
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-012- 01 Building s security specifications

Req 07
In terms of services the Consortium shall propose to the Government:
Management by area, parking, lift, corridor;
Access management by profile, by individual , mixed ;
Interface for supervision with plan and synoptic;
Visitor Management ;
Enhanced security, security surveillance , intrusion detection;
Sophisticated presentation for statistics (graph , curves ... );
Personalized badges ;
Video recording and associated management.
Req 08
The mandatory interfaces are:
111:
liE
Fire detection ;
CCTV interface ; 0
Ill' Staff management system .
Req 09
The requirements for the supervision are :
11: Ergonomic MML interface realized with animated synoptic;
lE A display panel (or a digital screen) which provides a graphical plan of the building pictograms
representing the various detectors and security devices;
11: According to the change of status of a represented device, the pictogram shall flicker;
11: Other ergonomic facilities shall be provided to improve ergonomic and efficiency of operator.
4.2 FIRE DETECTION FUNCTIONALITIES
Req 10
A Fire Detection sub-system shall be installed to control :
1: Technical rooms in Station ;
1: Maintenance Base ;
1: T elecom Supervision Center ;
E Depot (major & small) ;
E OCC (principal and backup) ;
11: All the locations along the line .
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-01 2- 0 1 Buildings security specificati ons P AGE 10/22
-...-.. .
Req 11
1: The Fire Detection system shall integrate automatically call functions for Emergency Services.
Req 12
lE All information shall be automatically transmitted to the OCC in case of personnel's absence
(Station closed ... ).
Req 13
Fire Detection System shall be able to detect and to provide warning about:
1: Smoke ;
1: Excessive heat ;
1: Rapid temperature increase .
Req 14
11: Only isolated technical rooms (GSM-R shelter ... ) shall contain Fire Suppression System linked
to the Fire Detection System (Type of Fire Suppression System in compliance with local rules in
force) .
Req 15
11: The Fire Detection System shall interface with CCTV in order to provide information incoming
from infrared camera in tunnels.
4.3 ACCESS CONTROL/INTRUSION'S REQUIREMENTS
4.3.1 Badge reader
The badge reader shall be designed for both internal and external use (IP65).
4.3.2 Presence detector
Req 17
Ill The number of presence detectors connected on the same loop or zone address shall be limited
{ "··· to 3. Detectors shall be equipped with anti masking device .
-.. · ..
Req 18
11: Door detector (open/close status)
Req 19
11: The number of door's detectors connected on the same loop or zone address shall be limited to
10. Door detection status and lock process shall comply with local regulation . (Case of
emergency) .
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -40 3- SYS-0 12- 0 1 Buildings security specificati ons PAGE11 /22
4.3.3 Audio detector for presence doubt verification
Req 20
1: Each audio detector shall be composed of an Omni directional microphone and a speaker.
Transmission of alarms shall be provided by local module directly in lP protocol.
4.3.4 Videosurveil/ance
Refer to CCTV specification .
4.3.5 Video Access control
Req 21
1: Each access shall be equipped with a reader associated to a camera which implies display of
the photo of the badge owner at the security manager desk. Doors shall open automatically or
manually.
4.4 .FIRE DETECTION'S EQUIPMENTS REQUIREMENTS
4.4.1 LFAP (Local Fire Management Panel)
Req 22
The LFAP shall provide an audible and visual alarm upon reception of fire alarm signals in the
following locations:
In each station ;
Maintenance bases ;
Telecom supervision centre ;
Depots (major and small) ;
OCC (principal and backup) ;
All the locations along the line .
Req 23
The LFAPs shall interface with the SCADA system .
LFAPs shall incorporate the signals of Fire Alarm/Extinguishing/Malfunction for each

defined zone and shall be able to monitor all above signals transmitted through voltage free
contact poi
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-0 12- 01 Buildin gs security specifica tion s P AGE 12/22
4.4.2 Smoke Sensing Fire Detectors
Req 25
E Zone's Fire Detectors shall be wired in a redundant configuration in order to avoid dysfunction
due to defective detectors .
4.4. 3 Heat Sensing Fire Detectors

For this project, three types of Heat sensing detectors shall be used:
Req 26
11: Fixed temperature detectors are activated as soon as the ambient temperature exceeds a
preset temperature limit. They shall be used in order to detect rapid increase of excessive
temperatures.
Req 27
11'. Rate-of-rise thermal detectors shall respond as soon as the variation rate of the ambient
temperature surrounding the detector exceeds the trigger level.
Req 28
lE Linear thermal detectors are used in order to protect a dedicated element rather than an area .
The operating principle is that the element's temperature exceeds a fixed temperature limit.
4.4.4 Mimic Panels
Req 29
lE Mimic Panels shall be provided with pictograms indicating the fire status of each zone. They
shall be installed in close proximity to the LFAP and near the major fireman's access points .
Req 30
1£ A draft of Mimic Panels shall be submitted for the Government representative approval.
4.4.5 Workstations
Req 31
11: Alarm Workstations in Stations and OCCs shall provide dedicated views of the fire detection
equipment; detector's location , identification, all operational information related to fire detection.
4.4.6 Cabling
Req 32
11: Fire Detections Cables shall be fire resistant and LSZH. In addition , they shall comply with the
requirements of the reference fire protection codes.
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -40 3- SYS-0 12- 01 Buildin gs security specifi cati ons P AGE 13/22
4.5 HISTORIC
Data base shall be capable to store more than 1 million events .

Several types of historical queries shall be available.
4. 5. 1 Basic queries
Req 33
I• Date and time in the day,
I• Activated alarms,
I• Remote commands processed,
I• Authorized badges.
4.5.2 Programmable queries.
Req 34
11 System shall provide simple query language to extract specific data from the data base,
Ill Results shall be exportable under standard Microsoft format to allow the possibility of further
treatments with spreadsheet software,
11. Predefined queries shall be programmed by the Consortium.
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-012- 01 Buildings security specifications P AGE 14/22
5. MANAGEMENT FACILITIES
5.1 MULTI SITE AND MULTI CLIENT MANAGEMENT
The multi client facility allows various configuration access rights to different branches of the
organization .
For instance, Rolling stock division and financial division shall be able to have distinct profiles and
therefore have different access management policy .
Multi site facility allows each site to manage the access rights differently for each part of the site
and particularly on temporary based period. Local security manager shall have the right to access
to their management part.
These facilities shall provide a solution for access of emergency and secu rity services.
5.2 VISITOR MANAGEMENT
Management of visitor shall be a software option according to the Government or Consortium

requirements and access procedures to visitors .
Hostess at the visitor desk is generally in charge of the management visitor badges in agreement
with the security/safety procedures.
5.3 BADGE CUSTOMISATION
This shall provide the possibility to create badges with logo and photos.
5.3.1 Rights management by profile

Rights for a profile allow the definition of access for a whole category of personnel. The profile shall
be defined with a list of readers, or group of readers, time periods, mono or multi sites ...
5.3.2 Rights management
Req 35
Rights shall be associated to the whole set of parameters such as:
jE List of building ;
lE Zone in buildings;
lt: Period of the day ;
£ Period of validity ;
jt: Parking rights.
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-012- 01 Buildings security specifications PAGE 15/22
5.3.3 Management of building zoning

The System shall comprise a building zoning management.
According to a list of readers allowing entrance in a zone and a list of readers allowing exit of the
zone it shall be possible to know the number of people inside the zone and their identification.
5.3.4 Reinforced security

For sensitive areas, double checking access terminals shall be implemented. These specificities
shall be determined with the access procedures edited by the Government and the Consortium
Organization.
5.3.5 Alarm Management
Req 36
ll Process of following alarms shall be provided:
ll Access control Alarm ;
ll Intrusion Alarm ;
ll Video Alarm ;
I Fire Alarm.
5. 3. 6 Lift management in OCCs

The Consortium shall be responsible for the provision of lift badge readers.
5.3. 7 Parking management in OCCs, depots, worl<shops and maintenance base

The Consortium shall be responsible for the provision of parking barriers, and access control
devices.
5.3.8 Fire Detection management

In case of fire, Fire Detection system shall provide, in a reliable manner, alarm signals to the
operators. In addition, indications shall be given to the latter when disruptions occur in the running
system (short-circuits, disconnections ... ).
Req 37
The alarms transmitted to operation staff in different locations (OCCs, depots, maintenance rooms)
shall be the following : ·
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-012- D1 Buildings security specifications P AGE 16/22
6. FIRE DETECTION ARCHITECTURE
Req 38
lE The LFAP (Local Fire Alarm Panel) localized at the places sated in Req 09 shall monitor and
control fire detection devices . Alarms and failure shall be transmitted to the SCADA in the OCC
through the RMS (multi service network).
Req 39
I' The Mimic panels (panel printed with the station map) shall indicate fire locations with lights .
Req 40
!1: Fire Detectors shall be addressable sensor connected to the LFAP and shall be selected on the
characteristics of various occurrences .
Req 41
11: In order to facilitate the identification of fire locations, the fire protected areas shall be defined in
accordance with the fire codes requirements . They shall be divided into multiple zones based
on fire and smoke zoning.
Req 42
11: Each zone shall be covered with the necessary number of digital addressable fire detectors in
order to display exactly fire locations .
Req 43
11: Each zone shall be provided with a LFAP which shall receive signals from fire detectors and
automatic fire extinguishing equipment.
Req 44
11: The LFAP shall provide audible and visual alarms .
Req 45
11: In stations, LFAP shall be installed at the SMO's entrance and shall be linked to the concerned
workstation to give alarms (fire and technical).
Req 46
11: In the OCCs , LFAP shall be installed at OCCs' offices .
Req 47
11: In the maintenance workshops, LFAP shall be installed in the maintenance chief office .
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-012- 0 1 Buildings security specifications PAGE 17/22
Req 48
11 In accordance with the architecture, type of risks and local regulations in force, each fire alarm
detection system (for stations and depots) shall be divided into several fire alarm zones.
Req 49
I In order to identify precisely and unambiguously fire locations, protected areas shall be divided
into zones. A list of these identified zones in compliance with the latest standards in force shall
be submitted to the Government representative approval.
..
.-.,;
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-012- 01 Buildings security specifications PAGE 18/22
7. DEPOT FIRE DETECTION
7.1 GENERAL
This area is designed for repair and maintenance of trains.
Req 50
•1: A telephone shall be connected to a direct line to the Fire Department and shall be installed
close to the LFAP.
Req 51
11: An administrative office shall count one Fire Detector only .
Req 52
11. The Local Fire Alarm Panel shall be installed in the guard room.
•.-:.:•.·.-
7.2 SMALL DEPOTS
Req 53
In both small Depots (Makkah and Madinah), the fire zones shall be :
11. Stabling Zone ;
II. Quick maintenance area;
11:: Administrative and social area ;
111: Washing Machine area.
7.3 DEPOT
Req 54
In Depot (Km 125), different zones shall be the followings:
I: Stabling Zone ;
I: Quick maintenance area ;
···-··
11: Administrative and social area ;
1: Washing Machine area ;
I Inspection Building ;
11: Drop Table and lathe on pit area ;
£ Overall Workshop
Ref : HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-01 2- D1 Buildings security specifications PAGE 19/22
8. INTERFACES WITH OTHER SYSTEMS
Req 55
The system shall have to interface with:
Air Conditioning ;
CCTV ;
CCN ;
Lift ;
LAN/WAN ;
Alarm system ;
SCADA
Ref: HHR- LO· TE -403· SYS-01 2- D1 Buildings security specifi cations PAGE 20/22
9. SITES TYPOLOGY
The following buildings are planned to be built and equipped with a security system. the
Government and the Consortium shall define additional sites to be equipped if needed .
Anti intrusion system shall be adapted to the specificity of the location .
9.1 NORMAL AND BACKUP OCC'S
Req 56
11: Similar building shall be built in Jeddah and in Km 125 area .
Req 57
I. ~- ·- lE Both buildings are sensitive in term of safety and security.
9.2 SIGNALLING CABINET
Req 58
11: Sensitive equipment is installed in these cabinets . They shall be normally collocated in closed
area in which shelters for other technical equipments (telecom , energy) are installed.
9.3 SUBSTATION
Req 59
1£ This technical building is equipped with high voltage devices. lt contains C&C equipment for
catenaries power feeding . This building is a very sensitive one.
9.4 GSM-R SHELTERS
This building is dedicated to GSMR equipments . This building is a sensitive one .
9.5 CNN SHELTER (REDUNDANT OPTICAL CABLE)
This building is dedicated to CCN repeaters. lt is a sensitive building .
9.6 ENERGY CENTRE
This shelter contains low voltage power feeding equipments for signal and on field lighting .
9.7 TRACTION ENERGY CABINET
This cabinet is usually located every 10 Km between two subst
Ref: HHR- LO- TE -403- SYS-012- 0 1 Buildings security specifications

9.8 MAINTENANCE BASE AND SPARE DEPOTS
Req 64
I A maintenance base is composed of several buildings used by mobile maintenance staff. lt
comprises:
a Offices ;
I Sanitary, conference room, dining room ... ;
I Workshop and garage for vehicles;
I A closed area for spare catenaries equipment. This sensitive area shall be lighted all the day
and protected by alarms displayed at the supervision centre;
K LAN/WAN ;
K Alarm system ;
I SCADA.
9.9 STATION
Req 65
[1 The design and implementation of the security system in the stations are in the scope of the
stations contractors. The management of the security of the stations shall be done locally but
the Consortium shall coordinate with the stations contractor for transmission of information to
the OCC bui lding.
Ref: HHR· LO· TE -403· SYS-012· 01 Buildings security specifications PAGE 22/22
r ~~ 1 fi:! :l:!::::I.::IJI .bg.b.¥1
Ci.c IJ:.J I Cu..u.w gbl

PHASE 2
fJ-;. -~ ::.
~-:~t--:
MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
l
MASTER C LOCK SYSTEM
A1 20/02/2009 First issue JM. Porte
A2 20/04/2009 Technical review JM. Porte
A3 21/04/2009 Language review G .GODDING
C1 29/06/2009 Final RFP D . CHR ISTIEN
D1 11/09/2009 Review according to Linklaters's comment D. CHRISTI EN
PREPARED BY D. CHRISTI EN 11/09/2009

-- A/
-
CHECKED BY S.PETROFF 11/09/2009 ( o\
VALIDATED BY G.NO RMAND 11/09/2009
¥
_._~

~~
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-013-01 MASTER C LOCK SYSTEM PAGE 2/14

MASTER C LO CK SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ....................................................................... ............................................................ ......... 5

2. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 6
3. FUNCTIONAL PRINC IPLES OF THE MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM ...................................................... 7
3 . 1 GENERALITI ES ..... ... .. ....... .. .... ...... ... ........ .. .... ... ..... ..... .... .. ..... .. ....... ... ..... .. .................... ........... ..... .............. ...... ... 7
3 .2ARCHITECTURE ............... ... .......... .. ... ..... ........ .... .. ..... ..... .... .... .......... .......... .. ... .. ........ .. .......... ..... .... ... ... .. .. ..... ... .. 7
3 .30N SITE APP LI CATIONS ...... ...... ... .. ....... ................. ........ ..... .. ... .. ... .. ... .. .... .. ...... ...... .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. ..... ...... ... ..... ..... .. .. 8
4. THE MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM ............................. ................................................................................... 9

9
4 .1 COVERED AR EAS ...... ..... ... ..... ..... ........ .. .. .. .. ... .... ........ ... .... ... .. ....... ... .. ... .... .. ....... .. .... .. ..... .. ... .. .... ...... ... ..... ...... ....
9
4 .2 1N OCCS ..... .... ................... ... .... ... ... .. ...... ... .. ........ ... .. .. .. ...... .. ..... .. .. .. ... ............... ..... .... ....... .. .. ...... .... ...... ... ...... ....
4. 2. 1 The components ..... ..... .......................... .. ........ .... ... .. .. .... .. ... ...... .. .. ... .. ....... ..... ..... ... .... ... ... ... ... ..... .... .. ... ..... 9
4.2.2 The Master Clock .. .... ..... .... ....... .... .. ............ ....... .. ....... ........ ........ .. .... .. .. ... .... .. .. .. .... ... ........ ...... ........ .. ........ 9
4.2.3 Management terminal... ... ... ..... .... ......... .... ..... ............. ... ... .. ........... .. .. ... ... ...... ... ..... ... ... ............... .............. 9
4.2.4 Digital clocks ......... .... ..... ....... ... .. ....... ..... ............. .. ...... .... ...... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... .. ...... ................. ... .................. 9
4 .3 1N THE SUPERVIS ION OFFICE OF EACH STATION .... .. ... .. ..... ........ .... .. ... .. .......... .. .. .. ... .... .... .. .. ..... .. .... ... .. .. ....... .. .. . 9
4.41N STATIONS ... ..... ..... .. .... ... ...... .. .. ...... .. ...... ...... ..... ........ ..... ....... .. .. .. ... ...... .. ... ...... .. ... .. .... ... ..... ....... .. ... .... ... ...... .. 10
4.4.1 Covered areas ..... ... .. .. .. ... ..... .............. ... .. .......... .. ... .. ....... .. ...... .. ... ................ ... .. .. ... .. .... ........ .. ....... ........ .. 10
4. 4.2 Constitution .. .... ..... ... .... ..... ... .... ... .. ......................... ...... .. ............ ...... ..... .... ... ... ..... ... .. ...... ....... .. ... .... .. ....... 10
4. 5 DEPOT & MAINTENANC E BASE .... ... .. ...... ... .. ... ... .. ..... ...... ...... ... ..................... ...... ..... ... ... ... .. .. ...... .................... .. 10
4 .6ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICES ....... ... ..... ..................... ... ... ... .... .. .. ....... .. ... ...... .......... ..... ... .......... .... ..... .. ................. 10
4. 7 SU PERVISION AN D ADMINISTRATION .. ....... ..... ...... ... ..... ...... ... ..... .. .. ............... .... ... ... .. .. .......... .. ..... .. ......... ...... .. 11
4 .8TRANSM ISSION NETWORKS AND PROTOCOLS .. .... .... .. .. ........ .. .. ..... ..... ........................... ...... ........ .... .. .. .... .. ...... 11
4 .9SYNCHRONIZATION S OURCE ........ ........ .... ...... .... ..... .. ....... ..... ...... ... ....... ...... .... .............. ... ...... ... ..... .. ........... .... 11
4 .10 CLOCKS PRECISION .... .. ... ... ........ ... ... ..... ..... .... ............ .. ... ... ........ .. .............. ........ ... .. ...... .... ..... ... .. ........ .... 11
4 .1 1 DEGRADED MODE ... ... ... .. ...... .. ... ....... ........... .... .... .. ... .. .......... .. .. .. .. .. .. ..... .. .. ... .. ..... ... .. .... .. ...... .. ... .. .. .. ........ 12
4.1 1.1GPS Signal...... ...... .. ... .. .. .. .... .... ...... ...... .. .................. .... .... .. .. .. .. ..... .... .. ...... .... .. ...... .. .. .... ............. .. .. ........ .. 12
4.1 1.2Master Clock ... .. .. .... ...... .... .. ...... .. .. .. .. .. ............ .. ......... .. .. ........ .... ......... ... .. .. ........ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ........ ........ .. .... 12
4.11 .3Secondary Master Clocks ............... ............... .. .... ......... .. ..... .. ... ........... .. ..... ... .......... .... ...... .. ... .. ...... .. .... . 12
4 .12 ALARM MANAGEMENT.. .... ... ..... ............ ... .. ....... .... ........ .. .... ... .. ....... ............. .. .. ... .... .. .. ..... .... ...... .. ........... .. 12
4 .13 ENVIRONMENT .. ..... ........ .. .... .. .... ... .... ... ... .. .. .......................... .. ..... .. .. ... .. .. ...... ..... .. ... ... .. .. ..... ......... ..... .. .. ... 12
5. INTERFACES ............................................................................................................................................... 13
6. PERFORMANCES, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANC E ........................................................................ 14
Ref: HH R-LO-TE -40 3-SYS-01 3-D 1 MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM

MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
PROJECT REFERENCES

Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-013-0 1 M ASTER CLOCK SYSTEM PAGE 4/14

MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the specifications of the Master Clock system applying to the HHR
project.
The Master Clock system provides to all technical systems the accurate time and pulses necessary
for operation.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-013-01 M ASTER CLOCK SYSTEM PAGE 5/14

MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
2. GLOSSARY
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-013-01 M ASTER C LOCK SYSTEM P AGE 6/14

MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
3. FUNCTIONAL PRINCIPLES OF THE MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM

3.1 GENERALITIES
Master Clock system is aiming at providing the same time and synchronization pulse all over the
HHR line .
Time is displayed in stations for the public and operating staff, in depots and maintenance base, in
OCC and emergency room.
Synchronization and time pulses shall be distributed to all technical components as well.
3.2 ARCHITECTURE
The following representation is an example of the architecture which can be adopted for the Master
Clock system.
Main OCC (Ope rations control cenler)
.-.
•
Secondary OCC (Operations control cenler)
~ (E)
r.
Slave onalogoe clocl<s (For the Worl<shops)
M osier clocl< syslem at the station of Madinah

Soa>nda>y";!;.,_,. Slavadlg;lalcloci3(Fe<off>c8s)
~ Thts archlte<:ture will be taken for all the

stations of the HHR high speed line. Master dock system allhe depot & Maintenance
The Master Clock system shall be made of:

• One management system , located at the OCC , allowing the supervision of the Master Clock
system in all the stations;
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-013-01 MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM P AGE 7/14

MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
3.3 ON SITE APPLICATIONS
The time base supplied by the Master Clock shall allow the synchronization of any element
displaying time.
The following sub-systems shall be synchronized by the Master clock system .

The precision of the synchronization shall be compatible with the one required by the following
applications:
• Core Communication Network (CCN),
• Telephony system (AVC, OVC),
• GSMR,
• PIS system,
• CCTV system,
• ACS system ,
• Billing system,
• Fire alarm system,
• Signaling system,
• UPS system,
• SCADA.
The communication between the Master Clock and the secondary master clocks shall be done via
an IP/NTP network type.
For the communication between the secondary Master clocks and the slave clocks, it will be
advisable to adopt an AFNOR solution type. lt is considered as a strong protocol against
perturbations. However, an lP solution can be proposed by the Consortium.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-013-01 M ASTER C LOCK SYSTEM P AGE 8/14

MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
4. THE MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
4 .1 COVERED AREAS
Req 01 The time shall be displayed in the following areas:
The OCC,
The supervision centre of each station ,
The administrative offices,
The waiting rooms ,
The prayer rooms ,
The ticketing rooms ,
The platforms,
·.-:{:::..:.:-: The main Halls and corridors,
·-:~:~-:·
4.2 IN OCCS
4. 2. 1 The components
Req 02 Each OCC Master Clock system shall be composed of:
11: One GPS antenna ,

11' One NTP/GPS server (called Master Clock)
11: A redundant Master clock,
I I' One system management terminal
11: One secondary Master Clock,
11: Digital clocks .
4.2.2 The Master Clock
IReq 03 A server capable of receiving a GPS signal shall be proposed.
~~--- 4.2.3 Management terminal
Req 04 The access rights on the system management terminal shall :

11: Be protected by means of passwords;
1£ Be configurable .
4.2.4 Digital clocks
Req 05 Slave digital clocks shall be installed in OCCs and in operation areas.
Req 06 Their number, location and dimension shall be the subject of a study by the Consortium which
shall require the station architect's approval.
Req 07 Those digital clocks shall be 24h type, giving a reading angle of at least 120•, and shall display
hours, minutes and seconds.
4.3 IN THE SUPERVISION OFFICE OF EACH STATION
Req 08
Ref: HHR-LO-TE -4 03-SYS-013- 0 1 M ASTER CLOCK SYSTEM P AGE 9/14

MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
Req 09 Those digital clocks shall be 24h type, giving a reading angle of at least 120•, and shall display
the hours, minutes and seconds.
4.4 IN STATIONS
4.4.1 Covered areas
Req 10 Analogic clock type shall be installed in the following areas:

I Waiting rooms,
I Prayer rooms,
11. Ticketing rooms,
11' Platforms,
11. Main halls and corridors.
4.4.2 Constitution
Req 11 The Master Clock system in each station shall contain:

11: One secondary Master Clock directly linked to the Master clock via LAN and CCN,
ll Analogic clocks located in relevant areas,
Req 12 Those analogic clocks, and shall display the hours, minutes and seconds.
4.5 DEPOT & MAINTENANCE BASE
Req 13 The Master Clock system at the depot & Maintenance Base shall be constituted of:
11: One secondary Master Clock directly linked to the Master clock via LAN and CCN ,
E Digital clocks.
Req 14 Those digital clocks shall have a reading angle of at least 120•, and shall display the hours,
minutes and seconds.
4.6 ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICES
Req 15 The Master Clock system in the administrative offices shall contain:
ll Analogic or digital clocks, according to the Government requirements;
Req 16 Those clocks shall display the hou rs, minutes and seconds.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-013-01 M ASTER CLOCK SYSTEM P AGE 10/14

MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
r~
4.7 SUPERVISION AND ADMINISTRATION
Req 17 The system shall provide indications on faults & diagnostic of the Master Clock system.
Req 18 The system shall provide:

Ill The automatic network synchronization every days (at midnight for example),
Ill An automatic re-synchronization following perturbations,
Ill The connexion to digital and analogue clocks .
Req 19 The system shall be able to execute self-diagnosis for the preventive detection of faults on the
overall Master clock system network.
Req 20 Only one time reference , transmitted by the Master Clock, shall be distributed through the
network. lt shall synchronize the different time systems all over the HHR line.
Those services will be use by the operation and maintenance teams .
4.8 TRANSMISSION NETWORKS AND PROTOCOLS
IReq 21 The OCC Master Clock system shall be linked to the station clock system via CCN.
Req 22 The Master Clock system shall use two different transmission modes:
1: The IP/NTP protocol shall be the required transmission mode between the Master clock at the
OCC and the secondary Master Clocks ;
I: An AFNOR or an lP solution , according to the Consortium's choice shall be the required
transmission mode between the stations slave clocks and the local secondary Master Clock .
The AFNOR Protocol has a great stability it is therefore advisable to adopt th is solution.
Nevertheless, the consortium may propose a network secondary Master clock/slave clocks on an
lP basis as this is a recogni zed quality solution .
4.9 SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE
Req 23 The OCC Master Clock synchronization shall be done via the GPS.
Req 24 The secondary Master Clocks shall be done via the Master Clock.
Req 25 The slave clocks synchronization shall be done via the local secondary Master Clock.
4.10 CLOCKS PRECISION
Req 26 In case of interruption of the synchronization signal Source of:

The GPS : The Master Clock shall ensure the synchronization of the network with a slippage not
exceeding 27ms/month .
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-013-0 1 MASTER C LOCK SYSTEM P AGE 11/14

MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
4.11 DEGRADED MODE
4. 11. 1 GPS Signal
Req 27 In case of failure of the GPS receptor or if the GPS signal cannot be received because of
interferences or interruption, the Master Clock shall automatically take in charge the network
synchronization with its intern oscillator. Once the problem solved, the network shall automatically be re-
synchronized on the re-established GPS signal.
4. 11.2 Master Clock
Req 28 In case of failure of the Master Clock and its redundancy, secondary Master Clocks shall
automatically take in charge the network synchronization with its intern oscillator. Once the problem
solved, the network shall automatically be re-synchronized on the re-established Master Clock signal.
4. 11.3 Secondary Master Clocks
Req 29 In case of failure of the Secondary Master Clock, slave clocks shall display the time
independently. The problem solved, the network shall automatically be re-synchronized on the re-
establ ished Secondary master clock signal.
4.12 ALARM MANAGEMENT
IReq 30 Faults and alarms shall be transm itted to the Supervision Centre
4.13 ENVIRONMENT
Req 31 All the clocks in the stations shall :

11: Tolerate temperatures up to 70°C ;
Ill Be protected against electromagnetic perturbations such as but not only those of electric
traction currents;
11. Have a protection level of IP65 minimum;
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-013·01 MASTER C LOCK SYSTEM PAGE 12114

MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
5. INTERFACES
Req 32 The Master Clock system shall distribute the time to all the following sub-systems:
Telephone system ,
Radio telecommunication system,
PIS system,
CCTV system,
PAS system ,
Billing system,
Fire alarm system ,
Signaling system,
UPS system,
SCADA.
(;· ·.·.
•4 ····
Ref : HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-01 3-0 1 MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM PAGE 13/1 4

MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
6. PERFORMANCES, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE
Refer to document HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001 Functional Specifications for Telecommunications
Ref : HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-013-01 M ASTER CLOCK SYSTEM PAGE 14114

iiJ:Jd~ l .b~ Qo Ld l iiuLw gbl
SA UDI RA ILWA YS ORGAN IZAT ION

PHASE 2
~ -- ~.- .- .---~
'- :.~:. .:'
::;- ~- --
(- "
'
TELECOMMUNICATION SUPERVISION
CENTRE SPECIFICATION
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
TELECOMMUNICATION SUPERVISION CENTRE SPECIFICATION
A1 20/02/2009 First issue D. Ch ristien
A2 20/04/2009 Technical review D. Christien
A3 23/04/2009 English language review G.Godding
B1 02/06/2009 Final version D. Christie n
D1 11/09/2009 Review according to Linklaters's comments D. Christien
PREPARED BY D. CHRISTI EN 11/09/2009

-~
CHECKED BY S.PETROFF 11/09/2009 ( 0
.....)

~
/~~
APPROVED BY C.SCHANG 11/09/2009 ~__.;;;;-
7
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-0 15-0 1

PAGE 2/12
T ELECOMMUNICATION SUPERVISION CENTER SPECIFICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................ 5
2. SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................................... .. 6
3. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 7
,• "1
4. SUPERVISION FUNCTIONALITIES ........................................................................................................... 8
4.1 SYSTEMS TO BE SUPERVISED ....................................... .......... ..... .. ........... ........ .......... .......... .. ................. .. ....... 8
4 .2FUNCTIONS SUPPORTED BY THE SUPERVISION CENTRE ....... .. .. .. .......... .. ......................................... .. .... .... ...... 8
4 .3SUPERVISION TOOLS ............. ..... ....... ... ......... .................. ... .... ................ .. ... ...... ......... ........... ........... .... ... .. ..... ... 9
5. ARCH ITECTURE ......................................................................................................................................... 10
5 .1 M AIN PURPOSE ............................ .................................. .. ......... .. ........... ... ....... .. .. ........ ...................... ..... .. ..... .. 10
5.2PERFORMANCES .............. .. .... .... .............. ........... .. ... .... .... ...... ............. .. ... .......... .... .................................. ..... .. 10
5.3SYSTEM SECURITY AND R EDUNDANCY ...... .. ... ........ ..... ..... ..... ..... .......................................................... ......... 10
Ref : HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-015-01
PAGE 3/12
T ELECOMMUNICATION SUPERVI SION CENTER SPECIFICATION
PROJECT REFERENCES

3 HHR-LO-TE -403-SYS-00 1 Functional Specifications for Telecommun ication

PAGE 4/12
TELECOMMUNICATION SUPERVISION CENTER SPECIFICATION
1. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the functional specifications and the technical constraints for the
implementation of the telecommunication supervision centre for the HHR project.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-4 03-SYS-0 15-D 1
TELECOMMUNICATION SUPERVISION CENTER SPECIFICATION

2.SCOPE
This document is intended for the Telecommunication Consortium for the HHR project.
The scope of work for the present document is illustrated on the picture below:
TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Scope
Of this SUPERVISION
Document
MAINTENANCE

P AG E 6/12
T ELECOMMUN ICATION SUPERVISION CENTER SPECIFI CATI ON
3. GLOSSARY
Refer to document HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-002 General specifications Section 2 : Glossary
...;. ·.
''tl ,, ••
I
',. (
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-015-01
PAGE 7/12
(~
4. SUPERVI SION FUNCTIONALITI ES
The Network Operations Centre is the control heart of the telecom systems where supervision ,
monitoring and administration are carried out. From a single location , proposed to be at the main
Operations Control Centre (OCC) at Jeddah city, operators and Government representative have a
real-time view of the state of the infrastructure allowing faults to be identified and technicians to be
informed .
4.1 Systems to be supervised
Req 01 The following systems shall be managed by the supervision centre :

Core Communication Network (SOH and 10 Gig abit Ethernet)
GSM-R network
Railway telecommunication system
Administrative telecommunication system
Building security
Master clock
LAN/WAN/WiFi networks
CCTV
Passengers information system
Ticketing
4.2 Functions supported by the supervision centre
Req 02 The Supervision System shall perform the following actions:

Supervision of the status of all the equipment,
Supervision of the status of all the interfaces,
Analysis of the alarms and action decisions,
Interface with maintenance,
Configuration management,
Management of the system extension ,
Alarm and performance archive
Reporting (statistics on the network, QoS indicators)
Hardware and software upgrade management,
Inventory management,
System administration (user profile}.
Ref: HHR-LO-TE -403-SYS-015-0 1

PAGE 8/12
4.3 Supervision tools
The supervision tools shall offer a friendly ergonomic interface to permit a fast detection of the
origin and the nature of the failure . Graphical tools, drop-down menus and multi windows
principles, adapted symbols and colours , audible alarms, zoom possibility are indispensable. The
topology Network shall be fully illustrated, graphically on each work station.
Req 03
~ The consortium shall detail the state of the art tools to be used in the supervision centre,
including a description of the Man Machine Interface.
Req 04
I All the supervision tools shall be in both Arabic and English languages.
r·· :...::\
~-~~
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-01 5-01

PAGE 9/12
5. ARCHITECTURE
5.1 Main purpose
All the supervised equipment shall be connected to the CCN (SDH or 10 Gigabit Ethernet). All the
supervision signals shall arrive at the OCC located in Jeddah , where separate rooms shall be
dedicated to supervision .
Req 05
1: The supervision centre shall ensure the network management via the core network.
Req 06
11:. The supervision of the whole network shall be done in the main OCC centre at Jeddah city.
At the OCC , alarms shall be distributed according to the nature to different operator's positions o.:r
(e .g. railway regulators , infrastructure supervisors ... ). \;;J
Req 07
11: The consortium shall propose an organisation for the distribution of the alarms to the
different operator's positions .
11: Each system shall be supervised separately, on different screens.
5.2 Performances
Any failure of any element shall be indicated without delay at the Supervision System centre.
5.3 System Security and Redundancy
The supervision system has an internal redundan cy; whereby service must be maintained in the
case of a single card failure .
Req 09
11: The consortium shall detail the internal redundancy of the equipment of the supervision
centre.
However, in the case of a disaster (e .g. fire , earthquake ... ) where all the supervision system is lost
then a second supervision centre shall become active (installed within OCC2 near the major depot
(km 125)). One supervision centre shall be active ; the other shall be in stand-by.
In case of disaster of the main supervision centre , the back-up supervi sion centre shall be activated
within a period which is compliant with RAMS .
Req10 ~
The cons ~~ m stlB1 ·p'rQPOSe upervision architecture with a stand-by supervision centre
located in Stie li?ck-~:~p'-:OQC. J be back-up supervision centre shall be activated in case of
disaster o~(!i]}{mit'rr-supervi'Si£>\ ntre .
Req 11 ! (f)
....,
\ ~ of
l '~ -
1
Both s W~ ion Gentr~s shaJJ • identically equipped .

)
Ref: HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-015-0 1
PAGE 10/12
Req 12
lE In order to duplicate the information on both servers, the consortium shall detail the different
procedures to update the main and the back-up servers .
In order to ensure a high level of availability and the shortest time of recovery, the servers shall be
installed in a different building than the operators .
Req 13
11' The active servers shall be located in the back-up OCC but the active operator's position
shall be located in the main OCC in Jeddah. On the same principle, the stand-by servers shall
be installed in the Jeddah, while stand by operator's position shall be located in the back-up
OCC . The consortium may present a different architecture provided it has the same level of
availability.
Passive server
Active Work Station
.:..... OCC Jeddah
LAN
Ticketing
.•' '•;
Stand-By·
Active server
occ
d-
Ref: HHR-LO-TE -403-SYS-0 15-D 1
PAGE 11/12
With this architecture, in the case of a disaster in Jeddah OCC, we lose the active
equipment (like GSM-R MSC, master clock ... ) but not the supervision . In the case of
disaster in the back-up OCC, we lose the supervision but not the active equipment. This
solution must be able to facilitate the disaster recovery plan.
Req 14
Ill The consortium shall define a disaster recovery plan in order to recover the supervision in
less than 8 hours.
For details on the availability of the system, please refer to the document
"Telecommunication functional program" reference HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-001 .
PAGE 12/12
i:JJ~~I .bgb¥1 tiD Ll:JI iiw.w gbl
SAUD I RA ILWAYS ORGAN IZATION

PHASE 2
. ~-:--.: }
-~ -
~ =--· -
' '
AUTOMATIC FARE COLLECTION

SPECIFICATIONS
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
AUTOMATIC FARE COLLECTION SPECI FICATIONS
A1 07/04/2009 First Issue L.FONTAINE
A2 20/04/2009 Modifications by Checking comments L. FONTAIN E
A3 22/04/2009 Modifications by Validation comments L.FONTAIN E
A4 24/04/2009 English language review G.DAVIES
81 02/06/2009 Final version after Linklaters comments L. FONTAINE
C1 29/06/2009 Final RFP L.FONTAINE
01 11/09/2009 Revi ew according to Linklaters's comment L.FONTAINE
PREPARED BY L. FONTAINE 11/09/2009
CHECKED BY D.MASSAT 11/09/2009 l (l I l V
VALIDATED BY G.NORMAND 11/09/2009 f!J

APPROVED BY C.SCHAN G 11/09/2009 ~ --~
~_,;;;-
~~ ~
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-D1 Automatic Fare Collection PAGE 2/64

AUTOMATIC FARE COLLECTION SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GLO SSARY AND DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................. 8

1.1 GLOSSARY .. ... ...... .... .. ...... .. .. ....... ........ ... ... .. ... .. ........................... .. ............. ................. ..... .. ... .. ..... ... .. ... .. ... .. ....... 8
1 .2 0EFINITI ONS ...... ... ................ .. ... ... .. ..... .... .. ..... ..... ... ... .... ... ... ... .. ...... ... ... ............ ....... ......... .... ... .. ..... .. .. ..... ... ... .... 8
;. ··-~·- · 2. INTRODUCTION - GE NERALITI ES ......................................................................................................... 12

2 .1 GENERALITIES .......... .. ... .. .. .. .. ...... ..... .. ... .. ................... ... ... .. .... ..... ... ...... .... .... ... ............... .. ......... ..... ... ......... ..... 12
2 .2RELATED D OC UMENTS ..... ... .. .. .................. .... .......... ........... ........ ... ...... ... ..... .... ....... ..... ... .. ..... .. .. ............ .......... 12
2 .30PERATING PHILOSOPH Y ............... .. ........ .. ...... ........ .. ........... ....... ................... .... ....... ....... ... .... .. .. ... ...... .. .. .. ... 12
2.4FARE C OLLECTI ON A REA ..... .. ........... .. ........ .. .. .... ... ... .... ... .. .. ....... .. ...... ..... .. ........ .... .... .... .. ........... ......... .. .... ..... 12
3. STANDARDS AND REFERENC ES .......................................................................................................... 13

3 .1 TI CKETS AND C ONTACT-L ESS C ARD S NORMS AND STANDARDS ........ .. .. ....... ..... .. ............. ............... .. ........... 13
3 .2FIRE SAFETY STANDARDS ... ................. .. .. ....... ... .. ... .. ....... ........ ..... .... ... ... ..... .. ........ .......... ............ .. ...... ... .. .. .... 14
3.30TH ER GEN ERAL STANDARD S ... ... ..... .. ...... .... ..... .. ... ... ... .. ... .. ... .. ... .. .... ... .. ... .. ..... .... ......... .. .... .......................... 14
4. OP ERATION PRINCIPLES ........................................................................................................................ 15

4.1 AFC CONTEXT ..... ... ... .. .. .. .......... ..... .... ..... ... ..... ... ...... ........ ...... ... .. ...... ................... ... ......... ..... ......... .... .... .... .... 15
4.2HHR NETWORK .. ..... .......... .......... ... .. ..... ...... ..... ... ...... ....... ... ... .. .. .. ..... ...... .. .... .. ........ ......... . ....... .. ..... .. ..... .. ..... .. 15
4. 2. 1 main characteristics of the line ........ .... .. ........ .. .. ..... ..... ......... ... .. .............. ....................... ..... .. .... .... ........ 15
4. 3RELATI ONSHIPS WITH OTHER TRAN SPO RTATION MODES .. ..... ... .. .... .... .. ...... ........ ... .. ... .. ... ... .. .... ... ......... ..... .... 16
4.4 FARE S TRUCTU RE AND PAYMENT ... ...... ....... ....... ... ..... ....... ...... .. ............. .... ...... ..... .......... ....... .... ... .. ......... ...... 16
4.4.1 General - Fare structure impact .. ........... .. ... ......................... .................... .... ............... ... .. ....... ....... ..... .. 16
4.4. 2 Fa re structure for Haramain High Speed Railway. .............. ... ...... ..... ... .. ......... .. ... .. ... .. .......... .. ... .... .... 16
4. 4.3 Payment practices ...................... .......... ...... ..... ... ..... ... .. ...... ......... ........... .. ............... ... .. .. .... ...... .. ............ 16
4.4. 4 Selling Principles .... .. .... ............... ..... ..... ....... ... ..... .......... .... ... ..... ...... .. .......... .. ..... ... ..... ........... .. ... ...... ... .. . 16
4. 4.5 Fare Policy .................. ... ..... .... .... ... ................... .. ................ .. .. ........ .. ... ....... .... ............... ............ ... ........ ... 17
4.4 .6 Fare Structure Evolution ...... ... ... .... ... .. .. .......... .................. .... ..... ............. ... ...... ...................... ......... .... ... 17
4.4. 7 Processing at exit gates .... ... .. ...... .... .... ....... .. .. .......... .... ... .. ........ ..... ....................... ... .... ... ... .. ... .. .... ... ... . 17
5. SCOPE OF WORK ....................................................................................................................................... 18
5.1 BASIC RE QUIRE MENTS ... .... ................ ........... ..... .... .... ....... .... ......... ..... ..... ..... ............. ...... ...... ........ .......... ..... .. 18
5.2WORK RE SPON SIBILITIES ....................... .. ....... .... .... ... ... ... ... ....... ..: .. .... ... ..... .. ... ...... ... ............. ..... ... ... .. ..... .. ..... 18
6. EXTERNAL INTERFACES ............................................................................................................... .......... 19

7. AFC BASIC DESIGN ................................................................................................................................... 20
7 .1 CLEARIN G HOU SE {LEVEL 4 ) _.... .... .. .. ... ... .... ... .... ...... ..... .. ................ .. ..... ~· :.,· ·~· ~ ·~ · ................ ... .. ....... 2 1
7 .2 CEN TRAL SERVER {LEVEL 3) .. ............ ........ .. ........ ....... ..... ... ..... ... .. ... ·· :}'*··· " ·" ·"-' ~ .. ·~ · ·· ....... ................. 21
7.3THE STATI ON LEVEL CONTROLLER SCU (LEV EL 2) : .... .... .. ... ... ..... . ··· i.,. .~ ,;i-:: ~.: ... ......
{,.r--:<(_:· ... ..... .. ............ 21
7 .4 0EVICES ( L EVEL 1): ... ... .... .... ...... ...... ... ... .... ..... ............... ... ... ... ..... .. , ..;/.( .... ..... .. . ~ .... ... ...~-:""... \, .. ...... .. ... .. ... .... 21
7.5MEDIA- TICKET , CARD {LEVEL 0): .. .. ..... ....... ................ ......... ...... .~ ... ..... .......1• . • . • •• .. ••• . • .~ •.. :t..:· ....................
21
r.fl '""· -
7 .6COMM UNI CATION S AND INTERFACES ... ..... .. .. ... ........... ..... ............ .. '> · •.> · · ~ · .. ··• ·: ·· · ······ '' ·· · · · ~.. ···· ·· ......... .... ... .. .. 21
7.6.1 Interfa ce 0-1- Media-Equipment .. ..... .. ..... ....... ... ... .... .. ..... ... ·..1-,.., .~'-'"/'o··~ · · · · · ···· · ··· · "':)?J?: . r§: ....... ... .... ... ... .. 22
7.6.2 Interfa ce 1-2 - Equipment-SCU. ....... ... ..... ................... .... ..... ... .
' I •
<;;·.
.' '~: :Lr,.r.,,.... .r:?..·,d.~' .... ...... ...... ........ 22
(\\V
7.6.3 Interface 2-3 - SCU-AFC Central Server ... ...... ...................... .... ... ... ..::·..:..... c.r: ~...................... .. ..... ... 22
Ref: HH R-LO-AF -403 -SYS-001-D1 Automatic Fare Collection PAGE 3/64

7. 6.4 Interface 3-4 -AFC Central Server-Clearing House ................... ............................... ....... ..... ... ......... 22
7 .7 ARCHITECTURE DIAGRAM .... ....... ... .... .. ... .. ... .. .. ... .... ................... ...... .. .. .... ..... .... ..... ..... ... ...... .... ..... ......... ......... 22
8. GENERAL OPERATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 24
8 .1 TICKET TECHNOLOGY - TICKET MEDIA ............ .... .. ....... .. .............. ... ... .... ... .. ......... ... .. ............ ....................... .. 25
8.2TYPES OF TI CKETS ............. .. .......... ... ..... ................ .. ....... ..... .. .. .. ..... .. ... ....... ..... .. ...... ............... .. ................... ... 25
8.2. 1 Single use Tickets (SJT) ..... .. .... ...... ......... ... ..... ............... .. .... ........ .. ... ....... ..... .. ........ .............................. 25
8.2.2 Stored Value Tickets (SVT) ... ..... ........ .......................................... ..................................... ..... .. .. .. ... .. .... 26
8.2.3 Pass and season Ticket .. ........................ .... .. .... ......................... ...... .. ..... ... .. .......... ...... ..... ................. .... 26
8 .3ACTORS ........ ... .... .......... ................. .. .. .... .. .. ... ..... ..... .... ... ... .... ... ....... ....... ..... ... .... ..... ..... .......... ......................... 26
8.3.1 Customers .................. ................... ... .......... .. ....... ..... .... .... ... .... .... .. .......... ... ......... ..................................... 26
8.3.2 AFC system provider ........................ ........ .......................... .. ................. ... ....... .... .. ............ ......... ............ 26
8.3.3 AFC system administrator ........ .. ..... .. ... .. ...... ..... .. ...... ..... ........... ........................... ............... ....... .. .. ... ... . 27
8.3.4 AFC card issuer.......... .. .... .... ..... .......... .................................. ... .. ..... ...... ........ .. ..... .. .. .. ...... ... .. ..... .......... ... 27
8.3.5 AFC magnetic ticket issuer ............ .... ... .... ... .. ... ... ...... .. ..... ...... .. ..... .... .. ... ... .. .. .... ........ ......... .. ... .. ... .. ... .. .. 27
8.3. 6 AFC Ticket Sale agent ... .. ....... .. ..... .. ... .............. .. ... .... .. ... .......... .. ......................................... ............. ..... 27
8.3. 7 AFC system operator and maintenance .... ... .. .. .. ... .. ............ ... .... ..... .. ... .......... .. ........ .. .. ............ .. ... .. .. .. 2 7
8.3.8 Transport Service provider ... ..... ..... .... ....... .. ... .. ... .. ....... .. ... .. ........... ..... .... .. ..... .. ... ..... .. ... ... ............ ......... 27
8.3.9 Conductor- enforcement ..................... .. ............... .................... ................ ..... ...... ..... ... ..... .. .......... .. ...... 27
8.3.10Remarks on actors ........ .................. ..... .. .. ... ... ... ..... .......... ................ ......... .. .. .. ................ ........ .. .. ... ......... 27
8.4USAGE CASES ........................................... .. ....... ... .......... .......................... .. ... .... ... ....... .. ... .... ... .......... ...... .. ..... 28
8.4.1 Customer using a single journey ticket ....... .. ............................................... .... .. ............ ...................... 28
8.4.2 Customer using a smart card .. ... ... ... .. ... ..................................... ................. .. .... .. .... .. ...... .. ...... .. ...... .. .. .. 28
8.4.3 Customer using Internet ... .. .. ..... ... ..... .. .... .... .. ... .... ... .... ... .. ..... ............. ...... ....... ... .. ... .. .... .... ... .... ... ........ ... 30
8 .5PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS ... .............. ................. .......... ....... ... ........... ........ ... ......... ..... ............. .. .... .. .. .... ..... 30
8. 5. 1 Management of special transportation events ..... .............. ........... .......... .... .... .. .................................. 30
8. 5. 2 Smart card procurement and delivery ........... .. .............................. ...... .. ............... .................. .. .. .. ...... .. 30
8.5.3 Revenue collection and accounting... ......... ... .......................... ... .... .. .... ....... .... ......... ... .. ... ........ ......... ... 31
8.5.4 Revenue allocation ............. .. .......... ..... ......... ... .. ... .. ....... ........ .. ........ ... ..... ....... ........................ .. ..... .. ..... .. 31
8.5.5 Payment by credit card....... .. .......... ... .. ..... .. .. ... .. ....... .. .. .... ........... .. ... .. ...... .... .. ... ........................ .. ..... .. .... 31
8.5.6 Cash Funds collection ... ... .. .. .... ........................ ............... ....... ..... .. ............ ............. .. .. ............ ... .. ... ........ 31
8. 5. 7 Equipment monitoring, operation and maintenance .. .. ......... ....... ..... ....... .... .. ... ........ .... .... ... .............. 32
8. 5. 8 Activity reports and Statistics .... .. ..... ... ... ... ..... .... ... .... .... .. ...... ... ..... ....... .. ... .. ... .... .. .... ..... ... .... ... ............. . 32
8. 5. 9 Fare evolution ........ .... ..... .... ... ..... ........ .............. .. ......................... .. .. .. ................ .. .................................... 33
8. 5. 10 Tickets Provision .................... ........... ................. ..... ........... .... ............................ ........ .. ............ ... ..... ....... 33
9. AFC FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................... 34
9 .1 FARE POLICY .............. ... .. ... .. .. ..... ...... .... ...... .. ............................... ...... .... .. .... ...... ..... ......... .. .. ... ... .......... .. ......... 34
9 .2SECURITY ................ ... .... .. ....... .. ........... .. .. ... .. ........ .......... .. .... .. .... .. ....... ... ... ......... ......... .. ... ........ ...... .. .... ..... ..... 35
9.2.1 Security of Cash and Valuable Equipment..................... .. ................... ... ... .. .. ................. ...... ......... ...... 35
9.2.2 AFC media and equipment security management .............. .. ..... ....................................... .. .... .... ....... 35
9.2.3 Security of transactions .................. ... .... .. ..... .. ... ... .. ..... ..... .... ...... .. .... ... .. .. ....... .. ..... .... .... .. ......... ....... ... ... . 35
9.2.4 Security of equipments and exchanges ...................................... .... .... ... .. ... ............... .. ............. .. ......... 35
9 .3CARDS PERSONALIZATION .. .... .. .. .. ...... .... ...... ... ... ... .... ..... .... ... .. ....... ... .... .. ......... .......... ........... .. .... ........ .. ........ . 36
9.4PROCEDURE WITHOUT NETWORK ....... ............. ............ ........ .......... ... .. ... ..... ......... ... ... ........... .... ... ... .... ... ...... .. . 36
9.5CUSTOMER CONTRACTS AND RELOAD ... .. : .. .... ............... .... ..... ... .. ..... ...... .... .... ......... ......... .... .. ... ...... ... ..... .. .... 36
9.5.1 Card in Black List ........................ .. .... .. ............................ .. .... .. .:................ ... .................................... ... .... 36
9.5.2 Card I · ··on ...... .. .. .. .. ...... .. .. ............. .. ............... ...... ...... .. .... .. .. .. ......................................... .. ..... ... .. ..... .. 37
9.5.3 ~ - -~ Q~t . ...................................... .... .. ... ...... .... .............. .. ... ... .. .. ........ .. ........... .. ... ....... .. ............. . 37
9.5.4 .nJit g2te,_V~iffl'?f; Cancelling ....................... .. .... ..... ... .......... ................ .......... ........ ..... .. ..... .......... .... 37
9.5. ..:tCioriPr'oJ ..~.·. ' ... .-:;:.. .-:-:.'.:., .... ..................... .. ......... .. ... ... .. ....... .. ... .. .................... .... ................... .... ..... ..... ..... ... . 37
9. t5 C:5ard lnf~rma iortd(s ay to Passengers ... ........ ... ..................... .... ... ............. .. .. .. ..... .. .... ...... ....... .... ... . 37
9. Zfl ~ard ~t of rder "t.:,··:1 ................. ... ....................................... .. ....... .. ......... ............................................. 37
9. 1,c'$;.1dJ.3.rcf.Wtthdrp. wal. ... -:-:h ....................................................................... ..... ......... ... .. ................................... 37
~ '; - fit Q'-' / /
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-00 1-D1 Aulomalic Fare Collection PAGE 4/64

9.7SPECIAL PROCEDURE .. .............. ............. .. ................. ..... ...... .......... .... .. ......... .... ...... ........ ......... ..... ... ...... ... ..... 39
1O.AFC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................... 41

10.1 TOM FUNCTIONS ...... .... ...... .......... ................ ............................. ...... .......... ... ........ ...... .. .......... ............... 41
10.1.1General Characteristics of the Ticket Office Machine (TOM) ..... .. .. ........................... ..................... .. 41
10.2 TVM FUNCTIONS .... ... ... .. ...... .. ..... ...... .. ................ ..... ... .... .. ... .................. .... .... ...... ... ..... .... ... ..... ... ........... 41
10.2. 1 General Characteristics of the Ticket Vending Machine (TVM) ........ .... .. ............. .. .......................... 41
10.3 ADD- FARE MACHINE FUNCTIONS ........... ............................. ......... ...... .. ..... .... ...... ..... ... .......... ........ .. .... ... 42
10.3.1 General Characteristics of the Add-fare Machine (AFM) ...... .. .. .. ...... .. .. ..... .. .. .................................. . 42
10.4 PCD FUNCTIONS ..... ..... ... ....... ..... ... ............................................... ...... .. ... .............. .. ......... ......... ..... ....... 43
10.4. 1General Characteristics of the Portable Control Device (PCD) ... .. .......... ................... .. .... ... .. ......... . 43
10.5 GATES ........................................................................................... ... ....... .... ..... .... ... ... ...... ..... .... ...... ...... .. 44
10.5.1 General Characteristics of the gates ................. ..... .. ....... .................. ... ................................................ 44
10.5.2Emergency procedures ..... ..... ..... .... ............ ....... ........... ....... ..... ... ......... ..... ... .... ...... ...... ..... ... ................. 46
10.6 STATION COMPUTER UNIT FUNCTION ............ .. .. ............................... .... .. ... .. .............................. ............ 46
10.6.1 General Characteristics of the SCU .......... .... .... .. ... ...... .. .......... ........ ... ......... .. .............. ... ..................... 46
10.6.2TVM, TOM and Gate Control and Management ...................................................... .......................... 47
10 .7 Cl M FUNCTIONS ........................ .. .... ...... ... ..... ... .. ............................... ......... .. ...... ............... .......... ..... .. .. .. 47
10. 7.1 General Characteristics of the Card Initialization Machine (Cl M} .. ............................................... ... 47
10 .8 AFC CENTRAL SERVER ................................. ............... .. .. ....... .... ........... .. .................. .... .... ... ...... .. .. ... ... 47
10.8. 1AFC Central Server Functions ..... .. ..... .... .. .. ...... ........... ... .... .. ...... ............................... ..... ...................... 47
10.9 DATA EXCHANGE BETWEEN EQUIPMENT UNITS ........... .. ................. .. .............. .. ..... ..... ....... ................... 48
10.10 CONTACT-LESS SMART CARD ........ .. ... ......... ........... .......................................... .. .... ..... ..................... ... ... 49
10.11 MAGNETIC MED IA ........ .. .. ... ...... ....................... .... ..... ...... ..... ... ...... .. ........................................ ............ ..... 49
10.12 MASTER CLOCK .............................. .................... .. .... ..... .... .. ....... .................. ............... ........................... 50
10 .13 CONTACT-LESS READERS ................... ............... .. ............. .......... .. ....... ...... .... .... ... ...... ..... .............. ........ 50
10.14 SAM .... ..................... ... .......... ........ .. ... ... ....... ... .. .. .. .. ..... ... ............................ ...................... .. ................... 50
11.BUILDINGS REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................. 51
11 .1 SPECIFIC RESERVATIONS ............................. .. .. .......... .. ................ .. ..... .. .. ......... .. ... .. ................... .. ... ....... 51
11 .2 CASH MANAGEMENT .... .... ........................ .. ............... ..... ... .. ......... .. ... .... .......... .. ...... .... ... ...... ... ...... ... ...... . 51
12.PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................... 53

12.1 OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ............. ........ .......... .. ............... .. ................ ... .... .. ......... 53
12.1.1 Contact-less media and reader performances ............ .. ................... ... .. .. ... ... .. .... ............................. .. 53
12.1.2Station equipment performances ................ ..... .. .............. .. ....... ...... .. .... ... .. ... .. .. .... .. .... ...... .... .... ... ..... ... . 53
12 .2 TECHN ICAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ........................... .. ..... .. ....... ... .. ... .................. .. .. ............... 53
12.2.1AFC system capacity .... ..... ..... .. .. ... ... .. ... .... ......... ........ .................. ............ ...... ........ .. ... ............. .......... .. .. 53
12.2.2Change at TVM .. .. .... ..... ...... .... ................................. .. .... .. ........... ........ .. ........ ................ ...... ... ............ ... .. 53
12.2.3Portable Checking Devices ... .... .... ........... ......... ... .. .. ............. ....... ... .. .. .... ....... ... ... ..... ....... ..................... 53
12.3 RAMS PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ....... .. .. ..... ........... .. ... ... .. ........................ ............. .......... .. ......... 53

15.PROC UREMENT, CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................... 58
16.SPECIFIC ENVIRONMENTAL CONSTRAINTS AND REQUIREMENTS .......................................... 59
16.1 EQUIPMENT OUTSIDE ............. ....... ...... .. ... .. .......... .... ...... ........................ ... .... ....... ........................... ...... .. 59
16.2 EQUIPMENT IN THE STATION OR CITY OFFICE .... ..... ........................... .... ...... .......... .... .... ........................ 59
16.3 EQUIPMENT IN COMPUTER TECHNICAL ROOM .. ............................ .......... ......... .. ....................... .. .. .. ........ 59
AUTOMATIC FAR E COLL ECTION SPEC IFICATIONS
Ref : HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -01 Aulomalic Fare Collection PAGE 6/64

PROJECT REFERENCES

1 HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-00 1 General Specifications
...to ...
HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-016
HHR-LO-CT-602-SAU-001
3 H HR-LO-F P-602-SYS-00 1 Fare Policy
...,...
•
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -0 1 Automatic Fare Collection PAGE 7/6 4

1. GLOSSARY AND DEFINITIONS
1.1 Glossary
The acronyms used in this document are detailed in the project glossary:
General Specifications - Section 2: Glossary (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-002)
1.2 Definitions
For the purpose of this document, the following terms and definitions apply .
Term Definition 8
The Government is the Project Owner and represents the Authority for
The Authority
this Work.
AFC Gate A ticket operated automatic gate to control the entry to and exit from the
paid area of station .
Alarm An audible and/or visual indication that can be remote or local.
Anonymous card Non personalized , non identified card .
This card could be a full fare card or a concessionary fare card (ie .
discounts for disabled , senior, family etc) depending on the passenger
category.
Assembly A physically self-contained or easily identified package whose integrated
parts, devices and structure perform a distinct function .
AFC Card Issuer This is an organization appointed to specify a Transport Card Application
and the characteristics of the card which support it.
Clearing House The processing and consolidation of transactional data/information
between relevant parties (consistent with an interoperable scheme) .
Component A single unit of hardware , often the lowest level of disaggregation
ordinarily assigned to parts and/or manufacturers listings.
Contact-less card A Smart Card , which transmits and receives data from a terminal by using
inductive coupler.
Contract Agreement between the user and the operator, that allows the user to use
the services of the operator, according to specified conditions .
Corrective The action taken to restore a failed item of equipment to an operable
Maintenance state .
Customer ~· ~. . ~erson who is entitled to use the services of a transport network in
IF':;:,· ~ .~ ~/~ ance with a contract with the supplier of those services .
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -0 1 Automati c Fare Coll ection PAGE 8/64

Customer Contract Agreement between the transport company and the customer defining the
conditions and regulations in force to provide and receive transport
services , to purchase and use tickets :
Contract generally includes
condition of ticket purchasing ,
price ,
condition of discount if any,
spatial validity (Origin I Destination),
number of trips,
start of validity date ,
end of validity date,
etc
Contract is defined by data elements stored in the contact-less cards.
Data element Data stored in the fare instrument (a contact-less card or a magnetic
ticket) to define and to describe the environment, holder, contracts, and
events etc
•~;--_-:.. ::.
-~7;
Distribution point A place where passenger can 'buy' a contact-less card or reload it.
Along the line, distribution points are located in the stations .
Electronic purse Electronic folder managed by the banks that can be put in a transportation
card chip.
Emergency Exit Gate A swing gate which can be opened by pushing a push-bar, in the case of
an emergency.
Employee Pass A ticket issued to transit employees which may be valid for travelling
throughout the transport system .
Entry An AFC Gate wh ich permits access from free to paid areas when a valid
ticket is presented to the gate . The barrier of the entry gate must prevent
passenger movement from the paid to free area unless such operation is
desired, for emergency conditions, under passenger agent's supervision.
Exit An AFC Gate which permits access from paid to free areas when a valid
ticket is inserted in the console associated with this gate . The barrier of
the exit gate must prevent passenger movement from free to paid area .
For emergency condition , it will operate under agent's supervision (direct
or remote MMI control).
Fare gates A set of AFC gates where passengers must possess a valid ticket to enter
or leave the "paid " area .
Fare instrument All devices that can be used as means of paying the fare : as an example ,
contact-less card or magnetic ticket is fare instrument.
Fare product A marketed specification of the conditions of access to a passenger
transport service or services , determining the usage rules , pricing rules
and commercial rules .
Fare Table A matrix of all fare charges between any two destinations .
Free Area Station area between the entry/exit gates and the station entrances/exits
Gate Array (Line) A group of fare gates in a line , at a fare co~t_a~ ;J-:~
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-01 Automatic Fare Collection PAGE 9/64

Host Computer Any computer system composed of hardware and software, which
exercises full or partial supervisory control over a subsidiary computer
system or which collects and assimilates data from a subsidiary computer
system . Any computer system may be host to one or more subsid iary
systems .
Identified card Information in the back-office (or in the card) that can provide a card
identification number (or other ID number in the card) as the cardholder
reference. This can be used to provide functions like automated value
reloading (i.e . 'top-ups')
lntermodality Possibility for a user to use several transportation modes which constitute
a complete trip.
For example :
Leg one- Bus from home to HHR station X
Leg two- HHR from the station X to station Y
Leg three - Bus from station Y to final destination
lnteroperability The interoperability enables a passenger to travel with the same ticket on
different operator networks . This can be achieved using a Central
Clearing House in charge of data collection (revenue collected , usage of
ticket, etc) to allocate revenue between operators.
Key (security key) An alphanumeric string of characters which is used to control access to
an application or product such as an entry to a security check or
computer.
Master clock The clock that maintains the current date and time and is the reference for
the AFC Gates , ticket office machines , station computer etc .
Mode Transportation system (railway, metro, light rail, buses, etc)
Module A functional replaceable sub-assembly installed in an item of fare
collection equipment.
Organizing Authority Name of the authority which defines transport policy (including the service
offering, service quality, investment, fares etc) and then selects its
operators of choice, usually after a competitive tendering .
Paid Area The station area between the entry gate array and the platform where
passengers have paid the appropriate fare to gain access .
Passenger A person who purchases and uses a ticket to enter the paid area of a
station.
Passenger transport A passenger transport operator or operators or a public authority
enterprise responsible for passenger transport policy and support, or a consortium
involving both types of organisations. The passenger transport enterprise
is responsible for the marketing of fare products.
Personalization Operation consisting of registering on (graphically) or in (electronically)
the contact-less card all data related to the card holder or rules with
respect to usage of the card .
f. ~b~~~
i'jij(~-. . ,.,,<.:_"4·~,'· ·
D
Device used by inspectors to check the validity of a ticket or a contact-
less card .
' ~re-pe"'rlOrralf. ~of'~ Operation carried out by the supplier of cards which consists in fixing
1 certain elements of the structure of the card (mapping , secret codes etc.)
.~
I '
I -~
\
\
""\-1-
-:;
~ ·~/t
--
/) ., ·
....
r-0Q.
:\,.•
1
't.'';
c::-
and/or graphic elements . These elements do not depend on the
characteristics of the holder.
0.'11i~- : Pro;r;c'? : p~j'
1 '
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-0 1 Automatic Fare Collection P AGE 10/64

Profile Personnel rights granted by an operator or a public transport authority to a

customer to justify certain statutes. These personal rights make it possible
to determine the applicable pricing.
Reversible Gate An AFC Gate which can be set to operate either as an entry gate or as an
exit gate .
Smart card An intelligent media used to carry the passenger transport contract and
validated at the AFC Gates.
Stored Value Ticket. A ticket with stored travel rights, the memory chip is loaded with electronic
tokens by Point Of Sales. Fare is deducted from the Stored Value Ticket
by the Exit Gates.
Station A boarding/alighting facility at a designated point on the system
alignment.
Terminal A station located at the end of the line.
TOM (Ticket Office Agent operated Sale machine able to sell tickets, create and reload cards.
.• , Machine)
Tool Base For A Base Unit on/in which the portable checking machines are plugged
Portables checking on/into after inspector service to:
Machines - Reload the batteries,
- Download data stored during the inspector service ,
- Load data (black list, fare table etc) from the Central Server, to be
used in the next service.
Transport card A file structure, directory entries, software, and security process loaded
application onto a smart card and te rminal to perform a particular function . There may
be one or more application(s) on a card or inside a terminal.
TVM (Ticket Vending Automated (passenger operated) sales machine able to sell tickets,
Machine) create or reload cards.
J-
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -0 1 Automatic Fare Collection PAGE 11/64
2. INTRODU CTION - GENERALITI ES
This document describes the Automatic Fare Collection System (AFC) to be implemented on the
HHR. The system will ensure that the correct payment is made by passengers (customers) for the
services supplied by the operator.
2.1 Generalities
The chapters below highlight the required characteristics of the AFC system for the HHR.
2.2 Related Documents
In addition to this document, other documents relevant to delivery of the AFC system , within the
--
:-·._.
overall project, are listed in the Project References chapte r.
2.3 Operating Philosophy
HHR stations will be staff-operated. The stations will essentially be split into separate areas : a 'free '
(unpaid) area and a 'paid ' area , the separation between these areas is provided by fare gates at
suitable locations in the stations .
A passenger can enter the paid area only through the insertion of a valid ticket, or by presenting a
valid smart card , to the entry fare gates .
The fare collection system is based on an origin I destination fare structure . The information , such
as ticket amount (single or multi-journey) and fare amount is encoded on the ticket or the card . The
ticket will be read and updated automatically by the fare gates when the passenger enters or exits
the paid area.
2.4 Fare Collection Area
Station fare collection gates shall be located across the main flow of the passengers between the
concourse (hall) entrance and the entrances of the boarding areas (waiting rooms , stairs ,
escalators, and/or elevators) . The minimum distance from either end of the fare gates to any
obstruction should be nominally four (4) metres (which has associated impacts on station design
and gate dimensions) .
AFC equipment should be installed to permit complete visual surveillance from the Station Control
Room , or the Ticket Offices.
Req 01 Means shall be provided to properly secure the TVM and the fare gates .
Furthermore, it shall be possible to quickly release (open) the fare gates for evacuation
J
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-40 3-SYS-001-0 1 Automati c Fare Collection P AGE 12/64
Req 03 The AFC system shall be designed and built to appropriate industry standards and in
compliance with the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia standards, as well as ISO standards and
references.
Req 04 When international or local standards do not exist, then European CEN standards, or
other appropriate if CEN is not applicable, shall be used .
Req 05 The norms and standards given in this chapter shall be applied for the AFC system.
3.1 Tickets and Contact-less Cards Norms and Standards
ISO 7816- Identification cards

Identification cards - Integrated circuit(s) cards with contacts
Part 1: Physical characteristics
Part 2 : Dimensions and locations of the contacts
Part 3 : Electronic signals and transmission protocols
Part 4: Inter-industry commands for interchange
ISO 14 443 - Proximity contact-less smart card

Identification cards - Contact-less integrated circuits cards
Proximity cards
Part 1: Physical characteristics
Reference to ISO 7810 (Card dimensions) and ISO 10373 (test methods)
Part 2: Radio frequency power and signal interface
Reference to ISO 10373 tests methods
Part 3: Initialisation and Anti-collision
Part 4: Transmission Protocol
ISO 10373
Identification cards - Test methods
Part 1: General characteristic tests
Part 2: Cards with magnetic stripes
Part 3: Integrated circuit(s) cards with contacts
Part 4:
Part 6:
Part 7:
EN 1545
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-01 Automatic Fare Collection P AGE 13/64

Identification card system - Surface transport applications (European pre standard)

Part 1: General data elements
Part 2: Transport payment related to data elements
lATA -International Air Transport Association

lATA ATB-2 Magnetic ticket format (if magnetic tickets are proved more appropriate than
contact-less cards)
IFM - lnteroperable fare management system - norms

ISO CEN 24014-1
- Public transport - lnteroperable fare management system (IFM) - Part 1: Architecture
To be used to prepare integration of other entities activity such as new distribution channels, card
and application management, new transport operator (other lines operator), new transport related ·..
service providers.
3.2 Fire safety standards
NFPA- National Fire Protection Association

NFPA 130 Standard for Fixed Guideway Transit and Passenger Rail Systems
3.3 Other General standards
• Ethernet TCP/IP
To be used for equipment connections and machine-to-machine dialogue.
• System to network (Ethernet, Wi-Fi, TCP/IP)
• Device monitoring (SNMP)
• Data exchange (XML, FTP, HTTP, SMTP ... )
• Time synchronisation (NTP)

4. OPERATION PRINCIPLES
4.1 AFC Context
The system is based on mandatory reservation for any traveller.
Req 06 The AFC system shall be able to manage the entire HHR line by means of a simple
change of configuration and equipment deployment.
4.2 HHR network
4.2.1 MAIN CHARACTERISTICS OF THE LINE
; ·······
. ~ :=··
Length About 450 kms
Number of Stations, including terminal stations 5
The HHR line is forecast to attract a daily ridership of about 400,000 passengers by 2042.
The stations will be designed to cope with peak hour passenger flows as below
The peak-hour passenger load per hour in 2042 for the HHR line is forecast to be:
Nstop Station Boarding Alighting

1 Makkah Central 11 110 8 458
2 Jeddah City 11 882 13 615
3 Jeddah Airport 1 068 1 068
4 KAEC 3 929 4 178
5 Madinah Terminal 1 608 2 278
Total 29 597 29 597
The figures above are given for information only . The latest and detailed information relating to the
traffic forecast is given in the Basic Service Plan document (HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-001 ).
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SY S-001 -0 1 Autom atic Fare Collection PAGE 15164

0
4.3 Relationships with other transportation modes
In keeping with the requirements for a fully interoperable system , the AFC system shall be able to
exchange data with all future potential operators.
Req 07 The AFC system shall be open and flexible enough to accept the integration, in the
future , of other transportation modes and associated services, such as buses, coaches or
car parks, and to share revenue allocation with other operators.
4.4 Fare Structure and payment
4.4.1 GENERAL- FARE STRUCTURE IMPACT

Worldwide , many factors apply constraints on AFC systems functionalities and structures . The
following examples are noted:
• Fare structure: flat fare , zonal fares , 0/D (origin destination), by distance , time , etc,
• Product range : passes (including concessionary), single journey, stored value , etc,
• Access control equipment: open network with ground validation , open network with on-board
validation , closed network with entry validation , closed network with entry and exit validation ,
• Manual (agent) control policy: no control, random on-board control, random paid area control ,
etc,
• Ticket technology: contact-less only, contact-less and magnetic, contact-less and paper, etc.
• Media life cycle for infrequent customer: single use (not recyclable) , multi users (ability to
reload) multi users (with ability to reload and deposit), fully recyclable (exit gate 100% control
mandatory),
• Ticket media type (card and single use low cost ticket, card and multi usage, card only
including recycle , etc.),
All equipments are compatible with ticket and card technology standards.
4.4.2 FARE STRUCTURE FOR HARAMAIN HIGH SPEED RAILWAY

The fare structure for the HHR is based on an origin I destination fare.
Thus, the price will be fixed according to the different trips (Makkah- Jeddah , Makkah-Madinah ,
Jeddah-KAEC, etc) and the class of travel (economy or first class).
Details of the different fares can be found in the Fare Policy document (HHR-LO-FP-402-SYS-001 ).
4.4. 3 PAYMENT PRACTICES
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-00 1-0 1 Automatic Fare Collection P AGE 16/64

All kinds of tickets and cards shall be sold or reloaded at TOMs and TVMs .
Personalized cards shall not be sold by TVM , but they can be reloaded at a TVM .
Req 09 In addition to selling points in stations (TOM and TVM) , the AFC system shall be
expandable to allow selling by agencies or external retailers.
Req 10 Furthermore, the system shall allow selling of tickets and ticket reservations through the
Internet.
4.4.5 F ARE POLICY
The Government will define the fare policy and the ticketing range.
,<:o.-. 4.4.6 FARE STRUCTURE EVOLUTION
Req 11 Fare tables shall be designed to be modified by changing parameters only. Redesign of
software shall not be necessary. This modification shall be carried out by operator staff.
Req 12 The AFC system shall be provided to modify or create new fares in the fare table and
update all equipment with the new fare tables.
4.4. 7 PROCESSING AT EXIT GATES
When a passenger leaves the system , the exit gate shall capture the inserted ticket or card if it
cannot be used any more (no value or no trip left in the ticket).
The captured cards and tickets will be recycled for future use in the system .
Operational staff shall gather the captured cards and tickets for recycling in the system.
:-_;,
'-:- -;:
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-00 1-0 1 Automati c Fare Collection P AGE 17/64

5. SCOPE OF WORK
5.1 Basic Requirements
The basic requirements for the fare collection system are:

• The AFC system shall provide facilities for the Consortium to set-up or change the fare policy
on the network . The transfer of new fare tables to TVMs, control access gates and other AFC
equipment shall be automatic;
• That it shall control access to the paid area and guarantee that the relevant fare payment is
made for all trips . Entry and exit gates shall be implemented to mark off the paid area ;
• The AFC system shall be expandable to future transport operators and to other rail lines (for
example Landbridge) and other transport mode networks, such as bus and car parks ;
• That it shall use tickets with contact-less technology preferably, or magnetic tickets if more
appropriate ;
··.:.·-
·._:_-/
• That it shall be easy to extend the system to allow sale of tickets by remote agencies or
retailers ;
• The AFC system shall provide for automatic delivery of tickets from TVM by insertion of cash
(coins , bank notes) and giving change . lt shall provide for automatic delivery of tickets from
TVM by payment by international credit card ;
• That it shall record all transactions and provide detailed reports of each sale or validation , and
errors;
• lt shall allow customers to purchase and reserve tickets through the Internet;
• lt shall allow for ticket delivery across all selling locations ;
• lt shall be designed for cash collection , with maximum security levels;
• lt shall cater well for disabled users .
5.2 Work Responsibilities
The Consortium shall be responsible for the following activities with respect to the delivery of the
AFC system for the HHR line :
• Detailed design of the system ,
• Providing the required pieces of equipment,
• Installation of the system in stations and in central buildings,
• Verification and testing of the system ,
• Commissioning ,
•
• the tools and spare parts necessary for
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-0 1 Au tomatic Fare Collection P AGE 18/64

6. EXTERNALINTERFACES
The table below gives the list of the different external interfaces linked to the AFC system.
Externa l System or Entity Interface with AFC system Interfacing item
Telecommunications Multi-Service Network AFC data
Telecommunications Master Clock Date and Time as reference
occ ECMS/SCADA AFC Alarms
Power Supply Power supply Low voltage power supply
Civil works Station I Buildings Ground space reservations for

equipment and admin istrative offices
Civil works Station ground Equipment weight:
weight can reach 500kg on less than
1 square meter on the ground
Banks Credit card Buyer credentials
Clearing entity (if any) Clearing AFC Statistics and billing information
Internet Bookings Ticket reservation and/or selling
--~-·
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -01 Automatic Fare Collection P AGE 19/64
7. AFC BASIC DESIGN
This description is based on international levels commonly used in the AFC domain.
Level 4: One Central Body- Organizing Authority
Card Management, Clearing House, Settlement, Reconciliation , Reporting ...
Level 3: (one or many) AFC system Central Server

At least, one central server is mandatory to manage the HHR implementation.
Equipment management and monitoring.
Date collection, statistics.
Level 2: On-Site (Station or other partner) Concentrator- station controller unit (SCU)
SCU station concentrator for all equipments (col lates all information).
Option: Separated distribution/sale machine concentrator and access control (Gates) management
concentrator.
Level 1: Devices (Front-end Devices)

Distribution I sale: TOM, TVM, Points of sale.
Access control: Gates, Control devices.
Level 0: AFC Medias (cards, tickets)
This is illustrated in the diagram below and includes provision to add more distribution/sale points
for retailers .
The example here after is based on a single operator and an external distribution channel.
Level4 Clearing House - Revenue allocation
Level 3 AFC operation centre- Distribution management (TVM, TOM, .. . )
Level 2
cards or tickets issued
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-00 1-01 Automatic Fare Collection PAGE 20/64

7.1 Clearing House (Level 4)
In the case of a single operator of all cards and tickets in use, the role of the Central Body can be
undertaken by the operator, since all revenues are dedicated to that operator.
In case of multi operators, a Central Body operates a clearing house to allocate revenue to each
operator.
7.2 Central Server (level 3):
lt provides the functions to manage all equipments under its responsibility. lt also manages stocks,
revenue, fare collection and is responsible for forwarding all relevant information/data to the Central
Body. Its role shall be:
• Accounting, administrative and statistical functions: accounting of the receipts, statistics
around sales and traffic levels, distribution of receipts, central management of transactions etc
• Functions of commercial management: management of the users and the cards,
• Pricing functions: creation , modification, removal of identical pricing tables and identical
configuration tables for equipment. The central system must provide practical and effective
tools to staff in charge of pricing activities, so that they can easily use the pricing functions,
• Security management, black list management and other information which allows for
supervision of card usage and detection of fraud , controls flows, management of the secret
keys etc
• Technical management of the equipment: Centralisation of the alarms history which makes it
possible to have a global vision of the behaviour of the equipment.
7.3 The Station Level controller SCU (Level 2):
The Station Level Controller provides equipment monitoring and a first level of equipment
management.
Station operators where the ticket vending machines, ticket office machines and entry and exit
access gates are installed need to have some local command to operate equipment depend ing on
the local context:
Gate direction (entry I exit) configuration to adapt the station configuration in response to the
passenger flow
• Emergency gate opening
City ticket office or external retailer locations can also be considered as Level 2 locations.
7.4 Devices (Level 1):
Device level includes all AFC equipment such as TVM , Ga1e, POS, etc
7.5 Media- ticket, card (Level 0):
7.6 Communications and Interfaces

Data communications for the AFC system, including information related to banking and finance,
shall use the multi-service network deployed for the HHR project. AFC information security shall be
included in the data exchanged over the network, and not in the commun ication network itself.
Authorization procedures, reliable data, etc. rely on certificates and signatures based on secret
keys available for the concerned entities.
For bank information, such as authorization, black listing, payment data gathering etc, the security
data is included in the protocols of the local credit-card respon sible entity.
7.6. 1 INTERFACE 0-1 - M EDIA -E QUIPMENT

This interface shall be compliant with the applicable standards.
7. 6. 2 INTERFACE 1- 2 - EQUIPMENT-SCU
Communications between Equipment and SCU use the multi-service network in side a station. This
network offers Ethernet port (RJ 45) 10/100 Base TX.
The interface should use TCP/IP protocols.
7.6.3 INTERFA CE 2- 3 - SCU-AFC C ENTRAL SERVER .....·.
Communications between SCU and AFC Central Server use the multi-service network along the
line. This network offers Ethernet port (RJ 45) 10/100 Base TX .
The interface should use TCP/IP protocols.
IReq 13 Complete and detailed documentation of Interface 2-3 shall be provided .
7.6.4 INTERFACE 3 -4 - AFC CENTRAL S ERVER-CLEARING HOUSE
If it is used, this interface uses WAN connections.
IReq 14 Complete and detailed documentation of Interface 3-4 shall be provided .
7.7 Architecture Diagram
An example of architecture for the AFC system is given in the diagram below. This diagram is given
as an indication only and shall not be considered as a system requirement. The Consortium shall
be fully responsible for the design and for proposing the final architecture of the AFC system.
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-0 1 Automatic Fare Collection PAGE 22164

.. ...' . ..
•.
AFC General Architec ture

Organising Authority
HHR Authority
Call cas h collector
Call Maintenance Marketing, Card

Link to bank network
HHR Accounting & Cashier Personalisation Portable base
Control Center AFC Central Level services Center
Ticketing Central Server Portable
CJDD checking
Machines
Multis ervice Backbone
Ticket1ng
M'&J.~~'l,9
Passenger ticket level
f{2 Smart card or s ingle u s e ticket

0
er
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -01 Automatic Fare Collection PAGE 23/64
The AFC system shall ensure manual and automatic ticket sale and control of the tickets at station
entries and exits. it shall also provide accounting records and traffic statistics to the HHR operator.
The AFC system shall provide equipments and functions to :

• sell tickets ,
• collect the fare from the ticket when the passenger travels,
• follow revenu e collection,
• manage the stock of tickets,
• allow revenue allocation in the case of multi operators involved.
The AFC system shall:

• prevent fraud by
o secure ticket technology,
o secure procedures for managing 'security keys' ,
o secure revenue accounting processes,
o securing (physically) the cash collectors,
o securing the system functions.
• provide high performance equipment for
o Gate access control (high speed),
o Ticket vending machines (high speed , easy to use).
• provide a reliable and cost effective system.
AFC system equipments are included in the transportation network, mainly in the stations, and use
other transport system services such as the communication network (to communicate between
AFC equipments or with external entities), or the OCC when events or alarms must be managed by
an operator .
IC/1
ir m
I -,J.
;:: ~,
c.,.~ - o onitor!A C station equipments,
.....~ "'!..:: ,··
'·)~ ~J,, p o Prrnt .$t-a· sties and reports.
~:-, ,
1 rr,jr· .. "' /)
t~~~~(i tor level:
o Collect and forward data (sale, gate, fund transfer, etc),
o Monitor all stations and equipments,
Ref : HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-01 Automatic Fare Collection PAGE 24/64

o Issue statistics ,
o Manage relations with the bank for credit card payment.
• At Central Clearing House and lnteroperability Centre level
o Collect all necessary operator data (card transactions , revenue collected, card
validation etc),
o Manage smart card procurement, security and after sales support,
o Manage card image.
8.1 Ticket technology- Ticket media
Ticket technology is a key determining factor in the AFC system functionalities.

Ticket technology shall guarantee :
• automated access control (machine readable) ,
• high performance for passenger flow, matching with gate performance ,
• high security to prevent fraud ,
• cost effective solutions for equipment cost, maintenance and ticket stock,
• long lasting investment with commonly adopted field proven technology.
A modern technology often deployed in transportation systems , proximity contact-less cards or

contact-less thin tickets , can be read just by presenting the 'media' close to the reader (0 to 8 cm).
Contact-less access gates are passenger-friendly and provide high throughputs and high levels of
reliability .
Req 15 Although it is the Government intention to use contact-less cards as ticket media, the
Consortium shall study the use of magnetic tickets and propose it to the Government if it
is found to be more appropriate than a contact-less card .
Req 16 The main ticket technology for the AFC system shall be contact-less cards, unless it is
proved magnetic tickets are more appropriate for all or some contracts (such as single
trips)
Req 17 Each media type shall be pre-personalized as much as the technology allows it.
Req 18 Aesthetic and tactile elements shall be proposed by the Consortium for each media-type .
8.2 Types of tickets
There are two main types of tickets used nowadays in AFC systems: the single journey ticket (SJT)
and the stored value ticket (SVT) . Smart cards are an electronic form of ticket very useful for stored
value tickets.
Req 19 The AFC system shall be able to support, with no modification , different levels of price.
8. 2. 1 SINGLE USE TiCKETS {SJT)
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-40 3-SYS-0 01-0 1 Automati c Fare Collection

8.2.2 STORED VALUE TICKETS (SVT)

This is a simple debit card that is read by any fare gate, usually implemented on contact-less card .
On the entry gate, the card reader will record the starting point of the trip; when passing the exit
gate, the gate reader will calculate the required fare and withdraw it from the stored value. In case
of cost exceeding the stored value, the passenger will have to reload the card at an add-fare
machine (AFM).
8.2.3 PASS AND SEASON TICKET

No pass and season ticket will be implemented in the Automatic Fare Collection policy, but
provision for such use in the future shall be taken into account.
8.3 Actors
The AFC system has to deliver different functions and services to different actors .
We describe here the actors and use cases to clarify the functions of the AFC system .
8.3.1 CUSTOMERS
Customers use the HHR transportation systems as passengers. The terms Customer or Passenger
are equivalent in this document.
8.3.2 AFC SYSTEM PROVIDER

The AFC system provider will use the system during the installation phase and performance tests
to verify that actions are performed correctly until the full completion of the installation or extension
(reliability report, alarm management, log, and equipment MTBF follow-up).

8.3.3 AFC SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR
The AFC system administrator is in charge of system administration including the management of
system (and functions), access authorization for AFC staff, transport seNice providers staff, as well
as AFC equipments management and external system authorization (M2M - Mach ine to Machine
Interface).
8.3.4 AFC CARD ISSUER
The company issuing HHR smart cards used in the AFC system by the customers (customer card) ,
or by authorized agent (agent card) .
HHR smart cards may be used by other seNice provider (Bus , Parking ... )
8. 3. 5 AFC MAGNETIC TICKET ISSUER
The ticket issuer is the company that buys and delivers HHR magnetic tickets used in the AFC
system by the customers.
Tickets are only used in the HHR network.
'F: ·· 8. 3. 6 AFC TICKET SALE AGENT
Personnel who are allowed to deliver AFC cards or deliver single use ticket.
8.3. 7 AFC SYSTEM OPERATOR AND MAINTENANCE
This entity is in charge of managing the AFC Ticketing System operation and maintenance.
This includes the Clearing House function, revenue collection and fare allocation and associated
settlements.
8.3.8 TRANSPORT SERVICE PROVIDER
A transport company (operating the transport network) using the AFC system to control the
passenger access to the se Nice.
The HHR operator will be the Transport SeNice provider. Each new line may have a different
service provider.
8.3.9 CONDUCTOR - ENFORCEMENT
Conductors are responsible for organizing the control of passenger ticket validation processes in
the paid area .
8.3.10 R EMARKS ON ACTORS
The same organization may act as many actors, for example be responsible for issu ing cards,
Sing le Ticket sale, SVT transaction audits and card management.
l_.•
Ref : HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-01 Automatic Fare Collection PAGE 27/64

8.4 Usage cases
The main goal of this section is to demonstrate , by means of worked examples , some of the
requirements of the ATC system and illustrate how the system is expected to behave in response
8.4. 1 CUSTOMER USING A SINGLE JOURNEY TICKET
Buying a ticket
The customer must buy a single journey ticket of the value corresponding to the origin and
destination of the journey.
Tickets can be bought on the Internet, in agencies (if applicable) and in all HHR stations that have
automated TVM machines and Ticket office machines .
At TVM , the payment can be made by coins , bank notes , credit and debit card .
The passenger receives a ticket. This ticket is created at the time of delivery. Data in the ticket
indicates information such as destination , seat number, class , departure and arrival times , station
of delivery, value paid , date and time of delivery, other information as appropriate .
Entering the network

The customer must present the HHR ticket at entry gates equipped with Readers .
During entry (as well as exit) the passenger shall be informed of the valid transaction "Pass" and if
applicable the amount of remaining value in the HHR card or ticket. The trip destination shall also
be displayed to the customer.
Leaving (exit) the network

The customer must present the HHR ticket at the exit gate . The exit gate shall capture the ticket for
future reuse in the network.
If the fare value in the ticket is not sufficient for the journey travelled , the gate will remain closed
and a message shall be displayed to the passenger. In this case , the customer will have to pay
some extra value to be able to exit.
Adding extra value in the paid area will require the passenger to locate and use an add-fare
machine (which will be readily available).
8.4.2 CUSTOMER USING A SMA RT CARD
Ref: HH R-LO-AF-403-SYS-00 1-0 1 Automati c Fare Collection PAG E 28/64

During entry (as well as exit) the passenger shall be informed of the valid transaction "Pass" and if
applicable any remaining amount of value on the HHR card or ticket. The trip destination shall also
be displayed to the customer.
Customer using the card for boarding (invalid card)

If the customer presents an invalid card (no-value , negative value, invalid card , no reservation for
the current day) , the transaction shall be rejected with an audible alarm, a visual 'red' light and a
message displayed with the reason of the rejection.
Customer using the card for exit (valid card)

When the customer presents a valid card at the exit gate, the gate computes the fare and deducts
it from the card . If the final value is negative, two strategies can be applied :
• cards with a deposit, if the deposit is larger than the negative value , then the final value of the
card will be negative,
• if there is no deposit, or the deposit is too small, then exit is not allowed , and the passenger
must pay an extra fare to exit the station.
The final negative value cannot be more than the deposit, and shall be recovered at the next add
value transaction .
machine (which will be readily available).
Customer using the card for exit (invalid card or invalid trip)
If the customer presents an invalid card at the exit gate the transaction shall be rejected with an
audible alarm , a visual 'red' light and a message displayed with the reason of the rejection. In such
a case the passenger will have to pay some extra value to be able to exit.
machine (which will be readily available) .
Automatic Fine collection

If the customer presents a valid card but its shows he has made a trip for which he has not paid
(i.e. travelled further than the purchased ticket permits , or there is some other reason permitting a
fine to be issued), then the fine is deducted from the card value even if the card has a negative
value . The customer will not be able to enter the station 'paid' area until he has been to a reload
distribution point to read and validate the fine collected, and possibly reload value on the card .
Customer with non-functioning card at exit

If the customer card is un-readable at exit gate th.e customer must present the card to a transport
agent. The transport agent will check the card (with PCD) and if the card is un-readable, the agent
will note the card number (for black-listing) , return the card to the customer and opens the manual
door to let the customer exit the network. The customer will have to present his broken card to a
point of sale to have a card exchange.
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-01 Automati c Fare Collection

8.4.3 CUSTOMER USING INTERNET
Using the Internet is in fact a process for performing ticket bookings , not for buying tickets directly .
The process is as follows :
Buying the ticket at home
The customer prepares his trip and books a ticket through Internet. He does not print the ticket but
a receipt showing the booking information : destination , train , trip date and hour, seat, etc. He can
also pay the ticket at home with a credit card .
Retrieving a valid ticket in station

With his receipt , the customer goes to a station or a point of sale where he can get a valid ticket
corresponding to the reservation . This contact-less (or maybe magnetic) media is then used for
entering or exiting the network just like if it was bought in station , and validated the same way.
There is no need to control the receipt at the gates , this receipt being for the customer information
only.
8.5 Particular requirements
8.5.1 MANAGEMENT OF SPECIAL TRANSPORTA TION EVENTS
In case of an operational incident, the customer will not have to pay the fare .
- Free exit on incident:

The station agent shall have a local (or remote) command (at the station level) to switch the exit
gate to a "free exit mode". The command may be a MMI command on the monitoring console or a
special contact-less 'Free mode' card to toggle the AFC Reader mode .
During the "free exit mode", the AFC reader shall update the value of the card and shall send a
transaction to the SCU (station controller) .
- Free exit on system or AFC Reader failure :
In case of system or AFC reader failure , the transport agent will open the large human control gate
and will deliver an 'AFC System Interruption Manifest' to be used by the customer as a voucher to
be presented at the point of distribution to 'release' the card from 'entered' status to 'exit' status at
no charge .
8. 5.2 S MA RT CA RD PROCUREMENT AND DELIVER Y
Req 20 The AFC system shall provide functions to register all cards received from the AFC card
issuer. The AFC system shall provide functions io-follbw the usage of the card delivered
to the customer and cards returned from the customer or cards out-of-service .

8. 5.3 REVENUE COLLECTION AND ACCOUNTING
Req 21 AFC security functions shall include:

I[ Management of revenue collection
I[ Transfer of credit card transactions to the Bank operator
I[ Accounting and reporting :
o Selection of a specific period
o Sorting by station
8. 5.4 REVENUE ALLOCATION
Req 22 The AFC system shall integrate an interface to exchange with a clearing house that will
be in charge of the revenue allocation.
8.5.5 PAYMENTBY CREDITCA RD
Req 23 The AFC system shall provide functions to accept international credit card payments, to
provide a connection to card authorization centre and send the payments details to the
bank or other financial institution .
8. 5. 6 CASH FUNDS COLLEC TION
The AFC system shall provide means for managing cash with maximum security.
Req 24 For the purpose of cash collection , the following shall be provided :
11: Safe offices and rooms with safe cases in locations where cash is planned to be stored ;
111: A secured access to the Ticket Vending Machines in stations, allowing cash collection and
loading out of the sight of customers;
11: Ramps or lifts instead of stairs, inside the stations, so that a hand trolley can be used;
lE Easy road access for vehicles moving cash funds.
1-
Req 25 During Cash collection, two reports shall be printed :

111: One for the collection agent,
11: One for the station manager.
A copy of the cash collection shall be sent to the accounting department.

The cash collection shall be sent to the AFC Central Server as 'an event' .
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-0 1 Automatic Fare Collection P AGE 31/64

8. 5. 7 EQUIPMENT MONITORING, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Equipment monitoring uses both the capability of the AFC system utilized by AFC operation staff
and the capability of the ECMS/SCADA to managed AFC alarms .
AFC monitoring shall be possible at Station level and at OCC level in parallel.
Req 26 The AFC system shall monitor equipment alarms in order to inform the appropriate team
in the event of failure , so the failure can be repaired (no control action is needed):
1: TVM- Out of Order, defaults, cash box almost full, almost empty supplies (ticket, etc.), payment
issue, breaking and entering, etc
liE TOM -Out of Order, defaults, credit card issue , incorrect logon , etc
ll Gate- Out of Order and reason, defaults , etc
Req 27 Different types of connections and protocols shall be available to provide the information :
Ill Contact (usually for TVM) ctJ
Ill Ethernet link with OPC or SNMP (with M IB) protocols
AFC equipment operation and maintenance includes many activities :

• Cash fund collection (see previous chapter)
• Reloading Smart Card and Ticket stocks
• Changing paper stock (for receipt printer)
• Repairing failures (modules or equipments exchange)
• Update (firmware, software, parameters, tables , etc)
• Activity log , alarm log , etc
All update actions such as firmware, software , parameters , and tables shall be done by automatic
remote procedure (upload, download, etc) , in an off-duty mode if necessary.
8. 5. 8 ACTIVITY REPORTS AND STATISTICS

Activity reports shall be collected automatically using the network (upload) .
Req 28 All activity reports shall be present at the beginning of the next operating day.
Req 29 Statistics shall include previous day activity (for instance daily statistics) .
The Activity Log shall be analysed and sorted so that relevant messages can be transmitted to
other IFM partners .
. )
8. 5. 9 FARE EVOLUTION
Req 30 The AFC system shall provide a "Fare creation module" to create or modify applications
and products, to determine the usage rules and business rules, and to fix the price.
This "Fare creation module" shall provide function s to export or import files describing the
application, products, usages, prices, business rules etc
The Import Module shall be able to integrate with other applications or product data.
The Fare Creation Module (or other related modules) shall generate fare tables for all types of AFC
equipment {TOM , TVM, Gates, AFM, PCD , etc).
New fare tables shall be downloaded automatically in advance, with the date that they become
'live'.
Each piece of equipment shall be able to store two (2) releases of each table.
Req 31 Active tables shall include all previous products sold and in use up to the final availability
of the products.
•.. ... ~
8. 5. 10 TICKETS PROVISION
IReq 32 This AFC system shall provide means for ticket delivery at all selling points.
lt shall provide ticket storage at all selling locations and in all machines.
lt also shall provide means for ticket delivery control (as an example, using a ticket ID).
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -01 Automatic Fare Collection P AGE 33164

9. AFC FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
The AFC system shall be designed to carry out the following functions:
• Issuing cards and tickets or reloading cards;
• Checking the validity of tickets, according to the rules specified herein;
• Checking the Sales Report and Reconciliation Report on each day of operation;
• Issuing Sales and traffic statistics ;
• Issuing operating alarms to the stations controller;
• Monitoring alarms (station controller),
• Controlling ticket and/or card validity.
The AFC system shall consist of the following equipment in each station:
• Several Ticket Office Machines (TOM), which deliver and/or reload all types of tickets valid on
the HHR network;
• Several Automatic Ticket Vending Machines (TVM), which deliver tickets and smart cards
valid on the HHR network;
• Several Automatic Add-Fare Machine (AFM) used by passengers to add value to their card or
ticket in case when there is not enough value on the card to exit the station ;
• Entry and/or exit gates, gathered in one or more passage lines, controlling validity for tickets or
cards used on the HHR network;
• A Station Control Unit (SCU), which collects and forwards all sales and gate transactions and
supervises overall operation of all AFC equipment;
• A station overview workstation , which gathers the main operating alarms and the controls
having the highest fail-safe degree.
Functional architecture of the AFC system
The chapters hereafter describe the functions of the AFC system.
9.1 Fare Policy
IReq 33 The AFC system shall be able to take into account the future Fare policy and its evolutions.
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-01 Automa tic Fare Collection P AGE 34/64

9.2 Security
This concept implies several items:

• Safety of passengers and operator employees.
• Fire safety,
• Security of cash and valuable equipment,
• Security of card s and tickets against fraud,
• Security of data (exchanges and storage).
Req 34 For Safety of passengers and operator employees, and for fire safety, the AFC system
shall follow safety recommendations applicable for all HHR systems.
9. 2. 1 S ECURITY OF CASH AND VALUABLE EQUIPMENT

.•:·=·- ····
~·--:···
Cash shall be secured (physically) by secure box in the TVM and a cash box for sale agent using
TOMs.
Cash collector agents shall have secure procedures to access the TVM cash box. The TVM shall
issue two tickets (cash collection messages) during cash collection.
Each TVM cash box sha ll have a unique number. This number shall be read by the TVM and used
to report cash collection.
9. 2. 2 AFC MEDIA AND EQUIPMENT SECURITY MANAGEMENT
Req 35 The AFC system shall provide functions to manage the AFC media security such as SAM
management and audit of card usage, and manage equipment security such as PKI
management and SAM management to store PKI key and security mechanisms.
AFC security functions shall include in this case:
• Keys management
• SAM management
• Card white list (authorized cards, authorized agent)
• Card black list
• PKI (Public Key Infrastructure) key generation
• Transaction audits
9.2. 3 S ECURITY OF TRANSACTIONS
Transactions with card s and tickets shall be secured by fast and standard mechanisms.
Req 36 Each card shall have a unique seri al number and a unique secret key (diversifje
9.2.4 SECURITY OF EQUIPMENTS AND EXCHANGES

Exchanges between sub-systems shall be secured by PKI scheme.
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -0 1 Automatic Fare Collection

Req 37 Each equipment and server in the system shall have a unique ID (serial number or other)
and an associated SAM . The SAM is used to store the private secret keys of the PKI and
process security algorithm .
SAM update
Req 38 A secure protocol shall be used to download new Keys (secret symmetric or asymmetric
keys) .
SAM production and update
Req 39 The supplier shall provide and initialise the SAM for the first equipments to install , register
and initialise the equipment.
Req 40 All tools such as equipment registration , equipment un-registration (disabling), SAM
:: .
initialisation , SAM update (off-line and on -line) shall be documented and provided with
the capability to create registration entity, new SAM , add Keys in the SAM etc
9.3 Cards Personalization
Req 41 The AFC system shall provide a card personalisation machine (CIM) able to print (text
and graphic) and encode (electrical personalisation) smart cards .
9.4 Procedure without Network
Req 42 TOM , TVM , Gates, AFM, SCU shall be able to work if the multi-service network is not
working.
Depending on the agreement with Credit Card Authorisation centre and the Bank, payment by
credit card may or may not be available off-line .
9.5 Customer Contracts and Reload
Customer contracts shall be encoded on the passenger ticket or card.

Different contracts shall be supported by the AFC system : single journey , multi-trips , etc.
Req 43 The Consortium shall propose the most appropriate customer contracts to provide an
efficient operation of the HHR line .
J
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-0 1 Au tomatic Fare Collection PAGE 36/64
Card returned by the customers at the end of its life
When a blacklisted card is presented to the system, the equipment shall disable (Inhibit) it and
send an alarm to the SCU.
9.5.2 CARD INHIBITION

Card Inhibition is an electrical and reversible inhibition.
Req 45 When a device inhibits (disables) a card or a ticket, the reason for the inhibition shall be
stored in the card and sent to the device activity list.
9.5.3 VALUE DECREASING
The value stored in the card shall be decreased in the gate process according to the fare policy.
Generally, the maximum fare is deduced from the card in the "Entry" process . The exact fare is
assessed by reference to the "Exit" process and the difference between "maximum fare" and "exact
fare" is refunded to the card , if necessary .
9.5.4 ENTRY GATE VALIDATION CANCELLING
Req 46 When a customer validates a card at the entry gate and cannot use the service for any
reason, cancelling of the entry validation shall be available to restore the initial value of
the card .
9.5. 5 CONTROL
In order to verify that customers in the paid area are riding the system in accordance with the fare
regulations , inspectors should be provided with portable checking machines able to read the card
data and verify that a valid contract has been encoded into the card .
If the passenger has no valid ticket in the paid area, the inspector will be required to fine the
customer.
9. 5. 6 CARD IN FORMAT/ON OISPLA Y TO PASSENGERS

Customers have no direct access to the data stored in the card. When they need to display the
remaining value of a card, they will be able to request displaying of the information on the screen of
TOM, TVM or Portable checking machine.
Note: Gates also display the remaining value at entry (initial value) and at exit (remaining value).
9. 5. 7 CARD OUT OF ORDER

Failed cards are referred to as being 'out of order'. Most of the failures will mean the card cannot
be read or written to.
Req 47 The AFC system shall have an image of each card in order for the operator to be able to
refund an 'out of order' card. ·
Req 48 The card image is not maintained in real time but the image shall be updated on the
operating day immediately following the day of the last transaction.
Smart card image updates are used to detect some type of fraud (simultaneous usage , valued -
discontinuity, transaction lost, etc) .
Smart Card images are also used in cases of card failure to replace the custo . ,, 2'ar€11 ·-~ --- e
same amount of value that was on the card before the failure. , · ,,, ~Jl.:. . 4_.;;\
! ·_ i~ :;jl ~{!, \ '\
9.5.8 CARD WITHDRAWAL 1-f! . 'f:.;i
Cards shall be withdrawn from the customer after the following events:
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-01 Automatic Fare Collection

• Card is out of order

• Card reaches the end of duration,
• Card is in black list.
• Abusive usage has been detected
9.5.9 CARD R ESTORING
The data stored in fa iled cards is restored to a new card. Restore Card Fu nction is necessary in
case of card failure. The remaining value shall be restored in the new card .
When the card fails, the card is unreadable. For the card restore function to restore the correct
value, a card image shall be stored in the central card data base. Card image management
requires all transactions to be forwarded to the central card database.
9. 5. 10 CARD D ESTRUCTION
Card is physically destroyed. Electric functions are not available and appearance is definitively
modified (card cutting or burning).
.· .;,:-.
9.5. 11 S ELLING
Tickets shall be sold in TOM and TVM , while cards can be reloaded at a TOM or a TVM . The fi rst
delivery of a personalised card shall be done in a TOM .
9.5. 12 MODES OF PAYMENT

At TVM and TOM, passenger shall be able to pay:
• In cash (coins and banknotes),
• By debit and credit cards.
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-0 1 Automatic Fare Collection PAGE 38/64

9.6 Reports
Req 49 The reports available to the AFC Central Server operator shall include, but not be limited
to , those listed below .
Traffic Statistics:
• Table of exit & entry flows per station and per time period (1 0 minutes) for one day.
• Table of exit & entry flows per station and per day for one month .
• Table of passenger flows per ticket type and per day for one month .
• Table of exits by entry flows per station for one day.
• Table of exits by entry flows per station for one month.
Accounting:
• Table of sales or exchanges per ticket type for one TOM operator shift.
t.:::=. =:
• ~ - . J
·:.·:_;. · • Table of sales or exchanges per ticket type for one TOM and for one day or for one month .
• Table of sales or exchanges per ticket type for one station and for one day or for one month .
• Table of sales or exchanges per ticket type for the whole network, for one day or for one
month .
Stored Value Usage:

• List of Stored Value between gates and TOM processes.
• Total amount reloaded in Stored Value Ticket by day, week, month , year.
• Total amount collected in the Exit gates from the SVT by day, week , month , year.
Black List generation

Contact-less cards shall be included in black lists due to the following events: stolen or lost card ,
abusive usage , several cards to the same customers .
t .- Req 50 Cards in the Black List shall be upgraded every day with the serial number of the card
reported as stolen or lost.
Maintenance:
• Table of gates anomalies counts , per type and per gate , for one station and fo r one month.
• Table of TOM anomalies counts , per type and per TOM, for one station and for one month .
• Table of TVM anomalies counts , per type and per TVM , for one station and for one month .
• Table of SCU anomalies counts , per type and per SCU , for one station and for one month .
• Table of equipment units anomalies counts for the whole network, per equipment type (Gate ,
TOM , TVM , SCU).
9.7 Special Procedure
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-40 3-SYS -00 1-0 1 Automatic Fare Collecti on

Req 51 Customers attempting to buy a ticket to the holy city of Makkah will be notified that this
city is not open to people of non Muslim religion . The customers may be required to enter
their religion when attempting to buy such a ticket
Furthermore, specific attention must be taken to avoid selling HHR tickets to occasional pilgrims;
priority must be given to regular customers of the HHR line.

10. AFC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
10.1 TOM Functions
10. 1.1 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE TiCKET OFFICE MACHINE (TOM)
Req 52 The TOM shall be installed at the ticket office , which is located in the unpaid area of each
station .
The TOM will be used for issuing all types of tickets or contact-less cards .
The TOM can be used for verification of all tickets types.
IReq 53 The TOM shall be designed for English and Arabic languages.
Req 54 The TOM shall be designed to prevent non Muslim people buying tickets for the holy city
of Makkah. This may require to enter customer' religion when attempting to buy such a
ticket.
The TOM is a self-contained device but shall, nevertheless, be connected to the Station Computer
Unit (SCU) so the following functions can be undertaken :
• Accounting (transmission of sales messages);
• Supervision (alarms) ;
• Management of the devices (downloading of parameters or files , transmission of commands
and controls) .
TOM (and TVM) equipment shall include an integrated printer, for printing customer receipts .
Req 55 Customer receipts shall indicate ticket information such as destination, seat number,
.<---'-•
- ·• class, departure and arrival times , station of delivery, value paid, date and time of
delivery, and other information as appropriate .
10.2 TVM Functions
10.2.1 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE TiCKET VENDING MACHINE (TVM)
Req 56 TVMs shall be installed in the non-paid area .
Req 57 TVMs shall accept coins , bank notes , debit and credit cards for purchasing tickets.
Req 58 TVMs shall deliver single-use tickets and reload smart cards . They will not deliver
personalized cards .
Req 59 The TVM shall be designed for English and Arabic languages.
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-0 1 Automatic Fare Collection

Req 60 TVM operation shall be secured as much as possible. Only authorised access shall be
possible (access by the back is preferable}.
TVM equipment shall include an integrated printer to print customer receipts with the ticket
information (destination , seat number, class, departure and arrival times, station of delivery, value
paid , date and time of delivery, etc).
Physical characteristics shall include:

TVM with coins and bank notes accepters, and debit and credit card payment facilities
Dimensions
Height 1800 mm maximum
Weight 1000 mm maximum
Depth 800 mm maximum
Features
Colour graphic display VGA minimum
Pointing I selection Touch screen
or right I left (4x2) buttons
Cancellation Cancellation Key
Coins acceptor Yes - 5 types of coins
Banknote acceptor Yes - 8 types of notes
DebiVCredit card payment Yes
Receipt printer Yes
Smart card reload antenna Yes
Cash box (coin or notes) Secured box
Voice guidance Option
Capacity
Smart card stock 400 Cards (about - 2 full days of sales)
Cash box - bank notes 2000
Cash box (coin or notes) 4000 (about - 2 full days of sales)
Technology
Computer unit PC based
Update and monitoring Remote management including software and
firmware download, tables and secure key
remote management
Req 61 The TVM shall be designed to prevent non Muslim people buying tickets for the holy city
of Makkah. This may require the customer to enter their religion when attempting to buy
such a ticket.
10.3.1 ADD-FARE MACHINE (AFM)
PAGE 4 2/64
Req 62 The AFM shall be installed in the station in the paid area. lt will be used by passengers to
purchase an additional amount of value if their ticket or card has not enough value to
allow them to exit the station.
Req 63 The AFM shall be designed for English and Arabic languages.
Expected characteristics sha ll be:
Dimensions
Height 1800 mm maximum
Weight 1000 mm maximum
Depth 800 mm maximum
Features
Colour graphic display VGA minimum
Pointing I selection Touch screen
or right I left(4x2)buttons
Cancellation Cancellation Key
Coins acceptor Yes - 5 types of coins
Banknote acceptor Yes - 8 types of notes
Debit/Credit card payment Yes
Receipt printer Yes
Smart card reload antenna Yes
Cash box (coin or notes) Secured box
Voice guidance Option
Capacity
Smart card stock No
Cash box - bank notes 2000
Cash box (coin or notes) 4000 (about - 2 full days of sales)
Technology
remote manaQement
10.4 PCD Functions

~.·_ ·.·
10.4.1 G ENERAL CHARA CTERISTICS OF THE PORTABLE CONTROL D EVICE (PCD)
PCDs are used by controllers or inspectors to check the validity of a card or a ticket.
Req 64 The PCD shall offer the following functionalitie s:

Displaying information on its screen (if necessary, or on passenger request),
Checking the validity of the tickets
Checking validity dates of the card
Signalling the conclusion of the control by a sound, different for an OK or Not OK conclusion . If
Not OK is signalled , the cause of the rejection shall be clearly displayed on the screen,
Input data with a keyboard.
Req 65 The PCD shall be designed for English and Arabic languages.
Expected characteristics shall be :
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-01 Automatic Fare Collection

Features
Hand held device
Battery - autonomy 20 hours

Card and ticket reader
Ticket printer Option
Technology
remote management
10.5 Gates
10.5.1 G ENERAL CHARA CTERISTICS OF THE GATES t.,.:.•
IReq 66 Automatic Gates shall be used to control access to the paid area.
An entry gate shall allow passengers to enter the network.
An exit gate shall control tickets or cards of passenger leaving the network.
IReq 67 All gates shall be designed for English and Arabic languages.
Req 68 Gates shall be operated by presenting contact-less cards (or magnetic tickets). Some
gates could be bi-directional gates (used for entry or exit), if station design allows.
Req 69 Exit gates shall capture inserted tickets and cards if the customer has no further need for
them. Captured tickets and cards will be recycled for future reuse in the system.
Req 70 During entry and exit of the paid area, passengers shall be informed of the valid
transaction "Pass" and, if applicable, the amount of remaining value on the HHR card or
ticket. The trip destination shall be displayed to the customer on the gate screen.
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -01 Automatic Fa re Collection PAGE 44/64

The figure below gives an example of gate configuration :
Reader+
Cap ture
Paid Area
OUT OUT OUT O UT
D
D D
D
Sta tion
Ticket
And
Monitoring
Desk
IN IN
'--y----1 '--y----1 '--y----1 '--y----1
Exit Aisle Exit Aisle '--y----1 Entry Aisle Aisle
Bi-d irec tionol
Expected characteristics shall be:
Dimensions - Gate cabinet

Hei~ht 1100 mm maximum
Width 300 mm maximum
Length 1900 mm maximum
Weight 300 Kg
Passenger free passage
Normal Gate free passage 550 mm maximum
Disabled User Gate free passage 1100 mm maximum
Features
Card I ticket reader To the right of the passeng_er
Entry gate Card and ticket reader
Exit gate Card and ticket reade r
Bi-directional gate Entry and exit device at each side
Long distance Information Visual information (L ED, light)
- In operation, dot not use
- Media type accepted (Card , Ticket)
Passenger information displays Close to the reader
-sound (accepted, rejected)
- light (pass, rejected)
- display ( 2 lines x 16 characters)
Performance
Entry
Exit
40 passenger per minute
40 passenger per minute /.
. ......
~
--
--- ·~
...
I ~. . . - . . , -' . , .(._
Capacity
Card containers Capaci ty - 4000 Cards --
- :- ,;"".
I
:9\ · ·~
~·
../~·
11:.; ~
~~ ·--.;:
\' ~ '-<-
Ref : HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -01 Automatic Fare Collection

Technology
firmware download , tables and secure key
remote management
10.5.2 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
Req 71 Power supply to each gate (equipment) shall be through UPS to avoid power supply short
failures .
Req 72 In the case of power interruption to a gate, the gate shall be released to the open
position , allowing free movement through the gate.
In the case of an emergency, all gates shall be released (opened) to ensure passengers can easily
exit the paid area .
This shall be achieved by an agent in the station pushing an "all gates released" button, this button O....,
shall immediately open all the gates for free exit (by shutting the power off or by other adequate V
means).
Req 73 Each gate shall be connected to the emergency "all gates release" button , with a secure
wired connection.
10.6 Station Computer Unit Function
10.6.1 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SCU

The SCU shall manage all equipment in the station .
Req 74 The SCU is a server that shall be based on a standard computer and standard operating
system.
The SCU terminal (a PC based workstation) shall be used by a station operator to monitor and
control AFC equipment.
IReq 75 The SCU shall be designed for English and Arabic languages .
An SCU shall provide a standard protocol (contacts, SNMP or OPC) to allow an external server
(like an ECMS/SCADA) to monitor and control SCU and station equipments .
An SCU shall provide an interface to allow remote access to the SCU and allow the administration
by a remote agent.
Req 76 An SCU shall be able to manage at least 40 .gates, 20 TOM, 20 TVM and 150 000
passengers per day. ·
_)
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-01 Automatic Fare Collection P AGE 46/64

10. 6. 2 TVM, TOM AND GATE CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT
Req 77 The SCU shall provide an MMI to monitor and control devices.
Req 78 The graphical MMI shall identify all equipment in the station and the status of each
device, plus a device level MMI showing devices modules and the status of modules.
10.7 Cl M Functions
10. 7. 1 G ENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CARD INITIAL/l A TION MACHINE (Cl M)

The CIM is used in the Back-Office to initialise contact-less smart cards. Its role shall be to
personalise contact-less smart cards; the CIM shall:
• Print, on credit card sized plastic cards, mandatory information including
o Card holder name,
o Photo,
o Card number,
o Etc.
• Encode on the card
o Card holder name,
o Status I profile of card holder,
o Card validity.
• Enable the card for operation
IReq 79 The Cl M shall be designed for English and Arabic languages.
10.8 AFC Central Server
10.8. 1 AFC CENTRAL S ERVER FUNCTIONS
Req 80 The AFC Central Server shall perform , but not be limited to, the functions described in the
paragraphs below.
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -0 1 Automatic Fare Collection

Interface with the SCUs

The AFC Central Server shall download the system parameters in the SCUs :
• Fare table,
• Operators list,
• Date & time ,
• Black list of cards detected as fraudulent or reported as lost or stolen .
The AFC Central Server shall receive from the SCUs :

• The equipment units status & alarms in real time,
• The accounting and traffic data at the end of each accounting day,
• Detailed card transactions, in order to detect fraudulent reloading .
Q
Database Management v
• The data received from the SCUs are stored in the AFC Database , in order to allow the AFC
Central Server operator interface to prepare the accounting , traffic and maintenance reports .
• The data shall be stored in the AFC Database for 2 months: the previous month and the
current one.
AFC Central Server Operator Interface

• To ensure confidentiality of the data stored at AFC Central Server level (accounting , etc), the
access to the AFC Central Server functions shall be protected by an identification function .
• The operator shall key-in his own identification number and password .
An authorized operator shall have access to the main menu functions :

• Configuration definition or modification of fare table, operator lists and date & time ;
• Reporting : display and print-outs of accounting , traffic maintenance reports and alarms for
current or previous month ;
• Log-out: exit from the AFC Central Server functions .
Contact-less card distribution:
Req 81 The AFC Central Server shall verify that only one card has been distributed to each
customer, and confirm identification of the card and the customer profile entitling the
purchaser to discounted tickets.
reports .
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -01 Automatic Fare Collection PAGE48/64

• Alarms for the operation or the maintenance services.

• Fare tables;
• Authorisations to start selling session;
• End of selling session;
• Enforcing the end of the selling authorisation time;
• Shut downs;
• Black lists .
• Date and time information, transmitted to the SCU by the master clock located in OCC .
10.10 Contact-less smart card
Req 82 Contact-less smart cards delivered by the Consortium shall be:

:· .. 1: compliant with ISO 14443 - Type A or Type B
1: microprocessor based
10.11 Magnetic media
Req 83 If applicable , magnetic tickets delivered by the Consortium shall be:

1: compliant with lATA ATB-2 format
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -0 1 Aulomalic Fare Collection PAGE 49/64

10.12 Master Clock
The Master clock, installed in OCC's technical room , shall transmit the following data through the
multi service network:
• Year
• Month
• Day
• Hour
• Minute
• Second
Data shall be received by the SCU via the multi-service network . SCU shall transmit this data to
Automatic Gates, TVM and TOM via the station Local Area Network.
Req 84 All pieces of equipment shall include a local clock, synchronized by the master clock. In
event that this synchronisation is not available for any reason , this local clock shall
e
update and deliver date, hour, minute, seconds .
AFC central server and SCU could use SNTP protocol to get the date and time from an SNTP
server synchronised with the Master clock .
10.13 Contact-less readers
Req 85 Contact-less Readers shall read both Type A and Type B media .
Req 86 All Contact-less Readers shall recognize type A and type B cards presented and shall
switch to type A or type B protocols to manage the presented card .
Req 87 The contact-less reader shall have at least 4 SAM slots.
10.14 SAM
IReq 88 SAM (Security Access Modules) shall be delivered by the Consortium .
SAM shall be used to secure the transaction between readers and contact-less media .
SAM shall be used to store PKI secret key and provide security mechanisms to secure exchanges
between equipment.
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-0 1 Automa ti c Fare Collection PAGE 50/64

11 . BUILDIN GS REQUIREMENTS
The general buildings requirements that shall be applied for the AFC system are given in the
General Specifications- Appendix 0: Building Requirements (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-016).
Req 89 The Consortium shall liaise with the station Phase 1 Contractor to finalize the number and
the location of all the AFC components.
11.1 Specific reservations
The following requirements shall be met for the AFC system regarding space reservations .
:=~4:--~ :- .
··:·:·::.·
Req 90 Ground surfaces planned for the AFC equipment, sale points with Ticket Office Machines
(TOM), Ticket Vending Machines (TVM) and control gates, in each station , shall be
sufficient for all the equipment necessary, for best operation of the system .
Req 91 The following space reservations shall also be planned for the rooms and offices used in
the AFC system:
lt: Offices in stations for management staff: at least 15 m2 ,
lE Rooms for cash storage in stations : at least 15m2 , with highly secured access .
it: Secured access to TVM in stations : 2 m2 free at the back of the TVM ,
11:: Offices in administrative buildings for system operations (customer management, statistics,
smart-card initialization and card recycling , etc): at least 160m2 ,
lE Technical rooms for AFC servers in stations and in central operation shall have at least a 15m 2
space dedicated to fare collection hardware in each site ,
Ill Rooms and offices for system maintenance (hardware repair) management: at least 240 m2 .
The repair room shall allow the delivery of large and heavy equipment (such as TVM).
Req 92 Ground resistance for the AFC equipment in stations and in administrative buildings shall
support the weight of:
11: TVMs in each station ,
11: Safe case (cash storage) in stations and/or in administrative buildings ,
lE Ticket Office Machines in stations,
11: Card Initialisation Machines in administrative buildings.
11 .2 Cash management
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -0 1 Automati c Fare Collecti on

Cash management (adding and retrieving money from TVMs or cash boxes) necessitates having
secure means of moving money.
Req 93 Cash management shall include:

I• Secure access to sale points, avoiding contact with customers during cash collection and
loading,
11. Secure access to TVMs , preferably at the back of the TVM
' .

12. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
12.1 Operational Performance Requirements
12. 1.1 CONTACT-LESS MEDIA AND READER PERFORMANCES
Req 94 At a Gate and when contact-less media is necessary, the transaction time shall be less
than 250 ms.
12. 1.2 STATION EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCES
Req 95 To support the high volume of passenger flows, the AFC system shall provide a high
performance entry and exit gate (up to 40 passenger I minute in entry and 40 passenger/
minute in exit). In the case of an emergency exit, a gate shall allow 50 pass./min. to leave
the station as per NFPA 130.
Req 96 To support the efficient sale of a high volume of tickets during peak hours, the AFC
system shall provide high performance TOM and TVM machines (TVM machines shall
deliver up to 4 tickets I minute).
12.2 Technical Performance Requirements
12.2.1 AFC SYSTEM CAPACITY
AFC equipments and the AFC system must provide the following performance:
IReq 97 The AFC system shall be able to manage 500 000 passengers per day.
12.2. 2 CHANGE AT TVM
Req 98 For coin payments, the TVM shall accept one coin per second . Any change owed must
be dispensed within 2 seconds.
12.2.3 PORTABLE CHECKING D EVICES
Req 99 The checking time shall be as short as possible (not more than one second). The PCD
should be able to handle 1000 validations in an 8 hour shift
Portable checking machines for inspectors shall have batteries that can be recharged to ensure
electric autonomy during an entire inspectors service/shift, without any loss of data.
Req 100 The Battery life shall be at least one shift in duration - but it shall preferably last for one
whole day of operation.
12.3 RAMS Performance Requirements
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -01 Automatic Fare Collection

The AFC system shall be fully compliant with the requirements detailed in the document:
RAMS As surance Requirements (HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001)
The purpose of these paragraphs below is to describe the overall operational performance relating
to Reliability, Availability, Maintainability and Safety (RAMS) fo r the AFC system.
Preference shall be given to the system with the best, recognised and proven performance levels.
The HHR Automatic Fare Collection System shall be designed with a high degree of reliability and
availability, in order to provide a dependable service that the public shall want to use, thereby
increasing patronage and the resulting revenues from the system.
The optimization of the system with respect to reliability, availability and maintainability must be
planned and must form an integral element of the project.
The Consortium shall demonstrate that the issues of RAM are managed during all phases of the
project (i.e. design , manufacturing, commissioning , operation and maintenance). The RAM
management process shall address all aspects of the project and must be demonstrably integrated
into the project as a whole . r'~ -·~· •
.. . .;.f
This must be achieved through the development of a process that, as a minimum, shall address the
following :
• Definition of RAM requirements;
• Planning and implementation of RAM tasks for all project phases;
• Assessment and control of impacts and threats to RAM requirements;
• Demonstration of compliance with RAM requirements;
• Program of on-going monitoring of compliance .
IReq 101 The Consortium shall submit to the Government, for approval, a System RAM Plan .
IReq 102 The availability of the equipment pertaining to the AFC system shall be at least 99.5%.
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -01 Aulomalic Fare Colleclion PAGE 54/64

Req 103 The Consortium shall guarantee that the works will meet or exceed the standards of
maintainability given in the table below.
Maintainability required
Equipment MTTR Mmax.90

(hr) (hr)
AFC Gates
- Entry Gate 0.4 0.9
- Exit Gate 0.4 0.9
- Reversible Gate (Assumes Equal 0.4 0.9
Entry and Exit Transactions)
Gate mechanism (include ticket reader) 0.5 0.9
Ticket Office Machine 0.5 0.9
Ticket Vending Machine 0.5 0.9
···;:·· Station Computer Unit 0.5 0.9
MTTR: the mean (average) time to repair the equipment (to restore operating functions);
Mmax.90: the maximum time to repair 90% of the 'out of order' equipment.
Req 104 The Consortium shall demonstrate that the reliability of the equipment composing the
system is consistent with the demanded system availability.
Req 105 During the factory acceptance test stage, the MTTR shall be demonstrated and the result
of this demonstration recorded in a report.
Req 106 During the maintenance period, the Consortium shall produce a reliability/availability report
every three months to demonstrate the ach ievement of the RAM targets . The fo rmat of
the report shall be approved by the Government or its representatives.
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -01 Automatic Fare Collection

The AFC system shall be designed according to the requirements detailed in the General
Specifications - Section 7: Design (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-007).
Ref : HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-0 1 Automatic Fare Collection PAGE 56/64

AUTOMATIC FARE CO LLECTION SPECIFICATIONS
The manufacturing requirements that shall be applied for the AFC system are detailed in the
General Specifications - Section 8: Technical and Manufacturing Requirements (HHR-LO-CT-602-
SYS-008).
,.·. .·..·


REQUIREMENTS
The procurement, construction and installation requirements that shall be applied for the AFC
system are detailed in the General Specifications - Section 9: Material and Workmanship
Requirements (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-009) and Section 10: Construction and Site Arrangement
Requirements (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-01 0).
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-00 1-D1 Automatic Fare Collection PAGE 58/64


REQUIREMENTS
The environmental elements that shall be used for the AFC system are given in the General
Specifications - Section 6: System Environmental Design Criteria (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-006) and
Appendi x B: Annual Climate and Weather in KSA (HHR-LO-CT-602-SAU-001 ).
16.1 Equipment outside
No equipment should be installed outside (outdoors) for the Automatic Fare Collection system.
Nevertheless, if this is unavoidable, then any AFC equipment installed outside the station shall be
compliant with IP65 standard .
16.2 Equipment in the station or city office
Some equipment may be instal led in station areas without air conditioning .
Equipments concerned : TOM, TVM, GATE , AFM , PCD.
Req 107 AFC equipment that will be installed inside a station, in an area without air conditioning ,
shall be compliant with IP54 standard .
Req 108 The following climate conditions shall be considered for the equipment mentioned above:
I ~ Temperature ooc to 50°C
Ill Humidity (non-condensing) 10% to 90%
16.3 Equipment in computer technical room
Equipments concerned: Servers, Card Initialisation
Req 109 AFC equ ipment that will be installed inside technical rooms shall be compliant with IP54
standard .
Req 110 The following climate conditions shall be considered for the equipment mentioned above:
11: Temperature 5°C to 35°C
lt Humidity (non-condensing) 15% to 80%
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -0 1 Aulomatic Fare Collection PAGE 59/64

17. VERIFICATION, TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS
The AFC system shall be verified and tested in accorda nce with the requirements detailed in the
General Specifications - Section 11: Verification , Tests and Acceptance (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-
011 ).
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001 -0 1 Automatic Fare Collection PAGE 60/64

The training requirements for the AFC system are detailed in the General Specifications - Section
12: Training Requirements (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-012) .
.-.
Ref: HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-001-01 Au tomatic Fare Collection PAGE 61/64

The AFC system shall be documented in accordance with the requirements detailed in the different
sections of the General Specifications documents.

20. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
The maintenance requirements that shall be applied to the AFC system are detailed in the General
Specifications - Section 13: Operation, Maintenance, Spare Parts, Special Tools and Test
Equipment (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-013).
..·..
",;
·-· ..·.~

21. TOOLS AND SPARE-PART REQUIREMENTS
The tools and spare-part requirements that shall be applied to the AFC system are detailed in the
General Specifications - Section 13: Operation, Maintenance, Spare Parts, Special Tools and Test
Equipment (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-013).

~::3:}~ 1 .bg.b:yl Cio U::.JI Ci.w.w g.bl
= - - - - SA UDI RA ILWA YS ORGANIZATION

PHASE 2
WORKS BASES AND MAINTENANCE

BASES REQUIREMENTS

WORKS BASES AND MAINTENANCE BASES REQUIREMENTS
A1 20/04/2009 First Issue M.C. ILLY
A2 07/05/2009 Draft version sent to the Government M.C. ILLY
81 25/05/2009 Revision following the Government comments M.C.ILLY
82 29/05/2009 Revision after final workshop M.C. ILLY
C1 29/06/2009 Final RFP M.C.ILLY
01 11/09/2009 Revision following Linklaters's comments M.C. ILLY
PREPARED BY MC .ILLY 11/09/2009

~
CHECKED BY G.JEHANNE 11/09/2009 -~ • -
VALIDATED BY G.NORMAND 11/09/2009 '11)
~
APPROVED BY C.SCHANG 11/09/2009 ~
Ref: HHR- LO- WB -403- INE-001-0 1 PAGE 2/26

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 6
2. STANDARDS AND REFERENCE ............................................................................................................... 7
2.1 G ENERALITY ........ .... ..... .... .................. ... ............................ ....... ........... ......... ..... ...... .... ...... .. .. .... ........................ 7
2.2EUROPEAN STANDARD .......................... ... ..... ................................ ........... ........ ... .... .. ... ........ ... .......................... 7
3. SCOPE OF WORK ......................................................................................................................................... 8

4. INTERFACES ................................................................................................................................................. 9
5. BASIC DESIGN ............................................................................................................................................ 10
5. 1 THE YARD ITSELF ... .............. ............ ... ... .................... ........ ...... .... ...... .. ........ .. ......... .. .... ........ ........................... 10
5 .2THE N EW LIN E WORKSITE ..... ............ .. .............................. .... ...... ..... ........... .. ............... ..... .............................. I 0
6. GENERAL OPERATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 11

6 .1 WORKS BASE ........ ..... .......... .. ............................. ........... ... ..... ........... .... .... ... ........ .. .. .... ..... ........... ......... .... ....... 11
6.2N EW LINE WORKSITE .............. .............. ................. ........... ..... ...... ....................... ... .. ......... ........................... ... . 11
7. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WORKS BASES ..................................................................... l2

8. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MAINTENANCE BASES ....................................................... 13
8 .1 SIDING REQUIREMENTS ...... ........ ................................................. ... .............................. ................................... 13
8 .20NLINE SITE ... ...... ............................................................. ..... .. ............... .... .. ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... . 13
8 .3MISCELLANEOUS ..... ........... .. ........ ... ... .. .............. .......... .......... ...... ...................... ............................... .. ............ 13
9. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................. 14

9 .1 D ESIGN ..... .... ..... .... ........ ....... ....... ..... .... .. ......................... ....................................... .. .. ......... .... .............. ....... .. . 14
9 .2THE RECEPTION FAN OF SIDINGS .................... ................................................... .... ...... ...... .... .............. ...... ..... 14
9 .3 EN GINE SHED AND HOLDING SIDINGS ............................... ........ ................ ........... .... ............................. .... ...... 15
9.4TRAIN-FORMING SIDINGS AND TRACKS WORKSHOP .... ............... ...... ........ .......... ... ............ ............... ... ...... ..... 15
9.5SIGNALLING YARD ........................... ......... ........................ .. ..... .. ............. ................ ..... ........... ........... ..... ... ...... 15
9 .6CATENARIES YARD, .................................................. .......... ... ......... .......... ......... ....... .......... ... ............ .. .......... .. 16
9 .7WORKSHOP FOR RAIL ELECTRIC WELDING ............................................ ............. ............................. .......... ..... 16
10.BUILDING REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................... 17

10.1 C ENTRAL SIGNALLING ROOM FOR SIDING ............... ....... .............. .. .. .......... ................... .......... .. .. .. .... ...... 17
10.2 OFFICES ............. ....... ......... ...... .. ... ... .............. ........ ........ ... ... : ................ .. ................. .. .. ............... ... .. .... ... 17
10.3 LIFE CAMP ........................ .. .. ........ .................................. ..... ........ .. ..... ... ......... ......................... .. .............. I 7
11.RAMS ............................................................................................................................................................. 18
Ref: HHR- LO- WB -403- INE-001-D1 PAGE 3/26

17.TRAINING REQUIREMENT ....................................................................................................................... 24

18.DOCUMENTATIONS REQUIREMENT .................................................................................................... 25
19.TOOLS AND SPARE-SPARTS REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 26
•"
Ref: HHR- LO- WB -403- INE-001-01 PAGE 4/26

PROJECT REFERENCES

1 HHR-LO -CT -602-SYS-002 General Specifications - Section 2
2 H HR-LO-CT -602-SYS-006 General Specifications - Section 6
3 HHR-LO-CT-602-SAU-001 General Specifications - Appendix B
4 HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-011 General Specifications - Section 11
5 HHR-LO-SI-403- INE-001 Signaling Specifications
Ref : HHR- LO- WB -403- INE-001-01 PAGE 5/26

1.GLOSSARY
~:..;·.,
Ref: HHR- LO- WB -403- INE-001 -0 1 PAGE 6/26

2.1 Generality
The following rules , E.O.S. (equivalent or superior ones), concerning track design, track
works; operation and maintenance shall be respected . Any incompliance shall be notified and
written by the Consortium to The Government, and will only be allowed with The Government
written agreement.
2.2 European standard
• EN 14587-1:2007 "Railway applications - Track - Flash butt welding of rail

3. SCOPE OF WORK
This document is part of Performance Specification regarding the Works bases to organize and
prepare the construction of the Main Line railway equipments of HHR. lt aims at describing its basic
design as well as its requirements and interfaces , which shall be respected by the Consortium ,
according to the Government's general requirements for the Railway.
and proper operation of the Works Bases.
The specifications regarding implementation , construction and operation of a works base for
railway equipment are very dependent on procurement strategy, the more so have there is no
existing operational railway near the forecasted High Speed Line HHR. The Consortium shall
define this strategy, as well as the global strategy for railway equipment construction organization
in Works Bases strategy document.
Req 01 According to procurement strategy chosen and works schedule , the Consortium shall define the
number (average works range) the locations and the functional sketch for its works bases in Works
Bases strategy document.
The Consortium shall be in charge of safe operation of these temporary equipment as well as the
new and definitive ones for maintenance purposes .
The present document may constitute a methodology, given as information , in order to help the
Consortium to carry out careful consideration enabling to establish its work bases strategy. lt is
based on high speed line construction experience .
lt describes the consistency of a standard works base with the following assumptions that the
Consortium shall define:
• Forecasted quantities to lay out

• Procurement by railway or road means with an efficient transfer rate
o allowing to supply the work base to realize railway equipments with an autonomy
to be defined ,
o allowing to guarantee an optimized weekly progression compliant with global
schedule ,
• a given maximum grade of the High Speed Line, enabling to dimension the traction
means,
a given distance between axels of the tracks helping to evaluate the procurement
needs (particularly the ballast quantity).
Ref: HHR- LO- WB -40 3- INE-001-01 PAG E 8/26

4. INTERFACES
Works bases earthworks, the roadway system and various networks are carried out by the Phase 2
Consortium; the base locations and design shall thus be provided quickly by the Consortium to The
Government.
Req 02 Taking into account the possible difficulties fo r procurement, the Consortium shall define as soon as
possible its requirements for road accesses (heavy, light, exceptional) to the various bases work, so
that they can be entrusted to Route Civil Works contractor by the Government.
Road accesses to the building site (offices, workshops) of the High Speed Line shall be done, in
theory, by the final accesses dimensioned for the future operation, maintenance and helps of the
line. The Consortium shall make sure that these accesses are sufficient for its needs.
Ref: HHR- LO· WB -403- INE-001 -01 PAGE 9/26

5. BASIC DESIGN
A work base is built for the duration of the construction of the concerned new line section. lt
consists of two parts:
5.1 The yard itself
Gathering:
• the reception fan of sidings, the forming one , the engine shed and its sidings,
• the warehouses for tracks, catenaries, electric power supplies and signalling
• the central signalling room for the yard sidings
• offices and large enough car parks
,...)
• life camp
• rail electric welding workshop on works base to set up CWR from elementary bars in order to
minimize welds numbers on the New Line worksite
5.2 The New Line worksite
Gathering:
• New Line tracks, signaling and OCS systems being built,

• Connecting lines to the works base itself.

6.1 Works base
The works base shall be run able all day and night long; its organization shal l warrant an
optimized coordination between the supplies reception, the following day works preparation and
the New Line worksite works themselves .
The railway traffic in side works base may be managed from a centra l signalling room.
The working staff protection systems may be reduced , considering the operations to carry out
and the on-site operated switches. However, some of them, located at the head of sets of
sorting sidings, may be remotely controlled by the central signalling room .
A basic signalling shall be implemented . So, the working staff protection systems shall be dealt
th rough a signalling program and the implementation through a technical particular plan .
The running speeds on railways and roadways in the works base shall be fixed regarding traffic
management and organisation as well as safety criteria.
6.2 New Line worksite
The work base operation aim shall be to warrant a maximum time slot of work to the last train
introduced on the New Line worksite .
Req 03 Works train operation on High Speed Line worksite shall be executed with temporary wayside
signalling laid along tracks as works proceed.
Req 04 Specific operating instructions shall be fixed by Consortium to ensure safe and efficient
operation.
Temporary crossovers shall set in order to help good operation

Running speed on High Speed Line Worksite shall comply with safety and schedule for
construction .
lReq 05 Operating ru les shall be introduced to prevent any damage on platforms due to running trucks.
These could be for example:

• 30 Km/h max on the earthworks platform.
• Half turn prohibited on the track bed (trucks shall enter through an access and leave through
another, or sha ll roll in reverse gear).
Ref: HHR- LO- WB -403- INE-001 -01 PAGE 11/26

7. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WORKS BASES
A work base is a multipurpose worksite, from which the Railway Equipment is laid on a dedicated
section of the High Speed Line.
The base shall primarily:
• Receive railway equipment heavy supplies (ballast, rail, sleepers, turnouts, catenary masts,
catenary equipment, cables, etc).
• Shelter various equipments yards and preparing workshops (before laying on the
New Line worksite ); particular, possible rail welding workshop for elementary rail bars just
received .
• Form the works trains, bound for the High Speed Line worksite.
• Manage running in and running out of the High Speed Line worksite, of these works trains.
• Serve the High Speed Line worksite by trucks for the provisioning and special works.
• Deal with its diesel engines and different wagons.
Some works bases may be partly or fully re-used as further infrastructure maintenance bases.

8. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MAINTENANCE BASES
This chapter describes the minimum requirements for the different maintenance sites .
8.1 Siding requirements
For each infrastructure maintenance base:

Sidings shall not be electrified
Sidings shall be long enough to simultaneously allow parking and shunting of:
I) The whole fleet of rail maintenance machines , locomotives and wagons devoted to it,
11) One 1000 t ballast train
Ill) One specialized train for loading/ unloading large parts of switches , expansion devices or
long rails .
Note: This minimal storage capacity on each base shall be reinforced with capacities of sidings on
the main line (see art. 8.2) .
At least, one siding shall be fitted with an inspection pit to allow crews to do their routine
maintenance on the underside of rail maintenance machines or locomotives.
Sidings shall be fitted with fixed light for night work.
8.2 Online site
For the whole line:

At least one storage area , and corresponding non-electrified sidings , for large part of switches,
expansion devices and long rails . lt shall allow, according to usual state-of-the-art, to load and
unload the works trains with them.
At least one storage area and corresponding non-electrified sidings for a minimum of 10 000 t
of ballast.
lt shall allow to park, load and shunt at least two 1000 t ballast train .
At least one on-tracking and off tracking area . Because the line is not connected to other
railways , rail mean shall be transported by land , then on track. This area shall allow to load/
unload heavy specialized trucks with locomotives, wagons or rail maintenance machine.
8.3 Miscellaneous
1) According to Saudi Arabia environmental laws , each infrastructure maintenance base shall
have :
Facilities for refuelling rail or rail/road machines , equipped with retention tank and separator for
hydrocarbon effluents,
Oil mill equipped with retention tank,
Facilities for storage and treatment of industrial waste .
2) The maintenance bases shall have ADSL broadband access in order to use CMMS and shared
with operating computer applications .
3) Heavy maintenance of locomotives , wagons and rail machines :

This heavy maintenance (preventive or corrective maintenance) shall be made either in the
infrastructure maintenance bases or in the rolling stock maintenance facilities . ~--=~~
The Consortium shall demonstrate that it will provide all the facilities needed o ~-(n'8'inta ~ i
locomotives, wagons or rail maintenance machines. , -~,'>:,,.,, ..)
~ ~~.
·?'-·,~ · ' '\ /
4) Specific case or high speed supervision train : ( ')'; ·•· ;., ''\~ i~
If the Consortium chooses to use supervision train based on commercial rol! i01J~?tock (i. l ~g ~ .
speed electric train) it shall build facilities and its crews inside the rolling stock fa dQ!ie),. {:
?· ,_) 1.t.• f'.c }
'~'~ "',~, \<.' ~
. h
' \. ' /o . ,. ~ '\ , /
--~~>_.;···
Ref: HHR- LO- WB -403 - INE-001-0 1 PAGE 13/26

n
9. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
This chapter describes a work base design methodology, based on the dimensioning as described
in chapter 3 for the works bases .
At the beginning, procurement supply by railway means seems unlikely on the given project HHR.
However, the description of the reception fan of sidings design is given below for information , in
order to help the Consortium to carry out consideration for the procurement reception area.
9.1 Design
Req 06 The work base implementation shall be out of flooded zones and an appropriate draining set up
of the tracks formation shall guarantee a satisfactory level for the water table.
Req 07 The necessary bearing pressure of the subgrade shall be fixed according to the awaited heavy
loads (road and railway movements)
Req 08 The design of the work yard tracks layout shall be carried out aiming to minimize the derailment
risk (lateral over-riding of buffers risk, rising risk of the axle-boxes, etc ... )
Req 09 The tracks longitudinal gradients shall be selected in order to guarantee safety (to avoid wagon
runaways) and according to the braking and starting engine powers of heavy trains.
In the different sidings , the distances between the axels of tracks, shall be designed
according to staff safety and allowable gauge .
The length of sidings shall be defined regarding the possible trains length .
Conveying means for locomotives and wagons shall be fixed by the Consortium.
The Consortium shall check obstruction and loads allowance on road networks (Saudi and
HHR dedicated ones) regarding road supplying forecasted .
9.2 The reception fan of sidings
from where they shall be forwarded to the
rement
nd out traffic
Ref: HHR- LO- WB -40 3- INE-001 -0 1 PAGE 14/26

9.3 Engine shed and holding sidings
For safety reasons , the engine shed shall only have one entry; it must be fitted with shunting
and communication tracks.
it shall be made up with:
• Fan of holding sidings allowing the parking of diesel locomotives and the gas oil supply. it
shall be equipped with an inspection pit,
• Dead-end tracks allowing the parking of power trolleys, small machines and various
rakes.
Its dimensioning depends on the number of machines to park, maintain and supply.
In case of further use of a works base as infrastructure maintenance base, a particular
attention shall be taken for location, capacity of pit siding and petrol station.
9.4 Train-forming sidings and tracks workshop
The train forming sidings are dedicated to preparation of works trai n and Line Works site
supply.
• The length of tracks of train formation sidings shall comply with forecasted works train
lengths.
• The number of tracks shall comply with organization and methods chosen for
construction .
• The dimensioning of the track workshop relates to the track laying technique:
o Specific tools may be necessary
• The office need assessment shall be globally optimized .
• The track workshop is usually fitted with as an access with a great bearing capacity.
9.5 Signalling Yard
The signalling yard size shall be fixed regarding:
• Global procurement strategy (range for works base con sidered)

• Procurement strategy to works base
Procurement strategy from works base to New Line worksite
• Procurement schedule
• Manufacturing strategy and methodology for construction
• Specific tools if any required
• Specific handling means if any

9.6 Catenaries yard,
The Catenaries yard size shall be fixed regarding:
• Global procurement strategy (range for works base considered)

• Procurement strategy to works base
• Procurement strategy from works base to New Line worksite
• Procurement schedule
• Manufacturing strategy and methodology for construction
• Specific tools if any required
• Specific handling means if any
9.7 Workshop for rail electric welding
CWR shall be constituted of basic bars long of 80 m minimum, electrically welded through
fixed welding machine (itinerant or workshop installation), th en in CWR welded through
aluminothermic or electric welds.
Generally, this fixed welding machine is located in a special workshop . Yet, it can be located
nearby the worksite (because of procurement difficulties for example) In this case, workshop
functioning shall be carried out according to European standard, or E.O .S, EN 14587-1:2007
"Railway applications -Track - Flash butt welding of ra il"
Ref: HHR- LO- WB -403· INE-001 -01 PAGE 16/26


Considering the lifespan of a work bases, al l the buildings are generally prefabricated bought,
rented or recovered.
In case of reuse for maintenance purpose, the Consortium shall consider since the beginning of its
design the relevant lifespan to take into account.
10.1 Central signalling room for siding
The central signa lling room, if any, for siding may be a prefabricated building.
For works base operation, a two-storey bui lding is recommended in order to allow a better
visibility on the works base.
On first floor, the station shall include a room with safety facilities, operation and control of the
trackside equipment and signals giving access to the new line work site from the whole of the
devices of the work base.
Combined with the station, buildings shall be planned for:
• Radio operator equipment, where maintenance, distribution and portable stations are
ensured equipping the machines with traction , the operating agents and the heads of
building site.
• Needs for the staff of reception siding and train-forming siding.
10.2 Offices
Offices plan sha ll include at least:

• Headquarters of new line work site from which the orders drive regulation of the traffic
and manag ement of the elementary building sites are given.
• conference rooms,
• Offices for managers, controllers, staff ...
Contiguous to the offices, a well sized car park shall be carried out.
10.3 Life camp
A life building for the staff shall be necessary to the operation of the works base.
lt shall be located on site, in a life camp ; it shall be located closer to depot, central signaling
room and offices , but nevertheless isolated from noise.
Ref : HHR- LO- WB -403- INE-001 -01 PAGE 1 7/26

11. RAMS
Alignment of track shall be designed in order to avoid any delay: the entries and exits of the
bases shall be multiple in order to prevent the base from any blocking in the event of
derailment.
In order to ensure safety, the management of the base and work on line shall be made with
the support of specified operation instructions.

Works base lifespan shall be limited to the installation of the railway equipment; lt is equ ipped
and organized in order to optimize its safe and efficient operation.

Requirements concerning construction material of the bases shall meet the same standards
as for the high speed line, only the track category will change .
Equipment for bases shall be manufactured in accordance with best industry practice.
Components shall be readily available throughout the world wherever possible. Specific to
the HHR items shall be brought to the attention of The Government.
Req 10 The Consortium shall produce for all equipment setting up a documentation summarizing
at least:
I Mechanical characteristics
Ill Electrical characteristics
Ill Construction references .....
11. Quality certificate delivered by the manufacturer and including proven technology
reference
Ref: H HR- LO· WB -403- INE-001 -0 1 PAGE 20/26


REQUIREMENTS
• Subgrade, roadway systems and various networks are carried out by the Consortium.
Req 11 The consortium shall insure, through its own or manufacturer's quality control, appliance of
the equipment with above defined characteristic documentation.
Req 12 The Consortium shall also insure that transportation, storage and handling shall not affect
• The Consortium shall submit an installation method statement and a list of installation
inspections to be performed for all installations .
• The method statement shall include a proposed method of recording installation criteria
towards approved design in order to check As-bu ilt detail and quality control of the
installation works.
• On the bases itself, works also take place at night; so, a sufficient lighting must be
provided to ensure the safety. Lighting pylons shall be installed with an adapted gauge;
• A triangle to turn over the rakes of wagon and especially small machines is necessary
near the base.
• A gantry gauge installation is necessary to check loading obstruction for safety reason.
• The turnouts are mostly ordered on-site with levers; the implementation of these levers
shall be carefully done regarding allowable gauge.
Ref: HHR- LO- WB -403- INE-001-01 PAGE 21 /26

15. ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFIC CONSTRAINTS AND

REQUIREMENTS
General Specifications documents (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-006 and HHR-LO-CT-602-SAU-001 ), for
design, building , maintenance and durability of bases installations.
IReq 13 The Consortium shall collect any missing information needed for a complete design.
15.2 Environmental impact of works base
Base design shall be carried out starting from an analysis of bearing risk on the environmental
constraints related on sand and temperature level and gradient.
The environmental constraints relate to primarily the night-works and week-end (air quality, smoke
emissions) which shall be regulated through specific instruction specified by the Consortium .
Concerning noise, water management (supply drinking water, drainage and water treatments
worn), the treatment of the pollution risks (particularly with the deposit), etc. the Consortium shall
apply the national legislation.
A planned environment quality shall be laid down by the Consortium.

16. CHECKING, TEST AND ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENT
Tests of bearing pressure of the subgrade are necessary before laying the tracks
Req 14 The Consortium shall submit 6 months before commissioning a schedule of tests and testing
procedures for the Works Base System addressing the requirements described in Section 11 of
General Specifications documents (HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-011 ).
Req 15 For signalling system if any, Consortium shall refer to Checking, Test and acceptance
requirements described in Interlocking and Main Line Signalling document (HHR-LO-SI -403-
INE-001).
d-
Apart from training for beginners , all the staff have to be trained to safety rules.
: ··.
••.• f

18. DOCUMENTATIONS REQUIREMENT
• Procurement strategy including engines and wagons provisioning on the bases.

• Work bases strategy (number of work bases, number of tracks construction teams).
Method of track lay out .
• Means used (by road or by rail) .
• Signaling program and technical plans of the works and maintenance .
• Particular operating instruction
• All required documents to be provided by other corporations: for example: Turnouts file ,
overhead catenary system cross section, etc.
• Environmental quality plan

19. TOOLS AND SPARE-SPARTS REQUIREMENTS
Not required for works bases construction.

See chapter 8 for maintenance bases.
Ref : HHR- LO- WB -403- INE-001 -01 PAGE 26/26

C.2.10 SEC 380 kV Feeding
lt is the Government's intention to contract all the work relating to the 380 kV to Saudi Electric Company
(S EC).
SEC will be responsible for the in itial survey, design, build, testing and commissioning to hand over to
the Government I Winning Consort ium .
The scope of work will include all necessary construction to enable power to be fed to 6 sub-stations at
the point where the Consortium t akes the power to feed the catenary system in HHR.
The boundary between HHR and SEC and future interfaces for construction and maintenance will be
clearly defined in the near future
0
-.~-!.
0
ii.J::ld~l .b~ CiD Lc:.JI CiJ.uw gbl

PHASE 2
ROLLING STOCK SPECIFICATIONS

()
A1 2710312009 First Issue R.BROUILLARO I H. FAURE
A2 2110412009 English Revision R.BROU ILLARO I H. FAURE
A3 0610512009 Review following checker comments R.BROUI LLARO I H. FAURE
A4 0610512009 Final Review following validated comments R.BROUI LLARO I H. FAURE
81 0210612009 Final version with Government's comments R.BROUI LLARD I H. FAURE
C1 29/0612009 Final RFP R.BROU ILLARD I H. FAURE
01 0410912009 Review following Linklaters's comments R.BROUI LLARD I H. FAURE
02 1110912009 Final following 51912009 presentation H. FAURE
E1 1611212011 Update for Contract Getinsa
E 0810112012 Final including Consortium Comments R Adams
REVISION N°: E1 NAME DATE SIGNATURE
PREPARED BY R Ad ams 0810112012
CHECKED BY R Adams 0810112012
VALIDATED BY R Adams 0810112012
APPROVED BY R Adams 081011201 2
.~\''""'S- ~
~
~-
/ : -.!I\' ._,,··''''''"' l '~
\ "' 't-o ' \'i
\
-;I'
V'
f( 0 ~ l .
I ~ ·~~,;)
~ 0
~~~
Ul
.....0 ,...
., \C\
:..c:
1
; t"
/"
~~·
1.· ~-
' ~-
~·
,·
"'"
Y'
lf'f~. \
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001-E2 Rolling Stock Specifications PAGE 2/80
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................... .............. 8
2. GLOSSARY .............................................,. ............................. u . . . . . . . . ...... . ....... ,. ... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,. . . . . . . . . . . . . .... ,,,,,.,9
2.1 DEFINITIDf\5 ··· ····· ········· ······· ···· ··· ··· ··· ············· ···· ···· ······ ···· ······ ····· ········ ··· ··· ······· ··· ······ ····· ··········· ······· ······ ····· ········ 9
2 .2ABBREVIA.T IONS .. ... ... ........ ... .... ..... ............ ..... .............. ........... .. ........ ... .................. ... ..... ........ .. .. ... .... .... .. ........ .... 9
3. STANDARDS AND REFERENCES........................................................................................................... lO
3.1TSI STAN~RD ... .... ..... .. .... ..... .. ..... ..... .... ...... ....... ...... ..... .... .... .. ..... .. ........ .................. ........ .. ...: ........ .... ........... .. lO
3.2150 STAN~RD... .. ..... .... .. ....... .... ........ ... ... ..... .. ....... .. ................ .... ... .... .. ..... .. ....... ... ............. ...................... .. .. ... 1 0
3.3EN STAN~RD .. .. ... .. .......... ... .... .. .... ..... .. .. ....... .. .. .. ...... .... .... .. ...... ..... .............. .. .. .. ........... ............... ... .. .............. ll
3.4UIC STAN~RD......... ... .. ... .................................... .. .. ........... .. ... .............. ...... .. .... ..... .... ... .. .. ..... ... .. .. .... .. ... ... .. .... l3
3. 5OTHER STANDARCG... .. ..... ... .............. .... .. .. .... ... .... .... .. .... .. ... .. ...... .... .. .. .... ..... .. ..... .... .. ........ ...... ... ...... .. .... ....... ... 16
4. GENERAL..................... ,. ..................................................................................................... ,.......................... l 7
4.1 PA SSE NGERS.. ..... .. .. ... .. ......... ..... .. ..... .. ...... ..... .... ...... ..... ...... ... .. ..... ..... ... ... .. ... ... ..... .. .. .. .... ..... .. .. ...... ..... ..... .. ... ... 17
4. 1.1 Capad ty..................................................................................................................................................... 17
4.1.2 RSK length and J'oad ............................................................................................................................... 17
4.1.3 Luggage poRcy. ......................................................................................................................................... l 7
4.2NE1V~RK. ..... ... ............ ...... ..... ...... .... .. .. ....... ... ... ........ .. ...... .... ...... .... .... .. ... ... ... ........ .. .. ........... .. .. ... .. .. ..... ...... .... 1i
4.2. 1 Gauges ...................................................................................................................................................... l ;
4.2.2 Station platform ........................................................................................................................................ 18
4. 2.3 Power supply............................................................................................................................................ 18
4. 2. 4 Track.......................................................................................................................................................... l 8
4 .3CONDITIO NS .. ................ ....... .. .. ...... .. .. ... ..... ... ..... .......... .. ...... .. ... .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ......... ... .. ... .. ... .............. ... ..... .. ........ l S
4.3.1 Climate. ...................................................................................................................................................... 18
4.3.2 Altitude....................................................................................................................................................... l 8
4.3.3 Sand and dust .......................................................................................................................................... JB
5. RSK MAIN REQUIREMENTS .................................................. ................................................................... 20

5.1 G ENERAL R EQU IREII'ENT... ...... ... .... ..... ..... .... .... .. .. ... .. .. . .. ..... .... ...... ... .. ........ .... .... ... .. .. .. ........ ... ......... ... .... ... ...... . 20
5 .2SF'AN LIFE .... ..... ..... ... ......... ....... ........ ....... .... .. .. ......... ... .... ......................... .......... ....... .... ... ...... .. ... .... .. ..... .. .. ...... 20
5 .3CCNSTR UC110 N REQUIREIII'EN'lS ..... ....... .. .. .. .. .. ... ........ .... ....... .......... ... ... ..... ...... . ...... ..... .... .......... ........ ... ... ...... 20
5.3.1 Modularity_ ................................................................................................................................................. 20
5.3.2 fn ter eh angeability................................................................................................................ ______.............. 20
5.3 .3 Main tenance. ............................................................................................................................................. 21
5. 3. 4 Dust-proofing ............................................................................................................................................ 21
5.3.5 FJui d-proofing............................................................................................................................................ 21
5.3.6 Water-proofirlg.......................................................................................................................................... 22
5.3. 7 Washing. .................................................................................................................................................... 22
5.3.8 Sh o ck......................................................................................................................................................... 22
5. 3.9 Coa ting and pa intlng. ............................................................................................................................... 22
5.3.1OM arks an d sign age................................................................................................................................... 23
5 .4COIII1t,'ERCIAL RE QUI RE II'ENT ... ..... ............. .. ........ ...... ...... .... ... ... ... .... .. .. ..... ...... ..... .... .... .... .. ... ... .... .. .. .. ... .... .... . . 24
5.4.1 Genera/.............................................................. .........................:.............................................................. 24
5.4. 2 Business d ass.......................................................................................................................................... 24
5.4.3 Economy class ......................................................................................................................................... 25
5.4.4 Cafe teria room........................................................................................................................................ -. 25
5 .50ESIG N REO LX REI,o'ENT.. .. ... . .. ...... ... .. .... ... .. ....... .... ..... .... .. ... .. ..... ........ ... ... .. ... ................. .. .... ...... .. .... ..... .... ... .. ... 25
5.5.1 Interior design........................................................................................................................................... 25
5.5.2 Outside de sign ................................................. ........................................................................................ 25
5.5.3 Components design................................................................................................................................. 26
5 .60PE RA.T IO N RE-QUIREMENT .......... ......... .. .... .. .... ...... ..... ...... .. ............ .. .. .... .. ... ... .... .. . ·J~"- .. ... .. . .. . .. .. .... . .... ~6
g.~.~ E~1~~~~~"~~~~··• • • · •·• •· · ·• · · ·• · •·• •· ·•· •·•.• · · · •· ·•· •· · ~~~i~~~;·· ~<·· · · •· · ·~~
5.6.4 Bnngmg the RSK mto serw ce......................................................... .",_ ..,....... ,
Q
1
b
~·
'
........ -t·- ~ ,. -
I ~- -
\ I (')"'
........ 28
lO () ...: '
Ref -~~- _ :J - t:;:_ . .!::J~- S · : .. :JJ 1-E 2 ~. :; ~ '<~ ~t." ~- ' .~.:,=:; ~· ;
t:\ () I. • •
~;.-0'/~~. . t~ /':
,~ , .• ~ --
l!'f~ ,tf' .
ROLLIN G STOCK SPEC IFICATION S
5.6.5 Driving........................................................................................................................................................ 28
5.6.6 Stabling...................................................................................................................................................... 29
5.6. 7 Communication. ....................................................................................................................................... -29
5.6.8 Situations management.......................................................................................................................... 29
5.6.9 Avai/abHity_................................................................................................................................................. 29
5. 6. 1OMultiple (MU). ............................................................................................................................................ 30
5.6.11 Rescue. ...................................................................................................................................................... 3D
5.7ELECTRIC!>.L REQUIRE !vENT ......... ........... ............... ... .. .... ... ... ................. ............ .... .. ... .......................... ....... .... 31
5.7.1 Energy supply........................................................................................................................................... 31
5.7.2 Regenerative braking .............................................................................................................................. 31
5.7.3 Electric and magnetic compatibility....................................................................................................... 31
5 . 8 1\1A I NTAI ~ ILI1Y REQUIR8.•1ENT.. ... ...... ....... ..... .......... .... ............... ..... ......... .... .. ..... ........ ..... ..... .. .. .. ..... .... ........ 32
6. RSK PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT............ ....................................................................................... 33

6.1TRACTION PERFORI\·~NCE REQUIREI\£NT.. .. .... .... .... .... .... ... ... .................... .. .. ... .. .. .. ....... ... .. ... ....... ... ...... ..... ... . 33
6 .2ADHESION REQUIREr.eNT ..... .... .... .... .. .. ............................ ..... ..... .... .. .......................... .... ..... .................... ..... ... 33
.~: : : :·. 6 .38RAKJ NG PERFORM~! CE REOUIREf-.£NT.... ... ........... ... .. ... ... ... .. .. ........................ ........... ... ... ................ ............ 34
6.3.1 Generalbraking........................................................................................................................................ 34
6.3.2 Service braking......................................................................................................................................... 34
6. 3.3 Emergencybraking.................................................................................................................................. 35
6.3.4 Immobilization braking_ ............................................................................................................................ 35
6 .4CRASI-WORTHII'CSS PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT........... .... ...................... ............ ..... ... ......... .... .. ... ... .... ..... 36
6 .5ACOlJSTIC PERFQRt,•IANCE REQUIREMENT... ... ....................... .. .............. .... ..................... ................................. 36
6.5.1 Genera/...................................................................................................................................................... 36
6.5.2 On board ................................................................................................................................................... 36
6.5.3 Outside HST.............................................................................................................................................. 37
6 .6ACCELERATION PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT.. ... ... .. ........... ... ... ... ..... ... ............ .... ... .. ........... ................ ....... .. 37
6 .7TEMPERA1URE PERFORMANCE REQUIREM:NT ........ .................. ... ................ .... .. ............... .. .. ..... ................. ... 37
6.85AFETY PERFORMAI'CE REOUIREf,£NT ................................ .. ... .............. ...... .......... ...... .... ................ ...... ..... ... 3S
6.8.1 Fire ............................................................................................................................................................. 38
6.8.2 Emergencycomponents ......................................................................................................................... 38
6.8.3 Access security. ........................................................................................................................................ 40
6. 9ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE REOUIREMENT .... ... .... ... .. ............................... ................... .......................... 40
6.9.1 Pressure .................................................................................................................................................... 40
6 .9.2 Wind..................................................................................................... ...................................................... 40
6 .9 .3 Aerodynamic forces. ................................................................................................................................ 40
6 .9 .4 Climate. ...................................................................................................................................................... 41
6 .9.5 Po/Juto'on..................................................................................................................................................... 41
6.9.6 Energy saYing........................................................................................................................................... 41
6 .10 RAM S PERFORMO..NCE REQUIREI,'Ei'IT.... ... .............................. .... ............ .... ..... ... .. ...... .. .... .... .... ............. 41
7. FUNCTIONAL AND ORGANIC REQUIREMENT ............ ........................................................................ 42
Ref: r-r-::: - L:J - :::;3 -..:. ::3- S, S-J:•1-::~ ~;)

ROLLIN G STOC K SPECIFICATION S
7 .2MULT lfJEDIA REQUIREMENT .... .. .. ... ............................................ ..... ..... .. .. ........ .... .. ........ ... ............................... 51
7.2. 1 Audio.......................................................................................................................................................... 51
7.2.2 Video.......................................................................................................................................................... 51
7.2.3 lnternet ...................................................................................................................................................... 53
7 .3COMMUI'4CA110N REQUIREI.ENT .. .. .... .... .. ... .... .... ... ......... ...... ... ........... .. ...... ..................... ... .. ....... .... ...... .. .... ... 53
7.3.1 Inter-com network.................................................................................................................................... 53
7.3.2 Public lnfortnation .................................................................................................................................... 54
7.3.3 PRM passenger calL. ............................................................................................................................... 54
7.3.4 Alarm signa/.............................................................................................................................................. 55
7.3.5 Close circuit television............................................................................................................................. 55
7 .4WI NDOWS ...... ...... .................................... ....... .. .... ... .. .. ... ....... .. ........ ..... ... ... ........... ........ ..... ... .. .. ...... .. .... ....... ... . 56
7.4. 1 General'. ..................................................................................................................................................... 56
7.4.2 Passenger wind~v................................................................................................................................... 56
7.4.3 Dri~rer window........................................................................................................................................... 56
7.5DOORS..................... ....................... ..................... ............................................................................................. 57
7.5.1 Access dooro............................................................................................................................................ 57
7.5.2 Passenger room door. ............................................................................................................................. 59
7.5.3 Toilet comparttnent door. ........................................................................................................................ 59
7.5.4 Conductor compattment door.. ............................................................................................................... 60
7.5.5 Dri~rers cab door...................................................................................................................................... 60
7 .6 STRUCTURE REQUIRE t,£ NT ..... .. .. ... .. ........ ... ...... ... .. .... ... .... ............... .. .. .................. ...... ... ....... ... ..... ...... ......... .. 60
7.6.1 General. ..................................................................................................................................................... 60
7.6.2 Ufting. ......................................................................................................................................................... 61
j:~:~ ~~1:;-s-urriice::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::~::::::::::::::=::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::=::: ~~
7.6.5 Floor........................................................................................................................................................... 61
7.6.6 WalL. ........................................................................................................................................................... 62
7.6.7 Inter-coach gang..vay............................................................................................................................... 62
7.6.8 Access ....................................................................................................................................................... 62
7. ?MECHANICAL REQ UIREME NT .... .. .... ......... ... .. ....................... .. .. .................. ....... .. ......... .......... .... ..................... .. 63
7.7.1 Bogie and runni!Jg components ............................................................................................................. 63
7.7.2 A4echanicaJ links.. ...................................................................................................................................... 64
7 .88RAKE REQUIREMEf\IT ... ... ...... ...... ... .. ........ .. ....... ...... .. ..... .. ... .... ..... .. .... .. ...... ....... ....... .. ... ...... ..... .......... .... .. ...... . 54
7.8. 1 System....................................................................................................................................................... 64
7.8.2 Brake control............................................................................................................................................. 65
7.8.3 Valve and gauge ...................................................................................................................................... 65
7.8.4 Tank ........................................................................................................................................................... 65
7.8.5 Braking devlca .......................................................................................................................................... 65
7.8.6 Efflclency................................................................................................................................................... 66
7.8. 7 lmmobiffzatiOIJ braking. ............................................................................................................................ 66
7.8.8 Control Unit.. ................................................................................................................................... .......... 66
7 .9DRIVER'S CAB REQUIREMEI'nS ....... .. ... .. .. ......... .. .. ..................... .......... .......... .... ..... ...... ... .. ..... .. ... .... .... ......... ... 66
7.9. 1 Comfort. ..................................................................................................................................................... 66
7.9.2 Start-up the HS/...................................................................................................................................... 66
7.9 3 Getting eneigy..................................................................................................... ..................................... 6 7
7.9.4 Getting traction and braking ................................................................................................................... 67
7.9.5 Emergency................................................................................................................................................ 67
7.9.6 Cab signaling ............................................................................................................................................ 67
7.9. 7 man/mac/line interface (MfVII). ................................................ :............................................................... 68
7.9.8 Juridical recorder:. .................................................................................................................................... 68
7.9 .9 Radio.......................................................................................................................................................... 69
7 .10 ELECTRIOO.L REOU IREP,•ENIS .. .. ............ ....... ................ ... ................ ... ......................... ............................. 69
7.10.1The control command system (CCS). ................................................................................................... 69
7.10.2Battery........................................................................................................................................................ 11
7.10.3Power unit ............................................................... .................................................................................. 12
7.10.4Electrlcal brake......................................................................... ................................................................ 72
7.10.5Auxiliary unit ............................................................................................................................................. 73
~: ;g:~~~~ro,g:::::~-;;,:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::··:·:~~-:i~\~!:·:i:;;~;~ ~~
7. 1 0. 8 Electrical e q uipmen ts .... ......... ........ ........ .... ... .... .. .. ...... .... ....... ...... .......... ...... ....... Jt>"~<-,>tJl-'!.1!::!J~;11.~J' :?
R ef·,... ,..r; . ,_~.f"~ --'- ;:J3-S • S <)J1-:::.::o::o ...,.,~!o : -So;,~f~:o::n:

.J
i:; · &r
~--~
1)
\t.
'<~~ ~ 1'
i~
\
....~
0
:_1r (~'(-.
" •~-
.
'
"-.
. .,.
lt (
I ~ r"'\'
. "'
.. ffY)~ - ~
\,
0
( )
8. DESIGN, INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ................................................................. 76

8 .1VERIF1CA110NTESiS OF RSKEOL~ PIIIEN"TS..... ............................................................. .................................. 76
8.1.1 Design monitoring.................................................................................................................................... 76
6.1.2 Inspection .................................................................................................................................................. 76
8 .2VERIF1CA110NTESiS OF RSK ............... ........................................................................ .................................. 76
8.2.1 Factory Tests ............................................................................................................................................ 76
8.2.2 On-site integration tests.......................................................................................................................... 76
8.2.3 Static Tests................................................................................................................................................ 76
8.2.4 Dynamic Tests.......................................................................................................................................... 77
9. DOCUMENTATION ....................................................................................................................................... 78
9.1TEST DOCU~£NTATION ....................... ......................................... ................................. ........ ........................... 78
9.20N BOARD DOCUIIIENTATION ........................ ................................................................. ...... ..... ....................... 78
9.3MAINTENO..NCE DOCUMENTA110N....... ............... ............................. ................................ ...... ........................ .... 79
,........
.•. • ·:. .
~
0
0
PROJECT REFERENCES

1 HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rollinq Stock Maintenance
2 HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 Small Depot Specifications
3 H HR-LO-DW -403-SYS-002 Workshop Specifications
.·.·~··· 1
' 4 HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 RAMS Assurance Req uirements

7 HHR-LO-PR-602-SYS-001 Performance Requirement
8 HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-002 General Specifications - Section 2: Glossary
9 HHR-LO-CT-602-SAU-001 General Specifications - Appendix B: Annual
11 HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011 GSM-R Specification
12 HH R-LO-CA-403-1 NE-001 Overhead Catenary System
13 HHR-LO-HV-402-I NE-001 Power Supply System
14 HHR-LO-SI-40 3-INE-001 Interlocking And Main Line Signaling
15 HHR-LO-TR-403-1NE-001 Track System
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001 -EZ Rolling Stock Specifications PAGE 7/80
1. INTRODUCTION
This part of the HHR project is the Rolling Stock (RSK) specifications. lt defines the objectives and
requirements related to the RSK supply.
As high speed operation is in fact a system, RSK ought primarily to comply with the global design of the
project proposed by the Consortium . To ensure a world class service, according to the infrastructure
characteristics, the RSK provided for this operation should derive from proven technology and tested
design in order to ensure:
• Safe operation especially in terms of:
o Rolling equipment,
o Brake,
o Access,
:·!·.•.
o Air conditioning (AC) and air treatment,
o Radio and cab-signalling.
• Respect of Saudi environment: Railway operating conditions are particularly harsh in the Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia (KSA) with exceptional high ambient temperatures, large day to night ambient
temperature differentials, high relative humidity, and wind-borne sand and dust. The Consortium
shall take particular care that his proposed designs take fu ll account of these conditions.
• High level of service to the customers: the particular conditions of KSA shall be taken into account.
Technical Specifications for lnteroperability (TSI) are the basic specifications to meet for this
project.
Unless otherwise stipulated in the performance specifications, the RSK, as well as their frames and their
mechanical and electrical components, sha ll be designed, constructed, tested and inspected in
conformity with the requirements of specifications and reports . The specifications and reports shall be
considered in this order:
• The European and International Standards Organization (EN and ISO),
• UIC standards,
• The Saudi Arabia Railways Requirements .
In all cases where the above documents are not applicable, the best engineering practice to accepted
standard s and best industry railway practice shal l be followed .
Ref: HHR- LO· RS -403· SYS-001 -E2 Rolling Stock Specifications PAGE 8/80
(J
2. GLOSSARY
General definitions and abbreviations used in this document are defined in the document HHR-LO-CT-
602-SYS-002 General Specifications-Section 2.
2.1 DEFINITIONS
Specific definitions used in th is document are defined below:
• Empty Functioning Order Load (EFOL): An HST without any passengers and luggage, but with
the necessary crew and equipment (water, catering ... ) ready to start commercial service ,
• Nominal load (NL): HST EFOL with passenger additional load (see chapter 4 .1.1 "Capacity" and
4.1.3 "Luggage policy").
• Exceptional load (EL): HST EFOL with 2 times the number of passengers and luggage additional
load (see chapter 4.1.1 "Capacity'' and 4.1 .3 "Luggage policy").
• LpA,eqT: Continuous acoustic level expressed in decibels with A balance.
• Emergency braking: This type of braking shall be conditional upon the drive system receiving a
specific safety command . During emergency braking it is not necessary to comply with passengers
comfort requirements .
• Immobilization braking : The purpose of this type of braking is to ensure that gravity is unable to
move the HST unit when stationary ..
• Electric or dynamic braking: Electric part of the braking can include rheostat and regenerative
braking.
• Mechanical braking: Mechanical part of the braking , this can include discs , magnetic track brakes ,
brakes shoes .
• Service braking: is used under normal operating conditions , as a normal service braking for speed
reduction or non repetitive braking bringing the train to a halt, or repetitive braking for speed control.
During service braking it is necessary to comply with passenger comfort requirements .
• Coaches' integration: To make coupling and connections on coaches in order to assemble the HST
after shipment of the coaches .
2.2 ABBREVIATIONS
Specific abbreviations used in this document are defined below:

• TSI CC HS: see chapter 3.1 "TSI standard",
• TSI ENE HS: see chapter 3.1 "TSI standard ",
• TSI Infra HS: see chapter 3.1 "TSI standard",
• TSI PRM HS: see chapter 3.1 "TSI standard",
• TSI RSK HS: see chapter 3.1 "TSI standard ".
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001-E2 Rolling Stock Specifications P AGE 9/80
All these standards are applicable within the framework of the project.
The last version shall be considered.
3.1 TSI STANDARD
• TSI RSK HS: Concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating to the 'rolling stock'
sub-system of the trans-European high-speed rail system , 21 February 2008,
• TSI Infra HS: Concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating to the 'infrastructure'
sub-system of the trans-European high-speed rail system , 20 December 2007 ,
• TSI ENE HS: Concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating to the 'energy' sub-
system of the trans-European high-speed rail system , 6 March 2008,
TSI PRM: Concerning the technical specification of interoperability relating to 'Persons with Reduced
Mobility' in the trans-European conventional and high-speed rail system, 21 December 2007,
• TSI cc HS: Concerning the technical specification for interoperability relati ng to the con trol-
command and signalling subsystem of the trans-European conventional rail system and Annex A to
Decision 2006/860/EC concerning the technical specification for interoperability relating to the
control-command and signalling subsystem of the trans-European high speed ra il system, 6 March
2007 and 7 November 2007.
3.2 ISO STANDARD
• ISO 3095 Railway applications -- Acoustics -- Measurement of noise emitted by rail bound vehicles,
• ISO 3381 Railway applications-- Acoustics -- Measurement of noise inside rail bound vehicles ,
• ISO 4628-3: Paints and varnishes -- Evaluation of degradation of coatings -- Designation of quantity
and size of defects, and of intensity of uniform changes in appearance -- Part 3: Assessment of
degree of rusting,
• ISO 5817: Welding -- Fusion-welded joints in steel, nickel, titanium and their alloys (beam welding
excl uded) -- Quality levels for imperfections,
• ISO 12944-1 : Paints and varnishes -- Corrosion protection of steel structures by protective paint
systems-- Part 1: General introduction ,
• ISO 12944-2: Paints and varnishes -- Corrosion protection of steel structures by protective paint
systems -- Part 2: Classification of environments,
systems -- Part 3: Design considerations,
systems -- Part 4: Types of surface and surface preparation,
• ISO 12944-5: Paints and varni shes -- Corrosion protection of steel structures by protective paint
systems -- Part 5: Protective paint systems .
PAGE 10/80
3.3 EN STANDARD
• EN 286-3: Simple unfired pressure vessels designed to contain air or nitrogen. Steel pressure
vessels designed for air braking equipment and auxiliary pneumatic equipment for railway rolling
stock ,
• EN 729-1: Quality requirements for welding . Fusion welding of metallic materials. Guidelines for
selection and use ,
• EN 729-2: Quality requirements for welding . Fusion welding of metallic materials. Comprehensive
quality requirements ,
• EN 729-3: Quality requirements for welding . Fusion welding of metallic materials. Standard quality
requirements,
• EN 729-4: Quality requirements for welding . Fusion welding of metallic materials . Elementary quality
requirements,
• EN 10025-1: Hot rolled products of structural steels - Part 1: General technical delivery conditions ,
• EN 10025-2: Hot rolled products of structural steels - Part 2: Technical delivery conditions for non-
alloy structural steels ,
• EN 10025-3: Hot rolled products of structural steels - Part 3: Technical delivery conditions for
normalized/normalized rolled weldable fine grain structural steels,
thermomechanical rolled weldable fine grain structural steels ,
structural steels with improved atmospheric corrosion resistance ,
• EN 10025-6: Hot rolled products of structural steels - Part 6: Technical delivery conditions for flat
products of high yield strength structural steels in the quenched and tempered condition,
• EN 10028-1: Flat products made of steels for pressure purposes - Part 1: General requirements ,
• EN 10028-2: Flat products made of steels for pressure purposes - Part 2: Non-alloy and alloy steels
with specified elevated temperature properties ,
• EN 10028-3: Flat products made of steels for pressure purposes - Part 3: Weldable fine grain steels,
normalized,
• EN 10028-4 : Flat products made of steels for pressure purposes - Part 4: Nickel alloyed steels with
specified low temperature properties,
• EN 10028-5: Flat products made of steels for pressure purposes - Part 5: Weldable fine grain steels ,
thermomechanically rolled ,
• EN 10028-6: Flat products made of steels for pressure purposes - Part 6: Weldable fine grain steels,
quenched and tempered ,
• EN 10028-7: Flat products made of steels for pressure purposes- Part 7: Stainless steels ,
• EN 10083-1 : Steels for quenching and tempering - Part 1: General technical delivery conditions ,
• EN 10083-2: Steels for quenching and tempering- Part 2: Technical delivery conditions for non alloy
steels ,
• EN 10083-3: Steels for quenching and tempering - Part 3: Technical delivery conditions for alloy
steels ,
• EN 10155: Structural steels with improved atmospheric corrosion resistance. Technical delivery
conditions ,
•
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001-E2 Rolling Stock Specifications
• EN 13129-1 : Railway applications . Air conditioning for main line rolling stock - Part 1: Comfort Q
parameters ,
• EN 13129-2: Railway applications- Air conditioning for main line rolling stock - Part 2: Type tests ,
• EN 13260 : Railway applications- Wheelsets and bogies- Wheel -sets- Product requirements ,
• EN 13261: Railway applications -Wheel-sets and bogies , Axles , Product requirements ,
• EN 13272: Railway applications - Electrical lighting for rolling stock in public transport systems ,
• EN 13802: Railway applications . Suspension components . Hydraulic dampers ,
• PROJECT EN 15663: Railway applications- Definition of vehicle reference masses,
• EN 22553: Welded , brazed and soldered joints . Symbolic representation on drawings,
• EN 30042 : Arc-welded joints in aluminium and its weldable alloys . Guidance on quality levels for
imperfections ,
• EN 50121-1: Electromagnetic Compatibility- Part 1: General ,
• EN 50121-2: Electromagnetic Compatibility- Part 2: Emission of the Whole Railway System to the
Outside World,
• EN 50121-3-1: Electromagnetic Compatibility - Part 3-1: Rolling Stock - Train and Complete
Vehicle,
• EN 50121-3-2: Electromagnetic Compatibility- Part 3-2: Rolling Stock- Apparatus ,
• EN 50121 -4: Electromagnetic Compatibility - Part 4: Emission and Immunity of the Signalling and
Telecommunications Apparatus ,
• EN 50121-5: Electromagnetic Compatibility- Part 5: Emission and Immunity of Fixed Power Supply
Installations and Apparatus,
• EN 50124-1: Railway applications- Insulation coordination- Part 1: Basic requirements- Clearances
and creepage distances for all electrical and electronic equipment ,
• EN 50125-1: Railway applications - Environmental conditions for equipment- Part 1: Equipment on
board rolling stock,
• EN 50126: Railway applications - The specification and demonstration of reliability, availability,
maintainability and safety (RAMS) ,
• EN 50128: Railway applications - Communications , signalling and processing systems- Software for
railway control and protection systems ,
• EN 50129: Railway applications - Communications , signalling and processing systems - Safety
related electronic systems for signaling ,
• EN 50153: Railway applications - Rolling stock - Protective provisions relating to electrical hazards ,
• EN 50155: Railway applications - Electronic equipment used on rolling stock ,
• EN 50163: Railway applications - Supply voltages of traction systems,
• EN 50206-1: Railway applications - Rolling stock - Pantographs: Characteristic tests - Part 1:
------
Pantographs for main line vehicles ,
N\-5(i)Z0 7:::. Uway applications - Electronic power converters for rolling stock ,
/ ,...:..--::.. •\.\;(. ) ~..
J'/~~ftN~.50238: ~ . y applications - Compatibility between rolling stock and train detection systems ,
{(.~C}I}E~ 50 ~~3: ~ ilw_? applications - Rolling stock - Rules for installation of cabling,
~J.:,, ~ ~o35sf ~·il b applications - Railway rolling stock cables having special fire performance - Thin
~ \¥Vall a t~,~d ~ all ,
~~. :o,. · , l <.
0
,f:N 503'67 :· ar' ay applications - Current collection systems - Technical criteria for the interaction
~~' · / graph and overhead line ,
• EN 50388: Railway applications - Power supply and rolling stock - Technical criteria for the
coordination between power supply (substation) and rolling stock to achieve interoperability ,
R•f' HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001t o1Uog S1ook Spooifice tio"" PAG E 12/80
• EN 60034-1: Rotating electrical machines - Part 1: Rating and performance ,

• EN 60034-18-1: Rotating electrical machines - Part 18: Functional evaluation of insulation systems;
section 1: General guidelines ,
• EN 60034-18-31: Rotating electrical machines - Part 18: Functional evaluation of insulation systems ;
Section 31: Test procedures for form-wound windings ; thermal evaluation and classification of
insulation systems used in machines up to and including 50 MVA and 15 kV ,
• EN 60077-1: Railway applications - Electric equipment for rolling stock - Part 1: General service
conditions and general rules ,
• EN 60077-2: Railway applications - Electric equipment for rolling stock - Part 2: Electrotechnical
components - General rules ,
• EN 60077-3: Railway applications - Electric equipment for rolling stock - Part 3: Electrotechnical
components - Rules for DC circuit-breakers,
• EN 60077-4 : Railway applications - Electric equipment for rolling stock - Part 4: Electrotechnical
components - Rules for AC circuit-breakers ,
• EN 60077-5: Railway applications - Electrotechnical equipment for rolling stock - Part 5:
Electrotechnical components - Rules for HV fuses ,
• EN 60254-1: Lead-acid traction batteries - Part 1: General requirements and methods of tests ,
• EN 60296: Fluids for electro technical applications - Unused mineral insulating oils for transformers
and switchgear,
• EN 60310 : Railway applications - Traction transformers and inductors on board rolling stock ,
• EN 60349-2: Railway applications - Rotating electrical machines for rail and road vehicles - Part 2:
Electronic converter-fed alternating current motors ,
• EN 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures ,
• EN 60623 : Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes - Vented
nickel-cadmium prismatic rechargeable single cells ,
• EN 60836 : Specifications for unused silicone insulating liquids for electro technical purposes ,
• EN 60896-11: Stationary lead-acid batteries - Part 11 : Vented types - General requirements and
methods of test,
• EN 60947-4-1: Low-voltage switch gear and control gear - Part 4-1: Contactors and motor-starters -
Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters ,
• EN 61287-1: Railway applications - Power converters installed on board rolling stock - Part 1:
Characteristics and test methods ,
• EN 61373 : Railway applications - Rolling stock equipment- Shock and vibration tests ,
• EN 61377: Railway applications- Rolling stock - Combined testing of inverter-fed alternating current
motors and their control.
3.4 UIC STANDARD
• UIC PROJECT FRS EIREN E V7: European Integrated Railway Radio Enhanced Network -
Functional Requirements Specification ,
• UIC PROJECT SRS EIRENE V15: European Integrated Railway Radio Enhanced Network - System
Requirement Specification ,
• UIC 438 -1: Identification marking for passenger rolling stock,
• UIC 505-1: Railway transport stock - Rolling stock construction gauge ,
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001 -E2 Rolling Stock Specificati ons
• UIC 512: Rolling stock- Conditions to be fulfilled in order to avoid difficulties in the operation of track
circuits and treadles ,
• UIC 513: Guidelines for evaluating passenger comfort in relation to vibration in railway vehicles,
• UIC 515-4: Railway coaches- Bogie frame structure strength tests,
• UIC 518: Testing and approval of railway vehicles from the point of view of their dynamic behavior-
Safety - Track fatigue - Ride quality,
• UIC 520: Wagons , coaches and vans- Draw gear - Standardization ,
• UIC 527-1: Coaches , vans and wagons- Dimensions of buffer heads- Track layout on S-curves ,
• UIC 528: Buffer gear for coaches ,
• UIC 533: Protection by the earthing of metal parts of vehicles ,
• UIC 540: Brakes -Air Brakes for freight trains and passenger trains,
• UIC 541-1: Brakes - Regulations concerning the design of brake components ,
• UIC 541-3: Brakes - Disc brakes and their application - General conditions for the approval of brake
pads ,
• UIC 541-4: Brakes- Brakes with composition brake blocks - General conditions for certification of
composite brake blocks ,
• UIC 541 -03: Brakes - Regulations concerning manufacture of the different brake parts - Driver's
brake valve,
• UIC 541-04: Brakes - Regulations concerning the manufacture of brake components - Self-adjusting
load-proportional braking system and automatic "empty-loaded" control device ,
• UIC 541-05: Brakes - Specifications for the construction of various brake parts - Wheel Slide
Protection device (WSP),
• UIC 541-07: Brakes - Regulations governing the construction of different types of braking gear -
Simple pressure receptacles of steel , not fired , for air braking equipment and auxiliary pneumatic
equipment for railway roll ing stock ,
• UIC 544-2: Conditions to be observed by the dynamic brake of locomotives and motor coaches so
that the braking effort produced can be taken into account for the calculation of the braked-weight,
• UIC 545: Brakes - Inscriptions, marks and signs ,
• UIC 555: Electric lighting in passenger rolling stock ,
• UIC 560: Doors , footboards, windows , steps , handles and handrails of coaches and luggage vans,
• UIC 561: Means of intercommunication for coaches ,
• UIC 562: Space for baggage racks , coat-hooks and lockers - Measures to prevent baggage theft,
• UIC 563: Fittings provided in coaches in the interests of hygiene and cleanliness ,
• UIC 564-2 : Regulations relating to fire protection and firefighting measures in passenger carrying
railway vehicles or assimilated vehicles used on international services ,
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001 -E 2 Rolling Stock Specifications P AGE 14/80
• UIC 617-7: Regulations concerning conditions of visibility from driving compartments of electric
powered stock ,
• UIC 640: Motive power units - Inscriptions, marks and signs ,
• UIC 641: Conditions to be fulfilled by automatic vigilance devices used in international traffic ,
• UIC 651: Layout of driver's cabs in locomotives, railcars , multiple-unit trains and driving trailers ,
• UIC 660: Measures to ensure the technical compatibility of high-speed trains ,
• UIC 751 -1: Railway radio equipment - Fixed and mobile units - General technical considerations ,
• UIC 751-2: Railway radio equipment - Technical specifications ,
• UIC 751-3: Technical regulations for international ground-train radio systems ,
• UIC 797: Coordination of electrical protection substations -traction units,
• UIC 813: Technical specification for the supply of wheelsets for tractive and trailing stock -
Tolerances and assembly,
• UIC 842-3: Technical specification for the surface preparation of metallic and non-metallic materials
used in the construction of railway vehicles and containers ,
{::-:-~ ,
'- .: ~7:: -.'

• UIC 842-5: Technical specification for the protection against corrosion and painting of coaches and
tractive units,
• UIC 897-1: Technical specification for the acceptance and supply of coated electrodes for manual
arc welding of Carbon , carbon-manganese and low-alloy steels ,
• UIC 897-2: Technical specification for symbols for coated electrodes for manual arc-welding of
carbon , carbon manganese and low-alloy steels,
• UIC 897-4: Technical specification for the acceptance and supply of combinations of wire electrodes
and flux for automatic submerged arc welding of carbon , carbon-manganese and low-alloy steels,
• UIC 897-5: Technical specification for a system of symbols for wire electrodes and flux for automatic
submerged arc welding of carbon, carbon-manganese and low-alloy steels ,
• UIC 897-6: Technical specification for the acceptance of combinations of wire electrodes (solid or
cored) and gases and also for the supply of wire electrodes (solid or cored) for automatic and semi-
automatic gas-shielded welding of plain carbon or low-alloy steels ,
• UIC 897 -7: Technical specification for a system of symbols for solid or cored wire-electrodes , gases
and wire-electrode and gas combinations for automatic and semi-automatic gas-shielded welding of
plain carbon or low-alloy steels ,
• UIC 897-8: Technical specification for determining the nominal output and coefficient of reposition of
cored wire electrodes for automatic and semi-automatic gas-shielded welding of plain carbon or low-
alloy steels ,
• UIC 897-9: Technical specification for the preparation for welding of the edges of rolled products
made of plain carbon or low-alloy steels with a tensile strength of less than 610 N/mm2 , for arc
welding with coated electrodes and for semi-automatic arc welding ,
• UIC 897-11: Technical specification for the acceptance of welders for fusion welding of steels ,
• UIC 897-12: Technical specification for acceptance or welding procedures for arc welding in steels ,
• UIC 897-13: Technical specification for the quality control of welded joints on steel rolling stock,
• UIC 897-14: Technical specification for the execution and control of test joints in steel- Test pieces ,
• UIC 897-22: Technical specification for the quality control of welded joints on rolling stock in
aluminium and aluminium alloys,
• UIC 897-2 3: Technical specification for the execution and control of test joints in aluminium and
aluminium alloys (Mock-ups) .
3.5 OTHER STANDARDS
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-00 1-E2 Rolling Stock Speci ficati ons
• EEIG 96S126: RAMS requirements,

0
• ERRI B55/RP8 : Computational Simulation and Test
Ref: HHR· LO- RS -403- SYS-001-E2 Rolling Stock Specifications PAGE 16/80
4. GENERAL
4.1 PASSENGERS
4.1.1 CAPACITY
The normal operations capacity of one HST shall be at least 417 passenger seats, according to the
Basic Service Plan conditions and constraints defined in the documents:......
• HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-002 Basic Service Plan,

• HHR-LO-OP-202-SYS-001 Operating Requirements.
4.1.2 RSK LENGTH AND LOAD
The HST shall be homologated according to TSI RSK HS and project of standard EN 15663.. The
Consortium is responsible for the performance of "Certification" and "Acceptance" tests of the
RSK component.
Government will nominate the entities responsible for the issue of certificates.
The HST structure and performance shall be designed based on total weight of each passenger
(included his luggage) is less than 95kg.
4.1.3LUGGAGE POLICY
A maximum of 1 large sized piece of luggage per passenger shall be the policy.
This luggage shall be :

• Weight less than 25kg,
• Sized less than 0.16m 3 .
Only one extra hand luggage per passenger shall be allowed:
• Back bag (ruck sack),
• Laptop bag ,
• Camera bag ,
• Women bag,
• Nursery bag.
Each seat shall be able to accommodate the passengers' hand luggage using a continuous top storage
rack on both sides in each coach (see chapter 7. 1.15 "Luggage"). In addition each coach shall have
areas or several shelf stacks allocated and designed specifically for large sized luggage.
In station luggage security check-in shall be carried out before the HST access. From the security
check-in point to the HST, luggage shall be carried by the passenger or a station porter.
An Independent lu ggage service shall be proposed in case of excess luggage.
4.2 NETWORK
4.2.1GAUGES
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001 -E2 Rolling Stock Specifications

The HHR project shall be a HST system in accordance with TSI RSK HS and TSIInfra HS:
• The track gauge (distance between the two rails) shall be: 1435mm,
• The RSK gauge envelope shall be the biggest type: GC.
4.2.2STATION PLATFORM
The nominal platform height above the running plane (rail) shall be 760mm. The door sill level of the
train shall match the level of the platform.
4.2.3 POWER SUPPLY
The means of electrification shall be by a 25 Kv, 60 Hz single phase system in accordance with the
documents:
• HHR-LO-CA-403-INE-001 Overhead Catenary System,
• HHR-LO-HV-402-INE-001 Power Supply System.
The electrification route shall consist of:
• Tracks in open line,
• Tracks in stations,
• Tracks in tunnels,
• Tracks in maintenance sites ,
• Tracks in stabling yards.
The return current system shall be able to pass the return current back to the relevant substations under
normal and downgraded conditions.
The catenary height shall be in accordance with the document HHR-LO-CA-403-INE-001 Overhead
Catenary System.
4.2.4TRACK
The track canting will be 1/20 in accordance with TSIInfra HS.
The track grade will be in accordance with TSIInfra HS.
The track shall be in accordance with the document HHR-LO-TR-403-INE-OOHracks Specifications .
4.3 CONDITIONS
4.3.1 CL/MATE
above sea level.
4.3.3 SAND AND DUST
The RSK shall be suitable to operate in an environment which has dust-filled locations and sand-filled
areas all over the route in addition to coping with salt spray air in the coastal areas.
The RSK shall be required to withstand violent storms and heavy rains without damage and loss of
efficiency.
Special attention shall be given to the climatic conditions prevailing in Saudi Arabia with reference to the
efficient filtration of intake air, lubrication oil and sealing against sand and fine dust. In particular,
support bearings, traction motors bearings, journal boxes bearings, axle mounted gearbox bearings,
and all other parts are to be well protected against the intrusion of sand and fine dust. Consideration
should be given to pressurizing equipment cases, axle mounted gearboxes, etc. to prevent the ingress
of contaminants.
···:."··.·
...
0
5. RSK MAIN REQUIREMENTS
This chapter describes the main RSK requirements .
5.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT
Req 01
The RSK shall be
11: Proven technology,
·~ Approved in terms of safety,
~ Equipped with an electric traction system (concentrated or distributed power),
I. Capable of being coupled in multiple units (MU),
.1. Equipped with an un-couplable coach system (except for maintenance reasons), Uncoupling must be
possible in specific maintenance shop only. ()
5.2 SPAN LIFE
During service life, the RSK running performances shall reach the level expressed in chapter 6 "RSK
Performance requirement".
Req 02
The RSK shall be designed on the basis of a 30 year span life.
5.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
5.3.1 MODULARITY
A modular construction system is proposed in order to increase protection from environmental factors
as well as to increase the mechanical stability and maintainability of all the devices.
Components or units pertaining to a given function and/or technology shall preferably be grouped in the
same fun ctional assembly named "module" (e .g; frame , cabinet, box, etc.).
IReq 03
The RSK shall be a modular system.
5.3.2/NTER CHANGEABILITY
onents shall be inter-chan eable.
Ref: HHR· LO· RS -403- SYS-001 -E2 Rolling Stock Specifications P AGE 20/80
5.3.3 MAINTENANCE
The RSK equipment shall be designed so that the maintenance effort is designed to achieve the highest
state-of-the-art technology.
The design of the construction modules shall be arranged to minimize the amount of maintenance effort.
Req 05
For maintenance purposes the RSK components shall :
11: Be inter-changeable,
11: Be clearly positioned with visible status ,
11: Provide good accessibility,
11: Have excellent maintainability in accordance with document HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling
Stock Maintenance ; chapter "Maintainability requirement",
11: Have a low wear rate ,
11: Provide for easy recognition of wear and tear.
Also KSA local operational constraints must be respected whereby it is necessary to operate in a dusty
and sand -filled environment. Consequently RSK shall be designed to mitigate against the impact.
Req 06
RSK shall be designed
11: For high capacity sealing of closed areas to protect against dust and sand penetration,
11: To minimize sand particles deposition on horizontal/vertical elements of bogies and the structure .
5.3.4 DUST-PROOFING
The air used for interior ventilation of the Power Modules and Auxiliary Modules shall be filtered .
Every care shall be taken to prevent dust or sand from being recycled .
The RSK shall be well secured against dust enetration .
5.3.5 FLUID-PROOFING
All possible leakage of fluids shall be evacuated to an inside-container which can be easily emptied
during maintenance . This is required in order to avoid pollution of the track as well as protect
components installed inside the chassis and electric cables .
The RSK shall be well secured a ainst fluid leaka e.
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001-E2 Rolling Stock Speci fi cati ons P AGE 21/80
5.3.6 WATER-PROOFING
Special measures shall be taken to prevent water ingress from rain or washing and prevent the
retention of water from condensation .
As a general rule, joint covers and panels exposed to weather conditions shall be assembled by
continuous welding.
The RSK shall be tested for waterproofing against zenithal and frontal water sprays and from the effects
of a washing plant.
The RSK shall be well secured a ainst water ingress.
5.3.7WASHING
The design of the bodies shall permit an easy washing process for the RSK by using automatic - train
washing plants. See document HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 Small Depot specifications.
lt shall be possible to wash the bogies as installed by a pressurized spray, wherein axle-set boxes and
electrical components shall be protected against getting wet.
Req 10
111: The RSK shall be washable,
11: The cleaning level expected shall be in accordance with the document HHR-LO-PR-602-SYS-001
Performance Requirement.
5.3.8SHOCK
Shock refers to items which could easily be damaged from the kicking up or spraying of hard material
(ballast for example) . In such cases components (such as cables or small pipes on the bogies), bogie ,
wheel-set, body under-frame and side frame shall be effectively protected against shock damage in
both directions of travel.
The RSK shock ex rotected .
5.3.9 COATING AND PAINTING
General
The materials used and the methods of assembly to construct the RSK shall be designed to ensure
maximum protection against rust and galvanic corrosion .
·~·~b~~'r{ ar:l(t idation protection work , including the preparation of substrates before painting , the
/; ..,-a1;Jil.ltCation 6f ~9 · ts and the laying of markings, shall be carried out in conformance with the
oil . . , ;,
• .0l:lJ •r;· !.ui.C
.
r .,.
o<t..-2.$,
? li l:IIC 842 5, :r
~%EN IS'O 4628-3, ~

-
~-
' 1 .' ',t
,.
d-
; .} r~omtne,[1 datt~n .o the following standards (or EOS):
{ 0.2
..-? E N ISCiH 2944,

. ffi~§1 for the wheel-set,
- for the compressed air tank.
)
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001-E2 Rolling Stock Specifications PAG E22/80
Req 12
The RSK shall be
Inner surfaces
The inner surfaces shall be :

• Protected against corrosion and oxidation , small knocks (e.g. from luggage), cleaning and washing
products.
• Powder coated or painted with products that respect the environment.
N.B. The colour and pattern will be decided in consultation with the client.
Req 13
11: Coating products applied to the RSK inner surfaces shall be adapted to mass high speed transit
system constraints.
Outer surfaces
The outer surfaces shall be protected against corrosion and oxidation and local environmental
.. -. ·.·'
~-
constraints, taking into account the information describe in the documents HHR-LO-CT -602-SAU -001
.-.·-·>-·
General Specifications -Appendix 8: Annual Climate and Weather in KSA ,
The public image of the RSK is given by the status and condition of the RSK outer surface .
Consequently the outer surface shall be coated and/or painted and/or protected against abrasion by
sand . The outer surface color shall not be matte, bleached , nor fade nor be torn off.
Req 14
1: Coating products applied to the RSK outer surfaces shall be adapted to KSA local conditions (e.g.
sand).
Bogie and wheel-sets surfaces
The bogies components shall be painted with a high quality primer coating (minimum 2 layers) . The top
coating shall be elastic high quality paint.
onents outer surface coatin
Compressed air tank

!
The compressed air tank surfaces , especially inner surface , shall be protected against corrosion and
oxidation .
ainst rust.
5.3.10 MARKS AND SIGNA GE
• UIC 438-1,
• UIC 545,
• UIC 580,
• UIC 640.
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001 -E2 Rolling Stock Specifications PAGE 23/80
All necessary identification markings of the coach for passenger use shall be bi-lingual :
• Arabic ,
• English .
For train crew and maintenance staff use , each device and component shall bear an identification plate
showing its symbolic designation and number. These plates shall be marked in:
• Arabic ,
• English.
Identification plates shall be mechanically attached. Adhesive fastening is not allowed .
Also, for identification of electrical apparatus in the body, the cab and under the frame, mechanically
fastened plates shall be provided .
The RSK marks and signage shall be bi-lingual and fastened securely.
5.4 COMMERCIAL REQUIREMENT
5.4. 1 GENERAL
The RSK shall be composed of several coaches (according to RSK technology) , connected to each
other by a coach intercommunication space (gangway) . Thus, passengers and HST crew shall be able
to pass from one coach to another.
The RSK shall have only two passengers' classes and a small cafeteria room:
Req 18
1: Business class (approximately 30% of seats),
1: Economy class (approximately 70% of seats) .
These two classes shall have a different and significant level of comfort. Moreover, each coach shall
contain only one class.
Req 19
The coach rooms and cafeteria shall be :
No smoking areas only
Passenger room style only (open space, no compartments).
The business class proportion shall be approximately 30% of seating . This class shall contain:
High luxury seats fixed 2 by 1 configuration,

. )
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001-E 2 Rolling Stock Specifications PAGE 24/80
Luggage storage racks and stacks; see chapter 7.1 .15 "Luggage",
Toilet com artment; see cha ter 7.1 .4 "Toilet com artment".
The high luxury seats shall be mandatory equipped with :
Req 21
Ill Folding table; see chapter 7 .1.9 "Seat" ,
Ill Reading light; see chapter 7 .1.10 "Lighting",
11: Multimedia devices; see chapter 7.2 "Multimedia requirement".
5.4.3 ECONOMY CLASS
The economy class proportion shall be approximately 70% of seating. This class shall contain :
Req 22
ll Luxury seats fixed 2 by 2 configuration,
ll Luggage storage racks and stacks ; see chapter 7.1.15 "Luggage",
.._....:..· • . t
lE Toilet compartment; see chapter 7.1.4 "Toilet compartment" .
The luxury seats shall be mandatory equipped with:
Req 23
I[ Folding table; see chapter 7.1.9 "Seat",
1: Reading light; see chapter 7 .1.1 0 "Lighting".
5.4.4 CAFETERIA ROOM
A small cafeteria located between Business and Economy class shall allow on-board and catering
service.
Req 24
The cafeteria room shall be equipped with :
1: Galley and bar for catering service ,
1: Trolley for on-board service.
5.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENT
Design has to be approved by the Government .
5.5.11NTERIOR DESIGN
The overall design of the coaches' interior shall be proposed by the Consortium . lt shall be of the
highest possible quality standards . Special attention shall be paid to a harmonic, timeless and
aesthetically united appearance .
RSK interior desi n shall be based u
5.5.2 OUTSIDE DESIGN

The design of the RSK outside shall be proposed by the Consortium . Spe
KSA local context (high temperature , sand ... ) and culture .

0
RSK outside desi n shall be based on the KSA context.
5.5.3 COMPONENTS DESIGN
RSK components shall be selected primarily from among components of modern design which have
already proved satisfactory in use on HST or which are derived directly from such HST components.
onents design shall be raven technology.
5.6 OPERATION REQUIREMENT
5.6.1 GENERAL
C\
\~:;;;)
The RSK and its function and components requirements shall be adapted to the Basic Service Plan
conditions and constraints defined in the documents :
5.6.2SERVICE AT HIGH SPEED
The RSK shall be designed to run:
Req 28
1£ At 300KPH in commercial operation ,
1£ At 300KPH +1 0% out of commercial operation .
The RSK shall be able to operate to respect the schedules defined in the document HHR-LO-OP-402-
SYS-002 Basic Service Plan and in conformance with the infrastructure of the networks.
Req 29
1£ The RSK shall stop in intermediate stations and restart after 3 minutes (without coupling or
uncoupling action). Stopping times at each station vary between 3 minutes and 10 minutes .
1£ The operations procedure to close and lock the door of a RSK single unit (SU) or multiple units (MU)
configuration shall be lower than or equal to 30 seconds .
No less than 50% of HST passengers with their luggage will board .
In an emergency situation, assuming that the HST is stopped on open track with access doors open on
both sides, the following erformance is required.
I. Time for emergency unload shall be less than 90 seconds. The conditions to be considered are HST
full of passengers.
I' All HST passengers without their luggage will disembark as fast as possible.
I. Disable or handicapped passengers will be assisted by the crew or by other passengers.
ll Unloading time shall not exceed 60 seconds.
Two RSK sets shall be able to couple together to get an MU configuration . For MU configuration the
operations procedure performances shall be at least the same as for an SU configuration .
Req 31
Ill MU configuration coupling action duration shall be in less than 3 minutes,
11. Mechanical uncoupling action duration shall be in less than 15 seconds.
Both an automatic command of uncoupling from the driver's cab and a manual command of uncoupling
from the ground shall be provided . The uncoupling of two HST shall be supervised from the in use
driving cab only.
·.·.·, ·.~ ·
0
5.6.3ACCESS
The RSK access shall be:
Req 32
1: Possible from any place and under any circumstances by the authorized staff,
I' Protected from any external intrusion (vandalism, terrorist, thief .. .).
5. 6.4 BRINGING THE RSK INTO SERVICE
To bring a RSK into service the procedure (including for MU) shall be:
Req 33
11: Possible from any driving cab of the RSK,
I: Done in less than 15 minutes (including tests before departure).
The initial point for this time is the moment when the driver sits down to begin the service tests .
The HST has been previously prepared:
By depot staff when the driver takes the HST from stabling area from maintenance depot.
By previous run if the driver takes the HST from station
.The mandatory RSK tests before departure shall be:
Req 34
11: Brake test,
11: Driving assistance and safety equipment tests .
The final list of tests before departure is left to the discretion of the Consortium , according to RSK
technology. The Consortium shall be able to demonstrate that the test before departure procedure
allows for time to respect RAMS performance requirements .
Moreover, these tests before departure shall be carried out from the driving cab in service , without the ()
driver having to move.
5.6.5DRIVING
RSK movements shall be controlled by the driver.
Each RSK extremity shall have its own driving cab. The following driving modes shall be available :
automatically through
1ng mode(s) can be proposed by the Consortium.
Req 35
RSK shall be controlled b the driver and shall allow manual and im osed s eed modes.
...
~··

5.6.6 STABLING
For stabling , the RSK shall be equipped with an automatic immobilization braking system (see chapter
6.3.4 "Immobilization braking").
The stabled RSK shall:

• Consume as little energy as possible ,
• Be as noiseless as possible.
Req 36
The RSK stablin rocedure shall be carried out in less than 10 seconds
5. 6. 7 COMMUNICATION
The RSK shall be equipped with an internal communication network (see chapter 7.3.1 "Inter-com
network"). lt shall be usable by:
• The driver to communicate with passengers ,
• The conductor to communicate with passengers, ~
\.!,J
• The RSK crew (catering) to communicate with passengers,
• The driver to communicate with the conductor,
• The conductor to communicate with the driver,
• The conductor or driver to communicate with the other driver's cab.
The RSK shall be equipped with an external wireless communication network usable by:
• The driver to communicate with the OCC .
• The conductor to communicate with the OCC .
The wireless communication network is described in the document HHR-LO -TE-403-SYS-011 GSM-R
specification .
Req 37
The RSK shall bee uip ed with an internal and external communication network.
5.6.8 SITUATIONS MANAGEMENT
The RSK shall have an MMI (Man Machine Interface) and shall be equipped (with tools and safety
tackle) to assist on board staff (the driver and conductor) to manage a range of situations:
on board staff to manage any situation through having a high performance MMI
nt.
· g features and the materials shall be designed and selected with a view to ensuring
good wear and corrosion resistance for the HST operation , during its
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001-E 2 Rolling Stock Specification s PAGE 30/80
0 Req 39 RSK availability shall be in accordance with :

1: General policy defined in document HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 RAMS assurance requirements,
1: General requirements defined in document HHR-LO-PR-602-SYS-001 Performance Requirement ,
1: Specific requirements defined in document HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance
chapter "Quality and RAMS manaQement plan".
5.6.10 MULTIPLE (MU)
Two RSK (in SU configuration) shall be able to couple together to make an MU configuration:
• The normal approaching speed shall be 3KPH ,
• An approaching speed shall be possible at 6KPH without RSK degradation .
A MU configuration shall be able to run on track, especially a curve and reverse curve, in accordance
with TSI Infra HS and the documents:
• HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 Small Depot specifications,
• HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002 Workshop specifications,
• HHR-LO-TR-403-INE-001 Track Specifications.
MU configuration coupling or uncoupling shall be done from inside the HST, without any worker action
from the outside of the HST .
Req 40
1: Two RSK shall be able to couple quickly to make up an MU configuration ,
1: In case of accidental uncoupling of an MU configuration, the two SU configuration sets shall brake in
emergency mode (see chapter 6.3.3 "Emergency braking").
5.6.11 RESCUE
In the case of a traction power supply failure, the HST shall be rescued by an adapted rescue system:
• An emergency HST (which follows it, or is in front of it),
• An emergency diesel locomotive equipped with the same coupler as the HST (see documents HHR-
LO-DW-403-SYS-001 Small Depots specifications) .
The rescue system is left to the discretion of the Consortium , according to RSK technology. The
Consortium shall be able to demonstrate that the test before departure procedure has a high level in
RAMS performance.
Req 41
The rescue system shall allow:
I: To push or pull a failed HST until the next station ,
l' To maintain a failed HST HVAC system in degraded mode (see chapter 7.1.16 "Heating , Venting
and Air Conditioning").
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001-E2 Rolling Stock Specifica ti ons PAGE 31/80
5.7 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT
5. 7.1 ENERGY SUPPLY
The RSK shall be powered by catenary's using alternating normal current at 25 000 volts - 60 Hz
frequency, according to the standard EN 50163 (or EOS).
The RSK shall supply energy to auxiliary equipment and the on board network power system
(distribution and energy transformation),
The RSK conception shall be in accordance with the followings standards:

• TSI ENE HS,
• TSI RSK HS,
• EN 50163 (or EOS),
• EN 50388 (or EOS),
• UIC 797 (or EOS).
Req 42
The RSK shall allow:
11: Power to supply the traction power unit,
11 Power to supply the auxiliary equipment and the on board network power (distribution and energy
transformation),
11' The means to perform regenerative braking (see chapter 5.7.2 "Regenerative braking'} ,
5. 7.2 REGENERATIVE BRAKING
The HST shall include a regenerative braking system (that returns current from braking action to the
catenary). This system shall be possible for the whole electrified network, according to the following
standards (or EOS):
• EN 50388,
• EN 50163.
The HST shall have an efficient re enerative brakin s stem.
5. 7.3 ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
The HST shall be in accordance with Electrical and ma
5.8 MAINTAINABILITY REQUIREMENT
All the RSK maintainability requirements are defined in the document HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001
Rolling Stock Maintenance chapter "RSK and components maintainability plan".
I'··:
··:.;!;' "
6. RSK PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
This chapter describes the RSK expected performances.

RSK shall be able to perform the journ ey time travel expected in the Basic Service Plan or the reference
travel times according to the documents:
• HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-002 Basic Service Plan .
• HHR-LO-OP-202-SYS-001 Operating Requirements
6.1 TRACTION PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
Traction performances shall be compliant with TSI RSK HS requirements and the RSK shall be able to
reach 300 KPH in the following conditions:
Req 45
11: With only 75% of the tractive power available,
0
1£ In the case of nominal load (NL).
In addition the various running and braking equipment shall be designed in order to run :
• At 300 KPH in commercial operation.
• At 300 KPH +10% out of commercial operation .
Req 46
it: The RSK shall be able to start on a 35%o grade in NL condition with only 75 % of the tractive power
available,
11: The RSK shall be able to start on a 20%o grade in NL condition with only 50 % of the tractive power
available.
6.2 ADHESION REQUIREMENT
The RSK wheel slip prevention device shall be in accordance with the following standard:
• TSI RSK HS,
• UIC 541-05 (or EOS).
lt shall allow for high perform ance to:

• Limit the slip time to less than 1 second,
• Limit the speed difference between two axles of the same bogie to less than 3KPH, in both cases,
wh eth/.~ ~a t~ !l (motor axles) or on braking (all·axles).
,, ',,,.,, .... l 4\.·
In addition, it §lliall comply ~~ he following requirements:
• In a, 3~·%'b g ade , witll~a ~io inal catenary voltage, on wet rail and without sanding device, with th e
initialrspAed eq ual to •ze~o~t RSK shall be able to reach:
\
.. v) ) .( I'
~' G, 90K-8 H ·n4 kil meters with 100 % of the tractive power available
'1>';:- • A
,..o ,Af._~~tt i 4~ 1lometers with 75% of the tractive power available
• Finally in the case of nominal load (NL), with 100 % of the tractive power available , with a nominal
catenary voltage and on a 6 kilometers-long 35%o grade the RSK shall be able to :
o Exit the grade at a minimum speed of 190KPH (with an initial speed of 190KPH)
o Exit the grade at a minimum speed of 275KPH (with an initial speed of 300KPH)
Req47
1: The RSK shall be equipped with a wheel slip prevention device in accordance with international
standards.
6.3 BRAKING PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
6.3.1 GENERAL BRAKING
Braking shall be used for maintaining a speed or stopping the HST accurately and reliably anywhere on
the line , according to following standards (or EOS):
• TSI RSK HS,
• UIC 540.
Braking shall also be in compliance with passenger comfort requirements . lt shall limit the proportion of
kinetic energy converted into heat.
The RSK shall have the same braking performances in SU or MU configuration. In addition , continuity of
the braking device shall be carried out automatically during an MU configuration coupling.
An interlocking system between traction and braking shall be provided , in order to cancel tractive effort
in the case of braking. Moreover adhesion used during braking shall be optimized.
A RSK system shall monitor and inform the driver in case of wheel-set locking . The following standards
(or EOS) shall be applied :
• UIC 541-05,
• UIC 660.
In the case of a braking system malfunction; the driver shall be able to isolate broken down parts in
order to continue HST service; UIC 660 standard (or EOS) shall be applied .
During coupling operations , the moving unit shall not un-brake the docked unit. In addition during
emergency operations it shall be possible for an emergency locomotive to control and use the RSK
brake system ; UIC 541 -03 standard (or EOS) shall be applied . Finally a HST shall be able to be used as
an emergency vehicle to rescue another HST.
Req 48
1: Braking system shall respect UIC 540 standard (or EOS) . Moreover all brake equipment shall be
based on proven technology and be standardized .
6.3.2 SERVICE BRAKING
Concerning service braking , RSK shall respect TSI RS K HS requirements (particularly in terms of
deceleration). ~
- ~--
''"-s 4.. ,
In addition , the main service braking used shall be electric. This electric braking is ~.abl\t don"t ·~
regenerative braking . In that case, a system shall constantly monitor catenary abso ~ tlert.-ia acity. ~ . ~
'I;·
o?
.; '
:-,/.. ,':~ ·~.
1\ ~ ''
~ ......... \,. ----..... r ,~
' \ -:.-?-·. '-" .... ~ -- ~f-.:

"' ·. :~..-. . ,<..... t:..: .
- ~> /
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS -001-E2 Rolling Stock Speci fica tions
Normal service braking (with only the electric part) shall also be able to maintain RSK speed , for a Q
speed superior to 60KPH, on a 35 %a infinite slope in NL condition.
In the case of applying the maximum service braking, the RSK jerk shall not exceed 0.6 m/s 3 in order to
respect passenger comfort requirements.
Req 49
RSK shall bee ui ed with a service brake .
6.3.3 EMERGENCY BRAKING
This type of braking shall be conditional upon the drive system receiving a specific safety command .
During emergency braking it is not necessary to comply with all the comfort requirements.
For emergency braking , RSK shall respect the following standards :

• TSI RSK HS,
• UIC 660 (or EOS) .
The decelerations and braking distance shall be reached using only the emergency braking device (as
defined in TSI RSK HS).
In the case of a loss of the RSK integrity (e .g. coaches uncoupling) , an automatic emergency braking
shall be performed on each HST part. This incident shall be indicated to the driver in the cab . In the
case of MU configuration uncoupling, any collision between the two units shall be prevented .
Passengers shall be able to stop the RSK in case of emergency (see chapter 7.3.4 "Alarm signal ").
Moreover the passenger action shall begin a braking sequence but the driver shall be able to control it.
The emergency braking performances shall also be replicated in degraded mode , as defined in TSI
RSK HS.
Req 50
I[ RSK shall be equipped with an emergency braking system in accordance with international
standards.
6.3.41MMOBILIZA T/ON BRAKING
The purpose of this type of braking system shall be to ensure that gravity is unable to move the RSK
when an HST is stopped for a long time. RSK shall respect the immobilization requirements described
in standard UIC 660 (or EOS) .
The RSK shall be able to be immobilized on the track with the following conditions:
•
•
•
•
•
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS -001-E 2 Roll ing Stock Specifica ti ons P AGE 36/80
In addition the RSK shall be able to be immobilized on stabling tracks with the followings conditions:
• SU,
• Empty Functioning Order Load (EFOL),
• 5 %a grade,
• 100KPH disadvantageous wind ,
• New wheels,
• During an unlimited period without energy supply ,
Req 51
11: RSK shall be equipped with an immobilization braking system in accordance with international
standards .
6.4 CRASHWORTHINESS PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
Req 52
11: RSK shall respect TSI RSK HS requirements regarding crashworthiness requirements (scenario 1, 2
and 3).
6.5 ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
6.5.1 GENERAL
Noise levels shall be preferably measured in accordance with following standards:

• ISO 3095 (or EOS),
• ISO 3381 (or EOS),
• TSI RSK HS.
The measured values shall not exceed the figures mentioned bellow and shall be in line with UIC 651
(or EOS).
In all cases announcements shall be clearly understood by passengers and HST crew.
6.5.20N BOARD
HST stopped
Req 53
1 ~ Inside passenger areas and HST crew rooms , with all auxiliary equipment in service at maximum
power, the sound level ,LpA,eqT shall not exceed 60 dB(A).
11: Inside the drivers cab, with all auxiliary eql!ipment in service at maximum power, the sound level
,LpA,eqT shall not exceed 60 dB(A).
HST running up to 300KPH
Req 54
Inside passenger areas and HST crew rooms ; the sound level, LpA,eqT shall not exceed
68 dB(A).
Inside the drivers cab; the sound level, L A,e T shall not exceed 80 dB A
' ··

()
6.5.3 OUTSIDE HST
RSK shall limit generated noise to its environment. In fact:
Req 55
11: In case of a stop HST with all auxiliary equipment in service at maximum power, its sound level (
LpA,eqT) shall not exceed 68 dB (A) .
Ill When starting the sound level (LpA,eqT) shall not exceed 85 dB (A).
11:. In the case of a HST running up to 300 KPH, its sound level (LpA,eqT) shall not exceed 94 dB (A).
6.6 ACCELERATION PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
In order to minimize wear on rails, the bogies shall be designed with the latest technology allowing a
significant reduction of the lateral acceleration; specifications and rules of UIC 518 standard (or EOS)
shall be applied analogously.
'R_e_q_5_6_ _ _R_S_K_s_h_a-ll-re-s-pe_c_t_th_e_f_ol-lo-w-in_g_c_o_m_fo_rt_l_ev_e_l_u_p-to_3_0_0_K_P_H_a_s_t_h_ey_a_r_e_d_e-fin_e_d-in-th_e_U_IC-5-13----, G
standard (or EOS):
11: Nmvx < 2,2 m/s 2 ,
11: Nmvy < 1,9 m/s 2 ,
lE Nmvz < 1,1 m/s 2 .
6.7 TEMPERATURE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
General
People heat emission calculation shall respect standards EN 13129.1 & 2 (or EOS).
Considering the local climatic conditions described in the documents HHR-LO-CT -602-SAU-001
General Specifications - Appendix B: Annual Climate and Weather in KSA, the coaches and
driving cab shall be equipped with an HVAC system.
Temperature
Considering the source of heat represented by the glazed surfaces and the KSA exterior temperature;
the required Air-conditioning performances shall be very high:
Req 57
Heating system shall be able to maintain an average inside temperature of 22°C (+2, -1), at full
speed, without any passenger, with lighting and without sun,
HVAC system shall be able to maintain an average inside temperature of 26°C (+1, -2) , HST
sto ed i!J:l I the assen ers, with li htin and with the maximum sun radiation level.
Preconditioning
In addition the RSK shall be able to be quickly preconditioned , to be in accordance with the Basic
Service Plan constraints defined in the documents:
• HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-002 Basic Service Plan.
Req 58
11: The Heating system , with lighting, without the sun , without any passengers and with the HST
stopped shall be able to increase the average temperature of the passenger areas to 20°C in a
maximum of 1 hour.
Ill The HVAC system, with lighting, with the maximum sun radiation level, without any passengers and
with the HST stopped , shall be able to decrease the average temperature of the passenger areas to
28°C in a maximum of 1 hour.
6.8 SAFETY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
6.8.1 FIRE
Fire protection
In order to minimize fire risk, the various materials used in the RSK manufacturing shall be flame
retardant. Flammable admissible levels shall respect the standard UIC 564-2(or EOS). Other
standards (like NFPA130,1SO 5658-2,1SO 4589-2,ASTM E662) are acceptable if Bidder can justify
that they are Equivalent or Superior(EOS) to UIC 564-2.
Moreover care shall be taken in RSK design , in order to prevent fire propagation through the HST
according to TSI RSK HS .
Finally, in case of fire , smoke and gas propagation shall be prevented inside passenger rooms and the
driving cab.
Req 59
11: The RSK shall be designed to be fire protected, taking into account TSI RSK HS requirements and
UIC 564-2 standard (or EOS) .
Fire alarm
In the case of any abnormal heating-up or a fire in the traction or auxiliary systems , the driver shall be
informed (see chapter 7.3.4 "Alarm signal").
6.8.2 EMERGENCY COMPONENTS
In order to make emergency evacuation easier, RSK shall be equipped (at least) with the following
devices as described in more detail below:
• Alarm Signal ,
• Exit doors ,
• Other exits ,
• Communication system ,
• Lighting,
• Outside access .
Alarm Signal
Once activated, it shall be impossible for any another passenger to cancel this alarm (see chapter 7.3.4
"Alarm signal").
Exit door
RSK access doors dimensions and number shall allow a passenger to complete evacuation . Note: lt is
considered that disabled or handicapped passengers shall be assisted by other passengers or the crew
without taking a wheel-chair.
Req 61
RSK access doors dimensions and number shall allow a passenger to complete evacuation (without
their luggage) in a maximum 3 min with the HST stopped along a platform (using only the doors on one
side).
lE The conditions to be considered are :
lE HST full of passengers .
e
11: Disabled or handicapped passengers will be assisted by the crew or by other passengers .
For safety purposes RSK access doors shall be equipped with an internal emergency opening device
that allows the doors to be opened if the HST is stopped (see chapter 7.5 .1 "Access doors").
Access doors shall allow passenger evacuation operations without a platform alongside the HST (see
chapter 5.6.3 "Access").
Other exits
In addition to RSK access doors , emergency exits shall be provided according to TSI RSK HS (see
chapter 7.4 "Windows").
Req 62
I[ The Drivers cab shall be equipped with emergency exits, one on each face of the cab to a minimum
size and equipped to allow driver's to evacuate .
Communication
This system shall be able to allow:

• Sound announcements from the conductor to all passengers (see chapter 7 .3.1 "Inter-com network"),
• External communications between HST conductor and line OCC ,
• Internal communications between HST driver and HST conductor (chapter 7.3.1 "Inter-com
network").
Req 63
1: The Communication system shall be able to work without main energy source for at least
3 hours, as specified in TSI RSK HS.
ting shall be able to work without main energy source for at least
~)
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001 -E2 Rolling Stock Speci fi cati ons P AG E 40/80
0 Outside access
Access doors shall also be able to be used by rescue teams in order to gain access to the HST (see
chapter 7.5.1 "Access doors"). In order to make access easier for rescue teams, each RSK door shall
be equipped with an outside emergency opening device .
These accesses shall be clearl indicated from the outside.
6.8.3ACCESS SECURITY
Passengers shall not be able to access various RSK forbidden service areas. Only authorized people
can have access to these areas .
Req 66
RSK shall be e ui ed with a system to avoid assenger gaining access to forbidden areas.
6.9 ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
6.9.1 PRESSURE
Req 67
The RSK shall be e ui
In case of failure of the pressure protection system , pressure variations inside the RSK in tunnel shall
respect at least TSI RSK HS pressure levels .
6.9.2WIND
Concerning lateral winds, RSK shall res ect TSI RSK HS .
6.9.3AERODYNAMIC FORCES
Aerodynamic forces are created by an HST running in its environment. Aerodynamic generated forces
shall respect the following requirements in order to protect maintenance staff along the track:
Req 69
1: The air speed along the track; measured at 0,2m above the top of the rail and at the distance of 3m
from the middle of the track, during a double MU configuration run at 300 KPH, shall be less than
20m/s.
i£ The air pressure variation (peak to peak); measured along the height from 1,Sm to 3,3 m above the
top of the rail and at a distance of 3m from the middle of the track, during a double configuration run
at 250KPH, shall be inferior to 750 Pa .

6. 9.4 CL/MATE
Req 70
11" The RSK shall be capable of starting up and thereafter operating reliably and safely without damage,
when continuously subjected to any atmospheric temperature and when subjected to any
combination of solar heat, humidity, wind, sand , rain, lightning and dust that may occur in the KSA
HST project area.
For further information about atmospheric conditions, refer to documents HHR-LO-CT -602-SAU-001
General Specifications -Appendix B: Annual Climate and Weather in KSA
6.9.5POLLUT/ON
Req 71
I ~ RSK emissions (particularly braking dust) shall be in accordance with public health regulation in
force in the KSA.
11" All wastes produced by the RSK (including wastes produced in the driver cab) shall be easy to ()
contain , to evacuate and to deal with.
11" RSK recycling shall be possible at the end of its working life. These recycling measures are to be
implemented at the design stage.
6.9.6ENERGY SAVING
The Consortium shall optimize RSK energy consumption for operation under reference travel
conditions, in accordance with the Basic Service Plan defined in the documents:
• HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-002 Basic Service Plan .
Req 72
RSK shall be e ui
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001 -E2 Rolling Stock Specifications PAGE42/80
7. FUNCTIONAL AND ORGANIC REQUIREMENT
7.1 COMFORT REQUIREMENT
7.1.1 PASSENGER ROOM
The basic passenger room requirements are defined in the chapter 5.4 "Commercial requirement".
Space provision shall be made in one business room for a minimum of two passenger Persons with
Reduced Mobility (PRM), using a wheelchair.(see chapter 7.1.7 "PRM passenger equipment").
The coach identification (number) and class shall be clearly identifiable from any coach space
(passenger room , vestibule ... ).
Req 73 The room spaces shall:

11' Be in compliance with TSI RSK HS and TSI PRM,
11: Allow passengers to reach their seats in a convenient way (e.g.circulation in the corridor, seat gaps).
7.1.2 VESTIBULE
The vestibule is the HST space located at each extremity of the coach (excluding the toilet space) and
includes the:
• Entrance platform,
• Coach intercommunication space,
• Access door space.
General vestibule
Req 74
1: The vestibule design shall allow easy loading and unloading of passengers and train crew during
station stops.
In addition, during the trip, vestibules shall allow passengers and train crew:
• To walk along the entire HST,
• To easily gain access to the toilet compartment and HST crew compartment,
• To circulate easily and safely between two coaches .
Persons with Reduced Mobility (PRM) adapted vestibule
Req 75 The PRM adapted vestibule shall:

1: Be in compliance with TSI PRM,
1: Allow easy loading and unload ing of PRM durinq station stops .
In add ition, during the trip, the PRM adapted vestibule shall allow PRM passengers:
• To gain access to the PRM adapted toilet compartment,

7.1.3 CONDUCTOR COMPARTMENT
The RSK shall be equipped with one specific and suitable compartment for the conductor, in order to
carry out:
• Private service activities ,
• Commercial activities (reception and information for the passengers),
• Voice announcements to the passengers (see chapter 5.6.7 "Communication"),
The compartment shall provide a good atmosphere .
Access shall be through an easy to open door equipped with a lock, lockable both from inside and from
outside (see chapter 7.5.4 "Conductor compartment door").
Also , the compartment shall be equipped with the following devices:

• Commercial brochure rack ,
• Electric power socket (240V/60Hz),
• Internet connection (see chapter 7.2 "Multimedia requirement"),
• Lights (see chapter 7 .1 .10 "Lighting"),
• Video screen to control on board information (see chapter 7.2 "Multimedia requirement") ,
·. ·-)
• Inter-com network and public information system (see chapter 5.6.7 "Communication"), ·· ,
• Electric water cooler of 2 liters capacity,
• Two hooks for hanging clothes ,
• One storage cabinet,
• At least one pocket for storing manuals and paper.
Req 76
The RSK shall be e ui ed with one s ecific and suitable com artment for the conductor.
7.1.4 TOILET COMPARTMENT
General
The RSK toilet design shall allow passengers:

• To reach the toilets quickly and easily,
• To have a high level of comfort and hygiene ,
• To get privacy and safety,
• To have a comfortable space , sufficiently equipped ,
The HST shall propose two types of toilet compartment:
• Standard ,
• Adapted for PRM passengers using a wheelchair.
The toilet compartment quantity shall be:
Req 77
ace is available .
ments shall be smooth and easy for cleaning and to ensure that they
ial used shall be of the best quality. Types and arrangement shall be
basin etc shall be made from the best quality hygienic materials (e .g.
An intelligent toi e·- n rol system shall be provided , including a signal to the passenger rooms showing
the occupancy status of the toilets d )
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-00 1-E 2 Rolling Stock Specifications PAGE 44/80
Technology
The HST toilet technology shall guarantee:

• The storage of dirty water (or material) on board ,
• The cleanliness of the basin after use ,
• The reliability of the operation of the toilets ,
• Maintenance cost optimization (treatment of dirty water).
To avoid pollution, the system shall be closed for dirty water (or material) .
Also , a vacuum toilet water flush system shall be installed . lt shall be a clear water system with a
retention tank to avoid expensive dirty water re-treatment.
Chemical toilets stems are not allowed .
Standard toilet
The standard toilet shall be equipped with an easy open door with a lock . The door panel shall be fully
closed (see chapter 7.5.3 "Toilet compartment door") .
•:...!...--":..- -·
-- :~·;:...·
PRM adapted toilet
The adapted wheelchair toilet compartment shall be :

• Designed according to TSI PRM,
• Located in the same coach as and very close to the PRM passenger room area to ensure easy
access to the toilet,
• Equipped with an automatic sliding door (see chapter 7.5.3 "Toilet compartment door").
7. 1.5 NURSERY COMPARTMENT
Req 79
[. The RSK shall be equipped to allow passengers to carry out operations of hygiene and comfort for a
baby in a private and specially adapted "nursery" compartment .
lt is recommended that at least one dedicated "nursery" compartment shall be provided per RSK .
lt shall be included in a toilet compartment if space is available for an adult to carry out operations of
hygiene and comfort for a baby.
7.1.6SANITARY
The HST sanitary design shall ensure that passengers can :

• Clean themselves and carry out operations of body hygiene during the trip,
• Have a supply of clean water,
Guarantee the quality of the water offered to the passenger for the operations of personal hygiene .. The
Bidder shall comply with current Saudi regulations .
The sanitary function and associated equipment shall be located in the toilet compartment. All
equipment like the basin etc shall be made from the best quality hygienic materials (e.g. stainless
steel ... ). The relevant rules/regulations of KSA should be collected from the local authority (i.e. Ministry
of Health , Ministry of Water and Electricity or others) by the Bidders .
( _:
.....

Req 80
111: The Sanitary water system shall provide a sufficient quantity of water for one day trip in accordance
with Basic Service Plan conditions and constraints defined in the document HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-
002 Basic Service Plan .
7.1.7PRM PASSENGER EQUIPMENT
Equipment for RSK PRM passengers shall be designed according to TSI PRM requirements .
Each HST shall have a minimum space for two PRM passengers , using a wheelchair. The location of
these wheelchair spaces shall be:
• In one business class coach, to ensure easy access and comfort during the trip,
• Very close to the wheelchair toilet, to ensure easy and straight access to the toilet through an
automatic sliding door (see chapter 7.5.3 "Toilet compartment door").
Also , the RSK equipment shall allow PRM passengers:
• To board and alight from the HST using a wheelchair (see chapter 7.1.2 "Vestibule"),
• To stable the wheelchair(s) in a convenient space ,
•
•
To
To
have easy access to the adapted vestibule , the room and the adapted toilet,
travel with the same level of comfort and facilities as another passenger:
0
o Headrest,
o Folding tables,
o Newspaper nets,
o Electric power socket (240V/60Hz),
o Internet connection (see chapter 7.2 "Multimedia requirement"),
o Reading lights (see chapter 7.1 .10 Lighting) .
o Headphone (see chapter 7.2 "Multimedia requirement") ,
o Video screen (see chapter 7.2 "Multimedia requirement").
• To use the adapted toilets (see chapter 7.1.4 "Toilet compartment").
Req 81 The RSK equipment and design shall be carried out:

11: For at least two Persons with Reduced Mobility (PRM) passengers,
1£ According to TSI PRM requirements .
7.1.8DRIVER'S CAB
Drivers' cab should be in accordance with the following standards (or EOS) :
• UIC 564-2,
• UIC 617-7,
• UIC 640,
• UIC 651.
In addition , the driver's cab shall :
• Be ergonomically designed with State-of-the-Art driving devices .
• Have effective insulation against high levels of noise , heat, and dust.
ts shall be State-of-the-Art and equipped with an ergonomically designed
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001 -E2 Rolling Stock Specifications P AGE 46/80
Driver's control desk
The Drivers' desk shall be a State-of-the-Art ergonomic design using LCD screens for indicating
operational values . lt shall separate operating from monitoring areas among other indicators .
lt shall be arranged with a paper holder and an adjustable spot reading light.
The operating control desk shall be so arranged that the driver faces the track side . This arrangement
shall give the driver the best safe view of conditions .
Control operating and monitoring instruments shall be installed to minimize obstructing the drivers' view.
Driver's accessories
The Driver shall have accessories including the following :

• Electric water cooler of 2 liters capacity,
• Two hooks for coat hangers ,
• One cabinet for storing items ,
In addition , drivers' equipment should be state-of-the-art fitted with the following minimum equipment:
• Tool box,
• Coupling adaptor,
• Small on board tools for safety, alarm indication and protection tools. In case of HST failure , the HST
shall be rescue system and the rescue system is left to the discretion of the consortium, according to
RSK technology (see chapte r 5.6.1.1). But, to ensu re this rescued function in any situation (i .e.
impact with an animal or vehicle that damages part of HST coupler function 9, on-board coupling
adaptor(s) system(s) could be required to maintain some safety functions (brake , HVAC ... ). These
scenarios must be studied in accordance with the safety plan .
7.1.9 SEATING
Common requirements
The HST seating design shall allow passengers :

• To have the expected level of comfort and services ,
• To have a specific and individual comfort in Business class rooms ,
• To provide comfortable support for the back , arms and head ,
• For the pressing of passengers on the seat during their various movements in the room ,
• To be able to locate their booked seat,
• To ensure a high level of comfort insulation against vibration .
The seat surfaces and structure shall be :
• Water proof,
• Crease resistant ,
• Wear resistant,
• Fire retardant fabric according to standards defined in the chapter 6.8.1 "Fire".
Passenger room
The seats for the Business class room shall be the highest luxury standard :
• Fixed , 2 by 1 configuration ,
• Motorized adjustments shall be possible for the backrest, the cushion as well as the footrest ,
The seats for the Economy class room shall be luxury standard :
• Fixed , 2 by 2 configuration ,
• Motorized or manual adjustments shall be possible for the backrest and the cushion ,
• With a simple mobile footrest.

Other features shall be available per seat:

• Business and Economy class seat:
o Seat pitches in Economy class 925mm
o Seat pitches in Business class 101 Omm
o Foldable armrest,
o Headrest,
o Folding tables ,
o Newspaper nets ,
o Seat identification ,
o Booking identification ,
o Electric power socket (240V/60Hz),
o Internet connection (see chapter 7.2 "Multimedia requirement") ,
o Reading lights (see chapter 7.1.10 "Lighting").
• Business class seat only:
o Headphone (see chapter 7.2 "Multimedia requirement"),
o Video screen (see chapter 7.2 "Multimedia requirement") .
The arrangement of the seat identifications shall make it possible for a passenger to quickly and easily
find his booked seat.
The seat characteristics shall not amplify vibrations from the floor, remaining comfortable under all ._._.,L.
circumstances .
Req 83
11: The passenger seat characteristics (dimensions, size, gap .. . ) and equipment shall be in accordance
with international HST comfort.
111: Specific attention shall be paid to the seating size and the gap between two seats , according to KSA
local morphological parameters
The final seating design is left to the discretion of the Consortium, according to the manufacturers own
experience .
Train sets are indicated at the following table :
Type of car Quantity Seats
End economy class car 1 38
Economy class car 7 38
Business class car with 1 13

cafeteria lounge
Accessible business class 1 20

car
Business class car 2 26
End Business class car 1 28
TOTAL 13 417
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001-E 2 Rolling Stock Specificati ons PAGE 48/80
Driver's seat
The driver's desk shall have comfortable seating according to TSI RSK HS requirem ents and UIC 651
standard (or EOS):
• Spring cushioned seat with access to side windows,
• All seats shall be rotating, reclining , with arm and head rests, and of therapeutic design . The driver's
cab shall accommodate fou r people.
Req 84
11 The drivers seat shall have comfortable design and provide a clear view of both tracks, according to
UIC 617-7 standard (or EOS).
7.1.10 LIGHTING
Lighting for Passenger areas
The lighting concept shall be designed according to the following considerations:

• No dazzling will occur either by the light sources or by reflecting surfaces in the surrounding area,
• Adequate lighting of all areas including passengers rooms , vestibules , gangways, toilet
··.:::·:: ·' compartments , conductor compartment, etc ...
• Separate lighting for the entrance steps,
• Separate reading lights for each seat, switch able from the seat position.
\ '
In passenger rooms, there will be 3 functional circuits:

• Fulllighting ,
• Half lighting ,
• Emergency lighting .
The lighting shall be controlled either centrally or individually (in each coach) by the conductor.
Req 85
11: The passenger areas lighting concept shall be in accordance with the luminosity requirements of UIC
555 (or EOS) .
An ambient light intensity of 40 lux shall be provided wherever passengers can assemble or lighting is
required. With full lighting , an average light intensity of 150 lux shall be achieved at reading level.
However, the final lighting atmosphere is left to the discretion of the Consortium , according to
manufacturer experience and new light technology.
Lighting for the Driver's cab
The lighting in each driver's cab shall be controlled manually within the cab , by the driver.
Req 86
111: The driver's cab lighting shall be arranged and defused with an intensity dimmer, according to EN
13272 and UIC 651 standards (or EOS).
7.1.11 WINDOW BLINDS
The HST window blind design shall prevent seated passenger from being dazzled by the sun .
Blinds shall be utilized above the windows providing incremental height adjustment.
ui ed with blinds.
However, the final blind design and technology is left to the discretion of the Consortium , according to
manufacturer experience .
7.1.1 2 TA BLE
The HST table design shall allow each passenger to have a working , eating , playing , etc .. .area in the
front of him:
• Folding tables shall normally be mounted on the back of each seat,
• At the face -to-face seating areas tables shall be mounted on the side walls .
()
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -40 3- SYS-001-E2 Rolling Stock Specifications PAGE 50/80
..· l
7.1.13 WASTE
The HST waste container design shall allow passengers to get rid of their waste at any time and in any
location on the HST:
• One small size waste container shall be mounted at a suitable location from each seat,
• A minimum of two large size additional waste containers shall be located at each extremity of each
passenger room,
• A minimum of two large size additional waste containers shall be located in the cafeteria room,
• Additional bins shall be integrated into the wall panels of the entrance areas.
Req 89
Ill Each passenger shall have enough containers for waste disposal, at any place in the RSK and in
any situation .
However, the final waste container design is left to the discretion of the Consortium, according to
manufacturer experience .
7.1.14 ASHTRAY
The whole HST is a no smoking area.
\Req 90
RSK shall have no ashtrays .
7.1.15 LUGGAGE
The HST luggage design shall allow passengers :

• To store their hand-luggage and personal belongings near their seat,
• To quickly store their heavy and/or cumbersome luggage ,
• To deposit their luggage in a safe place .
All coaches shall be equipped with :
• A luggage rack system along both side walls of the passenger rooms , transparent from underneath ,
• Additional areas or several stacks allocated specifically for large size luggage.
The luggage rack , stack and area design shall take into account the following standards (or EOS):
c:. •
•
UIC 562 ,
UIC 566.
Req 91
11£ The luggage racks/stacks/area shall be dimensioned and designed according to the !luggage
capacity defined in chapter 4.1.3 "Luggage policy".
7. 1.16 HEATING, VENTING AND AIR CONDITIONING
General performance
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001 -E2 Rolling Stock Specificati ons P AG E 51/80
Req 92
Ill In heating mode, the interior temperature shall be adjustable within the range 22oc (+2, -1) with
control step of 1°C.
it: In cooling mode, the interior temperature shall be adjustable within the range 26°C (+1, -2) with
control step of 1°C.
Technical constraints
The HVAC system shall be adapted to operational and local environmental constraints , according to the
information described in these documents :
• HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-002 Basic Service Plan ,
• HHR-LO-CT-602-SAU -001 General Specifications - Appendix B: Annual Climate and Weather in
KSA.
The driver' cabs shall be cooled by individual HVAC units , locally controlled. These units shall be in
compliance with UIC 651 standard (or EOS).
For special cases , like sandstorms, the HVAC re-circulate air system shall be closed to avoid blocking
of filters .
Q
~.:;y
Req 93 The HVAC system shall :

11: Be sand and dust proof to avoid pollution inside the passenger rooms,
11: Have a redundant back up technical solution for passenger room units in case of the failure of a unit
during the trip.
Emergency situation
The HVAC system design shall include an emergency solution in case of HST energy disruption (power
unit failure , catenaries current disruption .. . ) that causes the HST to be immobilized.
Req 94
1£ The HVAC emergency solution shall allow the passenger room condition to be maintained
(temperature, ventilation ... ) within an acceptable level (in degraded mode) during the time taken to
troubleshoot or to rescue the HST (see chapter 5.6.11 "Rescue").
111: Whilst the HST is being repaired or at the arrival of the rescue system (see chapter 5.6.11 "Rescue"),
the passenger room conditions (temperature, ventilation ... ) shall stay at an acceptable value (in
degraded mode) until arrival at the next station .
The final HVAC system and solutions are left to the discretion of the Consortium . The Consortium shall
be able to demonstrate that the HVAC system has a high level in RAMS performance .
7.1.17 CA FETERIA ROOM
Two levels of food and beverage service are proposed during HST trips , according to passenger class .
These spaces design shall not obstruct nor disturb passenger circulation when in use .
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -4 03- SYS-001 -E2 Rolling Stock Specification s P AGE 52/80
The office and catering cabinet shall be Open-able , closeable and easily lockable (e.g. roller door
system , folding door ... ).
The passenger space shall be equipped with the following:

• Bar,
• Small tables and stools,
The office and catering cabinet space shall be equipped with the following:
• Refrigerator,
• Water boiler,
• Storage area ,
• Newspaper nets,
• One cabinet for storing HST crew personal items with two hooks for hangers ,
• Small desk to put a laptop on ,
• Several electric power sockets (240V/60Hz),
• Internet connection (see chapter 7.2 "Multimedia requirement"),
• Lights,
The additional trolley space shall be equipped with the following :
• One Trolley,
• Trolley stabling area ,
• Preparation area,
h food and bevera e services shall be
7.2 MULTIMEDIA REQUIREMENT
7.2.1AUD/O
The mandatory audio system devices shall be :

• Control and headphone devices for each Business class seat,
• Loudspeaker devices in all HST space (Economy room , vestibule , toilet, conductor compartment...) .
Req 96
~ The audio system shall be state-of-the art and designed to broadcast a minimum of 10 audio
Channels at a time,
1: The audio system shall be able to broadcast messages with a sound level of +6 dB above the
surrounding sound level of the coach according to UIC 568 standard (or EOS) .
7.2.2VIDEO
In Business class and Economy class rooms , several screens (> 21 ")for common use shall be installed
at convenient places to allow:
• Live broadcast of the location of the HST on the high speed line ,
• Live broadcast of the location of the direction of Makkah,
• Advertising ,
• Video-clips ,
• Etc ...
In this case, the Audio signal will be transmitted via the loudspeaker
In Business class , each seat will be equipped with an eadphone

devices (see chapter 7.2.1 "Audio").
Req 97
1: The video system shall be state-of-the art and designed to broadcast video.
I[ In Business class, a video on demand system with an individual screen at each seat shall be
provided .
7.2.3/NTERNE T
State-of-the-art internet access facilities shall be provided , usable from each seat in the RSK and in the
conductors' compartment.
Wireless internet connection is recommended . However, the final solutions are left to the discretion of
the Consortium . In the case of a LAN cable solution , each seat shall be equipped with a LAN cable .
A high performance internet system usable from each seat shall equip the RSK.
7.3 COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENT t7.?.

u
7.3.1/NTER-COM NETWORK
An inter-com network shall be provided to allow HST staff (driver, conductor and crew, see chapter
5.6.7 "Communication"), to communicate or to make announcements to the passengers . This system is
recommended to use the existing audio network (see chapter 7.2.1 "Audio").
This inter-com network shall allow in single and double configuration :

• Calling and communication from the driver to the conductor(s) ,
• Calling and communication from the conductor to the driver,
• Conductor to call other conductor (double configuration) .
• Announcement in Business class only,
• Announcement in Economy class only,
• Announcement in both classes .
This inter-com network shall also broadcast messages from:
• Driver (Driver's cab) ,
• Conductor (Conductor compartment and some identified vestibule cabinet) ,
• Crew (Catering area).
This inter-com network shall automatically manage broadcast message priority:
• First: emergency message ,
• Second : Driver's message ,
• Third : Conductor message ,
• Forth : other messages .
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001-E2 Roll ing Stock Specifi cati ons PAGE 54/80
7.3.2 PUBLIC INFORMATION
A public information system shall allow the passengers :

• To reach without hesitation the right HST and then the correct coach ,
• To see their location during the trip ,
• To get information from the conductor.
This information system shall be complemented by the conductor.
This system shall display information to passengers about:

• HST identification (number ... ),
• Coach number,
• HST stations,
• HST direction (terminus),
• Next station ,
• Information message from conductor,
• Next station time ,
• On time or delay time ,
• Operation service messages.
This display shall be located inside and outside the HST:
• Inside display shall be separate or integrated into the Audio and Video System (see chapter 7.2
"Multimedia requirement") . In case of separate configuration , the location shall be convenient for all
the passengers seated in the rooms , including PRM passengers (e .g. Located above the passenger
room door .. .),
• Outside display location shall be convenient for all the passengers standing on the station platform,
included PRM passenger (close to the HST access door ... ). Passengers shall be able to read the
display information during the low speed movement of the HST, when it arrives on station .
This system shall display information understandable for disabled or handicapped passengers
according to standard TSI PRM.
A future provision for addressing the public address system from the Operational Control Centre (OCC)
is also foreseen .
Req 100
11: The Public Information System shall allow the display of useful information for all passengers, in
Arabic and Latin characters , understandable from inside and outside the HST.
7.3.3 PRM PASSENGER CALL

A call system shall allow PRM passengers to call the conductor. This system shall be located :
• In passenger room , close to the disable or handicapped area,
• In the PRM adapted toilet,
• In the vestibule, close to the passenger rooms equipped with disabled or handicapped areas.
Req 101
!1: RSK shall be equipped with a call system to allow PRM passenger to call the conductor in any
situation .

7.3.4 ALARM SIGNAL
Passenger alarm
Passengers shall be able to activate an alarm signal from all passenger areas of the RSK including
PRM passenger areas .
Once activated , it shall be impossible for any other passenger to cancel this alarm (see chapter 6.8.2
"Emergency components").
In the case of passenger use , the alarm signal shall cause:

• In the RSK (except driving cab): a sound and a display on the RSK conductor MM I,
• In the driving cab: the application of the emergency brake and a display on the RSK driver MM I.
During emergency braking (performed by a passenger) the driver shall be able to intervene on the
braking process to choose the best stopping point of the HST .
Req 102 .,........

-·...r.-
11: RSK shall be equipped with a passenger alarm system .

11: The number and the location of alarm signals shall be adapted to all passengers included PRM
passenger.
Fire alarm
In the case of any abnormal warming-up or a fire in the traction or auxiliary system:
• The driver shall be informed by a luminous and sonorous signal (see chapter 6.8.1 "Fire").
• The conductor shall be informed by a sonorous signal in the whole HST, including in an MU
configuration (see chapter 6.8.1 "Fire").
• The alarm may be cancelled by the conductor, but only in the relevant coach .
HST crew, shall be able to fight a small fire using fire extinguishers located in all RSK areas .
RSK shall be equipped with a fire alarm system , in accordance with TSI RSK HS requirement.
7.3.5 CLOSE CIRCUIT TELEVISION
The close circuit television shall be a video monitoring system. it shall be able to:
• Monitor all passenger areas (except the toilets),
• Record on board all the monitored video during 48 hours,
Req 104
RSK shall bee ui ed with a close circuit television.
0
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001-E2 Rolling Stock Specificati ons PAG E 56/80
7.4 WINDOWS
7.4.1 GENERAL
The HST window design shall provide for high quality materials adapted to operation and local
environment constraints, according to the information describe in these documents:
• HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-002 Basic Service Plan ,
• HHR-LO-OP-202-SYS-001 Operating Requirements,
• HHR-LO-CT-602-SAU-001 General Specifications - Appendix B: Annual Climate and Weather in
KSA.
All windows shall be mounted with a special permanent elastic adhesive sea lant that takes into account
the special environmental conditions in the Arabian Desert (e .g. wind blown sand).
Window frames shall be designed for regular maintenance (e.g. disassembly and reassembly to
exchange the window). Rubber parts shall made of flame retardant material.
··· ·::.•
Glazing will be of heat and energy saving properties.
The outside surface shall be especially hardened to withstand abrasion by sand .
7.4.2 PASSENGER WINDOW
Passenger windows contribute to the overall comfort of the passengers. They shall be designed to offer
the passenger an optimal view of the outside.
Fitted blinds shall prevent seated passengers from being dazzled by the sun. They shall be utilized
above the windows . An adapted system shall provide incremental height adjustment (see chapter 7 .1.11
"Window Blinds").
At least two of the windows per passenger room shall be designed for emergency exit. lt should be
possible to remove or to break them easily.
Req 105
lt RSK shall be equipped with high performance passenger windows, especially for passenger safety,
energy saving and maintainability.
The final passenger's window design is left to the discretion of the Consortium . The Consortium shall be
able to demonstrate that the solutions have a high level of RAMS performance.
7.4.3 DRIVER WINDOW
Driver windows contribute to the overall safety of the passengers. They shall be designed to provide the
driver with an optimal visibility for control of the driving environment, in accordance with the following
standards (or EOS):
To maintain the level of visibility for control of the driving environment, the driver's window shall be ()
equipped with :
• A wiping system,
• A washing system ,
• Air inside ventilation to avoid dimming caused by humidity.
The drivers' side windows shall be of tinted -glazing with a large opening offering good visibility for
shunting . Window blinds shall also be provided .
Req 106
11: RSK shall be equipped with high performance driver's window, especially for passenger safety,
driver's safety, enerqy savinq and maintainabilitv.
The final driver's window design is left to the discretion of the Consortium . The Consortium shall be able
to demonstrate that the solutions have a high level of RAMS performance.
7.5 DOORS
7.5.1 ACCESS DOORS
The access door system shall be able to operate in order to respect:

• The passengers' and HST safety,
• The operational constraints defined in the document HHR-LO -OP-402-SYS-002 Basic Service Plan ,
• The interface with the station ,
• A high performance system ,
• The HST image .
Passenger safety
The access doors shall allow the loading and unloading of passengers with their luggage .
They shall have sufficient steps from the entrance area of the car to reach the platform or the ground
(see chapter 5.6 .3 "Access").
The side faces of the door leaves as well as the respective opposite part on the coach shall be
equipped with a sealing system that shall :
• Protect passengers from injuries
• Be water resistant,
• Be dust proof taking into account the special operating conditions under consideration .
In case there is an obstruction (e .g. luggage , passenger body part .. . ) blocking the door during closing ,
the door shall detect the obstacle and:
• The movement will be immediately stopped ,
• The door will open again.
As \ ~~~n:t!J fl)IJ~ . , dimensions of the detectable obstacles shall be along the fwll height of the edge of
n ndoo rv,,· .~···r~" s
, a passenger shall not be able to cling to the door from the outside of the RSK .
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001 -E2 Rolling Sto ck Specificati ons PAGE 58/80
Then , the door dimension/capacity shall permit:
Req 107
t= For embarking or unloading 50% of passengers from one side in less than 60 seconds. See Reg30 .
~ For emergency unloading of 100% of passengers in less than 90 seconds . See req 30 .
I" To facilitate with ease the emergency unloading to the ground or an emergency transfer to another
HST alongside .
In the case of an emergency situation (e.g . an accident, or derailment. .. ), the passengers shall be able
to make the door free by an emergency system . One emergency system shall be available per door. To
avoid a mistake , the emergency handle system shall require two handle devices to be operated at the
same time . The use of this emergency system shall be:
• Possible only when the HST is stopped (see chapter 6.8.2 "Emergency components"),
• Identified, announced and recorded .
RSK access doors shall be e ui
HST safety
The HST access shall be:

• Possible in any place and under any circumstances by the authorized staff (driver, conductor, crew).
• Protected from any external intrusion (e .g . vandal , terrorist , thief ... )
There shall be a mechanism to allow unlocking of the doors for cleaning purposes, maintenance or
emergency purposes both from the inside and outside. Under these circumstances the door shall allow
manual opening and closing .
Each individual door shall have a mechanism to lock the door mechanical! included footste .
Operation constraints
The access door system shall respect the cycles and times of opening and closing fixed for the
operation constraint:
Req 110
1: The operations procedure to close and lock the doors and to allow an SU or MU configuration to
depart shall be less than 30 seconds .
High performance
After the doors operation release signal is activated , the door shall be opened from inside and outside
by passengers (e .g. Push button , sensor .. . ).
The system shall inform the passengers with various means (e .g. sound , light ... ) on the door status
(ready to be opened , opened and closed) and on the status changes (opening , closing) of the door.
The characteristics of the warning signal for the imminent start of the closing of the doors shall be in
accordance with TSI PRM requirements.
Req 111 . "'. _,,,.

The door operation (opening/closing) shall be controlled by the driver.
"' c-'
-\) .·."
~,
_
1 1
The system shall authorize the simultaneous opening or closing of the left doors, tbl~ f.! g ~t doors
all doors. -, ;:-; > ...
HST image

The doors shall be single-leaf slide type . The door leaves shall be lightweight structures . In the closed
position , the outer surf aces shall be in alignment with the exterior surface of the car.
The door shall offer to the passengers a good visibility:

• From the vestibule to the station platform or outside,
• From the station platform to the vestibule.
The door glazing shall match the exterior coach design .
Req 112
1: The access doors design and glazing shall match the exterior coach design ,
11: The access door shall offer to the passengers a good visibility from inside and outside .
7.5.2 PASSENGER ROOM DOOR
The side faces of these doors shall be :

• Made of a glazed panel ,
• Equipped with rubber profiles that shall be dust proof and water resistant.
The glazing panel will provide full visibility to the seating area and will match the interior design . If the
c
\-.;z,}
panel is translucent, some marks shall prevent passengers from bumping into the door.
Req 113
111: The vestibule shall be divided from the passenger room by a sliding door system , controlled by
passengers to open (e .g. push buttons, sensor ... ), the closing shall be automatic.
7.5.3 TOIL ET COMPARTMENT DOOR
Each standard toilet compartment shall be equipped with an easy to open door.
The PRM adapted toilet compartment shall be equipped with an automatic and large sliding door,
designed to allow easy access for a wheelchair .
The door panel shall have no opaque windows.
A privacy lock shall be available from inside the compartment. In case of emergency, the conductor
shall be able to unlock the door from the vestibule .
Req 114
11: Each toilet compartment (including the PRM toilet) shall be equipped with an easy to open and
lockable door.
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001 -E2 Roll ing Stock Specifications P AG E 60/80
The Conductor cam artment shall be e
7.5.5DRIVER'S CAB DOOR
The driving cab accesses shall be strictly reserved for authorized personnel.
• Driver's,
• Maintenance staff.
One door shall be installed to preserve driver privacy. The door shall be equipped with a lock, lockable
from the inside manually and from the outside by using a specific key.
The driving cab door design shall allow the driver:

• To reach the driving desk easily, to respect UIC 651 standard (or EOS).
• To reach the passenger room and power unit room,
• To evacuate the cab quickly in the case of an emergency.
Each driver's cab shall be e ui ed with an eas
7.6 STRUCTURE REQUIREMENT
7.6.1 GENERAL
The coaches shall be designed to be dust sealed and to fulfill the special requirements for operation
under the extreme environmental conditions in KSA with high dust concentration as well as extensive
amounts of sand. The main aspects to be designed to achieve a dust sealed car will be as follows:
• Access doors,
• Intercommuni cation,
• Windows,
• Air-conditioning,
• Ducts,
• Toilets.
KSA experience from operating passenger train for almost 30 years shows that the sand and dust load
carried by strong tailwinds along with the running of HST creates heavy problems for manufacturers to
make and keep the coaches dustproof.
Therefore it is suggested that pressurized passenger cabins are proposed to avoid the ingress of sand
and dust.
7.6.2 LIFTING
Lifting and/or re-railing points shall be provided , on the front and on the end on both side extremities of
each coach, so that the structure can be lifted or re-railed using suitable equipment.
Req 117
I[ The structure shall be fitted with devices so that the bogies may be securely attached to the
structure .
1
1[ The complete RSK (once separated from its' bogies or wheel-sets and other bogies fastened to the
structure) shall be able to be lifted simultaneously, usinq the liftinq pointsQrovided .
7.6.3BODY
The body structure of all coaches shall be welded according to standards (or EOS) :
• EN 729-1 to 4,
• EN 22553,
• EN 30042,
~
• ISO 5817. V
Special requirements for welding of body structures and corresponding testing procedures have to be
observed by the manufacturer in accordance with UIC 897-1-2-4-5-6-7-8-9-11-12-13-14-22-23
standards (or EOS) .
The body structure shall have an aerodynamic design .
The design of the structure will be based on the load assumptions of UIC 566 standard (or EOS) .
The maximum deflection of coach structure shall be proven and measured according to standards:
• EN 12663 (or EOS) ,
• TSI RSK HS.
Req 118
Ill: The body structure of all coaches shall be welded and of light weight design according to the latest
technology and material corrosion properties .
7.6.40UTER SURFACE
See chapter 5.3.9 "Coating and painting".
7.6.5FLOOR
Req 119
:11: The coach floor shall be made frorri flame retardant and water resistant material , in accordance with
TSI RSK HS requirements .
E\,aet~lHM ?~th e oor shall be :

r'_ "' \~o'''''' :c /-~: . ·s ~
, 1 <0-,c~~p\be~ igned' for (g timal sound insulation ,
1
2.' &
, ·,.Entir e cov~} by a slip and wear resistant floor cover material forming a water sealed area with
s~ewa~s'- ~
~
:2 the
'2.. ' I..., - •
~'-_'rlcC. ~· (" J::·. ()

" l> (f~
. ·: _ ~~"3· -:..-7
.J
The floor cover in the vestibule and coach intercommunication gangway area shall be made to be easy
to clean with material highly resistant against wear caused by sand and dust laden shoes.
7.6.6WALL
In the passenger room, the windows frame and blind systems shall be integrated into the wall lining
modules .
In the vestibule, the electric and pneumatic equipment shall be hidden and covered . All maintenance
access shall be located behind doors with integrated locks .
Req 120
11: The RSK wall paneling shall be made from flame retardant and water resistant material, in
accordance with TSI RSK HS requirements .
7.6.7/NTER-COACH GANGWAY
Train crew and passengers shall be able to pass safely from one coach to another and to stay in the
gangway space between two coaches, according to UIC 561 standard (or EOS). The inter-coach
gangway design shall take into account passenger comfort and train safety.
Passenger comfort
Req 121
11: No rain water, sand or dust shall penetrate the gangway,
11: No steps shall exist between the coach floor and the gangway floor,
1: Wall surfaces shall allow for easy cleaning (e .g. to remove a lot of hand and finger marks) ,
1: The gangway shall have a minimum clear passage in accordance with TSI RSK HS requirements .
Passenger safety
Req 122
1: Cables and connection between two coaches shall be arranged for easy coupling/uncoupling and
shall not be accessible to passengers ,
1: lt shall make RSK un-couplable, except for maintenance purposes in the workshops .
7.6.8ACCESS
The driving cab accesses shall be strictly reserved for authorized personnel only (Driver's, maintenance
staff).
All access shall be equipped with adequate provision of steps and handholds to allow passengers, HST
staff, cleaning and maintenance staff to load and unload:
• From vestibule to platform level ,
• From platform level to vestibule,
• From vestibule to ground level ,
• From ground level to vestibule .
Req 123
s
7.7 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT
7. 7.1 BOGIE AND RUNNING COMPONENTS
Axle and wheel
Req 124
1: The axle load shall be in accordance with TSI RSK HS requirement and project standard EN 15663
(or EOS).
11: Axles, wheels and axle boxes shall respect EN 13260, UIC 510-2 and UIC 813 standards (or EOS),
111: The wheel profile shall be adapted to very high speed operations , according to TSI RSK HS and TSI
Infra HS,
111: A wheel flange lubricating system shall be provided.
Suspension
Req 125
111: Suspension shall allow the achievement of comfort level requirements described in chapter 6.6
"Acceleration performance requirement", -·
-.;:-. -.~
Components
Running components shall be able :

• To bear curve and cant effort,
• To transmit tractive and braking effort,
• To bear coupling effort,
• To bear maintenance lifting operation or emergency lifting operation .
They shall be in accordance with the following standards (or EOS):
• UIC 515-4,
• UIC 615-4,
• EN 10025-1-2-3-4-5,
• EN 10028-1 -2-3-4-5-6-7,
• EN 10083-1-2-3,
• EN10155,
• EN 10213-3,
• EN 10293.
In order to keep the RSK stable during operation , the following requirements shall be respected :
• Bogie shall naturally remain stable without any antiyaw damper device at any speed .
• Bogie shall be stable as described in UIC 518 standard (or EOS) at maximum speed and cant,
• A bogie running stability detector shall be installed in each bogie according to TSI RSK HS
requirements ,
• Bogie shall be safety against derailment according to ERRI B55/RP8 (or EOS) .
Req 126
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001 -E2 Rolling Stock Specifications P AGE 64/80
0 Accident, derailment
Req 127
ll Bogie shall be safety against derailment according to ERRI B55/RP8 (or EOS).
1: All the measures defined in UIC 518 standard (or EOS) shall be taken in order to avoid RSK
derailment.
In addition :
• Measures shall be taken in order to avoid the possibility of components falling onto the track ,
• Life guards shall be provided and compliant with UIC-1 chapter 5.3 ;item(1) and EN 61373 standards
(EOS)
Current
Req 128
ll Bogie components shall allow track shunting according to UIC 512 standard (or EOS).
1: Also bogies shall allow traction current return for people safety according to UIC 533 standard (or
r>-·-·.·.· EOS).
,:·<:·:~-·
7. 7.2 MECHANICAL LINKS
The coaches shall be mechanically linked according to the following standards :

• TSI RSK HS ,
• UIC 520 (or EOS),
• UIC 527-1 (or EOS),
• UIC 528 (or EOS) .
See chapter 7.6.7 "Inter-coach gangway".
In addition coaches and bogies shall also be mechanically linked.
Req 129
1: The number of mechanical joints between the bogie and a coach shall be minimized for quick and
easy lifting.
7.8 BRAKE REQUIREMENT
7.8.1 SYSTEM
The entire Brake System shall be designed according to the following standards (or EOS):
• TSI RSK HS,
• UIC 540,
• UIC 541 -1-3-4-5-7,
• UIC 544-2,
• UIC 660.
lt shall consist of an Air Brake System :
• To minimize maintenance cost, the air brake equipment shall be panel -mounted ,
• The distributor valves shall be of modern technology with built-in pressur li-ffii:ti.,Ftg devices.
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001-E2 Roll ing Stock Speci fi cations P AGE 65/80
All air brake equipment and pipe-work layout shall be designed in a way to minimize internal corrosion
caused by condensed water. Particular attention should be paid to avoid the possibility of intensified
corrosion due to contact between dissimilar metals in the presence of condensed water or by traces of
dissolved metals present in the condensed water.
Req 130 The HST shall be equipped with the following braking components :
1: An air brake system with gradual application and release, acting on each bogie,
1: An immobilization brake ,
1: Equipment to allow MU configuration braking .
7.8. 2 BRAKE CONTROL
The HST shall be equipped with two pipes to automatically couple from single to double HST
configuration :
• A Brake Pipe ,
• A Main Tank supply pipe.
The pressure in the Brake Pipe shall be controlled by the driver's brake valve system.
0.
V
The pressure changes in the Brake Pipe, for application as well as for release , shall be controlled by
positioning a handle. The following positions shall be obtainable:
• Filling ,
• Full Release or Running ,
• Service application range (several steps for application or release) ,
• Emergency application position.
Req 131
11: A suitable anti-skid/slip protection device of the latest technology shall be provided . it shall permit a
high degree of safety,
11: The driver's brake valve system shall enable the control of the automatic air brakes for SU or MU
configuration .
7.8.3VALVE AND GAUGE
Req 132
lE A manually operated emergency valve shall be installed in the driver's cab with easy and safe
access .
11: The driver's desk shall be equipped with pressure gauges indicating pneumatic circuit pressures .
7.8.4 TANK
the obtain
rovided on each bogie .
7.8.6EFF/C/ENCY
Req 135
11. Parameters related to braking efficiency such as braking force, time for full application/release of the
brake, etc shall be in accordance with the Basic Service Plan conditions and constraints defined in
the document HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-002 Basic Service Plan.
7. 8. 71MMOB/LIZA TION BRAKING

See performance in chapter 6.3.3 "Emergency braking".
Req 136 The immobilization brake shall:

I: Be designed to be capable of safely holding the HST.
I: Comprise a mechanical acting system (e .g. screw brake acting on the axle, spring acting system,
etc .. . ).
'.. . ~
7.8.8CONTROL UNIT
Req 137
[. A brake control unit shall be provided to utilize the different brake systems optimally depending on
the operating status.
7.9 DRIVER'S CAB REQUIREMENTS
A Driver's cab shall be located at each extremity of th e RSK and shall contain the devices and
requirements concerning the control of the HST.
7.9.1 COMFORT
For the comfort, door and window requirements, see the followings chapters:
• Chapter 7 .1.8 "Driver's cab",
• Chapter 7.1.9 "Seat",
• Chapter 7.1.16 "Heating , Venting and Air Conditioning",
• Chapter 7.1.10 "Lighting",
• Chapter 7.4.3 "Driver window",
• Chapter 7.5.4 "Conductor compartment door",
• Chapter 7.6.8 "Access".
7.9.2 START-UP THE HST
The start-up circuit breaker or insulated command of the RSK Control Command System (CCS) shall be
near the driver. Moreover the driver shall be able to constantly check and easily assess the status of all
the electrical equipment.
The start-up battery shall supply the electrica l equipment of the driving cab.
An unlocking desk control shall be on the driver's desk.
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001 -E2 Rol ling Stock Specifications PAGE 67/80
The unlockin
In addition, information shall be given to notify which driver's cab is in service .
7.9.3 GETTING ENERGY
A main circuit breaker shall command energy capture .
lt shall automatically:
• Switch off by the CCS if needed,
• Switch off and switch on by ERTMS when the HST crosses a catenary neutral section .
The driver shall be constantly informed about catenary voltage value .
Req 139
11: After getting energy from the catenary system the following equipment of safety, braking , radio , CCS
and auxiliaries shall be automatically tested in order to be ready to operate.
11: In the case of stabling, a function shall manage the HVAC and lighting energy supply.
7.9.4 GETTING TRACTION AND BRAKING
Req 140
1: An operating handle shall command the HST traction power. lt shall be coupled with the dynamic
brake handle .
11: The HST traction shall be allowed only if a running direction and a current lim itation has been
selected .
111: The brake controller shall be in accordance with UIC 541 standard and display all useful information
to manage the HST brake.
7.9.5EMERGENCY
Req 141
1: In case of emergency, the driver's control desk shall be equipped with emergency systems (light,
horn , emergency braking button ...) according to emergency operating and driving rules .
7.9.6 CAB SIGNALING

The safety of rail traffic depends upon the infrastructure and the signaling system . All HST running on
the worlds' networks are equipped with a high safety level cab-signalling system .
HST control on the main line and in stations shall be carried out by a cab-signaling system complying
with ERTMS Level 2 and in accordance with the document HHR-LO-SI -403 -IN E-001 Interlocking And
Main Line Signaling.
. )
PAGE 68/80
The cab-signaling system shall provide full and complete in-cab information to the driver so that he may
adapt his speed conditions and in order to automatically enforce train braking to reduce excess speed . lt
shall also provide comprehensive speed supervision, including, but not limited to, the following items:
• Use of predetermined braking curves ,
• Monitoring of signaling and other speed limiting conditions ,
• Continuous monitoring of actual train speed ,
• Continuous comparison of actual speed with permitted speed ,
• Automatic application of braking to reduce excess speed .
By determining the necessary level of authority to proceed to be given to a train , the cab-signaling
system shall take into account all relevant data, including but not limited to:
• Train location
• Location of stopping points
• Interlocking conditions
• Permanent and temporary speed restrictions
• Track safety protection areas
• Type of route which has been set
• Track gradients
• Rolling Stock characteristics
• Program stop at stations
When running through permanent or temporary speed restrictions , the train speed shall be restricted for
the duration of the restriction only, according to the train length .
Information shall display on the on board ERTMS screen system, including but not limited to :
• Speed of the HST,
• Dynamic braking effort and tractive effort,
• Imposed speed (in the imposed speed mode),
• Legal time and date,
• Trip time information,
• HST energy consumption,
• Limited speed of the line,
• Profile of the line .
Req 142 Each driver's cab shall be :

111: Equipped with an on board cab-signalling system complying with ERTMS level 2.
11£ In accordance with the standards and documents TSI CC HS and TSI RSK HS .
7.9.7MANIMACHINE INTERFACE (MM/)
Req 143 Each driver's cabs shall be:

1£ Equipped with the latest technology of Man Machine Interface (MM I),
1: In accordance with the standards, rules and documents TSI CC HS, TSI RSK HS, EN 50126, EN
50128, EN 50129 and EEIG 965126 (or EOS).
7.9.8JURIDICAL RECORDER
Consequently, this equipment shall ensure the storage of the recorded data on board. lt shall be 0
possible to download this data at an appropriate site (e.g. maintenance site , station .. . ) equipped with a
specific tool.
Each driver's cab shall be e
7.9.9RADIO
The radio system shall be GSM-R type . lt shall ensure the connection between the Operations Control
Centre (OCC), the station and the HST crew in the zone covered by the OCC .
lt shall be in accordance with the following standards, rules and documents (or EOS) :
• TSI CC HS,
• TSI RSK HS,
• EN 50121-1-2-3-4-5,
• EN 50155,
• EN 50125-1,
• UIC 751-1-2-3,
• UIC PROJECT FRS EIRENE V7,
• UIC PROJECT SRS EIRENE V15.
Req 145
Each RSK set shall bee ui ed with a radios stem .
7.10 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
7.10.1 THE CONTROL COMMAND SYSTEM (CCS)
The Consortium shall design the HST Control Command System (CCS) in order to obtain sufficient
safety levels for:
• The passengers ,
• The HST crew,
• The HST itself,
• HST circulations .
The Consortium shall conceive the HST CCS so that a breakdown of several components shall not
involve a risk for:
• The HST itself,
• Other HST.
The structure of the CCS shall comply with the RSK RAMS and the global HST system . The Consortium
shall design in redundancies , doubled orders and multiplexed orders, to manage RSK degraded modes
and to limit the intervention of personnel according to RAMS data .
The CCS shall gather all the components intended to command , control , and supervise the RSK
functio o.s--i11110Tma.Land degraded modes . Some of the CCS functions shall relate to SU configuration
an ~olbt3d&h cli'6Wii.~RII relate to MU configuration .
fr:.o . ''"'. ·'" ·"~ s ~
tltgCS~~~<'-n gH rmf ng 1-a o the CCS , safety equipment such as ERTM S shall interface with it.
i:;· v/ \'
[ll 0 I •
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS -001-E2 Rolling Stock Specifications PAGE 70/80
• The system of RSK internal communication (e .g. bus ... ),

• Equipment of command and control of the RSK energy (e .g. current collection , current protection ,
conversion , storage, distribution , etc ... ),
• Equipment of command and control of the RSK when moving (e .g. traction , braking, driving , etc ... ),
• Equipment of command and control for passenger comfort (e .g. lighting , air conditioning , etc ... ),
• Equipment of command and control of the accesses (e .g. doors, emergency intercomm , etc .. . ),
• Equipment of monitoring of the correct operation of the RSK (e .g. integrity of the RSK, recording
camera , detection and fire control , bogie instability, passenger alarm, etc .. . ),
• Equipment of communication inside the RSK (lntercomm , Passenger Information System, etc ... ),
• Equipment of communication with the outside world (e .g. radio, ERTMS , etc ... ),
• MMI equipment of the HST.
General
The CCS shall be able to:

• Manage the passenger comfort in degraded mode, without catenary:
o HST alone ,
o HST connected to another emergency HST,
o HST connected to an emergency locomotive.
• Indicate the delays compared with the reference trip,
I . .._,
• Control the sanding ,
• Control the wheel-set flange lubricating,
• Assist the driver during the crossing of the catenary neutral sections .
The CCS shall be able to supervise and to manage these different items:
• HST configuration (MU or SU),
• On board lighting,
• Air conditioning ,
• Passenger areas (e .g. toilet, vestibule , etc ... )
• Access doors ,
• Pressure waves attenuation,
• Batteries voltage and battery chargers ,
• Wheel -set rotation and no rotation,
• Bogie instability,
• Batteries ground connection ,
• Hot axle box detector,
• No release of braking,
• Pneumatic suspension ,
• Ventilation of electrical apparatus ,
• Slip/slide events,
• Status of braking equipment,
• Passenger alarm .
Operating
The CCS shall also control and manage the different HST operation status:
• Service operation ,
• Short or long stabling ,
• Moving ,
• Maintenance,
• Control the speed of the HST at the time:
o Of crossing the washing machine ,
o Of the coupling phase.
• Supply with batteries ,
• Driving cab on service,
Test
The CCS shall be able to supervise the tests of the safety systems and the tests of the HST functions:
• Tests without High Voltage and record the results,
• Test the RSK at the exit of the maintenance site ,
• To check the status of the RSK,
• To test automatically the RSK,
• To detect the operating restrictions of the RSK.
Anomaly
Moreover, the CCS shall notify information to the driver or the conductor, in the event of an anomaly
requiring an action of them .
The CCS shall be able to notify:

• Mechanical component anomaly,
• Bogie instability,
• Release of braking,
• Fire detection ,
• Hot axle box detection ,
• Pantograph anomaly or a current collection anomaly,
• HST configuration anomaly or modification ,
• Intercommunication anomaly,
• Battery charger anomaly,
• Pneumatic suspension anomaly,
• Slip/slide anomaly,
• Access doors anomaly,
• Brake anomaly of the traction/braking unit,
• Bogie isolation of the pneumatic brake,
• Air production anomaly,
• Absence of traction ,
• Nose door anomaly,
• HVAC anomaly and the state of the air conditioning ,
• Passenger alarm ,
• Coupling mode ,
• Pneumatic brake anomaly,
• All action on the brake.
7.10.2 BATTERY
The battery sets shall be in accordance with the following standard (or EOS):
• EN 60077-1,
• EN 60254-1,
• EN 60623,
• EN 60896-11.
The battery set shall be housed in an easily accessible container, protected from ingress of dust, sand ,
water and oil. The interiors of the containers shall be painted with an anti-corrosive paint.
Req 147
' .·
Ref: HHR- LO - RS -40 3- SYS-001-E 2 Rolling Stock Specifications P AGE 72/80

7.10.3 POWER UNIT

The power unit shall be able to transform the main electric power collected on the catenary into
mechanical energy.
ect of the standards TSI RSK.
In addition, the power unit components shall be in accordance with the following requirements.
The power unit components shall be protected against over voltage and lightning risk.
The high voltage circuit breaker shall be in accordance with the following standards (or EOS):
• EN 60077-4-5,
• UIC 797.
Damage to the high voltage equipment shall not cause a loss of motive power.
The main transformer and the cooling fluid shall be in accordance with the fo llowing standards (or EOS):
• EN 60310,
• EN 60296,
• EN 60836.
The traction converter shall be in accordance with the following standards (or EOS):
• EN 50207,
• EN 61373.
The traction motor shall be in accordance with the following standards (or EOS):
• EN 60349-2,
• EN 61377,
• EN 60034-1,
• EN 60034-18-1,
• EN 60034-18-31 .
The command/control of the traction shall be in accordance with the following standards (or EOS):
• EN 50155,
• EN 50125.
7.10.4 ELECTRICAL BRAKE

The electrical brake system sha ll be able to transform an electric power generated by the motors into a
calorific power used to brake the HST.
This system shall be designed according to UIC 544-2 standards (or EOS).
The resistor shall be ventilated by fans. The air intake(s) dimensions shall be designed so that the air
speed is as slow as possible to avoid sand particles being ·sucked in.
The electrical brake shall res ect the TSI RSK HS re uirements,

7.10.5 AUXILIARY UNIT
An auxiliary unit shall be able to transform a nominal electric power into a different type of electric
power, to use for the electrical equipment.
Req 150
£ The auxiliary unit shall be in accordance with TSI RSK HS , EN 50207, EN 61287-1 and EN 50155
standards (or EOS).
7.10.6 PANTOGRAPH
The pantograph is an articulated device which makes it possible to collect the main electric current by
contact on the catenary.
The pantograph raising shall be done in two phases :

• First, the pantograph shall rise quickly,
• Second , the pantograph bow shall contact the catenary without arcing .
The pantograph lowering shall be done in two phases :
• First, the pantograph is separated rapidly from the catenary (to limit arcing when the bow separates
from the contact wire) ,
• Second , it goes down slowly and comes smoothly to rest on the stops
The pantograph shall maintain static and dynamic effort on the catenary, in accordance with the
following standards (or EOS):
• TSI ENE HS ,
• EN 50206-1 ,
• EN 50367.
The pantograph shock absorber shall be in accordance with EN 13802 standard (or EOS).
The pantograph shall be adapted to the constraints related to the contact with the catenary, in
accordance with the following standards (or EOS) :
• TSI RSK HS ,
• EN 50124-1 ,
• EN 50367 .
The pantograph shall preserve the integrity of the catenary in accordance with the following standards
(or EOS):
• UIC 505-1 ,
• EN 50206-1 ,
• EN 50367 .
The pantograph shall be tested in accordance with EN 50.206-1 standards (or EOS) :
Req 151
The pantograph shall be in accordance with TSI RSK HS requirement.
The system shall allow the collection of the catenary current under the tension 25kV-60Hz with only
one pantQgr~
1 , ....
:/ \.~t(I,'(J 1/J ,;:~
Two p,. . og Q.phs tsh:31-&b~ rovided per RSK.
The ~u'iit!iW\of Jhe current?:'8~1ection shall be according to EN 50367 standard (or EOS)
.·)
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001 -E2 Rolling Stock Specificati ons PAGE 74/80
7.10.7 AIR PRODUCTION
The aim of this function shall be to produce , from the ambient atmospheric air, a compressed air supply
stored in a tank . This pressured air supply shall be the energy necessary to operate all the pneumatic
equipment.
The compressed air production shall take into account KSA local climatic condition according to the
information describe in the document HHR-LO-CT-602-SAU-001 General Specifications - Appendix
B: Annual Climate and Weather in KSA.
The production of compressed air shall be in accordance with TSI RSK HS re
Compressor group
Req 153
111: The compressors capacity and performance shall guarantee the sufficient supply of compressed air
for the braking system , doors and other pneumatic auxiliary equipment.
Tank
Req 154
111: The compressed air shall be stored in tanks having rust proof internal surfaces and equipped with
automatic water-drains.
11: The storage capacity of the tanks shall be sufficient to operate the braking system , doors and other
pneumatic auxiliary equipment.
7.10.8 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENTS
General
The protection of the enclosure against pollution shall be according to IP65 rules and EN 60529
standard (or EOS) .
The contactor design shall be according to EN60947-4-1 standards (or EOS).
The design of on board electronic components shall be according to EN 50155 standard (or EOS) .
In general , the following standards (or EOS) shall be used :

• EN 60077-2,
• EN 50343 ,
• EN 50355.
Req 155
The electrical equipment shall guarantee the startup of the HST and all the operational functions
without erformance de radation .
Arrangement
Under body wiring , exposed to shock and pollution , shall

comply with IP65 rules (or EOS).
The electrical cabinets shall be designed and arranged in such a way that the hig
separate from the low voltage equipment.
Ref: HHR- LO- RS -403- SYS-001-E 2 Rolling Stock Specifi cati ons PAGE 75/80
Proper warning signs shall be exhibited on the cabinet doors. 0

Protection
The protection of the electrical cabinet and electrical block shall be according to lP 55 (external access
to the elements) or lP 20 (no external access to the elements) and EN 60529 standards (or EOS)
The electrical equipment, whose level of operating tension is equal to or higher than class Ill , according
to the EN 50153 standard (or EOS), shall be protected by a safety device with a locking system.
Req 156
11' The design of electrical equipment shall protect the personnel (e.g. passengers, HST staff and
maintenance staff) against electrical risks .
8. DESIGN, INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
8.1 VERIFICATION TESTS OF RSK EQUIPMENTS
8. 1.1 DESIGN MONITORING

The Government reserves the right to monitor the design of any or all of the assemblies (especially not
proven technology and critical components such as the air conditioning) and also the complete coach
through an appointed inspector prior to acceptance for construction.
8.1.2 INSPECTION
The Government reserves the right to test and inspect any or all of the assemblies and also the
complete coach through an appointed inspector prior to acceptance for delivery and for the activities
under the testing and commissioning period.
8.2 VERIFICATION TESTS OF RSK
Each new RSK shall undergo an intensive period of testing and commissioning before it enters public
service.
The final list and content of tests is left to the discretion of the Consortium, according to RSK
technology. The Consortium shall be able to demonstrate that the tests have a high level in RAMS
performance .
8.2.1 FACTORY TESTS
The Factory Tests stage shall be carried out by the manufacturer at his plant. These tests will be
observed and monitored by the Government and or relevant authority (inspectors ... ).
These factory tests will follow the sequence proposed by the manufacturer and are to be approved by
the Government and or relevant authority (inspectors ... ) beforehand.
8.2.2 ON-SITE INTEGRATION TESTS
8.2.3 STATIC TESTS
The Static Tests stage shall be carried out by the Consortium at KSA site after coaches' construction,
shipping, delivery and integration (To do coupling and connections on coaches to assemble the HST) .
These tests shall be observed and monitored by the Government and or relevant authority
(inspectors .. . ).
N.B. This integration and Static Test period shall be carefully taken in account at the very beginning of
the project, as explained in the documents :
• HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance,
• HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002 Workshop specifications. ~·~~ ·s"
lt is important to plan and make provision for the RSK integration and Static Test- iit~·g'es 'lnJor~
avoid cost increases and time delays . For example in the proposed maintenanc "rn.(i)del ,,some sp~_e
has been reserved at the KP 125 maintenance site, in order to perform these tas (s--. ;i;'
OJC'I/ •
~,.
f "4-
~. oi T.r
~·::!·<?;,~J~
-0
·c~
"tl
\..
11•
f~~' "' ~~. •.

I \\"' - · cr-
\ ___.->
8.2.4 DYNAMIC TESTS
The Dynamic Tests stage shall be carried out after the static tests stage by the Consortium at KSA high
speed way near the KSA site, in order to commission each HST. These tests shall be observed and
monitored by the Government and or relevant authority (inspectors ... ).
)
9. DOCUMENTATION
Each new HST will be delivered with all necessary documentation before passengers service beginning.
In principle the required documentation includes:
• Test documentation,
• On board documentation,
• Maintenance documentation .
9.1 TEST DOCUMENTATION
The test documentation shall be submitted at the the beginning of the HST construction stage. A
minimum set of 3 hardcopy and 3 DVD's created with files in . ".doe", "dwg" and ". pdf" format for:
• The Government's relevant authorities,
• The Government's inspector representatives ,
• The Government integration site (KP 125 maintenance site if it will used as the integration site)
representative and or relevant authority (inspectors ... ),
The documentation submitted shall be provided bi-lingual, arabic-english .

The test documentation submitted shall be in accordance with the chapter 8 "Design, Inspection,
Testing and Commissioning".
9.2 ON BOARD DOCUMENTATION
The on board documentation shall be submitted one years before the first HST delivery in a "Minimum
set" of 5 hardcopy and 5 DVD's created with files in ".doe", "dwg" and ".pdf' format for:
• The Government's relevant authorities
• The Government's inspector representatives ,
• The Government "Makkah maintenance site" representative and or relevant authority

(inspectors ... ),
• The Government "KP 125 maintenance site" representative and or relevant authority
(inspectors ... ),
• The Government "Madinah maintenance site" representative and or relevant authority

(inspectors ... ).
In addition, one hardcopy shall be supplied for each HST.

The documentation submitted shall be provided bi-lingual, arabic-english .
The documentation submitted shall be in accordance with the following list:
• Driving manual,
• Driver's troubleshooting manual,
• Conductor's manual,
• Conductor's troubleshooting manual,
The final list and content of on board documentation is left to the discretion of the Consortium, according ()
to RSK technology. The Consortium shall be able to demonstrate that the documentation has a high
level in RAMS performance.
9.3 MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION
The maintenance documentation shall be submitted one year before the first HST delivery in a
"Minimum set" of 5 hardcopy and 5 DVD's created with files in ".doe", "dwg" and ".pdf" format for:
• The Government's relevant authorities
• The Government's inspector representatives,
• The Government "Makkah maintenance site" representative and or relevant authority

(inspectors ... ),
• The Government "KP 125 maintenance site" representative and or relevant authority
(inspectors ... ),
• The Government "Madinah maintenance site" representative and or relevant authority

(inspectors ... ).
The documentation submitted shall be provided bi-lingual, arabic-english and in accordance with the
document HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance.
.·:.....;/)
PHASE 2
WORKSHOP SPECIFICATIONS
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
A1 15/04/2009 First Issue F.LACROIX
A2 21 /04/2009 Revision after checker's and G.G comments F.LACRO IX
B1 20/05/2009 Revision after Government comments F.LACRO IX
B2 02/06/2009 Revision after final workshop F.LACROIX
C1 29/06/2009 Final RFP F.LACRO IX
01 11/09/2009 Revision after Linklaters's comments F.LACROIX
PREPARED BY F.LACROIX 11/09/2009

~
...... • -c~
CHECKED BY H.FAURE 11/09/2009
~·--
VALIDATE D BY K.MEYER 11/09/2009
~ ./-~
~~ ;;:;;"
r'
,r ~~t'\ I
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-01 workshop specifications PAGE 2/40

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 . FOREWORD ................................................................................................................................................... 6
2. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 7
2 .1 DEFINITIONS .... ........................ ........... ... ............. ...... ... .. .. ... ................. ...... .. ... ...... ....... .. .. ... ... ....... ...... .......... .. ... 7
2.2ABBREVIATIONS ........ .......... ........................ ........... ... ... ... ................. ......... ... ... ...... ... .. .... .. .... .... .. ... .. ... .. ....... ...... . 7
3.1 TSI STANDARD ... ............. ... ............... ... .. .... .... .............. ... .. ..... ........... ... ..... ........ ..... ... .......... ............. .. ............. .. 8
4. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................ 9
5. ROLLING STOCK PROPOSED MAINTENANCE ORGANIZATION .................................................. 10

5.1 RSK MAINTENANCE PLAN .... ......... ........... ............ ... ... ... .. ..... .... .... ... ............... ... ..... .. .... ... ........ ... .................... 10
5. 1. 1 Construction Period .. ............. .......... .. ........ ...... ....... .. ... .... .. ......... .. ............. .......... .. .......... .. .. ..... .. ............ 10
5.1.2 Operating period..... .... .................. ........ .. ... ... ..... ... ............ .... ..... .... ..... .... ....... .. ... ........ ................. .. .. ........ 10
5.2DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS ..... ....................... .... ........ .... .. ............................................................................. ......... 12
5.3RESERVED MAINTENANCE LOCATION ..... .. .................. ........... ... ..... ........ .. ....................... ........ ........ ...... .......... 12
5.3.1 Makkah ... .. ......................................... .. .. ....... .... .......... ..... ............................. .. ........... .... .. ......................... 12
5. 3.2 Madinah ... ... ....... .. .................. .. ........ ..... ... ..... ... ....... .. ....... ........... .. .... ........ ............ ............... .......... ..... ...... 12
5.3.3 125 KP ... ..... .... .................................. ... .... .. ... ..... .... ....... ..... ...................... ...................................... .... ....... 12
5.4WORKSHOP SIZING .... .............. ...... ........ ...... .. .... ....... ... ................. .. .......... ... ..... ... ............. .................. .... ........ 13
5.4. 1 Maintenance organization proposal ................................ .. ........................... .. .......... .... ..... ... .... .. ... ....... 13
5.4.2 Workshop layouts proposal ......... .... ...... .... ................................. ....... ..................... ... ..... ..... ......... ... .... .. 14
6. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................... 15
6.1 ENVIRONMENT ..... ... .......... .. ........... ............. ... ...... ... .. .. ..... ..... .. .. ...... .... ... ............ ... .. ............. ..... ..... ... .. ........... .. 15
6.2LIGHTING ................. .. .. .. ..... .. ....... .................. .. ...... ...... .. ..... ... .......... .... .... ..... ...... .. ............... ... ... ... .. ... ..... .. ..... .. 15
6.3VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING ........ ... .......... .............. .. .. .. .... .. ...... ....... ....... .. ............................... ........ 16
6.3.1 Ventilation .. .... .............. .... .. ... .... ..... ... ... ... ....... ... .. .. ... .. ........ ...... ........... ..... ............. .... ... ....... .... ..... ............ . 16
6.3.2 Air-conditioning ......................... ... ........ ................. .. ... ..... ......... ....... ........... ... .. ............ .. ...... ..... ... ... .. ........ 16
6.3.3 Smoke exhaust ........... .................... ... .... ... ... ..... ....... ........... .. .. .... ... ............................. .. ....... .. ..... ..... ... ... .. 16
6.4FIRE PROTECTION ......................... .... ...... .... .. ........... .. .. .. ........... .. ... ..... ... ......... ......... .. ............... ..... ........ .. ....... 16
6.5SIGNALLING ... ... ...... ...... ........ ....... .......................... ... .... ....... .. ........... ...... ..... .... .. .. .... ... .. ... ...... ...... .. .... ........ ... .. . 17
6 .6WATER SUPPLY-SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE .............. .. ... .. ........... ............ .. .................... .... .. ........... .. ... .......... 17
6.7COMMUNICATION .. ..... ... ....... .... ...... ........ ........ ... .... ............. ... .. ... .. ..... .... .. .. .. ...... ... ........ ... ... .. ... ..... .... .. ...... .... ... 18
6.8BUILDINGS REQUIREMENTS .... ... .... ........ ........................ ............. -. ...... ........................... .... ,... ... .......... ... .. ....... 18
6.90THERS REQUIREMENTS ...... ........... .............. ................................. : ................................. ....... ........... ... ... ...... 19
6. 9. 1 Train speed limit ...... ....... ... ... ........ .... .... ........ ................... ..... ............ .. ... .. .... .. .... ..... ......... ... .. ...... ... ..... ... .. 19
6. 9.2 Track layout .. .......... ........ ................ ... ...... .... ..... .. ....... ...... ........ .......... ... ..... .. .... ............. ....... .. ........ ... .... ... 19
6.9.3 Safety. .... .. ....... ......... ........ .................. .. ..... .... ...... .... .... ........... ............ .... .. .. ... .... ... .. ..... ..... .................. ...... . 19
6.9.4 Security........ .. .......... ... ...... ............. .. ......... ...... ................ ....... .... .. ... ...... .. .. ....... .. .. .. ......... .. ......... ..... ... .. ... .. 19
6. 9.5 Design Life ..... ... ........... .... ............ ..... .... .. .......... .. .............. ..... ... .... .. .. ................... ..................... ........ ..... .. 20
6.9.6 Environmental considerations ....... ....................... ..... .. ... .... .. ......... ......... ..... ........... . ... ... :-:: .. .... .,.. . ...... 20
/ ,. \''~}! I(). ,,,'·"
7. WORKSHOP AREAS SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................ :· :;;~.:.,,: r:.'.'.':! . §'. ..... 21
7 .1 G E~E~L CHARACTERISTICS ........ .... ............ .. ......... ....... .. ..... ..... ............ ..... ... .......
/f'> ...)" .· Y.'
. ;}·:?-·· .... ,..'.............. \\::
71 1
. . , ratn mov.ements .... ... ... ..... ....... ........................ .. ....... .. ... ....... ....... ................. .. .~:· \}'': ......... ..:::'........f' . ~
7.1 .2 Road vehicles movements........ .. ... ............. ...... .. ... ..... .. ............... .. .... .. ... .... .. .:=-..~j .. ..... ....... ... , ..~~ ... ,... :.:....2 ~
7.1.3 Pedestrian movements.............. .. ......................... .. ........... .. ..................... ... .. .. .9.:.. . ~.·..................., .. .-.:. ,
o'(
/..~-..~ u· 1 • r .,--:'- 1
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-D1 workshop specifications .' ~ I { ~~"1.. ' . AGE 3/40

7.2WORKSHOP AREAS SPECIFICATIONS ................... ... ..... .. .. .... ... .. ..... .... ..... .. ..... ... ... ....... ... .... ...... ........ ........ ... ... 24
7.2.1 Entrance/assembly shop ... ........ ........ .... .... ..... ..... ........ .................. ........ ........ ........... ..... ....... ... ............. .. 25
7.2.2 Car-body shop .... ....... .. ..... .......... .............. ........... .. .. ... ....... ..... .... .... .. .......................................... .... .. .... ... 25
7.2.3 Car-body pretreatment & painting shop .... .... ............... ..................................................................... ... 26
7.2.4 Heavy components shops ............ ..... .... ... ...... ............................................................................ .. ... ...... 30
7.2.5 Light components shop .... .. .... ..... ..... ....... .. ..... ... .. ...... ... ....... ... .......................... .. ......... .... ...... ... ... ... ........ 30
7.2.6 Test tracks .......... ...... ...... ............ .... ..... ..... ... ........ ...... .................. .... .............. ... .. .. ... ..... ..... .... .. ................. 31
7.2. 7 Store ........ ............ ..... ........... ...... .. .. ... .. .. ... ... .... ..... .. ............ ... .. ...... ........ ..... ... .... ... .. ... ....... .. .. ... .. ....... .......... 31
7.2.8 Waste collection room .... .. .. .... ..... ...... ... .. ..... ..... .... ........ ...... .... ........... ... ..... ... .... .. .... ..... .... .... .. ....... ... ....... 31
7.2.9 Administrative and social buildings ........ ..... .. ....................... .... .. ... ... .... ... ........ ..... .. ... ... .. ... ................... 32
7.2.10Emergency vehicles workshop ...... .... .... ............ ................ .... .... ... ...... ... ... .. .... ...... ...... ... .. ... .. ................. 32
8. WORKSHOP MAIN EQU IPMENT ............................................................................................................. 33
8. 1. 1 Turntable for bogie and for wheel-set ............ ........ ... .... ..... ........ .. .... .... .... ..... .......... .. ... .. ... .. ..... ..... ... ... . 33
8.1 .2 Bogie washing machine .... ........ ..................... ............. ......... .... ..... .... .. ...... ... ........ .. ..... .......................... . 33
8. 1.3 Press for fitting and removal.............. ............................................ ........................................................ 33
8. 1.4 Vertical hub boring machine ................. .. .................................................................. ............................. 34
8.1.5 Wheel lathe ....................................... .. ...................................................... ......... .. ..... .......... .. .... ............... 34
8.1.6 Bogie and wheel-set elevator ......................... .. .. .. ............ ... .. ............. ... ................ ... .... ..... ... ...... ........... 34
8. 1. 7 Bearing extractor ... .. ... ........... ...... .............. .. ... ... .. .... ... ...... ...... ........ ...... ... ..... ....... ..... .. .. ....... ..... .......... ..... 34 A
~)
8. 1. 8 wheel-set inspection station ............................... .... .......... ... ........ .. ..... ... ... .... .. ... .. .. .. ... .. ...... .. .. .. .. ........... 35
8.1.9 Rerailing vehicle ... .............. ..... .. .............. .. ..... .............. ... .. ... ..... ..... .............. ....... ...... ... ..... ..... .. ....... .. .. .... 35
9. TESTING ........................................................................................................................................................ 36
9.1 FACILITIES TESTS ....... ... ...... ... ... .... .. ..... ...... ..... ................ ................. ..................... .... .. ..... .............. ..... ... .. ... .... 36
9.1.1 Acceptance tests ................ ..... .... ..... ..... .. .... .... .................... ... ... .. .. ... ........ .. .... ... ....... .... ..... ............. .. .. ..... 36
9. 1.2 On-Site Integration tests ............................ ....... .. .............. ........ ... .. ................ ........... ..... .. ...................... 36
9.2HEAVY EQUIPMENT TESTS .. .......... ....... ........ .. .. .. ......... ..................... .. .... ................ ... ... ... ... ... ...... ........ .... .... .... 36
9.2.1 Factory Tests ............................... ..... ..... .... ......... .. ... ........... .. .. ... .. .. ... ...... ... ...... ........... ... .... ..... .... ..... ........ 36
9. 2. 2 On-Site integration Tests .. ...... ..... ........ .... ... .. .... .. ..... ....... ... ... ... .. .. .... ..... ... ... ... ......... ..... .... ....... .. ...... ....... 3 7
APPENDIX ................................ ........ ............. ............ .. .................. ..... .................. .......................... ...................... 38
APPENDIX N"1: RSK MAINTENANCE SPACE RESERVATION ........ ... ..... .. ... .... .... ....... ..... ............ ...... ..... .. ...... 39
APPENDI X N"2: 125 KP LAYOUT PROPOSAL ...................................... ....... ... .. ............ .. .. ................................. 40
u
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-01 workshop specifications PAGE4/40
PROJECT REFERENCES

1 HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rollinq Stock Maintenance
2 HHR-LO-RS-403-SYS-001 Rolling Stock specifications
3 HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 Small Depot specifications
5 HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-001 Basic SeNice Plan
6 HHR-LO-OP-202-SYS-001 Operating Requ irements
8 H HR-LO-CT-602-SYS-002 General Specifications- Section 2: Glossary
9 HHR-LO-CT-602-SAU -001 General Specifications - Appendix B: Annua l
10 Ministry Of Interior - Kingdom Of Saudi Arabia-
Social Ru les
11 H H R-LO-TE -403-SYS-005 Transmission Network Specification
12 HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-006 LAN I WAN I WiFi Specification
13 H H R-LO-TE-403-SYS-007 Railway Telecommunication Specification
14 H H R-LO-TE-403-SYS-008 Adminis trative Telecommun ication Specification
15 H H R-LO-TE-403-SYS-009 CCTV Specification
16 HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-010 Passenger Information System
18 HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-012 Building Security Specification
19 HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-013 Master Clock System
20 HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-015 Te lecommunication SupeNision Center
Specification
21 HHR-LO-SI-1403-INE-001 Interlocking and main line signalin_g

1. FOREWORD
Due to the close relationship between RSK maintenance and workshop specifications, this
document shall be read in conjunction with the document HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001
Rolling Stock Maintenance.
As there are several kinds of HST maintenance organization in the world, this document
describes a group of basic maintenance sites (type 5 and sites used during Construction
Period as defined in the document HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock
Maintenance) and not a typical maintenance area, such as heavy "workshop".
In fact the Consortium is responsible to distribute these basic maintenance sites at the
various maintenance locations (three (3) maintenance locations are currently reserved), in
accordance with the RSK technology and the following documents requirements:
._ ....
Req 01
[ The Consortium shall be responsible for distributing the basic maintenance sites type 5 and
those used during the Construction Period, to the maintenance locations available. The
distribution of these basic sites shall provide a RSK maintenance system able to achieve all the
requirements described in the reference documents listed above.

2. GLOSSARY
Definitions and abbreviations used in this document are defined in the document HHR-LO-CT-602-
SYS-002 General Specifications -Section 2: Glossary.
2.1 Definitions
No specific definitions are used in this document.
2.2 Abbreviations
Specific abbreviations used in this document are defined below:

• TSIInfra HS: see chapter 3.1 "TSI standard",
• TSI RSK HS: see chapter 3.1 "TSI standard ",
'".<I If ,
n ' '' tJ ~\'
J
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-0 1 workshop specifications

KSA references used in this document are defined in the document:

Ministry of Interior- Kingdom of Saudi Arabia -Social Rules.
Moreover Rolling Stock Maintenance shall be based on European standards or EOS and the
following standards shall be respected in the workshop design and construction :
3.1 TSI standard
• TSI RSK HS: Concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating to the 'rolling
stock' sub-system of the trans-European high-speed rail system , 21 February 2008,
• TSJ Infra HS: Concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating to the
'infrastructure' sub-system of the trans-European high-speed ra il system , 20 December 2007.
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-01 workshop speci fications PAGE 8/40

0
4. INTRODUCTION
The purpose of the workshop facilities is to :

• Ensure that HST can be stored , cleaned , inspected , serviced , maintained , repaired (according
to the document HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance, the workshop shall
be able to perform activities on basic maintenance sites type 5 and those used during
Construction Period) and returned to service as necessary to meet fleet availability
requirements,
• Provide a safe and efficient working environment for staff,
• Minimize maintenance operating costs and downtime for HST.
Req 02
11[ The Consortium shall be responsible for all aspects of the workshop, including system-wide
reliability , availability, maintainability, safety and durability; according to the Basic Service Plan
conditions .
Minimum requirements about reliability, availability, maintainability, safety and durability

are defined in the documents:
• HHR-LO-MA-402-SYS-001 RAMS Assurance Requirements,

• HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance.
Moreover Basic Service Plan conditions are described in the documents :

The general requirements regarding the general policy of maintenance for Rolling Stock
are described in the document HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance .
Req 03
I: The Consortium shall design the workshop , in order to establish suitable performance and
availability levels for correct maintenance of HST in the different locations.
1: The Consortium shall equip workshop with all equipment, tools, safety systems , materials-
handling facilities , logistics management systems, staff amenities, security systems, utilities,
drainage systems , access roads , vehicle internal circulation and parking systems , landscaping
and all other functions required to ensure that all maintenance functions are carried out.
The workshop design , construction and equipment shall be in accordance with the
document HH R-LO -MR-402-SYS-001 Ro lling Stock Maintenance.
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002 -01 workshop specifications P AGE 9/40

5. ROLLING STOCK PROPOSED MAINTENANCE ORGANIZATION
The RSK Maintenance organization shall be clearly defined by the Consortium according
to his RSK technology. The elements provided in this document are for guidance only to
help the Consortium in his design of the RSK maintenance organization.
5.1 RSK Maintenance plan
RSK maintenance is described in document HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock

Maintenance . The document defines the objectives , requirements, constraints and
supplies to be taken into account, concerning the activities related to the maintenance of
RSK.
As explained in the document HHR-LO-OP-202-SYS-001 Operating Requirements, two

periods shall be taken into account in design and organization of the small depot and A
\;i;}
workshop :
• Construction Period,
• Operating period .
5. 1. 1 CONSTRUCTION PERIOD
This period takes place before the Commencement of Passenger Services and includes
the following activities:
• Coaches stabling before integration,

• Coaches integration (mainly coupling) ,
• Train stabling before revenue service ,
• Facilities and equipment for retrofitting,
• Facilities and equipment to allow maintenance during testing and commissioning runs.
For costs optimization purposes, the facilities used during this period shall also be designed in
order to be used during the operating period.
5.1.2 OPERATING PERIOD
This period takes place at the beginning of HST operation and includes maintenances
activities on classified basic sites with the type as described in the document HHR-LO-
MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance :
• Activities on basic maintenance site type 1: Day stabling (these activities are developed in detail
in the document HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 Small Depot Specifications),
• Activities on basic maintenance site type 2: Overnight stabling (these activities are developed in
detail in the doc ~e~~~ - . -DW-403-SYS-001 Small Depot Specifications),
L":,,~, )O '-' l1t> 1 . ·.
• Activities on 9-,slt rnarht~n.ij~~~ · 'te type 3: Quick maintenance (these activities are developed
in detail in t
0 '11
..
i.O~ li~ ment cHH'R'tL~ W-403-SYS -001 Small Depot Specifications),
t ) VI
• Activities :n&ic main ~ ance i! type 4: Periodic inspection (these activities are developed
in detail in docu ent HHR-L .::.DW-403-SYS-001 Small Depot Specifications),
\ ':'"' . ... ~~ ' J
\ \ /'/,...
\ ~~(~
. ~ .·',:,. ,t. · ~ .J
':• //1., _J,.~- ' . '/
'< "I~~\ ·
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-··~ .. . op specification PAGE 10/40
• Activities on basic maintenance site type 5: Heavy maintenance.
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-01 workshop specification s PAGE 11/40

5.2 Design assumptions
The design of the workshop shall be based on the operational needs of the HST line
(described in document HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-001 Basic Service Plan), HST fleet size,
headway derived from ridership forecasts, and the maintenance activities required for
HST (described in the document HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock
Maintenance).
The miscellaneous inputs used for the workshop design are:
• Train fleet, according to the document HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-001 Basic Service Plan :

• 2012, total fleet: approx 30 HST,
• 2042, total fleet: approx 100 HST.
• RSK in accordance with TSI RSK HS and HHR-LO-RS-403-SYS-001 Rolling Stock
Specifications, ····"*~
• Train length: see TSI RSK HS requ irements , (2 units can be coupled),
• Car length: (depends on RSK technology),
• Train width : (depends on RSK technology),
• Axle Load : see TSI RSK HS requirements,
• Trains gauge: see TSI RSK HS requirements ,
• Minimum curve radius : see TSI RSK HS requirements.
The key objective is to achieve and maintain a high availability, reliability, safety and
comfort of all relevant equipment along with a low life cycle cost.
5.3 Reserved maintenance location
The current reserved locations are listed below.
5.3.1 MAKKAH
The location is approximately at 6 KP close to Makkah. Moreover a dedicated track has

been reserved from the Makkah station in order to serve this location .
A land of approximately 35 ha is currently available in order to implement maintenance

activities. A layout of the land currently reserved is provided in appendix 1.
-
5.3.2 MAOINAH / ( • 1:. ' Ill I
'(') tj I
.. ) \ 11 , ·. ,, 'IJ.
, ,.,/. Jl,
The location is BP. ~<7>).i;natel~ at 44~ \f'< Sclose to Madinah.
A land of appro ~af~ly 4 ha is ~Jr.JJltly
available in order to implement maintenance
activities. A layou .\o'f~
, the
,,.. land
. cue
, . ,el
1<~ reserved is provided in appendix 1 (this area shall
x-
be confirmed at a I te s(age.J:,..• ·, ~., ·
.. 11"-] .
5.3.3 125KP ~ ~ •
The location is approximately at 125 KP .
Ref : HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-01 workshop specifications PAGE 12/40

A land of approximately 65 ha is available in order to implement maintenance activities . A

layout of the land currently reserved is provided in appendix 1 (this area shall be
confirmed at a later stage) .
The space reservations have been made in order to respect the various international
maintenance systems. The Consortium shall optimize the basic maintenance sites
according to his own maintenance system . In fact the Consortium is responsible for the
final choice of maintenance system location(s) :
• Makkah & Mad inah & 125 KP,

• Makkah or Madinah or 125 KP ,
• Others locations .
Req 04
E The Consortium shall choose maintenance system location(s) according to their own
maintenance technology and the operation requirements.
5.4 Workshop Sizing
Req 05
E The Consortium shall calculate the workshop size and the distributed basic maintenance site
type 5 as well as the sites used during the Construction Period
This calculation and site distribution shall be in accordance with the RSK technology and
the following document requirements :

• HHR-LO -OP-202-SYS-001 Operating Requirements.
Req 06
11: The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites capacity in connection with Construction
Period of approximately 30 HST, till 2012 .
Ill The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites capacity for an optimized operation of
approximately 50 HST fleet from 2012 to 2022 .
Ill The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites capacity for a fleet extension to approximately
100 HST from 2022 to 2042 .
5.4. 1 M AINTENANCE ORGAN/lA T/ON PROPOSAL
In order to develop the workshop specifications, a model of maintenance organization has

been created (based upon international RSK maintenance and the expected fleet for
phase 2012 to 2022 and 2042).
But this model is just a proposal and should not be seen as a requirement. lt is for
guidance only in order to make the specification easier to under§ia - . ~ Consortium
/- ·. · \ ·:· 1 '11 • ~
11
shall develop and propose his own solution .
/~ ·.\ J
•' . '\
\~\ ·'
.1 11 1 J
' I
.\'
·' '. .,.'

,t. \
J ' • \
' ,\:
,f']i
I' -· \ ___
·' ' 0
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-01 wo rks hop speci fi cations PAGE 13/40
According to international RSK maintenance practices the following tracks are needed (for
0
each location):
Basic site 2022 2042

Location type (main
200m 400m 200m 400m
activity)
Mobilization
(Stabling 12 8 12 8
position)
5
125 KP (Dis/assembly 1 X 1 X
track)
5 (Static test
2 X 2 X
track)
5 (Trial track) 1 (approx 3km) 1 (approx 3km)
5.4.2 WORKSHOP LAYOUTS PROPOSAL

.12:\
\~.:-;
In order to il lustrate the maintenance organization proposal , a generic track layout for KP
125 location is provided in appendix 2.
In the model, activities during the Construction Period are located at 125KP due to the
proximity of Jeddah harbour and the main line work base.
• Coaches stabling before integration and train stabling before revenue service.
As detailed in the above table, at least 28 HST can be stabled at this location. In fact,
these stabling tracks can be part of the basic maintenance sites type 1, 2, 3 & 4 (see
document HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 Small Depot Specifications and append ix 2).
In addition with the track located in the basic maintenance site type 5, this capacity is in
accordance with the 30 HST expected in 2012.
• Coaches integration (mainly coupling).
The dis/assembly track of the maintenance activity 5 can be used for coach integration .
• Facilities and equipment for retrofitting and to allow maintenance during testing and
commissioning runs.
Maintenance facilities of the operating period can also be used for the maintenance needs
of the Construction Period.

6. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 Environment
Climatic conditions of the west part of Saudi Arabia are described in the document HHR-
LO-CT-602-SAU-001 General Specifications · Appendix B: Annual Climate and
Weather in KSA.
The building services shall meet all applicable statutory requirements and relevant
industry international standards.
Th e manufacturing faci lities shall have full certification per ISO 9001:2000 and 15014001
standards of quality management and environmental concern management respectively.
• ' •j
:;'~:~:'· Req 07
11: The Consortium shall take into consideration the harsh climatic conditions prevailing in the west
part of Saudi Arabia in his workshop facilities design and build.
6.2 Lighting
Th e luminescence level measured at a distance of 1.00m above floor is given as indicated

in the following table:
Luminance
Area
Level
Circulation Space 150Lux
Stairs 150Lux
Stabling area 200Lux
Offices 250Lux
Meeting I Train ing Rooms 400Lux
Staff Rest Rooms 150Lux
Staff Mess Room/Canteen 150Lux
First Aid Room 400Lux
Staff Locker Room 150Lux
Toilets 100Lux
Internal Corridors 150Lux
Workshops (mean_l 200/300Lux
Stores 150Lux
Loading Bay I Deliveries 150Lux
L /' ~
Within the workshop, care shall be taken to create a pleasant tand appecili~S ~ u ~ t and
well lit environment. There should be as much natural ligrt as possi~e Wt{-t'!~ · the
workshop buildings. ' '"/
~ -.
~ ~l.
" \
,t
r<:J"'.F J,
- 1.' ,•
,.,..... t ~-
6-
~~.-, ( .,-.. ~·
.. I (t1..,..~. ' • .
Lighting circuits in escape routes and operationally critical areas shall be interleaved such
that a failure of any single cable, either feeder or final circuit, will result in a maximum loss
of 50% lighting in any one area .
Lighting within staffed areas shall generally be controlled by local light switches configured
to maximize on daylight saving .
Emergency lighting in all designated escape routes and operationally critical areas shall
be easy to maintain and supplied by a central uninterruptible power system .
An emergency lighting system shall be installed throughout the workshop to cover both
occupied and unoccupied areas.
Exit signs shall be maintained on at all times and have the same battery duration as the
associated emergency lighting.
6.3 Ventilation and air-conditioning 0.

\:-J
6.3.1 VENTILATION
Ventilation in the workshop shall be provided in the working areas in order to be in accordance with
Ministry of Interior- Kingdom of Saudi Arabia- Social Rules_
6. 3. 2 AIR-CONDITIONING
A central air conditioning system shall be proposed in the offices , computer rooms ,
conference rooms , etc. The equipment rooms such as relay rooms and telecom exchange
room shall have a special air conditioning system .
6.3.3 S MOKE EXHAUST
Smoke clearance systems shall be provided to clear smoke after a fire and are not
intended to handle high temperature smoke.
Smoke control shall be by individual fireman 's control switches located at the Fire Control
Point for each system or item of equipment to be controlled . Fireman 's control switches
shall include all control switches and status indication as required by the Fire Authority.
Provision shall be made to introduce air flow in the escape routes .
Req 08
I.: The Consortium shall provide ventilation , air-conditioning and smoke exhaust systems at the
needed areas . -
detection and alarm/public address system shall be provided ,
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-01 wo rkshop specifications PAGE 16/40

Details about workshop fire detection requirements are provided in the document HHR-
LO-TE-403-SYS-012 Building Security Specification
A depot hydrant system shall be provided to produce a controlled supply of water for
fighting fires on HST. The fire hydrant is for the use of the civil defence service only.
Fire hydrants shall be implemented with a regular spacing of approximately 55m

throughout the workshop, to enable the civil defence to 'connect their hoses from a point of
safety within striking distance of the fire.
An automatic sprinkler system shall be provided . A Gaseous fire suppression agent using
inert gas shall be provided for equipment rooms. The workshop design must comply with
the safety standards and statutory regulations .
The workshop design , engineering and use of materials should minimise the risk of fire ,
including meeting the standards set for the fire resistance duration of materials. Elements
of the structures shall have appropriate fire resistance. The Fire fighting system shall be
designed with sufficient fire hydrants for the workshop .
Req 09
I[ The Consortium shall provide a fire protection system in order to provide a high level of fire
safety in the workshop.
6.5 Signalling
Refer to document HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-001 Interlocking and Main Line Signaling.
6.6 Water supply-sewerage and drainage
The water requirement for workshop shall be estimated by the Consortium and submitted
to the government for approval.
The requirement for drinking water needs should preferably be met from the municipal
water supply.
The buildings producing sewerage are scattered all over the workshop. lt is therefore
proposed to provide independent treatment/disposal for sewage though septic tanks and
soak pits associated with a regular network for sewage disposal.
The sewerage network shall be laid in such a way that no industrial water nor workshop
wastes containing acids, detergents, grease and oils etc. are added to it.
New outfalls to local public sewerage infrastructure (or requisition of new) will involve
liaison with the local drainage network and the location of oil separators/interceptors .
A drainage system shall be provided for track drainage discharging via pollution control
measures to the water course. The drainage system shall prefera0 1y o by gravity;
otherwise a pumped system shall be provided. ,.
'! \(I\ !) • · " · '
Req 10
The Consortium shall provide a water supply-sewerage and drainage ~Y9tem.
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-01 wo rkshop sp eci fications

6.7 Communication
Req 11
In the workshop, the following telecommunications sub systems should be proposed:
Ethernet applications: Intranet, Internet. .. ,
Administrative Voice Communication System,
Railway Voice Communication System,
CCTV,
Master Clock,
Fire detection,
Access control,
WiFi ( VoiP, Ethernet applications, File download I upload between train and ground, message
exchange for train preparation ... ),
Access to the Core Communication Network (Fiber optic network),
GSM-R (for train communications only).
Details about telecommunications requirements are provided in the following documents:
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-005 Specification for transmission support and multi service

network,
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-006 LAN I WAN I WiFi Specification,
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-007 Railway Telecommunication Specification,
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-008 Administrative Telecommunication Specification,
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-009 CCTV Specification,
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-01 0 Passenger Information System,
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011 GSM-R Specification,
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-012 Building Security Specification,
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-013 Timing system specification,
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-015 Telecommunication Supervision Center Specification.
In addition the contractor shall provide a Public Address System that covers all workshop.
6.8 Buildings requirements
KSA social rules are defined in the document:
• Ministry of Interior- Kingdom of Saudi Arabia -Social Rules.
all applicable statutory requirements and relevant

0
6.9 Others requirements
6.9.1 TRAIN SPEED LIMIT
Train speed limits will be 7Kph in the sheds , 25Kph in the yard , and up to 30Kph for HST
entering and exiting the reception sidings.
6. 9. 2 TRA CK LA YOUT
As specified in TSIInfra HS , the following requirements shall be applied :
• Gradients of stabling tracks intended for parking HST shall not be more than 2.5 mm/m ,
• On tracks where HST complying with the TSI RSK HS move only at low speed (stations and
passing tracks , depot and stabling tracks), the minimum horizontal design radius shall not be
less than 150m,
• Track horizontal alignments comprising reverse curves without straight track between them
shall be designed with a radius greater than 190m,
• If the radius of either curve is less than or equal to 190m, a length of straight track at least 7m
long shall be provided between the curves,
• Vertical alignment of stabling and service tracks shall not include curves of radius of less than
600m on a crest or 900m in a hollow.
The workshop track layout shall be in accordance with TSI Infra HS requirements .
6.9.3 S AFETY
Safety requirement shall be in accordance with HHR-social Rules.doc "Ministry of

Interior- Kingdom of Saudi Arabia - Social Rules".
6.9.4 SECURITY
The following issues shall be adequately addressed :
• Full perimeter fencing and any other appropriate measures should be used to exclude intrusion
to areas of the workshop . Both the workshop control room(s) and the security control room(s)
can be secure and access can be controlled (Detailed requirements are provided in the
document HHR-LO -TE -403 -SYS-012 Building Security Specification) ,
• CCTV video surveillance/monitoring of the workshop and its environment (Detailed
requirements are provided in the document HHR-LO-TI;-403 -SYS-009 CCTV Specification) ,
• The avoidance of security blind spots within the design , in so far as th is is reasonably
practicable .
Req 14
The Consortium shall provide a safety system in order to provide a high level of security into the
workshop. /
J-
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-0 1 wo rks hop sp ecifications
6.9.5 DESIGN LIFE
The workshop building life shall be a minimum of 60 years. Moreover the workshop shall
be easily upgraded according to operation evolution .
Req 15
I The Consortium shall design the workshop facil ities such that the extension of 2042 can be
carried out in a manner which keeps the impact on depot operations to a minimum. In particular
space reservation shall be made.
In the model , future extensions can be seen in dotted lines .
6.9.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
The workshop design and its construction shall :
Conform to all appropriate local and international environmental standards and legislation ,
• Make use of recycled materials where practicable and at reasonable cost,
• Aim to enhance energy efficiency,
• Facilitate environmentally-friendly modes of transport to access the workshop.
Req 16
11: The workshop faci lities shall meet "ECO-friendly" requirements of modern HST lines, so
ecological and environmental criteria shall be integrated by the Consortium.

7. WORKSHOP AREAS SPECIFICATIONS
7.1 General characteristics
This workshop shall be the location for Construction Period maintenance activities and
subsequently a basic maintenance site type 5 during the operating period.
As previously said in HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance , this

Construction Period shall be carefu lly taken into account (at the very beginning of the
project) , in order to avoid increased costs and/or delay during the HST commissioning
stage.
HST are expected to arrive at workshop dissembled (coach by coach) from the RSK
manufacturers' plant. Thus HST shall be assembled, tested and stored .
•. !
..
•••... ,"·i·-:
• Assembly of the HST.
An area shall be provided in order to allow HST assembly. Area specifications and
equipment (mainly heavy lifting equipment) needed are based on the RSK technology. But
the miscellaneous areas and equipment needed for HST assembly can be used
subsequently to perform maintenance activity 5 at the revenue service stage.
• Testing ofthe HST.
After assembly, HST shall be tested. These tests include static tests and dynamic tests.
These tests can easily be done in the static and dynamic tests track needed for
maintenance activity 5.
• Storage of the HST.
A sufficient number of stabling tracks shall be provided in order to store HST from the time
they have been assembled until they are ready for Commencement of Passenger
Services or until the other maintenance location are built.
In the model, at least 28 HST can be stabled at KP 125 location (on the tracks of the
future basic maintenance sites types 1, 2, 3 & 4 ). This capacity is in accordance with the
30 HST expected in 2012.
7. 1. 1 TRAIN MOVEMENTS
(
.,.,
It,
I 0~ "'11

The movements generally required at workshop are :
Construction Period maintenance activity cycle
• From the stabling area (coaches) to the coach integration track

• From the coach integration track to the static test track
• From the static test track to the trial track
• From the trial track to the stabling area {HST)
• From the stabling area to the facilities for retrofitting and maintenance during testing and
commissioning runs
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-01 workshop specifications P AGE 22/40

Workshop maintenance cycle (activity 5}
• From the dislassembly track line to static test tracks

• From the static test track to the trial track (dynamic test)
As explained in chapter 5.4.2, in the model dis/assembly track and coachs integration
track are the same in order to optimize maintenance system .
Req 17
I[ The Consortium shall propose a workshop track layout that allows a smooth classical running
cycle for HST at workshop.

7. 1. 2 ROAD VEHICLES MOVEMENTS
Req 18
ll The Consortium shall propose for each workshop, a road layout that allows smooth and safe
movements .
In particular the following requirements shall be taken in account:
• Road layout shall be designed such as to limit the need to cross tracks in normal maintenance
and operating activities .
• Appropriate accesses shall be provided for emergency and heavy delivery vehicles, all entries
and exits, including all deliveries by service vehicles, will be routed through entrance gate(s) . A
9m-wide zone around the depot location boundary allows for the vehicles (emergency and
delivery) to go around the site. Road access shall be provided almost all around all buildings.
Space is reserved at the extremities of the service roads to allow U-turns. Visitors and
administrative personnel will be directed to the administration area and the dedicated car park
after checking , identification and registration. Adequate parking space for cars and two wheeled
vehicles shall be provided for both staff and visitors . These road vehicle movements will be as
much as possible independent of train traffic .
• Car parking areas shall be provided for the depot workers. The size shall be defined by the
Consortium taking account of the operating and maintenance organization and the small layout.
lt may be an elevated building. If not, all places shall be sheltered from the sun. The parking
facility shall provide places for visitors.
7.1 .3 PEDESTRIAN MOVEMENTS
Req 19
11: The Consortium shall propose for each workshop , a pedestrian way layout that allows smooth
and safe movements.
In particular in every area of the workshop, adequate access and pedestrian footpaths
shall be designed to minimize walking distances, and to provide safe personnel
movements. All potential dangerous spots shall be clear of obstruction and adequately
marked by warning signs, in particular any intersection between the road and tracks.
7.2 Workshop areas specifications
Although the building size, layout and organization are based on the Rolling Stock technologies.
The workshop buildings shall be laid out in a manner that maximizes not only land utilizations but
also productivity. This layout shall take into account, at the very least, the following specialty
functions:

In addition, the bogie shop shall accommodate bogies that may be under repair and inspection for
additional HST not currently assigned to the maintenance activity 5 facilities , but were exchanged
during maintenance activity 4 and shipped I transferred to the heavy maintenance facility for
overhaul.
The optimal layout of these shops within the facility typically results in a procedural flow that shall
take the shape of a "plus", where components and car-bodies are distributed from the
assembly/entrance shop to the relevant specialty shops, and are returned for reassembly.
4 5
,.·-:.:·.
Req 20
1: The Consortium shall provide adapted and well sized workshop able to maximized land
utilizations and maintenance productivity.
Each area is detailed bellow.
7. 2. 1 ENTRANCE!ASSEMBL Y SHOP
In this area it shall be possible to disassemble the HST (coach by coach) and remove all
bogies (that shall be exchanged with dummy bogies).
The real bogies shall be moved aside on a transfer table (for example) and sent to the
bogie shop, or stored if there is no work to be carried out on them . The track shall be
\ ... equipped with a maintenance pit (in order to allow bogie decoupling) and an overhead
travel crane (if required by the RSK technology).
When necessary, it shall be possible to replace main components , such as transformers

or traction motors in this area.
Req 21
lE. The Consortium shall provide enough and well sized facilities able to realize complete RSK
disassembly I assembly (car by car and bogies disassembly).
7.2.2 CAR-BODY SHOP

\'I '(J lfh ,
This shop shall at least include the following functional space ( This >l i s¥'"l:':~1i\ '~o ve
depending on the RSK technology: · :;:;
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-01 workshop specification s PAGE 25/40

WORKSHOP SPECIFICAT IONS
Body repairs
0
The main work to be done at this area involves repairing miscellaneous impacts on the
body panels. In fact the cutting , grinding and welding operations have to be carried out in
a specific facility which shall provide:
• Protection of other areas of the shop against noise, smoke and dust pollution,
• Inside equipment to remove smoke and dust at the point of emission , together with ventilation of
the whole facility and associated noise reduction systems.
Sheet metal shop
Generally this shop shall include the following main working facilities (this list can evolve
depending on RSK technology):
• Plate shearing machine,

• Rolling machine,
• Nibbling machine,
• Bending machine,
• Flame type cutting -off machine ,
• Welding posts ,
• Sound proof cabin for sheet metal work,
• Abrasive blasting cabin ,
• Individual welding smoke evacuation system.
Body work stations
Body inspections are performed at these stations. Thus access working platforms at
coach platform level shall be available in this area . These access platforms shall be
designed to minimize time loss during work and handling. In order to work on all parts of
the body, mobile access shall be provided .
Moreover these stations shall be equipped with air, water and electricity supplies , with
storage capacity and individual work stations.
Req 22
7.
I include the followings areas (this list can evolve ; depending on the
'cl
This shop shall be equipped with high pressure washing equipments and water
conservation system . The whole shop shall be heated to at least 20 °C, and ventilation to
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-01 workshop specification s PAG E 26/40

comply with the requirements of KSA regulations. Mobile platforms able to move along the
bodies and to the extremity for preparation work shall be provided .
Ref : HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-01 workshop specifications PAGE 27/40

This shop shall be able to perform the following main works:

0
Interior:
• Cleaning and washing,
Exterior:
• Under body washing ,

• Under frame washing ,
• Body extremity washing .
Blasting shop
This shop shall be equipped with a blast ball conservation system . Ventilation shall
comply with the requirements of KSA regulations . Mobile platforms able to move along the
bodies, to the extremity and on the top roof for preparation work shall be provided .
This shop shall be able to perform the following main works :
Exterior:
• Under body blasting,

• Under frame blasting,
• Body extremity blasting.
External preparation and interior painting shop
The whole shop shall be heated to at least 20°C, and ventilation to comply with the
requirements of KSA regulations . Mobile platforms able to move along the bodies, to the
extremity and on the top roof for preparation work shall be provided.
This shop shall be able to perform the following main works :
Interior:
• Painting preparation ,
• Painting (water soluble paint),
• Drying. __

This facility shall enable the quick painting of the train. Coaches shall remain in the tunnel
until the paint is touch-dry, and full drying is then completed in the preparation shop.
Req 23
Ill: The Consortium shall provide enough and well sized facilities able to real ize RSK car-body pre-
treatment & painting activities.
,~... .... ,

7. 2. 4 HEAVY COMPONENTS SHOPS
This shop shall at least include the followings areas (this list can evolve depending on the
RSK technology):
• Main transformer shop ,

• Power block shop,
• Pantograph and roof apparatus,
• Auxiliary motor shop,
• Traction motor shop,
• Gangway shop,
• Coupler/buffer shop,
• Motor reduction unit and transmission shop,
• Suspension shop,
• Oil damper shop,
• Brake unit shop (part of pneumatic shop),
• Air compressor shop (part of pneumatic shop),
• Brake panel/dryer shop (part of pneumatic shop),
• Door shop (part of pneumatic shop),
• Dummy bogie storage area (part of bogie shop),
• Bogie storage area (part of bogie shop),
• Bogie dis/assembly shop (part of bogie shop),
• Bogie repair shop (part of bogie shop),
• Wheel-set storage area (part of bogie shop),
• Wheel-set dis/assembly shop (part of bogie shop),
• Bearing laboratory shop (part of bog ie shop),
• Electric/Electronic shop,
• Common parts cleaning shop,
• Common parts painting shop,
• Automatic warehouse.
Req 24
I The Consortium shall provide enough and well sized facilities able to realize overhaul on RSK
heavy components.
7. 2.5 LiGHTCOfVfPON NTS SHOP

/ . ·' lO ,,,,.,'I,,,,
V. v , ·l J I rj I JrJ ' ' //
T, ip'~h6p shall·'a,t"l'~ t include the fo llowings areas (this list can evolve; depending on the
Wte hnology):_ ~P \

Car fittings for passenger parts of the coaches represent very many components. To
minimize coach immobilization time and facilitate handling and storage of the parts before
repairing, they shall be removed and placed on specific trolleys.
• Seat shop,
• Polyester shop,
• Carpentry shop,
• Floor cover shop.
Facilities for easy storage and cutting of the required carpets shall be provided .
• Air conditioning shop,

• Cable/wire shop,
• Battery shop.
Req 25
11 The Consortium shall provide enough and well sized facilities able to realize overhaul on RSK
light components.
7.2.6 TESTTRACKS
• Static (Static test track indoors),

This track shall allow static tests after a HST (re)assembly.
• Dynamic (trial track).
Req 26
lE The Consortium shall provide enough and well sized tests tracks , able to perform all static and
dynamics test needed by his RSK technology and heavy maintenance.
7.2. 7 STORE
Small RSK spare parts, equipment, fluids tanks , worker tools etc shall be store in a
dedicated building. The access doors to the storage shall allow free passage for a forklift
truck.
This room will be used for storing all spare parts, devices and tools . The access doors will have
enough space to allow a delivery lorry to partially enter the store. Moreover the other access doors
to the storage will allow free passage for a forklift truck. This storage will be equipped with work
preparation tables.
A specific part of the main store will be equipped with storage shelving and cupboards for tools.
7.2.8 WASTE COLLECTION ROOM

The access doors to this room shall allow free passage for a forklift truck. The waste
n
collection room contains several containers. Segregated containers shall be provided for a
minimum of paper, metal , plastic, domestic, oil, battery and other materials ...
Req 28
I' The Consortium shall provide enough and well sized buildings and areas in order to collect
miscellaneous wastes,
11: These buildings shall be designed in accordance with the applicable KSA law and regulations
regarding the waste to be stored in this room.
7.2.9 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SOCIAL BUILDINGS
Maintenance offices and premises are dedicated to the maintenance staff. They shall be
preferably located on the ground floor close to the maintenance areas.
In addition, amenities for maintenance staff (locker-rooms and changing rooms including
showers) shall be provided. These amenities are generally located on the ground floor.
Req 29
111: The Consortium shall provide enough and well sized administrative and social buildings in
accordance with its' maintenance system.
7.2.10 EMERGENCY VEHICLES WORKSHOP
This area allows to stable and maintain emergency vehicles as re-railing vehicle .
For further information , see chapter 8.1.9.
Req 30
11: The Consortium shall provide a sufficient number of emergency vehicles and well sized
workshop in accordance with the Consortium's maintenance system.
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-0 1 workshop specifications PAGE 32140

8. WORKSHOP MAIN EQUIPMENT
Req 31
it: The Consortium is responsible to determine the type and the number of equipment needed for
each maintenance activities,
it: The Consortium shall provide the totality of maintenance equipment and tools needed for each
maintenance activities .
This chapter describes some sample of equipment expected to be able to perform

workshop maintenance activities (Site type 5). The final choice of the maintenance
equipment is left to the discretion of the Consortium .
8. 1. 1 TURNTABLE FOR BOGIE AND FOR WHEEL -SET
·•·.·. · ,
These turntables shall be used for the transfer of bogies (or wheel-sets) from one track to
another for repair and overhaul and shall be mounted in a concrete pit. The top of the
turntable shall be flush with the workshop floor so as not to hinder trolley motion.
Moreover the rotary movement is generally powered electrically.
Req 32
il£ The Consortium shall provide adapted equipment able to transfer bogies and wheel-sets at
workshop.
8. 1.2 BOGIE WASHING MACHINE
The washing machine shall be designed for washing bogies and miscellaneous
mechanical assemblies (axles , bogie frames, etc). This machine shall be suitable for
washing traction motors with water.
Req 33
it: The Consortium shall provide adapted equipment able to wash RSK bogies and wheel-sets at
workshop, in order to make bogie maintenance activities easier.
8.1.3 PRESS FOR FITTING AND REMOVAL
This equipment shall be designed for fitting and removing wheels , hubs, brake discs,
transmission components and wheel centers which have been force-fitted on RSK shafts-
axles. These operations are generally performed at ambient temperature .
The machine shall be capable of mounting and dismantling all equipment fitted onto the
axle.
Req 34
The Consortium shall provide adapted equipment able to mount and dismafltl~ ··all , ~quipmE? t
fitted onto the axle . ·. ·;: "' • U'
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-0 1 workshop specificati ons PAGE 33140

8. 1.4 VERTICAL HUB BORING MACHINE
Wear to rolling stock wheel running tables make it necessary to replace these wheels in
accordance with set criteria . Replacement of these wheels entails removal operations and
precise machining of the mounting surfaces between the wheels and the axle case .
The vertical hub boring machine shall enable the precise machining of these surfaces.
Req 35
11: The Consortium shall provide adapted equipment able to make precise machining of the
mounting surfaces between the wheels and the axle case .
8. 1. 5 WHEEL LA THE
This lathe has the same function as the lathe in pit equipment described in HHR-S mall
Depot Specifications (except that this equipment can only re-profile a single wheel-set
ungrouped from bogie) . The lathe shall be a fully automatic machine which shall conform :;:>:·.
to the highest levels of accuracy.
The equipment shall be of a heavy duty type , suitable for re-profil ing the treads and
flanges of wheels.
Req 36
lE The Consortium shall provide adapted equipment able to make profile machining of the wheels
and flanges and the mounting surfaces between the wheels and the axle case .
8.1 .6 BOGIE AND WHEEL- SET ELEVATOR
The bogie and wheel-set elevator is designed to lift a bogie assembly (motor or carrier) to
facilitate assembly and disassembly of component sub-assemblies .
Req 37
lE The Consortium shall provide adapted equipment able to lift a bogie , in order to make bogie
8. 1. 7 BEARING EX TRA CTOR
The extractor is designed to extract bearings force fitted on Rolling Stock axle casings . In
order to provide the operator with well working conditions (bearing height approximately
one metre from the ground), the extractor shall be mounted in front of an axle lifting unit. A
coat of oil shall be pumped between the inner race of the bearing and .the axle shaft to
facilitate ext :acttrf.Q-:- · , .
, .·. JO J '"'1-1 , '·.
1. (•
v '' '
/ /) v • ')o;,\r.J Jrj /J rJ ,
1
'ry ·.
The a
:::)
li?' ~.te·
0
ator sh'al) ~yv. we I to enable bearing extraction from both sides of the axle .
:- 1- . . . \
.... .....t.fl I
Ref: HHR-LO- DW-403 -SYS-002-01 works hop speci fi cations PAGE 34/40
8.1 .8 WHEEL-SET INSPECTION STATION
This equipment shall be designed to check the internal structure of the wheel-set, and in
particular to search for internal, invisible cracks. This check is conducted using magnetic
particle inspection or ultrasound.
Req 39
I The Consortium shall provide adapted equipment able to inspect RSK wheel-sets internal
structure.
8.1.9 R E-RAILING VEHICLE
This equipment is used on line in of case HST accident (derailing). This vehicle shall be
used to carry personnel and equipment at site.
This vehicle shall at least be able to:

·"".·: :·
• Transport all re-railing equipment needed (according to RSK technology),
• Provide energy needed for re-railing operations,
• Provide social premises to re-railing staff.
The Consortium shall provide an adapted re-railing vehicle able to perform re-railing operations.
~
~
Q I, '
I
I
.S'
Ref : HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002-01 workshop specifications P AGE 35140

0
9. TESTING
9.1 Facilities tests
Two types of tests shall be performed for the facilities.
9. 1.1 ACCEPTANCE TESTS
Theses tests consist in checking the compliance of the facilities with the miscellaneous
layouts and characteristics made by the Consortium. These checks shall at least include:
Facilities dimensions,
Facilities characteristics
C'.
I<~
Facilities admissible loads,
Supply networks (air, water, electric ... ),
Etc .. .
9. 1.2 ON-SITE INTEGRA TION TESTS
All areas shall be tested with the RSK (or rolling stock component) in order to check
Workshop good operations.
9.2 Heavy equipment tests
For heavy equipment the followings test shall be performed .
9.2.1 FACTORY TESTS
The Consortium shall perform comprehensive tests to demonstrate compliance with the
safety, performance criteria , the standards and operating conditions.
During manufacturing and prior to shipment, verifications and checks shall be ca rried out
in order to ensure that the supply is in accordance with the technical specification and with
the approved design documents.
All quality checks shall be carried out, as required , during manufacture on the
Consortium's re_rtlJee,~). eration of safety and protection devices shal l also be checked .
.h v~·~ --A
/ / .•;:.' - -,:)!r;Jd ,,, ~~~~
' ,.,. ~ Jl~ J'
• Pnor to §S~r:flbly
._J _...
''~.,...~
~
.
• + ..-, I
(
- vl/l '
A compl 1tel-and thorou h chec (dimensional and quality) of all equipment parts shall be
carried o t~n~~ Con.§~~i~f' premises.
\ /
~'·
'
..... - ~- _,.
(.
,Jr-. ... ,-.;. .1.
• After asse ~ "(("
)
The entire supply shall be inspected at the Consortium's premises before shipment to the
site by government or any person duly authorized by him. After completion of manufacture
of items or sub-assemblies, and following completion of the consortium's own tests and
inspection, the government shall be invited to witness such tests.
If the results of the factory tests are successful, a "FAT" (Factory Acceptance Test)
certificate shall be signed by the Consortium and government.
9. 2.2 ON-SITE INTEGRATION TESTS
After delivery and assembly of the equipment, operating tests shall be carried out in the
presence of Consortium's representative to check that equipment design makes it suitable
to fulfil the scheduled functions .
The purpose of the tests is to record and acknowledge that the equipment is capable of
performing regular service under different operating conditions.
The Consortium shall submit for approval at least two months before co mmencing
commiSSioning detailed commissioning procedures, method statements and
commissioning check sheets. Through the submitted procedures, the equipment
performances shall be justified to meet the expected operations requirements .
The commissioning tests shall be undertaken in the presence of the government and the
Consortium, and any defects or deviations from the expected requirements or other
agreed parameter shall be adjust by the Consortium .

n
APPENDIX
Appendix 1: RSK MAINTENANCE AREA RESERVATION

Appendix 2: 125 KPLA YOUT PROPOSAL
Ref: HHR-LO- DW-403-SYS-002-01 workshop specifications PAGE 38/40

Wl. ~HOP SPECIFICATIONS
APPENDIX N°1: RSK MAINTENANCE SPACE RESERVATION
HJdftoh Conuphlol Model
I ...,.... ,.....
i I
I
I
r':.h\~h. Conceptu;al •odel
~ AIOfM JS ..I
tn ~P Cont<plu ol l'od<l
I
"-PIII"b iSb
- - All dimensions are in meters
-- ·---
r~ , ...._.~w.. ..........
ID"8(Y ~
,_,,
.......-
-·........
, . 4(1&
"""
.....-u
SPH2•1CA"11:Jot
.....,.,
TIU
_..
-
H.\AAMIII>I Hl<lH SPEED RAIL.......V
S<rwl Depot and Wor1cshop

Soa<eR~
-·
. . . . . . . . . .Uo(_o.~~
" ._..... .... t llUUit
-~ A3
.....:. . u.• u..uun Cl• t.UUAttOIII ....
~
··-
~
~- .... ....
~ w~
~~--if\
.j.
--
- -
·~ AXao.oJW
'-""'""' ~~~':=:=S.==' . HHR-I.().()W..J() 1.001
,,C1
'AGE39/40
..J
<1:
(/)
0 !':. ...
a. ~.;
~
a.
1-
:J
0
5
a.
~
I()
N
N
0
z
X
0
z
w
0..
0..
<(
l.
.;.:
a:"
0:}~~ 1 .bgb.:¥1 Cic U:.JI ciw.w gbl
_......__ _ SAUD I RAILWAYS ORGAN IZAT ION

PHASE 2
SMALL DEPOT SPECIFICATIONS
'_;. ...
J--
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
A1 09/04/2009 First Issue F.LACROIX
A2 10/04/2009 Revision after checker's comments F.LACROIX
A3 14/04/2009 Revision after checker's and G.G comments F.LACROIX
A4 20/04/2009 Revision after validation comments F.LACROIX

B1 20/05/2009 Revision after Government comme nts F.LACROIX
B2 02/06/2009 Revision after final workshop F.LACROIX
C1 29/06/2009 Final RFP F.LACROIX
01 11/09/2009 Revision after Linklaters's comments F.LACROIX
.
PREPARED BY F.LACROIX 11//09/2009
~
C HECKED BY H.FAURE 11//09/2009 ~...: .. -a;;.
_.:;-=---.- .~
VALIDATED BY K.MEYER 11//09/2009
-~
APPROVED BY C.SCHANG 11//09/2009 ~__.....;;;-
~ 7"
PAGE 2/43
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. FOREWORD ................................................................................................................................................... 6
2. GLOSSARY ....................•............................................•....................................................................... :.......... 7
2.1 ABBREVIATIONS .. .... ........ ..... .. ......................... ........... ..... ... ...... ... .... .... ..... ...... .. .............. ........ ... ............. ..... .... .. 7
3.1 TSI STANDARDS ..... .. ... ... ....... .... .. .. .................... ........... .. .... .. .. .. ....... ..... .. .. .... .. ...... ..... ... .... ............ ....... .. ... ..... ... 8
4. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................ 9
5. ROLLING STOCK PROPOSED MAINTENANCE ORGANIZATION .................................................. 10
5.1 RSK MAINTENANCE PLAN ........ ...... ..... ... ..... .... ... ....... .. .. ... ......... ... .... ...... ... ....... ....... ... ..... ........................ ... .... 10
5. 1. 1 Mobilization period ................ ......... ..... .... ....... .. ... .. .... ... ..... ..... ... ..... ...... .. .. ....... ........ .............. .. ... ... ... .... ... 10
5.1.2 Operating period. ......... ................. .. .. .. .... .. .. .. ..... ......... .. ....... ... ... .... ....... .. .............. .... .......... .. .... .... .. ... ... ... 10
5.2DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS ........................ ... ..................... .. ......... ... ...... .. ....... ... ..... .................. ..... ....... ............... .. 10
5.3RESERVED MAINTENANCE LOCATION .. ...... ...... ......... ... ....... ... ... .... .. .... ... ... ........ ...... ............. ....... ... .. .... ... ........ 11
5.3.1 Makkah ...... ...... .......... .. ... ............... .. .... ........ .. ..... .... ......... .... ...... .. ....... ........ ... ....... .... .. .... .. ..... ..... .. ..... .... .. 11
5.3.2 Madinah .. ..... ......... .. ........ ...... ... .. ....... ... ..... ........ .... .. ... ........... ... .... ... .. ... .............. .... ..... ..... .. .. .. ... ............ ... . 11
5.3.3 125KP ....... ................. .... .. .... ..................... .. ... ..... .. ... .... .... .... ..... .. ... .. .. ... ...... .. ... ................. ....... ...... ... ....... 11
5.4SMALL DEPOT SIZING .... ... ... ..... ..... .. .................. ....... .. .. .. .... ... .. .... ...... .. ...... ... ............ .. .. .... ..... ... ....... .... ... .. ...... 12
5.4.1 Maintenance organization proposal .. ... ... .... ... .. ..... ... .... .. .. ...... .. ..... ... ... .. ....................... ... ..... .......... ...... 12
5.4.2 Small depot layouts proposal ...... ............... ....... ... .. .. ....... ... ............. .. ... .. ........ .... .. ..... .. ... ............... ... ..... 13
6. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................... 14
6.1 ENVIRONMENT ........ .. .. .... .... .. ................ ............. .. ... .. .. .. .... ................. ............. ..... ... ..... ..... .... ................. .. ........ 14
6.2LIGHTING .. ..... .. ..... .. .... .... .... ............. ....... .... ..... .... ......... ............. .. .. .. .. ........ ..... ..... ... ..... ............. ....................... 14
6.3VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING ...... .. .... ......... .. ....... ... .. ........ .. ......... .. ...... ... .. .......... ..... ... ....... .... ...... ... ... 15
6.3. 1 Ventilation. .. ..... .... .... .. .. ..... ...... .... ....... .... ............ ..................... ..... ..... ........... ..... ........... ... ... .... ......... .... ..... . 15
6.3.2 Air-conditioning ....................... .... .... ............. ... ..... .. ... ............ ......... .. ... ... ... ... ................. ...... ......... .. .... ...... 15
6.3.3 Smoke exhaust ............. ... ....... .... ... .. ................ ....... ... .... .... ......... ........ .. .. ..... .... ........... ... .......................... 15
6.4FIRE PROTECTION ... .. .... .... ... .. ......... ... ... ....... ...... .......... .................... .. ... .. .. ........ ..... ..... ..... ... ..... ....................... 15
6.5SIGNALLING ......... .. ..... ....... .. ...... ... ...... ... ..................... ........... .. .............. ... ..... .. .... ...... .. ..... .... ...... .. ... .. .... .... ...... 16
6.6WATER SUPPLY-SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE ...... .. ..... ...... ... .... .... .......... ... ........ ........ ..... .. .. ..... ...... ... .. .. ............ 16
6.7COMMUNICATION ... ............... .... ......... ................. .. .... .. .......... .......... :.. ... ... ......... .. ..... .. ..... ............ ........ .. ... ....... 17
6.8BUILDINGS REQUIREMENTS ......... .. .... .. .. .. .......... .... ......... ... ... ... ....... ..... .......... ... .... ... ......... ...... .............. .......... 17
6.90THERS REQUIREMENTS .......... ......... .. ...... ....................... .. .... ........ ....... .. ...... ..... ... .. ......... ... .............. .. ... .. .... .. 18
HHI~J;~;i'm!l ~:1+::-. :s.~~;,t,::

6.9. 6 Environmental considerations .. ............. .. .. .. ....... ........ .... .... ... ..... ..... ... .... .. ............... ..... ...................... ~ 19 't- 1
==-~ , ·- ~~I' I
7. SMALL DEPOT AREAS SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... \ ..... ~H .. ......._2 .
~. ~ ~O~~M;~~V=~~~~:MENTS~ITHIN THE DEP~T <,,' .:"f...

1¥-
.r ......,('...... ., " .
J--
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 -D1 Small Depot specification s PAGE 3/43
7. 1. 2 Road vehicles movements.. .. ... ...... ...... ........... ... .. .... ....... ................. .. .. ....... ... ..... ................. .... ..... ... .. .... 22
7.1.3 Pedestrian movements............................ .. ...... ................ .. ......... .. ........... .... ... ..... .. .. .. ........................... . 22
7.2SITE TYPE 1 & 2 AREAS SPECIFICATIONS ...... ... .. .. .... .. ... .... .................. .... .. .. ..... .. .. .. .. ............. .. ... .. ... .. .. ........... 22
7.2.1 Washing machine area .. .. .. .. .. ...... .. ............ .. ... ..... ................... .. ....... ........ ..... ........... ....... ..... ... .. .. ....... .. ... 22
7. 2. 2 Wheel-set monitoring system area .......... .. ... ... .. ... ..... .. .. .. .. ...... .. ............ .. .. ...... ............ .. .. ............... .... .. 23
7.2.3 Day and overnight stabling area ............ .... .... ....... ......... ... ..... ........... .. .............. .... ............... .............. 23
7.3SITE TYPE 3 AREAS SPECIFICATIONS .......... .. ... .. ..... .... .. ........ ..... ..... .. ..... ... ..... ............. .. ..... .. ... ...... .. ... ........... . 25
7.4SITE TYPE 4 AREAS SPECIFICATIONS ........ .... ...... .... ........... .. ...... .. ... .. ... .. ... ..... ............. ... .. ... ... .. ..... .... .. .. .. .. .... . 27
7.4.1 Inspection tracks .. ........... ......... ... .. ...... ............. ..... ..... .. ..... .. ........ ..... ..... ........ ..... ........ .... ... .. ... ... ..... .... ..... 27
7.4.2 Heavy cleaning track ...... .......... ..... .... ... ... .. ............. ... ................ .. .................. ... .. ... ......... .. .. ...... ....... ... .... 28
7.4.3 Heavy repair track ....... .... .... ... ... ... .... ...... .... .... ........ ...... .. ... .......... .... .. ....... ..... ... .. ........ ......... .. .. .... ... ....... .. 30
7.4.4 Simultaneous lifting track ........... .......... .......... ..... ... ... ........... .... ..... ... ..... .... ......... ... ....... .......... .. ... .... ..... .. 30
7.4.5 Wheel-set ultrasound inspection device (option) .................. ....... .. .... ............. ... ..................... .. ....... .. . 30
7.4.6 Lathe on pit area ................ .................... .............. .. ................. ... ........ .. .. .. ......... ................. ... .. .. .. ........ ... 30
7.4. 7 BOGIE I wheel-set drop table area .. .. ........ ... ... .. ... ....... ...... .. ........... .. ... ..... ... .. .. .. .. ...... ............ ............ . 31
7.4.8 Small workshops .. ... .. ...................... ......... .............. .. ... .. .. ... ................ .. .................. .. .... ......... ... .. ... ......... . 31
7.4.9 Store ... ........ ... ..... ... ... .. ... .......... ... ....... ....... ....... .... ........ .. .. .. ... ..... ....... ...... ........ .... ... ... .. ..... .. ... ............. ... ..... 32
7.4.10Waste collection room .... .. ............ .. .... ... .. ........ ............................ .. ........... ..... .......... ........ ....................... 32
7.4.11 Administrative and social buildings ..... ....... .... .. ... .. ... .. ... .... ... .... .... .. ... .. ...... .. .... .. ............... ... .. ... .. .... .. .... 32
7.4.12Diesel engine workshop ... ...... .. .... .... .. ............ .... .. ..... ..... ..... ... .................. ......... .. .... ....... ....... .. ........ .. .... . 32
8. SMALL DEPOT MAIN HEAVY EQUIPM ENT .......................................................................................... 33
8.1 SITE TYPE 1 & 2 .......... ...... .... ..... .. .. ......... ... ................ .... .................. ........ ..... .. .... ..... .... ... .......... ... ..... ....... .. ..... 33
8.1.1 HST washing machine ...... ...... .. ....... .... ... .... .. ...... ... ................ ............. ........ .. .............. ....... .. .. .. ............ 33
8.1.2 Toilet emptying I filling vehicle .. ...... .. ... .......... ... .. . .. .. .. .. .. ...... ................. .. .. ....... ...... .. ... ..... ............. .. .... 33
8. 1. 3 wheel-set monitoring system ...... .. .... ...... ......... .... .. ...... ..... ..... .... .... ... ...... .. . ... ....... ... ......... .. .. ....... .. ..... .. 33
8.2SITE TYPE 3 ..... ... ........................... ...... ... ..... .......... ... .. ...... ... ... .. ..... .. ....... ..... ...... .... ............. .. .. ... .. ... ...... ... ...... .. 34
8. 2. 1 Toilet automatic filling and emptying ...... ... .. .. .. ...... .. ........ .... .. .. ... .. ............ .. ............ .. .. .......................... 34
8. 2. 2 Sand and water filling .... .. ............. ................... .. .. .... ... ... ............. .... ....... .. ........... .... ................... ... .. ... .. .. 34
8.3SITE TYPE 4 .... ... .... .............. ..... ...... .... ........ ... .. .... .... ...... ..... ..... ... ..... ... ... .. .. ...... .. ........ .. .. ... .... .. ..... .... .... ... ....... .. 34
8.3.1 Simultaneous lifting jacks.. ..... .. .. .... .. ..... ....................... ............. ... ... ....... .................. .. ..... ... ....... ........ .... 34
8.3.2 Drop table ... ............. ... ...... ... .. .. .......... ...... .. ... .... ..... ... ................. ..... .... ...... ... ......... ... .. .. ................ ......... ... . 35
8.3.3 lathe on pit...................... ..... ... .. .. ..... ... ..... ... ...... .... .. ..... .. ............ ... ..... ....... ... ......... ..... .... ....... ... ........... ..... . 35
8.3.4 Facilities to exchange components ...... .. .. .... .. .... .. .. ...... .... .... .. .. .... .... .. ... .. ......... .. .......... ....... ... .. ... .. .... ... 36
8.3.5 Emergency diesel locomotive ............ .... .. ... ........ .. .. .. ... .... ... ......... .. ......................... ...... ...... ................. 36
9. TESTING ........................................................................................................................................................ 37
9.1 FACILITIES TESTS .......... ....... ... .. ... ....... ... .... ...... ... ... .......... ... .. ... ..... ... ... ..... ... ... ........ .. ... ... ... .... ..... ..... ........ .. ...... 37
9. 1.1 Acceptance tests .................. .. .... .......... ........... ... .. .. ... ....... ..... .... .... ... ... ... .. ... .. ..... ... .. ... .. .. ... ..................... 37
9.1.2 On-Site Integration tests .. ........ .... .... .... .. .. .... .... .. .. ... ... .......... ... .......... .. ... ... .. .................. .. ......... .. ..... .. .. .. 37
9.2HEAVY EQUIPMENT TESTS ........ .... ... .... ...... ... .... .. ......... .. .. ... ..... ... ...... ... ... .. ..... ... ..... ... ................. ..... .. .. ... ... .... .. 37
9. 2. 1 Factory Tests ....................... .. ...... ..... ... .... ....... ... ... .. ...... .. .. ... . .. ...... ... ..... ... ... .. ........ .. .................. .. ..... ...... 37
9. 2. 2 On-Site integration Tests ........... ........ ................... .. ....... .. ... ..... .. ... .. ... .. ...... ... ........ .. ...................... .. .. .... 38
APPENDIX .................... ... ........... ............. .......... .................. ................... .............. .. .... ............... ... ........... ............. 39
APPENDIX W1 : RSK MAINTENANCE SPACE RESERVATION ............ ..... .. .. .... ...... ..... .................. ......... . 40
APPENDI X N°2: MAKKAH LAYOUT PROPOSAL. .... ....... .. .. ...... ..... . ...... ............... .... .. .. .... 41
APPENDI X W3 : 125 KP LAYOUT PROPOSAL ..... ..... ... .. .. .. ... ..... ... .. ................ ... .. ... .... .... ... ..... .. .................. .. .... . 42
APPENDI X W4 : MEDINAH LAYOUT PROPOSAL .. .. .. .. ....... .. ... .. ... .. .. .. .. ...... .. .. .... .. ... ...... ..... .. ..... ..... ..... 43
P AGE 4/43
PROJECT REFERENCES

1 HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance
2 HHR-LO-RS-403-SYS-001 Rolling Stock specifications

3 HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 Small Depot specifications
4 HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 RAMS Assurance Requiremen ts
8 HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-002 General Specifications - Section 2: Glossary
Cl imate and Weather in KSA
10 Ministry Of Interior - Kingdom Of Saudi Arabia -
Social Rules
11 HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-005 Transmission Network Specification
12 HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-006 LAN I WAN I WiFi Specification
13 HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-007 Railway Telecommunication Specification
14 HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-008 Admin istrative Telecommun ication Specification
15 HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-009 CCTV Specification
16 HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-01 0 Passenqer Information System
18 HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-012 BuildinQ Security Specification
19 HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-013 Master Clock System
20 HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-015 Telecommun ication Supervision Center
Specification
21 HHR-LO-SI-1403-INE-001 Interlocking and main line signalin_g_
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 -01 Small Depot specifications P AGE 5/43

1. FOREWORD
Due to the close relationship between RSK maintenance and small depot specifications,
th is document shall be read in conjunction with the document HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001
Rolling Stock Maintenance.
As there are several kinds of HST maintenance organization in the world, this document
describes a group of basic maintenance sites (type 1, 2, 3 & 4 as defined in the document
HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance) and not a typical maintenance
area , such as "depot".
The Consortium is responsible to optimize the designs and distribute these basic
maintenance sites to the various maintenance locations, all in accordance with the
relevant RSK techno logy and the following document requirements: (N .B. Three (3)
maintenance locations are currently reserved) , ()

Req 01
11. The Consortium shall be responsible for distributing the basic maintenance site type 1, 2, 3 & 4
at the maintenance locations available. The distribution of these basic sites shall provide a RSK
maintenance system able to achieve the requ irements described in the reference documents
listed above.
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 -01 Small Depot specifications PAGE 6/43

2. GLOSSARY
Definitions and abbreviations used in this document are defined in the document HHR-LO-CT -802-
SYS-002 General Specifications - Section 2: Glossary.
2.1 Abbreviations
• TSI RSK HS: see chapter 3.1

• TSIInfra HS: see chapter 3.1
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 -0 1 Small Depot specifications PAGE 7/43


Ministry of Interior- Kingdom of Saudi Arabia -Social Rules.
Moreover Rolling Stock Maintenance shall be based on European standards (or EOS) and the
following standards shall be respected in the small depot design and construction :
3.1 TSI Standards
• TSI RSK HS: Concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating to the 'rolling
stock' sub-system of the trans-European high-speed rail system, 21 February 2008,
• TSI Infra HS: Concerning a technical specification for interoperability relating to the
'infrastructure' sub-system of the trans-European high-speed ra il system , 20 December 2007.
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001-01 Small Depot specifications PAGE 8/43

(.
4. INTRODUCTION
The purpose of the small depot facilities is to :

• Ensure that HST can be stored, cleaned, inspected , serviced , maintained , repaired (according
to the document HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance, the small depot shall
be able to perform activities on site type 1, 2, 3 & 4) and returned into service as necessary to
meet fleet availability requirements .
• Provide a safe and efficient working environment for staff,
• Minimize maintenance operating costs and downtime for HST.
Req 02
1: The Consortium shall be responsible for all aspects of the small depot, including system-wide
reliability, availability, maintainability, safety and durability; according to the Operating
Requirements.
Minimum requirements about reliability , availability, maintainability, safety and durability

are defined in the documents :
• HHR-LO-MA-402-SYS-001 RAMS Assurance Requirements,

• HHR-LO-MR-402 -SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance.
Moreover Operating Requirements are described in the documents :
The general requirements regarding the maintenance plan and general policy of
maintenance for Rolling Stock are described in the document HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001
Rolling Stock Maintenance .
Req 03
I: The Consortium shall design the small depot in order to establish su itable levels of performance
and availability for the correct maintenance of HST in the different locations .
I[ The Consortium shall equip the small depot with all equipment, tools, safety systems, materials-
handling facilities, logistics management systems , staff amenities, security systems, utilities,
drainage systems , access roads , vehicle internal circulation and parking systems , landscaping
and all other functions required to ensure that all maintenance functions are carried out.
The small depot design , construction and equipment shall be in accordance with the
document HHR-LO -MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance.

5. ROLLING STOCK PROPOSED MAINTENANCE ORGANIZATION
5.1 RSK Maintenance plan
As it is explained in the document HHR-LO-OP-202-SYS-001 Operating Requirements ,

two periods shall be taken into account in design and organization of the small depot and
workshop:
• Mobilization period
• Operating period
5. 1. 1 M OBIL/ZA T/ON PERIOD
This period takes place before the Commencement of Passenger Services and includes
the following activities:
t:.:\
'\.:.::;
• Coaches stabling before integration ,
• Coaches integration (mainly coupling),
• Train stabl ing before revenue service,
• Facilities and equipment for retrofitting,
• Facilities and equipment to allow maintenance during testing and commissioning runs.
The maintenance activities in connection with th is period are developed in the document
HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002 Workshop specifications.
5. 1.2 OPERA TING PERIOD
This period takes place at the beginning of HST operation and includes maintenances
activities on classified basic sites and of the type as described in the document HHR-LO-
MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance:
• Activities on site type 1: Day stabling,

• Activities on site type 2: Overnight stabling,
• Activities on site type 3: Quick maintenance,
• Activities on site type 4: Periodic inspection,
• Activities on site type 5: Heavy maintenance (these activities are developed in detail in the
document HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002 Workshop specifications) .
5.2 Design assumptions
The design of the small depots shall be based on the operational needs of the railway
(describ~.fo i , cl'Q~JJ~ t HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-002 Basic Service Plan), HST fleet size,
head~.:;-~~rivedjJ~g~r' 'dership forecasts , and the maintenance activities required for
-
HST rd~scribed ft) rJ. t e document HHR-LO -MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock
Mai tQ'flance). · "'~
~.... ;.
I l
..! I "f.-:.
¥
I ' - (/)
The · ·, {e!laneol:!s inp).Jt$ dsed for the small depot design are:
Lip ,")r.; .- .<I, -~.
'· " ' . ,!" /. '
~
Ref: HHR-LO- DW-403-SYS-001-01 Small Depot specifications PAGE 10/43
• Train fleet, according to the document HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-002 Basic Service Plan :

• 2022 , total fleet: approx 50 HST,
• 2042, total fleet: approx 100 HST.
• RSK in accordance with TSI RSK HS and HHR-LO-RS-403-SYS-001 Rolling Stock
specifications,
• Train length: in accordance with TSI RSK HS (2 units can be coupled),
• Car length: (depends on RSK technology),
• Train width: (depends on RSK technology),
• Axle Load : see TSI RSK HS requirements,
• Trains gauge: see TSI RSK HS requiremen ts,
• Minimum curve rad ius: see TSI RSK HS requirements.
The key objective is to achieve and maintain a high availability, reliability, safety and
comfort of all relevant equipment along with a low life cycle cost.
5.3 Reserved maintenance location
The current reserved locations are listed below.
5.3. 1 MAKKAH
The location is approximately at 6 KP close to Makkah. Moreover a dedicated track has

been reserved from the Makkah station in order to serve this area.
A land area of approximately 35 ha is currently available in order to implement

maintenance activities. A layout of the area currently reserved is provided in appendix 1.
5.3.2 MADINAH
The location is approximately at 448 KP close to Madinah.
A land area of approximately 14 ha is currently available in order to implement

maintenance activities. A layout of the area cu rrently reserved is provided in appendix 1
(this area shall be confirmed at a later stage).
5.3.3 125 KP
The location is approximately at 125 KP .
A land area of approximately 65 ha is available in order to implement maintenance

activities. A layout of the area currently reserved is provided in appendix 1...-(this-ar shall
be confirmed at a later stage). . ' · ··· ,,,.,
Id 1Jr, ., / ~
1
I '''· .~~
The various space reservations have been made in order to fe!D.P}~ct the diff~J'nt
international maintenance systems. The Consortium shall optimize ~e maintenaq e sitJ:~ ))
according to his own maintenance system. The Consortium is re p"Qnsibl for the fi,~a l 1
choice of maintenance location(s): }/''>~." .. :~'·..; "';/·~. · L-..
r.,'1'.·~~- 0
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SY S-001 -01 Small Depot specifications PAGE 11/43
• Makkah & Madinah & 125 KP,

• Makkah or Madinah or 125 KP,
• Others locations.
Req 04
11:. The Consortium shall choose the maintenance system location(s) according to their
maintenance technology and operational requirements .
5.4 Small Depot Sizing
Req 05
11: The Consortium shall calculate the depot size and distribute basic maintenance site type 1, 2, 3
& 4 (for each maintenance location) .
This calculation and distribution shall be in accordance with the RSK technology and the
following documents requirements:

Req 06
11: The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites capacity in connection with Construction
Period of approximately 30 HST, till 2012.
£ The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites capacity for an optimized operation of
approximately 50 HST fleet from 2012 to 2022 .
11: The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites capacity for a fleet extension to approximately
100 HST from 2022 to 2042 .
5.4.1 MAINTENANCE ORGANIZATION PROPOSAL
In order to develop the small depot specifications , a maintenance model organization has
been created (based on international RSK maintenance and expected fleet for phase
2012 to 2022 and 2042).
This model is for guidance only in order to make understanding the specification easier.
The Consortium shall develop and propose his own solution.
According to international RSK maintenance practices the following number of tracks are
needed (for each location):
Basic site 2012 to 2022 2042

Location
type 200m 400m 200m 400m
4 8
4 8
4 8
~ .'6
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001-01 Small Depot specifi cations PAGE 12143
Basic site 2012 to 2022 2042

Location
type 200m I 400m 200m I 400m
cleaning) I I
2 (Washing
1 1
machine)
3 (Quick
4
maintenance) I I
Basic site
Location 2012 to 2022 2042
type
1 & 2 (Stabling
and light 6 4 12 4
cleaning)
2 (Washing
1 1
machine)
3 (Quick
4 4
maintenance)
4 (Periodic
6 12
inspection)
125 KP
4 (Lathe on pit,
drop table and
1+1+1 (approx 2+2+2 (approx
wheel-set
470m-long) 470m-long)
ultrasound
monitoring)
4 (Heavy
repair, heavy
1+1+1 2+2+2
cleaning and
lifting line)
5.4.2 SMALL DEPOT LAYOUTS PROPOSAL
For example a maintenance basic site distribution is recommended in this chapter

(according to Basic Service Plan, areas available, road and rail accesses etc). However
the final choice of maintenance system location is left to the discretion of the Consortium.
In order to illustrate the maintenance organization proposal, a generic track layout for
each site is provided in appendix 2, 3 & 4.
2012 to 2022
• Activities on site type 1 & 2 are performed at each maintenance location (Makkah , Madinah &
125 KP),
• Activities on site type 3 are performed at Makkah and 125 KP maintenance location,
• Activities on site type 4 are only performed at 125 KP maintenance location , which is the
integrated maintenance area in the model.
2042
• Activities on site type 1, 2 & 3 are performed at each maintenance location,
• Activities on site type 4 are only performed at 125 KP maintenance
integrated maintenance area in the model.

6. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 Environment
Climatic conditions of the west part of Saudi Arabia are described in the document HHR-
LO-CT-602-SAU-001 General Specifications - Appendix B: Annual Climate and
Weather in KSA.
industry international standards.
The manufacturing facilities shall have full certification per ISO 9001:2000 and 15014001
standards of quality management and environmental management respectively .
Req 07
ll The Consortium shall take into consideration the harsh climatic conditions prevailing in the west
part of Saudi Arabia in his small depot facilities design and build .
6.2 Lighting
The luminescence level measured at a distance of 1.00 m above floor is indicated in the
following table:
Luminance
Area
Level
Circulation Space 150Lux
Stairs 150Lux
Stabling area 200Lux
Offices 250Lux
Meeting I Training Rooms 400Lux
Staff Rest Rooms 150Lux
Staff Mess Room/Canteen 150Lux
First Aid Room 400Lux
Staff Locker Room 150Lux
Toilets 100Lux
Internal Corridors 150Lux
Workshops (mean) 200/300Lux
Stores 150Lux
--
/, ... ur6Jo
•ir.'' • . •
..;P ,,._
--..;;
<
. r s..::J·Jf".J.J '-1,,.,..,
rjl~\
Loading Bay I Deliveries 150Lux
{
'
....V I ;'t;, (J
-"· rJ,.
.' j":/, / Witti1? ttf~..:S all depot, care shall be taken to create a pleasant and appealing quiet and
t.' ;,.. well ~1t e~v· ~ · nment. There should be as much natural light as possible within the sma ll
\~ ,,, d~ot bu1ld1 s.
6
.::..>.,_ •Jr·, ,,_,
·~ '"' ...... -<'. -~- 'I
~ Lf{ ~ I~,:'"

Lighting circuits in escape routes and operationally critical areas shall be interleaved such
that a failure of any single cable , either feeder or final circuit, will result in a maximum loss
of 50% lighting in any one area.
Lighting within staffed areas shall generally be controlled by local light switches configured
to maximize on daylight saving.
Emergency lighting in all designated escape routes and operationally critical areas shall
be easy to maintain and supplied by a central uninterruptible power system .
An emergency lighting system shall be installed throughout the small depot to cover both
occupied and unoccupied areas .
Exit signs shall be maintained on at all times and have the same battery duration as the
associated emergency lighting .
6.3 Ventilation and air-conditioning
6.3.1 VENTILATION
The ventilation in the small depot shall be provided in the working areas in accordance with
Ministry of Interior- Kingdom of Saudi Arabia - Social Rules.
6.3.2 AIR-CONDITIONING
A central air conditioning system shall be proposed in the offices, computer rooms ,
conference rooms , etc. The equipment rooms such as relay rooms and telecom exchange
room shall be provided with a special air conditioning system.
6.3.3 SMOKE EXHAUST
Smoke clearance systems shall be provided to clear smoke after a fire and are not
intended to handle high temperature smoke.
~.
Smoke control shall be by individual fireman 's control switches located at the Fire Control
\. ·. Point for each system or item of equipment to be controlled . Fireman 's control switches
shall include all control switches and status indication as required by the Fire Authority.
Provision shall be made to introduce air flow in the escape routes.
Req 08
1: The Consortium shall provide ventilation , air-conditioning and smoke exhaust systems at the
needed areas . ·
6.4 Fire protection
An automatic fire detection and alarm/public address system shall be provided ,

comprising :
•
Details about small depot fire detection requirements are provided in the document HHR-
LO-TE -403-SYS-012 Building security specification
A depot hydrant system shall be provided to produce a controlled supply of water for
fighting fires on HST. The fire hydrant is for the use of the civil defence service only.
Fire hydrants shall be implemented with a regular spacing of approximately 55m

throughout the small depot, to enable the civil defence to connect their hoses from a point
of safety within striking distance of the fire .
An automatic sprinkler system shall be provided on all sites . A gaseous fire suppression
agent using inert gas shall be provided for equipment rooms. The small depot design must
comply with the safety standards and statutory regulations.
The small depot design , engineering and use of materials should minimize the risk of fire ,
including meeting the standards set for the fire resistance duration of materials. Elements
of structures shall have appropriate fire resistance . The fire fighting system shall be
designed with sufficient fire hydrants for the small depot.
Req 09
11: The Consortium shall provide a fire protection system in order to provide a high level of fire
safety at the small depot.
6.5 S ignalling
Refer to HHR-LO-SI-403-INE-001 Interlocking and main line s ignaling.
6.6 Water supply-sewerage and drainage
The water requirement for small depot shall be estimated by the Consortium and
submitted to the government for approval.
The requirement for drinking water needs should preferably be met from the municipal
water supply.
The buildings producing sewerage are scattered all over the small depot. lt is therefore
proposed to provide independent treatment/disposal for sewage though septic tanks and
soak pits associated with a regular network for sewage disposal.
The sewerage network shall be laid in such a way that no industrial water nor workshop
wastes containing acids , detergents, grease, oils etc.are added to it.
Ne lJJfalls to local public sewerage infrastructure (or requisition of new) will involve
/ lia s~i 'h--the local drainage network and the location of oil separators/interceptors .
/. ... ' o.J l /.1
to..._{f ;;:i"~~~~~ em shall be provided for track drainage discharging via pollution control
; ':1, easures to. tl1 water course . The drainage system shall preferably operate by gravity;
\,l ~,... therwi ea ~ -;' ped system shall be provided .
\~~
,., ~,. ~q t~-
- ,,
' -( ) ' ~
·, ~n e QP..r;Jsortium shall provi e a water supply-sewerage and drainage system .
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-00 1-01 Small Depot specifications PAGE 16/43

6.7 Communication
Req 11
In the small depot, the following telecommunications sub systems are to be proposed:
Ethernet applications : Intranet, Internet. .. ,
Administrative Voice Communication System ,
Railway Voice Communication System,
CCTV,
Master clock,
Fire detection,
Access control,
WiFi ( VoiP , Ethernet applications, File download I upload between train and ground, message
exchange for train preparation ... ),
Access to the Core Communication Network (Fiber optic network),
GSM-R (for train communications only).
Details about telecommunications requirements are provided in the following documents:
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-005 Specification for transmission support and multi service

network,
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-006 LAN I WAN I WiFi Specification,
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-007 Railway Telecommunication Specification,
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-008 Administrative Telecommunication Specification ,
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-009 CCTV Specification,
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS -010 Passenger Information System Specification,
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-011 GSM-R Specification,
• HHR-LO-TE -403-SYS-012 Building Security Specification,
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-013 Timing System Specification,
• HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-015 Telecommunication Supervision Center Specification.
In addition the contractor shall provide a Public Address System that covers all small depot areas.
6.8 Buildings requirements
KSA social rules are defined in the document:
• Ministry of Interior- Kingdom of Saudi Arabia -Social Rules.
industry international standards .
Req 12
I
The Consortium shall take into consideration the local architecture harmony a lid tire. so;;:t~ rules
and conditions prevailing in the west part of Saudi Arabia in his smaU, d~!i>Ot facilities frj:)Sra
Moreover the small depots architecture appearance shall be simil r fo" the HHR sJations
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001-01 Small Depot specifi ca tion s P AGE 17/43

6.9 Others requirements
6.9.1 TRAIN SPEED LIMIT
Train speed limits on site will be 7Kph in the sheds, 25Kph in the yard, and up to 30Kph
for HST entering and exiting the reception sidings .
6. 9. 2 TRACK LAYOUT
As specified in TSIInfra HS, the following requirements shall be applied :
• Gradients of stabling tracks intended for parking HST shall not be more than 2.5 mm/m ,
• On tracks where HST complying with the TSI RSK HS move only at low speed (stations and
passing tracks, depot and stabling tracks) , the minimum horizontal design radius shall not be
less than 150m,
• Track horizontal alignments comprising reverse curves without straight track between them Q
shall be designed with a radius greater than 190m, V
• If the radius of either curve is less than or equal to 190m, a length of straight track at least 7 m
long shall be provided between the curves ,
• Vertical alignment of stabling and service tracks shall not include curves of radius of less than
600m on a crest or 900m in a hollow.
The small depot track layout shall be in accordance with TSIInfra HS requirements.
6.9.3 SAFETY
Safety requirement shall be in accordance with HHR-social Rules.doc "Ministry of

Interior- Kingdom of Saudi Arabia - Social Rules"
6. 9.4 SECURITY
The following issues shall be adequately addressed:
• Full perimeter fencing and any other appropriate measures should be used to exclude intrusion
to areas of the small depot. Both the small depot control room(s) and the security control
room(s) can be secure and access can be controlled (Detailed requirements are provided in the
documents HHR-LO-TE-403-SYS-012 Building Security Specification),
• CCTV video surveillance/monitoring of the small depot and its environment (Detailed
requirements are provided in the documents HHR-LO-TE -403-SYS-009 CCTV Specification),
• The avoidance of security blind spots within the design , in so far as this is reasonably
practicable .
~
. ,..~
·~
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001-01 Small Depot specification s PAG E 18/43

6.9.5 D ESIGN LiFE
The small depot building life shall be minimum 60 years. Moreover the small depot shall
be easily upgraded according to operation evolution.
Req 15
liE The Consortium shall design the small depot facilities such that the extension of 2042 can be
carried out in a manner which keeps the impact on depot operations as low as possible. In
particular space reservation sha ll be made.
In the model , extension can be seen in dotted lines.
6.9.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
The small depot design and its construction shall:

.....
• Conform to all appropriate local and internationa l environmental standards and legislation,
• Make use of recycled materials where practicable and at reasonable cost,
• Aim to enhance energy efficiency,
• Facilitate environmentally-friendly modes of transport to access the small depot.
Req 16
I The small depot facilities shall meet " ECO-friendly" requirements of modern HST lines, so
ecological and environmental criteria shall be integrated by the Consortium.
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 -01 Small Depot specifications PAGE 19143

0
7. SMALL DEPOT AREAS SPECIFICATIONS
7.1 Movements requirements within the depot
7. 1. 1 HST MOVEMENTS
The movements generally required at small depot are:
Stabling cycle (day or night)
From the line, HST shall go successively through the following facilities:
• Washing machine (if necessary),

• Direct access to the stabling yard.
From the stabling yard , HST shall go successively through the following facilities :
• Washing machine (if necessary),
• Direct access to the Line.
Maintenance cycle
From the line, HST shall be able to go to the following facilities:
• Washing machine (if required),

• Servicing maintenance tracks,
• Preventive maintenance inspection tracks,
• Heavy cleaning,
• Heavy repair,
• Lifting line,
• Wheel-set automatic ultrasound inspection device,
• Drop table .
From the stabling area, HST shall be able to go to the following facilities :
• Washing machine (if required)

• Servicing maintenance tracks,
• Preventive maintenance inspection tracks,
• Heavy cleaning,
&?J;~~~
~ .>
y repair,
•:·.'Jl d l/r 11 , ''/k
• ''b.jnhJ. line,
l-' I ,,. ~ "· I
. , Wl1e~f' f el automatic Ultrasound inspection device,
.
~
J~
\
?
·. /
"'/,
. - •
"'"Jr-..:. -;
Dratf:-1 ·ble.
·~ ~ · /{ I
,f
(r
~~~t}, '

Pit Wheel Lathe cycle
From the line, stabling , HST goes successivel y through the following facilities :
• Washing machine (if required) ,

• Pit wheel lathe shed,
• If maintenance tasks are required after the machining of axles, HST can join maintenance sites.
The following diagram summarizes the main HST movements general ly required in small
depot and connections between them.
Req 17
IK- The Consortium shall propose a small depot track layout that allows a smooth classical running
cycle for HST at small depot.
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 -01 Small Depot specifications PAGE 21/43

7. 1.2 ROAD VEHICLES MOVEMENTS
Req 18
1: The Consortium shall propose for each small depot, a road layout that allows smooth and safe
movements .
In particular the followings requirements shall be taken in account:
• Road layout shall be designed such as to limit the need to cross tracks in normal maintenance
and operating activities .
• Appropriate accesses shall be provided for emergency and heavy delivery vehicles, all entries
and exits, including all deliveries by service vehicles, will be routed through entrance gate(s) . A
9m-wide zone around the depot location boundary allows the vehicles (emergency and delivery)
to go around the site . Road access shall be provided almost all around all buildings. Space is
reserved at the extremities of the service roads to allow U-turns. Visitors and administrative
personnel will be directed to the administrative area and the dedicated car park after checking,
identification and registration. Adequate parking space for cars and two wheeled vehicles shall
be provided for both staff and visitors. These road vehicle movements will be independent of
train traffic as much as possible.
• Car parking areas shall be provided for the depot workers. The size shall be defined by the
Consortium , regarding the operating and maintenance organization and the small layout. lt may
be an elevated building . If not, all places shall be sheltered from the sun. The parking facility
shall provide places for the visitors.
7.1.3 PEDESTRIAN MOVEMENTS
Req 19
11: The Consortium shall propose for each small depot, a pedestrian way layout that allows smooth
and safe movements .
In particular in every area of the small depot, adequate access and pedestrian footpaths
shall be designed to minimize walking distances, and to provide safe personnel
movements (all potential dangerous spots shall be clear of obstruction, adequately
marked by warning signs in particular any intersection between road and tracks).
7.2 Site type 1 & 2 areas specifications
As described in the document HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance, HST are

stabled in this area and undergo on run maintenance activities :
• Troubleshooting following on run failure
• Comfort and safety examination inside the coaches
• Outside and interior cleaning,
• Water refilling (shall respect "Water restocking equipment" requirements described in the TSI
Infra HS) ,
• Toilet drainage (mobile) ,
"Train external cleaning facilities" requirements
PAGE 22/43
The external parts of HST, i.e. front of cars , underbellies as well as vehicle sides shall be
washed in this facility. The washing machine shall be compliant with the external
dimensions of the vehicles (depending on the RSK technology used).
The HST shall enter and leave the washing area under its own power at "washing speed"
(between 2 and 6 Km/h as specified in the TSI Infra HS). The washing machine area shall
be covered by a building in order to preserve the cleaning device from ultraviolet rays and
avoid water projection out of the exterior washing area. Grated drains will ensure the
drainage of wastewater in the washing machine area.
Moreover the washing machine shall be preferably placed ahead of the other
maintenance facilities, in order to minimize and optimize small depot operations .
The washing area shall integrate a water treatment device to recycle used water in order
to reduce water consumption. About 70% of the washing water shall be reused for
washing . The remainder will be channeled into the small depot waste-water cleaning
system.
For further information, see chapter 8.1.1.
In the model, one washing unit is provided at each maintenance location .
Req 20
[' The Consortium shall propose, place and install a sufficient number of train washing units at
small depot in accordance with the level of cleaning expected by the operator (partially
described in the HHR- LO- PR -602- SYS-001-A1 Performance Requirement) .
[' The Consortium shall also define the characteristics of these washing unit(s) in accordance with
his RSK technology.
7.2.2 WHEEL-SET MONITORING SYSTEM AREA
This system permits the automatic measurement and control of all the important
parameters of the RSK wheel-set. lt shall be installed in one of the most frequently
accessed tracks towards the maintenance site and shall be able to take measurements at
variable speeds.
For further information , see chapter 8.1 .3.
Req 21
1: The Consortium shall propose, place and install a sufficient number of wheel set monitoring
system units able to automatically measure and control all the important parameters of the RSK
wheel-set. ·
7.2.3 DAY AND OVERNIGHT STABLING AREA
This area is directly connected to the main line and shall preferably be configured as a
"run-through" facility (as in the model), in order to minimize the time of exchange between
maintenance and operation .
All the vehicle positions are generally marked with a visual sign (i
and the position).
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001-01 Small Depot specifications

The stabling area shall be equipped with power supply (electrical power supply connection
can also be provided in each coach for powering industrial cleaning equipment) and water
distribution points for performing cleaning activities. Moreover in order to allow train
access to the cleaning team, mobile stairs shall be provided.
PAGE 24/43
The stabling lighting shall allow for safe and secure movement of vehicle crew and
cleaning personnel and the performance of the cleaning activities even if the vehicle has
been switched off. lt shall ensure that no space is in the dark when the fleet is all stabled.
In order to protect RSK from KSA climatic conditions (described in the document HHR-LO-
CT-602-SAU-001 General Specifications- Appendix B: Annual Climate and Weather
in KSA) , this stabling area shall be closed (or just roofed) .
The maximum acceptable slope on the stabling area shall be in accordance with TSI Infra
HS requirement.
In the model the stabling area is able to store:
Site 2012 to 2022 2022 to 2042

Makkah 8 HST 16 HST
Madinah 8 HST 16 HST
125 KP 8 HST 8 HST
Req 22
I: The Consortium shall provide a sufficient number and well sized facilities to stable the HST fleet
(described in the documents HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-002 Basic Service Plan and HHR-LO-OP-
202-SYS-001 Operating Requirements) and to carry out on run maintenance activities at night
and during off-peak hours (described in maintenance plan) .
E. The facilities shall be adapted to KSA climatic conditions and respect TSI Infra HS
requirements .
7.3 Site type 3 areas specifications
As described in the document HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance, HST are

stabled in this site for a maximum of four (4) hours and undergo the following activities :
• Quick functional checks and tests,
• Systematic quick periodic inspection,
• Quick comfort examination,
• Filling of water (shall respect "Water restocking equipment" requirements described in the TSI
Infra HS) ,
• Recycling toilet system (shall respect "Toilet discharge " requirements described in the TSIInfra
HS} ,
• Filling of sand (shall respect "Sand restocking equipment" requirements described in the TSI
Infra HS)
• Etc .. .
Activities in this site are at a maximum in off-peak hours and have to be minimized in rush
hours .
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 -01 Small Depot spe cifi cation s

Generally the maintenance site type 3 consists of tracks of approx 400 meter-long ; each
of them can accommodate two HST coupled together.
PAGE 26143
This area shall be equipped with a sand supply device , automatic toilet filling, drainage,
observation pits, door level and roof level platforms for ease of inspection and light repair
(these facilities provides access to under car, interior floor, and roof levels for safe access
to roof equipment).
The inspection bay shall also be equipped with a traction power supply system that can be
de-energized. Electrical operated switches, for power supply shutoff, shall be installed in a
cabinet and shall be easily accessible. The vehicle will enter and leave the inspection bay
under its own power.
For workers ' safety, the access to the roof platforms shall be protected, such that even a
tall person will not be able to enter the electrical safety area around the power collection
device. An interlocking between catenary supply and roof access shall be provided (i .e. an
entry authorization controlled via special keys).
Electricity outlets, compressed air nozzles and water supply points shall be spaced along
these tracks. The lighting shall allow carrying out the inspection activities including those
carried out from the pit. A drainage system shall be installed in the pits. This system is
linked to the waste-water treatment before discharge.
A lot of curative repair may be carried out directly in this area (exchange of lamps, small
parts like printed circuit board , etc.).
In the model the stabling area is able to store:
Site 2012 to 2022 2042

Makkah 8 HST 16 HST
Madinah 8 HST
125 KP 8 HST 8 HST
Req 23
I. The Consortium shall provide a sufficient number and well sized facilities to perform light
maintenance activities at night and during off-peak hours (described in maintenance plan). The
facilities shall at least be adapted to KSA climatic conditions, respect TSIInfra HS requirements
and provide a good safety level.
7.4 Site type 4 areas specifications
As described in the document HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance, in this site

HST undergoes the following activities :
• Detailed and systematic periodic inspection of main components and functions (preventive
maintenance)
• Exchange of worn modular Lowest Replaceable Unit (LRU) ,
• Exchange of failed LRU,
7.4. 1 INSPECTION TRACKS
The workshop shall be easily connected to the main line, stabling and
in order to minimize the time of exchange between maintenance and
Operating-maintenance exchange tracks (2 tracks are provided in
frequent and easy exchanges with the line and with the stabling yard.
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001-01 Small Depot specifications

This area is generally configured with raised rails mounted on post structures and
observation pits with depressed side floors . The observation pit shall be equipped with a
lift device to facilitate the removal and replacement of larger, heavier component units. In
fact these tracks shall allow access to under car components requiring repair or
replacement. Moreover access to the car body sides (for glass, doors, interior, exterior
repair and inspection requirements) and to the roof (for servicing activities of pantographs
and other roof mounted equipment) shall be provided at these tracks. In order to allow
handling of the dismounted parts overhead travelling cranes shall be provided.
Exchange of parts within the workshop (activities on site type 5 are described in the
document HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002 Workshop specifications) requires a storing yard,
truck access and communication means with other workshops to manage the spare parts.
The workshop should have suitable transit areas for lorries (logistical flow) and a spare
part storage yard (central and local) .
The functional space to facilitate manipulation of handling methods and specialized tools
is required between adjoining track axes and between the track axis and fixed obstacles .
Pit lighting shall be switched from within the pits. Cross under passages shall be provided
at the middle of the shed . These will allow pedestrians access across the width of the
shed beneath the raised rails . Mobile access stairs shall be supplied to access vehicle
doors on all roads to HST clearances. Hot and cold water, cleaners ' drains, power and air
supplies along every road shall be protected from collisions by forklifts etc. The sheds
shall be equipped with a ventilation system . And tracks shall be at grade.
Each track shall include an overhead power supply line (catenary) in order to allow HST
movement on the tracks . This catenary shall be interlocked with roof walkways access
and the overhead travelling crane for safety reasons (preferably a movable catenery is
used).
Req 24
11: The Consortium shall provide a sufficient number and well sized facilities to perform light
maintenance activities . These facilities shall at least be adapted to KSA climatic conditions ,
respect TSI Infra HS requirements and have a good safety level.
111: The Consortium shall propose arrangements of the various areas in order to optimize the
logistics, minimising displacements of goods , materials and people
7.4.2 HEAVY CLEANING TRACK
The periodic reinforced exterior and interior intensive cleaning shall be performed at these
tracks .
The intensive cleaning area shall be covered by a building in order to protect the workers
against the climatic conditions. Moreover if these tracks are used for exterior cleaning they
shall be equipped with protection panels on each side in order to prevent water spraying
onto the other tracks and grated drains will ensure the drainage of waste water in the
cleaning area.
This track shall be equipped with water, power and compressed air supply points and
power supply distribution points.
Req 25
I[ The Consortium shall provide a sufficient number and well sized facilities to perform HST heavy
cleaning.
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001-0 1 Small Depot specifications

7.4 .3 HEAVY REPAIR TRACK
These tracks are over a pit and allow heavy repairs, modifications and allow the exchange
of heavy equipment (except bogie equipment). For this purpose this track shall be
equipped with an overhead travelling crane and platforms .
This track shall be equipped with water, power and air compressed supply points and
Req 26
1: The Consortium shall provide a sufficient number and well sized facilities to perform HST heavy
repair.
7.4 .4 SIMULTANEOUS LIFTING TRA CK
These lines are used to jack up HST cars in a simultaneous, synchronized and safe
manner in order that items of running gear and some under frame mounted equipment, -..·.:
such as complete bogies, can be removed and replacement items fitted . The design of the
jacks shall be such that personnel shall be able to work safely under a HST being
supported by these jacks without the necessity of providing additional supports.
These lines shall be equ ipped with water, power and air compressed supply points and
In order to optimize bogie movements, the lifting line shall be linked to the bogie
maintenance workshop area (as in our model in appendix 4 ).
Req 27
11: The Consortium shall provide a sufficient number and well sized facilities to inspect HST under
body parts and to change under frame mounted equipment (e .g. bogies, ... ).
7.4 .5 WHEEL -SET ULTRA SOUND INSPECTION DEVICE ( OPTION)
This device allows ultrasound wheel -set inspection in order to improve the general safety.
A complete HST shall be able to pass through this device building , in order to be able to
inspect all HST wheel -sets.
Req 28
11:. The Consortium shall provide a sufficient number and well sized facilities to inspect and monitor
cracks inside HST wheel-sets .
7.4 . 6 L A THE ON PIT AREA
This facility shall allow reprofiling of the wheel diameter pa rity and profile due to the
stresses of track wear, drift, and wheel flat spots (without having to remove the axle).
·J
PAGE 30/43
The lathe on pit equipment shall be mounted under the floor for ease of operation . HST
are pulled over the machine to expedite turn around time. The HST position over the pit
lathe shall be controlled (with the HST not supplied by catenary); generally a mechanical
hauling device is used for this purpose. Scrap metal eliminated during machining shall be
removed onto a conveyor belt.
Req 29
I[ The Consortium shall provide a sufficient number and well sized facilities to profile (without
having to remove the axle) any HST wheel-set.
7.4. 7 BOGIE ! WHEEL -SET DROP TABLE AREA
A complete HST shall be able to pass through the bogie I wheel-set drop table building, in
order to be able to change all train bogies .
In order to optimize bogie I wheel-set movements, bog ie I wheel-set drop table is

preferably linked to the bogie maintenance workshop (as in the model).
Req 30
I[ The Consortium shall provide a sufficient number and well sized facilities to change a bogie I
wheel-set or other HST heavy under body parts.
7.4. 8 S MALL WORKSHOPS
These small workshops shall be provided and used in order to support maintenance
activity on site type 4. These workshops include the following specialities:
• Electrical.
This area is dedicated to the control and the repair of the electrical parts of the HST.
• Mechanical.
This area is dedicated to the control and the preparation of the mechanical parts of the
HST (mainly bogie). lt shall be located close to the lifting line and drop table area .
• Pneumatic.
Th is area is dedicated to the reparation of the pneumatic parts of the HST.
• Car shop.
This area is dedicated to the reparation of the be

located close to the heavy cleaning area .
Req 31
The Consortium shall provide a sufficient number and well sized rder
to support maintenance activities on site type 4.
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-4 03-SYS-0 01-01 Small Depot specifica tions

7.4.9 STORE
Small RSK spare parts, equipment, fluid tanks , worker tools etc shall be stored in a
dedicated building. The access doors to the storage shall allow free passage for a forklift
truck .
Req 32
11: The Consortium shall provide a sufficient number and well sized buildings and areas in order to
store the miscellaneous elements needed by his maintenance system .
7.4.10 WA STE COLLECTION ROOM
The access doors to this room shall allow free passage for a forklift truck . The waste
collection room contains several containers . Segregated containers shall be provided as a
minimum for paper, metal , plastic, domestic, oil , battery, other materials ...
Req 33
11: The Consortium shall provide a sufficient number and well sized buildings and areas in order to
collect miscellaneous wastes .
111: These buildings shall be designed in accordance with the applicable KSA law and regulations
regarding the waste to be stored in this room .
7. 4. 11 ADMINISTRATI VE AND SOCIAL BUILDINGS
Maintenance offices and premises are dedicated to the maintenance staff. They shall be
preferably located on the ground floor close to the maintenance site .
In addition , amenities for maintenance staff (locker-rooms and changing rooms including
showers) shall be provided . Those amenities are generally to be located on the ground
floor.
Req 34
1£ The Consortium shall provide a sufficient number and well sized administrative and social
buildings in accordance with the Consortium's maintenance system .
7.4. 12 DIESEL ENGINE WORKSHOP
This area allows to stable and maintain emergency diesel locomotive needed for rescue
HST.
For further information , see chapter 8.3 .5.
Req 35
The Consortium' ;~ I provide a sufficient number of emergency diesel locomotives and well
sjzed diesel 'eng ft;)~W \'<shop in accordance with the Consortium's maintenance system .
~fi~~~orisortium st:$if}~tso choose emergency diesel locomotives location in order to minimize
t!__me· to r:each (ailed HS '\
0
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-00 1-0 1 Small Depot specification s PAGE 32143
8. SMALL DEPOT MAIN HEAVY EQUIPMENT
Req 36
111: The Consortium is responsible to determine the type and the number of items of equipment
needed for each maintenance activities,
Ill The Consortium shall provide the totality of maintenance equipment and tools needed for each
This chapter describes the principal heavy equipment expected to be required to perform
all the small depot maintenance activities (Sites type 1 to 4 ). But as mentioned above , the
final choice of the maintenance equipment is left to the discretion of the Consortium .
8.1 Site type 1 & 2
8. 1. 1 HST WASHING MACHINE
This equipment is to wash the exterior of a HST while they pass through the wash at the
maximum practical "washing speed" required to effectively clean the HST without causing
damage to any part of the HST or its exterior finish . Trains may pass through for washing
from either end and so the machine must be able to wash to the required standard in both
directions.
Catenary is present through the HST wash and can be either energized or de-energized.
Req 37
I: The Consortium shall provide adapted equipment able to wash the exterior of an HST to the
required standard for all weather conditions .
Required washing standard is partially described in the HHR-LO-PR-602-SYS-001-A 1

Performance Requirement.
8. 1.2 TOILET EMPTYING/ FILLING VEHICLE
This vehicle is able to perform emptying and filling of HST toilets along the stabling tracks .
Depending on the toilet technology, generally emptying of effluent tanks is followed by
rinsing and then recharging of the system with flushing water containing formaldehyde to
break up the waste matter.
The Consortium shall provide adapted equipment able to empty and fill HST toilets .
8.1 .3 WHEEL -SET MONITORING SYSTEM

The information shall be fed back into the RSK maintenance scheduler/database for
monitoring. Once an HST has been earmarked for wheel turning/attention, the information
shall be capable of being transmitted to the wheel lathe for information for the turning
process.
The equipment shall be housed out in the open but protected against the weather. The
sensors will be such that they retain their effectiveness even though they can not be
routinely cleaned as they are likely to be located in relatively inaccessible areas.
The equipment shall be able to immediately alert maintenance staff on an emergency

basis if a serious wheel defect is detected, such as a crack in a tread or an axle.
Req 39
E The Consortium shall provide adapted equipment able to monitor record and detect any wheel
issues . Moreover this equipment shall alert maintenance staff in the case of a serious wheel
defect being detected.
8.2 Site type 3
8.2.1 TOILET AUTOMATIC FILLING AND EMPTYING
This system is able to perform automatic emptying and filling of HST toilets along the
stabling tracks . Depending on the toilet technology, generally emptying of effluent tanks is
followed by rinsing and then recharging of the system with flushing water containing
formaldehyde to break up the waste matter.
Req 40
111: The Consortium shall provide adapted equipment able to automatically empty and fill HST
toilets .
8. 2. 2 SAND AND WATER FILLING
The HST sand boxes shall be filled from sand distribution points located along the HST, in
front of each bogie. The sand box pipe plug is opened by the operator who will insert the
sand-filling gun into the sand box and operate the filling handle. A single operator shall be
capable of using the filling system, although the installation shall be designed to be used
simultaneously by multiple operators (each one with a filling gun).
Req 41
111: The Consortium shall provide adapted equipment able to quickly fill HST sand boxes and water
tanks.
8.3 Site type 4
8. 3. 1 SIMULTANEOUS LIFTING JA CKS

The jacks shall be interlocked with the movable catenary in order to ensure that jacking
operations can only take place when the catenary is swung out of the way in order to
avoid clearance problems.
The jacks are controlled from one control station which shall be provided with a means of
enabling the operator to monitor that the jacking process is proceeding safely and in
synchronism on all vehicles being jacked . The number of jacks being controlled during
jacking operations shall be variable in order to reflect the number of vehicles being jacked .
Control and power cabling for the jacks shall be run in ducts under the floor and be
accessible at the jacking/control station points at sockets under access hatches which will
be strong enough to bear any likely imposed weights e.g fork lift trucks or another jack.
The intention shall be to keep this cabling to a minimum on the workshop floor.
Connection between the jacks and the floor sockets will be via suitably robust connectors
and cables .
Req 42
11: The Consortium shall provide adapted equipment that allows for HST under body parts
inspection and to enable HST bogie exchange .
8.3.2 DROP TABLE
This equipment allows removing and exchange one bogie, one wheel-set or a heavy LRU
located under the body frame (e .g. AC unit, mixing box ... ).
The equipment will support the car under attention , and a section of rail which shall drop
with the bogie on it. The bogie shall then be removed from the general area using lifting
tackle, crane, turntable etc.
Interlocking shall be provided between the support jacks and the drop in order to ensure
that the drop cannot be actuated until the jacks are in place and under some load,
indicating that they are engaged .
Interlocking measures and procedures shall also be provided in order to ensure that the
HST cannot be moved while the equipment is engaged and in operation , or an HST
cannot access the road while the equipment is in operation for the purposes of
maintenance, testing etc.
Req 43
11: The Consortium shall provide an adapted equipment that allows HST bogie I wheel-set and
underbodyheavypartsexchange. . ·
8.3.3 LATHEONPIT
The purpose is to be able to restore the correct wheel profile on worn and damaged wheel
treads by machining on all powered and unpowered wheel-sets on an HST.
(· .
Safety interlocking shall be provided with other parts of the installation in order to ensure
that the HST cannot be moved whilst machining operations are under way.
Moreover this equipment shall be able to:
• Accurately and safely maneuver an HST into position on the lathe on the pit for the purposes of
machining wheel treads. Note that during these operations the HST will be unpowered and
unbraked and so the system will have to be capable of accelerating and braking (safely) a full
length HST under these conditions.
• Cut and crush all variations/patterns of swarf produced during wheel machining operations in
order to make for more convenient and safe disposal via the conveyor to a skip.
Req 44
11: The Consortium shall provide adapted equipment that allows HST wheel reprofiling without
having to remove an axle.
8.3.4 FACILITIES TO EXCHANGE COMPONENTS

p
\~;)
There are used to assist with the removal of HST roof mounted equipment and movement
of HST modular, parts etc; and assistance with general small depot maintenance
activities.
The cranes shall be interlocked in order to ensure that:
• They can not be used while the catenary is energized

• That all hooks etc have been fully retracted and that no loads are attached before the catenary
is re-energized following an isolation
Req 45
11: The Consortium shall provide adapted equipment that allows for safe HST modular equipment
handling and movement.
8.3.5 EMERGENCY DIESEL LOCOMOTIVE
This equipment is used on line in case of HST failure. In fact this locomotive shall be able
to run on the whole network (with his own diesel power supply) and rescue failed HST.
This locomotive shall (at least) be able to move the failed HST until the next station in
order to evacuate passengers and clear the line.
As detailed in the HHR-LO-RS-403-SYS-001 Rolling Stock specifications, this

equipment can include a system able to maintain failed HST HVAC in degraded mode.
Req 46
The Consortium shall provide adapted emergency diesel locomotive able to rescue failed HST
_.on line .
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001-01 Small Depot specifications P AGE 36/43

9. TESTING
9.1 Facilities tests
Two types of tests shall be performed for the facilities .
9.1.1 A CCEPTANCE TES TS
Theses tests consist in checking the compliance of the facilities with the miscellaneous
layouts and characteristics made by the Consortium. These checks shall at least include:
Facilities dimensions,
Facilities characteristics
Facilities admissible loads,
Supply networks (air, water, electric .. .),
Etc ...
9. 1. 2 ON-SITE INTEGRATION TESTS
All areas shall be tested with the RSK (or rolling stock component) in order to check small
depot good operations.
9.2 Heavy equipment tests
For heavy equipment the followings test shall be performed .
9.2.1 FA CTORY TESTS
The Consortium shall perform comprehensive tests to demonstrate compliance with the
safety, performance criteria, the standards and operating conditions.
During manufacturing and prior to shipment, verifications and checks shall be carried out
in order to ensure that the supply is in accordance with the technical specification and with
the approved design documents.
All quality checks shall be carried out, as required, during manufacture on the
Consortium's premises. Operation of safety and protection devices shall also be checked.
• Prior to assembly

The entire supply shall be inspected at the Consortium's premises before shipment to the
site by government or any person duly authorized by government. After comp letion of
manufacture of items or sub-assemblies, and following completion of the consortium 's
own tests and inspection, the government shall be invited to witness such tests.
If the results of the factory tests are successful, a "FAT" (Factory Acceptance Test)
certificate shall be signed by the Consortium and government.
9.2.2 ON-SITE INTEGRATION TESTS
After delivery and assembly of the equipment, operating tests shall be carried out in the
presence of Consortium's representative to check that equipment design makes it suitable
to fulfill the scheduled functions .
The purpose of the tests is to record and acknowledge that the equ ipment is capable of
performing regular service under different operating conditions.
The Consortium shall submit for approval at least two months before beginning .... ·
comm1ss1oning detailed commiSSIOning procedures, method statements and
commissioning check sheets. Through the submitted procedures, the equ ipment
performances shall be justified to meet the expected operations requirements.
The commissioning tests shall be undertaken in the presence of the government and the
Consortium, and any defects or deviations from the expected requ irements or other
agreed parameter shall be adjust by the Consortium.
PAGE 38143
APPENDIX
Appendix 1: RSK MAINTENANCE AREA RESERVATION

Appendix 2: MAKKAHLA YOUT PROPOSAL
Appendix 3: 125 KP LAYOUT PROPOSAL
Appendix 4: MEDINAH LAYOUT PROPOSAL
-..;··: : :'
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 -01 Small Depot specifi cations

0
)
SMALL DEPOT SPECIFICAT IONS
0
APPENDIX N°1 : RSK MAINTENANCE SPACE RESERVATION
Hadinah, Concept ual Mod el
I .Appraa 14 he
Mahhah, Conceptu 3l model

0-.
~:)
Apprfl }S ha
12S KP. Con.:P. ptval Model
All dimensions are in meters
:SOil01 PrDlEI:T• HAAAWI.JN HIGH SPEED RAILWAY
"= !::':'w~':::!;;;;~:
...........\ ...,. t \,-~ \ ·~ ~ r-
, .- i -- i f - - - - - -- - - - - - - - t - - - - l F. Lo\IR(IX Phae2
y---1 Small Depot a d Workshop
h/o._,, \0__,.,·· .•. , ", r-·-+~+--------------+-----1 0£0E),
H F-U.Ii£
Tffl.[,
~~~ .. , ~••~~~w~~~--~~~~
~--~~~ml~.~~~
~~M~i----+.,~
!-i vAli!ATII't
Space Reservallon
I . ~....... , 1:1 I~ "'-~ tiBt-....... F;.L ~- ....
:::l, .;,' / . ~' rc..;:;:~-',.-lf,;:.:
~ ~~f------..l:....,~"":::l,_:l!!-
=-.__··----+...:";:;.·L--j
•'P"""'ID•
"'" ' .
AX.ElCh .if
1Ni ~~~IIPI Iotl., ,ltlil loll..t/il>lolol'olliiN u •~ ~- l:'c~":••'. ""'•I'~~
(
:
1 1
~-.,-Jr.... l l~n ,.....,.. - c.SCH<.KG !3f'J'II:prt':."'J:f.~~~~'-'~ HHR~J)·DW-301..()()1
~ ~~~
- ~~
~ - ~L--------------L--~----------------~------------~-~~==---~~~~~~~~~~-~~~~~~~~~--------~~
1r 1 r
.,. /'
~: ./' ..
1
~
.. I
........., .
i '• .
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403- 1-C1 Small Depot specifications PAGE 40/43
APPENDIX No2: MAKKAH LAYOUT PROPOSAL
Ru~rvaiion for othor naint~nna. ort-riUtion. Tot& ll"eelindudit! the 11 nel oppnrx 35 ha
Apprn18 ha
Peo.JErT, HARAMAIN HIGti SPEED RAILWAY

Phase2
.........,.......,_, .........,
IAUDol RAILWA1'1 OJIGAlflLATION
PAGE 41 /43
SMA LL DEPOT SPECIFICATIONS
APPENDIX No3: 125 KP LAYOUT PROPOSAL
0
-
Cfl.D4fD I HAAAMAtlll HIGH SPEEO RAILWI\Y

F. L.O.CR®C Pl"lase2
I TITI.[,
OEOEJ: SC..U.E.: Small Depot a d Worl<st-op
H. FAl.lt
CQM;eptu.al MIX!el
ll 1~ . lv .... lC(JPa .AFnt 'fM ~
At,_..,~"""'-'6...... I
IAUOf f Ai l WAYI D I OAJIIU.TIO t
.. - ..... KP 12 5
1I .
1{!~
~
- t:' 'll~
-,•' ·'r ·~
--
r .L AXELCiu A
DIU..!il«;lll.
HHR-L~V\'-301...()()3
\~-~ \
<.' .
,:r -·.;-
/'. If-).
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403- ---00 1-C1 Sm~ti n..p-q - pecifications P AGE 42/43
'."" ......... ,(1\t(::- ,
SMALL DEPOT SPEC IFICATIONS
APPENDIX No4: MEDINAH LAYOUT PROPOSAL
Approx 14 ha
TIT I£: Sma ll Depot

. .3,lMoll bQtlil,l~ ........ ,
Conceptual Model
•AU04 RAILWA1'1 O "IJIA•UA • tetM ~a<Jinah
DU.ldliGNO. 1£~.
H~R~ O.OW...'Ul1-l'll"l4 c
Ref: HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001-C1 Small Depot specifications PAGE 43/43

Madinah, Conceptual Model
I
I Approx 14 ha
Mak kah, Conceptual model
Approx 35 ha
,.,,
125 KP , Conc eptual Model
""
Approx 65 ha
All d i mension~-?J:P. in meters
I 'l' •· :, ·'\. J r . ~ 11 DESIGNED ' PERFORMANCE HARAMAIN HIGH SPEED RAILWAY
lm ~
STATUS' PROJECT,
, \ -, · '·' -,., ""' :r Jf-..11 F. LACROIX SPECIFICATION Phase2
q,~""''b-O.W' "'""""
~' , ..._ • t ~ - ~ 11 CHECKED'
H. FAURE
SCALE' TITLE, Small Depot and Workshop \
~
'-::s:O.-'SAUDI a~
Space Reservation
B\
\\/09/H
nt~5t09 REYIS!OH AF1£R 5RO CO~
Fl.
F. l
. .. RAILWAYS ORGANIZATION
in assoc;;ation ri"'
VALIDATED' FORHAT'
A3
G. NDRMAND
A\ 09/04/~1 FIRST EHISSION F. l AXELCIUM
~~;-
APPROVED ' This drawing 1n.ust not be either loaned. copied or otherwise DRAWING NO.
REVISION DATE DESCRPIIOH DRAWN reproducl!d in vhole: or in part or used tor any purpon
C SCHANG ~thout the prior "ritte:n permissioh of SYSTRA.. HHR-LO-DW-301-001
0
1---
/I'
Reservation for other maintenance organization, Total area (including the 18 ha) approx 35 ha
I~
\l/1
1f\4?
-- J
- 1R?R
1942 -
DESIGNED ' STATUS, PERFORMANCE PROJECT' HARAMA!N HIGH SPEED RAILWAY

F. LACROIX SPECIFICATION Phase2
~~
CHECKED ' SCALEo TITLEo Small Depot
_(1 ltllll'l/09 Rf'lisloN .lftER !JO<{~TERS'S COHil!lfts! '/"'- ,£!'. /J F.L H. FAURE
81
AZ
AI
I Z0/05/09
II0/0.,09
I 09104/09
!SitO(OiftlfTS ,;, '/_
LFC~HTS ' / ~ '')//
\ _ \' .·7
"-/ / F. l
F.l
F.l
F D,!::y:>::.,JI.bg.b:.,IJ iiDW I ewuug.bl
AXELCIUM
VALIDATED,
G. NOR HAND
FORHATo
A3
Conceptual Model
Makkah
APPROVED ' This drawing m.ust not be eith~r I • copied or otherwise DRAWING NO. REV.
REVJSIOH DATE DRAWH re:produc:H in whole or ~· !'".:-~.:.:: ::::-_-, for any purpose
C. SCHANG wilhoullh• prior vrillon p~ , . ,Muu " ' SYSTRA. HHR-LO-DW-301-002 [ C1
I..-
1Qn
iI~'~"~'j~~======~~==========================================================================~~l~========~
-----~~---------------------------------------------------------------~~----------------------------~~==-----=~
~-----1~--~~=-~==~
~-='
L___--~
----- ~-------
----------- -
,,
~~.x~~ DESIGNED '

F. LACROIX
STATUS' PERFORMANCE PROJE(l, HARAMAIN HIGH SPEED RAILWAY
SPECIFICATION Phase2
fl ,--.. -~- ."r ~-
~I
J - ·'
CHECKED , SCALE' TITLE, Small Depot and Workshop
Ct
A1
Bt
REVISIOH
~
120/0S/09
lo9mto9
OATE
I ~.ATEAS"S COHHOO~
REVI5lO~ Af1_£R ~(01111EHTS
~ I :'I'~ /
'
c•
''' ~--;/
~(' 7!
;::.
4
lr
fi"
" 7J f.l
f .L
OAAlt!l
TD}:::y=JI.bgb::¥1 <lDidl c'WJ.wgbl
SAUDI RAILWAYS ORGANIZATION . ---
AXELCIUM
H. FAURE
VALIDATED,
G. NORMA NO
APPROVED '
C. SCHANG
FORMAT'
A3
DRAWING NO.
HHR-LO-DW-301-003
Conceptual Model
KP 125
10
C.
1'•>·-
-- - -
\I Approx 14 ha
- 287 1nnn
-- I -- 182
--
- -
All dimensions are 1n meters
DESIGNED ' STATUS, PERFORMANCE PROJECT' HARAMAIN HIGH SPEED RAILWAY

f . LACROIX SPECIFICATION Phase2
"'"'""''b-MOcl'~....
CHECKED ' SCALE' Small Depot
U/D9/09 R£VISIONAflER LINKLATERS'S COIHNTS F.l H. FAURE
_~>e--~SAUDI
r
Conceptual Model
81
AZ
2~/G5/H REVISIOH AFTER SAD CO/ti1EIHS
REVISIONAflER llf C0191ENTS
F. L
F. l
: . RAILWAYS ORGANIZATION
VALIDATE!}. FORMAT'
A3
wto~tn
G. NORM AND Madinah
AI 09/G4/G9 FIIST fltSSION F.L AXELCIUM
APPROVED ' This drawing must not be e.itl'ler loaned, copied or otherwi.se DRAWING NO.
reproduced in vbol i! or in part or used for any purpose
REVIS1011 DATE DfSCRI'TION DRAWN
C. SCHANG without tf'le prior written pumission of SYSTRA. HHR-LO-DW-301-004
0,
~~~ ~ .b~ Cio U:..ll ii..w..u.J gbl

PHASE 2
ROLLING STOCK MAINTENANCE
I H I H I R 1-1 L I 0 1-1 M I R 1-1 4 I 0 I 2 1-1 5 I y I 5 1-1 0 I 0 I 1 1-1 F I 1 I

A1 28/02/09 First Issue H.FAURE
A2 16/03/09 Review following checker comments H.FAURE
A3 17/03/09 Review following validor comments H.FAURE
A4 19/03/09 Review following last comments H.FAURE
81 25/03/09 Review following Government's comments J . GEOFFRAY
82 09/04/09 Internal review H.FAURE
83 15/04/09 Final draft sent to the Government H.FAURE
C1 02/06/2009 Final version following Government's comments H.FAURE
01 29/06/2009 Final RFP H.FAURE
E1 11/09/2009 Review following Linklaters's comments H.FAURE
F1 18/12/2011 Update for Contract Getinsa
REVISION N°: F1 NAME DATE SIGNATURE
PREPARED BY Getlnsa 18/1 2/2011
CHECKED BY R Adams 20/1 2/2011
VALIDATED BY R Adams 20/1 2/2011
APPROVED BY R Adams 20/1 2/2011
Ref: HHR- LO- MR -402- SYS-001 -F1 Rolling Stock Maintenance PAGE 2/39
G
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................ 6
2. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 7
4. GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................... 9
4.1 PURPOSE .... ...... ..... .. ..... ......... .. ................ .. ........ .............. ........................................................ .. .... ... ................. 9
4 .2RESPONSIBILITY ........... .... ... ......... .. ..... ... ...... .. .... ...... ....... .. .......... ..... .. ...... ........ ... ...... ...... .... .. ......... .. .......... ....... 9
5. MAINTENANCE PLAN ................................................................................................................................ 11
5 .1 GENERAL POLICY PLAN ...................... .. .......... .................. ... .. .......................................................................... 11
5. 1. 1 Servicing ................... .... ............................................................................. .... ... ........... .. ..... .. ................ .. .. 12
5.1.2 Preventive maintenance ....... .... .......... ...................................................................................... .. ............ 12
5. 1.3 Corrective maintenance ................. ....... .. ... ................................... ... ........ ................ ......... .. .... ............... 13
5. 1.4 General maintenance policy ............. .. ............................ ...... .......... .......................... ............... ... ...... .. ... 14
5.1.5 General maintenance diagram ..................... .. .... ..... .. ..... ................................................. ......... ..... .... .... 14
5 .2MAINTENANCE RULES PLAN ....... ... .. ............... ....... .. ..... .................... ....... .......... ....... .... .. .. ....... ... .... ... ... ..... .. .... 14
5.2.1 System documentation .... ............. ....... ...................................... .... ... .. ......... .......... .. ... ... .. ......... .............. 15
5.2.2 Maintenance documentation .... .... ....... ..... .......... ......................... ... .......... ....... .... ............ ........ ..... .... ..... 15
5.2.3 Spare parts documentation ............. ......... .. ............................................ ............................... ................ 16
5.2.4 Documentation management system .......... .............................. .. .. ........ ... .......... ..... ... .. .. ... .... .... .......... 16
5.3MAINTENANCE FOLLOW UP PLAN ......................... ... ..... .... ..... ... .... .. ... ......... ..... ............ ... ............ ..... ............. .. . 17
5.4MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES ............ .... .. ............................................................................................................. 17
5.4. 1 On ground activities ............ ................. .. ...... ..................... .... .................... ... .. ...... .. ......... ... ................. .... 18
5.4.2 On board activities ................. .. .. ... ........................ .. ................................................................. ............... 18
5.4.3 Activities on type 1 sites .... ....... ............ ...... .................................. ... .. .......................... ........... .. ...... .. .. .... 19
5.4.4 Activities on type 2 sites ....... .... .... ... ........................................ .. ... .. .. ....................... ............................... 19
5.4.5 Activities on type 3 site .... ...... .. ..... .... .. .................................................................................................... 20
5.4.6 Activities on type 4 sites ...... .... ....... ........... ............................ ....... ..... ........ .... .. .................... ................... 21
5.4. 7 Activities on site type 5 ......................... .... .. ....... .. ............ .. ............................ ......................................... 22
5.5SITE TYPE PLAN ............................................. ... ... ..... .. ... .. .... ... .. .. ........ ...... .... ... .... ..... ... ...... .............. ........ ........ 23
5.5.1 Integrated sites ........... .................................................................... ............................ ...... .. .. .. ... ...... .. ...... 23
5.5.2 Sites locations ........ .... .. .............. .... ........ ....................... .............................. .. .......... .. ... ....... ...... ........ ....... 23
5.5.3 Sites sizes ............................... .. ................................. .. .. ... ........... .. ... .......... .... .. ... .... ................ .......... .. .... 24
5.5.4 Sites capacities ............................. ...... ......... ...... ........ ................. ...... ..................... ........ ........ .................. 24
5.5.5 Sites local context ........ .. .................................. .... ............ ..... .... ................. ............. .................... .... ........ 25
5.5.6 Sites facilities and equipment ........... ...... ........ .. .... ........... ........ .. ...... ...... ................................................ 26
5.5. 7 Sites detail facility layout ......... ........................................ ......................... ... ........ ..... ..... ............ ..... .. ...... 26
5 .6TOOLING PLAN ..... ...... ..... ...... .. ...... ............. ............. .... ............ ....................... .... ........... ...... ........ .... ................. 26
5 .7LABOR, RECRUITMENT AND TRAINING PLANS ........ .. .. ........ ...... ............ .. ... .. .... ........ ........... .. .... .. .. ............ ........ 27
5.8MAINTENANCE DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT ................ ..... .... ........................ ... .. ... ..... ................ ........ ......... ... .. 27
6. COST PLAN .................................................................;................................................................................ 28

6 .1 LIFE CYCLE COST .......... ............. .. .... ..... .. .. .. ... .... ................................................ ..... .. ........... .. ... ..... ........ ..... .... 28
6.2MAINTENANCE COST PRODUCTIVITY .. .. .............. ....... .. ..... ... .... ... ...... ... ........... ............ ....... ................. .. .. ......... 28
7. QUALITY AND RAMS MANAGEMENT PLAN ....................................................................................... 29

7 .1 RSK QUALITY PLAN ....................... ... .... ............. .. .............................. ...... ......... ... ....................................... .. ... 29
7.2RSK RELIABILITY PLAN .................. ... ... .......... .. .......................... ....... ......... .. ...... ..... ...... ... .... ........ ............... ..... 29
7.2. 1 Key functions and or components reliability plan ......... ...... .. ..... ..... .. .... .. ... ........ .... ........ ..................... 29
7 .3RSK AVAILABILITY ........ ..... ...... .... ...... ....... .. .................. .... .. .... ................... .......... ........................... ................. 30
7 .4RSK AND COMPONENTS MAINTAINABILITY PLAN ............................................... ...... ............ ...... ....... .... .. .. ...... 30
7.4. 1 Requirements for the Maintainability during operation ... .... ........ .. ......... .... ... ....................... .... ......... . 30
7.4.2 Requirements for the Maintainability during servicing ................................ ........................ ............... 31
7.4.3 Requirements for the Maintainability during light maintenance.............. .. ........................................ 32
7.4.4 Requirements for the Maintainability during heavy maintenance .................................................... 33
34
7.5TRAIN SAFETY PLAN ........... ... ..................... ..... ........................ .... ................... ... .............................. ................
7. 5. 1 Critical functions and/or components safety plan .................................... .. ......................................... 34
7 .6RAMS IMPROVEMENT PLAN ... ..................... ..... ....... ............. ..... ..................... ...... ................... ........................ 35
8. TOLERANCES AND EXCEPTIONS ......................................................................................................... 36
9. STATUS OF THE HST FLEET................................................................................................................... 37

9 .1 AT THE END OF THE CONTRACT .... ............ .. ....................................................... ...................... ....................... 3 7
9 .2PENAL TIES .... .... ... ............. ..... .. .................. .. ..... .. ................. ....... .................. ..... .......................... .................... 37
APPENDIX ............. ...................... ......................................................................................................................... 38
APPENDIX N"1 : EXAMPLE OF BASIC MAINTENANCE ORGANIZATION DIAGRAM ....................................... 39
Ref: HHR· LO- MR -402- SYS-001-F1 Rolling Stock Maintenance PAGE 4/39
PROJECT REFERENCES

1 HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance
2 HHR-LO-RS-403-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Specifications
3 HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 Small Depot Specifications
4 HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002 Workshop Specifications
5 HHR-LO-MA-402-SYS-001 RAMS Assurance R~uirements
f-
1. INTRODUCTION
This document defines the objective requirements for the Rolling Stock (RSK) Maintenance design.
lt defines the objectives, requirements, constraints and supplies to be taken into account,
concerning the activities related to the RSK Maintenance.
• lt is a global and iterative approach about technical and managerial activities making it possible
to ensure the acquisition (design, production, testing & commissioning, delivery and operation)
of a complex RSK.
• As far as possible, it integrates all the constraints applicable to the future RSK system .
The resulting Maintenance Plan is about optimizing operational availability while minimizing the
total cost of ownership of this RSK system (RSK and its supporting organization).
This document shall be study in parallel with the following linked documents:
• HHR-LO-RS-403-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Specifications;
• HHR-LO· DW -403-SYS-001 Small Depot Specifications;
• HHR-LO- DW -403-SYS-002 Workshop Specifications.
2. GLOSSARY
Definitions and abbreviations used in this document are defined in the document HHR-LO-CT-602·
SYS-002 General Specifications ·Section 2: Glossary.
Ref : HHR- LO· MR ·402· SYS-001-F1 Rolling Stock Maintenance PAG' 7139 d--

MINISTRY OF INTERIOR • KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA ·SOCIAL RULES.
The Rolling Stock Maintenance shall be based on European standards or EOS.
Ref: HHR- LO- MR -402- SYS-001-F1 Rolling Stock Maintenance PAGE 6/39
4. GENERAL
4.1 PURPOSE
The aim of this document is to provide details of the main conditions in which the RSK
maintenance is to be carried out by the Consortium .
The Consortium shall be technically in charge and responsible of the RSK maintenance including
but not limited to:
• Activities locations,
• Design of maintenance sites,
• Sites construction,
• Sites management,
• Maintenance policy,
• Documentation,
• Recruitment of labor,
• Training,
• Spare parts.
4.2 RESPONSIBILITY
The Consortium shall undertake the RSK maintenance under its own responsibility, including the
overhaul operations necessary during both mobilization and operating period in order to:
Req 01
l Maintain the RSK in good operating condition, according to a high level maintenance policy
described in this document chapter 5 "Maintenance plan",
l Maintain the RSK in good operating condition, according to a cost optimization policy described
in this document chapter 6 "Cost plan",
E Keep daily performances at an appropriate level in terms of Quality, Reliability, Availability,
Maintainability and Safety as specified in this document chapter 7 "Quality and RAMS
management plan" .
When maintenance operations are sub-contracted:
Req 02
I[ The Consortium shall submit for the approval of the Government the sub-contracts it proposes
to enter into for the maintenance of the RSK,
I[ The Consortium shall organize supervision through regular inspections, audits, etc in order to
check, survey and identify any discrepancy error in the maintenance process, with a view to
correct the situation.
In case of any incident involving the RSK punctuality or passenger comfort, the Consortium shall
take appropriate measures to restore service as soon as possible, even if an inquiry is to be
conducted to determine causes and responsibilities.
Major event are such as:

• HST derailment,
• HST fire,
• HST accident following wheel -set damage (cracks, hot box ... ),
• Passenger injury (or dead) following access door opening during run,
• Etc.
In case of a major event involving the RSK, the Government and or relevant authority
(inspectors .. .) shall take appropriate measures to conduct an inquiry to determine causes and
responsibilities.
+ R•f• HHR· LO· MR ·402· SYS-o<J1·F1 Rolllog Stod< M•loteooooo PAGE 10/39
5. MAINTENANCE PLAN
In order to provide a high level of quality, the maintenance policy must include servicing (daily
maintenance), preventive maintenance (scheduled) and corrective maintenance (unscheduled).
The Consortium shall submit a general Maintenance Plan, that shall include detailed and
documented plans.
The includes detailed plans shall consist of but not be limited to:
• General policy,
• Maintenance rules,
• Maintenance follow up,
• Maintenance activities,
• Site type (facilities layout),
• Tooling plan,
• labor, recruitment and training.
5.1 GENERAL POLICY PLAN
In order to develop the RSK maintenance policy, it is necessary to understand the organization of
the maintenance of a HST system . As an example, the maintenance of the HHR RSK may be
organized according to the basic diagram shown in appendix 1.
Considering that the breakdown of any element within a HST system can disrupt the normal
operation of the whole transportation system, preventive maintenance actions must be carried out
to reduce the probability of the occurrence of such events.
The type of maintenance actions must also take account of factors specific to the RSK, not only
from its design point of view (mean time between failures - MTBF- of a component or of its
subsystems) but also from an operating point of view.
The choice is therefore based on an analysis of the suitability of equipment as regards the
achievement the objectives set forth within the following fields:
• Safety of traffic and persons,

• Reliability (low rate of operating incidents),
• Availability (short periods of immobilization),
• Comfort offered to passengers.
While analyzing the consequences of possible malfunctions, attention shall be paid to the following
circumstances:
• A fault may have consequences which jeopardize traffic safety and or the regularity,
• A fau lt may cause a system or sub-system to no longer fulfill its initial function, but may have no
consequence on traffic safety and/or regularity,
• A fault may cause disruptions, but would allow the system or sub-system to fulfill its initial
functions.
Furthermore, a HST system differs from a conventional railway system in the larger quantity of
0
identical systems or sub-systems (vehicles, installations on line) and the higher frequency of
replacement of many of them . lt is therefore necessary to design maintenance actions perfectly
suited to train-set units, and suited to each subunits (sub-system) as well.
HST Maintenance actions are broken down into 3 types of technical actions:
• Servicing maintenance actions,

• Preventive maintenance actions,
• Corrective maintenance actions .
However, the final choice of maintenance actions type and content is left to the discretion of the
Consortium. Should the Consortium propose an alternative solution to the maintenance actions
defined in chapter 5.1.1 to 5.1.3, it must be able to demonstrate that the alternative is at least
equivalent in RAMS performance.
Req 03
E lt is required that the HHR RSK maintenance policy comprises the most simple and basic
maintenance actions such as cleaning and washing.
5.1.1 SERVICING
lt relates to the daily quick maintenance actions that contribute to a safe operation, comfort of
passengers, and a good public image of the HHR:
• Cleaning :
o Outside body washing ,
o Interior cleaning,
• Refilling of various tanks (water, sand ... )
• Draining of various tanks (water, toilet .. . )
• Catering, supply of vending machine items,
• Controlling of the status of:
o Comfort components ,
o Interior fitting that could be impact the passenger safety,
o Critical components that could impact the HST runs in term of safety.
• Replacing the wearable components (brake pad ... ),
• Etc.
5.1.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 0

lt takes into account that the functioning of RSK is similar to the functioning of a critical factory with
a continuous production process. lt must consequently carefully program the maintenance
operations so as to minimize the consequences thereof and to reduce the probability of:
• RSK failure,
• Service degradation .
Two types of preventive actions exist:
• Systematic maintenance (scheduled),
• Conditional maintenance (according to parameter),
In preventive maintenance actions, the goal is to reduce to a minimum the durations of intervention ,
their frequencies and their associated costs by a better design of
• The RSK maintainability,
• The maintenance sites (see chapter Req 20).
t r - - : :R- LO- MR -402- SYS-001-F1 Rolliog Stock"''"''"'"" PAGE 12/39

Systematic maintenance
lt consists in an inspection cycle - scheduled according to time or kilometer - in order to carry out
various necessary controls, Gleanings, adjustments and standard exchanges, as in particular:
• Control of correct working condition of components and their redundancies,
• Control of correct working condition of protections and their safety circuits,
• Cleaning of components so as to avoid abnormal heating and risks of short-circuit or starting,
• Adjustments allowing for optimum operation of the RSK,
• Etc.
This is particularly the case for those components most closely related to safety and or regularity,
when:
• The cost of RSK failure is disproportionate to the cost of component replacement,
• The frequency of intervention on various components allows for various other actions to be
carried out during the same immobilization period.
Condition based maintenance

__ ,
....._.-;.. ..·.;
~
lt consists in carrying out various operations depending on the status of HST components,
exceeding a threshold i.e. subordinate to the occurrence of predetermined events. This method
provides a means of using the total potential of each element considered while taking account of its
real operating conditions.
This type of maintenance provides a means of optimizing the components utilization thresholds
while minimizing the immobilization times by simply replacing components at the most opportune
moment, particularly in the case of elements for which any defect can have consequences which
jeopardize the traffic safety and/or regularity.
The detection of thresholds can be obtained by means of various processes such as:
• Visual monitoring,
• Individual measurements,
• Wear Witnesses,
• Level gauges,
• Potential (time before overhaul expressed in time or kilometer),
• Diagnosis systems (tests),
• Etc.
5.1.3 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

In addition to preventive maintenance, corrective maintenance of a faulty sub-system or component
is required after the occurrence of a fault or after the degradation of a function, so as to allow the
faulty sub-system or component to be brought back into service, at first on a temporary basis and
later definitively.
The corrective maintenance actions comprise in particular:

• Failure localization,
• Diagnosis,
• Repairing (exchange, repair, etc.),
• Control of the correct working condition.
Two types of corrective actions are to be considered:

• Emergency breakdown service,
• Corrective maintenance or repair.
r
Emergency breakdown service:
Emergency breakdown service is a fast intervention of corrective maintenance carried out on a

purely provisional basis mainly by a driver, a train crew or maintenance staff. lt allows recovery of a
failure during operation, with the goal of minimizing the HST stop. The HST would then set out
again with or without passenger according to a defined operating rule, in degraded mode adapted
to the failure. The HST would next join a maintenance site for a thorough corrective maintenance.
Corrective maintenance or repair:
A corrective maintenance or repair is a maintenance action in final matter carried out by

maintenance staff on a failed HST, function or component. After repair, the HST must recover all its
original functional characteristics.
5.1.4 GENERAL MAINTENANCE POLICY

The general maintenance policy consists in describing the principle of maintenance. lt gives
information concerning part or complete activities (maintenance actions) sub-contracted by the ·"·"·-
Consortium plus the form of the respective agreement.
Req 04
I E The Consortium shall prepare the model to be used for servicing, preventive and corrective
maintenance actions, frequency and scheduling.
This model shall be adapted to the operation plan conditions and constraints defined in the
documents:
5.1.5 GENERAL MAINTENANCE DIAGRAM

The general maintenance diagrams of the proposed maintenance organization shall clearly identify
the job responsibilities, especially safety-critical maintenance operations.
Req 05
IE The Consortium shall prepare the general maintenance diagrams to be used for maintenance
organization. A
These diagrams shall be adapted to the Basic Service Plan conditions and constraints defined in
the documents:
5.2 MAINTENANCE RULES PLAN
Maintenance actions to be carried out:
• According to specific maintenance rules and procedures related to:

o Servicing maintenance
o Preventive maintenance,
• With reference to maintenance rules and procedures plus manufacturing documentation; related
to corrective maintenance.
~ HHR- LO- MR -402- SYS-001 -F1 Romog S1ook M,;"""'"re PAGE 14/39
.-~...
I
These rules and procedures must contain all the necessary information to describe the RSK
system and to carry out its maintenance. They shall also be used to carry out the training and the
education of the maintenance staff.
The maintenance rules and procedures shall be based on:
Req 06
1: The experience acquired on identical or similar equipment (or part of equipment) already in
service,
11: The analysis of the forward planning studies with regard to reliability, maintainability, availability
and safety carried out when equipment was designed and when studies were carried out on the
modification of equipment already in service,
[ Direct and continuous observation of the behavior of the constituent parts or similar parts,
[ The results of any tests carried out on equipment itself.
Several types of documents exist to keep a high level of maintenance and to support the RSK.
Mandatory rules and procedures documentation required shall be made up of the following
documents:
• System documentation,
• Maintenance documentation,
• Spare parts documentation.
5.2.1 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION
The purpose of system documentation is to provide general information on the RSK system
allowing its comprehension by a person external to the project. This documentation shall be
illustrated and easily understandable.
System documentation is mandatory for any person wanting to acquire a brief knowledge of the
RSK.
RSK system documentation shall be provided by the Consortium.
5.2.2 MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION
The purpose of the maintenance documentation is to provide the information making it possible to
maintain or restore the rolling stock under its normal conditions of operating and safety.
The mandatory maintenance documentation required shall be made up of the following documents:
• The functional notices that describes in details the operation of the RSK ·and its principal
functions and components. They are for:
o maintenance staff,
o maintenance engineers .
• The servicing maintenance documents (cycle and procedures) that provide the information
making it possible to maintain the rolling stock under daily good comfort, operating and safety
conditions. They are for sub-contractor (cleaning, catering, water, toilet. .. ) and maintenance
staff (quick inspection, wearable components exchange .. . ).
• The preventive maintenance documents (cycle and procedures) that provide the information
making it possible to maintain the rolling stock under long term good conditions of comfort,
operating and safety. They are for maintenance staff.
Ref: HHR- LO- MR -402- SYS -001 -F1 Rolling Stock Maintenance PAGE 15/39
cf-
• The corrective maintenance documents that provide the elements making it possible to restore
the rolling stock system under normal conditions of operating and safety following a breakdown,
damage or an accident. They are for:
o maintenance staff,
o drivers,
o train crew.
However, the final choice of maintenance documentation type and content is left to the discretion of
the Consortium . Should the Consortium propose an alternative solution to the mandatory
maintenance documentation defined in this chapter, it must be able to demonstrate that the
alternative is at least equivalent in RAMS performance.
RSK maintenance documentation shall be provided by the Consortium .
5.2.3 SPARE PARTS DOCUMENTATION
The purpose of the spare part documentation is to provide the information making it possible to
understand the decomposition of the train , especially its equipment, components and Line
Replaceable Unit (LRU) in order facilitate their supply.
lt is for:
• maintenance staff,
• storekeepers.
The spare parts documentation shall be made up of the following documents:
• The illustrated catalogues documents that provide all necessary information for comprehension
(drawings in 3 dimensions, illustrations ... ) and for knowledge of the composition of the RSK.
They would also gather information on each RSK component as description, quantity,
characteristic, manufacturer number, etc.
• The spare parts list with full information allowing for the supply of the RSK spare parts during all
the lifespan of the HST system.
• The RSK design drawings complete collection including components, sub-components, LRU,
sub-LRU, spare parts, etc.
• Etc.
However, the final choice of spare part documentation type and content is left to the discretion of
the Consortium. Should the Consortium propose an alternative solution to the spare part
documentation defined in this chapter, it must be able to demonstrate that the alternative is at least
RSK spare part documentation shall be provided by the Consortium.
5.2.4DOCUMENTATION MANA GEMENT S YSTEM
The purpose of the documentation management system is to provide all the necessary information
for maintaining the RSK in a high level of quality and operating conditions .
lt is for:
• maintenance staff,
• storekeepers.
0--:, HHR- LG- MR -402- SYS-001 -F1 Rom"9 Stook M•iotoo.ore PAGE 16/39
The documentation management system shall be based on a computerized system (software and
hardware).
RSK documentation management system shall be provided by the Consortium .
5.3 MAINTENANCE FOLLOW UP PLAN

According to Basic Service Plan and maintenance documentation cycle, preventive maintenance
needs to be scheduled and to have a close follow up.
Corrective maintenance needs also to be recorded to keep feedback and traceability.
Regular logs will provide back-up and records for enquiries needs. Formalized feedback
management is particularly recommended in order to initiate improvement to the day-to-day
performance.
lt shall allow regular search to get information and analysis (reliability, maintainability, lifespan ... ).
This software and its development for the maintenance system is the responsibility of the
Consortium :
• Network inside each maintenance sites,
• Interconnection between maintenance sites .
However, the final choice of maintenance information and control system type and content is left to
the discretion of the Consortium . Should the Consortium propose an alternative solution to the
software defined in this chapter, it must be able to demonstrate that the alternative is at least
Req 11
11: The Consortium is in charge of developing a maintenance information and control computerized
system (software and hardware),
11: The system shall schedule, manage and follow up the whole maintenance actions,
11: The system shall also integrate archiving and history management functions .
5.4 MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES
RSK Maintenance activities are:

• The whole maintenance actions intended to maintain and or restore a HST under a status or
given conditions of reliability, so as to achieve its necessary functions.
• A combination of technical, administrative and management actions.
The RSK maintenance system shall comprise several levels of maintenance activities.
)
Ref: HHR- LO- MR -402- SYS -001-F1 Rolling Stock Maintenance
f--
PAGE 17/39
These maintenance activities can be associated to basic maintenance sites:
• Activities on type 1 sites,

• Activities on type 5 sites.
In addition, some maintenance activities are possible without specific site:
• On ground activities,
• On board activities.
This maintenance activity classification was identified as the simplest and most straightforward
method for defining protocols. lt can be easily referenced by describing the maintenance and
inspection services to be required at each basic maintenance site; type 1 to type 5.
This classification is also in accordance with the quantity and the nature (complexity and skill-level
of workers) of the work to be carried out.
Req 13
I l The Consortium shall develop basic maintenance sites according to the activities classification
define in this chapter.
5.4.1 ON GROUND ACTIVITIES
These maintenance activities are:

• RSK on run automatic maintenance actions,
• To be carried out during operations hours,
• To be carried on ground, during the trip.
They include on ground devices for monitoring and automatic failure record (hot wheel box
detectors .. .),
They need high speed line on ground devices and measurement equipments.
The Consortium shall develop on ground maintenance activities.
5.4.2 ON BOARD ACTIVITIES
These maintenance activities are:

• RSK on run automatic maintenance actions,
• To be carried out during operations hours,
• To be carried on board, during the trip.
They include on board devices for monitoring and automatic failure record (On Board Computer
System .. . ),
They need RSK on board devices and measurement equipments.
The Consortium shall be in charge of developing on board maintenance activities.
t-
Rof' HHR- LO- MR -402- SYS-001-F1 Roll;og Stook M•lotoooooe PAGE 18/39
5.4.3ACTIVITIES ON TYPE 1 SITES

These maintenance activities are related to RSK on run maintenance actions:
• Servicing maintenance,
• Emergency breakdown service.
They must be performed with no disturbance to the Basic Service Plan:
• During day time,
• According to operation plan schedule,
• In a station , between two trips,
• On a stabling area, between morning and evening peak time.
They include:
• In service monitoring realized before train departure, during run or at train arrival. When
systematic, some of these operations can be performed by operating labour (driver,
conductor. .. ),
• Water tank refilling,
• Fast cleaning between two runs,
• Fast troubleshooting following an on run failure,
• Fast comfort and safety inspection inside coaches.
• Etc.
These activities require type 1 site facilities such as:
• A stabling area with simple equipments:
o Roof covered stabling tracks,
o Accesses for cleaning and inspection team ,
o Electricity and water supply.
The Consortium shall develop maintenance activities on site type 1.

These maintenance activities are to related to RSK on run maintenance actions:
• Servicing maintenance,
• Emergency breakdown service.
They must be performed with no disturbance to the Basic Service Plan:
• During overnight stabling,
• According to Basic Service Plan schedule,
• In a station where overnight stabling is allowed,
• On an overnight stabling area, close to a station, between evening and morning peak time.
They include:
• Troubleshooting following an on run failure,
• Comfort and safety inspection inside coaches,
• Daily inside cleaning ,
• Outside washing,
• Water tank refilling,
• Specific works according to rolling stock specificity and cycle.
• Etc.
)
Type 2 sites require :

• A stabling area with:
o Roof covered tracks,
o Accesses for cleaning and inspection team ,
o Electrical and water supply.
• Exterior washing machine,
• Toilet empting or filling vehicle,
• Specific maintenance facilities according to RSK maintenance requirements:
o Wheel-set monitoring equipment,
o Wheel-set automatic ultrasound system,
o Etc.
5.4.5ACT/VIT/ES ON TYPE 3 SITE

•'
These maintenance activities concern RSK light maintenance actions:
• Servicing maintenance
• Conditional preventive maintenance
They must be peliormed with no disturbance to the Basic Service Plan
• Between two trips:
o During day stabling, between morning and evening peak time,
o During overnight stabling, between evening and morning peak time.
• According to maintenance cycle schedule,
• On a maintenance area equipped with basic equipment (roof, pit, platform ... ),
• By day and night working shift.
They include:
• Quick functional checks and tests,
• Systematic quick periodic examination to detect any anomalies that could affect:
o Major components so as to guarantee a high level of safety,
o Passenger comfort and safety so as to guarantee a high level of service,
• Quick comfort inspection,
• Sand and water refilling,
• Toilet system recycling,
• Etc.
Type 3 site requires:
• A roof covered tracks system equipped with:
o Catenary,
o Inspection pits,
o Inspection platforms,
o Toilet filling and emptying systems (automatic),
o Sand and water refilling systems.
o Accesses for cleaning and inspection team everywhere,
o Electricity and water supply,
o Etc.
• A building for maintenance staff,
• A storage area for spare parts.
~HR- LO- MR -402- SYS-001-F1 Romog Stock M•tot~'"' PAGE20/39

These maintenance activities are related RSK light maintenance:

• Systematic preventive maintenance,
• Conditional preventive maintenance,
lt cannot be performed between two trips and requires to temporary stop the HST.
They are performed:

• According to maintenance cycle,
• A maintenance site equipped with specific equipments and dedicated facilities,
• During day and night working shift.
They include:
• Detailed and systematic periodic inspection of main components and functions (preventive
maintenance),
• Exchange of worn LRU . This work is triggered within the framework of systematic preventive
maintenance (when a component reaches the end of its programmed life) and conditional
preventive maintenance (when it is noted in the course of an inspection that the normal
operation threshold criteria have been reached),
• Exchange of failed LRU . The replacement is triggered within the framework of corrective
maintenance.
• Etc.
Type 4 site require the following facilities:
• A large indoor tracks system equipped with:
o Inspection pits,
o Inspection platforms,
o Movable catenary,
o Electricity and water supply,
o Etc.
• Specific indoor tracks:
o Heavy cleaning track,
o Simultaneous lifting track,
o Dropping table track,
o Wheel-set truing (reprofiling) lathe track,
o Etc.
• Small building for specialty shops (Electrical, Mechanical, Pneumatical, Body and fitting .. . )
equipped with:
o Area for maintenance workers,
o Storage area for spare parts,
o Various facilities to test HST functions,
o Various facilities to exchange components,
o Etc.
o -: ~I
5.4.7 ACTIVITIES ON SITE TYPE 5
These maintenance activities are related to RSK heavy maintenance:

• Conditional preventive maintenance:
o On RSK car-body structure (middle life, renovation),
o On components overhaul (components replaced following conditional
preventive maintenance cycle).
• Corrective maintenance or repair:
o On RSK car-body structure (accidents, fire ... ),
o On components overhaul (components replaced following corrective
maintenance).
These activities are to be performed according to RSK maintenance cycle and require:
• Stopping the HST runs during several days on a heavy maintenance workshop to treat the HST
car-body structure. This workshop is equipped with big size, expensive and heavy facilities
(blasting tunnel, painting cab ... ),
• Receiving components to be repaired from type 4 maintenance activity site, overhauling them,
and sending them back. Such heavy workshop includes several specialties shops (wheel -set,
bogie, brake, power unit .. . ) equipped with industrial working chains and manufacturing facilities
(testers, lathes ... ).
8 ..
They include:
• Interventions on HST car-body structure and on LRU, carried out to restore to said elements the
same level of operation or comfort as those of identical new ones. These interventions (or
overhaul operations) involve resources related to a reconstruction of a HST,
• Production tasks for modernization or for taking evolutions into account,
• Overhaul of failed LRU exchanged during maintenance activities on type 3 and 4 sites,
• Corrective maintenance actions of LRU and heavy repairs to a HST car body following traffic
accidents (collisions, .. . ),
• Procedures implying the control of a specific and or complex technology, that required to
purchase of specialized support equipment.
• Etc.
Type 5 sites require the following facilities:
• Specific outdoor tracks (test track),
• Specific indoor tracks :
o Un-coupling,
o Lifting,
o Un-lifting,
o Coupling,
Q-.
o Static test.
• Large building for specialty shops:
o Car-body shop,
o Structure pre-treatment & Painting Shop,
o Power car shop,
o Coaches test area,
o Etc.
• Large building for components shops (traction motor, wheel-set, air conditioning unit ... )
equipped with:
o Area for maintenance workers,
o Storage area for spare parts,
o Various facilities for testing of HST functions,
o Various facilities to exchange components ,
o Etc.
• Warehouse building,
• Etc.
+ - : : :HR- LO- MR -402- SYS-001-F1 RoiUog Stook Molotoo.ooe PAGE 22/39

c
5.5 SITE TYPE PLAN
5.5.1 INTEGRATED SITES

The scheme below shows the concept design of an integrated maintenance site system.
All maintenance sites types are located on one single area. This system allows for performing all
the maintenance activities (except on ground activities) in the same place.
r
r-------------------,
2
i --------- ~--------- 1
5
But in general :
• The type 1 sites are in fact station tracks or a stabling area,
• The type 2 to 4 sites are integrated and named DEPOT or SMALL DEPOT. They are located as
close as possible to stations,
• The site type 5 is named WORKSHOP or HEAVY WORKSHOP, and can be located anywhere.
The locations, sizes, capacities and the local context constraints of maintenance sites are an
important criterion for the organization of maintenance facilities and for achieving adequate fleet
availability.
Therefore the maintenance site system shall be adapted to the Basic Service Plan conditions and
constraints defined in the documents:
Req 21
[ The location, the size, the capacity and the local context constraints shall be taken into account
by the Consortium to prepare the most efficient RSK maintenance sites system .
More details about sites requirements are defined in the following documents:
• HHR-LO- DW -403-SYS-001 Small Depot Specifications,
5.5.2 SITES LOCATIONS

Three maintenance areas are possible:
• Near Makkah for activities on sites type 1 to 4,
• Km 125 for activities on sites type 1 to 5,

• Near Madinah for activities on sites type 1 to 4.
Details about sites location requirements are defined in the following documents:
However, the final choice of maintenance sites locations is left to the discretion of the Consortium .
Should the Consortium propose an alternative solution , it must be able to demonstrate that the
Req 22
1£ The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites location for an optimized operation of
approximately 55 HST fleet till 2022 .
I[ The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites location for a fleet extension to approximately
100 HST from 2022 to 2042 .
5.5.3 SITES SIZES
The maintenance system size shall be proposed for a fleet of approximately 55 HST. This fleet
corresponds to the requirements of the Basic Service Plan in 2022.
A fleet extension to approximately 100 HST is to be considered according to the Basic Service Plan
in 2042. Therefore, the maintenance system size and organization must make possible this fleet
extension.
More details about sites sizes are defined in the following documents:
However, the final choice of maintenance sites sizes is left to the discretion of the Consortium .
Should the Consortium propose an alternative solution, it must be able to demonstrate that the
Req 23
E The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites sizes for an optimized operation of
approximately 55 HST fleet till 2022.
E The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites sizes for a fleet extension to approximately
100 HST from 2022 to 2042 .
5.5.4 SITES CAPACITIES
The location but also the capacity of the RSK maintenance system shall allow the fundamental
HST maintenance actions during:
• The Construction Period; from the arrival of the first HST element in the KSA until the beginning
of the operating period.
• A 30 year operating period; according to the HST life span .
Fundamental HST maintenance actions during operating period are described in previous
chapters.
The activities to be carried out during the Construction Period are:

• Stabling of coaches before integration ,
• Integration of coaches (coupling and connections between coaches for train assembly).
• HST testing after integration,
HST stabling before operating period ,
Facilities and equipments for retrofitting,
e : HHR- LO- MR -402- SYS-001-F1 Rolling Stock Maintenance PAGE 24/39

• Facilities and equipment allowing for preventive and corrective maintenance during Testing &
Commissioning runs.
Details about sites capacity requirements are defined in the following documents:
However, the final choice of maintenance sites capacity is left to the discretion of the Consortium.
alternative is at least equivalent in RAMS performance and adapted to the operation plan
conditions and constraints defined in the documents:
Req 24
1:: The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites capacity in connection with Construction
Period of approximately 35 HST, from commencement of passenger services .
E The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites capacity for an optimized operation of
··-· · approximately 55 HST fleet from commencement of passenger services to 2022.
' -·
1:: The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites capacity for a fleet extension to approximately
100 HST from 2022 to 2042.
5.5.5 SITES LOCAL CONTEXT

Each site of the maintenance system shall integrate and respect the local context in terms of:
• Climatic conditions,
• Religious practices,
• Existing standards or practices:
o Social rules,
o Maintenance building style,
o Labor organization
o Etc.
More details about local context in terms of climatic condition and social rules are defined in the
documents named:
• HHR-LO-CT-602-SAU-001 General Specifications - Appendix B: Annual Climate and
Weather in KSA,
• MINISTRY OF INTERIOR - KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA - SOCIAL RULES.
For example, according to the heavy sun and high temperature conditions, each activity shall be
covered by a roof in order:
• To prevent high temperature inside the RSK,
• To avoid keeping HST energized,
• To preserve acceptable working conditions to maintenance staff.
Details about sites local context requirements are defined in the following documents:
However, the final choice of maintenance sites context is left to the discretion of the Consortium.
Req 25
lr The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites witch take into account and respect KSA local
context.
5.5.6SITES FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT

lt is mandatory to use modern equipment and state-of-the-art technology for facilities. The main
characteristics of facilities and equipments such as wheel lathes, gantries, traveling cranes, lifting
equipment, etc. shall be also provided
Details about sites facilities and equipment requirements are defined in the following documents:
However, the final choice of maintenance sites facilities and equipment is left to the discretion of
the Consortium . Should the Consortium propose an alternative solution, it must be able to
demonstrate that the alternative is at least equivalent in RAMS performance.
The maintenance plan for these facilities and equipment shall be updated on a regular basis. Their
maintenance should as far as possible be planned whenever no HST is in workshop.
Req 26
il:The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites facilities and equipment in connection with
Construction Period of approximately 35 HST, from commencement of passenger services ..
I: The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites facilities and equipment for an optimized
operation of approximately 55 HST fleet from from commencement of passenger services to
2022.
1: The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites facilities and equipment for a fleet extension
to approximately 100 HST from 2022 to 2042.
5.5.7SITES DETAIL FACILITY LAYOUT

Details of the proposed general layout of each site showing access, covered and non -covered
areas, plus the main location of facilities such as wheel lathes, gantries, traveling cranes, lifting
equipment, etc. shall be also provided.
Details about sites facility layout requirements are defined in the following documents:
Req 27
[ The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites layout for an optimized operation of
approximately 55 HST till 2022 .
[ The Consortium shall propose maintenance sites layout for a fleet extension to approximately
100 HST from 2022 to 2042.
5.6 TOOLING PLAN
As part of the Maintenance Plan, a list of the main tools required in relation to RSK technology shall
be compiled, as well as a list of the main general tools to be used. lt is required to use appropriate
tools and machines in order to facilitate performance and minimize down times.
The maintenance plan for the main tools shall be regularly reviewed and updated by the
_IConsortium. The maintenance of these tools shall take place of course during periods when no
~ HST is under maintenance.
)
Details about facility tooling plan requirements are defined in the following documents:
5.7 LABOR, RECRUITMENT AND TRAINING PLANS

In order to define the maintenance staff management, a quantitative and qualitative analysis of
maintenance system labor is necessary.
This analyze will conduct to:

• Each site manpower table,
• Each site recruitment plan,
Maintenance staff training is a critical point to keep a high level of quality. Consortium shall provide
specific training plan, according to:
• Maintenance staff position (staff, manager. .. ),
• Maintenance staff specialty (power unit, pneumatic, troubleshooting ... ),
• RSK technology,
• Maintenance rule plan (see chapter 5.2).
Req 29
£ Consortium is entirely responsible for recruiting and training maintenance staff,
[ Consortium shall specify the qualifications (initial formations, graduate ... ) of the maintenance
staff for each maintenance activity,
[ Consortium shall provide a long-term training plan for training and maintaining the skills of
maintenance staff.
5.8 MAINTENANCE DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT
For all plans defined in this chapter 5 (General policy, Maintenance rules, Maintenance follow up,
Maintenance activities, Site type, Tooling plan, Labor, recruitment and training), the Government
reserves its right to follow the Consortium design and development during the whole Construction
Period, through appointed inspectors, specialized in the field of HST maintenance.
Req 30
E The Consortium shall propose a design and development policy.
1: This policy shall include:
- Design review and development plan ,
- Audits by operator and relevant authorities,
-Etc.
The inspectors shall be selected and paid by the Government, based in the Consortium office and
shall report to the Government.
Req 31
I£ The Consortium shall give inspectors all authorizations to collect any data and to attend to any
internal meeting about RSK maintenance and connected activities, under the Construction
Period.
6. COST PLAN
6.1 LIFE CYCLE COST
The overall life cycle cost of the RSK is made up of all the expenses incurred for the user by virtue
of:
• The acquisition,
• The management,
• The maintenance
throughout its service life.
Req 32
The life cycle cost of the RSK shall be provided by the Consortium .
6.2 MAINTENANCE COST PRODUCTIVITY
The optimization of the overall cost of possession of a RSK thus consists in taking a judicious
balance between the actions:
• Designed to keep a high level of comfort and safety (servicing maintenance actions),
• Designed to prevent the occurrence of a fault (preventive maintenance actions),
• Intended to rectify the effects of a breakdown or of a fault (corrective maintenance actions).
The maintenance policy must be perfectly tailored to the safety imperatives and to the quality
objectives, and must enable the best compromise between the costs which they generate through
their application and the costs of any faults which would occur in the event of the total absence of
maintenance.
The optimization of costs means that the nature and scope of the work carried out in the course of
maintenance operations must continually be judiciously adjusted to the actual degradation
occurring in commercial operation and any changes in such degradation over time.
Req 33
I: The Consortium shall propose a maintenance cost productivity policy to protect the Operator )
and the Relevant Authorities against the escalation of RSK maintenance costs.
[. This policy shall include:
- Maintenance cost commitments,
-Audits by operator and relevant authorities,
-Etc.
The Government inspectors specified in chapter 5.8 (Maintenance design and development) would
be also in charge to follow the maintenance cost productivity.
Req 34
1£ The Consortium shall give inspectors all authorizations to collect data and to attend to
maintenance activities during the operating period.
Ref: HHR- LO- MR -402- SYS-001 -F 1 Rolling Stock Maintenance PAGE 28/39
7. QUALITY AND RAMS MANAGEMENT PLAN
The quality and performance of maintenance operations is a key element in the overall quality of
the service. As part of the Quality and RAMS management the Consortium must provide a quality
plan for maintenance as well as a RAMS plan, covering Reliability, Availability, Maintainability,
Safety (RAMS) approach.
7.1 RSK QUALITY PLAN
Req 35
11: The Consortium shall establish the corresponding quality assurance plans and procedures and
ensure adhesion to all chapters thereof.
Any major modification to the quality assurance plans and or procedures during operating period
shall be notified to the Government and or relevant authority (inspectors .. . ) for evaluation
purposes.
7.2 RSK RELIABILITY PLAN
RSK Reliability is measured by delay at HST arrival at its station . The general requirements and
expected targets for the HST are defined in the following documents:
• HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 RAMS Assurance Requirements,
• HHR-LO-PR-602-SYS-001 Performance Requirement.
7.2.1 KEY FUNCTIONS AND OR COMPONENTS RELIABILITY PLAN

Key functions and/or components are those of higher hierarchy for rolling stock maintenance and in
term of HST reliability could be:
• Traction motor,
• Air production,
• Etc.
The final key function and or component list shall be provided by the Consortium, according to:
• The RSK technology,
• The Consortium analysis,
• The testing & commissioning feedback,
• The operating period feedback .
From the final key functions and/or components, the Consortium shall provide description, studies
and targets in terms of MTBF.
Req 36
1: The Consortium shall establish the final key function and or component list.
t According to this list, the Consortium shall provide description, studies and targets in terms of
MTBF.
Any HST out of service due to malfunctioning of any of its key function and/or components will be
treated as not available and counted in the calculation of availability rate In accordance with the
documents HHR-LO-PR-602-SYS-001 Performance Requirement.
)
Also , special attention shall be devoted to the alarm devices function (cinematic chain, traction
regulation .. . ) with targets of missed indications limits shall be given . Above studies must be
regularly updated on the basis of the needs identified and in relation to maintenance staff turnover. 0---
7.3 RSK AVAILABILITY
RSK shall be designed to be available for service throughout its life without operating restrictions
(speed, in particular) outside of maintenance periods.
RSK unavailability due to maintenance is a significant factor in overall fleet availability.
The general requirements and expected targets for the RSK are defined in the following
documents:
• HHR-LO-PR-602-SYS-001 Performance Requirement.
7.4 RSK AND COMPONENTS MAINTAINABILITY PLAN
Maintainability is the ability to handle maintenance operations in such a way as to minimize

downtime and to alleviate the constraints of major components replacements.
RSK maintainability must be optimized in order to:

• Limit the durations and consistencies of the maintenance actions,
• Satisfy the RSK availability goal according to operation requirement.
The key factor is also primarily the RSK design, the layout of maintenance facilities and efficient
tooling.
The organization of operation and RSK maintenance requires the maintainability to be specified
according to:
• Maintainability during operation,
• Maintainability during servicing,
o During day time between two trips or during overn ight stabling ,
o According to maintenance cycle schedule, but organized in order to not disturb
operation plan.
• Maintainability during light maintenance,
• Maintainability during heavy maintenance.
The Consortium shall describe measures to cope with these requirements and a description of it as
part of its Bids.
The general requirements in terms of maintainability are defined in the following document:
7.4.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAINTAINABILITY DURING OPERATION
These requirements shall be adapted to the Basic Service Plan conditions and constraints defined
in the documents:
Ref: HHR- LO- MR -402· SYS-001 -F 1 Rolling Stock Maintenance PAGE 30/39
(
The RSK maintenance shall be designed to allow:
Req 37
1: The procedure to put into service (tests before departure) a HST single or double unit in less
than 15 minutes.
:E The procedure to prepare the HST (commercial conditions, temperature adjustment. .. ) in less
than 1 hour.
:E The time available for operation not less than 18 hours per days.
I' In case of a major failure requiring on line assistance (at the time of the arrival of the rescue
locomotive or HST), the procedure to pull or push the HST out of the main line in less than 15
minutes after the arrival of the assistance.
[ In case of minor failure to the HST (which does not cause the termination of commercial
service), the procedure to re-assume its service in less than 5 minutes after the discovery of
the breakdown origin.
7.4.2REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAINTAINABILITY DURING SERVICING

These requirements shall be adapted to the Basic Service Plan conditions and constraints defined
in the documents:
General requirements
Req 38
[ All servicing maintenance action duration (included cleaning) in less than 4 hours,
11: The interval of servicing maintenance higher level action (activity 3) upper than or equal
to 5 000 kilometers .
1t To reach the electrical socket to energy the RSK (or to charge the battery) from outside,
1: Daily external washing of the HST with an automatic washing machine without degradation on
the HST external image,
E Easy daily cleaning of the HST interior fitting: seats, floor, panels, doors, windows, etc,
1: To carry out simple servicing maintenance (draining, replacement of filters , adjustments) without
action on an adjacent component.
E Visual monitoring of degradation of fixings part whose failure could pose risk for passenger
injury inside the HST and for component to fall down on the track.
Filing requirements
Air, sand, drivers cab windscreen water, sanitary water and toilet system shall be designed to allow
filling :
Req 39
11: From outside the RSK,
11: From both sides the RSK,
1: Easily by presence of filling indicator visible from outside on each side,
I[ Duration in less than 10 minutes.
Toilet requirements
Toilet system shall be designed to allow draining and rinsing :
Req 40
[. From outside the RSK,
l From both side the RSK,
[. Presence of full status indicator visible from outside on each side,
E Possibility draining and rinsing from only one side,
E Duration in less than 10 minutes,
E Interval upper than or equal to 4 days.
7.4.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAINTAINABILITY DURING LIGHT

MAINTENANCE
RSK shall have a maintainable design to allow:
Req 41
[. Greasing and lubrication as simple as possible.
I: To prevent and protect mechanical articulations (dampers, rods .. . ) against sand and pollution.
r. To check easily all the functions on the pneumatic circuits (Presence of pressure taps).
E. To prevent and protect electronic components against clogging (Pollution on the drawers,
electronic boards, switchgear ... ).
E To carry out vibratory check of all the auxiliary motors with high voltage protection .
E Withdraw of components often inspected (batteries .. . ) without dismounting them and without
additional tools.
£ Components having an incidence on the safety of circulations to be checkable by non-
destructive tests (sweating, ultrasounds, magnetic test...).
,E Fastener parts to be withdrawn with conventional tools.
LRU requirements
RSK LRU shall have a maintainable design to allow:
Req 42
E Each LRU to be disassembled and reassembled independently of those which are adjacent to
it.
,1: Each LRU to be easily accessible as well as -the fastener parts (nuts, screw, clamps, bolts ... )
and connections.
1
1: The easy removal of heavy components or LRU install~d on the side of the RSK (sliding or
telescopic rails . So they could be mounted and dismounted directly with a fork lift.
1£: LRU fasteners and connections quick disassembling and reassembling (in particular
connections: electric, pneumatic, hydraulic and cooling).
Ref: HHR- LO- MR -402- SYS-001 -F1 Rolling Stock Maintenance PAGE 32/3 9
( .
Bogie requirements
RSK bogie shall have a maintainable design to allow:
To connect removed bogie and to move them using a towing vehicle.
Control and adjustment of the critical bogie components (brake disks, brake pads, wheels running
surfaces, brake system .. . ) shall be done:
Req44
11: By direct visual examination from the pits,
11: By adjustments without specific tool.
Wheel-set requirements
RSK wheel-set shall have a maintainable design to allow:
Req 45
I[ High pressure water cleaning without any axle boxes damage,
I[ To re-profile the wheels running surfaces with an underground pit lathe without preliminary
disassembling.
RSK wheel-set design shall allow to use the most efficient equipment for diagnosis:
Req 46
I[ Ultrasound bench on fixed station (wheels, axes, discs),
11: Automatic geometrical measurements (diameter, balance, profile of wheel running surface,
spacing of the faces of wheels, OR. ..) and controls of wheels cracks.
7.4.4REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MAINTAINABILITY DURING HEAVY

MAINTENANCE
Req 47
11:Time before mid life overhaul upper than or equal to 15 years after entering into service ..
ll To run up to 600 000 kilometers per year, on the basis of 15 years, after entering into service,
without heavy maintenance on the car body structure.
IE Interior refurbishment schedulable on several maintenance periods in less than 4 days (out of
peak period of operation).
Bogie requirements
RSK bogie shall have a maintainable design to allow:
To move the bogie (with wheel-sets and possible transmission) on the workshop track.
Ref: HHR- LO- MR -402- SYS -001 -F1 Rolling Stock Maintenance
Window requirements
RSK window shall have a maintainable design to allow:
Req 49
I All the coaches side windows replacement, from the interior of the vehicle, in less than 4 days
(out of peak period of operation).
7.5 TRAIN SAFETY PLAN
Ratios of safety critical events could be the number of such events per million kilometers (for each
HST).
The general requirements and expected targets for the HST are defined in the following document
HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 RAMS Assurance Requirements,
7.5.1 CRITICAL FUNCTIONS AND/OR COMPONENTS SAFETY PLAN

.•.•.
Maintenance critical functions and critical components are those of major consequences on
operation and therefore, have a major importance in the safety plan.
Critical functions and or components in term of passenger safety could be:

• Access doors.
• Air conditioning devices,
• Etc.
Critical functions and or components in term of HST movement safety could be:
• Wheel-sets,
• Braking system,
• Etc.
The final critical functions and or component list shall be provided by the Consortium , according to:
• The RSK technology,
• The Consortium analysis,
• The testing & commissioning feedback ,
• The operating period feedback.
The Consortium shall provide studies and targets in terms of MTBF for the key and critical
components . Above studies must be regularly updated on the basis of the needs identified and in
relation to maintenance staff turnover.
Any HST out of service due to malfunctioning of any of its critical function and/or components will
be treated as not available and accounted for in the calculation of the availability rate in accordan ce
with the document HHR-LO-PR-602-SYS-001 Performance Requirement.
Req 50
ll The Consortium shall establish the final critical function an/or component list (passenger safety),
1
[ The Consortium shall establish the final critical function and/or component list (HST movement
safety),
j[ According to these lists, the Consortium shall provide description, studies and targets in terms
of MTBF.
7.6 RAMS IMPROVEMENT PLAN

The Consortium shall establish, at least annually, an appropriate plan to improve the different
RAMS components listed above. This plan is submitted for discussion to the Government and/or
relevant authority (inspectors ... ).
Req 51
lr The Consortium shall establish an annually RAMS improvement plan during the operating
period,
....·.
.....
~.
Ref: HHR- LO- MR -402- SYS-001 -F1 Rolling Stock Maintenance

8. TOLERANCES AND EXCEPTIONS
Measurements related to parts identified as safety-related such as :

• Key functions and/or components (see chapter 7.2.1 ).
• Critical functions and/or components (see chapter 7.5.1),
shall comply with the values and criteria specified in the maintenance documentation.
Any situation that does not conform to this requirement, and that may happen in exceptional
circumstances, and for a short period only, must imperatively be reported to the Government and
or the relevant authority (inspector ... ) using a derogation form. This derogation form shall be
approved by the Government and or the relevant authority (inspector... ) prior the HST run.
Ref: HHR- LO- MR -402- SYS-001 -F 1 Rolling Stock Maintenance P AGE 36/39
9. STATUS OF THE HST FLEET
The consortium shal l take all dispositions to guarantee the status of the RSK during the contract
period. The goal is to prevent Consortium to minimize the maintenance activities, especially at the
end of the contract.
9.1 AT THE END OF THE CONTRACT
To avoid any over cost caused by an insufficient maintenance at the end of the contract the
Government will ask The Consortium a full evaluation of the status of the HST fleet with the
assistance of the Government inspectors specified in chapters 5.8 and 6.2.
Req 52
E The Consortium shall give inspectors all authorizations to collect any data and to attend to any
RSK maintenance activities in any site, under the evaluation period.
The evaluation shall be :
• Done according to inspector's recommendations and working plans,
• Made on each HST, during a six (6) months evaluation period,
Req 53
[ The Consortium shall provide a complete evaluation of the status of the whole fleet during the
last six months of the contract.
9.2 PENALTIES
In case of trouble, showing without ambiguity the RSK status is not in accordance with the
maintenance policy:
• The overhaul will be done immediately by the Consortium and paid by him ,
or
• Penalties shall be applied to the Consortium on the basis of ten times the overhaul costs.
APPENDIX
~HR- LO- MR -402- SVS-<l01-F1 Rolllog Stook M•lotoo.o" PAGE 38/39

APPENDIX N°1: EXAMPLE OF BASIC

MAINTENANCE ORGANIZATION DIAGRAM
Legend:
• HST
............
•
•
LRU overhaul-able :
LRU not overhaul-able: .........
HST fleet
I
Servicing area (site type 1 to 3) Small Depot (site type 1 to 4)
•
• •• •• •• •
• •• •
• • •••
•
•• • • •• •
.•
•
Workshop (site type 5)
•••
•
•• •
•••
•• •
••
t
• • .:•• .•••• •••
•
•
•
' •
HST components manufacturers, LRU manufacturers and
or sub-contractors
'
• •
• •
t:
' HST Manufacturer '
Operation and Driving indicate the whole divisions which manage the HST fleet service. These
divisions organize the RSK runs and the first maintenance activity.
The SMALL DEPOTS manage the on run maintenance and the light maintenance. They also
insure the troubleshooting and the replacement of LRU . They are in charge of the availability of the
RS fleet.
The WORKSHOP supports SMALL DEPOTS and is in charge of the heavy maintenance. lt insures
the overhaul of the LRU and makes the heavy repair on the RSK car-body structure (oxidation
treatment, coating and painting ... ).
HST manufacturer and HST components manufacturers and or subcontractors supply light depots
and heavy workshop with LRU.
()
0., :lJ~I .bg.b.::.JJ ao ld I Ci.w..w gh I

PHASE 2
-·
(:·;::-: 1
(
~- ·
BASIC SERVICE PLAN
I H I H I R 1-1 L I 0 1-1 0 I p 1-1 4 I 0 I 2 1-1 s I y I s 1-1 0 I 0 I 2 1-1 E I 1 I
IN ASSOCIATION WITH AX
ELCIUM
BASIC SERVICE PLAN
A1 02/05/09 First Issue K.MEYER
A2 14/05/09 Final Draft K.MEYER
B1 30/05/09 Final review K.MEYER .' ..·:·
B2 10/06/09 Final review K. MEYER
C1 29/06/09 Final RFP K.MEYER
Update according to new cafeteria

02 14/09/2009 D PERRONNET
requirement and Linklaters's comments
E1 30/11/2011 Update for Contract Getinsa
REVISION N°: E1 NAME DATE SIGNATURE
PREPARED BY Getinsa 30/11/2011
CHECKED BY R Adams 20/12/2011
VALIDATED BY R Adams 20/12/2011
APPROVED BY R Adams 20/12/2011
Ref: HHR- LO- OP -402- SYS-002-E1 Basic Service Plan PAGE 2/19
BASIC SERVICE PLAN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................ 6
2. REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................................................... 6
2.1 TRAFFIC HYPOTHESIS ..... ... .... ..... .......... ... ... .. .... ....................... ........... .... ... ... ..... ........ ....... .... ........... ....... .... ...... 6
2.2SPECIFIC ASSUMPTIONS IN TERMS OF RUNNING TIMES .... .. .. .. ...... .. .... .. .. .. .. ...... .... .. ...... .. ...... .. .. .... .. .... .. .. ........ . 6
2.3DENSITY OF SERVICE 2012 AND 2022 .................. .. ...... .. .. .. .. .. .......... ...... ...................... .... ........ .. .... .... ........ ..... 7
2.40ENSITY OF SERVICE 2042 ... ..... ................................. ........... .. .. .. .......... ....... .... .......... ... ... ... ................ .. .... .... .. 7
2 .5ACCEPTABLE LOAD FACTOR ....... ........ ... ...... .... ... ...... .................. ..... ... ... .. ........... ..... .... .. .............. .......... ..... .. ... .. 8
2 .6FLEET REQUIREMENTS ................ ........................... .. .. ... ...... ... .... ..... ..... ... ..... ............... .... ............ ........... ... .. ... .. 8
3. ASSUMPTIONS AND GENERAL PRINCIPLES ....................................................................................... 9

3.1 SYSTEM ASSUMPTIONS ... .......... ... ...... ........... .... .. ..... ....................... ... .. ... .... ...... ............................. .. .. ............... 9
3.2ASSUMPTIONS DEDUCED FROM ROUTE CIVIL WORKS AND STATIONS .................. .. .. ...... ........................ ...... . 9
4. SERVICE PLAN IN 2012 ............................................................................................................................ 11

4 .1 TRAIN STOPPING PATTERNS - YEAR 2012 ...... .. .... .... ........................ .. ...... ...... .............. .. .............. .... .. .......... . 11
4.1 .1 Train stopping Pattern - Friday Peak Hour year 2012 ...................... .. .. ............................................ 11
4.1.2 Train stopping Pattern - Friday Off Peak Hour year 2012 .... .. ........................ ...................... ............ 12
4.1 .3 Train stopping Pattern- Week Day Peak Hour year 2012 .................. Error! Bookmark nol defined.
4.1.4 Train stopping Patterns - Week Day Off Peak Hour year 2012 ......... Error! Bookmark nol defined.
5. SERVICE PLAN IN 2022 ............................................................................................................................ 13
5 .1 TRAIN STOPPING PATTERNS - YEAR 2022 .. ... .. .. .... .. ...... ... .... ............. ...... .. .. .. .. ................. ... ... ............. .. .... .. .. 13
5.1.1 Train stopping Pattern - Friday Peak Hour year 2022 .................. .. .. .. ................... .. ......................... 13
5.1.2 Train stopping Pattern - Friday Off-Peak Hour year 2022 .................................................. .. ........... 13
5.1.3 Train stopping Patterns - Week Day Peak Hour year 2022, ............... Error! Bookmark not defined.
5.1.4 Train stopping Patterns - Week Day Off-Peak Hour year 2022 ......... Error! Bookmark not defin ed.
6. SERVICE PLAN IN 2042 ............................................................................................................................ 15
6.1 TRAIN STOPPING PATTERNS - YEAR 2042 .... .. .. .. .. .. .. ........ ................ .. ........ .. ...... .. .. .. ................... .. .... ........... . 15
6. 1. 1 Train stopping Patterns - Friday Peak Hour year 2042 ...... .. .... .................... ... ........ ......................... 15
APPENDICES ....................................................................................................................................................... 16
APPENDIX W1 : TRAFFIC ASSUMPTIONS- YEAR 2012 (JANUARY 2009) .. .. .. .... .... .. .. .. ............................ ..... 17
APPENDIX W2 : TRAFFIC ASSUMPTIONS - YEAR 2022 (JANUARY 2009) .................... .. ........ .. .... .. ....... .. .... .. 18
APPENDIX W3: TRAFFIC ASSUMPTIONS - YEAR 2042 (JANUARY 2009) ............ .......... .. .......... ................... 19
Ref: HHR- LO-OP -402- SYS-002-E1 Basic Service Plan PAGE 3/19
BASIC SERVICE PLAN
Figure 1 : 2012, Train Stopping Patterns, direction Makkah to Madinah Friday, Peak Hour ................................. 11
Figure 2 : 2012, Train Stopping Patterns, direction Makkah to Madinah Week Day, Off-Peak Hour ................ Error!
Bookmark not defined.
Figure 3 : 2022, Train Stopping Patterns, direction Makkah to Madinah, Friday Peak Hour ................................. 13
Figure 4 : 2022, Train Stopping Patterns, direction Makkah to Madinah, Friday Off-Peak Hour............................ 14
Figure 5 : 2022, Train Stopping Patterns, direction Makkah to Madinah Week Day, Peak Hour ... Error! Bookmark
not defined.
Figure 6 : 2022, Train Stopping Patterns, direction Makkah to Madinah Week Day, Off-Peak Hour ................ Error!
Bookmark not defined.
Figure 7 : 2042, Train Stopping Patterns, direction Makkah to Madinah Friday, Peak Hour ................................. 15
Table 1- Minimum Intermediate Station Dwell Times .... ......................................................................................... 6

Table 2 - Number of Tracks per Stations .......... .. ................................................ .................................................. 10
~ ....
Ref: HHR- LO-OP -402- SYS-002-E1 Basic Service Plan

PAGE 4/19
BASIC SERVIC E PLAN
c
PROJECT REFERENCES

2 HHR-LO-MT-402-SYS-001 Rolling Stock Maintenance
Ref: HHR- LO- OP -402- SYS-002-E1 Basic Service Plan

PAGE 5/19
BASIC SERVICE PLAN
1. INTRODUCTION
This document presents the basic service plan for 2012 (Assumed Day one of Operating Period),
2022 and 2042 based on requirements and assumptions defined in paragraph 2 and 3. The proposed
Basic Service Plan for 2012 , 2022 and 2042 defines train stopping patterns (TSP) and number of
trainsets. The aim is to propose a comprehensive solution as a revisable base.
For the overall system design, the Consortium shall design its own Service Plan to meet the same
objectives.
The Actual Day one of Operating Period will be determined by construction progress and the plan
updated by the Consortium accordingly.
2. REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Traffic Hypothesis
Traffic forecasts are focused on 3 dates:

• 2012: Day one of the operating period;
• 2022: 10 years after starting operating to take account of ramp-up;
• 2042: Operations during 30 years.

The Service Plan shall be built with consideration to several periods :
• Friday and Week-Day;
• Distinguishing Peak Hour and Off-Peak Hour.

Traffic matrices are presented in appendix 1 (year 2012), appendix 2 (year 2022) and appendix 3
(year 2042).
2.2 Journey times
Req 01 The objectives of journey time are:

lr 2h30 calling at all stations between Makkah Central and Madinah Central ;
r 2h00 for express train (direct without any stop between Makkah C. and Madinah C.)
The journey time is based on the standard High Speed Train International Service. This high quality
service is assumed to be operated during 18 hours.
The analysis assumed the station dwell times indicated in Table 1 below:
Table 1 - Minimum Intermediate Station Dwell Times

Station Scheduled Dwell Time
6 minutes to 8 minutes (in
Jeddah Central
case of coupling trainset)
KAlA 10 minutes
Ref: HHR· LO· OP -402- SYS-002-E1 Basle Service Plan

PAGE 6/19
BASIC SERVICE PLAN
KAEC 3 minutes
2.3 Density of Service 2012 and 2022
The analysis for year 2012 is derived from the results for year 2022. The rationale is that the
frequency of trains is a very important factor at the beginning of service operation. 1t should not be
simply designed to provide minimum service meeting the expected traffic. The frequency must be
attractive enough to generate an important traffic ramp-up.
The assumption was made to keep the same train frequency in year 2012 and in year 2022 and to
adapt the offer with single units instead of twinset units. Therefore the train services remain the
same between these two years.
The level of train service along various portions of the Railway has been estimated to be required
to deliver the appropriate array of choices of train stopping patterns to passengers at all stations
and to satisfy the project Friday ridership demand in year 2022.
Friday ridership demand is assumed to reach peak levels during 3 hour period in the morning (6
am to 9 am) and another 3 hours in the afternoon (4 pm to 7 pm ). Train service density will be
higher during these periods, reverting to slightly lower level during the remainder of the day.
Req 02 According to the prelim inary traffic forecasts appended in appendix 1 (year
2012} and appendix 2 (2022) and assuming 417 seats per unit, the number of trains per hour
shall be:
- 7 trains per hour between Makkah Central and Jeddah Central,
- 4 trains per hour between Jeddah central and KAEC,
- 2 train per hour between Jeddah Central and KAlA
- 2 trains per hour between KAEC and Madinah Central
2.4 Density of Service 2042
According to the preliminary traffic forecasts appended in appendix 3 and assuming 417 seats per
unit, the number of trains per hour in 2042 could be (normal and peak hours):
• 11 trains per hour between Makkah Central and Jeddah Central
• 6 trains per hour between Jeddah and KAEC including
• 3 train per hour between Jeddah Central and KAlA
• 3 trains per hour between KAEC and Madina~ Central
Ref: HHR· LO· OP -402- SYS-002-E1 Basle Service Plan ~

PAGE 7/19
BASIC SERVICE PLAN
2.5 Acceptable load factor
The acceptable load factors are (Year 2022):
Load factor
Mean 65%
Friday peak hour 85%
2.6 Fleet Requirements
Req 03
ll To permit the service frequencies in 2012, 2022 and 2042, and unless resulting of further ...~
marketing studies approved by Government, the minimum required fleet of 200 m long units
with a capacity of 417 seats each, shall be:
- in 2012: 35 trainsets
- in 2022: 55 sets
- in 2042: 100 sets
The availability ratio of the HHR fleet shall not be less than 94% during peaks.
Ref: HHR- LO- OP -402- SYS-002-E1 Basle Service Plan

PAGE8/19
BASIC SERVICE PLAN
3. ASSUMPTIONS AND GENERAL PRINCIPLES
To conduct its studies, the Consortium shall use all the following assumptions . In case of change, the
Consortium shall design its basic Operating Plan in order to be compliant with the requirements. lt
shall be presented using the same format as in this document.
3.1 System Assumptions
Several assumptions are used:

• The High Speed Train system is assumed to operate on dedicated tracks,
independent of any other passenger or freight rail services;
•
• Train sets are indicated at the following table:
Type of car Quantity Seats
End economy class car 1 38
Economy class car 7 38
Business class car with 1 13

cafeteria lounge
Accessible business class 1 20

car
Business class car 2 26
End Business class car 1 28
TOTAL 13 417
For more information, see the layout included at the end of the document C.3.1.
Rolling Stock Specifications HHR-LO-RS-403-SYS-001-02
• Train running times are obtained from simulated train performance circulations ;
• The schedule features service patterns are repeated every hour, as opposed to
patterns that differ from hour-to-hour providing for simplified operations: this makes
the service more regular and predictable and reduces the number of different types of
required overtakes;
• The minimum spacing between trains (commonly referred to as the frequency of

service) is set at 4 minutes. This is based on the assumed practical design capacity
attributes of the signal and train control system and is in accordance with 3 minutes
allowed by ERTMS 2 theoretical capabilities;
3.2 Assumptions Deduced from Route Civil Works and Stations
Ref: HHR· LO· OP -402· SYS-002-E1 Basic Service Plan

PAGE 9/1 9
BASIC SERVICE PLAN
Several assumptions are used:

• 5 stations are provided, accordingly the Operating Plan framework has taken into
account the following number of tracks serving passenger platforms:
T a bl e 2 - N urnb ero fT rack s per statlons

STATIONS Number of Tracks
Makkah Central 10
Jeddah Central 8
KAlA 6
KAEC 6
Madinah Central 6

PAGE 10119
BASIC SERVICE PLAN
4. SERVICE PLAN IN 2012
4.1 Train stopping patterns- year 2012
4. 1. 1 TRAIN STOPPING PATTERN-FRIDAY PEAK HOUR IN YEAR 2012
The Train Stopping Pattern for Friday Peak Hour in year 2012 is based on the number of trains
required in year 2022, and is as follows:
Figure I : 2012, Train Stopping Patterns, direction Mnkkah to Madinah Friday, Peak Hour
TSP1 TSP7 TSP2 TSP3 TSP4 TSP5

Madinah
Central
KAEC
SU TU
KAlA
SU TU
Jeddah
Central
Makkah
Central
2
Trains by Train Stopping Pattern (TSP)
Where: ...... ........ .................. ...................... ................................................... ...................................

- SU means Single Unit,
- TU means Twin Unit
- Number under the Trains Stopping Patterns (TSP) defines number of trains by type of TSP
-0 :Origin I Destination Station
-0 :Intermediate Station
The graphic shows the variations in the types of trains and stopping patterns that would be available to
HST passengers for the 2012 Friday Peak Hour. The actual mjx of stopping patterns also identifies the
number of trains per hour that would stop at each HST station.
Ref: HHR- LO- OP -402- SYS-002-E1 Basic Service Plan PAGE 11/19+ --
BASIC SERVICE PLAN
4. 1. 2 TRAIN STOPPING PATTERN -OFF FRIDAY PEAK HOUR IN YEAR 2012
Figure 2: 2012, Train Stopping Patterns, direction Makkah to Madinah, Off Friday Peak Hour
TSP1 TSP7 TSP2 TSP3 TSP4
Madlnah
Central
KAEC
su su
KAlA
su su
Jeddah
Central
Makkah
su
su Iru
Central
1 1 2 2
Trains by Train Stopping Pattern (TSP) .:.)
The passenger volume by section is less important off Friday Peak Hour. However, the density of
service by line segment and time of day shall be the same as for Friday Peak Hour in terms of
numbers of trains. As the passenger volume by section is smaller, the Trains Stopping Patterns are
different in terms of utilization of single units instead of twin units for Train Stopping Pattern 2 (TSP2)
and TSP4.

PAGE 12119
BASIC SERVICE PLAN
5. 1. 1 TRAIN STOPPING PATTERN-FRIDAY P EAK HOUR IN YEAR 2022
According to the density of service by line segment, it is possible to optimize the Train Stopping
Pattern as follows:
Figure 3 : 2022, Train Stopping Patterns, direction Makkah to Mndinah, Friday Peak Hour
Madlnah
Central
1•.·.-.:•.•
!•••••
KAEC
TU TU
KAlA
TU TU
Jeddah
Central
Makkah
Central
suI"
2 2
5.1.2 TRAIN STOPPING PATTERN-OFF- FRIDAY P EAK HOUR YEAR 2022

The density of service by line segment and time of day is the same as for Friday Peak Hour in term s of
number of trains, routes and basic services types. However, as the passenger volume by section is
smaller than for Peak Hour, the Trains Stopping Patterns are different in terms of:
• utilization of single units instead of twin units for Train Stopping Pattern 2 (TSP2)
Ref: HHR- LO-OP -402- SYS-002-E1 Basic Service Plan PAGE 13/19
BASIC SERVICE PLAN
In this case, it is relevant to propose the following Train Stopping Pattern for Friday Off Peak-Hour:
Figure 4 : 2022, Train Stopping Patterns, direction Makkah to Madinah, Off-Friday-Peak Hour
Madinah
Central
KAEC
TU TU su
KAlA
TU TU su
Jeddah
Central
Makkah
Central
2
Compared to Friday Peak Hour, all Train Stopping Pattern are similar except trainset formation in
TSP2 where one with twin unit is replaced by one with single unit. However, frequencies are similar in
terms of intermediate and terminal stations and number of trains. This pattern provides the same
number of trains as for Friday Peak-Hours.
BASIC SERVICE PLAN
6. 1. 1 TRAIN STOPPING PATTERNS- FRIDAY PEAK HOUR YEAR 2042
According to the density of service by line segment and time of day, it is possible to optimize the Train
Stopping Patterns as follows:
FigureS : 2042, Train Stopping Patterns, direction Makkah to Madinah
TSP1 TSP2 TSP4

Madinah
Central
;,·-·. - ~·:
KAEC
TU
X
KAlA
Jeddah
TU ~
Central
TU
TU rU
BASIC SERVICE PLAN
APPENDICES
Ref: HHR- LO-OP -402- SYS-002-E1 Basic Service Plan

PAGE 16/19
BASIC SERVICE PLAN
0
APPENDIX N°1: TRAFFIC ASSUMPTIONS-
YEAR 2012 (JANUARY 2009)
YEAR 2012
2012 Norma Wee kd ay Dally Rall Demand

To: Makkah Jeddah Jeddah KAEC Madlnah
From: Central Central Airport Central Total
Makkah Central 52,519 1,495 1,920 2,196 58,131
Jeddah Central 49,828 1,498 19,695 4,021 75,042
Jeddah Airport 1,496 1,498 201 3,195
l<AEC 1,920 19,530 1,920 23,370
Madlnah Central 1 597 3 182 201 1 920 6 900
Total 54 841 76 729 3195 23 535 8,338 155 638
2012 N orm a I W eekd ay P ea k H our Ra 11 Dem an d

To: Makkah Jeddah Jeddah I<AEC Madlnah
From: Central Central Airport Central · Total
Makkah Central 3,180 180 151 152 3,653
Jeddah Central 2,907 180 1,408 295 4,790
Jeddah Airport 180 180 24 384
KAEC 129 1,182 130 1,441
Madlnah Central 117 230 24 156 527
Total 3 333 4 772 384 1 715 601 10 805
2012 Norma FrId av Da11IV Ra 11 Demand

To: Makkah Jeddah Jeddah I<AEC Madlnah
Makkah Central 57,092 1,496 1,920 5,213 65,721
Jeddah Central 54,477 1,498 20,456 5,029 81,460
Jeddah Airport 1,495 1,498 . 201 3,195
KAEC 1,920 18,309 1,920 22,149
Madlnah Central 2 601 4 310 201 1,920 9"032
Total 60 494 81,209 3 195 24 296 12 363 181 557
2012 Norma FrIday Peak Hour Ra 11 Demand

Makkah Central 3,987 180 161 559 4,887
Jeddah Central 3,128 180 "1,723 314 5,345
KAEC 195 1,596 174 1,965
Total 3 688 6 140 384 2 042 1071 13 325
Ref: HHR- LO- OP -402- SYS-002-E 1 Basle Service Plan

PAGE 17/19
BASIC SERVICE PLAN

YEAR 2022
20 22 Norma lWee(Id av Da 11IV Ra 11 De man d

Makkah Central 69,105 2,106 2,390 2,877 76,478
Jeddah Central 65,491 2,108 24,909 4,983 97,491
Jeddah Airport 2,106 2,108 283 4,497
KAEC 2,390 24,666 2,390 29,447
Madlnah Central 2 091 3 893 283 2 390 8 657
Total 72 078 99 772 4 497 29 690 10 533 216 569
2022 Nor m a I W ee kd av P ea k Hour Ra 11 Deman d

Makkah Central 4,183 253 188 199 4,823
Jeddah Central 3,823 253 1,769 377 6,222
KAEC 161 1,488 162 1,810
Total 4 390 6 214· 540 2 152 771 14 067
2022 Normal Prldav Dally Rail Demand

Makkah Central 75,227 2,106 2,393 6,754 86,480
Jeddah Central 71,660 2,108 25,972 6,327 106,068
Jeddah Alr~ort 2,106 2,108 283 4,497
KAEC 2,393 23,113 2,393 27,899
Madlnah Central 3 405 5 379 283 2 393 11460
Total 79 564 105 827 4 497 30 759 15 757 236 404
2022 Nor m a IFr Iday Pea k Hour Ra 11 Deman d

Makkah Central 5,247 253 201 723 6,424
Jeddah Central 4,122 253 2,194 403 6,973
KAEC 243 2,016 217 2,475
Total 4 852 8 003 540 2 592 1 377 17 373

PAGE 18/ 19
BASIC SERVICE PLAN

YEAR 2042
2042 Normal Week day Dally Rail Demand

Makkah Central 119,645 4,171 3,705 4,937 132,458
·Jeddah Central 113,135 4,175 39,845 7,653 164,808
Jeddah Airport 4,171 4,175 560 8,906
KAEC 3,705 39,346 3,705 46,756
Madlnah Central 3 584 5 826 560 3 705 13 675
Total 124 595 168 992 8 906 47 255 16 855 366 603
· :: ·;
2042N orma Wee kdav P ea k Hour Ra 11 Deman d

Makkah Central 7,237 500 292 340 8,369
Jeddah Central 6,611 501 2,793 614 10,519
Jeddah Airport 500 501 67 1,068
KAEC 249 2,356 252 2,857
Total 7 625 10 558 1068 3 387 1 273 23 911
2042 Normal Friday Dally Ra I Demand

Makkah Central 130,609 4,171 3,719 11,337 149,836
Jeddah central 123,997 4,175 41,868 10,016 180,056
Jeddah Airport 4,171 4,175 560 8,906
KAEC 3,719 36,831 3,719 44,269
Madlnah Central 5 835 a 377 560 3 719 18 491
Total 137 722 179 992 8906 49 306 25 632 . 401 558
2042 Norma FrIday Pea k Hour Ra 11 De man d

Makkah Central 9,089 500 312 1,209 11,110
Jeddah Central 7,159 ·501 3,558 664 11,882
Jeddah Airport 500 501 67 1,068
KAEC 376 3,215 338 3,929
Total 8 458 13 615 1 068 4 178 2 278 29,597
Ref: HHR- LO- OP -402- SYS-002-E1 Basle Service Plan

PAGE 19/19
r·~
V
0
0, :l:!~ I .bgb.:¥1 CiD I.J:..J I i:WJ..w g..b I

PHASE 2
OPERATING REQUIREMENTS
IHI HI RI-I L I0 1-1 0 Ip 1-12 I 0 I 21-1 s I y I s 1-1 0 I 0 111-1 G 11I
~ 1
-..:../
IN ASSOCIATION WITH
AXELCIUM
A1 15/03/2009 First Issue G. SOUCHARD
B1 24/03/2009 Government's observations J . GEOFFRAY

r:·_
\::.:. ..
B2 10/04/2009 Final Draft J . GEOFFRAY
C1 10/05/2009 Internal review J . GEOFFRAY
01 30/05/2009 Final review, English review G. GODDING
E1 29/06/2009 Final RFP J. GEOFFRAY
F1 11/09/2009 Linklaters's comments D.PERRONN ET
G1 23/12/2011 Update for Contract R Adams
REVISION N°: G1 NAME DATE SIGNATURE
PREPARED BY R Adams 23/1 2/201 1
23/12/2011 )
CHECKED BY R Adams
23/1 2/2011
23/12/2011
APPROVED BY R Adams
Ref: HHR- LO- OP -202- SYS-001 -G1 Operating Requirements PAGE 2/18
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. OPERATING REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................... 5

1 .11NTENDED PURPOSE .. ... ......... ... .. ... .................. ......................... .. ............. .. .................................. .... .... ... .......... . 5
1.20PERATING PLAN FRAMEWORK .. .... ..... .. .... .......... ........ .. ........ ... .... ....... .... .. ....... .... ................................. ...... .... .. 5
1 .3TIME TABLE .......... ..... .................................. .... ... .......... .. ........ ..... ................... .. ......... ..... .. .. .............. .................. 6
1 .4FLEET SIZE ASSUMPTIONS .... ......... ... .............. .... ... .. ..................... ... ................. .. ....... ................ .... ... .......... .. ..... 6
1.5TECHNICAL HYPOTHESES ............ ................... ..... ..... ... ............. .................. ......... ............... ............. .... ....... ... .... 7
1. 5. 1 Stations .... .................. ......... ...... .. ... ......... ....... .. .... .................. .... ..... ... ... ... .... .... ........ ... .................. .... .............. 7
1.5. 2 Rolling Stock Maintenance and Stabling facilities .......... ... .......... ............. ....... .. ...... .. .. ..... .. ...... .. ..................... 7
1 .6RULE BOOK AND MANUALS .... .. .. ........ ... .... ........... .. .. ........................... .. ............ .. ...... ... ....... ............................... 8
1 .70PERATION LANGUAGE ... .. ........... .............. .... ................... ... ............. ...... .................. ... ............... .. ... .................. 8
1.80PERATING PLAN REVISION .... ...... ............................. ... .......................................... .. .... .................. ...... ............. 9
1 .90PERATION QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN ......................................................................................................... 9
2. OPERATION MANAGEMENT ................................................................................................................... 10
2 . 1 OPERATION HEADQUARTERS BUILDING .................................... .... .. ........................................................ .. ..... . 11

2. 1. 1 Description ...... .......................................... .......................... ........... .. ....... .............. .... ..... ...... .... .... .. .... ... .. ..... . 11
2. 1.2 Central Traffic Control room (CTC) .. ...................... ...... ........................... .. .. .. ................. .... .... ...................... . 11
2. 1.3/nfrastructure maintenance .... .... ........................ .. .... .. ........................................... ..... .. ....... ..... ..... ................ 12
2. 1.4 Passengers' service monitoring .. ...... .. ....... ............ ................... .... .... ...... ..................... .. ....... .................... .... 12
2.1.5 Organization chart (/NO/CA TIVE) .................... .... .......... .. ...... .... .... .......... .................... .. ............................ .. . 13
2 .21NCIDENTS AND ACCIDENTS ................ ... .. ... ....... .. .... ....... ..... ........... .... ........ ... ... .. ................... ............. ... .. ... .. ... 14
2.2. 1/ncidents and accidents .. .... .... ...... ............. ....... ... .......... ................................................................... ........ ..... 14
2.2.2Procedures .................... .... ...... ....... ....... ... .. .......... .... ................. .. ....... ...... ............. ........ .. ......... ....... ... .. ... ...... 14
2.2.3 Training ........... ..... .......... ..... ......... .... .... ........ .. .. ...... .................. ..................... ....... ........ .. ... ...................... ...... 14
2.2.4Record ...... .. .... .. ... .... .......... ... ......... ...... ................... .... .... ...... ..... .. ........ ... ... ....... .. .......... ....... ........... ........ ... ... 15
2. 2.5 Crisis management .. ..... ............................ .......... ............... ..... .... ....... .................. ... ............. ........... ..... ... ...... 15
2 .3PASSENGERS CARE, INFORMATION AND SERVICES ............................. ..... ............................................... ... .... 15
3. OPERATION DURING CONSTRUCTION PERIOD ............................................................................... 16
3 .1 TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE PROCESS ............... ...... .................. ....... .. ........ .. ... ......................... .......... ................ 16
3.2MARKETING AND SALES ................ ... ........ ..... .... ........ .... ... .. ........... .. ... .... ..... ... ......... ...... .......... .............. .... .... ... 16
3.3BRANDING ..... ...... .................................. .. .................. .. ......... ......... : ........... ........... ..... .. .... ....... ..................... .. .. 16
3.4COMMERCIAL ADVERTISING ............ ........ .. .... .. ............ .. ... .... .. .... ........... .......... .... ........ ..... .. .... .. .... ...... ............. 17
4. TRAINING ...................................................................................................................................................... 18
4 . 1 TRAINING ISSUES ....................................................... ... .. .. .. ........ ... ... ...... ... ....... ...... ... ..... .. ....... ... ..................... 18
4 .2SAFETY RELATED INCIDENT MANAGEMENT .... ................. .. .............. .. ... ...... ........................... ........ .. ............ .. .. 18
Ref: HHR· LO· OP -202- SYS-001-G1 Operating Requirements PAGE3/18

Project References
REFN° REF ID NUMBER REF DESCRIPTION

1 HHR-LO-SA-602-SYS-001 SAFETY REQUIREMENT
2 HHR-LO-FP-602-SYS-001 FARE POLICY
3 HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-002 BASIC SERVICE PLAN
4 HHR-LO-SY-301 -INE-001 SCHEME OF RAILWAYS SYSTEM
5 HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-001 ROLLING STOCK MAINTENANCE
6 HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-001 SMALL DEPOT SPECIFICATIONS
HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-002 WORKSHOP SPECIFICATIONS

7
8 HHR-LO-RA-602-SYS-001 RAMS ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
9 HHR-LO-AF-403-SYS-00 1 AUTOMATIC FARE COLLECTION
10 HHR-LO-PR-602-SYS-001 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
11 HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-002 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS- SECTION 2:

GLOSSARY
13 HHR-LO-CC-403-SYS-001 OPERATION CONTROL CENTER
Ref: HHR- LO-OP -202- SYS-001 -G1 Operating Requirements

PAGE4/18
1. OPERATING REQUIREMENTS
1.1 INTENDED PURPOSE
This section of Performance Specification is intended to set out the operating requirements to
which the Consortium shall conform. Hence, this text describes:
• the Operating plan framework, assumptions and hypothesis detailed in the document HHR-
LO-OP-402-SYS-002 , Basic Service Plan
• the Operation management to be set,
• the Trains operation,
• the Drivers management,
• the Stations operation including sales and other services .
Req 01
l The Consortium shall provide a detailed operating plan based on the public Authorities
requirements in terms of safety ((HHR-LO-SA-602-SYS-001) and tariffs (HHR-LO-FP-602-SYS-
001 ). lt must be approved by the Government before implementation .
Req 02
.I: This operating plan shall describe how the different 0/Ds are served on week-days and Fridays
during, peak and off-peak hours ensuring both facilities of services and Rolling Stock facilities
efficiency.
1.2 OPERATING PLAN FRAMEWORK
The Operating Plan framework including its operational features relies on the traffic forecast
established by the Government in 2008.
Religious peaks shall not be considered as input data for operation (i. e. time table, Rolling Stock
fleet size and maintenance facilities).
Req 03
1: The Basic Service Plan (HHR-LO-OP-402-SYS-002) relies on train sets with a 417seats ±
2,5% capacity, with 2 classes and a rough 30/70 ratio between 151/2nd Class, to be further
adjusted by means of detailed market studies (passengers segmentation, cf. HHR-LO-FP-402-
SYS-001 ). If adjustments were to be performed by the Government, the Consortium should
consider the corresponding outcomes.
Req 04
[ The passenger care implies mandatory reservation.
Ref: HHR- LO-OP -202- SYS-001-G1 Operating Requirements

However, complementary seats (such as rumble seats) in each coach would be welcome if feasible
and preferably not managed by the reservation system .
lt is provided that each HHR passenger will be responsible for his own luggage, limited to one per
passenger plus one hand luggage.
Operating assumptions and features of stations facilities are set forth in § 1.3 to 1.5
1.3 TIME TABLE
Req 05
ll The target of the time table is to link Madinah Central to Makkah Central and vice versa in not
more than two hours and thirty minutes, assuming three intermediate stops (at KAEC, KAlA and
at Jeddah Central).
Req 06
ll The Consortium shall draw up a train schedule including the provision of a recovery margin of
4.5 minutes per 100 km. His graph shall use the line capacity in conformity with the UIC
standards concerning route capacity (UIC Leaflet 451 - 1 ).
1.4 FLEET SIZE ASSUMPTIONS
To cater for the traffic forecast, the above mentioned Operating Plan framework makes minimum
provision of fleets of:
• 35 train sets in 2015
• 55train sets in 2025
• 100 train sets in 2045

provided an availability ratio of 94 % (Friday peaks) and assuming the following load factors (Year
2025):
Load factor
Mean 65%
Friday peak hour 85%
The Consortium are strongly encouraged to challenge these figures (operating plan - train stopping
pattern, time table, required fleet size), and supply relevant justifications.
Ref: HHR- LO- OP -202- SYS-001-G1 Operating Requirements

PAGE 6/18
1.5 TECHNICAL HYPOTHESES
The Consortium shall comply with the following features as data and as constraints .
1. 5. 1 Stations
The Consortium's Operating Plan shall consider the following number of tracks:
STATIONS Number of Tracks

MAKKAH Central 10
JEDDAH Central 8
KAlA 6
KAEC 6
MADINAH Central 6
Jeddah Central station and KAEC station shall be through stations.
lt shall be considered a 40 minutes duration for technical operations in Makkah Central and
Madinah Central in order to allow for interior cleaning.
Dwell times to be considered are:
Jeddah Central 6 to 8 minutes (train sets coupling)
KAlA 10 minutes
KAEC 3 minutes
1. 5. 2 Rolling Stock Maintenance and Stabling facilities

As described in detail in HHR-LO-MR-402-SYS-004, HHR-LO-DW-403-SYS-004, HHR-LO-DW-301 -
SYS-002, HHR-LO-DW-301 -SYS-004, two kinds of maintenance facilities are to be provided :
• Stabling facilities equipped to carry out minor maintenance operations, with possible extensions
compatible with the long term operation plan (to be worked out by the Consortium) and
allowing for overnight stabling of Rolling Stock,
• Workshop depot to be located at the most convenient location for:

o optimizing the number of train sets required during operation
o dealing with the capacity constraints of HHR main line
Such maintenance facilities shall take into account the land ownership issues as well .
Therefore, the stabling and depot features to be considered are:
• a stabling yard in Makkah, close to Makkah Central, connected to Makkah Central with a
reserved track and to the main line towards Jeddah,
• a stabling yard in Madinah, close to Madinah Central,
• a Workshop; located tentatively at Km 125 with connections to the HHR main line North and
South bound.
Ref: HHR- LO- OP -202- SYS-001 -G1 Operating Requirements

PAGE 7/18 +--
1.6 RULE BOOK AND MANUALS
A "Rule Book" and "Operating Manuals" applicable to all trains operating on the HHR shall be
provided by the Consortium and submitted for approval to the Railway Commission.
These documents shall be prepared in compliance with:
• The KSA standards, specifications and legal obligations,
• The safety and operating rules to be issued by the Railway Commission .
The documents shall consider the high speed standards issued in Europe or equivalent standards;
the priority will be given to EN standards unless justified equivalence.
This task covers both normal and degraded modes of operation.
1.7 OPERATION LANGUAGE
Two versions of every document shall be issued:
• Arabic
• English
Some of them may be prepared in English only, subject to KSA Authorities prior approval.
Req 07
I l The Consortium should preferably recruit staff with a working knowledge of the two languages.
At all events, the OCC must permanently have at least one English speaking operator on all
shifts.
Req 08
E Train drivers working on the Railway must have an adequate knowledge of Arabic.
Language proficiency of staff will be documented by means of proficiency certificates in each (:')
language to be issued by the competent authority, in compliance with the regulations in force.
Communications between trains crew and the control center on the Railway will normally be in
Arabic; they will be recorded. Train operation may be stopped in case of language
misunderstanding.
Ref: HHR- LO· OP ·202- SYS-001-G1 Operating Requirements

PAGE 8/18
1.8 OPERATING PLAN REVISION
Revisions of railway operating conditions shall impact the Operating Plan . Relevant proposals from
the Consortium will be subject to the Government's approval pursuant to the relevant clause(s) of
the Contract.
The Government may call for any information and documents deemed necessary for the production
of a modified Operating Plan.
One (1) month (starting from the receipt of a request) is allowed to examine a modification request
and to issue a decision on the matter. After three months, no response given from the Government
means approval.
In case of emergency, temporary modifications of operating conditions can be implemented by the

Consortium . The Government shall be informed immediately and the relevant report shall be
notified in the shortest possible timeframe.
Such notifications will not relieve the Consortium of any compensation or any responsibility against
penalty under the provisions of the Contract.
1.9 OPERATION QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN
The quality and performance of operation are key elements.
Req 09
E. As part of the Quality Management Plan specified in the Contract the Consortium must provide
an Operation quality management plan.
This plan must address:
1. Reliability, Availability, Maintainability, Safety (RAMS) aspects , as detailed in HHR-LO-RA-

602-SYS-001.
2. Safety Requirement HHR-LO-SR-602-SYS-001 .
3. Performance Requirement Management HHR-LO-PR-602-SYS-001 .
4. Description of processes for the preparation of services delivered to passengers (time table,
services in the station .. .).
5. Description of processes for services amendments (peak periods).
6. Staff training procedures and programs, and io particular the ones for drivers. The use of
simulators is mandatory for the drivers training . The number of simulators must be justified.
7. The certification process of staff involved in safety aspects, subject as well to compliance
with procedures to be set forth by the Railway Commission.
Ref: HHR- LO· OP ·202- SYS·001-G 1 Operating Requirements

PAGE 9/18
2. OPERATION MANAGEMENT
"Operation management" covers the following fields:
• Real time operation management,
• Infrastructure maintenance management,
• Drivers management,
• Conductors management,
• Stations management (equipment and passenger care).
The corner stone of operation management lies in "Operation headquarters" in the "Control Center"
(CTC) organization and facilities. This entity deals with:
• Real time operation, i.e. trains supervision, drivers' and controllers remote support, in normal
mode and failure and emergency cases,
• Infrastructure maintenance management,
• Stations monitoring,
• Passenger care and information, in normal operating mode and in cases of incidents.
d-
Ref: HHR- LO- OP -202- SYS-001 -G 1 Operating Requirements PAGE 10/ 18
2.1 OPERATION HEADQUARTERS BUILDING
2. 1. 1 Description
Req 10 An unique Operation headquarters shall be in charge of:

l.l Real time operation management which includes:
- Train supervision (HST and maintenance trains as well) and delay mitigation measures,
- Infrastructure operation management,
-Track and railway equipment maintenance programs,
-Rolling Stock fleet real time management (failures mitigation measures),
ll Drivers management:
-Real time management (in case of delays),
-Technical support (hot line, in case of failure),
1r Conductors' duty management,
I[ Passengers' information in stations.
The Consortium shall submit rules organizing the relationship with the police and more generally
with public authorities in case of operation troubles or emergency (accidents , environmental
disaster... ). The rules shall be in compliance with internal and regulatory rules as specified by the
Railway Commission.
Preparation of service, i.e. operation short and middle term program : preparation of service
adaptations (peaks, special events ... ) can imply modifications to Rolling Stock and on board staff
rosters.
Req 11
lr This operating centre, on duty 7/7 , 24/24 must be highly secured and however easy to access
to.
lt must provide staff with an efficient working environment in a functional and cost-effective to
operate and to maintain building.
Req 12
I l A back up centre shall be provided as a "mirror", in order to prevent any technical disaster and
to enable staff training. In case of emergency, this center must enter into operation in less than
two (2) hours (refer to HHR-LO-CC-403-SYS-001 Operation Control Center).
2.1.2 Central Traffic Control room (CTC)
All on field equipment (signals, crossings .. . ) are remotely controlled by the CTC . The features of
the telecoms back ups and their subsequent reliability don't need any local control device.
Ref: HHR- LO-OP -202- SYS-001-G1 Operating Requirements

PAGE 11118
t--
The CTC controls only the main line (line 1, line 2, sidings, tracks in station and access tracks from
or to the depots/workshop). The management of the trains inside stabling and depot yards
(maintenance of RS and engines) shall be controlled independently through specific and dedicated
interlocking.
2. 1. 3 Infrastructure maintenance
The infrastructure staff working in the Operation headquarters will be in charge of programming the
infrastructure maintenance activities. In case of infrastructure failure this staff will organize the
appropriate measures, in order to ensure the safety and to reduce the impacts of failure.
This maintenance staff will coordinate all the team. If some failure repair requires a specific action
from other members of the CTC team , the Infrastructure staff shall notify the CTC and take
guidance for ensuring a safe and timely response.
2. 1.4 Passengers' service monitoring
Information exchanges shall be needed between the OCC and stations staff in charge of:
• the train technical supervision in stations (at arrivals and before departures),
• passengers catering, sales, information, access control,
Req 13
l The Consortium shall define these exchanges accurately, taking the passengers care as a
priority.
Ref: HHR- LO· OP ·202- SYS-001-G 1 Operating Requirements

PAGE 12/18
2. 1. 5 Organization chart (/NO/CA TIVE)
Headquarters Management
I I
I
Pre
• •
Operations {all the operational departments
•
Post operational
operational are to be located in the OCC building)
Preparation of Operation Control Management Quality

services Centre (OCC) of disruptions monitoring and
Traffic control and crises experience
Power Supply Control Feedback
Operational monitoring
••••·.1 of plant and equipment
Management of RS Infrastructure
Drivers Maintenance
Conductors RS Hot Line
Passenger care
Security
Administration & Staff management,

logistics Accounting
Computer system maintenance
Ref: HHR- LO· OP -202- SYS-001 -G1 Operating Requirements

+-
P'G' 13118
n
2.2 INCIDENTS AND ACCIDENTS
2.2.1 Incidents and accidents
In this paragraph,
• "Incident" means a technical failure with an impact on operation (train delay, air-conditioning
etc) without any Rolling Stock I equipment damage or staff I passengers injury.
• "Accident" means any event having human consequences or materiel damage on

infrastructure or Rolling Stock.
The OCC (telecom, etc) enables real time information gathering and mitigation measures
(communication with a board staff, passengers, information display etc).
;:::·
2. 2.2 Procedures
Req 14
11 Each incident or accident shall be described by type and procedures accordingly issues. These
procedures are at OCC staff disposal and permanently updated according to operating
experience.
Recovering scenarios shall describe at least following cases:

• Train set replacement
• Tracks obstructions
• Derailment
• Abnormal weather conditions (storm, rainfall, .. . )
• Train abnormal stop in tunnel and passengers evacuation
• Client injury in train or in station
0
These procedures shall be tested as part of acceptance.
2.2.3 Training
As part of procedures, initial and continuous training courses for concerned staff are provided.
PAGE 14/18
2.2.4 Record
Req 17
Il Any incident I accident shall be recorded in order to enable further inquires by the Consortium
and/or Public Authorities.
2.2.5 Crisis_management
Req 18
<.. 11: A crisis team located in a crisis room will be in charge of managing serious incidents or
accidents (to be defined by the Consortium).
The crisis room is physically separated from operation room with possible visual communication.
2.3 PASSENGERS CARE, INFORMATION AND SERVICES
The service to be delivered to passenger comprises:

• Access to station and to platforms
• Passenger guidance within station premises
• Ticket delivery or I and checking
• Sales
• After sale
• Catering
• Information - public address
• Security insurance
The Consortium shall describe how these services are organized and staffed, according to the
Performance Requirements set in HHR-LO-PR-602-SYS-001 .
Ref: HHR- LO- OP -202· SYS-001 ·G1 Operating Requirements PAGE 15/18
3. OPERATION DURING CONSTRUCTION PERIOD
3.1 TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE PROCESS
During the Construction Period the Consortium shall conduct Verification, Tests and Acceptance
Process according to HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-011 .
3.2 MARKETING AND SALES
Req 19
I[ Detailed market studies shall be fulfilled in order to determine accurately the passengers'
segmentation in terms of volumes purposes and expected services.
I[ According to these studies, the Consortium shall fix a realistic and consistent Operating Plan
(time table and services provided to the passengers).
The distribution (sales) management is a critical issue regarding costs and facilities of services
perceived by the passengers.
Req 20
'[ The sales channel management (ticket office, AVM (automatic vending machines) in station,
travel agencies offices internet, tour operator shall be defined with the corresponding
distribution costs.
3.3 BRANDING
t
Req 21 During the Construction period, the Consortium shall manage studies and develop
strategy to carry out a branding process as follows
[ Conduct a Market Survey within 4 months after the Notice To Proceed to determine the main
categories of customers and their purposes;
E Define the marketing policy 2 months later;
1: Carry out the legal aspects as patent for the names, logo and any visual signature. Both
domestic and international issues will be taken care of, including web rights .
I: Design all the components in terms of visual identity, design, sounds, uniforms etc.
[ Propose an efficient strategy to launch the "product" 6 months before the beginning of
Operation
r Provide a public relation plan according to the phases (Route Civil Works, Stations, System)
and stages of the project 5 months after the Notice To Proceed. lt will present the project itself
and the new service (High Speed Line, Transport Plan) to future customers.
'~ HHR- LO- OP -202~ SYS-001-G1 Op•rnU"g R•q"i"m'"" PAGE 16/18

)
Req 22
liE Three (3) months after the Commencement of Passengers Services, the market survey and
marketing policy shall be updated, then every anniversary year.
Each stage of the process shall the submitted to the Government's proposal.
The Consortium should provide Branding for new Railway Commission for Saudi Arabia and it
should be according with the Specification of the Government. This branding is mainly related to
the logo and in itself gives a relevant and good impression of the commission. (See AI Shoula
Negotiation Brief (SRC Logo).docx)
The Branding should
:·:~-: I
3.4 COMMERCIAL ADVERTISING
The Consortium shall propose advertising business plan in stations and on board trains.
Ref: HHR- LO- OP -202- SYS-001 -G1 Operating Requirem ents

4. TRAINING
4.1 TRAINING ISSUES
The Consortium is in charge of the training as defined in HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-012 (12 .1).
Req 24 The specific skill certifications for the operation are related to:
11 Infrastructure maintenance staff, in particular the mastery of the safety rules concerning
maintenance operations (long welded rails, signaling ... ),
I l Operation headquarter staff under normal and emergency conditions,
11 Drivers,
11 Controllers,
11 Stations staff (trains management, customer care- sales, access control).
Req 25
I[ The Training Plan shall detail the skills categories, overall schedule, locations for presentation
of specialist modules, training materials and equipment, and the experience and assignment of
the Consortium's training staff.
Req 26
I l The expert trainers will have to remain on site for the first two years of Operating Period to
monitor and to support the managers in their initial staff training programs, and to observe and
coach them . The Consortium's trainers shall be Arabic I English bilingual (or assisted by an
interpreter competent in the technical vocabulary).
All course material shall be provided in CD-ROM format. The initial draft training documentation
must be supplied in English and Arabic.
Where required by industry standards (in particular safety case approval as specified in EN 50126),
staff will have to be formally tested by qualified training experts. Certificates will be issued to
successful candidates by the Consortium . The Government may conduct independent reviews of
the Training Plan by Consultants and, if necessary, may require the Consortium to correct any
deficiency.
4.2 SAFETY RELATED INCIDENT MANAGEMENT
Req 27 The training plan shall:

[ Identify and accommodate the safety-related incidents as listed in chapter 2, with a matrix and
flow chart indicating the appropriate actions, their order and priority of response, for managing
and recovering from such incidents;
L Provide facilities and systems to facilitate response, managem ent and recovery from such
incidents ensuring the safety for passengers and staff.
~~' HHR- LO- OP -202- SYS-001-G1 Opo"tl"g R•q"l" m'"l' PAGE 18/18
~ ~=-,11 .bg.b..::¥1 Cic ld I Ci..w..w g.bl

PHASE 2
FARE POLICY·
I HI HI R 1-1 L I 0 1-1 F I p 1-1 4 I 0 I 2 1-1 s I y I s 1-1 0 I 0 11 1-1 D 11 I

FARE POLICY
A1 26/04/2009 First Issue K. MEYER
81 26/05/2009 Final Issue K. M EYER
C1 26/06/2009 Final RFP K. M EYER
01 11/09/2009 Linklaters's comments K. M EYER
PREPARED BY K. MEYER 11/09/2009
CHECKED BY G.NORMAND 11/09/2009 /.
VALIDATED BY J . GEOFFRAY 11/09/2009
~
APPROVED BY C.SCHANG 11/09/2009 .~
Ref: HHR- LO- FP -402- SYS-001-01 Fare Policy PAGE 2/7

FARE POLICY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................ 5
2. FARE POLICY OBJECTIVES ...................................................................................................................... 5
3. INPUT DATA ................................................................................................................................................... 6
3 . 1 AVAILABLE INPUT DATA ......................... .... .................................................. ................... .... .............. .... .. ........... 6
3.2 FIXED INPUTS ..................... ..................... ................................ ....... ......... ..... ................... .......................... .. ...... 6
3 .3ECONOMY CLASS TARIFFS .................. .... .. .................. ............................. ............... ........... ..................... .......... 6
4. REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................................................... 7
.·.· ··
Ref: HHR· LO- FP -402- SYS-001 -D1 Fare Policy PAGE 3/7
FARE POLICY
PROJECT REFERENCES

3 HHR-LO-FI-551-AXE-002 Financial Requirements
4 HHR-LO-FI-551 -AXE-001 Financial Templates
... ·····~
·:.···
r.,,
HHR· LO· FP -402· SYS-001·01 F•M PoUoy PAGE 4/7
fARE POLICY
1. INTRODUCTION
The aim of this document is to define:

1. The Fare Policy issues and expected inputs
2. The input data
3. The requirements
2. FARE POLICY OBJECTIVES
The fare system is a key element for:

), ••·- . -1
1. The attractiveness of the service offered to passengers: The objective is to maximize the
revenue. Tariffs would be fixed accordingly.
2. OPEX balance sheet (financial achievements, HHR-LO-FI-551-AXE-002 and Financial
Template HHR-LO-FI-551-AXE-001 ): marketing tech niques should be used in order to
maximize the revenue (yield management).
Ref: HHR- LO- FP -402- SYS-001-01 Fare Policy PAGES/7

FARE POLICY
3. INPUT DATA
3.1 Available input data
At this stage, 3 reports are available:

• Phase 1 Report - SRO (2007)
• Market Survey Abstract (1 0/02/2009)
3.2 Fixed inputs
• 2 classes divided into 70% for the economy class and 30% for the first class.
• Ticketing Purchase through ticket booth, automatic vending machines, on line sales
(website or call-centre), travel agencies.
• Mandatory Reservation.
• Lowest and highest rates fixed by the Government for economy class only.
• Possible fare variation between peak and off-peak periods.
• Contract under Public Service Obligation
3.3 Economy class tariffs
Considering the available reports and the tariff levels of the existing trains in KSA, the reference
tariffs would be as follows for off-peak period:
Makkah-Jeddah (78 km)Second Class =

26 SAR
First Class = 45 SAR
Jeddah -Madinah (371 km) Second Class = 124 SAR

Jeddah-KAEC (107 km) Second Class = 36 SAR 0
Additional studies need to be conducted by the Consortium to consider peak and off-peak
periods or subscription formulas. After conducting market studies, the Consortium shall
propose to the Government to adapt the tariffs accordingly.
~f' HHR· LG- FP ·402· SYS-001-01 ' "' PoUoy PAGE 6/7
fARE POLICY
4. REQUIREMENTS
Req 01
11 The Consortium shall carry out the market study needed for the complete implementation of the
HHR Fare Policy
11 The Consortium will implement the methods, objectives and means detailed in its proposal
The Consortium shall conduct the market studies during the Construction Period.
Req 03
:.·: -··. lr The Consortium shall producea Transport Plan, meeting market studies and consistent with
tariff hypotheses, to the Government for approval.
Req 04
11 One (1) year before the beginning of operation, the Consortium shall propose to the
Government a complete and detailed tariffs grid. The grid may distinguish different periods
according to the hour, the day and the month. This process will be reviewed one ( 1) year after
the beginning of operation and then every year
I Off-peak tariffs (normal week day between 9 am and 15 am) will be based on the reference
tariffs with a margin of+/- 10%. Peak-tariffs will be limited to the reference tariffs+ 100%.
• Tariffs will be approved by the Government.
Req 05
I The first "best guess" estimated prices temporarily fixed for Day-1 of operating period will be
adjusted according to a trial and errors process during the "ramp up" operating period. Finally,
the Government and the Consortium would agree on the relevant tariffs to apply, accordingly
with all the interdependent elements (revenues, cost, performance requirements ... ).
Ref : HHR· LO- FP -402- SYS-001-0 1 Fare Policy PAGE 7/7

A
\:t;l
()
)
~::::~,:~~ 1 .bgb:¥1 i:ic l..d l CiJ.u..w gb l

PHASE 2
INFRASTRUCTURE MAINTENANCE
SPECIFICATION

INFRASTRUCTURE MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATION
A1 19/03/2009 First Issue Olivier Gouin
A2 23/03/2009 Review Jerome Geoffray
A3 24/03/2009 Upgrading Olivier Gouin
A4 24/03/2009 Review Jerome Geoffray
A5 25/03/2009 Review Olivier Gouin
A6 26/03/2009 Review Gilles NORMAND
B1 15/04/2009 Review Grahame GODDING
C1 19/05/09 Review Olivier Gouin
C2 27/05/09 Final Issue Olivier Gouin
01 29/06/09 Final RFP Olivier Gouin
E1 11/09/09 Review according Linklaters's comments Olivier Gouin
F1 16/12/2011 Update for Contract Getinsa
REVISION N°: F1 NAME DATE SIGNATURE
PREPARED BY Getinsa 16/12/2011
CHECKED BY R Adams 17/12/2011
VALIDATED BY R Adams 17/12/201 1
APPROVED BY R Adams 17/12/2011
+--:, HHR-l0-MI-402-SYS-Q01-F1 lof"'''"ct"M Molotooooco Sp"""""

PAGE 2128
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................ 6
2. GLOSSARY .................................................................................................................................................... 6
3. MAINTENANCE PLAN .................................................................................................................................. 7
3 .1 PREAMBLE ................. ................. ... .. ... ............... .. ...... ..... ..................... ........ .................... ......... ......... .. .............. 7
3.2GENERAL POLICY PLAN .......... ............. ....... .... ......... ........................ ..... .... ... ........... ........ ................................ ... 8
3 .30RGANIZATION OF CONSORTIUM ......... ....... .... ................................ ..... .... ............................ .... ................ ...... ... 8
...-.-.-:. 3.41NTEGRATED LOGISTIC SUPPORT ..... ..... .. .......... ... ........... ....... ... ... ...... .......... .. .. .......... .............. ...... ........ ... .... ... 8
3.4.1 Maintenance rules ............................................................................................................................. 8
3.4. 2 Staff. ............................................................................................ ... ........................ ........... ................... 9
3.4.3 Supply chain, spare parts ..................................................... ...................... .............. .... .. .................. 9
3.4.4 Support means and equipment ....................................................... .. .. .......................................... 10
3.4. 5 Documentation ........................... .... ........................... ........ .. .. ... ..... .... .. .................... ..... ........... ...... ... 10
3.4. 6 infrastructure and facilities necessary for HHR maintenance ...................................................12
3.4.7 CMMS.................... ........................ ...... ..... ... .... ............................... ... .... .......................... .................. 12
3.4. 8 Maintenance and operation interfaces . ........................................................................................ 13
3 .5SAFETY MANAGEMENT ........ ....... .... .... .. .......................... ...... .. .... .............. ................... ..... ............................... 13
3 .6QUALITY MANAGEMENT ..... ......... ..... .. ..... .... ......... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ..... .... ............... .. ... .. .... ... .......... .. .... .. ...... .... 13
3.7ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT .......... ....... ............................ .... .. ....................... .......... ..... ............. ..... ....... ... 14
3.8REPORTING TO THE GOVERNMENT .... ........ ... ................ ............ ............. .... ................... .. .. .. .................... ... ..... 14
3. 8. 1 Monthly reporting .... ... .... ........... .............. ...... ... .... ... ........... .. ..... ......... ............. .. ................. .............. 14
3.8.2 Annual reporting ..... ... .. ................................. ..................... .......................... ... ............................... .. . 14
3.8.3 The Government access to CMMS .................................................................. ...................... .... ... 15
4. MAINTENANCE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 16
4.1 PREAMBLE .. .. ............ ........................ ... .. ... .. ... ... ......... .... ... ... ............ ... .... ...... ... ... .... ..... ................. ........... ........ 16
4 .2MAINTENANCE OF TRACKS .......... ........... ... .. .................................................................................................... 16

4.2.1 Monitoring .. ............................ .... .............. .. .. ............... ..................... ......................... ... ...... .. ............. 16
4.2.2 Preventive maintenance ................................................ ................... ........ ...................................... 17
4.2.3 Corrective maintenance: ............................ .... ... .......... .. ... ................. .............. ...... .... .. .. ..... ... ... ... ... .21
4.2.4 Renewal ........ ................ .. .......... .,.............. .... ............ ...... .. .... ........ .... .. ......... ...... .......... ... ... ............... 21
4.3MAINTENANCE OF CATENARIES .......................... .... ......... ... ........... ... .'.......................... ...... ..... ... ...... .. ........... ... 21
4. 3. 1 Monitoring ...................................... .... .............. .................... ............................... .............................. 21
4.3.2 Preventive maintenance .. ......... ................. .. .................... ............. ............ ...................................... 22
4.3.3 Corrective maintenance .. ... .... ..... ...... ......... .. .. ... ........ .. .. ... ........ .. .............. ............ ..... .... ... ............... 23
4.3.4 Renewal ... ...... ... .. ............ ... .......... .... ...... ................... .... ..... .... ....... .. .... ...... ..... .. .... ... .. ............ ......... ... 23
f--
4.4MAINTENANCE OF CATENARIES POWER SUPPLY EQUIPMENTS AND LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY ............. 23
4.4.1 Monitoring .................................... ... .. ..... .............................................................. ... .. ........................ 23
4.4.2 Preventive maintenance ...... .... .......... ... ............................... ... ..... ....................... .. ... ...... ...... ........... 23
4.4.3 Corrective maintenance ............ ... .. ... . ...... ........... .. .. ................ ... ..................... ... .. ... .. .. .. ......... ..24
Ret: HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-001-F1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification

o./ PAGE 3/28
4.4.4 Renewal ............................................................................................................................................ 24

4.5MAINTENANCE OF SIGNALLING .... ..... .......... ............. ...... .. ................................................ ........ ........................ 24
4.5.1 Monitoring ......................................................................................................................................... 24
4. 5. 2 Preventive maintenance ................................................................................................................. 25
4.5.3 Corrective maintenance ............. ..................................................................... ... .. ........................... 25
4.5.4 Renewal ....................................................................................... .......................... ........................... 26
4 .6MAINTENANCE OF TELECOM ..... ............ .... ... ............ .. ........................ ......... ................... ... .. ..................... ....... 26
4.6.1 Monitoring ................................................................. ........................................................................ 26
4. 6.2 Preventive maintenance ....... .......................................................................................................... 26
4.6.3 Corrective maintenance ........ .. ......................................................... .............................................. .27
4.6.4 Renewal .................................... ............................................................................. ........................... 27
4. ?MAINTENANCE OF PLATFORM DOORS .... .................... ........ ........................ ................... ........................... ....... 27
4. 7.1 Monitoring ........... ................................................................................................... ........................... 27
4.7.2 Preventive maintenance ..... .. .. .. ................................................................................. .................... .27
4. 7.3 Corrective maintenance ................................ .. ........................................................... .................... .27
4. 7.4 Renewal ........... ................................................................................................................................. 27
4 .8MAINTENANCE OF PHASE 1 PACKAGE 1 (CIVIL WORKS) ........................ ......................................................... 27
4 .9MAINTENANCE OF STATIONS ............... ................ .... ........................................................ ............................... 28
4. 9.1 Maintenance plan provided by phase 1 package 2 Consortium (stations) .. .. ... ...................... 28
4.9.2 Maintenance plan provided by the Consortium ........................................................................... 28
f-Ref: HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-001-F1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification

PAGE 4/28
PROJECT REFERENCES

1 HHR-LO-MA-402-SYS-001 RAMS assurance requirements
4 HHR-LO-CT-602-SAU-001 General Specifications -Appendix B: Annual
5 HHR Social Rules doe "MINISTRY OF INTERIOR
- KINDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA - SOCIAL RULES
····.·
Ref: HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-001-F1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification

PAGES/28
1. INTRODUCTION
The Infrastructure Maintenance Specification defines the objectives, requirements, constraints and
supplies to be taken into account by the Consortium, regarding the activities related to HHR
infrastructure maintenance.
The Consortium shall undertake infrastructure maintenance under its own responsibility, including
the overhaul operations necessary during the mobilization period and the operating period, in order
to:
• Meet all RAMS and performance requirements dedicated to infrastructure.

• Ensure an optimum levels of the infrastructure according to RAMS
The Consortium will have to design its own maintenance plan, based on a proven maintenance
model. The requirements for this design are detailed hereafter (see chapter 3).
The maintenance plan shall be used by the Consortium to build and justify maintenance costs.
The maintenance plan provided shall reach the minimum technical and safety requirements
specified in chapter 4.
If the Consortium does not take into account some of these requirements because of his own
technical choices, then he shall provide and justify alternative solutions to meet both technical and
safety criteria. These solutions shall be at least equivalent to the reference requirements.
The Maintenance of the 380 kV Power Supply is out of scope of this contract. Even if the
Consortium is responsible for the installation of the whole needed 380 kV equipment for the high
voltage feeding of the HHR, he is not in charge of its maintenance after the handover to Saudi
Electricity Company (the Owner).
2. GLOSSARY
0
See document HHR-LO-CT-802-SYS-002 General Specifications-Section 2
Ref: HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-001 ·F1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification

PAGE 6/28
3. MAINTENANCE PLAN
3.1 Preamble
A general Maintenance Plan shall be provided, including detailed and documented plans.
The various detailed plans shall include:

• General policy statement
• Consortium organization
• Integrated Logistic Support:
o Maintenance rules and associated specifications or standards, which enable all

RAMS and performance requirements to be met,
o Work force, staff
o Initial and ongoing employees training,
o Supply chain, spare parts,
o Support means and equipment,
o Documentation
o Infrastructure and facilities necessary for the implementation and maintenance of

HHR,
o Computer system support: CMMS,

.·
o Interfaces maintenance and operation.
• Security management
• Quality management and expected targets
• Reporting to the Government.
Ref: HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-001 -F 1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification

PAGE 7/28
()
3.2 General policy plan
A general policy plan shall be designed
The general policy consists of

• A description of the type of proven maintenance model which shall be applied and
• A demonstration of the accuracy of this model to meet all performance and RAMS
requirements, and its efficiency.
3.3 Organization of Consortium

A
w
The Consortium shall prepare and submit an organization plan .
This organization plan shall contain:
• Maintenance activities during the Construction and Operating Period

• The general organization diagram to be defined, including
• all job descriptions
• safety-critical maintenance operations
• emergency breakdown service
• construction and operating entities interface
• Consortium and the Government interface
• all technical activities interfaces
• Contractual information for the setting of sub-contracts
n
3.4 Integrated Logistic Support
3.4. 1 MAINTENANCE RULES
The Consortium shall clearly explain in which way he will maintain the High Speed Line (HSL).
Ref: HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-001 -F1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification )

PAGE 8/28
This detailed document shall include:

• A list of the European (or equivalent or superior) technical requirements, standards and I or
specifications used as reference,.
• The alert, intervention and immediate action limits defined for each specific technical domain
according to Technical Standard for lnteroperability (TSI),
• The frequency of monitoring and systematic preventive maintenance,
• The main method used for each kind of maintenance activity,
• The estimated production outputs and annual production volumes,
• The maintenance activities which are crucial for safety,
•
. ~ = ..:..
3.4.2 S TAFF
Req 05
lr: Consortium shall provide details of staff, locations, planning and emergency breakdown
service with an explanation of the team's size
Req 06
11' The Consortium shall also give details about staff training, undertaken during the Construction
Period and throughout the Operating Period.
Req 07
11: Maintenance staff shall respect all technical tolerances featured in the individual maintenance
manuals and instructions produced for each specific equipment.
Req 08
11 Engineers and technicians in charge of maintenance shall be trained to UIC specifications and
route speeds.
3.4.3 SUPPLY CHAIN, SPARE PARTS
The Consortium shall give details about the proposed supply chain and spare parts.
Ref : HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-001 -F1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification

PAGE 9/28
This document shall include:
• Spare parts stocks
• Supply chain policy, especially for complex procurement items. (electronic parts, large
switches , etc.)
3.4.4 SUPPORT MEANS AND EQUIPMENT
The Consortium shall give details about maintenance means and equipment.
This document shall include:
• Monitoring means
• Heavy mechanica l devices
• Rail or rail-route vehicles
• Heavy tooling
• Emergency breakdown tooling
• Specific tooling for each sub-system
Req 11
ll The Consortium shall demonstrate its ability to completely meet the minimum requirements in
section 4 below.
3.4.5 DOCUMENTATION
A documentation plan shall be first provided.
Req 13
ll Post-contract, the Consortium shall prepare and submit two (2) types of maintenance
documentation:
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS:
General documents for engineers are in charge of maintenance planning. These documents shall
be written in such a way as to underline the safety organizational framework.
Req 14
/ Mamtenance manuals for track.
+ - - -They shall include, but not limited to
Ref: HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-001 -F1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification

PAGE 10/28
n • Characteristics of track components, their possible defaults and how to identify and correct
them.
• The frequency of monitoring and preventive maintenance for each type of equipment.
• Tolerances for the maintenance of track geometry detailing the alert, intervention &
immediate action values (e.g . TSI) and the procedures used to comply with the different
limits.
• Dimension of free passage, protection and maintenance of turnouts.
• Temperature conditions for CWR distressing.
• Permissible temperature conditions for track works depending on curve radius and type of
work considered. Due to high temperatures, identification of a possible work prohibition
period for safety reasons.
• Continuous welded rail (CWR) track works with, for example, a maximum 50 mm lift and 20
mm slew, set up with or without the use of a track consolidator (tonnage and duration of
stabilization period).
• Procedure and instructions to replace defected component: sleeper, rail, fastener, turnout,
etc.
Req 15
I Maintenance manuals for signalling, telecommunications, overhead catenaries, power supply
and platform doors maintenance.
They shall include, but not limited to:

• Characteristics of vital components, their possible defaults and how to identify and correct
them.
• Operations to be carried out on vital components during monitoring and preventive

maintenance.
• The frequency of monitoring and preventive maintenance shall be specified for each type of
equipment.
• Procedure and instructions to replace defected component.

PAGE 11/28
Maintenance manuals for civil works, viaducts , bridges, tunnels and right-of-way.
They will be supplied by the phase 1 Consortium for integration in the phase 2 maintenance
plan .
Maintenance manuals for stations.
They will be supplied by the station Consortium for integration in the phase 2 maintenance
plan .
Req 18
l Maintenance manuals for main maintenance equipments: heavy mechanical devices, rail or
rail-route vehicles, heavy tooling.
3.4.6 INFRASTRUCTURE AND FACILITIES NECESSARY FOR HHR MAINTENANCE
Req 19
ll The Consortium shall give details about the infrastructure and facilities necessary for HHR
maintenance.
This document shall include, but not limited to:
• Small depots and maintenance base(s)
• Spare part storage areas
• HHR Integrated maintenance monitoring systems: sensors , computer-aided maintenance

systems,
• etc.
3.4.7 CMMS
The Consortium shall give details on CMMS.

PAGE 12128
• CMMS architecture and objectives.
• Asset management.
• Inventory control.
• Integration of monitoring data.
• Condition-based maintenance (CBM) features and functions.
• Work orders.
• Safety (Management of permits and other documentation required for the processing of
safety requirements).
• Maintenance follow up (feed back and traceability).

'· ······'
• Breakdown/emergency analysis.
• Performance reporting.
• CMMS scheduled deployment and especially interfaces with the mobilization period (data
and exchange).
3.4.8 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INTERFACES.
The Consortium shall give details about maintenance and operation interfaces.

• Work schedule according to traffic time table
• Safety measures against operational risks (also based on signaling arrangements)
• Emergency breakdown service
3.5 Safety management.
Req 22
E The Consortium shall provide a Safety management plan in accordance with the RAMS
specifications.
The objective of this plan is to assure the Government that all these requirements shall be
satisfied over the whole life time.
3.6 Quality management
The quality and performance of infrastructure maintenance is a key element in the overall quality of
service.
Ref: HHR-LO·MI-402-SYS-001 -F1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification

PAGE 13/28
Req 23
11: The Consortium shall provide a Quality management plan for infrastructure maintenance
according to the RAMS criteria and the performance approach.
The objective of this plan is to assure the Government that all these requirements shall be
satisfied over the whole life time .
3.7 Environmental management
The maintenance plan shall take into account the requirements of the KSA regulation body.
3.8 Reporting to the Government
3.8. 1 MONTHLY REPORTING
Req 25
lr: Based on extracted information from the CMMS, the Consortium shall develop for the
Government, a reporting framework which describes maintenance activities and indicators on
a monthly basis.
3. 8. 2 ANNUAL REPORTING
Req26
11:
The Consortium shall draw up annual maintenance reports for the Government in accordance
with stated performance requirements.
They shall describe inspection, maintenance, and renewal operations carried out over the previous
year as well as plans for maintenance over the year to come. If necessary, these reports shall refer
to the operating incidents report specified in the Operation Plan . lt shall describe the maintenance
measure(s) adopted to prevent such incidents from re-occurring .
O
+---
Ref: HHR-LO-MI -402-SYS-001-F1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification
PAGE 14/28
3.8.3 THE GOVERNMENT ACCESS TO CMMS
Req 27
r The Government shall be granted access rights (specific secured Internet distant access) to
the CMMS.
...·.
•.·
Ref : HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-001-F1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification

PAGE 15/28
4. MAINTENANCE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
4.1 Preamble
HHR Maintenance shall be divided into 4 types of maintenance technical action:
• Monitoring,
• Preventive maintenance actions,
• Corrective maintenance actions.
• Renewal
The main requirements are described below. Each item shall be developed and detailed precisely in
the maintenance rules section of the Consortium maintenance plan.
4.2 Maintenance of tracks
4.2.1 MONITORING
The monitoring shall be based on:
• daily monitoring carried out by recognition trains
• automated measurements by periodic inspection trains
• visual observations of the equipment and the geometry during periodic surveillance runs .
Req 28
~ Recognition train:
This train shall be equipped with the common on board signalling system used by the commercial
trains. it will check every morning the integrity of the infrastructure and the proper condition of the
signalling system before each first commercial service.
The objective of this procedure is twofold: ()

• first to detect any failure or deterioration of infrastructure or its right-of-way,
• secondly to indicate to the operator the speed restrictions to be applied temporarily, if
necessary, until clearance is given by the maintainer.
Req 29
[' Automated measurements by periodic inspection trains
Every two weeks an inspection train shall carry out automated measurements of the track
geometry plus vertical and transverse accelerations along the line on main tracks and switches
arranged in the straight position .
Once a year, the same inspection train shall carry out the measurement of the geometry of
turnout tracks at each crossover.
The corresponding data shall be recorded and available in the CMMS.
Ref: HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-001 -F1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification

PAGE 16/28
~J:f!ff..Q!=l§~.RY.~I!Qt'!§
Periodic monitoring tours of the track infrastructure shall complement the automated measurements
by inspection trains. They can gather and record information which cannot be automated.
Req 30
I The Consortium shall carry out periodic surveillance rounds for track, switches and expansion
devices for structures:
- for each track, every 3 months at least.
-for switches and structures expansion devices every month.
Req 31
l Visual observations of the equipment, the geometry and the right-of-way shall be carried out
after each special event such as a very hot temperature, desert storm , sand invasion, massive
rains, etc.
4. 2.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

~X§J.I~Mf!TJ~.ER~.Y.I;.t':lJ:!Y.Ff...¥.~JNJ:sMN<::.Ff..
Main line:
Req 32
I Rail ultrasonic inspection:
Every 6 months, a search for internal rail defects shall be conducted . This shall be carried out
continuously with ultrasound test equipment and must include the insulation glued joints.
Req 33
I Heavy preventive grinding:
Once a year it will be performed by a grinding train in a continuous operation. This is necessary to
help prevent the evolution of rolling contact fatigue (RCF) defects.
Annual lubrication of the joints of safety guide rails
Ref: HHR-LO·MI-402-SYS·001 -F1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification

PAGE 17/28
Switches:
Req 35
1: Periodic checks:
Every 6 months, the Consortium shall record systematic and periodic information on the status of
their various constituent parts.
The corresponding frequency can be modified according to:
- the criticality of the various constituent parts,
- the frequency of usage of the switches,
-the level of availability required to guarantee no delays
Req 36
1: Ultrasonic manual flaw detection:
lt shall be carried out with a 6 month to 2 year frequency according to the HHR operating plan ()
and local conditions (temperature, sands, etc.).. Cl
The ultrasonic testing includes the insulating glue joints in turnouts.
Lubrication of switches
The frequency depends upon the HSL traffic and local conditions (temperature, sands, etc.).
Req 37
[ Deburring
The deburring of half-switches or peaks I counter-peaks in the mobile frogs shall be carried out.
Req 38
1: Heavy Grinding prevention:
lt will be performed by a grinding train every two years in a continuous operation to prevent the
evolution of rolling contact fatigue (RCF) defects.
After grinding , the sliding bearings of the switches shall be cleaned.
Structures expansion devices
Req 39
lE Ultrasonic manual flaw detection:
lt shall be carried out with a 6 month to one year frequency according to the HHR operating plan
and local conditions (temperature, sands, etc.). ·
Req 40
I[ Deburring
The deburring of structures expansion devices blades shall be carried out.
1---:., HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-llOHI lofm'""""" M•lotoo'"" Spoclfiootloo

PAGE 18/28
(
Req41
lE Heavy preventive grinding:
The grinding of structures expansion devices shall be carried out during the main line grinding.
After grinding , the expansion devices shall be cleaned and greased.
Track geometry:
Conditional based preventive maintenance on the geometry of the main line shall be organized to deal
with the following :
• Treatment of the causes of local defects:

Local defects will be considered separately from the general and uniform degradation due to the
operations. For instance:
o distorted rail.;
o ballast impact marks;
o high welding;
o hollow welding;
o muddy area.
• Conservation of geometric elements both in profile and plan

• An adapted topology for levelling operations
Conservation of geometric elements both in profile and plan
Ballast profile:
Req43
1: For a HSL on ballasted track at 320 km I h, maintenance shall be organized to maintain the
ballast profile along two contradictory requirements:
-To have regulatory ballast profile but as "low" as possible to avoid ballast projections.
-To have a reserve of ballast for maintenance for subsequent levelling interventions.
,·.· ·
~:: ..
Sleepers and small equipment
Extremities of sleepers shall be verified during periodic maintenance rounds .
Missing fasteners shall be replaced.
Req45
1: If faults are found, then investigation rounds shall be executed to determine the overall
condition of fasteners and to schedule large-scale interventions in homogenised areas.
IReq 46

PAGE 19/28
._.;j
Control after each intervention on fasteners.
Rail line track
• Rectification of rails
• Replacing rails:
Resurfacing by welding shall be reduced to the times when strictly necessary.
Switches Geometry
Types of levelling methods:
Req 48
E Any intervention on the geometry of a switch shall be carried out with an absolute guiding
system which can measure absolute track position in three dimensions; any relative method is
banned because it provides no added value. The levelling interventions shall be carefully
prepared, including the portions of track at the start and at the end of the work.
Switch floor and small devices
No intervention shall be carried out on the concrete parts of the floor outside incidents.
Interventions shall be possible on the small devices (replacement, etc.).
Switch rails, half switches and mobile frogs
Rectification of rails
This operation shall not be permitted on half switches, mobile frogs.
Rails replacement
Replacement of large switch parts: half-switches or mobile frog:
Resurfacing by welding shall be limited to that which is strictly necessary.
Geometry structures expansion devices
Req 51
lE Any intervention on the geometry of a switch shall be carried out with an absolute guiding
system which can measure absolute track position in three dimensions; any relative method is
banned because it provides no added value.
d--R ef: HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-001-F1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification

PAGE20/28
4.2.3 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE:
• Rail replacement
Req 52
11 For any broken rail or lean, the type of failure cause must be determined and I or confirmed by
a specialist technical expert.
• Replacement of sleepers following an incident
• Replacement of large parts of switches
• Rail grinding of damaged portions of track or switches
• Correction of a geometry default which is on Immediate Action Limit/ (e.g. if IAL detected by
inspection train)
{::': ::
4.2.4 RENEWAL
• Rails renewal
• Ballast renewal:
Req 53
If Ballast renewal is not effective if the rail geometry, especially distorted rails, has not been
previously treated.
• Complete track renewal
• Switches renewal
• Structures expansion devices renewal
4.3 Maintenance of catenaries
4.3. 1 MONITORING
Req 54
lt: [email protected]~§\.tR~M!;~T.l?.§X.I;'.~J~JRQJ~.l~~J?.~~:nm~.TJ~~!t'!§
An inspection train shall carry out automated measurements on catenaries. Information and
quantifiable evidence shall be input and made available in the CMMS:
- every two weeks for catenaries dynamic (efforts, displacement and acceleration), catenaries
geometry (height, stagger) and electrical arcs.
- every 2 years for the measure of the thickness of contact wire.
Ref : HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-001 -F1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification

PAGE 21/28
Req 55
[ VISUAL OBSERVATIONS OF THE MATERIAL AND GEOMETRY.
lt shall be done for every track every two months.
Power supply equipment shall be also observed.
Req 56
[ DETAILED INSPECTION
Every year, a detailed inspection shall be carried out, including the handling of the assemblies to
detect games and abnormal fastenings.
4.3.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
~X~T.~.M~J]g_f.R~.Y.~.t;J:ttY.~. M~JNJ:~i;-!~~-9g_:. ~
C '
Visits:
Periodic inspection shall include:
• scrutinizing,
• dimension checking, with or without disassembly,
• tests of operation ,
• maintenance actions:
o cleaning
o lubrication
o application of protection products,
Req 57
[ These checks and actions shall be specified in the maintenance manuals and instructions. 0
The installations concerned are:
- Tensioning device: every 5 years
- Isolator switch : every 2 years
- Switch: every 5 years
g_Q.~.QH!Q!'!fl~.!'lfl§.~.Q.?.fl]:;~!;I;-!TJY!; . Mfllt:J.TgW~Ng!;;
This task concerns:
• Component replacements
• Insulator cleaning in polluted areas: cut and cover areas, quarries and after sand storm ...
• Geometry adjustments after track levelling operations
d-Ref: HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-001 -F1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification

PAGE 22/28

This task concerns:
• Contact wire breaking
• Insulators burning
• Unspecific items in catenaries (e.g.: plastic bags)
• Storm side effects
4.3.4 RENEWAL
Because of the expected life time of the equipment, no renewal is expected; except for the contact
wire.
In the case of contact wire rods fixed with sleeves, the contact wire on the whole tension length shall
be replaced within one year.
4.4 Maintenance of catenaries power supply equipments and low voltage power
supply
4.4. 1 MONITORING
The monitoring of all this equipment shall be done by:

• The power supply operator in the OCC for the whole remote installations,
• The maintenance staff during catenaries rounds (visual observations of the material and
geometry) and inspections or audits performed during their visits.
~X§T.~M~T!~.P.R~.Y.F;.~l!Y.F;..J¥1A.!~J:st-!~t-'.Q.~.:.
Visits:
Periodic inspection shall include:
• Scrutinizing,
• cleaning,
• lubrication, application of various products,
• testing after intervention,
• specific tasks: for example, measurement of nitrogen pressure in a transformer, replacement

of capacitors on criteria,
• etc
These checks and actions shall be specified in the maintenance manuals and instructions.
Ref: HHR-LO·MI·402-SYS-001 -F1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification

PAGE23/28
The periodic visit can be triggered by the duration or by the intensity of use or by legal obligations
(application of a statute, law or decree)
This task shall be carried out during the visits explained above.

As the facilities are redundant, the corrective maintenance shall be carried out without any impact on
operating. The switch from degraded mode to alternative system shall be done either automatically or
by the OCC operator.
4.4.4 R ENEWAL
Because of the expected life time of the equipment, no renewal is expected.
4.5 Maintenance of signalling
4.5.1 MONITORING
Req 59
( AUTOMATED MEASUREMENTS BY PERIODIC INSPECTION TRAINS
Every two weeks, an inspection train shall carry out automated measurements of signalling
equipment. Information and quantifiable evidence shall be available in the CMMS .. lt shall include
records of short-circuit current, transverse impedance, return of traction current, local transmitters
of information and ERTMS.
Req 60
ll VISUAL OBSERVATIONS OF THE MATERIAL
Every year, on board observation of the signals shall be done by the maintenance staff.
B.SM9.T.~. MQ.t:J.IJ:QB!t'!Q;
The monitoring of all this equipment shall be done by:
• the operating and supervision staff of the OCC.
• automatic devices and computer aided maintenance systems .
Ref: HHR·LO·MI· 402-SYS·001·F1 Infrastructure Maintenance Specification

PAGE 24/26
§X~T.~J~1~TJg.P.R~Y.I~~IlY.~..~A.J~It;N~tJ.~.~.
The visits and periodic inspections of all signalling equipment, including signalling cables, are about:.
• scrutinizing,
• measurements, made with or without disassembly, especially isolation measures.
• tests of operation,
o cleaning
o specific tasks : for example ventilator cooling rack or side-way signal lamp
replacement on criteria, etc.
The periodic visit can be triggered by the duration or by the intensity of use or by legal obligation
(application of a statute, law or decree)
The Consortium shall also carry out the maintenance of technical equipment of the signalling
buildings.
• Security devices
• Air Conditioning
• Lightning arresters
This task shall be carried out during the visits if necessary.

Signaling operation induced by track operations: example: during a switch levelling, switch controllers
shall be dismounted before work and remounted.
These actions shall be specified in the maintenance manuals provided by the suppliers.
As many facilities are redundant, most of the corrective maintenance shall be carried out without any
impact on operating . The switch from degraded mode to alternative system shall be done either
automatically or by the OCC operator.
Considering that track-fixed signalling installations are independent, once an incident occurs on those
installations, the emergency breakdown service shall work in line with OCC operators in order to
minimize the impact upon operations.

PAGE25128
4.5.4 R ENEWAL
4.6 Maintenance of telecom
4 .6. 1 M ONITORING
The transmission monitoring system shall detect any defect on the transmission network either by an
automatic system or by th e OCC staff.
4 .6. 2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
~X~T.~M~TJg.P.R£?..Y.~.~IlY.~. M~~IS.t-!~.N9.~.:.
C'?:,
Req 62 'C.Y
I[ An investigation visit of the optical fibers cables and pipes shall be carried out every four (4)
years.
Connections control:
Req 63
I[ The first check of these devices shall occur one year after the placing in service of the system
and thereafter every four (4) years.
Visits of telecoms equipments:
Periodic inspections shall include:

• scrutinizing,
• measurements, with or without disassembly, especially isolation measures.
• tests of operation,
o cleaning
o specific tasks: for example ventilator cooling rack periodic replacement.
~' HHR-LO-MI-402-SYS-001-F1 lof'"''"""'e M•lotoo•ooo Spoclflootloo

PAGE26/28
0
The Consortium shall also carry out the maintenance of the technical equipment of telecoms buildings:
• Security devices
• Air Conditioning
• Lightning arresters

For optical fibre cables, it shall cover:
• the release of any constraint caused by a cable duct move,

• the repair of a splice or a connector,
• the replacement of a segment due to a puncture defect.
For other equipment, it shall cover complete or partial replacement.
4.6.4 R ENEWAL
4.7 Maintenance of platform doors
4 . 7. 1 MONITORING
A specific monitoring system shall detect immediately any defect on platform doors and forward an
alarm to the OCC.
4. 7.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
This preventive maintenance shall be specified in the maintenance manuals provided by the supplier.
4. 7.3 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
Provisionally measures shall be taken to ensure passengers immediate safety and the level of
corrective maintenance will depend upon the number of doors broken down.
4. 7.4 R ENEWAL
4.8 Maintenance of phase 1 package 1 (civil works)
The Consortium shall take over the maintenance of the civil works from the phase 1 package 1
Consortium after the end of the initial maintenance contract.

PAGE 27/28
The Phase 2 Contractor should be responsible for route maintenance work in respect of the Route
Civil Works between handing over from Phase 1, Package 1 and Commencement of Passenger
Services. lt should be recognized that the Phase 1, Package 1 Contractor retains defect liability
responsibility as per his contract.
4.9 Maintenance of Stations
4.9. 1 MAINTENANCE PLAN PROVIDED BY PHASE 1 PACKAGE 2 CONSORTIUM (STATIONS)
The Consortium shall take over the maintenance of the stations from the phase 1 Consortium after the
end of the initial maintenance contract.
The phase 1 package 2 consortium will be responsibl e for defining the maintenance requirement for :
• The air conditioning
• The escalators and elevators
• Its own low voltage power supply system.
4.9.2 MAINTENANCE PLAN PROVIDED BY THE CONSORTIUM

The Consortium shall define its maintenance plan to reach the performance requirements expected for
the following devices:
• CCTV network
• Access control system
• Passenger information (sound system, screening, central clock system)
• Ticketing system
This plan shall integrate the Phase1 -Package 2 one.
0----:. HHR- LO-MI-402-SYS-001-Ft '""" ''"""'• M•;,teooooo Spodftootloo

PAGE 28/28

Performance Specifications II

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Performance Specifications II

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Performance Specifications II

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HARAMAIN HIGH SPEED RAILWAY

PHASE 2 C,.;;;J.,}=._II bgmJJ Cio L:::..JI 8..u.J..w ghl

HARAMAIN HIGH SPEED RAILWAY

IN ASSOCIATION WITH AXELCIUM

I AI-Rosan Contracting Company

I Administrador de lnfraestructuras Ferroviarias (ADIF)

Cobra lnstalaciones y Servicios lnternacional, S.L. i

! lndra Sistemas, S.A.

; Obrasc6n Huarte Lain, S.A.

C.1 General Technical Documents

C.1.1 General Specification

HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-00 1-01 General Specifications-Section 1

HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-002-01 General Specifications-Section 2

HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-003-E1 General Specifications-Section 3

HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-004-E 1 General Specifications-Section 4

HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-005-01 General Specifications-Section 5

H H R-LO-CT -602-SYS-006- E 1 General Specifications-Section 6

HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-008-01 General Specifications-Section 8

HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-009-01 General Specifications-Section 9

H H R-LO-CT -602-SYS-0 10-01 General Specifications-Section 10

H H R-LO-CT -602-SYS-011-0 1 General Specifications-Section 11

HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-012-01 General Specifications-Section 12

HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-013-01 General Specifications-Section 13

HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-014-01 General Specifications- Appendix A

HHR-LO-CT-602-SAU-001 -01 General Specifications-Appendix B

HHR-LO-CT-602-SYS-015-01 General Specifications-Appendix C

HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-016-01 General Specifications-Appendix 0

HHR-LO-CT -602-SYS-017 -C 1 General Specifications-Appendix E

C.1.2 General Drawings

Electrical Power Supply Schematic HHR-LO-EP-301 -NE-001 -81

Example of Transmission Network ArchitectureA3

General Alignment - AI Haramain High Speed Rail Corridor

H H R-LO-SY-301 -INE-001-C1 System Schematic

0 C.1.3 Framework for Safety Regulation

2011 -03-20 Guidance for ICPs DTE R4

2011-04-17 Guidance on Early Actions DTE R3

2011-10-01 Key guidance for safety certification DTE R8

2011 -10-01 Key guidance on the SMS DTE R8

C.1.4 Performance Requirements

HHR-LO-PR-602-SYS-001-F1 Performance Requirements

C.1.5 Performance Score Calculation

HHR-LO-PR-602-SYS-002-E1 Performance Score Calculation

C.1.6 Safety Requirements

HHR-LO-SA-602-SYS-001 -01 Safety requirements

C.1.7 RAMs Assurance Requirements

HHR-LO-RA-403-SYS-001 -01 RAMS

C.1.8 Route Civil Works

See CD 's for Drawings

C.1.9 Station Design and Operations

C.2.1 Operation Control Centre (OCC) Specifications

(' -. HHR-LO-CC-403-SYS-001-01 Operation Control Centre

C.2.2 High Voltage Power Supply

HHR-LO-HV-403-INE-001 -E1 High Voltage

C.2.3 Low Voltage Power Supply

HHR-LO-LV- 403-INE-001 -01 Low Voltage

C.2.4 Overhead Catenary System

HHR-LO-CA-403-INE-001 -01 Catenary

C.2.5 Track System

HHR-LO-TR-403-INE-001 -01 Track System

C.2.6 Interlocking and Main Line Signalling

:;:PS . ~~~-~- .:::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ::::::: :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: ::::: :::: ~~